poten sae a: - a —— = a i > ea, —_ pa 7 = a pare 53 > ss a en eae 2 ieee Za eT ba J - Soe _ a vee 5 an ae eee pa fe 7 ‘ Sees Pag go ae I a hs eee oe es ca ake im ee ome a on a a SNe: in \ D pan \ fi ) = < ye \ h | = > =i s/z 5, He: maar LN ING f & = je © ‘lp Pea aes : i} A ait \ Bae iy ay K " He 4 iii Whe | i i 4 + ys ae i: | ane a i : Roe a Mi aN A i te 4 a ui ye Pe JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS y AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOO EO Gis Ac DD: SOTA N= (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, Sc, BO Edited by FRANK CRISP, LLB. B.A, One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London ; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.LS., Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.ZS., JOHN MAYALL, Jon., F.Z.S., Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cantad.), AND J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY. FOR THE YEAR 1887. PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY WILLIAMS & NORGATE, LONDON AND EDINBURGH. * = ie iy te The Journal is issued on the second Wednesday of - February, April, June, August, October, and December. { To Non-Fellows/ 1 18877. Part 4. AUGUST. Price 5s. b JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL - MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO , =OO TO Gx AN Ds SO2 As (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, Sc. Edited by FRANK CRISP, LL.B. B.A, One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President aid Treasurer of the Linnean Society of Zittiote: - WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Se., F.LS8., © F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.ZS., Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in Ki ing’s College, JOHN MAYALL, Jon., F.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), AND : : J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A,, Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, ELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, 4 WILLIAMS & NORGATE, AT | Ms LONDON AND EDINBURGH. Dy, = 4 . “PRINTED BY WM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED.) [STAMFORD STREST AND CHARING Cross. CONTENTS. aS ae TEaNsactions oF THE SooreTy— 1X.—On THE DIFFERENT TISSUES FOUND IN THE MUSCLE OF a Mummy. By R. L. Maddox, M.D., Hon. F.R.M.S. (Plate X.) — X.— REMARKS ON THE FORAMINIFERA, WITH ESPECIAL REFERENCE TO THEIR VARIABILITY OF FORM, ILLUSTRATED BY THE CRISTEL- LARIANS.—Part II. By Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.S., and C. Davies Sherborn, F.G.S. .. “a ie. XI.—On new species or Scypum1a anp Dinopnysis. By J. G. Grenfell, F.G.8. (Plate XI.) —.. és Seri oe (Plate XI. will be issued with the October No.) SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. ZOOLOGY. : PAGS 537 545 658 A. VERTEBRATA: :—Embryology, Histology, and bbc: “ a. Embryology. Ricurer, W.—Continwity of Germinal Protoplasm +o ss s6 2» ee om ws Fiziscumann, A.—Development of the Carnivor® sos ia te cyag Gea Catpwet, W. H.—Embryology of Monotremata and Marsupialia dec pete a gO STRAHL, H.—Wail of Yolk-sac, and Parablast of the Lizard... 4s «5 os ‘es Scuvirzz, O.—Maturation and Fertilization of Amphibian es, oe ah Mae Rh een Beppanp, F. E.—Structure of Ovum of Dipnot +. +. «x bir Pia eh wane heme Hennecvy, L. F.— Vesicle of Balbiant 1.1 se 0» 0s 40 oe os ow SuTtTon, J. ‘Buanp—Atavism oe oe 20” eo oe eo os Ae ee oo ee oe B. Histology. ; ay ee W. —Karyokinesis ae ie ends oe eo oo ve ‘se ee ee oe - Ranvier, L .—Cup-shaped Cells os oe ee ee ee oe se oo ae oo coe OBRZUT, A.—Giant Cells of Tubercle oo oe oe oo oe oo eo pe. seu $3 Mosso, A.—Alteration of the Red Blood-corpuscles a : Macatium, A. B.—Nuclei of Striated Muscle-fibre in Necturus (Menobranchus) lateralis oe oe oe oo oo 6 oo ee oo oo oo. Bowman, F. H.—Variations is Woot oe oe 72 ee oe ve oo ee oc. es 3 B. INVERTEBRATA. | Nousspaum, M.—Vitality of Encapsuled Organisms MR YR ee SR ater crc VaRIGNY, A. me Eee of Medium oe so ‘ee oe oe oe es oh ee es by Mollusca. Riwpytawi; B-Bhellé of Osplalepoda 2 hac 4 a a Woirr, G.— Renal Organs of Prosobranchs .. «+ «+ es 06 #6 40 #2 90 List, J. H—Glands in Foot of Tethys fimbriata es sae got Soil ian nares a ear WEGMANN, H. —Anatomy of Patella oe ve oe ae ee ee oe ee eo ee Molluscoida. a. Tunicata. Lanz, L.—Musoular System of Glossophorum sabulosum — a» ow ‘ iene B. Polyzoa. Ostroumorr, A. A.—Morphology of Bryozoa Sat Waliep a Ca eE NW ate i 5 VicE1ivs, W. J.—Morphology of Ectoproctous Bryoroa =. +s ne ne te we ” rh) Morphology of Marine Bryozan,» ee eo (ee oe oo ee bis Bet 7. Brachiopoda. Jounin, L.—Anatomy of Brachiopoda Articulata., .» » +» ee «» os 94. SoLLas, W. J.—Oxcal Processes of Shells of Brachtopoda .. «+ «ss ce 0 ( 3 ) ted Arthropoda. _ Otavs, O.—Relations of Groups of Arthropoda .. «2 + +» se os ‘a, Insecta. Korscuet, E.—Some interesting processes in the formation of Insects’ Ova eee F F —Polar Globules in Insect Ova 42 40 nn we -Dusots, R.—Phetogenic Function ef Ova of Sim aad waht gers ne ae ForeEL, A.— Senses of Insects se ee ve oe ee C8 oe ee oe Hennessy, H.—Cell of the Honey Bee .. «. Roel Sa sania 88 aaae H.— Brain of Vespa crabro and V. oulgaris wie eee et » Basaxi, C.—Life-history of Ugimya sericaria 4. ae bn ne te we ‘Ga ton, Francis—Pedigree Motk-breeding WOO CaS ee ag cap Sree FAvssex, V.— Histology of Erteric Canal ef Insects .. 1. +e oe ws Loman, J. O: C.—Glandular Secretion of free Iodine .. .. “s McCook, H. C.— Modification of Habits in Ants through fear of "Enemies BEAUREGARD, H.—Vesicating Insects 1. 2s oe 0 as bain) ee Scupper, 8. H—Fossil Insects So ete Cay ed thee aS lee Wat oe A ; vy. Prototracheata. _ Sepewrck, A.— Development of Cape Species of Peripatus .. ++ +s +s 3. Arachnida. Lomay, J. 0. C, = Morphological Signi ested of so-called Malpighian pis of two- Spi TroveEssart, L _—Ohorioptes (or Symbiotes) on Birds Hs z od weet Re Raver, A. ee lewis... our Of ey eee ETT eT Croepene, A .—Stage in the Development of Galeddes.* 50S e. Crustacea. Garp, A.—Parasitic Castration and tts influence on the External Characters male Deeapod Crustacea - oe *s #6 oe os os oe oo oe _. Barrois, T.—Palemonetes varians.. .. SS Be eo Oe ~Grarp, A., & J. BonnteER—Phylogeny of Bopyride Becks can’ Renee okies Kester, R.—Muscular Fibres of Edriopthalmata 4. 1e we awe Gisrp, A.—Copepod Parasite of Amphiura squamata — .. +e vn we Vermes. a. Annelida. ‘Witsoy, E. B.— Origin of Theretory System of Earthworms 1 .. «+» Sarnt-JOSEPH, LE Binse DE—Polychxta of Dinard... s. 00 ae JovEUXx-LAFFUIE, J Organization of NETHIAD gee bee 8 Cunnincuam, J. T.—Nephridia of Laniceconchilega .. .. sp swe “Oxrrey, L., W. B. Benuau, & D. RosA—Criodrilus lacuum .. s+» Sa H,— Anatomy of P. riapulide cad 7 oe oe oe oe B. Nemathelminthes. ZACHARIAS, O.— Process of Fertilization in Ascaris Gg ttc Se’ ies Vittot, A.— Revision of the Gorditde .. .. -.. Ges es GRassl, B.—Filaria inermis oe - + “* oe “ Keuer, R.— Muscular Fibres of Echinorhynchus a mee has og of Muscular Fibres in Hehinorkyuelus Warn en y- Platyhelminthes. Counnincuam, J. PES ae MEDRO OME ong Se gh ie ee ” ” Brock, J.—New Trematode oe oe =e oe ee oe LaNvsbene, B.— Ciliated Pits of Stenostoma.. A eee ome ee Toma, L—Distoma endemicum ee de Seite eee ie ok: Mean we ae BrrGENDAL, D.—Land Planarians .. .. oe “Hautez, P.—Funetion of Uterus or Enigmatio. Organ in Fresh-water Dendrocela .. : 5. Incertse Sedis, : ~— Wepon, W. F. R—Balanoglossus Larva 4. +s 1s oe we ww Lrpywie, H.—Trichodina paradoxa oe —- oe o eo : oe oe oe Echinodermata. ie ; Deveas, F; Marrin—Mergui en adhe eu Oythaee Sgt ese (24) Coelenterata. MaAcMony, C. A.— Cheeni of Anthea cereus pe ee é Me Danrxssen, D ——North Sea Aleyonida .. .. Sec ives Uitistncee tes Porifera. LENDENFELD, R. von—Systematie Position and Classification = Shounes SA Vosmanr, G. Ged: —Relationships of the Porifera =... se un oe ww Carrer, H. J.—Reproductive Elements of Spongida .. +. “ss ss 0 Protozoa. KuAWEINE, W.—Biology of Astasta ocellata, and Euglena its ea ae Danysz, J.—New Peridinian vo 16 ee ee cee ee te oe PoucneEt, G.—Peridinea «. ealibas eray CA ae Danitewsky, B.Hematozoa of the Tortoise... Rae ar iaas eee Povcuer, G., & J. pe Gurrne— Protozoa as food of Sar dines Veer Ae Kirk, T. W.—_New Infusoria from New Zealand Re ant aa Mitr Hicken, E.—‘ Challenger? Radiolaria 3s... es ta we oe ee a GaRBINI, A.—Psorosperms —.. ve as we re tae a ae - BOTANY. ae GENERAL, including the Anatomy pag Physiology | of the Phanerogamia, a, Anatomy. (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. Went, F. A. F, €.— Young Condition ef Vacuoles 1. 2. ae os ay Be (2) Other Gell-contents. | Hike daa of the: Cellestips ops) Saige. ey Os ie oO toa eee ees Scuunx, H:—Chemisiry of Chlorophyll -.. +. sso “ Sos pepe ie Tscuircu, A.—Researches on Chlorophyll .. PASE cr Hansen, A.— Researches on Green and Yellow Chitoropha yl. oa (eke oes ee as M.—Raphides in Ty ypha +. z Beis Heimerrt, A.— Calcium oxalate in the Cell-wall of Nyctagince a é Witpeman, E. pe—Presence of a Glucoside in the alcoholic extraet of setae ‘planis Errena, L., Cu. Maisrriav, & G. “CLautRiav—Localization and Signi feces of. Alicaloids in Plants Sas 8 eae igs, Cte Peete taaee ce Pew plume ea (8) Secretions. Kassner—Caoutchoucin Plants 1.) ee oe ea Ne UR (4) Structure of Tissues. ae Mornius, M.—Concentrie Vascular Bundles 1... +. es 90 oe 5S HApEerLannt, G.— Structure of Stomata.. .. Spiers Cee WISSELINGH, C. van—Clothing of Intercellular Spaces se ee eg Be TrecuL, A.—Relation of Seerctory Channels to Laticiferous Vessels Bae 5 » _ Laticiferous vessels of Calophyllum Brace Saupanua, L. DE—Anatomical peculiarities of Echites peltata... Y HasERLANDT?, G.—Meristem of the Medullary rays of Cytisus Laburnum (5) Structure of Organs. TrrRACcIANo, N.—Adventitious Roots 1. .. Rly Mace Nas Tscuircu, A.—Tubereles on the Roots of Lequminosx: .. are as a Frank, B.—Swellings on the Roots of-the Alder and eee oor Ke eo KsELLMAN—Shoots of Pyrola secunda .. Pris ereerraS he" Kronre tp, M.—Relutionship between Stipule an. Leaf ol, Cae eae WorcrtzKy, G.— Comparative Anatomy Of Lendrile: ssa aga ta ane aa ZippERER, P.—Pitchers of Sarracenta 1. se) se ue ue ee) ew KRASAN, F.— Formativn of Hairs... Geilo eae RT RR Nout, F.—Normal Position of Zygomorphic Flowers sats dn) timers wa eae Masrzrs, M. ela y Conformation of Cypripedium ~ ss 00 ov vs CrLaKoysky, L.—Cupules of Cupulifere —_. a hee be Rirrinauaus, P.—Resistance of Pollen to Enter nal Influences weak eon ee SrapueEr, §.—-Nectaries Marre, E.—Strueture and Development of the Fr wit “of Anay gyris fetid - PAGE *> .. 598 . 599 _ 699 . 600 -» 601 £7601 602 602 . 6038 F aay ee 603 . 603 603 605° os NaGaMArtsz, A.—Chlorophyll-function of Leaves . vo) f. Physiology, (1) Reproduction and Germination. Bata ia P.—Fntrance of Pollen-tubes into the conducting Tissue.» — +s HILDEBRAND, F.— Fertilization of Oxalis .. os ws Linpman, C. A. M.—Fertilization of Scandinavian Alpine Plants PA ge - JORISSEN, "A. —Chemistry of Germination .. ase res Fierson, G.—Germination of the Date-palm.. (2) Nutrition and Growth. _ Sontag, P.—Apical Growth of Leaves ws 2+ ws ~ Enexetmann, T. W.—Chlorophyllous Assimilation... os Sacus, J.—Action of the Ultra-violet Rays in the Formation ed Flowers . _ Srencer, F.—Absorption-bands ., . eae eee ya ee (3) ‘skovonient. PENHALLOW, D. P.—Movements of Tendrils .. os se se ee ne te ~ Worrmann, J.—Rotation of Tendrils .. ay Na a kp Mice tie Detiersen, E.—Elasticity of Flexion in Vegetable Organs gai en th det A cee ae “(4)' Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentaticn). DraKonow, N. W.—Intramolecular Respiration a Green, J. R.— Changes in the Proteids in the Seeds which accompany) Germination 2 y. General. Detrimo, F.—Myrmecophilous Plants .. : DETMER, W. —Lffects of Low Temperatures on 2 Plants... GoOEBEL's ‘ Outlines of Classification and Special Morpholog y B. CRYPTOGAMTA. CampsELL, Doveias H:.—Development of Spermatozoids Cryptogamia Vascularia. GorsrL, K.—Prothallium and Germ-plants a Lycopodium inundatum .. Scuropt, J.— Anatomy of the Sporangia of Ferns fer sche MontEvERDE, N. A.— Formation of Crystals in the Marattiacex a ae ee Stance, F. F.—Apogamy in Ferns oA Reo eae Drurry, C. T.—Apospory in Polystichum angutare var. puleherrémum Wills... Lacumann, P.—Structure of Davallia Mooreana . Fee eee Le » dtoot of Hymenophyllacez? 1. 66 oe ue ee kat ine STENZzEL, K. G.—Rhizodendron ee se oe oe oe ee °* ee ee °? ** Muscinez. Hanserre, A. Say of Moss resembling Chrovlepus .. ; Vuit.euin, P.—Glistening Apparatus of Schistostega osmundacea .. Livrricat, K, G.—Formation of Pores in Sphagnacex Ee Algee. Twat. M. F.—Structure and Development of the Apes in Floridex ., Perer, A.—Parasitic Alga of Emys ees id » Haves, F.—Padina .. ETN Te ulp tat cdo mee sae Witpeman, E. pe—Fo rmation ‘of Cysts in Uiothrie speatinrae'a\ ipa Pa aiet eetaras » Hansarre, A.—Allogonium .. es Peep eae ~ Moniez, R.—New Parasites of Daphnia HansairG, A.—Mountain Alge .. Lanzt, M.—Endochrome of Diatoms — .. PES ee eer gery" “iar §.—Raising Diatoms in the Laboratory 7 vier eae aie Fungi. me avcarey G., & O. J BERS Sh ee EE of paras ~ WE?TSTEIN, R. v.—Cy ystidia of Fungi .. eae - Waxxer, J. H.—Infection through parasitic ‘Sclerotia Pisa Weiss, A.— Fluorescence of Fungus Pigment Fetasiee: te YN - ee ees Arruvr, J. C.—Pathogenic Fungi SN Eo get OM RIPE VT ELEN POL a PRLS ZuKAL, H.—New Genus of Ascomycetes .. 3. 0. ae ne 4 oe ep oe oe Zorr, W.—Ancylistex and Chytridiacex encase aks Sve, B., & F. Kammysxi—M yeorhiza aa a Pion sae ZUKAL, H.—Green colour of decaying wood .. +8 +. Ys. (6) Protophyta. Sige vee Vincenzi, L.—Chemical constituents of Bacteria .. s,s. 0+ 08 pe oe ws Soroxin, N.— New Species of Spirillum Seickte ec ee FRANELAND, G. C. & P. F.—New Micro-organisms obtained. from Bop ee | Sab aes: FRANKLAND, P. F., & T, G. Hant—Distribution of Micro-organisms in the dir eee MICROSCOPY. «, Instruments, Accessories, &c. ° “(1) Stands. JAUBERT’S (LEON) Microscopes, Eye-pieces, Objectives, &e. Saase > XII. xu, XIV. 7 - and Figs. 155 and 156) oe oe ee oe Bauscu & Loma Optical Co.’s Prichinoscope (Fig. 157) nay Coeap Siete eM Leer ean get RoceErs-BonD Universal Comparator (Figs. 158 gyid 159) =. 5. vere ene oe ~ Gunrya Co.’s: Comparator (Pie. 160) 5 ae ee wel ee ee ee ole ae 9 Reading Microscope (Fig. BGO) ES 5 : Camprmce Scientific Instrument Co.'s Reading Micr. oscope (ig. 162) e Sone CamPANI’s (GIUSEPPE) Compound Microscope (Fig. 163)...» — Be 5 James's (F. L,) Dissecting Microscope (Fig. 164).. 2: se ne oF = (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. : ‘ NEw Glycerin Immersion Microscopic Objective” _.. ZeEiss’s Objective-changer, with slide and centering adjustment Figs. 165 and ie. (8) Iuminating and other Apparatus. Netson, E. M., & G. C. Kanop—Value of Achromatic Condensers .. Bavscu & Los Optical Co.’s Condenser (Fig. 167) .. Mixes’ (J. L. W.) “ Desideratum.” Condenser ae oe: 4, Nacuet’s Camera Lucida for Magnifiers (Figs. 168 and 169) . Babar wees Prism for Drawing (Fig. 170) a % __ Batscu & Lome Optical Co.’s Mechanical Stages Figs. a and 172) Sminnow’s (A.) Microstat (Fig. 173) — .. i ata DP ae Mp ea ONE Daruine’s (8.) Serew-Micrometer (Figs. 174-177) PE ee en ts Pacan’s (A.) Growing Slide (Figs. 178-180) nies) eli aleh Sad cab oe olact ors CHALANDE, J.— Apparatus for examining living Myriopoda a ete ade Grirritu’s (E. H.) Mechanical Finger (Figs. 181-183)... » Substage Diaphragm-holder and Glass Diaphragms ig. 184). Fieiscav’ ) a vy.) Hemometer (Fig. 185) ee cad ee eo- “ee oe oe ee ee oe THOULET, J.— Measurement by Total Refletion of the Refractive Indices. of Miero- scopte Minerals (Fig. 186) (4) Phipioneaeedee ; , Nexson’s (E. M.) Photomicrographic Camera (Fig. 187)... 2. ese Francorre, P.—Photomicrographic Camera for the Simple or Compound Miesesopy BEnEcgKE, B., & 8. ‘T. Sters—Focusing in Photo- Eas | (Figs. 188 and ee Israun, O. —Photomicrography with High Powers CROOKSHANE’S (E. M.) ‘ Photography of Bacteria’ and.‘ Manual ‘of Bastiniolegyes (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. BanTALINI, G—Method of determining Ug index of ibe: when the siraidiig angle ts large .. A Recoenacn of 200, 000 lines to the PD rae (6) Miscellaneous, Microscoricat Society of Calcutta .. .. 4 B. Technique. (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Hoerre, F.—Blood-serum Cultivation ... 2... ee ee ee oe ee ee “ee ee (2), Preparing Obi ects. Goopaun, G. L.—Method for suey ae Sizes aes to the @ action of diferent liquids oe os ee Henxinc, H.—Modes ‘of preparing Ova Mouiscu, H.—New Method of distinguishing Vegetable from Anant: Pie Ranvier, L L.—Mode of examining Mucous Membranes . oe ee ef | we oe ee se we oe or ‘ee os eo 58 €e- ee ee oe oe oe. ee se ae 644 ee 646 e 6t7 648 648 650 <4 651° = 657 ok 661. 662 664 665 C22 Macativn, A. B. SS aadattin the Termination of ees in the Liver «ss Souvirze, O.—Preparing the Amphibian Egg “ oat ae tee, Wade es Parren, W.—Preparing Eyes of Molluscs and Arthropods. Ps cele eet WSs Pee Waurre.eccr, T.—Killing Polyzoa .. .. BaP GL s vee k, wen) eemee ede cee Divert, F.—Preparation of Insect Spiracles Bes Fone Pens ae ee Girop, P.—Botanical Manipulation wake ray Be ri. v Vries, H. pE—Preparation of Plants in Alcohol « cease oe PS ry Sone Terry, W. A.—Oleaning Diatoms ., PRR eh ae * * Cuapman, F. T.— Preparing Silver Crystals . Pare edas aie eer" PREPARING Crystals of Silicon Fluoride... 6. 0 +» se ws (8) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes. Ryper’s (J. A.) Paraffin Imbedding Apparatus (Fig. 190) PPC PRESET eee Scudnand, S.—Imbedding Objects for the Rocking cea we Labptietenss «thn antes 5 CANFIELD, W. B. —Imbedding Eyes in Celloidin 4... Be ue en eee Francorre, P.—Imbedding in Vegetable Wax .. or Garman, H.— Baskets for the suspension of ee in parapin (Figs. ‘191- -198) Pr _Francorte’s (P.) Sliding Microtome .. se See Tsar Ryper’s (J. A.) Automatic Microtome (Figs. "194 ‘and 195) Rie at Sy Dae Sates 9 “Maut’s (P. F-) Section-smoother (Figs. 196-198) .. 4. se ee ae nee Borpen, W. C.—Extemporized Section-smoother .. ss +s ne ue ews Donerty, A. J— Making Sections of Injected Lung «+ +» oe «+ (4) Staining and Injecting. Campse.., D. H.— Fixing and Staining Nuclei .. Wat pete lah Ce LustéarTEen, L.—Staining Elastic Fibres with Vistonia Blue ewe Farman, ©, F.—Staining Peziza Specimens .. Sea eae ate WESENER, F.—Staining relations of Leprosy and Tubercle Bacilli sie BauMGARTEN—Staining differences of Leprosy and Tubercle Bacillt Oe eae Spina, A.—Decoloration of Bacteria stained with Anilin uae Pe Agha gir SOS aay tes A Linpt, O.—Demonstration of Phloroglucin .. Seb Fe cet Ge ae es Francorre, P.—Staining Preparations for Photography Sed cp taws nc eb ecees- Ses (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Francorts, P.—Flask for dehydrating specimens to be mounted in balsam or RAPES wes Psat Bae, OP ela eh pe eka e ee ma SoyKa, J.—Permanent Preparations on firm media... se +e ve ae ene ~ Francorre, P.—Use of Styraz in Histology .. 1. s+ +e en oe wt Wuirney, J. E.— No excess of balsam necessary .« «+ +s «8 oe 08 os ‘Vorce; C. M.—Mounting Opaque Objects -. pee ke eee Parkes, R.— Mounting Upaque Objects on a Micrometer sasiaaroidad PRESS oe James, F, L.—COover-glass Holder (Fig. 199) ge Shasta eaeeg ab. SNE ee James's (EF. L.) Improved Slide Cabinet 3 Pat ae Rey Se Nt nie GRIFFITH'S > H.) Pocket Slide Cabinet (Fig. 200) Bg seh SER hak Meek tk (6) Miscellaneous. Mott, J. W.—New ¢ Mig o-cheintoal Reaction for Tannin .. Kiement & ReENanD—WMicro-chemical Reactions based on the formation of Chyatals: PROCEEDINGS OF THE Society PRN aa EE OLR pep RS TP PAGE 671 671 672 674 675 675 675 676 676 677 678 680 680 631 681 682 682 685 686 686 687 688 688 688 688 688 689 689 691 691 692 692 692 692 693 654 694 695 695 697 I.—APERTURE TABLE. . Corresponding Angle (2 %) for — Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch; Pene- Numerical : Mona Anntin . Tlominating trating, Aperture. Air Water enna White Light. | (Blue) Light. | Photography. | SC Power. (nsinu=a)|| (w=1-00). | (=1°33). | (v= 1-52). |% Line .) ee Tine F.) ued ine 15 | . ms (:) 1:52 Ee ue 180° Q’ 146,543 158,845 193,037 “658 “ga 51 a 3% 166° 51’ 145,579 157,800 | 191,767— “662 1:50 © * 161° 23’ 144,615 | 156,755 190,497 4. *667 1-49 os Sp ET ADI AD 143,651 155,710 189227 “671 1°48 Ag #4 153° 39! 142,687 154,665 187, ‘957 “676 1°47 ae 3 150° 32! 141,723 153,620 186, ,687 © +680 1:46 ae ae 147° 42’ 140,759 152,575 185,417 °685 1:45 oe 5 145° 6! 139,795 151,530 184,147. +690 1:44 ae ak 142° 39’ 138, 830 150,485 182,877 "694 1:43 re, ae 140° 22’ 137,866 149,440 181,607 — -*699 1:42 es As 138° 12' | 186,902 | 148,395 | 180,337 “704° 1:41 ae ey 136° 8’ 135,938 147, 350 179, 067 “709 1°40 sees Si 134° 10’ 134,974 146,305 177,797 “714 1°39 = Es 132° 16’ 134,010 145 ,260 176, 527 “719~ 1°38 a aa 130° 26’ | ° 133,046 | 144,215 175,257 “725 1°37 Be es 128° 40' 132, 082 143,170 173,987 “739 1:36 ae Pe 126° 58’ 131,118 142,125 172,717 “739 1°35 oe oe 125° 18’ 130,154 |, 141,080- 171,447 4 1:823 “7416 1°34 < Bs 123° 40’ | 129,189 140,035 -} 170,177} 1796 “741 1:38 a 180° .0’| 122° 6’ 128 , 225 138,989 168,907 1-769 “752 1°32 vs 165° 56’ | 120° 33’ | 127,261 137,944 167,637- | 1-742 *758 1°31 Se 160° .6’ | 119°- 3! 126,297 136,899 166,367 | 1°716 "763 1:30 5 15°. 38" 1172 35" 125 3383 135,854 165; 097 1°690 +709 1-29 a ADIOS 50%} TGS <8" 124,369- 134,809 | 163,827 1: “715 1:28 — A 148° 42’| 114° 44” 123,405 133 ;764 162, ,007 1:638 “781 1:27 A 145° 27' |-118° 21’ 122,441 | 132,719 161,287 | 17613 “787 1:26 i 142° 89’ | 111° 59’ 121,477 131,674. | 160,017 |- 17588 +794. 1:25 5s 140° 3’ | 110° 39’ 4 120,513 130,629 _|- 158,747 1563 ~}- -800 1:24 os 187° 36’ | 109° 20’ 4 119,548 129,584 157.477 H 61-5388 *806 1:23 a 135° 17’ | 108° 2’ | 118,584 128,539 156,207. | 1:51 +813 1°22 3 133° 4’ | 106° 45’ | 117,620 | 127,494 154,937 1-488 *820 1:21 a 130° 57’ | 105° 30’ 116,656 126,449 153,668 | 1:464 +826 “4°20°: us 128° 55’ | 104° 15’ | 115,692 125,404 | 152,397 1-440: * 833° —1:19 Sy 126° 58’| 103°. 2’ ¥ -114,728 124,359 151,128 1 ee “840 1-18 os 125°. 3’| 101° 50’ | 118,764 123,314 149,857 ee “S47 1:17 PS ee 123° 13’ | 100° 38’ § 112,799 | 122,269 | 148,588 17369 "809 1:16 oa D219 26742992 229! 111,835 121,224 147° B17 ako tGs +862 1:15 = 119° 41’| _98° 20’ | 110,872 120,179 146,048 | 1°323 +870. 1:14 7s 118° 0’) 97° 11’ | 109,907 119,134 144,777 | 1:°300. “877 1:13 ss 116° 20'| 96° - 2’ 108,943 118,089 143, 508 | 1-277) “885 1-12 “A 114° 44’ | 94° 55’ 107,979 117,044 142, 237 1254 “893, 1-11 oe 1182) 97) 98? AE 107,015 115,999 140,968 | 1°232 “901 1:10 a 111° 36’ | 92° 43 106,051 114,954 139,698 |--1°210 *909 1:09 aS 110° 5’ {| 91° 38’ 105,087 113,909 138,428 JL "917 1:08 “A 108° 36} 90° 34’ 104,123 112,864 137, 158 ‘1°166. *926. 1°07 a5 107°. 8'| 89° 30’ 103,159 111,819 135, 888 1:145 +935 1:06 Py 105° 42’ | 88°27’ 102,195 110,774 134. 618 +943 1°05 a 104° 16’ | . 87° 24’ 101,231 109,729 |- 133, 348 ~ *952 1:04 Ag 102° 53’ {| 86° 21’ 100,266 | 108,684 132. 078. | *962 1°03 op 101° 30’; 85° 19/ 99,302 107,639 | - 180,808 “971 1:02 aE 100° 10'| 84° 18! 98,338 106,593 129,538 +980 1:01 ¥, 98° 50’ | 83° 17’ 97,374 105,548 128,268 .+990- 1-00 180° 0’ 97984 1 B20; FT! 96,410 104,503 126,998 . 1:°000 0:99 163° 48’ 96° 12’| 81°.17' 95,446 103,458 125,728 “4010 0:98 157° 2" 94° 56’ | 80° 17’ 94 482 102,413 124,458 1 020 0:97 1519352! 93° 40'| 79°18’ 93,518 101,368 | .123,188 - 17031 0:96 147° 29’ 92° 24’ | “78° 20’ 92,554 100,323 121,918 F 1°042 0:95 143° 36’ OIE AO! e772 29! 91,590 99,278 120,648 | 1°053 0:94 140° 6’ 89° 56’ |. 76° 24' 90,625 98,233 119,878 1-064 0:93 136° 52’ 88° 44’| 75° 27’ 89,661 97,188 118,108 1:075 0:92 at" 87° 32'| 74° 30’ 88,697 96,143° |. 116,838 1 1.087 0°91 15120! 86° 20’) 73° 33’ 87,733 95,098 115 ,568 1-099 0:90 128° 19’ 85° 10' | 72° 36° 86, 769 94,053 |} 114,298 Til 0:89 125° 45’ 84° 0’ | 71° 40’ 85,805 93,008 113,028 1°124 17136 0°88 123°. 17’ 82° 51’ | 70° 44’ 84,541 91,963. | 111,758 Numerical Aperture. 0°87 0:86 . | SOSH EEE REO OOOYOYHSHSAOKAARAKAAHARARARAGRORARHRARIIIIIIIITAD ODO DO ©90000090090990909000990900000090990099990900909900900990909000900000 AAD DOVPARAWDOVPAAWOVW HPAVHWDOWHAAHDOMVWHADIDOOHMVWRADUDOOMNOWRUAIDOOMWH APERTURE TABLE—continued. Corresponding Angle (2 u) for Air af) 120° 55’ 118° 38’ 116° 25' 40 =}? 112°" 12’ -110° 10’ 108° 10’ 106° 16’ 104° 22’ 102° 31’ 100° 42’ 98° 56’ SIRE 95° 28' 93° 46’ 92° 6’ 90° 28 88° 51’ 87° 16’ 85° 41’ 84° 8’ 82° 36’ 81° 6’ f 79° 36’ 78°. 6’ 76° 38’ 75° 10’ 73° 44’ 72°.18' 70° 54’ 69° 30’ 68° . 6’ 66° 44’ 65° 22’ 64° . 0’ 62° 40’ 61° 20’ 60°: 0’ (a fader Wi. 54° 47’ 53° 30’ §2°° 13’ 49° 40’ 47°. 9! 44° 40’ 42° 12’ 40° 58’ 39°. 44’ at 20! » 34°. 56’ Ooo ae. 30° 10’ 28° 58’ 27° 46’ 25°26" 23°. 4’ 20° 44’ 18° 24’ 17° 14’ 16%. 25! 13° 47’ 11° 29’ 9° 11’ 6°. 53’ “8° 44" Water (nm = 1538) 81° 42’ 80° 34’ 79° 37’ 78° 20’ 77° 14’ 76° 8! 7a° 3! 73° 58’ 72° 53’ 71° 49’ 70° 45’ 69° 42’ 68° 40’ 67° 37’ Homogeneous Immersion » | o€m = 1°52), 69°49’ 68° 54’ 68°. 0’ 67° 6’ 66° 12’ ' 65°.18" Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. Monochromatic White Light. | (Blue) Light. (A = 0*5269 4, | (A = 074861 p,| (A= 0°4000 p, Line E.) 83,877 82,913 81,949 80,984 80,020 79,056 78,092 77,128 76,164 75,200 74,236 73, 272 72,308 71,343 70,379 69,415 68,451 67,487 66,523 65,559 64,595 63,631 62,667 61,702 60,738 59,774 58,810 57,846 56,881 55,918 54,954 53,990 53,026 52,061 51,097 50,133 49,169 48,205 46,277 44,349 43,385 42,420 40,492 38, 564 36,636 34,708 33,744 32,779 30,851 28,923 26,995 25,067 24,103 23,188 21,210 19,282 17,354 15,426 14,462 13,498 11,570 9,641 7,713 9,785 4,821 Line F.) 90,918 89,873 88,828 87,783 86,738 85,693 84, 648 83,603 82,558 81,513 80,468 79,423 78,378 77,333 76,288 75,242 74,197 73,152 72,107 71,062 70,017 68,972 67,927 66,882 65,837 64,792 63,747 62,702 61,657 60,612 59,567 58,522 57,477 56,432 55,387 54,342 53,297 52,252 50, 162 - 48,072 47,026 45,981 43,891 41,801 39,711 37,621 36,576 35,531 33,441 31,351 29,261 27,171 26,126 25,081 22,991 20,901 18,811 16,721 15,676 14, 630 12,540 10,450 8,360 6,270 5,225 Photography. near Liue h.) 110,488 109,218 107,948 106,678 105,408 104,138 102, 868 101,598 100,328 99,058 97,788 96,518 95,248 93,979 92,709 91,439 90,169 88,899 87, 629 86,359 85,089 83,819 82,549 81,279 80,009 78,739 77,469 76,199 74,929 73,659 72,389 71,119 69,849 68,579 67,309 66,039 64,769 63,499 60,959 58,419 57,149 55,879 53,339 50,799 48 259 45,719 44,449 43,179 40,639 38,099 35,559 33,019 31,749 30,479 27,940 25,400 22,860 20,320 19,050 17,780 15,240 12,700 10, 160 7,620 6,350 Power. (a2.) “757 *740 "723 706 *689 *672 +656 +640 "624 *608 +593 ‘578 563 *548 533 *518 *504 -490 “476 462 "449 *436 *423 *410 +397 "384 *372 *360 “348 *336 *325 “314 *303 *292 *281 *270 *260 *250 *230 “212 *203 “194 *176 -160 “144 -130 +123 “116 "102 “090 078 -068 “063 *058 048 040 “032 026 023 *020 “O14 *010 *006 ‘004 "003 Pene- Uluminating} trating Power. (°) 1 Ot He HR 0D 09 © OD DO DS DO bD DO DD DD DD DD DD DD te et tt et tt tt et tt tt 149 ‘163 “176 *190 +205 *220 *235 *250 *266 +282 *299 *316 *333 “351 “370 +389 “408 "429 +449 "471 “493 *515 *538 *562 “587 “613 *639 “667 695 "724 754 *786 “818 “852 “887 1-000 12-500 16° 667 20°000 ¢ 10 om _ GREATLY REDUCED PRICES) OBJECT-GLASSES MANUFACTURED By R. & J. BECK, 68, CORNHILL, LONDON, EC. PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT.GLASSES. G ; Ame le Linear magnifying- power, with rednch No. | Focal length. | aper-| Price. heady Sie oa eye Di . ture go ae SA ARE EET CT IS ROE IPAS Te -| about | No. 1.| No. 2. No. 8. No. 4 No. 5. | = £8. d, 100 | 4inches ..-.. 9 : a0 (8) be) 16 30 40 50 101 | Sinches~ .... 7 0.0 102|Binches .. ..| 12 | 210 0 } Ps ee eS ee 108 | 2inches .. 4. | Io 110 0° 104 | inches .. ..| 17 | 210 0 } 22 fe SO Oe aoa et ee TOD AAs Aaeh ices ef 28 210 0 | 30 48 go | 120 150 IDG 4 Pane te 2 0 0°) pee NS As 107 es nh poe es 210 0 } hate Nein iees eae ie CEN os TOS 43-inch Aso age 210-01 100 |. 160} 300} 400 500 S09 1-2 inch oj Se ee PBS 4 0 0 125 | 200} 375 | 500 625 110 | +. inch, sree) Sess 95 5 0 0 150 | 240} 450 | 600 750.- 111 rd ach eee pane 75 38-10 0O | 200} 320} 600) 800 | 1000- 442} 2 hieh AS pen so) 20 410 0] 250} 400 | 750 | 10004 1250. 1964 inch ee oe oe B30 _5 0 O07] 400] 640 | 1200 | 1600.} 2000 - 114 | 3, imm. eg cere a ee 6c) 5 5 O-| 500} 800 | 1550} 2000} 2500 115 | 4 imm. Sa ice F LOO 8 0 0 750 | T200 |°2250 | 3000-| 3750 116 =; imm. eS octe's| 2a 80 10 0 0} 4000 | 1600 | 3000 | 4000} 5000. 117 | p,inch.. ... .. | 160 | 20.0. O | 20007) 3200.) 6000 | 8000 | I0,0G0 ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, AppliCABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE. WITH THE UNIVERSAL SCREW. Angle MAGNIFYING-POWER, | of with 6-inch body and No. Focal length. aper- Price. eye-pleces. ture, a ae about No, 1.| No. 2. | No. 3. Pie ie hl tat 150 1.3 inches-- 2... | 6 1 0.0%} 12 4 27 151 | 2inches .. .. 8 100 ES, Sete ph | cae P5272 sch os. Ks 18 1 5 0O 46 6I 106 15854 neh os an 138 1 5.0 gO. | 116 °-| 205 154°) 2 inch “25>... 2. | 80 1. 5°04} 170 | 220 “| 415 ADD: anche poe owas otto 2 5 QO | 250 | 330 | 630 - 156 2 inch Fda ee ETO 310 0 | 350 | 450 | 800 157 | 3, imm. Wise hee LOO 6 0 O- | 654 | 844 |1500° ; re SES Revised Catalogue sent on application to R. & J. BECK, GS, Cornhill. ate = Ady aut ; 2 | | : i 4 JOURN.R.MICR.S0C.1887. PLX. oe rT nn Te OT ata asa Rar os SO OES ease } J ( 4 { OSES ESSN H t i \ Ys shy rteert Wy MbeneL MEP Erase steno rr enn AT nr se eee ee renee a a ; A aaicxy, restos : i ae a wy we a ie uh Ww — ae Kos Bt K ie xy a Bei wk ie f eS ee Frac pone i 4A SAE By Sete et] trea West, Newman &Co lith. Muscle of a Mummy. RLM.delad nat. JGG del. JOURN.R.MICR.SOC1887.P1. XI. West Newman&Uo. lith. Seyphidia Amcebeea Dinophysis semicarinata. a . JAN 29 1903 nia) 12 aC ene ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. AUGUST 1887. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. IX.—On the Different Tissues found in the Muscle of a Mummy. By R. L. Mavpox, M.D., Hon. F.R.M.S. (Read 11th May, 1887.) s PuatTEe X. To some it may be a matter of surprise, to others a question of utility, to have gone back amongst the dead of remote ages in search of a subject for microscopical examination, whilst on every side we are surrounded by living organisms whose structure is unknown. Yet let me venture to hope the result which I now have the honour to bring to the notice of the Fellows may justify the selection. Whatever may be the opinion entertained of this record of the examination, it must be admitted there is one point upon which the dead doth not speak, nor can the living offer more than silence, and that is whether a thousand or two thousand or more cycles have slipped away “with the years beyond the flood” since this muscle-structure possessed life. The time, however, has certainly been beyond a period in which we could fairly hope for the preservation and identification of any part of the minute organic tissues of either the muscular, vascular, or nervous systems. It was to satisfy myself upon this point, but more especially as regards the preservation of the striated character of voluntary muscle, that the examination was undertaken. Very possibly others have pre- viously made like researches, but the limited means at my disposal have not enabled me to discover any record of a similar examination. Should such be within the knowledge of some of the Fellows whose opportunities have been greater, it is still hoped this paper may extend our knowledge and dispose of some of the difficulties that attend such studies. No doubt, in the present instance, much is due to the very careful way in which the preservation of the dead was carried out, for in two EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. Fig. 1. Fibrille in mummy muscle x 200. », 2. Remains of blood-vessels (?) in mummy muscle x 200. » 3. Broken blood-vessel in mummy muscle x 200. » 4. Delicate nerve-fibres in mummy muscle x 200. 3 2 Ditto. » 6. Ditto. (All the figures have been reduced from 400 to 200 diam.) 1887. 2N 538 Transactions of the Society. other examinations all trace of minute structure was lost, the tissues being so impregnated with the asphalt, pitch; or resinous gums and other materials used in the process of embalming, as to be useless under any of the methods of investigation that were adopted with success in this case. About nineteen years ago there was handed to me a portion of a human mummy, the arm (I believe of a female), obtained before 1853 from one of the many Egyptian tombs, by a friend since deceased. A small piece was cut from one of the muscles—if I remember correctly, the triceps—which had been exposed by the removal of the various investing bands of linen, and carefully wrapped in note-paper, and put aside for a more convenient time, and thus came to be forgotten until a few weeks since. The little piece that was removed was about 1} in. long, pliable, and looking closely like a small tuft from an old cocoa-nut fibre mat or a dirty bit of spent tan. A very cursory examination proved so attractive, that it was deter- mined to no longer delay a more strict investigation. ‘The question was how best to proceed, and in order to vary the methods the following reagents were used. The parts taken from the bit of muscle were cut from each end, also from the middle, and placed to soak in them for a fortnight :— . Glycerin 4 dr., glacial acetic acid 4 m. . Glycerin 4 dr., liquor potasse (B. Ph.) 1 dr. . Glycerin 4 dr., sweet spirit of nitre 2 dr. . Glycerin 4 dr., saturated solution of boracic acid 1 dr. . Glycerin 4 dr., glac. acet. acid 4 m., and chloride zinc 6 gr. . Distilled water 4 dr., glac. acet, acid 2 m. . Saturated solution of salicylic acid. . Distilled water 3 parts, hydrochloric acid 1 part. 9. Distilled water 6 parts, nitric acid 1 part. 10. Distilled water 2 parts, rectified spirit 1 part. 11. Distilled water 16 parts, chloral hydrate 1 part. 12. Equal parts of this solution and rectified spirit. 13. Turpentine. 14. Chloroform. 15. A portion of the muscle was boiled for ten seconds in a little distilled water. 16. A similar piece was boiled for the same time in equal parts of distilled water and rectified spirit. These portions were allowed after- wards to soak in these fluids for three or four days. It may here be remarked that the boiling shrank the tissue very much, and rendered it tough and elastic, possibly from the gums used in the embalming process. As several of these reagents offered no peculiar advantage, only those which proved most useful will be now mentioned. No. 1 enabled me to separate the fibres into smaller bundles by means of needles and the dissecting Microscope, but did not allow of any perfect separation into fibrillee. No. 5 permitted the dissection to be carried further and to bring into view numerous fibrillee, also a blood-vessel filled with rather coarse granular contents. Nos. 8 and 9 allowed the compression of the fibres until they pre- © CO NIS OH OF I On Tissues in Muscle of Mummy. By Dr. R. L. Maddow, 539 sented only a finely granular appearance, but in this could be detected numerous fine fibres of different refractive power from the rest of the substance. ‘These delicate fibres with high powers could be traced into different planes forming a plexus. No. 16 permitted the examination of similar fine fibres to be carried perhaps a little further. The objects, when prepared for the purpose of examination, were temporarily mounted either in a saturated solution of potassic acetate and distilled water equal parts, or in distilled water with such portions of the reagent that remained adherent to the small portion of muscle that was selected. In order to avoid assuming the correctness of my own interpretation of the appearances presented under the Microscope, every endeavour was made to photograph the structures, but where the delicate and the densely coloured portions were in the same field of view, it was found impossible to distinctly render the former, such as the fibrillee and nerves, the same becoming through over-exposure too feeble to print with fair definition in the positive, before the exposure had been long enough to impress the image of the denser parts, consequently I was driven to the use of the pencil and camera lucida to portray these structures—structures which it was not in any way anticipated would be thus far found intact. The figures of plate X. have been drawn to a scale larger than the photomicrographs, or really than necessary, but this was done expressly that the parts might be more readily distinguished. A lower magnifi- cation was tried, but the result was less satisfactory, and it was more difficult to use. The macroscopical appearances have already been alluded to. In the microscopical examination the first thing that was noticed in a large number of the portions that had been teased out by the needles was a coarse, granular striation, crossing at irregular intervals at right angles to the course of the fibres. This is shown in fig. 5 and in photograph No. 1. I have no satisfactory theory to offer to account for this pecu- liarity, which was evidently not directly due to the pressure of the bandages, as in many of the bits of muscle they were far too near each other for that idea, but it struck me as the process of embalming was often carried out or begun very shortly after death, that in this case it might have been before the rigor mortis had passed away, and that the albuminoid fluid substance of the muscle had been coagulated, and as it seems impressed or imprisoned under the rigor of the muscular structures. The next notable appearance was the preservation of the muscular fibres, but unfortunately minus their own striation. In some of the prepared specimens, the muscular structure presented a beautiful wavy character which did not admit of perfect straightening, and in some cases where one of the needles used, a thin pointed flat one, had been pressed some- what heavily on the fibres, these had been broken up into finer bundles and finally pressed out or broken up into their respective fibrille, whilst here and there in other specimens fibrillz as fine lines could be seen stretching across from fibre to fibre of the teased-out muscle. The former only have been represented in fig. 1. An unsuccessful attempt has been made to photograph both conditions. Photographs 2 and 3. 2Nn 2 540 Transactions of the Society. In numerous specimens a peculiar appearance of aérolated lines was noticed, which generally followed the course of the fibres, but sometimes ran rather obliquely across them. These looked very much like long interspaces, varying slightly here and there in width, that had been filled with some fluid that had coagulated and imprisoned minute air-spaces. One specimen was photographed for part of its course which was more than double that depicted in the printed photograph No. 4. The slight swellings are visible in the part represented. Several of these aerolated Spaces are also shown in the figs., especially fig. 2. They remain a puzzle to me, but they led me to search most carefully for some perfect minute vessels, and after spending much time over the slides I was rewarded by finding a small vessel charged with rather coarse granular contents lying between the fibres. It had been broken across in its course, and separated only a very short distance from it were likewise three small broken portions of the same vessel. The attempt to repro- duce this by photography, photograph 5, has not been as successful as desired on account of the non-actinic colour of the structure, hence it hag been figured more highly magnified, fig. 3. Whether the contents were blood constituents greatly altered by the process of embalming or perhaps by the injection of some preservative liquid is doubtful, but the ap- pearance is sufficiently characteristic of its vascular nature. The use of immersion lenses disclosed nothing more satisfactory, as regards the granular contents, though some of the few separated granules seemed to have a kind of haloround them. Thus far the examinations proved very interesting. Two apparently different vessels or empty tubes were dissociated from the fibres by the needles, but it appears to me they cannot safely be said to belong to either the lymphatic or vascular systems, for some parts of the muscle had been invaded by a mildew growth. Curiously this mycelium had spread aeross the fibres and not in the direction of their length. These two tubes appeared too large to be the basic mycelium tubes connected with the smaller branches of what were regarded as due to a growth of Penicilliwm from the few conidia found Jying amongst them. These vessels or tubes were photographed in order to furnish an idea of their appearance, and on the nature of which I do not venture to offer any definite opinion. Photograph 6. During the examination of many of the prepared specimens, where the fibrous structures had been purposely compressed, the eye continually glimpsed minute fibres of a different refractive power from the other parts, running for a short distance in the substance of the muscle, and then lost to view. ‘This led me to endeavour to prepare some of the specimens so that their course could be more completely followed. By very careful focusing the fibres could now be traced through different levels, although the plexus brought into view is figured in each drawing as if it occupied only one plane. Figs. 4, 5 and 6. Without much hesita- tion, I think these fine fibres must be regarded as nerve-fibres. They were not seen in any of the specimens as long as the muscle structure retained its fibrous appearance, but when it was softened, compressed, and had assumed a more or less finely granular character, then these delicate nerve-fibres were brought into view. The mode of pre- paration that .gave perhaps the best results was when boiled for ten On Tissues in Muscle of Mummy. By Dr. R. L. Maddow. 541 seconds with water and rectified spirit, or when water with nitric acid had been used as the reagent. Every effort to photograph these structures failed, the brown non-actinic colour and density of the substance prevented the necessary differentiation, though perfectly visible under the Microscope with careful focusing. These fine fibres appeared in part as continuous bright lines, in part as grey lines, according to the position of the mirror. Unfortunately the stock of osmic acid was exhausted or it would have been used to try and render these fine fibres yet more apparent. Under none of the reagents used did the muscle structure afford any perfect evidence of the peculiar striation belonging to voluntary muscle, but some of the fibrillee appeared to be made up of minute dots united in line, though how far this may have been inherent to the structure, or how far due to the general coagulation that was apparent in the highly compressed and softened muscle, is doubtful ; but this much may be noticed, that the purposely softened muscle in which the nerve-fibrils were most visible, presented no trace of perfect muscular fibrille. Although, correctly speaking, not belonging to the microscopical side of this interesting subject, this paper would be much more incomplete without some notice of the acknowledged methods of embalming, for the examination of a specimen kindly sent to me by Prof. Stewart of the Royal College of Surgeons proved absolutely useless, the flesh apparently having been placed in a bath of melted bitumen, or something of the kind, by which all structure was lost, and also in another specimen, for which I was indebted to the kindness of Mr. Shore, manager of the Hartley Institution, Southampton, which was somewhat brittle, and though treated with the same reagents, furnished no satisfactory results ; still it is feared, even with this assistance, we shall find no sufficient clue to the method of preservation used in the present case. To enter into all the details would far exceed the limits of this paper, and the subject must, therefore, be but cursorily dealt with. Whatever the origin cf embalming, the process was perfected in Egypt. Besides the description given by Herodotus of the different methods, some instructions have been found in the Rhind papyrus. All the great cemeteries had their establishments for the reception and embalming of the dead, and it is stated that in those belonging to the necropolis of Memphis, there were always from 500 to 800 corpses passing through the different processes. Herodotus explains that the brains were re- moved through the nostrils, the intestines by an incision in the left side of the abdomen, which was then cleaned with palm wine, and afterwards filled with myrrh, cassia, &c.,and the body steeped for many days in a solution of natron, an impure soda-salt found in the Natron Lake of the Libyan Desert in Upper Egypt. After the steeping, the body was handed to the swathers and bandaged with gummed cloths, and made ready for the coffin. The cost of the different methods is given as varying from 243]. to 96/.—the less costly method. This consisted in filling the abdomen with cedar-tree pitch or pine pitch, the body being steeped in the natron bath, the contents of the abdomen being allowed to escape or eviscerated by other means. The corpse of the poor was placed in natron for many days (70), after rinsing the abdomen with “syrmea.” Asphalt was said to be used with the more costly methods, and wax but 542 Transactions of the Society. rarely. In some cases, it is stated, the body was immersed in melted bitumen. A species of tanning was also employed. Sometimes the viscera, after cleansing, were replaced, but more frequently embalmed separately, and placed in a vase near the mummy, the emptied abdomen being filled with chips of cedar sawdust, and a little natron. The cast linen of the household was usually kept for the bandages. The swathing was begun at the toes and fingers, then carried over the whole body in numberless bands ; from 700 to 1200 yards of bandages, or strips three or four inches wide, it is written, have been unrolled from a single mummy. The mummies of Memphis are described as black and brittle, and those of the time of the Hebrews as yellow and flexible, the flesh even yielding to pressure, and the limbs capable of altered position with- out breaking. ‘This flexibility is supposed to have resulted from the use of very costly injections of chemical solutions into the vessels, as the natron process largely destroyed the structures. The under bandages were dipped in spirit and applied wet. When Syrian turpentine came into use asin Thebes, the mummies were blacker than those of Memphis, both the bandages and body being greatly hardened. In later periods some of the bodies had an ashen grey appearance, others that were treated with bitumen were dark coloured and heavy. The methods described by Herodotus, Diodorus Siculus, and others, have been more or less con- firmed by MM. Jomard, Royer, and Larrey, in their ‘ Description de lEgypte.’ The evisceration by incision is said to have been adopted for the rich. The mummies in which the cavities were filled with aromatic resinous bodies are somewhat olive coloured, with distinct features, the teeth, hair, and eyebrows remaining mostly perfect. Those in which the body had been filled with bitumen, are somewhat reddish, with a hard skin, and are not very alterable on exposure to the atmosphere, the features remaining moderately perfect. Those that have been salted do not differ much from the last, but the hair has generally dropped off, and the features are not so perfect. When the impure bitumen or pisasphalt was use | internally, it was also supposed to have been used very hot, so as to impregnate all the tissues. The bodies that were only salted and dried remain less perfect, the features being destroyed, the hair removed, while the skin is hard and parchmenty. ‘The Egyptian modes of embalming were copied by the Jews, Greeks, and Romans.* The more perfect Jewish method was probably the one employed in © preserving the mummy that furnished the muscle that has been the subject of this paper, though this must be accepted as a matter of specu- lation. The appearances under the Microscope of living and recently dead muscle are not strictly alike, the latter has more opacity besides other differences. The muscle fluid, myosin, has been found to coagulate at 45° C., and the same temperature sets up rigor mortis, and at 75° C. the albuminoids become coagulated. In spite of the diligent physiological and microscopical researches that have been made in studying the complex character of living muscle, we are yet confronted by many * For the rules and methods of embalming I am indebted to the pages of the Encyclopedia Britannica, 9th ed., the Penny Cyclopedia, and Kitto’s Cyclopedia of Biblical Literature, On Tissues of Muscle in Mummy. By Dr. Rh. L. Maddow. 548 difficulties, and it is doubtful if the last words have yet been said in connection with its attributes and structure; hence we can hardly expect that the dead tissues of remote ages, no matter by whatever method preserved, should be found to closely correspond with the living or recently dead similar structures. We have lost the striation and its doubly refracting power, the sarcolemma and the long pointed nuclei, and how far the chemical substances, myosin, glycogen, inosit, creatin, &c., remain intact in the mummy muscle, is very doubtful. The with- drawal of moisture with the use of materials to delay tissue change we must expect will prevent any very perfect restoration as a whole of this highly delicate complex tissue. With the separation of the bundles of fibres into smaller ones, and these again into finer ones, all of which are held together by connective tissue, until we end at the fibrille, we must, it appears, for the present be content in our comparison of the recent muscular structure and the remote dead. To have gained this much with the addition of vessels and nerves, was worth the inquiry. Nortr.—Since the foregoing was read, one of the Members of the Council, Mr. Julien Deby, has drawn my attention to a paper by Czermak,* published in 1852, containing the result of his examination of two Egyptian mummies, and having most kindly placed the article at my service, I am enabled to add this very brief summary of the interesting details of the microscopical examination. The mummies were those of an adult female and of a lad about 15 years of age, and dating from a period of 2000 years since; the former being in a very marked state of preservation, having been most carefully prepared and wrapped with about 4000 yards of bandages, though not a person of an exalted station. The boy was much damaged, hence the examination chiefly refers to the former. Czermak, after giving a general description of the condition of the different parts of the bodies, and alluding to the method of embalming and the excellent preservation of the female mummy, which he attributes especially to the natron used in the process, passes to the microscopical details, of which he gives thirteen very carefully drawn figures. On re- ferring to these it will be noticed that Czermak was very fortunate, as he found the striation in one of the voluntary muscles—the sphincter of the eyelid—by making use of turpentine as the examining medium; but this medium failed entirely in my hands, and also upon making a further trial of the same. He does not appear to have obtained the separation into fibrille, as his figure is that of a bundle of fibrils. ‘To accomplish this separation it seemed to me to be necessary to swell the tissues very gradually. There is another most interesting point in Czermak’s paper, he having been able to recognise the axis cylinder in the fibres composing the median nerve of the arm. It will need no apology to offer a very brief notice of the microscopical details, as his paper may not be of easy access to many of the Fellows. The following refers to the figures as given in the plate at the end of the paper :— 1. The cells with nuclei of a section of the nail of the ring finger of the female mummy. 2. A longitudinal section near the root of the nail. * SB. K, Akad. Wiss. (Math.-Naturw. Cl.), ix. (1852). 544 Transactions of the Society. . Hair of the head of the female, showing the sheath. . A cross section of the hair near the root. . The cells of the inner sheath. . Henle’s and Huxley’s layers. . A transverse section of the muscle of the thumb, flexor pollicis longus, treated with water. 8. The cartilage cells of the ear of the small mummy. 9. Section of the cartilage of the patella, with the cells i situ. 10. Cartilage cells from the rib of the female mummy. 11. Nerve-fibres of the median nerve in which besides the nerve-substance the axis- cylinder can be also seen. 12. A few muscular fibres from the sphincter of the eyelid as seen in turpentine, showing the striation and other appearances. 13. A section of the fatty layer in the great toe of the adult mummy, with the fat-cells in position. “TOD Ore OO Czermak speaks of one of the former Presidents of the Society, Prof. Quekett, having shown him a figure of the hair of a mummy in one of the Nos. of the ‘Microscopical Journal. Unfortunately I am unable to specialise the number. It will thus be seen that by the aid of the Microscope it has been possible to touch the fringe, and gather up a few threads of “the frayed border of the royal robe” worn long centuries since, but carefully folded up and laid aside as a legacy to the wardrobe of time. X.—Remarks on the Foraminifera, with especial reference to their Variability of Form, illustrated by the Cristellarians.—Pant II. By Prof. T. Rupert Jonzs, F.BS., F.GS., and C. Davies SuHersorn, F.G.S. (Read 8th June, 1887.) Part I. of this paper, in the ‘Monthly Microscopical Journal’ for February 1876, contained a synoptical Table of the published varieties of Cristellaria, from the time of Linné to 1840; and an attempt was made to reduce these numerous figured forms to their proper zoological positions, by referring them to the few best-pronounced types of Cristellaria. In the two plates illustrating the above-mentioned paper, there were figured a series of Foraminifera, all belonging to the Nodosarine; and they exemplified the gradual passage from the straight, many-chambered shell of this kind of Foraminifera to the most perfect spiral form. At the same time it was shown that the cylindrical and compressed shells of varying thickness were merely varieties of the same form. It has been thought advisable to continue the Table as a guide to future workers in this group of Microzoa; and in this paper the Cristellarians are now further zoologically tabulated to the end of 1860. It having been found impossible, for want of space, to include those other groups of Nodosarinze which are closely connected with Cristellaria, we have omitted hundreds of references to the many varieties of Margi- nuline, Vaginuline, and other sub-groups, which cannot, if regarded biologically, be separated from the Cristellariz. The most striking series of these omitted forms will be found in a paper by Neugeboren, published in the Verh. Mitth. Siebenburg. Ver. Nat., ii. 1851, where a series of forty-five partially-coiled Nodosarine are figured, most of which have been elevated by him to the rank of “species.” Others are to be found in a paper by M. Cornuel in the Mém. Soc. Géol. France, sér. 2, i. 1848; in Reuss’ “ Westphalischen Kreide,” SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xl. 1860, &e. In drawing up the Table, five forms have been selected as the chief types around which to group the Cristellariz ; these are, C. calcar (Linné), representing the keeled and rowelled forms, and of which all spiral Cristellariz are specifically varieties; and, as convenient sub- varieties of this, C. cultrata (De Montf.), representing the keeled forms; C. rotulata Lam., the keelless forms; C. italica (Defr.), the triangular- elongate forms; and C. crepidula (Fichtel and Moll), including all com- pressed-elongate forms. It must, however, be understood that these five varieties are not themselves to be considered as really distinct, but are used merely as available heads of divisions into which the Cristellari# may be sorted. Some few subordinate names are kept, with the alliances indicated. In the Table, the middle column gives the names bestowed by different authors upon the varieties which they have described as “species.” Those names which we consider to be of sufficient value to be kept for classificatory purposes have been printed in larger type; while, on the other hand, those which are unmistakably the same as our recognised types are printed in smaller type, to indicate the advis- ability of allowing their pseudo-specific name to drop. There is certainly 546 Transactions of the Society. a fictitious, though to some extent a practical, value in these pseudo- specific names, when the student is collecting and arranging Foraminifera, if he is desirous of distinguishing minute differences by nomenclatorial terms; but he should not be led to exaggerate the zoological value of such varietal forms and conditions. Further, were naturalists to use only such terms as might be approved of by exact biology, the discoveries and observations made by earlier authors would perhaps be too often forgotten or laid aside. Indeed, it is necessary to retain for classificatory purposes many names given by these earlier workers, and very desirable that observers should refer to these older works thoroughly, when seeking for comparisons and new names. Amongst the several Bibliographies of Foraminifera known to us, that appended to H. B. Brady’s ‘Report on the Foraminifera of the Challenger Expedition’ is by far the best; it has carefully brought the literature of the subject. into notice, and is very useful for the above-mentioned purpose of enabling the student to find what has already been done in this line of research. Since 1860, the period at which our present Table closes, there have been published a very great number of papers on the Foraminifera; the labours of Reuss, Terquem, Karrer, and others having brought to our notice hundreds of forms, amongst which the Nodosarinze predominate. Of these papers we do not propose now to treat; but it will be useful to refer to a work, by von Schlicht,* who, in a series of thirty- eight large plates, illustrating the Foraminiferal fauna of one deposit (corresponding, according to Hermann Credner,f to our Hempstead Beds of the Isle of Wight), devotes eight and a half quarto plates, containing two hundred and thirteen figures, to the Cristellariz alone. To the delineation of other members of the Nodosarinze (Lagena to Marginulina) he gives ten and a half plates, with two hundred and sixteen figures. Von Schlicht only grouped his specimens in “ genera ”’ ; but von Reuss, in the SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Ixii. 1870, carefully described most of the forms, making many new “species.” ‘The most cursory examination of these plates will show the extremely close connection existing between all the forms; and, having in hand the illustrations of so fine a series from one deposit, and therefore of so large a group of forms most probably living continuously in one area, and — under one set of conditions, we are enabled to see in a striking manner how greatly one form can and does pass into manifold varieties, and how difficult it is to recognise the limitation of species, and say where they begin and where they end.t It only remains to again point out the completeness of the chain which has for its links the sub-groups Lagena, Glandulina, Nodosaria, Dentalina, Marginulina, Vaginulina, and Cristellaria (including Robulina); and again to draw attention to the infinite number of varieties, whose only claim to “ specific” position consists in the varying curvature of the shell; other modifications, such as surface-marking, form and position of orifice, variable flattening of the shell, &., being common to each of the several sub-groups above-mentioned. * ‘Die Foraminiferen des Septarienthones von Pietzpuhl,’ 4to, Berlin, 1870. + ‘ Blemente der Geologie,’ 8vo, Leipzig, 1883. + The recognition of these difficulties evidently led Dr. Goés to compile the valuable lists in his paper on “ The Reticularian Rhizopoda of the Caribbean Sea,” K. Svenska Vetensk.-Ak. Handl., xix. 1882. On the Foraminifera. By Prof. T. R. Jones & OC. D. Sherborn. 547 ‘DLUDNUD) J OF WEY} LIYPVI v210}/ajSI49 0} Satoods pozdaoow STIY} IaJor 0} OTGVSIAPV FT FUG} OM + ‘(studuouds pus ‘S3Y) ZG “0 “MIA “CesT “WIM “ZH ‘ssnoy (Ug) snipers vlie[[o}suQ ‘e[NpIdedo “Q oq} pue MomeN ** “Yq SMIpeps wuynursreyy LE EFF ‘FI ‘OF “d : : “wOry as “AM SIM Ae Tata oct -diosop oY} Woy oyqeuluiejap JON "8 ‘Td esuo[qo re ci ei ina ac (omsy ou) gf ‘TH “d QOwoN ,B[nptdadao sf ; ; : pease oe wee ; “ TM ae eae Meera ousiac) 10-neKaue (ggg ‘d) ssnoy CY) BP BNIB “OH Ud vipeutreyar 8g J ‘b 4 ‘ST ‘ord FLVTTOISTLO JO SOHPMBA | ein prdaro ‘QO Woys pur peoaq Y “°° “Yd SHB[Mouormes vepnue,g 6S FF FLT ‘Tp dd "907 ‘d TIIAX ‘CCST *MOIIEU ‘Yq Blno ae ae ‘senoy ) Sqroo Trews ya |-snssordai0o . ¥ ee SS, 3506 EP A ORGIES ‘ Ud) By BVNOIe) “100 Tews WIM Ud BVNIIV ‘ ‘ ‘ .. .* oe eer ‘ ‘ZI ‘“ SLIV[[IISIIO [loo OSIVT YMA «Ud VIVAlds vraepnuLpg joa vuyMUrsiepE LG EB FST ‘ed [SpuBlYps}ned UsToIT}seaproU ep UWOSUNAOULO}SIOAIVIFIOT, Lop SSIUJUUOY Inz osvipylog , ‘IddITIHY ‘SFST : [orsseme] “TBA ayesuoje (¢ “Sy) Sulpnpouy ‘Cajoq) Bolpeyl VlaBl[oeystry "°° ‘Tory,.p Vywoundy Vives" ‘9 ‘ne ‘3 ez 3 ‘OLE ‘d ‘CON “Way “A [ua ‘Poul "[oay ‘00g “Wey, ‘OVIHOUY.( ‘StS ee ma reccloye | VyYVe[NoIqio i733 ee ee ee 95 bc “cc ‘Mo0Y Staspnpidoedo vuvnuyg “ * ' Fy ‘a mA Td ‘gzz-d ‘GEST ‘YouqIyee sonON ,, WVIOF-Oploly ONON,, “ATWAOY “VY ‘A “FST "ey V[Nyor 49) 9}8AO oe ee ee ‘H "A enbi,qo T3 oe oe oe oe CZ oii bc LG ‘a ‘@4e8Iy[no‘Q " * ‘HA wysoorueyd SUB: «opty 6 ZLG ‘d ‘puyjeqnjg B@joyuomsey yw ff ‘WI ‘A Bsopou wiBnUe[g °° °° =‘ ** 1% 3 °xt Id ‘g9¢ ‘d ‘ZEST CMS "[RIOUL][ INJ Yonqiyve sonoN ,eploly Usyposuesny,, “MONUDVAT NOA “J "GPT ‘DILDINUD) T SYBUIIT B JO SOTJOLIBA { C7) IBVd[ VO 76) oe oe oe (Cap) IvoO[Vo “ec ee oe ee ee (oy it 6b Z6G ‘d oe ee Ci ep) eyerypno 79 oe oe oe oe c y “cc 162 ‘d ‘CW 9G) BYVIZ[NO VITBTTOYSTAQ py GOI euramng =“ St Te. ae alvetane oe o oe "TOU essoidep euynqoy oo o . ey ws "1 “16% d ‘TIXX “Tog ‘[e}T “00g “May, = ,yo1ovidos tpodoziy,, “ILLOTaHOIL “FST i CENT E EEE - ‘ALVONOTY UO “IVACHHIY, 6 6 6 ¢ c CVAUISLAG ‘AETICMOY “AHIGTY “SSHTICMY YIHLGHA ‘(FNNI'T) YVOTVO VIUVITELSIX() JO SNOILVOIMIGO]] IVLEIAV A GHL ‘Q98T O% OFS Wowd SYOHLAY A GHOILON SV ‘LNANGONVYUY IVOIOSOTONOYHH NI ONIMOHS “GTAVL TVOLLGONAS T'ransactions of the Society. 548 ‘sauly [ejdes ueyuns ‘CW P(A) 2384809 ‘FF avou “BLLBL[A4SIIHO ‘S1SSVO0 “— ‘(popaoy “S118 ] NOIINBINIS “—) SIaqMIVYO MOF YIM pus Yor, “Ry BVAIZTNO —) ‘eoueIJO] STAN VILV[UUS] "(S2QPO) “O.P V7nbuoja munjnunyy ‘Uelle[nael ‘SoUl] [ejdas UDZUNS TIM “SY Bl[ NOL “O “OUT[NULSIV YA “(palaey) memynunyd yi ‘Syorreaqng (BLOTS 4, jeurmiou 9} jo salrep *MOITCU ; ; louiel “VJNPIdeito VIIVI[[IISIA See ee ‘gg ‘Sy foulnursieyy st 9% “SIA aes eS a tae -auITNULSIE “UBLI][O}SUIO “ouTTN UL STEN pue yesuoye < ‘UBLeNUB[ YA pus o}esu0[9 Surmooaq ‘B4V[ NOI “— ‘ja0yH tood WyIM ‘ayeuoquingns ‘ey eVI}[Nd “OD ‘e[nyenoieqns ‘) peoiq io ‘e[npidei9 -Q yoy, (#unjnunjpq o18 Tg pues 0G ‘}) Diunnunjg OYA pure vurynwmbmp oyu Surssed “ey Bl NzOI “—Y “puynunrbinpy miunnuny | LesU “01.10))99821/) ouLnULs.1e AL ‘B[np! tdoao ‘0 = Wyoous TUNED Tel ‘BOTLTe yt iweu {o1esu0]e I ‘c ‘oyeuioqum satuTjemos fey BV [NOI 1@u 9 “M) LUD pry yonu SI 69 ‘Sq edTTeyL “OQ ATJsouL : TepOSuBLy ‘yorqy “ploys ‘BolT Bq “Q Aprvau favpnsuery “yoy ‘oyesuoje ‘eyel[ nyo “O ejdes UeyUNS YIM ‘pivnjnunjd ‘O,P sIsMAuTUILTE euynqoy *” CW ® “aD sissvo O.P essv190 ‘O,p euny{iues ‘OC P Ryelov0urT ‘O.P STaLrojraer O,p vurydesor ‘O.P Byenore - -C,p essorduro0d oe ‘O.P ‘seproquiso °C.p xe,duuis 66 ee ‘O.P BuLoneAL BITES" ‘O,P SMB[NsUVLy vUlNULoIe_, ** ‘sSY VON] VITVT[OISE) —*” ** -gsay epide, vuljnqoy °° ‘sSyy ByVqOT "SSY] VIPATUI9JUL ‘SS 2} Bq UIT] ‘O.P 2901 ‘ssy] eyeue[dui00 ‘O.P BINOAvU VITeTTOIsH) ** (2) ‘mis0xy esso1duioo BuIMOIUONY *” (‘weTq) vyejnjor “SSt] SITVAO ‘C.P Slie[n suey ‘SSI VYB[NOI}Uop VIIPT[OISUQ ** 66 ee . . oe 6 ‘g J C6 ‘d oe oe o- L-¥ yt 66 16 ‘d os . oe eT I O 4 13 Ut Pepa penes 0G om on GP ‘TF J 6“ 68 ‘d oe o. OF “6g ‘J (73 oc oe ge “1g ay 73 88 ‘d eae Se STO i a pees eevee aoe . oe 1g ‘og 4 bs 44 fn te A 66-98 E+ Co ag rd ee GGG Sn pga st oe 8G COS SLE a ‘OUUSIA 410} USSU ‘SSOJ “WRIOH “ANDSICUO,.d 9F8L ee eo oe ee oe LF Bi “ ae oe ee . of OF J ‘EG 4 - ae ee ee ae 6¢ t 66 1g ‘OG 3 ‘Es 4 ‘sg‘ug FS ee se oe oe 9¢ 5 be se ee oe oe ee cc J T3 ae ee eo "EG J ‘eT 4 th ge be Sepp tay og ee oe oe se ee T¢ ey (T4 6h ‘Sh J ff eT eZ ey Aa OL OS aie % §9-09 J ‘SI 4: 6L J ae Gp te ae ee oe ae oe ee SF i cc tee eee Tig g « PITY “WOT “U194SI0A 5, ‘ssogy NOA “WY “VY ‘9F-GF8T “panuyuoo—aAtay J, TVOILAONAG 549 By Prof. T. RB. Jones & C. D. Sherborn, On the Foraminifera. fF ON ‘883 ‘dra Spent ‘og ‘uM ‘wagv0a "yt ‘W 8d 9% “TWA “ZT ON ‘Ea “d “A “yen tog “uM “rojo yf “BI ON “683 “d “ITA “quNy ‘og “UY ‘znaynon “yy ‘VT NIUVNOIB | ale Os - rs . es oper y i 9 d “(NS VIIVT[IISTAQ wou St TT “Sy f wuynuheopy uewepnues pak ars ania et STL : @) U 7 W l Id | ‘e ‘? oo 2 pide VIILTTOISIAD) oe o* ** a OL ‘e 7 2 “$0z “d : : oe ee '? nee 14800 “ ee . ee ae —¢ * ‘ a“ euynubo, UBIepNUL,T fe os sg ayyTMorjor wuEfMMETT. oo : ‘5 4 ‘gor ‘d UL. t ‘(snos0ByoI) [ yavd “11 “TOA “Tt “x08 ‘OOUVIT "JOIH ‘00g “MEPL “IHONYOD “SFT ‘oyVULIBOqns oy “mote SNL HIORRIVY VireypoysIg ty tet ts x LL ‘SMOCMVYS POAINO SNOIOMINT GA “VpPBIg~ND Qt 8 W Toney eul[nqoyy ** ** te **(pemnsy you) ‘ouTTTOQVAQNS $C Pq) stssvo Qos CIN Yul) Sissvo vueppoysy tt ‘g¢pueg y “ gtd SqUrgtno ‘HO * ve (TEST) W Lurmmng “ oe ** . °° a “ “ ‘VUBTNJOI Ta) ee oe CI#81) “WW wnbiywe “ oe ‘e e- on . ae “ al ‘d “meinjjersiw9 = ** «— ** — (T$R1) “IN Bssordop wuynqoy os ts tee T 3 ‘ti eT ‘d TH “Tos % “WPTevF] “ostiajo 4, “deryposyeupy otfospuvy [oy oA “yu N ¢tquoydos orpejy ‘oor “1197, ,, ‘THLOTAHOI, “LEST ‘OYLGUTT PUB OPBTOGTIN : (YT OM) VPVAQ[NO VIAV[TOIsSIAGQ ‘Yd Bolsinqopsry VUTMOIGON Fe MA TT VOT Tea ‘TOA “vorydvrsopuowpyg Woy, “SmqopSvp “qorz19 A ,, ‘Idd TIN "WV YW ‘OFST ‘oyuuoguin pue popsey ‘xojTOAQ 7° Ot ‘O.P f eopv10dcar Me rn gtk CSN Se ares ul “STOQUIVYO [BIOTFLOAQNS TIT i ‘ett 8" "Oy p Brpeutregur Song et SNP Sete) hota Pea “ec +. .* * ‘O?P VOVLTIISNV “ oo * ee ee 4 Tn a ‘G 4 ec “OU TOTIVI “ * +e + ‘Oo. xoydturs “ - . oe 8% wh 4 J “ce SOT ‘d “potoquiByo-Moj pus yoryg “VPVPNZOC"Q ss ce ‘O.,P ByVuAOUt % ae 9% ‘co 3“ Zot ‘d ‘stoqmmeyo MOMVU LOY YF PUB ‘oywUOquIN “oyUquUT “BIVIZTNO “Y ** =‘ °E,p sttMIEJtod4To MN Shy et 1S dat -" ton da ‘SyTVUr [BUIPNy -ISUO[ TOS PUB SOTNUBIS YIM poyuoMVUIO “IVAqNG “IBOTVO "DQ ‘O.P + ByeuTTOe hy a hs ee Cotes . o0ted ; ‘SOMSY 8, [TOW . : PUL POITPOTY UL WVYZ [VIOAOA ssoyT som peydos oy, “VOT i oo em Ti Dee Coyicy, Ke So ot | GRE ae ere “ATU quourvuro [VIpIvd YIM § pepeoy pus [voryourmt{g awaqns ‘wyngsoo4g +t tt othe ‘O.P ByeUIO Hy A eles PPG 0) I ‘ ‘JOO pROTG TYTN “ . oe ae ** °O,p sires “ a oe ee GT ‘ET ‘J “ 86 ‘d ‘OPVGUNT PUB OPVTOGUIN ‘foo pVotg YIM “BVPVAGTNO DQ cs te ot CIN 0) Byurgqno “ we fh ee) ceremeer NG tga i of the Society. t0ons O a Transact 500 ‘OVSUITBOGNS ‘[I0d OSA] “VoTTeIT “Q* 6 ° oe “c ee ee ‘oyetoquin “eye[nyor*Q ‘o}BULIvOgnsS ke te te -ejdos 4ys1e148 YT “ 50 80 ‘eyemoquin ATpeo1q ‘sg tee “co ee eo "possordmmooqns ‘ayequnty ge owe @1edypno-‘Q ‘tood ‘(u1y} pue peonpoad zoquieyo yee] WIA) VABNIoI “DQ e[Njenoie “(us “D peold °84V[NJOI VITVT[OISIAIH o[duis oyesuoTy °° °° 66-67 ‘dd “Tt “T8804 V1 V[N}Od VIAV[TOFSIAQ “°° “APOMIVA YOY} ([V4V[NZOA “O [eIomqoA ** °° ‘(oyesuoja ‘CT J) ByeIA[ NO “Heqexg “°° ** “887, SIUTTOJOp ss ‘ssyy vy} e1ednedep s **“g817 'ByduooUL a “* "SEIT B]OET.Jeu “ ‘SEY VULOISOUOS IT, ** “BSY BUTISSIPI}IT is “ “Ss Be} eTOguIN on ** -ssay vydazou1p ot ‘s8Y] OSIBUT\snsue « " ** “B9x7 BIBE[BS BUITNGOY “* “SSI B]eoTRS “ "* “S837 TAO, SNP VITe]T[OISLIC) TO8D “Yospnol “9s}197; oo IUG Spleiny vurnuelg (,euOTUEIIE}daG ce ce oe ee Oo 08 J ee eo oe 6% J «6 6 oe oe ee 86 J “c oL d ee eo ee LG ‘ty (13 ‘ ste ae ok al eo eo ee = : (73 89 ‘d ee ee ee &2 J 66 66 ee eo ee Zo 3 “cc ce oe ce IZ 5 (73 19 ‘d oe oo oo 0Z J (75 99 ‘d ee eo oe 61 3 ‘F 4 ‘68 ‘d TOW SOT, “SSAEY WH “V “IGS ce I ‘6g tz “18 ‘d UOUleTy sep yyoeyy,, ‘(adouzTUVMHOG Aq ‘[suvi}) ONILUVET “TGS SSA] VSNYGO VUTTNGOYy - ** “ssiy BNO} UT s ** “SSt] SI[IQVIIVA VITel[oISLIO SI J 3 44 LI J 6 {4 OT ‘GL ‘9b 3 “69g -d ee ce 06E-Cog “A 1 TOI “PeHY syUo ,,AVI}AOT, “YolortoysoQ “WeINg, “SSATY WY “OGST ‘64 B[NJOI BVILV[TOISTAD 61 JF WAxx ‘[d ‘[eg ‘d ‘uopuoy ‘o}% /XOssng Jo suOT}eMI0,T snosdeJeID pus AreTyJ0, OY} JO s[issog pue Asojooy oY ,, “NOXI(] HOINTaaNA ‘OCST ‘pony tt ‘popooy pu pvorq royyer SCL WW) V[NpIdoedo Viaet[oystqg ‘C1148 [PUIPNY -ISU0] pue oqmin 9411919 ‘ZQ yp0wwys “ “TBA es : ‘oyeulreoqns “e4yeIgyno “Q ' * *94'24800 Ajjeurpnyisuoy pue syequiry = -(O,p) vwuyoo p “eA “ABOTVO “DQ “MIUDjaISI4) SUITNULGIVyL °° = °° TE YQ “AIMyeNy §,toSurprey ge ee ‘Ww eIlOdse 66 SSNOY VIPOULIOZUL VITLT[O}SIID ‘PSC-ILI dd mH “yqy YEN ‘PIeH ee “ZC) 8} S[OTT4S ss "ZO eroyyjays —“* “ ‘OP Byeuryos eurpnqory °ZE) BEPIOQMIOYL BITL][OISIIO, «CUOMO “UST “IO'T “880,75, <0 Wea ies eer ¥ «& 89% ‘d "* $6 FST “4 ‘193 « S1OQUIT “ploty,, “HLTY “WV “OSS 6Z ‘97, ‘5 be (14 Jie, “By See Fea To GZ 5G a i744 (74 SZ-1G F ‘ZT 3 ‘TPL a ‘MHZ(ZQ NNVHO ‘SFST *“panuyjuoo— ATs J, TVOILGONAG 501 By Prof. T. R. Jones & C. D, Sherborn. On the Foraminifera. [20H YVOM TIM “eyerypno s oe ‘84B[N}OI VIIB[TOYSIAQ °° "a1jjazSi7) OUTTNUISIVU peolg {°° “piwnjjajsei) OUTTNUISIVyL °° ‘Joey B Suissossod pue ‘ody 0} 03 ysorvou Suloq zg ‘Sy ‘einpidedio ‘9 prog ‘DUD IISU) OUI[NULSIV], peorgr * “Pesey 5 APYSYS “OG “SI "#Iwypyagsiwp SUI[NULSIVy, peaAmno pus poonporg },. ‘pLunjaIsi) OUTNULSIey, poonpord yony, ** eyB[NnzJoL OH °° Hx “GOLIST "* “MONS UT] SUIS YIM “VY VIZ[NO VIIBI[OISTID ‘ayetoquin “‘eyey~nzor ‘Q °° ‘UOTTOMS “BOTT VII “QO °° ‘possordmio0o “ey V[NJOI VIIVT[OYsSTIDQ °° [lOO YSts.xey TYLA s Ee ‘OquUIN VSI] JIM ‘UMOIS-]][T “epnpridei9 ‘9g °° ‘MOLIGE “BTN pIdoedo VelaBsp[oyslag °° “eydos of} 42 xepnsue Soe NODa ay “IR[NOIGIOGNS puv Foy} ‘VorpVyt “Q jomwaqng °° ‘sey saapbnr ‘oD Woy Suueyip Apetyo ule1ey} pus ‘snopiqun 48 selnuvis Ag} @ YIM ‘Vyepnzor “Q jo ‘eaqns ‘poessordmoo ‘oyesuoTq ** ‘FSI-6F1 ‘dd Joa ee “u10g Soprloyjneu 6 ee ee eo ee q Sp ‘OF ee “ce "* “TOG SIsU9sUT}404) BUNCH Oh ae Os TT) Se A | ‘(tmoT}008) oe oe ee oe 63-5 “ce “ oo “M10 @INTOATOD “c ee oe ee q 7) *8e ‘J 6 “< ee ** ‘TOG BINUTUT “ oe o or q 7) Ee 4 “c GP ‘d oe “M10g eyepnueis ““ ee .* se q 7) ‘9g ai “c “ ae oe “u1Og SIULOJOp “ oe oe ee q 7) ‘cg om 6 it ee ee ‘u10g SUVIIVA 66 ee "*O-0 5g Lele Tae ‘y “ IF ‘d oe ee “mIOg Jofeur “ ee ee oe q 7) Te ‘F 6“ 6 ee ee ‘u10g eurpords 6 ee ee ee 0—0 ‘0g a “ “e oe oe “10g sepronyty “ oe oe oe 0-0 ‘6z oF “ «“ ee ee “u1Og 14SvT oe ee ee "e909 of) 7) ‘9g, oy 66 OF ‘d * << -Tog Bjoeljoid elIeyposuIgD 7 8 ‘ulpleg ‘OAg ee se ee ee **B[NJOI VIIVTOSMQ *" ‘108 “AT (N ‘Sey speuuy ** SOTO ITT[OIOTIO M. “ Sia fie | ale "* souoe veined Aqeyd erreyoystqgg s**t ‘THA “009 "[O84) “UINOL "Weng "* gsi epeydmoyoely eulnqoy °° °°” "SSI BY B[OAGO ce oe ee ee “* -‘ssqy Izjpoyqoedg "* sgsqy ByeqdosT4nuL ‘SSI ByVOUNAy ‘SSY] VISNSUB VIIVIPOISUD TO ‘AT “UQY ‘JON ‘PICH , S10qWOTT “plory ‘ss ByeNSue vulNqoy ** “BSY sdout 16 a oe oe ee ee “cc ee of ee “ ee or ee “ of oe ee ee oe ee o- ee ee xs “SSY «STIULIOFIAINS eIIeTosuyy ** BU ee THT “8ex) ‘TOOH "Yostnocy “Yos}107, = (1s Grace sS 6c eo “IQ eyeyduone BUI[NUL]| | cee ee se oe oe OF f 66 Sey (3 ee ee Pi ic BYB]]O00 () BULMOLWO NT ee ee ee ae o- Le mi Le 4 S ‘pojooy ATpvorq ‘eyery~no D °° °° “IW TuUBMIBOFR (2) CISC IEC iene ee aH ; < 6 ee eo ee “TL 8) BLOULIBUL ; ee ee ee ee ee Ig J 6 = SY VTNIOL 79) ee ee Bivicy eleqduroiorma ‘ ee ee oe ee oe 0c yt 9% 4 8 ‘UMOIS-T]I “BZVAIZTMO “Q “ * + “AGH VyworIquin wuyoUeTG ** OFF TGS 4 S BOUPEE GO) es 2 aU OC OC AEG TILE ln Saath anne eee Sanat AS Bes Mes 0(0) (2) T ee ee ee oe Pitic| enone elyeqOry ee ee oe ee oe I¢ ‘J 66 S . ee ee “TUG eyer;dure () be ee ee ee oe oe 0g a 66 i ee ae “IY, BINJOAUL (2) 3 ee oe ee ee os “ . : ee oe ee ATL eydure (é) (T3 ee ee ee ee ee SF a (13 BPVIFTNO OC .. .. ag BywonTaN (euyauyg ot BY ‘6 ee ee oe Pvc SBXOT BUl[NU oe ve ee ee ee Ch Ft 6c Sop oss Ig” vooyyAine geurnuyg "8 ORR FT ‘Qred ut ‘geet “ry Bpiciny VYVIYLNO ‘O T[VUg wvUINULTG) “AGW Vywssvtour viejo “" *" ** ** ** OFF &s4 ‘BYVIF{TNO ‘CQ oyequny A[su0NG °° %* « “AYG] BJessvaoUl BiABTOISMIQ ** "* " ** 8 CZs CVJVINJOR VIAVT[OISIAH Oywolfo “* ‘* “AYM VUlp[EysIMovM[Ngoy “* "* ** ** ** FZ FU ‘0S 4 » (OTSO[OOSOINIPL » “OUTANTUNGT “4 “HO “FCST 502 *panuyjuoo—fATav J, TVOILAONAG 553 By Prof. T. R. Jones & C. D, Sherborn. On the Foraminifera. ‘poonpoid ‘wor1yByt ‘Oo ot tg erpowryo} VUBTTORSII) * tt tt oT ‘ST 3 ‘L08 “d ‘TLE-LOG “dd “11a “say ‘Joo “Yosynog “Yos}1oz — ,,;HOPSUMOFT “UBIO ,, ‘O}BqU] pus oyeuoquin a “OPVQUIL] PUB ‘oZBMOGTUN ‘ayVUIIvOgns ‘vy BIZ, Nd ‘O "ar ajSL4) OYQUN], OULLNULSIETA, ee oe oe ‘SSI eyeTeqns be ee oe ee oe o- oe oe ‘SSI B[NOIGIO “ oe ee oe or THA ‘TOTM “PUY ‘Syuo ,dpy-38O “plory "wes0,7 ,, ‘BUG[NJOI VILVTTOISIIQ OT ‘uopuoyT ‘oag ‘on ‘sytog ‘ArinqMon Jo AqtuIOLA oy Jo ATOWSIFT [VOTSOTOIy oy} UO oINZoOTT Y , 84BIT[ND ‘O IVOTVd 'O 6 “BOTT SIT "OD ‘BY B[NJOI “OD ‘C[NYBNIIBGNS “OY IVON ‘“HOIY} puv Moreu ‘Vepnpidodi9 -O ‘BY BI4[ND ‘DO "a49TOSqo [10 “AVA BV[NpIdai09 “OH ‘BOTTSIT ‘O ‘ayequl] “AVA VL NPIdoax9 VIIVL[[IO}SIIQ ‘Sunok ‘eyVizp[no ‘O "9g ‘J SB oUTRS ¢ ‘qyemoquin “v4 BV[NyOI “OH ‘00H OSIV] WIA ‘VY VIZ NO ‘OD gByU[NzoL H e[npidoio ‘OM “(ZEST ‘Mousey NOA vynzs001und +p =) oyequIIT ‘vy vI4y[Nd “O ‘quoUIsery ‘nujngsoun)g gVpVAZ[ND | 6B BlNZoL YH ‘eTqooy “VY BVIgtNo ‘O « UOIIPUOO OUI[NUISIVP OY} Io uvlepNUe,g OU} JOY} JV OATIIV P[NOM,, F[NpPe JI YOM ‘oewp/078~9 SunoZK 6“ 6“ oe oe Cy WOPL ep) BYB.I][NO “ oe oe oe oe oe oe o- Cuury) ¢ voyeo eulpnqory oo os oe oe oe "* game TI[OLOTIOM, iT; oe oo oe o* oe oe "q10,.P SLIBNSUVIT} 6c oe oe on - on ae Cuve'q) BLV[NJOI be ee oe oe oe os oe .- "q1Q,p ByOAI sé o oe oe oe oe se sonore wino[dAye1d “c * oe ee on o- oe oe somo pr? BATOSqO “ or oe ee o- oe oe ‘q1O,P BNoIAvU “ o. oe o oe Ag Pe “SST eyeuv,duro0o BIIB[[OJSIIL) pea Ny a fy ‘sSOT “FA “[°]8D S SIMA Ul ‘SANOL "YT, “PSST t+ ae eee ay snqjooo wurnqoyp tt oo oe ae oe “UL svydoq BILBO oe oe ee o* oe oe oo “IH eliBuop (2) BulTAgoy ee oo oe on oe ee YG BYR ULAR o- o o- qT (4) seu0u BI[VIOY oe oe oe ee oe o° o- “TTL 81/83 UOTO VIIV[NUB[ oe Oo oe oe oe ee ee o “ITAL BYOL 66 ee oe oe oe se se) 5s TI SHOLOU BITGTOIsIAG)) Se eee eS oe oe - “IU eatds (2) @UIUOLUO NT oe oe oe ee hee ry ByeorfIquin ewurUeTgG tee ee 8 sraGE wImosgo BIPBIOY tt oe ae oe “I e][OUS} elre[nuel gy ee ee oe ee ee oe oe “TUL Boll due 6“ oe oe oe oe ‘NNVWONYOT “9 "fC “CCST EI 5 “ “At J 6 ose oth “Seu eNO BITeTTOT) ** ** «TT ‘or 3 ‘Ge 4 ‘L9 “d ‘SsOaY “HV ‘“FS8T “ g9 ‘d ¢ 3d ‘tr ‘d ee Lt J OF J 68 J Le $ 9€ J 'SINOC LUTAAY “], ‘FEST oe iT oe It “d “a oe rgd oe “ * eed OL J Tt ‘Ze 4 cE J FE J GE F Ig J LZ $ Th J cg J “ “ “ “cc 0€ 4 62 ‘4 83 "4 ° N 1887. Transactions of the Socvety. 5d4 ‘aod Stine ss "sf +9) eyeTOOOTRT “ Piscine’ hes Gyan ‘qio.p Bquso * Yeh hecte ‘C) BIVASN.dUe s a aa ie g Tyas “ OHIO PMS Lea sO BIBT Mus, | sy 8 | “Hi word Ay eItepMonptON e's ‘e 4 ‘e1e ‘dd ‘(SI[VIOZV[LUN) VITVTNOIpuor gy ‘TL ‘ToUUN ‘log ‘ooy “WY Woy, ,VUISSOTT Ip “}10} OUILT “pP “SSOF WVIOT,, “VESOD “HO “CCST "9 B]N4800 Atremen4 -ISUOT PUB OFUC TIT] ‘poloqwBYO-MoJ “IVA TBOT BO ss SO BUBOMB A: i eae a ss ‘oyequary “BF BLNAOL ‘ ee ‘QO. vovlsny BarNqoy i 20m cer ‘dl GIO, P SUBNSUVIY VUITNULOIB, Gi Gnd ‘SOTJONIVA ‘VL NJIVNOIVGns * SOOM a) (iccho gy natel i Pea A sealed pC US oe. ee. ee ae *C) BSOqO ee ee oe ee oy Ll ti ; cc "T} MOIS IwlNsortdt (73 cé oe oe oe 7@) 240.1} 000 (73 oe oe ee - G y ve IZl ‘d ‘popooy “BOTT BIT BITETTOISTAD “= “ “* ‘OM MEOIMTOA Beye " P31 9 ‘Oar “ad Tt ‘TOURN ‘TOY OOW “I Wey, ,OUVOTPVA ‘P NIG BULLY “Pp “‘SSOT WRIOT,, “VISCO 4) “O “GEST ‘poonpord pues o}vULTwoTues “ Te Goes acs “gq essamdutoo i Ue a Se FRE ORR nee | «REG 73 oe ee ee “g (¢) BId0}UL 73 oe oe . 9I-FL J «é ys (73 o- ee oe oe T BIGOJUL ée on oe oe SI ‘a1 aT “ Fae ‘d “(npojnjou Jey ‘70.4)N0 J[BY) OyeULLeoTUTES ie sinh > Gate) RECESS STAT[O9p ts Sal SA eee Pa I LJ 88 ‘d ‘OyBULIVOgNS “VYBlAIf_No MH ‘SY VULO}SOUOSIT} ee ay aa OTS OFT EBOTTByL 70) ee ee or oe oe ee ‘dg bc oe oe on oe Si cc ee “ Aes ae, ; ‘7 (2) BBG WUT] 13 oe ae oe oe L 7 “c 9g¢e “‘d BY VIg[no 7@) oe oe oe ee 7 BYVq UII] 6eé oe oe - oe 9-F "I : 6c ‘eyepnyor"g “* " ** “qiO,p ByBULOUT S BREE RRC Gr TE eG COn a 66 oe oe oe a ‘g ByVIpRt Ts . oe ee oe Dy ‘CT "4 ‘Fee ‘d ‘eyeigynog * ¢ssy Byduoour sf es SI Bee ae Te pe oy eg -d VIVTNJOL Q ‘ssyy vyetodnedop as “eA wate ei Teint Suareerd 66 aie ve oe oe ‘g Typomtsog cb . oe ee 01-8 aT “cc ‘“c ‘o} VqUIIT puw posserdut09 as ‘ts gga OSIBUNIYSNSUB ef OG ees © Nisleh Season) SG iets, a RCGe td. : * as Die ae gee 'T STABU it ee ee ee oe CF ‘J “ce gee ‘d pozSo118 | Ste 700. 08 ‘SOY SIUMOJap BUTNgoy “ “°° S-Ly FL 4 ‘Leg ‘d ‘OYVULIBOGNS ey ety[no 7@) oe oe oe ee re BS1OKO ee ee ee oe 02 ‘6L J : 4 “poysoite OS Sei gre ee ‘q vorydiyyo : ae tia” +22 81 7 gze -d ‘peonpoad puv poysotiy “vyvpnyor ‘Q ** ‘* ** “@ SUESIOAMOD VIIVT[OISM ~" ” LT ‘OT ¥SL 4 “Leg “d SSS SS AD NEE, RMD a, SoS tah? nae F “panuijuod—a Ta J, TVOILZONAG By Prof. T. R. Jones & C. D. Sherborn. 555 On the Foraminifera. "4X0} OY} Ul 7707000 “DY SB POqLIosep SIT “SLT ‘swmwogyyD “* %84SO(), SIUIOOTG, oe ~ + oe pues, ymax ‘yd ‘Zer “d ‘BOTTRIT'Q OTT HBA BSOQQTS VIIV]TOISII, “* $Z J ‘tax ‘Td “ter “d ‘Byernjor‘g ‘* '* B480O Bso[NsuRqns euIINqoy ** "BS : = “pynynjos *Q OUTTNUISIVU OywoUOTY ** “* ** BPSOD esoqqis “ 22 se ei “atx “Td “TOL ‘d [-soquTd 8.23809 Ul sty} 0} Surpuodsati0d omsy ou 8] oun) °° °°“ “qIO.P Byenjor eineypoysta) "LT Sh GE ‘CUUTT) Ieojvo BUTTNgoy °° CC CUB FX ‘1d ‘cet “d ‘QC8T ‘G “OSty “ITA “[OA ,SvUBTUR]TOg "pBooV [PP HIV» “YLSeD D "O ‘9ST 20:2 ‘Q]VUNIT SSA IO 9IOUU ‘XO4IOA “— JO Ayourwa possordog, *’ “JM WOA SIsuosnaqvuscC 01 ig WIDE ic cr ‘bp 3 > 4 ‘eee ‘OY U] PUB OPBOTTIGUN “BVT NOI “ ** LOPSUNJ WOA vyBjsooqns ” wu UE GOs aie ress Sire te “ ; ae fk jz ad Covedt hPa TWEE - i SST euvoqolspuey “ Age ACE CMRI. lg ae “ 8jyeVpnyzor ‘Og Sunod Jo ‘ passaiduroo ioyywt “ZO ELSE WO ie ee | ‘sexy vytjod fy. A ae Shae ee era ‘oyequiy ‘e[nprderio ‘Q " ** ** ssy BUByONVN ct ae Re We ieee ee teed “ “US][OAS “19d VOrpeyt 70) o oe ee “S8q] SILGBaALUL “ oo - on . 6g aii “cc 98% ‘d IVA oq stine [q *“" ~~ CJM OA) vpnotine "6 CO em Ts oY cH hee “ ‘TlOo OSIV] YIM ‘opequaly “eT Upt dois ‘g ‘* ‘* ‘* ssnoqy Bynsie s ees a ee gar (2 ‘d “oq UITT : ‘BINJENOIVANS “OQ (ssef do oLOM ‘sotoLVA “BT NPT doxo ‘9 (uoysrey pue [IY q) vyenore u mr 98-FE ‘J ‘Eg 3 ‘egz “4 PLUM OS) PUINULSIV]A, 10 anpideo “9 momen ‘ge ‘ze ‘Te ‘Sang °° Cddyryg) snipers erp gs “BS FG 3 TS FG 4 ‘eee “d TTIAX “UOT AL “PETY “LOGSSUNzg ,SpULTTs}nog "[IU “ND ‘TpIQU “ostIWOT » ‘ssaTY “A “V “CEST ‘oy equally bp 4 el 4 I no 70) oe oe "S877 eueyl[odoresour “ oe or oe oe G ‘J “cc “ ‘(syreul 13 74 oe ee ee SS] ByCUsIS vuln qoy * o* oe oe + ay “ CLG ‘d “oy eq UaTT ‘e181 [NO 76) oe ee SSI] enuruoid ““ ae ee ve oe g = Ye 4 ‘TLZ ‘ad ‘souof TITTOTOT FIOM r BUI[NULSIV Avau ‘aequIt|-pvoq 200))2}81./D eulNusieyy ** *t* “BSY BPVIOOOP VIMBTPIISM "GT ‘136 ‘3 ‘9L 3 ‘8 3 ‘693 4 ‘Z6Z-19% ‘dd 1a “80H “9H “C “YosHOZ , SINQueppoey “Plo » “ssaTy “W “V “SEsT WIA passoudur oqiun) ejvnoqun pue ‘#]NJSOO JNOTIIA J ee Op Ue 0 “ “ eee ee OM nm anil ease “pourioyjem ‘ayvpnorde puv Moideo se se OG ghe ‘CQ wydn1104 Ut ce meee NY) abe AGI yf oi ‘Teotd Ay yng ‘UMOTS [JOM YOu “ «“ ‘2 cee ee ‘2D Byeao he ey ne ea Teotday yng TI?“ 4+ ‘+9 wqurnSueqns “ we Se base eee op len, oa ‘oyeynorde puv Mov ‘STIN’ VIIV[NUs{q “" “" ‘NY B[NOSNL.s UOT uw bee kin Ce red Gla ‘d : "e2]N4so0 pus aspa [eijUOA 4ySierjs WII “rwaqns ce ss ts ee 8 Ky BMOTTIS c sas eee 5 ‘Op BYVIZSOI S tee ‘D BpBoTRFqus a ie th ase, pee SLIPS te z “IBAQqNS MOLLE gs 4 ad ie <5 19) SI[TUIIS “ oe oo oe oe 9I ‘i Transactions of the Society. 506 ‘Dunmnung pamiojog 4** ** “biay, vyetnorm0s s 1S, Re SS One ie oroad “‘puynurbuoyr Vv ee oe ee “bx977, asoroeds “6 oe we oe oe Z 7 « $29 ‘d “DUMO)NUD) T Vv ee ee ee *bi97, BY CULO “cc oe ee ee ee I J *AT ‘1d Ge ‘eyB[nJoI'9Q * oe ee "qiO,P Borysna 66 ee oe ee Tk 13 £29 ‘d ‘pojooy Apqied ‘vpn prdodo ‘pO uvuaenurg yw ** = ** «6 ‘qig,p tmonbieg, aes gh gC aC | ye as ‘poonpoid yonm ‘B4B[N4Or *H ouT[NUIcIVy, ~*~ ** ** “qIO,p BIsNyoA a aaa am aimee) J Si ae gt me we Loy 818 ly[no 70) ULL, ee ee a GIO, reuntid 66 ve ee ee oe OL ‘J “cc 129 ‘d ¥ é ‘ ae ee ‘ar i ) eyenbryue 73 ee oe .. oe I ‘ty « 029 ‘d : poonpord qonm ‘7870302 (9 omrTMO rE ye Ue vo Rpm ad gig ‘XIXXX ‘9 “ZJoT ‘duly ‘oy “Woy ‘oljteg o1gIMOIG—,, SVL] “WRIOT “Wey, “‘WaodYAT, “O ‘SSST ‘XOJIOA ‘O WeOU wma «8—** «= "TT “‘P “A SOPIOUITTOQVE viavyjoysum- s**t % J 1 1d ‘ged "AX “[ULONY ‘SSNOlG “OA “YN WIOA ,\WLUVET UIOA SOSOTY-[VIANTICG ,, “HOUVI, “P “A “M ‘SCSI “eyVIg[ no ‘O = peyooy “omvsoyy, “9Il .. .. .. . Go) Joa!) co 6 ‘ ‘ "C1 8[NJOL “CF poloquivyo-osiey] “CT eu G1O DAU EUTOUT erie 9T-F1 F ‘e1B[ NOI ‘CO oFVOT[Iquin ‘UoT[OMS ‘porequivyo-Moy °* ‘* . dJosoq vssorduroo vulnqoy °° °° * er ‘aI ‘J Ax ‘yd ‘ L6G ‘d ‘ejnpridoeto gyorg, ** ‘qiQ.p xe;duns a; pe Ce aoul a “DLwO/IISw) OUI[NULGIV, pexsquieyo-se1y4 yeoipurpAg, ** °° Joss B\IOOUL VITKTTOISIIQ «6 ** «=O * Ss ** «GE-TE J AIX ‘Jd ‘967 ‘d ‘BOTTV4T VITBVT[OISTIQ suoy “ * ‘qIO.P Byenore vIIeToys) ** —** ** OS-8B J “ATE ‘Td ‘96g ‘d “LEST “Wonqiqer sonenNy ,,SINQUe}IO “UROOTT “WeIOT,, “TIPO OH LC “LEST ‘muuoyarsidg OUTTNUISIBYA, ** ** ‘* ‘Snon vulsva vuynursiep “°° ** ** ZT yA ‘ld ‘got d TIX “UOTM “SSIM “SV “YH Agosyuoq ,,Asndvy-1oqQ uoA Aotso}soyONG ,, “NGYOSTOATN “T “( “9CST ‘CIN B ‘A vinprdawo +p Jo ‘zea-qns “qig,p vssaudwoo +p °°" °° 4809) essord 00 BLBT[ONST() SF 00 99 eh NUR O< S60) Se *panuyjuoo— KAY J, IVOILEONAG (-Aytange pue onjea ogtoeds [nyqnop Jo munyajsmp uInY W]e “* °°" °* ‘wysoQ Bnsiquie He Gee Be eT a == ‘nynnjos “) Iensueuy “*" “* °° 4802) BYBqOT ss Cera men Smee DCN 3h f Old Gay (nee “IVA paqqit ‘eye, nyo Yong oo eo 1809 VyYBII}SIUMOS (13 ee oe ee 59) “c =e ‘@}V[ NOL ee oe oo oe "qIQ,P ByeuroUt (13 oe ee ee SP 0) és 63S ‘d ‘eyerqyno'g * oe B80) Bye]]ONUO ‘c ee oe oe Do (ey tr “ 0&z ‘d ‘IVA POQGII “BOTL BIL “‘Q °° °° wISOD BUNISSI}UBseTO oe eh cha Neeiet Slee SRE RS is gé6r ‘ad SYSIg~Moa "°° e4s0() sijenbeut vurnqoy ** * * "ey sf 6ze ‘d ‘eYVIy[ Nd Q ** ** ** B_IsoD VUSVU BIIBOISMIQ * * « “Zy “ eerd "84800 "IVA BYVIF[ND “CQ wVyeUO\soy “AVA sStuMAojIOdATO wvuljnqoy “* * % “* Ty 'xTx ‘jd ‘ 961 ‘d *(sno1jstiom) 8 te et 28) AQT ‘IVA IVOTVO “GQ ** °° «eysop vuldsioned wireppoystIg s**t 8G CF AX “Td ‘ET ‘d 557 By Prof. T. BR. Jones & C. D. Sherborn. On the Foraminifera. LL “DLINIIISY) GUI[NULSIVU UITJOMG “* °* ** gsney vydour 2 oe ee es ey ee BOTS ‘S}VI}J[NO ‘HO pus Vl NOI “O ojvUOquIN UeDAYoq AjoIIBA °° °° «°° ~~ ssnay vynov ss Ur ay nek Ge ee SOL ee OTIC “Ol ‘e[npidero ‘QJOsooueA ie oo ssnoiy ediey “ ee on ee <7 Abt np Se 1d ‘l1zZ ‘d ‘B4B[NyoI 76) oe Ar ee ssneiy suvo—es 6c ee ee eo oe L rr “se FZ ‘d ‘nianjjajsi4) OUTMULOeA SPI, ** °° ssnoy TAoueseyT i ee Ss ee ers, alee “DIDj)IISW) GUI[NULSIV [VopulpAoqng ** °° ssnoy evimoe[di1y4 ce Sine cee Les eae | se ite. & “pinjjagsig) 8YVUOGUIN PUB OUT|NULSIV, possoadmog ** °° ** ssnoy LyOIV PA sf 2 ee ee eeu cie Od ‘S4B[NJOI “OD poyepUr potoquivyo-May “* °* ssno yy VIde4SOsT[O ES TS tee en es cael O ¢1z-d "BY BIZ [NO ‘CE OPBOTTIquIA, as ‘a ssnoyy era} dor01Ut 7] ag nk ee an zt ‘“ CIZ ‘d “Dunas SUIPNUISIV] UTTOMG ** ** ** ssney VyVpUr eeypeysg ** oo gy ma yd ‘Zz -d ‘TX ‘UOTM ‘SIM “TV “A ZIG ,Oploly uoypostpeydysoy “wrei0g,, “ssaqy “A “WV ‘O98 4 : ee ee ae UBT Bye[NJOL “cc om ee ee GF ‘OF 7 oe “ee BPVIZTNSI ‘s + TE py sisseo vuUpsHQ ot IRE gop d ‘S[N}ZVNIIVGNS “OY HOY} BV SUIOJ ouITNUISIV_Y W “°°! ** “WeOYy TuUOIg i Ae Sha) (5 oS tieete ‘@[npidoedo ‘O jzeMp pus Holy VW *° °° “gH fe vyerodned wiaenueg * * * “egy “ ¥Fep-d JonUIoD VYV[NIIyoI VIdV[NUs,Tg “* "* " ‘yey 'xx ‘qd ‘ec -d TAX “009 [09H “CFO ,, WelOT UOJSET[OYO ,, “ATHUVT “YA PUG SHNOL LAAAAY “], ‘09ST ‘SL VIJ[NO ‘O polsey-H01q} pue peqqu-yoyy, “* °° “Wog volsmaqopsey ss tm te ges ET oe eC ‘BYVIP[NO “Y popseyx-YoyyT, °" "* WAOPEYOIy Wourwmny vuyngoy * ** +s Ty A Td ‘gc Td ‘TTX “Sa4) ‘TOON “Yosynoq “Yos}lez ,-oIngepseyj{ “1VIyIoOy, ‘WeIOT,, “NNVWANYOT “ ‘f “O9ST “‘BYB[NZOI BIIBTTOysTAQ “og FE Td ‘oT “d ‘mopuoyy ‘oAg ‘OOSSH *[09H) ,,PUBLSUG JO Y[LYO poy 04} UO,, “ANIHSLIIA, SVNOH], ‘GCST ‘O.P vpvhraw) mwwpyagsi4y) poyesuolyy “AA vyesuoya . Spee tos Set)! SOS Mer ORT RS LOE ‘BOIL VIL “O poyesuoye Ajomoryxy “yy vydeos “ sé ay oy eo STO NOOR. Ge [oisseimp] “rea ‘iamoy vduny ‘boy ‘19 ‘SI “Yooy wayung nuynuios “99-$9 “SSL “('T) snunydvs vuynmbuwy ‘gg “SIT “AA BYBIS00 “IVA 3 . PS eo aes 19-§9 3 “ ‘Ig ‘e[Nprdaro Vrrel[oystIY ‘EC ‘BG ‘ssl “g [opoy “O.P vuqnjh vuynubunyg ‘LE “SI “O.P vunygojyzveg ‘9 ‘9g “St ** Ce *M) BNyenoreqns < ee BR SO Cea 6G ‘B[N4SOO SUIYOUBIQ ITM ‘munjnunjg peyedy pue yoy, “* “A BVsuojqo “ ck ft Pt ee EA «ae COT ame S ‘oyequat ATjenbe pue ApTsuoiys (2) 4e,q *° AA BLOFOI“wA se a ee Re er Cn Tm. ior ‘ByOIg[NO Qo ss (rp) aeopeo wpreyoys "Tt gg ‘eG. 3's a ‘eg d , WBIOT “JIG JU0007] ,, “NOSWVITTIM ‘O "M ‘SC8T "84 qn 401 7@) oe ee oe ‘brag, SISMO}OUL euTINgoy oe oe oe ae ON y “c 129 ‘d “‘piupnung paulojagg ** = ** ‘qIO.p Bulyn} eur ad se See Ee ak Se eg “d ey elTnyod 79) e}eoT[Iquin ULL, oe ce oe ‘bia y, *@SIOUL «cc o- on oo oe $ J “ “ce 558 Transactions of the Society. XI.—On new species of Scyphidia and Dinophysis. By J. G. Grenretz, F.G.S. (Read 8th June, 1887.) Puate XI. Last September I came across an exceedingly interesting new species of Scyphidia living parasitically on the tails of some sticklebacks in Dorset- shire. From its habit I propose to call it Scyphidia amebea. I have not yet found it on the sticklebacks near Bristol. The points of special interest are two: first, the mode of attachment, and secondly the process of reproduction, which has hitherto been unknown in any species of this genus. Sometimes the animal is simply attached by the posterior end of the body in the ordinary way, without there being anything to draw special attention to this part; as in plate XI. fig. 1, 2; or again the base may be widened out, as in fig. 4. But in the great majority of cases, the animal is attached by means of pseudopodia, as in figs. 5-10. These may take the form of a single lobe or of two simple lobes, and so on up to several large highly complicated processes. I found it hard to draw these accurately from the living animal, because the stickleback’s tail interfered with the light; but by killing with salicylic acid and staining I obtained a number of good specimens free. On the living animal I sometimes found that the lobes of the pseudopodia ended in threads, but these are not visible in preserved specimens. I do not know of a parallel case among the Peritricha; but among the Holotricha Stentor Roeselii sometimes has pseudopodic projections round the base, according to Simroth, but much smaller and less com- plicated ones than in the present case. The integument of this species is highly elastic, as in the rest of the genus, and the animal consequently assumes a variety of forms, as may be seen in the figures. On the whole, however, the body is conical, in- creasing in width from the base upwards. The surface of the integument sometimes seemed highly granular in living specimens. The body is generally divided into two distinct portions ; the upper half is very coarsely granular; it contains the contractile vesicle in its upper portion ; the lower half of the body is nearly always very much clearer; in its upper part lies the very large granular nucleus which is always a very conspicuous object, is broadly egg-shaped, or sub-triangular, and occasionally I have seen this divided into two parts. The peristome is well developed. 7 I met with one live specimen in the act of dividing by transverse fission. ‘This is shown in fig. 14. A well-marked constriction had been formed, and the new ciliary wreath was in active motion all round. I did not trace the process further than this, but I think there can be no EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. Fig. 1-6.—Scyphidia amebea from the living animal. », 7-10, from preserved specimens. », 11.—Scyphidia amebexa dividing ; from the living animal. 5,5 12,—Dinophysis semicarinata. On new species of Scyphidia & Dinophysis. By J.G. Grenfell. 559 doubt as to what was going on. ‘This is the first record of the mode of reproduction in the genus. I was not aware that any theoretical importance attached to this observation till on my return home, I obtained Prof. Biitschli’s very in- genious and interesting paper on the relationship of the Vorticellina to the other Ciliata. In this paper Prof. Biitschli limits the Vorticellina to Stein’s three families of Vorticellina, Ophrydina, and Urceolarina. He points out that in the Vorticellina the adoral wreath of cilia forms a right-handed spiral, while in Stentor and other Ciliata the spiral is left- handed. He also recalls the fact that in the Vorticellina division is longitudinal instead of transverse, and shows how both these peculiarities can be explained by supposing the Vorticellina to be derived from some such form as [xchnophora. By a change in the orientation of the Vorticellid body the adoral wreath becomes the dorsal surface, the point of attachment to the stalk is the ventral surface, and their division is once more transverse. But Saville Kent has shown that Ophrydiwm Hichornii frequently divides by longitudinal fission, and here is Scyphidia, a genus placed very close to Vorticella, also dividing transversely. If this proves to be the normal method of division in the genus, and if Prof. Biitschli’s theory is to stand, it would seem that Seyphidia must be relegated elsewhere, to near Spirochona probably. I do not think this a satisfactory solution of the difficulty. But what is to be done with Ophrydium? This genus divides both ways, which if hereditary would imply a longitudinal division, as well as a transverse one, in its ancestors among the Ciliata of the Lienophora type. Is not that impossible? or is the direction of fission determined in some cases by the shape of the animal? As the other Ciliata are in the habit of dividing longitudinally after conjugation, and have the power of reproducing any part of their body, is it impossible to suppose that the same cause which originally made the elongated Ciliata divide transversely may also act in making the elongated Vorticellina divide transversely to their length? If this were possible, Ophrydiwm would be a connecting link between Scyphidia and the Vorticellina in respect to reproduction. The length of this species is about 0°00275 in. for a good sized specimen, and the width about half the length. This or a closely allied species is also found on the loach. From a surface gathering in Port Royal Harbour, Jamaica, I obtained the species of Dinophysis shown in fig. 15. It was common and the only species present. Of the species figured in Stein’s great work it most resembles D. Homunculus ; but the position of the pro- jecting foot, which instead of being on the axis of the body lies ina line with the ventral edge of the rest of the body, together with the keel-like ridge on the back, distinguish it at once from Stein’s species. Saville Kent has described, but not figured, a species, D. caudata, which in some respects is very like this one. The chief points of difference are as follows :— 1. In D. caudata the body is said to be “inflated,” and is compared in shape with the body of D. norvegica and D. acuminata, which are distinctly rounded in outline. The new species is not rounded at all. 560 Transactions of the Society. 2. D. caudata is described as having a smooth ridge or keel running ~ along the dorsal surface of the broad part of the body, apparently along its whole length. The new species has this ridge confined to the distal half of the broad part. 3. No reference is made to the small knobs at the end of the foot, one or more of which are always present in the new species.. In various other points the language is hardly that which would naturally be used in describing the Port Royal species, but the above are, I think, sufficient. Description of the new species. The body expands posteriorly, and terminates in a large foot-like prominence, the ventral edge of which is in a line with the ventral edge of the rest of the body. This terminates in one, two, or three, small knobs, or prominences. A smooth keel-like ridge runs along the posterior half of the dorsal edge of the wide part of the body. The funnel at the head is very large, larger, I think, than in any other species. It is very nearly equal to the whole width of the body. Its surface is wrinkled, not finely striated as in Saville Kent’s species. The collar, round the neck, posterior to this, is very delicate and difficult to see; but its dorsal extremity is strengthened by a thick and long projection of the cuirass. This projection is also characteristic of the species. The ventral plates are three or four in number, the fourth one being a small posterior one, as figured. The first of these seems to be attached to the right valve of the cuirass, and the second to the left valve. This latter plate is frequently more or less veined with a network of approximately circular meshes. The cuirass is extremely thick and is pierced with many holes, which at the level of the surface are large, and form a complete network ; at a lower level they terminate almost in a point. From its half keel I propose to call it D. semicarinata. Length 0:0036 in.; breadth of body 0:°0016 in.; breadth, including ventral plates, 0°0022 in. . ( 561 ) SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOO GY AN DO BOT A NY (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, &c., INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND OTHERS.* ZOOLOGY. A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology.t Continuity of Germinal Protoplasm.{t—Dr. W. Richter discusses the various factors in organic evolution with special reference to Weismann’s conclusions. The greater portion of his paper covers very familiar ground, but the degree of misunderstanding between Virchow and Weismann is lucidly and carefully explained. In the latter part of his paper the author takes as a special case the variations which he has observed in the con- nective tissue of human subjects. A list of these is given. The same variations occur independently of local inheritance, in mechanical response to functional demands. The local modification cannot be said to be directly inherited, but is the result of an associated quality of connective tissue ex- pressing itself through a definite lawof growth. The relation of Weis- mann’s conclusions to psychology is finally discussed. Their essential consistency with the main propositions of the natural selection theory is maintained throughout. Development of the Carnivora.s—Dr. A. Fleischmann has carried out some interesting investigations upon the development of the Carnivora, on which he reports as follows :— Material was hard to obtain, in spite of the fact that cats and dogs are to be found as pets in every family. From one hundred to one hundred and fifty cats were examined weekly during the rutting periods in February and June. Later it was found possible to obtain materials from animals kept in confinement. Besides this, useful material was obtained through sportsmen from foxes and wild cats. A series of stages of the domestic cat was obtained by the successive extirpation of the horns of the uterus. The preservative fluid was picro- sulphuric acid, to which one-tenth per cent. of chromic acid had been added. * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “ we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, ey also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied subjects. ~ Biol. Centralbl., vi. (1887) pp. 40-50, 67-80, 97-108. § Ibid., vii. (1887) pp. 9-12. Cf. Amer. Natural., xxi. (1887) pp. 394-6. 562 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The author has not yet been abie, in spite of great care and patience, to find the ova of the cat and dog in process of segmentation in the oviducts. The youngest ovum which he found was a somewhat oval blastosphere, upon which the germinal area was already very distinct. This was in- vested by a very distinct Rauber’s layer of cells. The youngest blastosphere of the cat is nearly spherical, and twelve days after the first copulation still presents the form of an oblong sphere. Through rapid growth at the poles, it soon, however, becomes citron- shaped ; the germinal area then forms a convex elevation on the middle third of the blastosphere. While the blastosphere of the dog retains the two-pointed, citron- shaped form, that of the cat retains that form for only a very short time, and becomes barrel-shaped, in that the points of the blastosphere are pressed inward by mutual pressure in the successive sections of the uterine cornua, so that the ends of the growing blastospheres are only feebly conical. The flattened extremities of the blastosphere are not undergrown by mesoderm, and therefore no vessels are developed in that portion of them. At the outer margins of the flattened ends of the barrel-shaped ovum, there is a delicate reticulum formed of elevations of the ectoderm, which has apparently arisen by pressure of the ends of the hollow ovum upon the folds of the uterine mucous membrane. Around the entire germinal area and at the opposite side of the blastosphere, on the twelfth day, there are already formed small projections and elevations of the ectoderm, which serve to attach the ovum to its nidus. Before the allantois has reached any considerable dimensions, the subzonal membrane has thrust out villi in all directions, and into these grows the connective tissue supporting the outer vascular layer of the allantoic Sac. The primitive groove is formed in the germinal area at right angles to the long axis of the blastosphere; the same direction is assumed by the medullary groove. At about the sixteenth day the entire germinal area changes the direction of its axis to one parallel with that of the axis of the ovum, a condition which the embryo maintains until birth. In the primitive streak the mesoderm is formed exclusively from the outer walls of the primitive groove; in many sections one sees the mesoderm proliferating outward from the sides of the primitive streak between the two primary embryonic layers, and numerous cleavage figures indicate rapid growth in this region. The entoderm is always distinctly marked off from the mesoderm, and the author could not obtain clear proof of the entoblastic origin of the mesoderm. Even at the anterior end of the medullary groove the mesoderm is always sharply marked off from the other layers ; a heaping up of the mesoderm on the entoderm as described by E. van Beneden is not apparent. The mesoderm is characterized in well-preserved germinal areas, from eleven to thirteen days old, as a solid mass of cells, which is composed of several layers of cells under the germinal area, but consisting, outside of the latter, of but a single layer of cells. The cclom first appears as clefts in the mesoblast outside of the germinal area, and is pushed in under the latter at a later period. A chordal canal is always developed, and opens at a number of points into the cavity of the umbilical vesicle or yelk-sac; an opening of this canal into the anterior end of the primitive streak was not discovered. Only in an advanced embryo, with ten somites, could a slight ectodermal depression be discovered at the anterior end of the primitive streak, but this was closed below by a mass of cells. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 563 In front of the medullary groove lies a completely closed mass of mesoblast ; the interamniotic pore, described by E. van Beneden and Julin, was not observed in young germinal areas. The anterior amniotic fold in the cat, dog, fox, and mole is not covered by mesoderm, but consists wholly of ectoderm and entoderm. It follows from this that there is found a proamnion not only in Rodents, Bats, and Marsupials, but also in Carnivora and Insectivora, from which it may be concluded that it is a structure common to the Mammalia. The significance attached to it by Van Beneden the author cannot share. The Wolffian duct does not arise as a solid cord of cells, but, as the author observed in the duck, as a diverticulum of the ccelom; that the ectoderm takes part in the formation of the Wolffian duct was not estab- lished. As respects the formation of the maternal placenta, the author fully confirms the statements of Bischoff, that the villi of the chorion grow into the uterine glands, destroying the latter. Embryology of Monotremata and Marsupialia.*—Mr. W. H. Caldwell has published an abstract of the first part of his paper on the development of Monotremata and Marsupialia. In very young ova of the former there is a fine membrane between the single row of follicular cells and the substance of the ovum; this vitelline membrane at first increases in thickness with the growth of the ovum, and numerous fine protoplasmic processes pass through it and connect the protoplasm of the follicular cells with that of the ovum ; these serve for a time to conduct food granules. This “ yolk- forming period” is succeeded by an “absorption of fluid period,” during which the ovum absorbs large quantities of fluid, and increases in size; the third period is that of the formation of the chorion. Al] these periods are gone through while the egg is still in the follicle. In the passage of the egg along the Fallopian tube the vitelline membrane again increases in thickness, and the chorion absorbs fluid and becomes the albumen layer ; outside this now appears the shell or shell-membrane, which is tough and parchment-like, without calcic salts in Echidna, but apparently with them in Ornithorhynchus. The deposition of the shell has not yet been observed to be due to the activity of any special glands, but the author says the shell-membrane does not increase at the expense of the chorion or albumen layer. In Marsupials the yolk-forming period is not marked off from the absorption of fluid period; in an ovum of Phascolarctos there was a thin transparent shell-membrane. The ova are telolecithal, and go through a partial segmentation ; though the ova of Placentalia segment completely, the resulting blastodermic vesicle is identical with that of Monotremes and Marsupials. A primitive streak region is formed, in Monotremes, in front of the posterior lip to the blastopore, and long before the epiblast has enclosed the yolk. In Marsupials the epiblastic growth encloses the hypoblast at a very early stage, except over a narrow slit in front of the posterior lip of the blastopore ; the primitive streak is not conspicuous at an early age, because of the large size of the cells. Balfour’s objection to the comparison of the blastopore of the rabbit with that of the frog is explained by the presence ofa posterior lip to the blastopore in Marsupials; the author postulates the existence of a similar structure in the rabbit, and regards its blastopore as corresponding to the whole area marked out by the growing epiblast and the posterior lip of the blastopore before the closing of the primitive streak region. * Proc. Roy. Soc. Lend., xlii. (1887) pp. 177-80. 564 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Wall of Yolk-sac, and Parablast of the Lizard.*—Dr. H. Strahl finds that the yolk sac of reptiles presents many resemblances to that of birds; the yolk-sac is at no period a vesicle equally thick in all its parts and com- posed of two simple layers ; the mode of growth of the endoblast appears to be peculiar, for it does not widen out as a special epithelial membrane, but its cells are found around the yolk. In agreement with Kupffer, the term parablastic is applied to the cells which lie beneath the endoblast, after the development of the three germinal layers ; their parablastic cells may be seen even during the cleavage period, when they are formed by a tranverse division of the germ; and the defined masses of yolk-spheres may be seen in all further stages ; they lie partly be- tween the cords of vessels or endoblast-cells, which form the lower thick wall of the yolk-sac, and partly at its free edge ; it has not yet been definitely shown that they contain cell-nuclei. In the later stages of development free cells may be distinctly seen within the yolk-sac; these are sometimes very numerous; the cells are small, and have a distinct nucleus; they are irregularly scattered in the yolk-sac, and look as though they were lymphoid cells. It is possible that some of the parablast-cells take a part in the formation of the endoblast, but this point cannot be yet definitely settled; there is no reason to suppose that the cells arise or multiply by free-cell formation. The author discusses in detail the supposition of Kollmann that the germinal ridge (marginal ridge, Kollmann) is the seat of origin of the blood ; and he comes to the conclusion that there is no reason for accepting this hypothesis, or that a zone separated off from the mesoblast gives rise to the blood-vessels. What Kélliker has shown to be true of Birds and Mammals seems to hold also for Reptiles. Maturation and Fertilization of Amphibian Ova.t—Dr. O. Schultze has been led by his studies on the ova of Amphibians to some general results; he finds, as do those who have investigated the ova of other classes of animals, that the germinal vesicle shares the fate of all the parts that do not form the directive corpuscles, and passes into the substance of the egg-cell; greater weight must henceforward be laid on the fact that there is a complete intermixture of the female nuclear substance and the cell substance before fertilization. The nuclear substance which is collected around the germinal vesicle as it commences its retrograde metamorphosis is sharply separated, in some cases even by a temporary membranous layer, from admixture with the substances of the egg. After a time this separa- tion ceases, and the two parts soon unite. A part of the chromatic substance passes to the surface of the egg, and then by a double mitotic division gives rise to polar bodies; in the unripe egg of the Amphibia the germinal vesicle occupies a central position so long as its fluid substances are equally grouped in the direction of all the rays; yolk-gemmules, which are quite distinct, soon collect, and increase in size; the egg then becomes telo- lecithal. Objection is taken to van Beneden’s epithet of “ pseudo” as applied to the karyokinesis which obtains in the egg of Ascaris megalocephala ; and the author concludes with enumerating the proved cases of the presence of polar globules in vertebrates. Structure of Ovum of Dipnoi.{—Mr. F. E. Beddard has a further con- tribution to our knowledge of the structure of the ovum in Protopterus, and some notes on the ovary of Ceratodus; in the latter form the multicellular * Zeitechr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 282-307 (1 pl.). + Ibid., pp. 177-226 (3 pls.). t Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1886 (1887) pp. 505-26 (38 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 565 or plasmodial ova, which are sufficiently common in the former, are much more rare than the ordinary unicellular ova. Mr. Beddard points out that the fact of there being two kinds of ova with a different mode of development is not new to the Vertebrata, as the “egg-nests” of Elasmo- branchs suffice to show; and these egg-nests are common among Vertebrates. In all these, however, both kinds of eggs have morphologically the value of a single cell. The important facts to be borne in mind in comparing the egg-nests of Elasmobranchs with the ova of Dipnoi appear to be the early formation of the complicated follicular layers in the latter and the early commencement of yolk-secretion; the temporary fusion of the primitive ova in the Elasmobranchii, and the degeneration of some of them becomes permanent in the Dipnoi, the ovum being the equivalent of a whole nest. The apparent absence of any protoplasm in the yolk-mass of these remark- able structures in the Dipnoi renders it extremely unlikely that the structure developes into an embryo. The formation of ova as described by Prof. Huxley in Lacinularia appears to be clearly analogous to the fusion of a number of germinal cells in Protopterus and Ceratodus. Vesicle of Balbiani.*—M. L. F. Henneguy has been studying sections of ovaries of young guinea-pigs and rats, fixed immediately after death by Flemming’s mixture of chromic, acetic, and osmic acids ; in the young ovules he always found a slightly refractive body with well-marked contours, placed near the germinal vesicle. This—the vesicle of Balbiani—is found in young primordial ova, but is not found in such as are more advanced; its colora- tion is uniform, its substance chromatophilous, and not arranged in a plexus as in the nuclei. The author enumerates the various forms in which he has succeeded in finding it, and then passes to the very interesting observation that his studies on the testicle of the rat has shown him that the so-called accessory nucleus which has been recently studied by Nuss- baum and Platner, ought to be regarded as comparable to the vesicle of Balbiani in ova. The only reagent which, at present, is found to be useful in fixing this vesicle is that of Flemming. Atavism.t—Mr. J. Bland Sutton tries to show that, using the classi- fication of Prof. Gegenbaur, all examples of atavism are paleogenetic, and that none are neogenetic, or not found as a germ in the embryo; the prostate is selected as affording a remarkable instance of atavism, and it is regarded by Mr. Sutton as a suppressed uterus, the fibro-muscular tissue representing the matricial walls, the follicles corresponding to the reticular glands, and the reticulus itself being identical with the cervix uteri and the immediate adjacent portion of the vagina. It seems to be clear that the prostatic concretions and egg-shells agree structurally and chemically and are pro- duced by homologous organs, so that man has in his prostate an unimpeach- able witness of an ancestry with the feathered tribes low down among the oviparous reptiles. Dealing with secondary sexual characters, the author urges that the known facts seem to point to the conclusion that the epiblast is chiefly derived from the male element, while the female pronucleus is chiefly re- sponsible for the hypo- and greater portion of the mesoblast ; if this be true, the transmission of characters peculiar to the male is not so obscure as many have supposed. * Sep. Rep. Bull. Soc. Philomath. Paris, 1887, 4 pp. + Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1886 (1887) pp. 551-8. 566 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO B. Histology.* Karyokinesis.t—Prof. W. Waldeyer gives a useful historical résumé, with interpolated criticisms, of recent researches on cell-division, with accompanying diagrams and bibliography. Cup-shaped Cells.t—M. L. Ranvier discusses the vacuoles of cup- shaped cells, the movements of the vacuoles and the intimate phenomena of the secretion of mucus, taking as his object of investigation the cells found in the epithelial covering of the membrane which invests the retro- lingual lymphatic sae of the edible or the grass-frog. In answer to the question, Is the vacuolar movement a vital one? M. Ranvier finds that it ceases on the death of the cells. After staining, it is possible to see that the vacuoles are situated in the mass of protoplasm which occupies the base of the cell, or in the protoplasmic processes which are given off from it, and they may, therefore, be found in any region of the cup-shaped cell from its base to its orifice. When the cells are examined in the living state it may be noticed that some of the vacuoles which they contain dis- appear more or less rapidly and before reaching the surface of the mucous membrane. It is probable that, breaking within the cell, they pour out, along the lines of protoplasmic substance, the liquid which they contain, and that this liquid, bathing the masses of mucigen, carries away part of it. Thus charged with mucin it arrives at the surface converted into mucus. Giant Cells of Tubercle.s—Herr A. Obrzut concludes, from his ‘obser- vations, that a giant tubercular cell does not represent a histological unit, but in reality a conglomeration of endo- or epithelial cells hypertrophied by the influence of the parasites of the tuberculosis, and that it is, as usually observed, in process of undergoing retrogressive modifications. Alteration of the Red Blood-corpuscles. ||—In normal blood Sig. A. Mosso finds corpuscles which become altered with the greatest ease, while others are more resistant. It is impossible to examine microscopically the blood of most animals without destroying or profoundly altering a certain number of corpuscles. Mere contact with glass suffices to quite decolorize, alter their shape, and bring the nucleus into view. In the red corpuscle can be distinguished a skeleton or network, which is brought out by maceration and digestion. By digesting the blood of various animals, especially birds, in gastric juice, a red corpuscle is seen to be composed of an external envelope, of a granular fibrillar network, and of a nuclear suc. Within the nuclear sac are usually seen ten to twelve corpuscles, which stain more deeply than the nucleus. Between the external envelope and the nucleus may be distinguished, even in mammals, a median zone, which the author calls the cortical part. It is composed of two substances so intimately commingled that they form a homogeneous substance in the physiological condition, but which separate on alteration of the corpuscle, and then the one looks transparent and the other yellow from hemoglobin. Sig. Mosso has seen crystals within the corpuscles of dog’s blood, coagulated slowly or rendered incoagulable by the addition of pancreatine. These crystals are rhomboidal, with well-marked angles, and yellow in colour, and con- centric in position. ‘The diameter of the corpuscles being about 6 or 7 p, the crystals measure 2°5 » to 5 pw. The resemblance of these crystals to * This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. + Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol., 1887, pp. 1-30. t Comptes Rendus, civ. (1887) pp. 819-22. § Arch. Slav. Biol., ii. (1886) pp. 402-25 (1 pl.). || Atti R. Accad. Lincei.—Rend., iii. (1887) pp. 252-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 567 hemoglobin shows that in the higher vertebrates there exists within the corpuscle a substance analogous to albuminoid bodies, and which is able to crystallize without the corpuscular form changing. ‘The corpuscle is de- colorized because the yellow substance separates from the other which is found in the cortical portion, and crystallizes without leaving a trace of the nucleus. The normal form of the mammalian red corpuscle is not that of a bicon- cave disc, as is usually believed, but this appearance is produced by altera- tion of structure due to unsuitable conditions, mechanical violence, chemical reagents, and the like. In his experiments Sig. Mosso used very dilute solutions (sodium chloride 0°75 per cent., stained with metlyl-violet 1 in 5000), alkaline eosin 1-2 per cent., NaCl 0°6 per cent., or methyl- green 1 per cent. Except blood-serum, all other fluids were found to aiter more or less rapidly the red corpuscles, but contact with glass is stated to be extremely damaging. For example, if a drop of blood squeezed out of a pigeon’s feather be treated with 2 per cent. eosin solution, and viewed without contact, the nucleus will be found unstained. But if the same drop be but lightly touched with a cover-glass, the corpuscles become altered, the nuclei become red and swollen, the cortical part more pallid, as if the hemo- globin had disappeared. This great susceptibility of change Sig. Mosso con- siders to have been the cause of many errors, and these of such magnitude that it is necessary to repeat the whole course of the histology of the blood, for every ordinary method of examining blood destroys the cortical part of the corpuscle. Sig. Mosso concludes by alluding to the differences in the resistance of red corpuscles. This resistance was measured roughly by means of 0°3 per cent. chloride of sodium solution, stained with methyl-violet 1: 5000, and more accurately by successive strengths of the chloride solution (0°76—0°4 per cent.). These experiments are not yet fully completed, but it may be stated that the resistance for any given species is very variable, and that the corpuscles of birds are the most resistant. Nuclei of Striated Muscle-fibre in Necturus (Menobranchus) lateralis.*—Mr. A. B. Macallum has obtained his best preparations of the nuclei of Necturus lateralis with gold chloride and formic acid; many of the isolated nuclei have on their surface furrows and striations; the former are probably due to the pressure exercised by the trabecule of the muscular reticulum ; this last appears to the author to be the true contractile element, while the myosin shifts and accommodates itself. In some cases the reticulum was not on, but in the nucleus, and in these cases no chromatin or caryoplasma could be discovered. Mr. Macallum thinks with Carnoy and Melland that the muscle reticulum is simply the modified cytoplasma, the caryoplasma being derived from the latter. When the caryoplasma is modified as in some of the cells observed, the nuclei must be capable of movement, or of contraction and extension; the possession of a square- meshed reticulum implies extension and contraction in definite directions— the nucleus contracts with the muscle-fibre and extends with it again, yet not passively. Where nuclei have part of their surface completely free from furrows, we may suppose that part only of the nuclear body is sur- rounded by the muscle substance, a part of it lying between the latter and the sarcolemma. Variations in Wool.{—Dr. F. H. Bowman gives an interesting account of variations observed in the structure of wool and other fibres. These indicate a constant tendency to a reversion toa more primitive type, besides illustrating the effects produced by the environment or by artificial selection * Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xxvii. (1887) pp. 461-6 (1 pl.). + Proe, Roy. Soc. Edin., 1887, pp. 657-72 (1 pl.). 568 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO in breeding. He defines the difference in degree between hair and wool, as expressed in the method of attachment of the epidermal scales which form the external covering of the fibres. The modifications which are noted concern all the various parts of which the hair is composed. In the fleece of the semi-wild sheep of Central Asia, three different classes of fibres may be distinguished often in the same lock of wool; (a) those which have all the characteristics of true hair in their most marked degree; (b) those which resemble alpaca and mohair fibres; (¢) those which are true wool. “ All the variations observed are formed in the fibres from the same sheep in the various races which inhabit Central Asia, while in most of the sheep inhabiting other parts of the world the usual variations from the normal types are less distinctive in their character and confined within narrower limits. This seems to point to the mountainous regions of Central Asia as the district from which the present domestic sheep has spread. B. INVERTEBRATA. Vitality of Encapsuled Organisms.*—Herr M. Nussbaum noticed a living embryo in a Daphnia which had been expelled from the gastric cavity of Hydra; of this Daphnia, as of another that was swallowed, nothing remained of the soft parts. This observation showed that the embryos of the Cladocera that were seized were not killed by the poison of the stinging organs, and that the egg-shell protected them from the “digestive ferment of the Polyps.” An experiment with absolute alcohol used to poison a pregnant female Daphnia showed that while the adult was killed the young remained capable of further development when trans- ferred to pure water. Considering the enormous voracity of Hydrz this immunity of the Daphnia embryos is important, not only for the latter but also for the polyps. The resistance of the embryos being due to the presence of a hard egg-shell, the whole phenomenon is comparable to the power possessed by many lower organisms of forming a temporary capsule to protect themselves against desiccation ; and in the plant-world there are other analogies —fruits serve as food for animals, but their seeds pass uninjured through the digestive tract. Influence of Medium.j—M. A. de Varigny has made a number of experiments as to the effect of alterations of medium on Beroe ovata, Aurelia aurita, and Pagurids. Some of these may be thus summarized :— Beroe .. Fresh water .. .. «+ oe «+ oe « « Contraction and death. i .. Equal parts fresh and salt .. .. .. .. .- Contraction, with recovery after replacement in salt water after 15 mins. “s .. L part fresh to 3salt' -., °° 2. =. ° s. «. “Salle elleen. E Fe 4 fc Ssalt .. 1.2 2 . «. «.» No effect. + .. Sea-waterat31° .. .. .. «- «.. «+» More rapid movement of ciliated plates. Aurelia .. Ns o* os ee we eee Swe )~S we )~6Rhythmic movements re- placed by rapid and spasmodic, but normal again in 1] mins. Beroe .. es at BE° sel becom) coe oe | poe — SPABHIS OEMAA aoe IE De 25 mins. a its 95 at 400 o ccc ane eas, aol okelencewe Deaths 5 he cs + 2 per cent. sulphate of copper -- Rapid death. 5 ae 3 +1 » bichromateof potassium Reduction of ciliation and contraction and slow death. oe ie re + 1:5 per cent. chloral hydrate.. .. Slow death. * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 173-4. + Soc. de Biol., 1887. Cf. Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1887) pp. 127-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 569 Mollusca. Shells of Cephalopoda.*—Herr E. Riefstahl, after pointing out the different relations held to their shells by Cephalopoda and Gastropoda, distinguishes the external shells of the Ammonites and recent Nautiloids from the internal shells of Belemnites and Squids. The great differences between shells depend on various modes of life; those of the Ammonites were almost more important as swimming organs than as defensive envelopes, for they were generally very thin and light, much lighter than those of the existing Nautilus ; the shells of Belemnites were very strong, and gave the whole body great powers of resistance; they were enclosed by a thick skin rich in vessels, so that if they were injured they were rapidly healed. The Sepiz have a light shell, which is, however, fairly strong. With regard to the formation of the septa, the author remarks that every septum arises from its predecessor, becomes separated from it by the increase in length of the intervening walls, and finally becomes a new strong septum; in con- sequence of this the hinder end of the body of the animal is always in contact with a septum, and does not need to sccrete either air or chalk. There is good reason for ascribing to the Cephalopod-shell the independent mode of growth which has been detected in the Lamellibranchiata, and there is no reason for supposing that there is any secretion from the body of the animal. Renal Organs of Prosobranchs.t—Herr G. Wolff gives a preliminary notice of his observations on the renal organs of German Prosobranch Mollusca, Paludina vivipara, Bithynia tentaculata, and Valvata piscinalis having been examined. He has been able to convince himself of the presence in all these of the internal orifice; the great reduction which this has suffered, greater even than in the Pulmonata, will explain Leydig’s failure to find it in Paludina; it is least reduced in Valvata, where its duct has long and strong cilia. In Paludina the pericardial opening of the kidney is clearly in physiological conncction with the opening of the kidney into the water-reservoir, for the muscular fibres which inclose the former are connected with the sphincter which embraces the latter. In Bithynia a glandular body which corresponds to the kidney of Paludina projects freely into the organ which may be regarded as the water-reservoir; it differs from Paludina in having two orifices, one upper and one lower, which lead to the exterior; the pericardial orifice is quite close to the former of these. Glands in Foot of Tethys fimbriata.{—Dr. J. H. List finds consider- able differences in the presence of glands on the upper and lower sides of the foot of Tethys fimbriata; on the former there are unicellular mucous glands, unicellular glands with specially formed fat-like contents, which may possibly be phosphorescent organs, unicellular glands with special contents, some of which are often arranged in a lamellar manner, and similar glands which have coarsely granulated contents. Of the numerous glands there are two kinds; in one the form of the gland is flask-like, and these are bounded by a distinct membrane and contain two different masses, which are arranged as in the goblet-cells; there is a filar mass arranged in a meshwork, and an interfilar mass. ‘The second form of unicellular mucous glands are quite like goblet-cells, even if they are not, as the author believes, epithelial elements. The glands, which may have a phosphorescent * Naturforscher, xx. (1887) pp. 153-4, from Paleontograplhica, xxxii. (1886). t+ Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) p. 317. t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 308-26 (1 pl.). 1887, 2 Pp 570 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO function, are very largely developed, not only over the whole of the foot, but on other parts of the body; the contents are almost completely homogeneous and are of a fatty nature; it is to be noted that Grube has reported that Tethys is remarkable for its strong phosphorescence, and Panceri has remarked that the unicellular glands which serve as the luminous organ of Annelids have fatty contents. In another form of gland lamelle are found, some of which exhibit a concentric arrangement, but this may be due to the mode of hardening; the function of these glands is not quite clear, but it is certain that they are not mucous organs, though it is possible that they are byssus glands, the contents of which have been altered in the process of preparation. The glands with coarsely granular contents are pyriform in shape; their func- tion is unknown. On the lower side of the foot there are, in addition to the goblet-cells, a few small mucous glands, a comparatively small number of luminous organs, and a few scattered glands with granular contents. In addition to these there are specific organs which call to mind the multinuclear colour- and chalk-glands which Leydig has observed in the skin of many terrestrial Gastropoda. They have no surrounding membrane, and the cell-substance generally is a finely granulated mass; the nuclei are from two to seven in number in each cell, and colour well. They are very easily seen to be connected with connective-tissue cells; and the author believes that both they and the cells observed by Leydig are only further developed connective-substance cells, which remain in contact with the other cells of the same substance. Anatomy of Patella.*—Dr. H. Wegmann contributes some notes on the structure of Patella, an animal often, but only partially studied. His bibliography only comes down to 1883, and the recent thorough research by Mr. R. J. Harvey Gibson has apparently not reached the author. The two systems which are especially discussed are the alimentary and vascular. An Infusorian parasite found on the gills is also described. As the ground covered by Dr. Wegmann’s research is in part included in Gibson’s mono- graph, the detailed anatomical results need hardly be summarized. The value of the investigation is increased by the comparison which is in- stituted throughout between Patella and Haliotis, as also by the excellent illustrations. Molluscoida. . a, Tunicata. Muscular System of Glossophorum sabulosum.{—M. L. Lahille de- scribes the well-developed muscular system of this Tunicate, which he finds to be very simple and instructive. ‘There are generally six pairs of lateral muscles, corresponding to the six buccal lobes; occasionally eight pairs—a sign of approximation to the Cionide which is paralleled by other characters in the organization of Glossophorum—are present. The author remarks, parenthetically, that he is about to demonstrate the homology of what he calls the stolon (pos:-abdomen of Milne-Edwards) with the vessels of the tunic of simple Ascidians, the proliferating stolon of the Salpida, and the endostylar bud of Pyrosomatide. Owing to the fact that the ova are always developed on the right side of the rectum, the lateral muscles of the right are shorter than those on the left side of the animal. M. Lahille does not agree with Traustedt that the deviation of the intestine produces * Rec. Zool. Suisse, iv. (1887) pp. 269-303 (2 pls.). } Soc. ’Hist. Nat. Toulouse, xx. (1886) pp. 107-116. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 571 the muscular asymmetry, but is of opinion that the latter is the cause of the former. The other longitudinal muscles are the cloacal, of which there are three pairs, and the dorsal and the ventral, of which there are, respectively, one pair. Of the transverse muscles, the buccal and cloacal present no remarkable characters; the branchials are found in the interior of each transverse sinus. The muscular bundle is always single in Glossophorum, which is interesting as being a primitive arrangement, known as yet to obtain only in the Salpide. _The statement of Della Valle that there are no muscular fibres in the gills of Tunicates is traversed. The mesodermic cells, which are elongated, and which give rise to the muscular fibres, have at points along their internal walls refractive thick- enings of contractile substance ; these are developed from the periphery of the cell towards its centre, and so have, in section, a prismatic form. The prisms increase in size till they leave between their faces only an extremely thin layer of protoplasm. The author agrees with Profs. Van Beneden and Julin in thinking that the muscles of adult Tunicates are mesenchymatous in origin and epithelioid in formation. The organogeny of the musculature of the Tunicates appears to be always of one type ; but in the Salpide and Urodele larve the mesodermic cells do not elongate. The symmetry of the Tunicata, as of the Nematodes and lower Verte- brates, appears to be eutetrapleural and interradial, but this homology is an adaptational and not a primitive one. B. Polyzoa. Morphology of Bryozoa.*—Herr A. A. Ostroumoff concludes his study of the morphology of the Bryozoa of the Gulf of Sebastopol. In regard to the metamorphosis of all the three types he notes :—-(1) the formation of the basal surface at the expense of the cells of the posterior wall of the vent (ventouse); (2) the histolysis of the provisional larval organs, and of the alimentary canal if it be always present (IM. zostericola, Cyphonautes); (3) the formation of an ectodermic rudiment of the ali- mentary canal, formed by the cells of the cap (calotte) which is invagi- nated (Ctenostomata?); (4) the formation on the surface of this rudiment of a mesodermic layer arising from the mesoderm cells of the larva. Budding and regeneration are discussed at some length, and the author emphasizes, in conclusion, the following four most important results :-— (1) the calcareous skeleton of Bryozoa is deposited between the cells of the ectoderm, which persists throughout the life of the cells as a single layer under the skeleton (in Membranipora), or as a double layer inclosing the skeleton (in Lepralia) ; (2) the body-cavity is mesenchymatous, without endothelial lining; (3) the vent forms, in Cheilostomata, the basal wall of the cell, and the stolon in Vesicularia ; on its derivatives the new members of the colony are always budded off, except the opercula avicularia in Cellularia and Escharella; (4) the polypide is formed at the expense of the ectodermic rudiment and of the brown mass; the larva still exhibits in its early embryonic life a peculiar organ, known as the cap (calotte), and destined to form the above-mentioned rudiment. Morphology of Ectoproctous Bryozoa.t—Dr. W. J. Vigelius, who in 1884 suggested that the skin of the adult was represented by the ectocyst, and that the ectodermal epithelial layer which gives rise to the tegumentary * Arch. Slav. de Biol., ii. (1886) pp. 325-55 (5 pls.). ¢ Tijdsch. Nederl. Dierk. Vereen., i. (1887) pp. 77-92 (1 pl.). 2P 2 572 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO skeleton is only found in very young buds and afterwards disappears, has been led to reconsider this. He now finds that in Farella repens, and another species, probably a Membranipora, there is on the surface of the tegumentary skeleton a thread indicating an epithelium formed of very large cells; these cells closely resemble the ectodermal cells of Loxosoma and Pedicellina ; it is very difficult to detect this layer except in specimens which, when fresh, have been treated with nitrate of silver. The author’s researches on Flustra have shown him that the endocyst and endosare are formed of the same non-epithelial tissue; this parenchy- matous tissue appears to be a special form of connective tissue which is massive in the cords and reticular in the layers which line the cavity of the body. In Bugula calathus it often contains a number of spherical or ellipsoidal corpuscles, which are granular in appearance; they vary greatly in their distribution. They multiply by division, and this is better seen in buds than in adults; their function seems to be that of formative elements, which serve either to nourish the tissues or to give rise to new cells in developing individuals, helping to form new organs. The muscular fibres are only these cells excessively elongated. There can be no doubt that in the budding of the ectoproctous marine Bryozoa two distinct and well-developed embryonic layers take a part; the outer one is composed of large cells, in which the tegumentary skeleton is deposited, and the inner invests the cavity of the young bud and furnishes nearly the whole of the organs and tissues of the adult; in consequence of its situation and the part it plays in development it must be regarded as representing the mesodermal layer. In the early stages it forms an epi- thelium, which does not persist, but is converted into ovicells or aviculariz, or furnishes the different organs which fill the cavity of the bud; it also provides the materials for the development of the nutritive apparatus. In this last both ectoderm and mesoderm take a share. If it be admitted that the endoderm is wanting, then the epithelial layer which invests the eavity of the young bud ought to be considered as representing both mesoderm and endoderm ; from the time of the formation of the gastrula the elements of the inner layer are fused with the internal cellular mass of the embryo. Morphology of Marine Bryozoa.*—Dr. W. J. Vigelius gives a pre- liminary notice of his results with regard to the morphology of ecto- proctous marine Ctenostomatous and Cyclostomatous Bryozoa. The ectodermal epithelium has been studied by silver preparations of Bugula, Membranipora, Flustra, and Mimosella; in the adult of all it consists of large, much-flattened cells, and in the rudiments of the bud of smaller polygonal cells. Contrary to Kohwey, Dr. Vigelius believes that the fine partition-walls which separate the individuals of Alcyonidium from one another are perforated, and so correspond to the communication-plates which are so often found in the Ectoprocta. With the exception of Alcyonidium all the forms examined had the pareuchymatous tissue developed on one and the same type; and this closely corresponds to what the author has already found in Flustra mem- branaceo-truncata and Bugula calathus. The nutrient apparatus is very much the same in all forms; the cilia of the tentacles of preserved speci- mens were seen to be arranged in the same way as in Flustra ; Zoobotryon and Mimosella, in addition to the pharynx, stomach, cecum, and intestine of other forms, have a masticatory stomach. The circular canal is always found, and is invested by the continuation of the mesenchymatous layer which is found in the tentacular canal; in Alcyonidium mytili the author * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 237-40. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 573 was able to detect within the circular canal, on the anal side, a sharply defined organ, which looked very like a ganglion. The gonads are always products of the parenchymatous tissue, but the size of the ovary and ova varies considerably; in Flustra carbasea the spermatozoa-spheres form a compact cell-mass. In Crista the formation of the generative cells appears to go on exclusively in the brood-capsules. The intertentacular organ of Alcyonidium mytili is not present in all functional individuals of the colony ; it lies beneath the tentacular sheath, has an epithelial invest- ment, and is fused for a large part of its course with the adjacent tentacles of either side. y. Brachiopoda. Anatomy of Brachiopoda Articulata.*— Dr. L. Joubin, who has already investigated the inarticulate Brachiopoda, has extended his studies to Tere- bratulina, Argiope, &c. Longitudinal sections of young forms show that the peduncle is a sac which is entirely closed, and is applied against the hind wall of the mantle, an arrangement, therefore, analogous to what obtains in Discina. By the aid of figures the author describes the minute structure of the stalk and of its appendages. These latter can only be made out in young forms, as they soon become incrusted. There are a varying number of small yellowish hairs, which terminate by a kind of sucker. The hairs are hollow, and the walls are formed of a series of zones arranged concen- trically round alumen. Lach hair is fixed in the thick layer of cartilaginous tissue which forms the end of the peduncle. In function they appear to be comparable to the byssus threads of lamellibranch molluscs, but in their mode of development, and their morphological relations, they are altogether ditferent. Ceecal Processes of Shells of Brachiopoda.t—Prof. W. J. Sollas adduces evidence that the so-called cecal processes of the shells of Brachiopods are sense-organs; they are obviously composed of epithelial cells, and in their centre they show traces cf an axial fibre, which can be seen to be continuous with the nerve-cells of the mantle. At the outer end of the tubule there is a single large finely granular cell, with a large oval nucleus and spherical nucleolus, and there may be, in addition to it, a number of other nuclei. The inner end of the terminal cell appears to be prolonged into a fibril, which can sometimes be traced into continuity with both the nucleus and the axial fibre. The cecal tubes of Waldheimia cranium are, therefore, epidermal outgrowths with a large terminal granular cell, which is continued proximally into a nerve-fibril and is covered distally by a transparent chitinous layer, separating it from all external influences likely to serve as stimuli except that of light; that, however, the cecal process is an organ for the perception of light cannot yet be taken as proved, owing, especially, to the absence of anything like pigment in the terminal cells. Specimens better prepared may perhaps add to our information on this point. Arthropoda. Relations of Groups of Arthropoda.t—Prof. C. Claus states that the “ essential points ” on which he insists are— (1) He independently supported, eleven years ago, the phylogenetic origin of Scorpions and other Arachnoids from the Gigantostraca. * Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xii. (1837) pp. 119-26 (1 pl.). + Scientif. Proc. R. Dublin Soc., v. (1887) pp. 318-20 (1 fig.). ¢ Arbeit. Zool.-Zoot. Inst. Wien, vii. Ct. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist, xix. (1887) p. 396, hie. =r ’ ws 574 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (2) In 1880 he “implicitly” stated the distinction of the three Arthropod series—Crustacea; Gigantostraca, Arachnoidea; Myriopoda-Insecta. - (3) His views as to the relation of Limulus to the Arachnoidea are quite different from those of Prof. Ray Lankester. (4) The reference of the Mites to retrograde Arachnoidea, which is sup- ported by the discovery of the rudimentary heart, has been for many years supported on other grounds than those of Lankester. (5) The hypothesis of the “ adaptational shifting of the oral aperture ” is perfectly untenable. (6) And it has nothing in common with the opinion, founded on the conditions of innervation, that the second pair of antenne of the Crustacea represents the foremost truncal members, while the first pair, like the antenne of Insecta and Myriopoda, belong to the prestomial part of the head. a. Insecta. Some interesting processes in the formation of Insects’ Ova.*—Dr. E. Korschelt, as a first of a series of accounts of interesting processes in the formation of the ova of insects, gives a description of an abnormal mode of development in the origin of the egg-rays of Ranatra linearis. This may be taken as a supplement to his description of the peculiar mode of formation of the chitin of the so-called egg-rays of Nepa cinerea. In that form the egg has at its upper pole seven filamentous appendages—the egg- rays—which serve to bring air to the submerged egg. For this object they are porous at their tip and internally, and this porous substance is connected with a similarly porous layer in the egg-shell. The rays of Nepa do not arise in the usual way in which chitin is formed, for they are not cuticular products excreted by the epithelial cells, but are developed within specially modified cells. The allied Ranatra linearis has two rays only, but these are longer than those of Nepa, with which they agree in internal structure. While the egg-shell proper is developed in the typical mode of chitin formation, the rays are, as in Nepa, formed within specially modified cells. The epithelial tissue thickens in the upper lateral wall of the younger ovarian chambers. Owing to this increase in size, the upper wall gets a ridge-like thickening. In the youngest chambers this consists of similar cells, but in those that are a little older the nuclei begin to increase in number. Among the epithelial nuclei of the ordinary size there appear some larger ones, which are already so far altered that they appear to be filled with a number of small chromatin particles. In a more advanced stage the increase in size becomes more marked, and this goes on with age. Plasmatic spaces appear around the larger nuclei, which thus look as though they were surrounded by acell-body. The increase in the size of the nuclei is accompanied by a multiplication of the cells, and the thickening, within which the rays are to be formed later on, is very different from the rest of the cell-wall. The next process which becomes noticeable is that four of the larger nuclei arrange themselves by pairs, and become almost completely attached to one another. Henceforward these are the cells which grow most, all the other nuclei being left far behind. The histological structure which contains the two nuclei may be well called the double cell. In Ranatra it is not so early or so strikingly characterized as in Nepa. The chitin of the egg-rays is formed within the double cells between the nuclei, the cell-plasma which lies there being directly converted into the chitinous substance ; the ray is first formed at its base, and begins to grow considerably. The cuticula-like layer * Zeitschy. t. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 327-97 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 579 which invests the ray, and which is homogeneous, is not, in Ranatra, formed within the double cells, but is secreted by the neighbouring cells in the form of a cuticle; and we have, therefore, the somewhat remarkable phenomena of the union of arare form of intracellular chitin formation with the ordinary or typical form of cuticular secretion of chitin. The observation of the whole process of chitinization leads the author to the belief that it is due to the direct influence of the nuclei on the activity of the cell. Although the substance given off by the nutrient and the double cells is so different in nature, yet it is impossible to dispute the similarity of the two processes. In both kinds of cells, i.e. in the nutrient cells of Lepidoptera and the double cells of Nepa and Ranatra, the nucleus extends in the form of amceboid processes through the cell; and as in both cases a substance is excreted by the cell, it is very probable that the nucleus thus increases its surface for the pur- pose of increasing the constant action between the nuclear and the cell- substance. It thus exerts a greater influence on the secretory activity of the cell. The second chapter deals with the exit of the ovum from the ovary, and the fate of the empty ovarian follicle; and with the relation of the egg- forming organ to the efferent apparatus. The result of the investigation of a number of forms is this: the ova always make their exit from the ovarian tube in one typical way, which, however, presents a number of variations due to the characters of the ovarian chamber after repeated ovipositions ; the variations may be ascribed to the variations in the form of the ovarian tube, and to the characters of its epithelium. In all cases the egg-chamber is broken through at its base, since here there is always a cellular partition, which opposes the passage of the ova from the ovary into the efferent apparatus ; the injury suffered by the tube varies considerably. Sometimes there is not only fissure, but an extension of the constriction at the base of the tube, when the egg passes from the tube into the duct without the connection between the two being broken. In other cases, however, when the epithelium of the ovarian chamber forms a very thin layer, the exit of the ova is accompanied by a destruction of the epithelium, and the consequent breaking up of the whole chamber, of which the tunica propria alone remains; here, of course, the connection between the ovi- gerous and the oviducal organs is suddenly broken ; it is more marked when the constriction between the separate egg-chambers has gone so far, that they are only connected by a thin filamentary piece, for here it is impos- sible for the ova to pass on; the ovigerous and oviducal portions may in these cases be connected by nothing but the surrounding peritoneal in- vestment; the walls of the emptied egg-chamber fall together, and form isolated balls of cellular substance, until they are absorbed. We have here, it is obvious, to do with a very interesting phenomenon ; the true ovary as represented by the oviducal tube is, by a normal act of destruction, separated from the rest of the generative apparatus; in certain cases the ovary again becomes connected with the efferent apparatus, and the solution and reparation of continuity is periodically effected. In the third chapter, Dr. Korschelt deals with abnormal processes in the development of insects’ eggs. In Reduvius personatus and Bombus lapidarius the lowest ovarian chamber has its wall considerably thickened, as if in consequence of the thickening of the epithelial cells; and the chamber seems at first to have been emptied and to be undergoing retrograde change; closer examination, however, shows that we have to do with a chamber which still contains ovarian rudiments, although altered in condition. In Reduvius personatus the lowest ovarian follicles of some of the tubes 576 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO have a thick wall formed of several epithelial layers, the cells of which- are quite irregularly arranged, and show signs of degeneration, while there are lacune between the cells. The yolk-mass is vesicular and spongy. There can be no doubt that we have here to do with a pathological con- dition. Bombus lapidarius presented just the same phenomena. The fourth chapter treats of an increase of surface caused by the development of folds on the inner side of the follicular epithelium of Rhizotrogus solstitialis ; the folds are caused by an invagination of the unilaminar epithelial layer within the egg, and they may extend to the middle of the ovum; when deep there are never more than three; it is to be noted that folds and villi are to be seen on the inner wall of the oviduct. Against the supposition that they are abnormal we have to put the fact that they are found in eggs of all stages and of histologically normal character; nor can they be thought to be due to the faults of preparation. It is possible, then, that the folds are normal and have for their function an increase in the surface of the egg with a view to its better nourishment ; with the growth of the eggs the folds disappear. . What happens here cannot but remind us of the numerous folds found by Lankester in the cellular egg-capsule of the Cephalopoda. Polar Globules in Insect Ova.*—Dr. F. Blochmann has shown (1) that in five classes of insects the ovum is never without a nucleus; (2) that in Musca vomitoria, in the winter ova of Aphis aceris, &c., polar globules are formed; (3) that in some parthenogenetic ova at least only one polar globule is formed, while in the normally fertilized two are present. In the winter ova of Aphis aceris two cells are extruded in normal fashion; the first occasionally gave indications of a nuclear spindle. In two species the summer parthenogenetic ova exhibited only a single polar cell, an observation of some suggestiveness as to the physiological import of these extruded elements. In Musca vomitoria a polar globule formation does indeed take place, but the elements are not extruded. Three results of nuclear division remain for a while in a peripheral thickening, the fourth forming the female pronucleus. Polar globules have now been observed in three classes of insects, Photogenic Function of Ova of Lampyris.t—Dr. R. Dubois has found that the ova are luminous in ovaries taken from the abdominal cavity of Lampyris, and carefully washed immediately after removal; the eggs of both fertilized and non-fertilized individuals are luminous, and the development of the light is in direct relation with the degree of intra-ovarial development of the ova. The luminosity persists in laid eggs until the embryo escapes ; the shell abandoned by the larva does not remain Juminous, but the creature itself has two luminous organs at the moment of birth; the luminosity of laid non-fertilized eggs does not last beyond a week, and it has been noticed in eggs in which there is no trace of segmentation. The hLygrometric condition of the surrounding medium exercises a great influence on the production of the light, which becomes weakened or extinguished as soon ag the moss on which the eggs have been deposited becomes a little dry; if the dryness has not gone too far, the addition of a little moisture causes the luminosity to reappear. Boiling water immediately and alcohol rapidly suppresses the lumi- nosity; eggs washed and shaken in distilled water do not give up their * Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1887) pp. 108-11. t+ Bull, Soc. Zool, France, xii. (1887) pp. 137-44. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. iy luminosity to it; if kept for much more than an hour in water, the eggs begin to lose their photogenic properties; but if withdrawn at such a moment, the light-giving power gradually returns. It is easy to show, as by pricking the egg with a teasing needle, that the substance contained in the shell of the egg is luminous by itself; if parts of the tissue of the luminous organ are rubbed lightly on a sheet of paper there are luminous marks, but nothing of the kind occurs if the shell remains intact. The photogenic power is exercised in the egg without the aid of trachea, nerves, or special anatomical elements, and the continuity of the light is the result of the vital processes of the egg of Lampyris noctiluca. Senses of Insects.*—M. A. Forel contributes a most interesting and exhaustive account of experiments made by himself and many others on the much discussed problem of the senses of insects. (1) In regard to sight of ants, he notes especially these three conclu- sions :—(a) They perceive light, and particularly ultra-violet (Lubbock) ; (b) they really see the ultra-violet rays, without eyes they are almost indif- ferent to them, and only respond to solar light more or less intense ; (c) the dermatoptric sensations are feebler among ants than in the animals which Graber studied. (2) After reviewing new and old experiments, as to the sense of smell in insects, he notes the following general facts :—(a) In many insects which are essentially directed by sight, as in the Libellulids and Cicadas, the antennz are rudimentary, and the sense of smell likewise. During the night these insects are passive, while during the day they trust to their power of sight, or possibly in some cigalids also to hearing ; (b) the sensitive region, in spite of Graber’s protestations, is situated in the antenne, espe- cially in those parts where the antennary nerve ramifies; (c) in certain insects, as in most Diptera, the antenne probably serve almost solely for smelling purposes; (d) in other cases, however, where they are mobile, as in the Hymenoptera, they are used for detecting their food or their mates at great distances. (8) As distinct organs of taste, M. Forel regards the nervous terminations (a) on the proboscis of flies (Leydig), (6) on the jaws and on the base of the tongue (Meinert), (c) on the end of the tongue (Forel), and (d) on the palate or on the epipharynx (Wolff). (4 and 5) Forel’s results as to hearing are as yet too negative to admit of notice. He finally discusses the sense of touch in its various manifestations, and the last chapter of his interesting memoir discusses the relation of the five senses to the general psychical life of insects. Cell of the Honey Bee.t|—Prof. H. Hennessy has a second note on the geometrical construction of the cell of the honey bee; he finds that a sphere may be inscribed within the cell from a point measured from the vertex at a distance equal to the side of one of the lozenges, and with a radius equal to half the long diagonal of this lozenge, while another sphere with a diameter equal to three times the size of the lozenge circumscribes the triangular pyramid at the summit. If D’ be the diameter of the inscribed sphere, and D that of the exterior sphere, the relation between them may be expressed thus :— 2 errs Re)" * Rec. Zool. Suisse, iv. (1887) pp. 161-240. + Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., xlii. (1887) pp. 176-7. _ 578 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The relation between the geometrical cell and the interior and exterior spheres may possibly have some bearing on the question of the formation of the actual cells. Brain of Vespa crabro and V. vulgaris.*—M. H. Viallanes, in the fourth of his memoirs on the structure and histology of the nervous centres of Articulata, deals with the brain of Vespa crabro, and V. vulgaris. He divides the brain into three great regions, which he calls protocerebrum, deutocerebrum, and tritocerebrum (“protocerebron,” &c.); the first of these consist of the two optic ganglia, the three ocellar ganglia, and the median protocerebrum. The optical ganglion is almost identical in consti- tution with that of Libellula, and consists of post-retinal fibres, ganglionic layer, external chiasma, external medullary mass, internal chiasma and internal medullary mass. The optic nerve connects the ganglion with the median protocerebrum, and is composed of four perfectly distinct bundles, two of which are superior and two inferior ; of the latter, one is very large, and is formed of two distinct cords. The ocellar ganglia are found beneath the ocelli; each consists of a mass of dotted substance, which is fairly homogeneous, and has connected with it small nervous cells, in which the protoplasm is much reduced. The median protocerebrum is made up of two pedunculated bodies, two cerebral lobes, and a central body. The first of these consists of the internal and external calyx, together with the stalk; the elliptical calyces have their walls formed of a thick layer of dotted substance, and both their internal and external surfaces are invested by a thick layer of small nerve-cells. Five parts are to be distinguished in the peduncle, the stalk of which is united to the substance of the cerebral lobes by two large fibrous bundles. The central body, although consisting almost exclusively of dotted substance, has a complex structure; it enters into relation with nearly all the constituents of the protocerebrum, fibres extend- ing to the cortex, to the calices, to the cerebral lobes, the cesophageal commissure, and the olfactory lobes. The two cerebral lobes are intimately connected beneath the central body ; they are essentially formed of dotted substance, among which are a large number of fibrous bundles with definite courses ; the connection between the lobes is effected by two commissures, one superior and one inferior ; the cesophageal commissures are very voluminous and are continuous with the cerebral lobes; they also consist of a very homogeneous dotted substance, among which are a few bundles of well-marked fibres. Attached to the protocerebrum is a special organ which the author calls the wings of the cerebral lobe; it is entirely formed of dotted substance, and is everywhere surrounded by ganglionic cells. The cerebral lobes are themselves everywhere surrounded by nerve-cells arranged in layers, which are thickest behind and in the median region; the prolongations which they give off pass to the central body, to the stalk of the pedunculated body, and to the olfactory lobe, as well as to the cerebral. The deutocerebrum is represented by the two olfactory lobes, each of which has the form of a rounded projection, attached by a short stalk to the anterior face of the corresponding cesophageal commissure. The structure is very characteristic; the central part is formed of somewhat loosely arranged dotted substance, and the cortical consists of a layer of olfactory glomeruli; each of these last has the appearance of a small sphere of dotted substance, and is united to the central part of the lobe by a short peduncle which is formed of the same substance. The outer face of the olfactory lobe is invested by a thick layer of small cells altogether similar * Ann. Sci. Nat., ii. (1887) Art. No. 1, 100 pp., 6 pls. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 579 to those which invest the calices; the prolongations which they give off are grouped into bundles which make their way among the olfactory glome- ruli, and are lost in the central dotted substance of the lobe. In the pedicle there are fibres and dotted substance ; the antennary nerve is com- posed of two bundles. The tritocerebrum, unlike what happens in some insects, notably the Orthoptera, is fused with the neighbouring parts, and can only be distinguished by the point of origin of the common trunk of the nerve for the labrum and the stomatogastric nerve. Life-history of Ugimya sericaria.*—Prof. C. Sasaki gives an account of the life-history of Ugimya sericaria, the Dipteron whose larva plays terrible havoc among the silk-worms which are raised in Japan in May and July. After describing the external and internal anatomy of the adult fly, in which particular attention is given to the structure of the generative organs, the development of the maggot is considered; the greater number of eggs are laid in May, and deposited on mulberry bushes, with the leaves of which they are eaten by the silkworm; owing to their small size and hard chitinous covering they are not crushed by the strong jaws of the silkworm, and pass uninjured into the digestive tract. In one to nine hours the shell breaks open by a longitudinal slit on its flat surface; the escaped maggot is invested in a thick transparent oval sac, which soon opens at one end, when the tiny creature becomes free. After one to eight hours the maggot, probably by the aid of its hooked jaw, passes through the wall of the canal and enters directly into the ganglia which lie close beneath ; ordinarily the silkworm is now weakened, and its body presents an unusual aspect from the severe irritation of the nervous system. The appearance produced may be understood from the popular name of “swelled segment” which is given to the disease. Feeding on the ganglion-cells the parasite grows larger and larger; after about a week it passes into the body and “ directly searches for the portions of the tracheal system of its host where the stigmata open.” Here it forms a sort of cup by heaping up the fats and muscular fibres of its host round the opening made on entering, and sticking them together with its saliva; it now feeds entirely on fat. The presence of a dark brown or blackish patch round the stigma is conclusive evidence of the presence of the parasite. In addition to the disease mentioned, other diseases and symptoms may be caused by the presence of the maggot. When it reaches maturity the maggot leaves its abode in the body of the silkworm or its pupa, and, making a hole in any part of the body of its host, it passes into the cocoon, and thence to the outer world. The author describes in detail the habits and anatomy of the mature maggot, the structure of the pupa, and its developement into the mature insect, and concludes a very interesting essay by some suggestions as to the protective methods which should be adopted. It is interesting to note that the pupa of this fly is itself infested by a parasitic mite, which probably belongs to the genus Tyroglyphus. Pedigree Moth-breeding.|—In order to obtain new data for verifying certain important constants in the general theory of heredity, Mr. Francis Galton proposes to experiment on moths, more especially on those which are double-brooded. He points out the advantages, such as the short lives, no change in length of wing, and ease of rearing and preserving, &c., to be obtained by using moths as subjects. It is intended to start from a brood of a single pair of moths, and to * Journ. College of Science, Imp. Univ. Japan, i. (1886) pp. 1-46 (6 pls.). } Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 19-28. 580 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO trace the changes of some one characteristic, e.g. length of wing, during several successive generations. ‘Three lines of descent will be contrasted, viz. shortest winged, longest winged, and medium winged, in each generation. For measuring the length of wing of living moths, he proposes a pair of scissor-like compasses, with arms on one side of the joint, being five times the length of those the other side, and the long arms furnished with an index marked in 1/2 millimetres. He has also tried the glasses from one of the tubes of an opera-glass, with a lengthened interval between them, so as to form a Microscope of very long focus, say 18 in. ‘This was fixed to a light rod that carried a millimetre scale, set across its free end, at a trifle less than 18 in. from the object-glass. On approaching the scale to within half an inch of any small object, that object and the scale are both in fair focus at once, and they are sufficiently far from the eye to render any error (arising from slight change in position of the eye) of little or no importance. For accurate measurements of dead moths, Mr. Galton has a much better instrument under construction, in which there is a small Microscope with cross wires, in the short limb of a pentagraph, the long limb being used both for setting the Microscope and for reading off the measurements. The author then details his method of centering the measurements, by means of a curve through the ends of ordinates, such as he has used in other measurements. Histology of Enteric Canal of Insects.*—M. V. Faussek has observed in Eremobia muricata the same kind of glandular structures between the cells of the cylindrical epithelium of the midgut, to which Frenzel has applied the name of glandular crypts. They have the form of narrow-necked flasks, and are filled by a mass of closely applied nuclei, which do not differ essen- tially from the nuclei of epithelial cells. The hind-gut consists of two sections, connected with one another by a delicate coiled tube. This has a strong muscular layer, and is lined by an epithelium, which consists of very small cells, is raised up into folds, and provided with a thick intima. On the contraction of the muscular elements, these folds must close the lumen of the tube. In the portion of the tract which lies above the con- necting tube, the epithelium consists of long broad cells, with very large nuclei, each of which is surrounded by a transparent area. The other part of the tract is occupied by six longitudinal ridges of the epithelial layer— the so-called rectal glands. In the epithelium of these there are two kinds of cells, some being higher and cylindrical, others less distinctly marked and mucous. The nuclei of the latter are of small size, and each occupies the centre of a clear vesicular space. The space between the epithelial layer and the musculature is filled by a loose fibrous connective tissue, the limits of the separate cells of which are not preserved. The trachex branch in this tissue, and fine ramules make their way between the epithelial cells, and end in small blind enlargements. Some interesting observations were made on the structure of the hind- gut in larve of Aischna and Libellula. The muscular layer is feebly, but the epithelial well developed. The latter consists of two kinds of cells in different regions. Some are large and cylindrical, with large granules, and these form folds, into which enter pretty thick tracheal branches. This kind passes gradually into the second, in which the cells and their nuclei aresmall ; and the protoplasm does not stain with carmine. The layer formed by these is arranged in numerous complicated folds, and appears in cross * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 322-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 581 section as if it were made up of gland-like cell-complexes. The enteric gills are irregularly invested by two kinds of epithelium; in the terminal portion of the hind-gut the enteric gills disappear, and are replaced by typical rectal glands, the presence of which speaks in favour of Chun’s supposition that the rectal glands are not structures which have been altered by disuse. Glandular Secretion of free Iodine.*—Dr. J. C. C. Loman found that, on keeping for five days a specimen of the rare beetle Cerapterus 4-macu- latus, a distinct odour of iodine was perceptible. This was excreted in drops, and when tested by ether, alcohol, and starch, found to be truly iodine. The iodine was found, on dissection, to be secreted by the anal glands. These, as in other species of Coleoptera, consist of two extremely fine coiled tubules, provided with a pyriform lateral swelling. The walls of this are thickly covered with muscular tissue; and it may be regarded as a reser- voir or propulsive organ. The function of this secretion appears to be defensive. Modification of Habits in Ants through fear of Enemies.t—Dr. H.C. McCook observed a raid of Formica sanguinea on a nest of F. fusca, which proved a failure. The instinct for kidnapping has appeared to develope, on the part of those who are the victims, a corresponding strengthening of instinct in the way of concealment. When the latter are not exposed to the acts of the former, they raise above the surface of the ground a mound of more or less con- siderable size, and over its summit and at the base the gates are scattered without the least attempt at concealment. But when a colony of their enemies is near, they omit or subdue elevations above the surface, their gates are few and cunningly concealed, and quantities of rubbish are scattered around, with the evident intention of hiding the locality of their nest, or making the approach to it more difficult. A similar faculty has been observed in F. schaufussi. Vesicating Insects.t— Continuing his monographic researches on Meloide, M. H. Beauregard discusses the spermatogenesis, and the various external and internal structures associated with the reproductive system. 1. Spermatogenesis.—On the internal wall of the testicular tubules (a) large cells are seen with spherical nucleus, and among these (b) small spherical groups of four or six cells of pyramidal form, and arranged in stellate fashion, with convergent summits. These groups of small cells arise from the division of the larger. The cells of the groups multiply by division, and not by budding, and form the spermatic spheres described by Balbiani. The final result of division is the formation of what Beauregard calls “ spermatoblasts,” each of which gives origin to a spermatic filament. The spermatic sphere is from the first to last enveloped ina fine protoplasmic layer with a nucleus. This is due to one of the original halves of the male ovule, the other half, of course, dividing to form the “spermatoblasts.” The further ontogeny of the sperms is traced, and notice is taken of the relevant observations of Gilson and Wieclowieyski. 2. The eaternal male organs are next described in a number of typical forms. The bivalved copulatory apparatus, with the groove surrounding the penis, is also described in detail. 3. Female apparatus——The third part of the memoir discusses the various structures which make up the female organs. These do not differ in any marked feature from those usually found in Coleoptera. M. Beau- * Tijdschr. Nederl. Dierk. Ver., i. (1886-7) pp. 106-8. + Proce. Acad. Sci. Philad., 1887, pp. 27-9. } Journ. Anat. et Physiol., xxiii. (1887) pp. 124-63 (6 pls.). 582 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO regard distinguishes two groups—(1) those in which a seminal reservoir and accessory gland are present; (2) those in which the accessory gland is absent, and the seminal reservoir approximated to the orifice of the oviduct. The female genital armature formed from the ninth urite is then discussed, with special reference to the conclusions of Lacaze-Duthiers. The histo- logical details of M. Beauregard’s careful investigations are hardly adapted for compressed summary. Fossil Insects.*—Dr. S. H. Scudder gives a systematic review of our present knowledge of fossil insects, including myriopods and spiders. It is essentially a translation for the benefit of English readers of the text furnished by the author to Dr. Zittel for his ‘Handbuch der Paleontologie.’ The German text, however, is accompanied by more than two hundred illustrations. M. Barrois is also publishing a French version. Each ‘section of the work is accompanied by a complete bibliography, which shows at a glance how recently this department of paleontology has been developed (very few of the titles dating back beyond 1850), and how extensive and varied the author’s own contributions have been. The con- cise descriptions of the classes, orders, and families are accompanied by brief notes on the fossil genera and species, with the locality and geological horizon in many cases; while the stratigraphic distribution and range of each order are shown by tables giving the number of species found in the -rocks of each age. No fewer than 2600 species of true insects have been found fossil up to the present time. The great majority of these, as well ‘as of myriopods and arachnids, are from the middle tertiary. This great irregularity in the chronological distribution of the fossil forms, which is, of course, due largely to the character of the deposits, is a plain indication that important insect fauna still remain to be discovered. Thus, of the fossil spiders, 31 forms are known from the paleozoic strata, 1 from the mesozoic, and 285 from the tertiary, the great majority of the tertiary forms having been found in the amber deposits of Prussia. y. Prototracheata. Development of Cape Species of Peripatus.|—Mr. A. Sedgwick com- mences his third memoir on the development of Peripatus by a brief refer- ence to the criticisms and arguments of Dr. Kennel. In the ectoderm there appear lateral thickenings, which are continuous from somite to somite; the ventral part of these gives rise to rounded elements, which go to form the nervous system; the elements are formed first in the preoral region and then in the lateral cords; or, in other words, the nervous system, at its very first appearance, begins in front of the mouth, where it is continuous across the middle line, and it extends backwards, continuously, on either side; the central ganglia give rise directly to the eyes and tentacular nerves, the portions around the mouth become the circumoral commissures, and the hinder portions are the rudiments of the ventral nerve-cords of the adult. A distinction must be drawn between the true body-cavity and the large apparent body-cavity, which may be called the pseudoccele or vascular space ; the adult body-cavity comes entirely from the pseudoceele, and both heart and pericardium are pseudoccelic; the only products of the entero- cele cavity are the nephridia and the generative glands with their ducts; neither in the embryo nor in the adult do the nephridia open into the pseudoccele, but into a vesicle in each appendage which has been hitherto * Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey, No. 31. Cf. Science, ix. (1887) p. 426. + Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xxvii. (1887) pp. 467-550 (4 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSCOPY, ETO. 583 unnoticed. These characters, when taken with the peculiarities of arthro- pod organization—the feeble development of the somites, the apparent absence of nephridia, the vascular character of the pericardial cavity, and the possession by the heart of lateral ostia opening into the pericardium— are of great morphological interest. Developing, later on, the general results which follow on the pseudo- ceelic character of the body-cavity, Mr. Sedgwick defines a ccelom as a cavity which (1) does not communicate with the vascular system, (2) does communicate by nephridial pores with the exterior, (3) gives rise by its lining to generative products, and (4) developes either as one or more diverticula from the primitive enteron, or as a space or spaces in the un- segmented or segmented mesoblastic bands. Now the vascular space has none of these characters; it developes either from the blastoccele or from a system of channels hollowed out in the mesodermic tissue of the body. In Annelids and Vertebrates the two spaces co-exist; in the Arthropoda it is very probable that the ccelom persists as the gonads and their ducts, but for the most part vanishes, giving rise possibly to glands of a doubtful nephridial nature, while the body-cavity and vascular system have an ex- clusively pseudoceelic origin; in the Mollusca the ccelom and vascular space have not been sufficiently distinguished from one another; there seems, however, to be no doubt that the pericardial cavity of the Lamelli- branchiata and Gastropoda represents the entire ccelom, for it is always shut off from the vascular system, and it communicates with the exterior by a pair of nepbridia. The considerations urged as to the distinctness of celom and vascular system do not, at present, seem to apply to the Nemertinea or Hirudinea. In most animals the vascular space or pseudoccele appears before the celom, but in Peripatus the ccelom appears first; in arthropods, at least, the vascular space is in the early stages very commonly occupied by yolk, while the ccelom is entirely free from it; there may be, therefore, some connection between the vascular and the enteric spaces. The true ccelom of Peripatus appears in the ordinary manner as a series of cavities, one in each mesoblastic somite ; these, which are at first ventro- lateral in position, soon acquire a dorsal extension, and the contained cavity becomes divided into a ventral part, which passes into the appendage, and a dorsal part, which comes into contact but does not unite with its fellow of the opposite side on the dorsal wall of the enteron. The dorsal portions soon become obliterated in the anterior part of the body, but posteriorly they unite with those of their own side to form the generative tubes. The ventral portions retain their isolation throughout life, and give rise to a coiled tube, which is the nephridium of the adult, and a small vesicle which is contained in the appendage, and constitutes the internal blind end of the nephridial portion of the somite. The body-cavity consists of four divisions—a central compartment which contains the intestine and gonads, a pericardial cavity, lateral compartments containing the nerve-cords and salivary glands, and the portion in the appendage. If it is true, as is likely, that the ccelomic relations of other Arthropods are similar to those of Peripatus, we may add to the definition of the group the terms—ccelom inconspicuous, body-cavity consisting entirely of vascular spaces; while in Vertebrates and most Annelids the body-cavity is entirely ccelomic, and the vascular spaces are broken up into a complicated system of channels, and in Mollusca generally the pericardium alone is ccelomic, and the vascular spaces are represented by the heart and the more or less complicated system of spaces in the body, Mr. Sedgwick enters with some detail into the incomplete segmentation 584 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and syncytial nature of the embryo, as to which he has already made some remarks. Peripatus capensis is remarkable, even if not unique, among animals for the large size of its egg, combined with the almost complete absence of yolk; the history of its segmentation shows that at no period of development are the cells which arise from that segmentation completely isolated units; on the other hand it is quite certain that in small holoblastic eggs the cleavage is complete, and the question naturally arises, is the com- plete or the incomplete cleavage phylogenetically the more correct. In answer to this we may observe that no animal is composed of a mass of separate and similar cells, that complete cleavage is probably very much rarer than is generally supposed; when such a cleavage does take place it may possibly be due to “an intensely active force in the centre of the cell, which compels for the moment the assumption of this (clean rounded) form in the protoplasm over which it has dominion.” The phenomena of seg- mentation in the ova of various Crustacea suggest that it may be possible to find a purely mechanical explanation of complete cleavage. The sup- position that the ancestral Metazoon was a colonial Protozoon is not supported by holoblastic segmentation, but is somewhat favoured by what we know about incomplete cleavage. The view, however, which is in accordance with the facts of develop- ment of Peripatus capensis is the old doctrine that the ancestral Metazoon was a multinucleated infusorian-like animal. But this view is, after all, only “a more or less plausible suggestion without any strong basis in fact.” Mr. Sedgwick proceeds to criticize the speculations of Metschnikoff, and points out certain difficulties and misunderstandings; the chief point in which they disagree is that Mr. Sedgwick cannot accept the view that the hollow blastula is a primitive form, or that the formation of the endoderm by migration inwards of the cells is a primary process. Attention is directed to the fact that the formation of mesoderm in Peripatus is essentially a formation of nuclei which pass to their respective positions and arrange themselves in the protoplasmic reticulum there present, and to the observation that the primitive streak is the growing point of the animal, from which almost all the tissues of the adult are derived; its nuclei, therefore, are not merely mesodermal, but are also ectodermal and endodermal. 5. Arachnida. Morphological Significance of so-called Malpighian Vessels of two Spiders.*—Dr. J. C. C. Loman has made transverse sections through the hinder part of the body of a Cteniza from West Java, the examination of which shows that the two excretory ducts are appendages of the midgut ; similar relations have been observed in Epeira, Tegenaria, and Mygale. Other points of difference between these ducts and the Malpighian vessels of insects are to be found in (1) the structure of the separate cells, which in spiders are of the type of enteric epithelial cells, and (2) as to their function, for the contents of the spider’s ducts are fluid, and their slight contents are by no means of the character of renal concretions; uric acid and uric salts were wanting. The resemblance of these tubes to the tubular excretory organs which have been shown by Spencer to be connected with the midgut in Oniscus, Gammarus, &c., is another indication of that connection between the Arachnida and the Crustacea rather than the Insecta, which recent studies have gone so far to support. * Tijdschr, Nederl, Dierk. Vereen., i. (1886-7) pp. 109-13. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 585 Chorioptes (or Symbiotes) on Birds.*—M. L. Trouessart, remarking that Sarcoptes is the only acarid that has yet been certainly found on birds, now directs attention to the discovery by MM. Rivolta and Caparini on fowls, of two acari which they call Epidermoptes bifurcatus and E. bilobatus ; the latter is synonymous with Symbiotes avium; these creatures appear to the naturalists just named to be the cause of grave attacks of psoriasis. M. Trouessart, however, agrees with M. Neumann, that the psoriasis is rather due to Achorion Schénleiniit, and thinks that the figures given of Epidermoptes show that that genus has not the form either of rostrum or of limbs which is proper to the fossorial habits of the psoric species, and that its facies is that of a plumicolous sarcoptid. On Passer domesticus there lives, as there probably does on a number of other birds, a species which certainly belongs to the genus Chorioptes (Gervais) or Symbiotes (Gerlach); it is found at the point of insertion of the primary feathers, and does not seem to penetrate deeply into the skin; it is proposed to call it C. avus. On P. domesticus there is a very small Pierotichus which may be called P. dermicola, as it lives under the skin of the body. Sarcoptes levis.j—Prof. A. Raillet gives an account of a new acarid found parasitic on the pigeon and the fowl. This new species is very closely allied to Sarcoptes mutans, but appears to differ in having only one larva at a time; it is also smaller than S. mutans, though larger than S. fossor ; it approaches the latter, and differs from the former species by the absence of cutaneous papille on the notogastrum of the female. The most important character, however, is the presence of two copulatory suckers on the male, for this is a very exceptional, though not unique, possession in the genus Sarcoptes. The mode of life of this new species shows that the name of plumicolous Sarcoptide is not exclusively applicable to the Analgerine, for S. levis lives in the follicles of feathers. The author is of opinion that the presence or absence of copulatory suckers in a given form is not sufficient to justify the creation uf a new genus, or even of a special section of an old genus. Stage in the Development of Galeodes.{—Herr A. Croneberg describes a somewhat remarkable stage in the development of Galeodes araneoides ; the spherical abdomen forms the chief mass of the contents of the egg and the broad and flattened cephalothorax with the folded palpi, and the legs are pressed down on the lower surface of the abdomen. The appearance of young which have just escaped gives the impression of a contraction of the abdomen having driven part of the fluids contained in it into the anterior part of the body, the appendages of which have thereby become suddenly extended ; the abdomen is now seen to be of an elongate egg-shape, and to have some slight constrictions. The cuticle is shown to be pro- visional by the complete absence of all the setw and hairs which are so numerous in the adult; along the back alone is there a double row of twelve setz. The appendages have as yet no distinct sign of seg- mentation, and there are no indications of the abdominal limbs. The rostrum is stout and broad, and is completely devoid of the complicated setal apparatus at its tip; the highly chitinized pharynx is provided with projecting chitinous ridges, and so calls to mind the structure of the Pseudoscorpions. Most remarkable is the presence of a pair of flat, wing- like appendages, about 0°5 mm. long, which are inserted on either side of * Comptes Rendus, civ. (1887) pp. 921-3. + Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xii. (1887) pp. 127-36 (1 pl.). + Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 163-4, 1887. 2 @ 586 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the cephalothorax in the space between the first and second pairs of feet ; they are situated, however, very much higher than the feet, and there are no signs of them in the adult. It is difficult to say what these provisional organs mean, but they may perhaps be best compared with the paired appendages found in the embryo of Asellus. In Galeodes they are invested in a distinct cellular layer, which is altogether identical with the matrix of the general body-covering, but which does not contain trachez, nerves, or muscles. As there was not, in the stage observed, any indication beneath the cuticle of the various appendages which are permanently connected with the skin, it is probable that the Galeodide live for a time in this pupal condition after escaping from the egg. e. Crustacea. Parasitic Castration and its influence on the External Characters of male Decapod Crustacea.*—Prof. A. Giard has found that Sacculina Fraissei, which is parasitic on Stenorhynchus phalangium, so acts on the males as to give them very much the appearance of females ; indeed, if one neglects to lift the caudal appendage and observe the position of the genital orifice there is some difficulty in determining the sex. Similar modifica- tions were observed with young males of Portunus holsatus infested by Sacculina Andersonii (sp. noy.), and less considerable modifications were detected in other species. The Bopyride which infest young Decapods bring about similar results, and Perez has noticed a case of parasitic castration in the hymenopterous insects of the genus Andrena which is in- fested by Stylops. The author discusses the results arrived at, and comes to the conclusion that the modifications due to parasitic castration must be assimilated to those which are the result of progenesis—progenesis obtain- ing when sexual reproduction occurs in a more or less precocious manner, the products being matured before the creature has attained its full development. In addition to their intrinsic interest the observations of Prof. Giard have an important bearing on the question of the value of the older statistics with regard to the Rhizocephala; the date of fixation of the parasite may be approximately fixed by the knowledge of the fact that the modification of the external sexual characters is the result of the profound lesion of the genital glands. The fact that a parasite provokes in its host an abnormal development of organs which protect it at the expense of its victim seems at first sight very exceptional, but it is to be regarded as a mutual adaptation which is not without analogy with numerous facts of symbiosis, while the deformations produced in various plants by the Cecidomyiz or the Cynipide are phenomena of exactly the same kind; a curious case is that of the white campion (Melandryum album) which is infested by Ustilago antherarum ; when the parasitic fungus is developed on a male plant it fructifies in the stamens, when it falls on a female the stamens, instead of remaining rudimentary, become completely developed just as the male Stenorhynchus widens its abdomen to protect the Sacculina Fraissei. Paleemonetes varians.{—M. T. Barrois gives a careful account of the characters of Palzmonetes varians Leach, and discusses its geographical distribution. As to the somewhat anomalous characters of the latter the following explanation is offered; in earlier times the ancestors of existing * Bull. Sci. Dep. Nord, x. (1887). Cf. Ann. and Mag. Nat, Hist., xix, (1887) . 825-45. sg + Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xi. (1887) pp. 691-707 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 587 lacustrine forms inhabited fjords and more or less deep bays which gradually lost their communication with the sea; the waters, which became less and less saline, were finally quite fresh, but they retained such of the animals as were able to adapt themselves to the new conditions of existence ; it is because of this process that we find the same species in the sea as in fresh-water lakes. Phylogeny of Bopyride.*—MM. A. Giard and J. Bonnier, limiting themselves for the present to European Decapoda, point out that each species of these Crustacea may have two or three distinct parasites; the Bopyride parasitic on the Decapoda may be divided into three groups—abdominal, branchial, and visceral parasites; analogous cases may be cited among the Branchiobdellide of the crayfish and the Cistride of deer and horses. These facts, incomprehensible on the theory of the fixity of species, seem to show that several states of symbiotic equilibrium have been succes- sively realized ; by the aid of development these can be traced in the case of the Bopyride. The first larva is very uniform throughout the group, and its long pelagic existence shows us that the ancestors of the Bopyride were free forms; by the whole of its organization it approaches the Ggide, and more particularly Eurydice. The second larva is of the Cryptoniscus-stage, and it is now that the parasitic life begins; in the Cryptoniscide the male is arrested in its development at the second larval stage, but in the other Bopyride it takes a more or less Idothea-like form. The singular coexistence of parasitic Cirripedes in all the types of Decapods infested by the Bopyride leads us to suppose that the Bopyrids have been introduced into the Decapoda by the Cirripedia Rhizocephala ; while the members of one branch of the Cryptoniscide have remained faithful to their first host, another branch has become adapted for direct parasitism on the Decapoda, and has given rise to Phryxus, Bopyrus, and the Entoniscide. The presence of a phryxoid stage in the development of most female Bopyride shows that the genus Phryxus may be regarded as the stock whence many have issued. Muscular Fibres of Edriophthalmata.t—Dr. R. Keebler has investi- gated the mode of grouping of the contractile elements in the muscle-fibres of Isopoda and Amphipoda, as well as their relation to the cells from which they are developed. A large number of forms were examined. The con- tractile substance occupies the central region of the primitive bundle, while the protoplasm not differentiated into fibrils forms a peripheral envelope. It may form a layer more or less thick, but its situation in relation to the contractile element is always the inverse of that which is observed in the muscles of other animals. The variations in the different forms concern the size of the muscle-cells and primitive cylinders, the number of the cylinders, the form, development, and relative importance of the contractile element, and finally the number, size, &c., of the nuclei. The size of the muscle elements is not proportionate to that of the animal. As regards the above variations, Amphipods are much more regular than Isopods. Copepod Parasite of Amphiura squamata.{—M. A. Giard describes the female, male, and young forms of Cancerilla tubulata Dalyell, which he found at Fécamp as a very abundant parasite on Amphiura squamata. (a) The female, which is generally fixed to the oral face of the disc, at the base of a ray, with its head towards the mouth, has a triangular form, * Comptes Rendus, civ. (1887) pp. 1309-11. + Journ. Anat, et Physiol, xxiii. (1887) pp. 113-23 (1 pl.). t+ Comptes Rendus, civ. (1887) pp. 1189-92. 2Q2 588 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO due to the presence of two egg-sacs as large as the body. The form and appendages are deseribed. (b) The male, which is much rarer and decidedly smaller, resembles a Cyclops. It differs markedly in the structure of the first and second thoracic appendages. (c) Reproduction goes on from May to September; two or three egg- laden females may occur on one Amphiura; the segmentation is total and unequal; the gastrulation epibolic; the embryo a nauplius. The young forms fix themselves to the extremities of the arms of the Amphiura, and approach the disc as they grow. _ In most of its characters, Cancerilla tubulata approaches Ascomyzon echinicola Norman, a parasite of Hchinus esculentus, and Asterocheres lillyeborgii Axel Boeck, a parasite of Echinaster sanguinolentus. Its buccal armature connects the Pecilostomata with the Siphonostomata, and M. Giard proposes to unite the Lichomolgide Kossmann (Sapphirinide Brady), the Ascomyzontide Axel Boeck (Artotrogide Brady), the Bomolo- chide Claus, and the Ergasilide Claus, in a single group of Coryceide. Vermes. a, Annelida. Origin of Excretory System of Earthworms.*— Prof. E. B. Wilson, who has studied the development of Lumbricus olidus, finds a remarkable similarity between the development of its nephridia and the origin of the excretory system in Vertebrates. Of the eight large cells at the hinder end of the embryo two are nephroblasts ; from each cell a row of cells extends forwards on the ventral side of the body; the rows are at first one cell wide, but become solid cords, several cells in thickness ; in each somite a solid outgrowth from each nephridial row projects into the ccelom, and is ultimately converted into a nephridium ; as these organs arise as metameric outgrowths from a solid cord of cells that lies in the somatopleure, their mode of development is essentially similar to that of the vertebrate prone- phros. The nephroblast is originally an ectoblastic cell, and later sinks below the surface. Hatschek, Meyer, and Lang have called attention to the close resemblance between the Wolffian ducts of vertebrates and the longitudinal canal that unites the nephridia of the larval Polygordius and some adult annelids; the present results supply the embryological proof of the homology of the two structures, and show that the excretory system of annelids and vertebrates are constructed on fundamentally the same type, and originate by similar modes of development. Polycheta of Dinard.j—M. le Baron de Saint-Joseph deals in this first portion of his memoir with the Syllide ; in his introduction he speaks of the importance of examining Annelids in the living condition, pointing out that large species can only be preserved in alcohol, which destroys their colours and contracts their tissues, while all the media in which smaller forms are mounted have their inconveniences. The best—or, rather, the least objectionable —is Langerhans’s fluid, which consists of five parts of gum arabic and five of distilled water, to which, after twenty-four hours, are added five parts of glycerin and ten of a five per cent. solution of phenic acid; before being put in this the worm should be plunged-in a one per cent. solution of chromic acid, which kills it without causing so much contraction as alcohol. * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1887, pp. 49-50. 7 Ann. Sci. Nat., i. (1887) pp. 127-270 (6 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 589 Five different modes of reproduction are known among the Syllida :— (1) By direct reproduction, as in a number of forms. (2) By alternate generation and fission, and then by budding from a single stolon, as in Syllis hamata, S. Krohnii, and others; the stolones of the different genera always differ from the stock, and they differ also among themselves in the forms of their heads, of which there are four distinct types, that of Syllis amica, that of Cheetosyllis, of Tetraglene, and of Ioida. (8) There may be reproduction by successive alternating generations, at first by fission with a single stolon, then by budding with a single stolon, and lastly by budding with several stolons in a chain, all the chains having for males the forms of Polybostrichus, and for females that of Sacconereis; here we find Autolytus, Myrianida, Virchowia (?), and Procerastea (?). Viviparous repro- duction has been proved in two cases only, in S. vivipara and S. icisa. (5) Reproduction by lateral gemmation occurs in Syllis ramosa, where the stolones have the form of Tetraglene. There are as yet a number as to the mode of whose reproduction we are still ignorant. The descriptions of the species commence with that of Syllis hamata, under which must be included the varieties regarded by Czerniaysky as specifically distinct. S. variegata, S. prolifera are followed by S. alternosetosa sp.u. which is extremely common ; its head is provided with four small eyes without a crystalline lens, the sete are of various kinds, and remarkable for their complete alternation. S. zsthetica is also a new species characterized by the form of its sete. Under S. gracilis Czerniavsky has distinguished four species, which must be united. Pionosyllis is accepted with the emendations of Langerhans. P. longocirrata sp. un. is distinguished by having the dorsal cirri of the anterior segments excessively long; transparent organs termi- nating in a cecum surround the proboscis; the author is unable to ascribe any function to these long tubes, of which there are ten, P. lameliigera sp. n. is in some respects intermediate between Pionosyllis and Eusyllis, having, like E. lamelligera, the first ventral cirrus lamelliform and two glandular tubes attached to the sides of the proboscis. Syllides longocirrata is redescribed. LEusyllis is regarded as the bond of union between Pionosyllis and Odontosyllis, and nearer the former ; the five species found at Dinard— E. lamelligera, E. monilicornis, E. blomstrandi, and E. intermedia sp. n.—are all fragile and phosphorescent. Four species of Odontosyllis, of which O. polyodonta sp.n. has a very large number of small teeth, are mentioned. The possession of a large conical tooth must be added to the definition of the genus Trypanosyllis, which is represented at Dinard by two species. Pierosyllis spectabilis is carefully described ; this species often has its body and long dorsal cirri covered with Trichodina Auerbachii, and a curious marine infusorian which was described but not named by Claparéde; it may be called Ophryodendron annulatorum. Eurysyllis paradoxa in its various stages is described. Grubea. clavata, G. pusilla, Sphzerosyllis hystrix, and S. erinaceus are described, With regard to Langerhans’s supposition that Pzedophylax exhibits alternations of generation, Baron de Saint-Joseph expresses the opinion that the German naturalist based his view on animals which had lost their proboscis and proventriculus. Seven phases of P. claviger are described. The genus Autolytus must include Procerza and Stephanosyllis ; the author gives an emended definition. A. paradoxus sp. n. is distinguished by having, from the third segment, the dorsal cirri alternately short and long. = eat UL Nee 2 ee TEES eel = —— I ta 3 ad results which serve to check or prove the comparisons. It includes a method for investigating the subdivisions of the standard by comparing each part of the total length with a constant distance, determined by two adjustable stops. A heavy cast-iron base-is mounted upon stone-capped brick piers, giving a permanent foundation to the apparatus. Upon this base, and reaching from end to end, are two heavy steel tubes 3 in. in diameter, ground perfectly straight, and made “true” by a system of local correc- tions after they are firmly secured upon the bed-plate of the machine, the object being to get a straight-line motion of the Microscope plate, which slides freely on these true cylinders. Flexure of these cylindrical guides is provided for, by lever supports at the neutral points. Fitted closely to these guides, and outside of the range of motion of the Microscope plate, are two stops, one at each end, as shown in the figure. The stops are arranged to be adjusted at any desired position along the guides, and are _* Description supplied by Prof. Rogers. Cf. also Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts. and Sci., nae (1882-3) pp. 287-398 (7 figs.). Journ. Franklin Inst., exvii. (1884) pp. 361-5 (2 figs.). 640 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO securely held by clamping on the under side. These stops are each pro- vided with a pair of electro-magnets, the poles of which do not come ‘in contact with the armature seen at either end of the Microscope plate. ‘The magnets are intended to overcome the unequal pressure due to ordinary contact, a rack and pinion being used to move the plate. The magnets are used to lock the Microscope plate at each end of its traverse between the stops. Beyond the main base just described, and supported also on brick piers, is an auxiliary cast-iron frame, which is provided with lateral and vertical motion within limits of zero, and 8 in. and 10 in. respectively, for rough or approximate adjustment, and upon the top of this frame are two car- riages, which slide from end to end, a distance of about 40 in. Upon these sliding carriages are placed tables provided with means of minute adjust- ment, for motion lengthwise, sidewise, and for levelling, thus permitting the adjustment of a standard yard bar quickly, and without the necessity of its being touched with the hands after being placed upon the table until the work of comparison is completed. The tubes of the Microscopes are 12 in. long and 1} in. diameter with eye-piece micrometers, and the objectives are fitted with Tolles’s illumi- nating prism just above the lower lens. This method of illumination has proved to be invaluable in the work of comparing line measure standards, especially so in the case of bars having lines ruled on polished gold surfaces at the bottom of wells sunk one-half the depth of the bar. The first operation in the use of the comparator is to level the main base ; then sliding the Microscope plate from end to end of the steel tubular guides—having the Microscope adjusted so as to be in focus upon the surface of the mercury held in a shallow trough, over which the Micro- scope passes—the curvature due to flexure of the guides is determined, and may be compensated for by counterweights at the various points of support. In order to test this right-line path of the Microscope plate, the following method is employed. A fine line is traced upon the plane surface of a standard bar, extending throughout its entire length. This is accom- plished by means of a cutting-tool attached to the Microscope carriage. Then, reversing the position of the bar, a second line is traced near the first, care being taken to have the distance between the two lines of each end a constant quantity. If the distance between the lines is a con- stant at every point, it is safe to assume that the horizontal curvature is insensible. The extent of the effect of any horizontal curvature in the cylindrical ways may also be found by comparing the lengths of two standards placed at varying distances from the centre line between the ways. While the comparator has all the conveniences belonging to the ordinary method of comparisons by means of two Microscopes, preference is given to the “stop method.” The adjustable “stop plates” are first set approxi- mately at a distance apart equal to the lengths of the standards to be com- pared. The Microscope plate having been brought into contact with the left stop, the reading of the micrometer is made for coincidence with the initial line of the standard. The carriage is then placed in contact with the second stop and the reading for coincidence with the terminal line is then taken. ‘he bar to be compared now takes the place of the standard, and micrometer readings are made as before. The difference between the results of these micrometer readings gives the difference between the lengths ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 641 of the two standards, since the distance between the stops may be con- sidered constant for the short interval of time required to make the com- parisons. It is the experience of Prof. Rogers that the precision of the contacts is about four times as great as that of making coincidences between a line of the scale and the micrometer line of the Microscope. The experi- ment of making one hundred successive contacts and coincidences has been frequently made without observing a single instance in which a variation from constancy under a 1/4 objective could be detected. In the employment of the “two Microscope method,” the comparator has a convenient auxiliary attachment for observing the graduations when the graduated surface is in a vertical plane, according to the method first used by Lane of the U.S. Coast Survey. A modification of this form of comparator, made by the Ballou Manu- facturing Company, of Hartford, Conn., from the plans of Prof. Rogers, for Prof. Anthony, of Cornell University, is shown in fig. 159. The instrument - is mounted upon a single heavy base. Though not having the range of motion in the adjustable supports for the standard bars possible with the original comparator, it possesses all of the conveniences for rapid adjust- ment and accuracy of movement. The right line motion of all moving parts longitudinally is governed by heavy cylindrical guides, and the same Fic. 159. jul method of the “stops” is used in the comparison of either line or end measure stundards of length. In this form of the comparator an effort was made to reduce the cost of construction without impairing the efficiency of the apparatus. The reduction effected in the cost was very considerable. The instrument shown in fig. 158 cost 2500 dollars, while that shown in fig. 159 cost only 800 dollars.* im i * Cf. also a paper by Prof. W. C. Unwin, “Measuring-Instruments used in Mechanical Testing,” Proc. Phys. Soc. Lond., viii. (1887) pp. 179-84 (3 figs.). 642 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Geneva Co.’s Comparator.—The Geneva Society for the Construction of Physical Instruments constructed for the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures, at Paris, the comparator shown in fig. 160, for determining the co-efficients of dilatation of divided metre scales. are made use of,* In this four Microscopes Fie. 160. fu Hm ] HN To ae * Cf. description in the ‘Mémoires du Bureau International des Poids et Mesures.’ The two Microscopes on the stone pillars were made by MM. Brunner Freres, of Paris. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 643 Geneva Co’s. Reading Microscope——In this Microscope (fig. 161) designed more particularly for astronomical purposes—the determination of the nadir with a mercury bath—the principle of the ‘* Vertical [nminator” is made use of for illumination. Fic. 161. Just below the 1 in. objective is a circular opening a which admits light to a piece of thin cover-glass, which is supported on an axis which passes out at one side and terminates in a milled head. On setting the thin glass at the appropriate angle, light is reflected on the object under examination, while at the same time the glass does not obstruct the observer’s vision through the eye-piece and objective. The upper milled head clamps the body-tube in the socket when it has been adjusted to the proper sie The whole instrument is 4 in. high. Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co.’s Reading Microscope.— This (fig. 162) is also intended for reading off measurements by the aid of a compound Microscope. The one figured has a single Microscope only, but some are supplied with two. The Microscope slides in a socket attached to a frame which moves in a deep V-shaped groove on the top of a heavy open brass support. A micrometer screw acting against an upper and lower spiral spring moves the Microscope laterally, the extent of movement being indicated on a horizontal graduated bar, the periphery of a coned nut on the screw axis AEA Fic. 162, i _ + oy in po} serving as the index. Fractions of divisions are recorded by graduations on the nut itself, the bar, which has a bevelled edge, here acting as the index. Campani’s Compound Microscope.—One of the earliest opticians known to have made a specialty of the construction of Microscopes was 644 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Giuseppe Campani of Rome, who flourished in the latter half of the 17th century, when he was regarded as one of the most skilful makers of tele- scopes in Europe, outrivalling Eustachio Divini of Bologna, and in technical perfection of optical work not unworthy to rank with Huyghens. His Microscopes have now become so rare that we need hardly plead any other justification for figuring one of them (fig. 163) which we met with during a recent visit to Italy, and which is the first (to our knowledge) that has been figured.* The body-tubes are of wood, and are provided with a double focusing arrangement, one (the lower) for regulating the distance between the object-lens and the object by screwing into the metal ring-socket supported on the tripod, the other for varying the distance of the eye-lens from the object-lens by a screw-motion of the upper tube within the lower one. The base consists of two plates, the upper one being attached to the tripod and the lower one being held to the former by the lateral pressure of a bent spring on either side travelling on rollers, the object-slide being placed between the plates, which are perforated in the centre so that the object may be viewed by transmitted light. The object-lens is bi-convex, of somewhat yellow glass, and about 1/2 in. focus, and is held in a wood cell by a perforated cap, which serves as a diaphragm. The eye-lens is bi-convex, of about 1 in. focus. There is no field-lens, and hence we think the date of the construction may with some probability be assigned as prior to that of Hooke’s compound Microscope (vide his ‘ Micrographia,’ 1665), in which the appli- cation of a field lens was claimed as a novelty. In confirmation of this point we may note also that in 1667 Hon. Fabri, in his ‘Synopsis optica’ (4to, Lugduni), Prop. 46, described a compound Microscope by Divini, in which two pairs of plano-convex lenses were used for the eye-lens and field-lens respectively, so that the application of a field-lens to the eye-piece of a Microscope was known in Italy at that date. Divini’s Microscope was also fully described in the ‘Giornale de Letterati, i. (1668) pp. 52-4, which description was partly translated in Phil. Trans., 111. (1668) p. 842, and must have become widely known. Fic. 163. James’s Dissecting Microscope.,—Dr. F. L. James uses a cigar-box ‘from which the top and front side have been removed, an old hand-mirror, and a plate-glass cover (fig. 164). In use, this stands on a board which carries an upright rod, provided with a ball-and-socket joint. On this rod slides an arm made of wire, twisted so as to hold a watchmaker’s eye-glass. When not in use the ball-and-socket joint permits this rod to be turned down out of the way. The object to be dissected or slide to be arranged is placed on the plate-glass cover. The light is thrown upward by the mirror and through the cover-plate, so as to render visible the minutest detail of * Society of Arts Cantor Lectures on the Microscope, by J. Mayall, junr. (reprint in collected form) 1886, p. 10 (1 fig.). ¢ Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr. Sth Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 145-6 (1 fig.). ; ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 645 the object to be arranged. In fact the entire combination is a sort of mounting and dissecting Microscope on a large scale. Fic. 164. Bauscu, E.—Two new combined inverted and vertical Microscopes. [Describes the Microscopes noted ante, p. 141.] Proc. Amer, Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 148-9 (1 fig.). Competition for the best Microscope. [“‘ Notes from our London Correspondent.” “Certain amateurs of the Microscope in London have been recently discussing the advisability of proposing a com- petition among opticians : (1) for the best stand for the highest class of work; (2) for the best stand to be supplied for a given sum, say 20/.; and (3) the best student’s Microscope, costing, say, 5/. The suggestion is that a handsome gold medal might be awarded for the best instrument in each class. Special precau- tions would doubtless have to be taken in the two latter competitions to insure the strict fulfilment of the conditions as to the cost of the instruments. A jury would have to be named comprising microscopists of known skill in the use of the instrument, and one of the principal conditions would be that every Micro- scope would be put through its paces by one or other of the jury—not by the opticians or their nominees. If this matter could be brought to a focus I hope the American opticians will join in the competition. The intention is to arrange the fairest possible conditions, so that the awards may carry the highest possible authority.” ] [Nothing has been heard of this here!] Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, TV. (1887) p. 17. Czapsxt1, S.—Die Mikrometerbewegung an den neueren Zeiss’schen Stativen. (The fine-adjustment to the new Zeiss stands.) [Same as Journal, 1886, p. 1051, but different fig.] Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenk., VII. (1887) pp. 221-2 (1 fig.). NaGcura, O.—[The Choice of a Microscope.] (Japanese. ] Tokio Med. Journ., 1886, No. 420. NeEtson, E. M.—New Microscope. [Original description. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 292.] Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, III. (1887) pp. 85-8 (1 fig.). STRICKER, S.—Demonstrationen mit dem elektrischen Mikroskop. (Demonstrations with the electric Microscope.) Wiener Med. Bi., 1X. (1886) No. 39. (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. “New Glycerin Immersion Microscopic Objective.”—We have been favoured by a firm of Manchester opticians with a copy of a notice under this heading in which the following statement is made :— “Their experiments and experience prove glycerin to be a much better medium than water or oil. Water necessitates the Microscope being used 646 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO almost upright, and soon evaporates. Oil requires great care in manipula- tion and loss of time in cleaning off after use. Glycerin is free from these objections. It will remain three or four days limpid and free from evapora- tion, and only requires cleaning off with a camel-hair pencil dipped in water, and the lens dried with blotting-paper. This objective has more brilliant definition, deeper penetration, and a greater working distance from the object than any others of its class at much higher prices.” It is not a little surprising that in these days an optician should show such a want of appreciation of elementary optical principles. Glycerin having a lower refractive index than the oil used for immersion the objective is not a homogeneous-immersion objective, with which, therefore, it cannot be compared. Glycerin having a lower refractive index than the fluid used for homogeneous-immersion, the aperture of glycerin objectives, and with it the brilliancy of the definition, is necessarily reduced. 'The “deeper penetration ” is of course simply a function of the reduced aperture. Why a glycerin objective should have a greater working distance it would puzzle an optician to say. Apart from optical errors, it is equally erroneous to say that glycerin requires less care in manipulation and takes less time to clean off than oil, while its well-known tendency to absorb moisture, and therefore to change in index, is more than a compensation for its alleged freedom from evaporation. It will be news to many that “ water necessitates the Microscope being used nearly upright.” Notwithstanding the glowing panegyric on this objective the notice of its virtues, although stating that it isa 1/16 in., omits any mention of its aperture. Zeiss's Objective-changer, with slide and centering adjustment. — This contrivance (figs. 165 and 166) is designed to Dee (1) accurate Fic. 166. XK SH i We = 4 a Be co a =e = centering, and (2) rapid change of the objectives. It consists of two parts, the tube-slide and the objective-slide. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 647 The tube-slide is screwed to the bottom of the body-tube. The plane of the sliding motion is purposely made, not at right angles to the axis of the instrument, but inclined at an angle to it, so that the objective falls and rises as it is inserted or withdrawn. In this way any danger of contact with the object is avoided. The objective is screwed to the objective-slide, and the plane of motion makes with the axis of the objective an angle which is the supplement of that of the tube-slide. At one end is a screw turned ‘by a watch-key, which acts as a stop to bring the objective always back to the same position, and which also serves as a centering adjustment in the direction of the slide, while the adjustment in the transverse direction is effected by a similar screw working at right angles to the first. Objectives whose settings are approximately compensated for their focal lengths can, by means of the clamp-screw on the objective-slide, be set once for allin their proper position. Any number of objective-slides may be used with one tube-slide. The two pieces fit one another accurately. The objectives always return to the same position, so that the same part of the object occupies the field of view. Horxins, G. M.—Diminishing the power of an Objective. [It is often desirable to diminish the magnifying power of an objective, and at the same time increase its penetration. For example, if one possesses a 13 in. or 2 in. objective, and desires to examine objects like minerals in the natural state, crystals, seeds, &c., he will find it necessary to focus up and down upon the object to see it in all parts. A 3 in. or 4 in. objective would furnish the desired power, but it is not at hand. To increase the focal length, and at the same time enlarge the field and deepen the focus, it is only necessary to place a double convex lens of, say, 5 in. focus about half-way down the draw-tube. The action of such a lens is the reverse of that of an amplifier.’’] Engl. Mech., XLY. (1887) pp. 310-1, from Scientific American. (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Value of Achromatic Condensers.*—Mr. E. M. Nelson and Mr. G. C. Karop write that an achromatic oil-immersion condenser has been made for them by Mr. T. Powell (Mr. Nelson having, in 1882, suggested to him the necessity for achromatizing the then chromatic oil-condenser ) and that this has enabled them to illuminate objects by solid axial cones of larger angle than before ; the spherical aberrations of a chromatic condenser being so great that only the rays passing through the centre or through a narrow zone of the condenser could be focused on the object at one time. The result has been a marked increase in resolution. In illustration of this increased resolution they refer to w drawing of an areolation of the same valve of Isthmia nervosa, which they figured in their former paper.t The straight bars of silex, by which the central delicate perforated membrane was shown to be attached to the margin of the areolation now have a trabecular appearance ; the delicate membrane extends to the edge of the large areolation, and has perforations more difficult to resolve than those in the centre. They point out that this is not a correction of misinterpretation of optical images, but a clear case of increased resolution, due to an improve- mont in optical appliances. Even now they do not wish to lay any claim t» finality, but to show that every advance in perfecting instrumental appli- ances is attended by an increased gain in our knowledge of structure. In addition to the new condenser they have used Professor Abbe’s new compensating eye-pieces, which give sharper images than those of the Huyghenian construction. * Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1887) pp. 41-3. + Ibid., ii, (1886) pp. 269-71 (1 pl.). 648 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Condenser.—The speciality of this condenser (fig. 167) is that one end of the cross arm has a weight acting as a counterpoise to the bull’s-eye lens at the other end. The lens is 3 in. in diameter. Miles’ “‘ Desideratum” Condenser.*—Mr. J. L. W. Miles’ condenser “ consists of a plano-convex lens of given dimensions, having a ground spot in the centre; to this can be superadded an adjustable plano-convex lens of short focus. These can be used with or without a system of stops and discs with openings by means of a sliding spindle, which enables any size or character of stop to be placed close under, or at any distance from the lenses. “The following is a recapitulation of the working capabilities of the condenser :— “The back lens, used as a simple condenser for all powers, will be found to meet all the requirements of the ordinary microscopist. With a 1/2 in. objective of 70° or 80° aperture, and a C eye-piece, P. angulatum can be ‘ dotted’ readily. “Used as a combined condenser and light-modifier, it possesses advan- tages superior to the devices in common use. “ As a dark-ground illuminator, it leaves nothing to be desired, working easily with powers from 3 in. to 1/2 in. of 40° inclusive ; and also with the 4 in. by increasing the size of the spot-stop. “It gives binocular vision with 1/4 in. objectives, illuminating both * Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, pp. 31-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 649 fields of a binocular Microscope, in use with that power, remarkably well; hence, as may be inferred, there is no difficulty whatever in illuminating both fields with all lower powers. “Tn combination with the front lens it has an aperture of 110°, and will, in conjunction with a suitable stop, give dark-ground illumination, with 1/4 in. objectives, up to 100° of aperture, or with any power intermediate between that and the 1 in. “The combined lenses, having a comparatively large aperture, will be found useful in all cases when a pencil of light of large angular dimensions is desirable, which is very seldom. “Used with a stop having one or more side-openings, it will give uni- lateral or equidistant beams of light of considerable obliquity. “ Generally speaking, the stops, when used, are to be placed close under the lenses, but in practice it will be found that placing a large stop at some distance from the back lens will occasionally disclose structure when every other method fails. A unilateral beam of light, for resolving P. angulatum on a dark ground, is best got by placing a suitable stop on the back lens before screwing on the front. “Last, and not least, of the merits of this condenser, is the low price at which it can be supplied, and adapted to nearly any Microscope. It has one fault; it is non-achromatic. This defect is not noticeable with low and medium powers. In using the combined lenses with high powers, the defect may be minimized considerably by careful focusing. Using one lens only, the defect will scarcely ever be noticed. As a matter of fact, only the most costly condensers are really achromatic. To make this into a so-called achromatic condenser would increase its cost, and render it useless for many purposes.” Nachet’s Camera Lucida for Magnifiers.*—This apparatus, shown in fig. 168, consists of a glass cube A, formed of two prisms, one of which has an hypothenuse surface gilded on Prof. Govi’s Fie. 168. method. This is sufficiently 9 transparent to transmit the rays from the object C to the eye at O at the same time asit reflectsalsoto the 4, eye the rays from the paper B and mirror M. The doublet or single lens is at L. The images are of-_ two different tints, the one seen through the gold film being emerald green and that seen by _ reflection yellow. The difference of sagaed is said to be of advantage in making clearly visible the point of the pencil. M. Nachet supplies the apparatus in connection with the stand, fig. 169. The instrument can also be used to reduce drawings, which are placed under the mirror M and the paper under the lens L; for this purpose the mirror is made to rotate and an extra low power lens is used. As the smallest movements of the pencil are followed by the lens, these reductions c B * Robin’s (C.) ‘ Traité du Microscope,’ 2nd ed., 1877, pp. 429-31 (2 figs.). 1887. 2-U 650 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEAROHES RELATING TO have, says Prof. Robin, “ a character of precision and finish quite remark- able.” Prism for Drawing.—In accordance with our ouster of chronicling microscopic apparatus actually brought to the condition of practical manu- facture and use, we note this device of an anonymous designer. It consists of a right-angled prism, not attached’ above the eye-piece, but placed at the nose-piece over the objective, the image being reflected on paper placed on the table on which the Microscope stands. It cannot, however, be used with ordinary Microscopes where the body-tube is in front of the limb, but only with such forms as the Watson-Moss,* where the body-tube is at the side. Bausch and Lomb Optical Co’s. Mechanical Stages.—These are made in the two forms shown in figs. 171 and 172. Fig. 171 is 43 in. in diameter, Fie. 171. and is intended to be used with the “Concentric” and ‘Professional ” Microscopes. It is thin, to allow great obliquity, but firm. The movements are contained within the circumference of the stage, so that it can make * See this Journal, 1881, p. 516. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 651 a complete rotation. The rectangular movements are delicate and actuated by two milled heads, placed one above the other (Turrell form). ‘I'he upper part of the stage is polished black glass; the edge is milled, graduated to degrees and silvered. Fic. 172. Fig. 172 can be adapted to any Microscope which will admit of a stage 34 in. in diameter. The movements are all contained on the upper surface of the stage, and it can therefore be completely rotated. It is thin and will admit the use of very oblique light. Smirnow’s Microstat.*—Dr. A. Smirnow describes, under the name of microstat, an apparatus which he has constructed to obviate the great Fia. 173. | eee EE } ————— EN oD I HARI 6 nN inconvenience of examining the whole of a large object under high powers, or of re-finding minute objects, such as Bacteria, in a large preparation. The purpose of the instrument is much the same, he notes, as that of Klénne and Miiller’s Bacterium finder. or The principle of the contrivance is based on the fact that any point * Russ. Med., 1886, No. 27 (in Russian). Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxix. (1887) pp. 384-8 (1 fig.). 202 652 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO may be determined by its distance from two fixed points or lines on the same plane. The slide is placed in a frame A and kept always in the same position by arod X. Before the slide is inserted the rod X is pressed forward to the anterior margin of the frame. where it is held by two teeth M. By pressing the knobs of the teeth, the rod is released and springs back so as to fix the slide in a given position. The frame is moved from right to left by a micrometer screw C. On an immovable plate K,a permanent point o is marked, and the adjacent margin of the movable frame is divided in 0°25 mm. Thus one line on the preparation is defined. But the frame A is fixed to another movable plate BB which is worked by the rack and pinion G, D, on an inferior fixed plate E E, and in an antero-posterior direction. One margin F of this fixed plate is also graduated, and there is another fixed point 0, so that the desired point in the field can be defined in two directions, and therefore readily determined. The plates BB and EE have apertures for illumination. The attachment to the stage is a simple matter. The whole field can be systematically observed, a point can be registered and readily found again, the size of large objects can be measured, movements of organisms can be defined, and the comparison of lent preparations greatly facilitated. Notwithstanding the fulness of the description and the renown of the German periodical in which it appears, it must be said that the “ Mierostat” is simply a mechanical stage with finders, and in this country at any rate has no feature of novelty. Darling’s Screw-Micrometer.*—Mr. 8. Darling has devised two forms of screw micrometer, in which he claims there is “no perceptible play between the threads of the screw and the nut,’ and in which “the screw will revolve much farther, relative to the motion of the cross-hairs, than in the micrometers heretofore made ;” and further, that he has found “a sub- stitute for the common cross-hairs (spider’s web), ‘by which measurements can be made with greater accuracy and uniformity.” One form of his micrometer (fig. 174, top view, with top E removed ; fig. 175, section of fig. 174 through A B) has a V-thread screw and nut, the nut Fie. 174. Ki Me 9s eee |) rea ba Fie. 175. SSN SUR Li EERE SWS AGES E Pea L, == WP Te fk MMI nd i ALLL ——— LL i 1@ | AN TA e N Cc being split at one end and a screw tightening the nut. The frame that carries the cross-hairs has a very small hard abutting-piece coming against * Specification of U.S. Patent, No. 287,420, Oct. 30, 1883. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 653 the end of the screw ; the screw also being made hard and preferably small. In another form (fig. 176 top view, with the top E removed ; fig. 177, section of fig. 176 through RS), two screws are made on the same piece, cach made Fiac. 176. mu Wi gary Fic. 177. Vv > Sa MN aa i e Yj TEI AN ln oe ia A 4 We c EGA NUN b=== == SEES N BEE TCE QQ 5 2S <7 el ea Pa a ay of a different pitch, and a whole or split nut for each part of the screw, one nut and the corresponding screw being attached to the frame that carries the cross-hairs. He proposes to use wires of glass or other suitable material instead of spider-webs, and to apply short cross-wires parallel with and opposite to each other, leaving a space between them and in various positions, so that the operator can have several points to guide him in adjusting the micro- meter on the object to be measured. He says,— “Tt is well known to mechanics that a screw loose in the nut cannot be depended upon for great accuracy and uniformity in measurements, notwithstanding the slack may be taken up by a spring, as particles of matter are liable to get between the threads and cause errors. That difficulty is avoided in this improved micrometer. From experiments it is believed that the cross-hairs in a micrometer made according to this improvement can be adjusted to a line a number of times—say five, more or less—within an error of 0:00005 of an inch. It greatly facilitates the adjusting of the cross-hairs to a line to have the screw move a considerable part of a revolution for each division of the index-wheel. It is difficult to move the screw made in the ordinary way little enough to adjust the cross- hairs in the most accurate manner, and the difficulty in moving it little enough often influences the operator to accept an adjustment as correct with which he is not fully satisfied. In the drawings I have illustrated a screw made in two parts on the same piece, one part being 20 pitch and the other 25 pitch, which gives a movement to the cross-hair frame of 1/100 in. each revolution, this being intended for ordinary work; but in a micrometer for very fine measurements I should use a screw from 35 to 40 pitch. 386 and 37-037 pitches would be 3 /4000 in. approximately, to each turn of the screw, and the object being magnified fifteen times, and the index-wheel divided into ten parts, one division on the wheel would be 1/200,000 in., and the 654 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO index-wheel being about 1-2 in. in diameter, it will be seen that the lines on the screw or index-wheel will be over 0:35 apart, instead of one-tenth (0-035) of that, when the wheel is divided into one hundred parts, in the usual way.” “T have illustrated two methods of making micrometers, which vary from each other in some respects. One method is shown in figs. 174 and 175, and the other in figs. 176 and 177. In figs. 174 and 175, C is a case with top removed, inclosing the cross- hair frame D. F are wires attached to sliding frame D. These wires may be made of metal or any suitable material, and should be from 1/500 in. to 1/1000 in. in diameter. Glass is a good material to make the wire of, as it can be pulled apart and a square end obtained. The wires can be secured to the frame by wax or any other suitable means. There may be one wire only, or two, as shown in fig. 174, or any number desired, and they may be placed in any position, as shown at A, Z, and Y, fig. 176, or any other preferred. M is a split nut. N is a screw for bringing the two parts of the nut together. J is a screw which passes through nut N, and terminates in a small hardened abutting-end K. O is an index-line. I is a small hardened abutting-piece attached to cross-hair frame D. G is a rod for holding spring H in position. Q is a graduated index-wheel. E is the top to the case C. V W X, fig. 176, are adjustable pieces, to which the wires are attached ; T the part of the screw which is 20 pitch; J, the part that is 25 pitch. The screw J, passes loosely through the frame C. It will be seen that by means of the split nut and screws N all play between the nut and the screw can be prevented. Nut B’ may be split at one end, the same as nut M, or made in two parts, with two screws as shown. ; It is evident that with the nuts properly adjusted the frame that carries the wires (cross-hairs), fig. 176, must move with the screw without variation. The arrangement shown in figs. 174 and 175 has the advantage of the split nut, and in addition to that very small abutting-surfaces, so that there will be much less liability for dust or oil to get between the abutting- surfaces K and I than in the usual form. There is a great advantage in having several points to aid in adjusting the cross-hairs to a line. If the operator is in doubt whether one point coincides with the line, the other points will help him to decide directly. In fig. 174 the nut M may be made in the frame D, as shown at B’, fig. 176, instead of being located outside of case C; but in that case the advantage of the small abutting-surfaces I and K would be lost; but it would be better than the usual form. The index-wheel is divided into ten parts and each part into five fractional parts. Now, with the two pitch-screws 36 and 37:°037 pitches, as above described, one division of the wheel will read 1/200,000 in., and each fractional part will read 1/1,000,000 in., for with a Microscope that magnifies fifteen times, one turn of the screw being 3/4000 and one division of the wheel being 3/40,000, and this magnified by fifteen times gives 3/600,000 = 1/200,000, and one-fifth (the fractional parts), will give the 1/1,000,000. The advantage in using the end of a wire instead of the side of a spider-web in the usual way, is that the full size of the line is always in view, and, having the wire nearly the size of the line, it is much easier to judge when the two coincide than when the line is covered by the cross- hairs, asin the common way, and when more wires than one are used each one will serve to correct a mistake that might be made with one alone.” ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 655 ‘ Pagan’s Growing Slide.*—The Rev. A. Pagan’s slide was designed mainly for the purpose of watching the development of rotifers and other organisms which require a constant change of water. Figs. 178-81 give the essential points of its construction, which is very simple, and so far effective as to have enabled Mr. Pagan to observe the growth of the spores of Volvoa globator after they had been confined to the slide for six weeks, the actual process of germination taking three days to complete. Fig. 178 is a longitudinal vertical section of the whole apparatus drawn to a scale of half the actual size. A is a wooden stand supporting a glass Fig. 178. trough B, from which a water supply is conveyed to a slide D by a siphon C. This siphon is made from an ordinary capillary vaccine-tube, bent over a minute gas-flame. The water is conveyed from the slide by means of a spout F’, made of blotting-paper, to another trough or suitable receptacle E. Fig. 179 shows in full size an arrangement cut out of blotting-paper, and placed on an ordinary slide, a being a circular hole for containing the object under observation. This hole is connected by a narrow channel c with another hole b, shaped as in the drawing, and so placed beneath the siphon c as to receive a drop of water as it falls. Itis sufficient, however, if the drop Fic. 179. falls on the blotting-paper. A third hole d serves to collect the super- fluous water, and also acts as a reservoir when the slide is under examina- tion with the Microscope, water being applied there from time to time with a camel’s-hair brush. When it is desired to use the instrument, the blotting-paper is wetted and put on the slide, the drop of water containing the organism placed in the hole-a, and the whole is covered with thin glass up to the dotted line e, * Journ. Quek. Mier. Club, iii. (1887) pp. 81-3 (4 figs.). 656 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO three 3/4 in. square cover-glasses being very suitable for this purpose. The siphon may now be started, the current being regulated to about one drop per minute by means of a linen thread, unravelled, soaked in water to get rid of air-bubbles, and pushed up the shorter limb of the siphon. The water is drawn off at the other end of the Fie. 180. . glide by three strips of blotting-paper, one brcad and the other two less than half the width, placed under the broad slip, thus forming a kind of channel for the water to flow through. After a time the blotting-paper is liable to get clogged, and will not allow the water to filter through; it must therefore be changed. To enable this to be done the part used on the slide is cut in pieces in the manner indicated in fig. 179. The form of the lid of the trough B is shown in fig. 180. Itis provided with three holes drilled 1 in. apart, in order that, when desired, three separate slides can be kept under treatment at the same time. Apparatus for examining living Myriopoda.*—M. J. Chalande em- ployed the following simple apparatus for microscopical observation of living Myriopoda :— ; Two glass slides are fixed, one over the other, by sealing-wax along the two sides, leaving a space of 1-2 mm. between the two slides to allow the myriopod to be introduced. One end of the apparatus is closed by means of a small piece of cardboard. The space between the two slides must vary according to the size of the specimens to be examined, and for very small forms the author substituted a cover-glass (32 by 12 mm. and 1/5 mm. in thickness) for the upper glass slide. In order to give the myriopod foothold, he gummed some particles of sand to the lower slide at various distances apart. If this is not done, the animal continues to struggle, as it endeavours to find something to hold on to. Griffith's Mechanical Finger.t—Mr. E. H. Griffith says that a cheap mechanical finger, for those who cannot afford to purchase a better one, may Fig. 181. Fic. 182. be quickly made as follows :—Procure a strip of sheet brass or other metal, and cut it like fig.181. Make the aperture just large enough to fit over the * Bull. Soc. d’Hist. Nat. Toulouse, 1886. See this Journal, ante, p. 385, t+ Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr. 9th Ann, Meeting, 1886, p. 150 (3 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 657 screw which fastens the lower system of a low-power objective to the barrel of the objective. Bend the points (1 and 2) down, so that they will meet and serve as a bristle clamp. Remove the lower system of the Fig. 183, objective, and put in the thin brass plate as in fig. 182; then draw a cat’s whisker between 1 (a and 2, and the finger will be — | ready for use as soon as the point of the whisker is in focus and in the centre of the field. A divided wire might be soldered on the ring in fig. 182, and it would answer the same purpose (see fig. 183). Griffith's Substage Diaphragm-holder and Glass Diaphragms.*—Mr. E. H. Griffith’s holder is a metal disc a (fig. 184), which is to be fastened to the substage fittings b, by means of the screw c, which allows it to be turned in any position. An aperture of any desired diameter is made in the holder a, and provided with a ledge for the support of diaphragms | Fie, 184. i i which may be dropped into position when the holder is turned on one side, as would be indicated in the fig. were the disc turned over. The slot at c allows the diaphragm to be placed central with the objective on a decentered stage. The screw-head at c should be of sufficient size to retain the holder in any position itis placed. The pin d is to indicate a central position when the holder is to be used on a well-centered stage. Thin metal discs with various apertures may be used for diaphragms, but much cheaper ones may be made by placing common round cover- glasses e f on the turntable, and with a brush quickly covering all but the desired aperture with asphalte or other pigment. In the place of diaphragms, various coloured glasses for the modification of light may be used. Fleischl’s Heemometer.t—This instrument, fig. 185, devised by Prof. E. v. Fleischl for the estimation of hemoglobin in the blood, is based on the colorimetric method ; that is, it compares the colour of red glass with that of a solution of the blood, and from the thickness of the stratum of the solution or of the glass when the tints are the same the amount of colouring matter present in the blood is determined. Prof. Fleisch] finds, however, that although it is easy to prepare a plate of red glass which has exactly the same colour as a certain thickness of a solution of blood, yet if the thickness of the plate be increased n-fold it no longer has the same depth of colour as a solution of the same blood concentrated n-fold, * Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr. 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 150-1 (1 fig.). + Med. Jahrb. K.K. Gesell. Aerzte Wien, 1885, 20 pp, and 1 pl. 658 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO or as the same solution increased n times in thickness. This peculiarity, which may totally vitiate the colorimetric method if proper precautions are not observed, is due to the fact that though the absorption of light by the glass and the blood-solution respectively are directly comparable so far as red light is concerned, there is no such direct relation for the violet Fic. 185. =) An SSS SRUFFLE rays; hence it is absolutely necessary to eliminate the violet rays from the source of illumination, and when this is done the relation is complete for all thicknesses of the plate and the solution. For this purpose the comparison must be made not by daylight nor with electric or petroleum light, but either by candle-light or with an oil or gas flame; if this cannot be done, a plate of light-yellow glass must be interposed between the instrument and the source of light. Another feature of Prof. Fleischl’s method is that the constant quantities are not, as is usual, the concentration of the solution and its thickness, but the absolute volume of the blood ex- amined and the sectional area of the cylindrical vessel in which the solution is contained, the thickness being immaterial. ; The hemometer consists of a glass tube G, 15 cm. in length and 15-20 mm. in diameter, closed at the bottom by a glass plate, and divided into two semi-cylinders a a! of equal size by a vertical glass plate 0-5 mm. thick. The cylinder is fixed to the stage over a circular aperture, through which light is projected from the mirror 8, formed of a plate of fine white sum. Beneath one half of the aperture is a wedge of red glass K, movable by the pinion and milled head RT, so that any part of the wedge may be brought under the aperture. The instrument is used in the following way: the two halves of the glass tube are filled to any height with water; in one is dissolved a unit volume of the blood, and the coloured ‘glass is then shifted until the two semi-cylinders show the same colour. ‘The position of the wedge is then read upon the graduated scale P through the opening M in the stage, the graduations being arranged so as to give direct the percentage of colouring matter as compared with the normal proportion of hemoglobin contained in healthy blood. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 659 To transfer a fixed quantity of blood to the glass cylinder Prof. Fleisch] uses what he calls an “ automatic blood-pipette,” made by dividing a fine thermometer tube into lengths of equal capacity by sliding a short column of quicksilver from one part to another of the tube and marking the glass at the ends of the column (which is not less than 1 em. in length) with a diamond. The tube is then cut through at these points, and each length is ground to a conical termination at each end and provided with a short holder of silver wire. If the end of one of these pipettes is immersed in a drop of blood it becomes filled by capillary attraction, and a unit volume of the liquid may thus be transferred to the glass cylinder. Measurement by Total Reflection of the Refractive Indices of Microscopic Minerals.*—M. J. Thoulet describes a contrivance for measur- ing the indices of minerals under the Microscope by Kohlrausch’s method of total reflection.- The only microscopic methods which have been em- ployed with advantage are those of the Duc de Chaulnes and of Mallard, but in both of these it is necessary to have a section of the mineral and to determine the thickness of the section with accuracy; with Kohlrausch’s refractometer it is only necessary to have a plane surface of the mineral immersed in a liquid of greater refractive index, so that a natural crystal face may conveniently be employed. In this apparatus, as is well known, the liquid of high refractive index is contained in a cylindrical vessel surrounded by oiled paper, which serves to illuminate the interior with diffused light except at the point occupied by the observing telescope, and the mineral is supported on a rotating axis, which coincides with the axis of the cylinder. When the normal to the crystal surface makes with the axis of the telescope an angle equal to that of total reflection, one-half of the field of view is illuminated by totally reflected rays. The field is consequently divided into two equal parts of very unequal intensity. If the angle between the two positions at which this occurs is 27, then? is the angle of total reflection, and the index of the mineral is p sin 2, where p is the known index of the liquid. '- M. Thoulet’s contrivance is merely the total refractometer of Kohlrausch applied in a simple form to the stage of Bertrand’s Microscope.t A plate cf blackened brass fixed to the stage by the screws d d carries the graduated semicircle s (of which R is the axis) moved independently by the milled head A, and carrying the vernier ¢ with it when moved by B. This axis carries not only the object 0, but also the small cylindrical tube M, into the cork a of which it fits closely. This tube contains the bisulphide of carbon or other liquid which surrounds the object, and being completely closed prevents evaporation. M is surrounded by a second cylindrical tube N, open above, but closed below by the cork P. This tube is fixed to the holder D by a point which enters P; and D, being attached to the stand of the Microscope by the spring clip C, may be adjusted by hand to any desired position. The tube N is covered with oiled paper except along a narrow band parallel to its axis, which is brought opposite to the objective E by turning the milled head G. The tube M having been filled with carbon disulphide, and the object fixed at O with its face parallel to the axis (gum arabic may be used for this purpose, being insoluble in the liquid), the whole apparatus is rapidly centered and adjusted by the stage movements and those at G and C; the angle of total reflection is then determined in monochromatic light by the goniometer, which is divided to tenths of a degree, and which by * Bull. Soc. Minéral. France, 1883, pp. 184-91 (1 fig.). + See this Journal, 1883, p. 413. 660 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO repeated measurements gives the angle to about 2 minutes, corresponding to units in the third place of decimals. In using the instrument the objective is replaced by Bertrand’s lens for convergent light, or the objectives 0 or 1 of Nachet may be employed. Fic. 186. As regards the liquid, there are many objections to the use of carbon disulphide, and M. Thoulet recommends biniodide of mercury and potassium as more convenient than either naphthaline monobromide or solution of sulphur or phosphorus in carbon disulphide. In any case it will not be possible to determine an index of refraction which is greater than 1-7. A Microscopic Advantage. [By inverting a 1/4 in. objective over the eye-piece of the Microscope an arrangement is produced which immediately gives the images in their proper position, and not upside down, as without it. This is a considerable advantage, because it enables a worker to go straight to the object without the mistakes which so frequently occur with beginners.’’] Scientif. Enquirer, II. (1887) pp. 106-7. HAuustEén, K.—Ein Compressorium fiir microscopische Zwecke. (A compressorium for microscopical purposes.) [A brass tube surrounding the objective, at the lower end of which a cover-glass is cemented with shellac. It can be used as a compressorium, and also to prevent the dimming of high powers with water vapour when observing delicate transparent objects in the living condition on the hot stage. Zeitschr. f. Biol., XXII. (1886) pp. 404-7 (1 fig.). Ketchum’s (J.) Portable Oxy-calcium Lamp. [‘‘ When packed occupied a case only 13 in. long by 6 in. square. The oxygen cylinder was 3 x 12 in. long, and contained four hours’ supply. The illumina- tion was very fine.” Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) p. 97. Laboratory Notes. [Usefulness of a simple and inexpensive eye-piece micrometer as a part of the outfit of each Microscope in the laboratory. Culture-cells made of vulcanite rings. ee Amer. Natural., X XI. (1887) pp. 477-9. N., W. J.—The Two Mirrors. No. VI. Sci.-Gossip, 1887, pp. 75-6 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 661 Polariscope, single, for the Toy Microscope. [Made of sixteen or eighteen cover-glasses. ] Engl. Mech., XLY. (1887) pp. 337-8 (2 figs.), from Scientific American. Rocers, W. A.—“ Microscopic metal thermometer, by which the indicated temperature is read off upon the eye-piece micrometer of the Microscope.” Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Ann, Meeting, 1886, p. 190. Schroeder’s New Lieberktihns. [Made of Wolfram steel. ] Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, III. (1887) p. 92. SELENKA, E.—Die elektrische Projections-lampe. (The electric projection lamp.) SB. Phys.-med. Soc. Erlangen, 1887, 8 pp. TaTHAM, J.—Illumination of Objects under the Microscope. Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, pp. 78-9. THANHOFFER, L. v.—Mikroskopische Gaskammer. (Microscopical gas chamber.) [Contains only the following abstract—‘ with which the author investigated under rarefied and compressed air or in different gases the movements of the protoplasm or the circulation of the blood in small transparent animals.” | Math. u. Naturwiss. Ber. Ungarn., TV. (1886) p. 218. VANDERPOEL, F.—Improved settling tube for urinary deposits. Amer. Mon. Mier. Journ., VII. (1887) pp. 71-2 (4 figs.) pp. 115-6. Warp, R. H.—Micrometer Wires. [Recommends the use of platinum wires in preference to spider threads. } Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr,, 9th Ann, Meeting, 1886, pp. 89-93. (4) Photomicrography. Nelson’s Photomicrographic Camera.— This camera (fig. 187) was designed by Mr. E. M. Nelson in conjunction with Mr. C. L. Curties, especially for use with Prof. Abbe’s new 3-power projection eye-piece. The apparatus consists first of a base-board, which is of sufficient length to take the camera when fully extended, the Microscope, and the lamp. The axis of the camera is fixed at the same height above the board as the optic Fie. 187. axis of the Nelson Model Microscope, but can be arranged to the height of any stand. The camera itself consists of two cardboard tubes, which are light but strong, the one sliding into the other like the tube of a telescope ; the joint between the two tubes is made light-tight by a velvet flap which is fastened down by an indiarubber band. The joint between the Microscope and camera has the usual light-excluding tubes. The camera when closed and used with the 3-power projection eye-piece is arranged to give a magni- 662 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO fication of about five times the initial magnifying power of the objective employed, and when fully extended gives ten times the initial power of the lens. The outer cardboard tube is fastened to an upright piece of wood which is clamped to the baseboard by thumb-screws at any point of its extension. ‘The focusing screens of grey glass and plain glass with ruled lines, slide in grooves at the back of the upright piece of wood. The double back is the well-known Tylar patent metal one, which is cheap and efficient. This back is not a fourth of the cost of the wooden ones, and is free from the objectionable sticking of the slide due to the warping of the wood. The focusing is effected by a rod which runs down the right- hand side of the camera, a string passes round this and over a pulley on the other side of the board, taking a turn round the milled head of the fine-adjustment screw. This string is kept tight by a piece of elastic. The feet of the Microscope fit into blocks fastened on the baseboard. Mr. Nelson especially recommends the aplanatic lens No. 127 in Zeiss’s catalogue, power 6, as a focusing glass, and says that “the whole of the apparatus, viz. camera, Microscope, and lamp, is produced at a cost less than is usually paid for a camera alone. It is not a makeshift which is only capable of doing fairly good work, but it is proved by practical experience to be equal to the highest class of work. The Campbell differential screw fine-adjustment will be found peculiarly serviceable for photomicrographic work, as it is slow and free from spring, which is the bane of every geared- down fine-adjustment.” * Photomicrographic Camera for the Simple or Compound Microscope. —Dr. P. Francotte’s camera is intended specially for Mayer’s simple Micro- scope, but can be used with any instrument ina vertical position. Low powers only are used. In form the camera is merely a pyramidal box with four sides. The topmost side carries a quarter-plate frame (9 x 12). The lower one is fitted with a brass tube by which it is arranged in the Micro- scope. By means of three screws, exact centering is perfectly obtained. A frame with ground glass serves for the superficial point and the regulation of light, and for the exact point a frame with transparent glass and a single lens of low power is used. The frame for the sensitized plates is double, and is supplied with two intermediate arcs, the one for a glass 6 x 45 (quarter plate cut in two), the other for a quarter plate cut in four. With Steinheil’s lens and monochromatic light, beautiful clichés of entire sections of larve of Salamander, &c., 15-18 mm. in length, were obtained. The images were 9-11 cm. long. The sections were stained with picrocarmine and the plates used were those obtained from Attout-Taillefer or those of Monckoven or Beernart sensitized for red rays by quinoline blue (cyanine). The apparatus also gives good results with the compound Microscope, — with or without the ocular. Focusing in Photomicrography.—The inconvenience of focusing by means of long rods has been attempted to be obviated in several ways. One method, by the substitution of a piece of white paper for the ground glass, viewing the image from an opening at the side, was described in this Journal, 1886, p. 841. i To accomplish the same object, Dr. B. Benecke { inserted a telescope with a right-angled prism in the front part of his camera (fig. 188), by means of which the image on the screen of white paper at the other end of * Cf. Engl. Mech., xlv. (1887) p. 213. + Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiii. (1887) pp. 149-51. t ‘Die Photographie als Hilfsmittel Mikroskopischer Forschung,’ 1868, pp «74-5 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 663 the camera was focused, the observer’s head being thus in close proximity to the Microscope. (A and B are intended to show the mode of illuminating an object by oblique transmitted, and by reflected light.) Fic, 188. Dr. S. T. Stein* adopts the following method of focusing. The Micro- scope A (fig. 189) is first adjusted by direct vision until a clear image of the object is obtained; the eye-piece m is then removed and the body-tube united with the wooden chamber H by means of the black cloth connection B, which has rubber collars at m and n, and admits no light; the rays from the mirror / throw a blurred image of the object upon the ground- Fie. 189. glass plate of the camera C. Behind the camera is the plane mirror D, in which the observer whose eye is near the Microscope sees this image; he is thus in a position to adjust the Microscope until a well-defined image i: thrown upon C by the direct use of the micrometer-screw r without the * Stein, S. T., ‘Das Licht,’ 8vo, Halle, 1884, pp 231-2 (1 fig.). Cf. also J. Girard’s ‘La Chambre noire et la Microscope,’ 2nd ed., 1870, pp. 52-8 (1 fig.). 664 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO intervention of any complicated mechanism such as is necessary from the usual position behind the camera. It may be convenient to examine the image with a small telescope or opera-glass. Photomicrography with High Powers.*—Dr. O. Israel draws attention to the photomicrography of fresh objects, especially of vegetable micro- organisms in their natural condition, by the application of high powers and the use of good bromide gelatin plates. For most microbes it is necessary to use very narrow diaphragms in order to reproduce the fineness of their lines with sufficient clearness ; and as thereby much light is lost, long exposure becomes necessary. Hence also a very stable apparatus is a sine qud non. The duration of the expo- sure is dependent on the clearness of the microscopic picture, and this in its turn depends on the source of light, the objective, and the size of diaphragm. Diffuse daylight gives the best light, and for high powers and immersions a condenser is either desirable or necessary. Dry, water, and oil-immersion lenses are all applicable, though the best results were obtained with Hart-. nack’s immersion ii. with correction. It is of great importance that the object to be photographed should be very thin, in order that the parts above or below the plane in focus should not detract from the clearness of the picture. For over-exposed pictures the author recommends the addition of a few drops of a concentrated solution of bromide of potassium to the iron developer, and this does not interfere with any subsequent treatment with cyanide of silver. Evidence of the efficacy of the method is given by the prints of negatives of micro-organisms and of other fresh objects, among which may be mentioned striated muscular fibre in salt solution. Crookshank’s ‘ Photography of Bacteria’ and ‘Manual of Bacteriology.’ —The intention of Dr. E. M. Crookshank’s ‘ Photography of Bacteria’ + will be best explained in his own words:—“ It might appear ill timed to publish photographs of bacteria when the apochromatic objectives, which promise to be of such great advantage in photomicrography, have just been introduced. I only wish, however, to illustrate results obtained with ordinary objectives, and to demonstrate that photography may be employed with success to represent preparations of bacteria even under conditions unfavourable for photography. There has been no desire to produce a series of feats in photomicrography ; but on the other hand, I am anxious to encourage the attempt to make photography subservient to bacteriology. Those who would aim at the former should select difficult test-diatoms as their subject, and endeavour to equal or surpass the photographs taken by Dr. Woodward, of America. “The preparations to be photographed were selected without any reference to the staining reagents which had been employed, and in some eases photographs are given which were purposely taken of bacteria so faintly stained, as to be demonstrated under the Microscope with difficulty. “Tt is hoped that these photographs will be useful as supplementary illustrations to my ‘Manual of Bacteriology,’ while the accompanying letter- press may serve as an introduction to the methods employed in photo- micrography.” A second edition of the author’s ‘Manual of Bacteriology’ { is also * Virchow’s Archiv f. Path. Anat. u. Physiol., evi. (1886) p. 502. + Crookshank, E. M., ‘Photography of Bacteria,’ xx. and 64 pp. 6 figs. and 22 plates of photographs with explanations, 8vo, London, 1887. + Crookshank, E. M., ‘Manual of Bacteriology,’ 2nd ed., xxiv. and 439 pp., 137 figs. and 29 pls., 8vo, London, 1887. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 665 issued, enlarged and revised, and with additional chapters on the general Morphology and Physiology of Bacteria, &c. There are seventy-three additional illustrations, and a very extensive Bibliography. Firtp, A. G.—A new Photomicrographic Apparatus. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) p. 94 (1 fig.). Hitcucock, P.—Resolution of pearls of Amphipleura. [Note on Dr. Van Heurck’s photographs. ] Amer. Mon, Mier, Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 105-6. Magrni, G.—Qualche considerazioni sulla micro-fotografia. (Some considerations on photomicrography.) Boll. R. Accad. Med. Roma, 1886, No. 4. Mercer, A. C.—Photomicrograph versus Microphotograph. [* A photomicrograph is a macroscopic photograph of a microscopic object; a microphotograph is a microscopic photograph of a macroscopic object.” The distinction was originated by Mr. George Shadbolt in 1859 or 1860. } Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, p. 131. Microphotogrammes du Dr. Van Heurck et du Dr. P. Francotte. (Photomicrographs of Dr. Van Heurck and Dr. P. Francotte.) [3 of Amphipleura pellucida resolved into beads. Navicula fusca and Nobert’s 18th and 19th band. 4 of zoological subjects. ] Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., XIII. (1887) pp. 159-60 (1 pl.) Photomicrography.—See (6) American Society of Microscopists. (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Method of determining the index of refraction when the refracting angle is large.*—The method of minimum deviation can only be employed when the refracting angle of the prism is less than twice the limiting angle; but Signor G. Bartalini shows that indices may be measured in a prism bounded by three planes inclined to one another at two unequal angles, the ray of light being so transmitted as to be refracted at the first and third and internally reflected at the second surface. For the success of this method it is only necessary that the larger angle of the prism added to the complement of the limiting angle should be less than 180°. The formula is sin a sin d where cot d = cot (a — f) cos’ 6 sin? 6 = -” ~ sin a. cos (a — £) sin b or cot = 7 ° 1 ‘ sin a. sin (a — £) . cos’ 6! tan? ot = °8 (a — 8) sina_ sin b According as the ray after internal reflection makes an acute or an obtuse angle with the third surface. In the above formule a and b are the angles of incidence and emergence, and a and £ are the corresponding angles of the prism. Observations made upon a quartz crystal gave— By minimum deviation .. .. nm, =1°5442 n, = 1°5537 By the above method .. .. nm, = 1°5444 n, = 1°5535. Resolution of 200,000 lines to the inch.—Once again microscopists have been doomed to a bitter disappointment, which is the harder to bear * Atti Soc. Toscana Sci. Nat., v. (1887) pp. 181-3 (1 fig.). 1887. 2x 666 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO from its having been so confidently expected that at last the vapourings of microscopical theorists would be exploded and the superior value of a little practical demonstration clearly shown. Theory might attempt to decide that 200,000 lines to the inch could not be resolved with our present resources, but what could that avail against the fact not merely that 200,000 lines to an inch had been ruled, but that they had actually been seen. When it was known that Mr. C. Fasoldt, of Albany, New York, who from all accounts is a most able and skilful ruler of lines, intended to show 200,000 lines to an inch at the last meeting of the American Society of Microscopists, expectation was at fever heat, and the feelings of some of our theoretical microscopists can be better imagined than described. It was evident that it was no longer an occasion for such merriment as followed the statement of the belief of a correspondent that “ with a little patience” the feat could be accomplished, nor was the offer now only one to “make affidavits” that the lines had been seen* (as if the question was simply one of veracity), but it was declared that a practical demonstration would be given by the author of the lines in the presence of the members of one of the first microscopical societies of the world. This might well excuse, not only excitement but anxiety, on the part of those who had been pinning their faith on the fact that a good many things must happen before 200,000 lines to the inch can be not merely ruled but seen. The day came, but alas! with the day the man came not—“ circum- stances prevented that pleasure.’ In place of the man came only a ruling and a letter. That the ruling was all it claimed to be we have no manner of doubt; what the letter was can be best appreciated by printing it in full.t ‘ “ Albany, N.Y., August 2, 1886. “ Secretary American Society Microscopists. “ Dear Sir,—I had intended to be present at your meeting this month, “but circumstances will now prevent that pleasure. With this I send the “ Society a fine ruling 5000 to 200,000 lines per inch (23 bands). This “ruling has been resolved by several persons here, with my vertical “ jlluminator and 1/12 h. im. objective. I had intended to meet with you “and display these lines with my apparatus, but that being impossible, I “ send the lines, hoping that some of the members will be able to see them “all as has been done here. I shall always be glad to receive any one “interested in rulings, and will display them to any one who will favour “me with a visit at Albany. : “ Yours very truly, Coas. Fasoupr.” The only record consequent on this letter is a vote of thanks for the gift, and we have reluctantly therefore been forced to the conclusion that there (whatever had been done “here”), no one was in fact “able to see them all,” so that we have a respite, however brief, from that rude awaken- ing which we must nevertheless consider to be still in store for us. Boys, C. V.—See “ Orderie Vital.” Ewe.u, M. D.—A further study of centimeter scale “ A.” Proc. Amer, Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 75-82. +5 Comparison of a standard centimeter ruled on glass by Chas. Fasoldt, with centimeter scale “A.” Ibid., p. 83. * See this Journal, 1886, p. 868. t Proc. Amer. Soe. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, p. 206. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 667 GuNDLACH, E.—Optical Errors and Human Mistakes. Proc. Amer. Soc, Micr., 9th Ann, Meeting, 1886, pp. 157-60. Heats, R. S.—A Treatise on Geometrical Optics. (Contains sections on the Simple Microscope; Coddington lens, Stanhope Jens, and Stanhoseope ; Doublets of Wollaston, Pritchard, and Chevalier; sketch of theory of telescopes and Microscopes; the Compound Microscope; magnifying power of the Microscope; on the measure of the aperture of the Microscope, post; recent improyveinents in the Microscope.] xvii. and 356 pp., figs., 8vo, Cambridge, 1887. Himes, C. F.—The Stereoscope and its Applications. (Includes the Binocular Microscope. ] Journ. Franklin Institute, CX XIII. (1887) pp. 398-408, 425-41, 3 pls. and 13 figs. JAMES, F. L.— [The Neglected Twin nowhere proves his usefulness more than in microscopy. The observer who has his left hand properly trained has the purely right-handed one at an immense disadvantage. This is especially true in working with high, or comparatively high, powers. Try it, and you will see. With the left hand to manage the stage and the riglit upon the micrometer adjustment, one can get over a slide in less than half the time occupied when the right hand is constantly leaving the adjustment to regulate the stage.”] St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LILI. (1887) p. 348. Kerser, A.—Bestimmung der Brechungs-exponenten, fiir welche die chromatische Abweichung zu heben ist. (Determination of the refractive exponents for which the chromatic aberration is to be removed.) Central-Ztg. f. Optik u. Mech., VIII. (1887) p. 97. = 5 Ueber die Korrektur von Systemen grésserer Oeffnung. (On the correc- tion of systems of large aperture.) Ibid., pp. 145-6. Magnifying-power of Objectives, Measurement of. {Inquiry by F. R. Brokenshire and replies by R. Gill, G. H. Bryan, F. J. George, and “ Gamma Sigma.’’] Sci.-Gossip, 1887, pp. 90-1, 116, and 163-4, Engl. Mech., XLV. (1887) pp. 392 and 437. “OrRDERIC VITAL.”—A lens used both for refraction and reflection, [and note by C. V. Boys.] Engl. Mech., XLV. (1887) pp. 443-4 (1 fig.), 468. Pou, A.—{Recent progress in the Theory of the Microscope. } Rivista Scientifico-Indusriale, April 30. Nature, XXXVI. (1887) p. 262. Rocers, W. A.—Methods of dealing with the question of temperature in the com- parison of standards of length. Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Aun. Meeting, 1886, pp. 67-74. Roystox-Picott, G. W.—Microscopical Advances. XVIII, XIX., XX., XXI. (Diffraction, Ancient and Modern. } Engl. Mech., XLY. (1887) pp. 331-2 (5 figs.), 379 (1 fig.), 427 (4 figs.), 475-6 (6 figs.). Strokes, A. C.—Focus Upward. (It has been said in a joking way ‘that nothing will throw a microscopist into a chill quicker than to see a friend look into his Microscope and focus downward with his coarse-adjustment.’ Yet men who ought to know better have been seen to do this reprehensible thing.”’] Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, 1V. (1887) p. 23, from ‘ Microscopy for Beginners.’ - Zecu, P.—Elementare Behandlung von Linsensystemen. (Elementary treatment of ‘Lens-systems.) (Sep. Repr.) 16 pp., 8vo, Tiibingen, 1887. (6) Miscellaneous. Microscopical Society of Caleutta.—A Microscopical Society has, on the suggestion of Mr. W. J. Simmons, been founded at Calcutta,* with an entrance fee and annual subscription of five rupees. It is intended to have two Sessions, one in the cold season and the other in the middle of the year, with a recess after each. Meetings will be held monthly. So far as we know, this is the only Microscopical Society in any part of India. There must be a large and very interesting field for microscopical work in that part of the world, and we wish the new Society every success. * Indian Daily News, 1587, June 25, i) a. Te 668 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO American Society of Microscopists:\—The Working Sessions. {1. The dredging excursion. 2. Photography (discussion and demonstration of photography by lamplight in its application to the Microscope). 3. The General Session (various exhibitions and practical demonstrations). ] Proc. Amer, Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 174-96. as 5 3 Reports of Committees on Micrometry and on Universal Microscope Screw. Lbid., pp. 197-8, 199-201. BuRRiuL, T. J.—Presidential Address. [Bacteria and disease.] Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 5-29. Dallinger’s (Rev. Dr.) Presidential Address. [‘‘ Professor Dallinger presents a far more commendable course, as shown in his laborious and conscientious work described in his presidential address before the Royal Microscopical Society. Instead of predetermining that an organism cannot adjust itself to changed environment, because it might follow that species could be evolved from each other, a conclusion at variance with our narrow notion of the way in which an Infinite Creator would proceed in peopling a world with animals and plants, he goes about a series of most delicate experiments, lasting through seven years without a break, to learn if it is a fact that environing con- ditions may be greatly changed and yet the organism adjust itself to the change. No one can read his account without admiration for such painstaking and in- telligent experimentation and for the determination, after the break in the series, to go over the ground again. Such work done by the leaders inspires the rank and file of workers, and it is such work as this which has given us scientific discoveries and their benefits.” ] Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VII. (1887) p. 114. Fink, H. E.—“ The Eleventh Commandment in the eye of a needle.” (Hxhibition.) The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 143-4. GiuLmeEr, T. L.—The Microscope in Dentistry. Dental Review, 1887, May. JEAFFRESON, C. S.—Presidential Address to the North of England Microscopical Society. Highth Ann. Rep., 27 pp., 8vo, Newcastle-upon-Tyne, 1887. (Manton, W. P., AND OTHERS. |—Making a Microscopist. The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 176-8. Micuart, A. D.—Presidential Address to the Quekett Microscopical Club. { Darwinism. ] Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, III. (1887) pp. 44-62. Microscopist, an enthusiastic. ; [Note on Mr. E. H. Griffith.] Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIIL. (1887) p. 114. Moore, A. Y., Death of. [Memorial resolutions of the Cleveland Microscopical Society. | Amer. Mon. Mier. Journ., VIII. (1887) p. 97. a » Obituary notice of. The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 187-40 (portrait) and p. 149. Noble, Captain, and this Journal. [Comment by Editor on note, ante, p. 494} Eng. Mech., XY. (1887) p. 402. Pharmacy, the Microscope in. [The Pharmaceutical Society of Brooklyn, in its lectures to drug clerks, includes a course on the Microscope in Pharmacy.” | The Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 125. PumMPpuHrReEY, W.—The Microscope in the Lecture- and Class-room.. [Concludes that when the object is to demonstrate to a class, or to a small company, who can critically examine the image as displayed on the screen, the image, as taken direct from the object, is much to be preferred; but that for lar ge companies, and where the close examination of the image would be impracticable, the photomicrograph is better adapted to the purpose. ] Journ. of Microscopy, V1. (1887) pp. 141-7. Sorsy, H. C.—The Microscopical Structure of Iron and Steel. {Paper laid before the Iron and Steel Institute, May 1887.] The Tronmonger, 1887, June 4, pp. 391 -9. STRASBURGER, E.—Das botanische Practicum. (Practical Botany.) 2nd ed., xxxvi. and 685 pp., 193 figs., 8vo, Jena, 1887. Warp, R. H.—Remarks on the methods of making Microscopical Societies successful. Proc, Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Ann, Meeting, 1886, pp. 94-102. West, C. E.—Forty years’ acquaintance with the Microscope and Microscopists. Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 161-73. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 669 B. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Blood-serum Cultivation.t—Dr. F. Hueppe combines the advantages of blood-serum for growing micro-organisms with the advantages of plate cultivation for separating the colonies in the following manner :—Blood- serum is sterilized at a temperature of 58°-60° by the discontinuous method. It may, however, be sterilized at once and with safety by heating to boiling-point, but although its nutritive properties are apparently unaffected, it loses slightly in transparency. The author gives an illus- tration of a modification of Fol’s sterilizer, heated by the same arrange- ment as the author’s own thermostat.t The tubes are laid in the oblique position. After sterilization the serum is warmed to 37° C. and inoculated in the usual manner. Meanwhile, a 2 per cent. agar solution, to which 0:5-1 per cent. grape sugar is added, has been prepared. Having been fluidified, the agar is cooled down to 42°-45°. Equal quantities of the warm inoculated blood- serum and of the warm agar solution are then mixed together, with the usual precautions, and having been well shaken up, are allowed to solidify in plates, bulbs, &c., at the ordinary temperature. When firm the cultiva- tions are removed to the thermostat. By this method the breeding of tubercle-bacilli from sputum succeeds pretty well. CrosireR, R.—A method of inoculating fluid cultivating media. Brit. Med. Journ., 1886, No. 1347, p. 769. EpinGron, A.—A new culture medium for micro-organisms capable of withstanding high pressure. Lancet, 1886, I. p. 704. GR1IESSMAYER.—Die Reinkultur der Microben mit specieller Riicksicht auf die Hefe. (The pure culture of microbes with special reference to yeast.) Alig. Brauer- und Hopfen Ztg., 1887, pp. 591-2, 603-5. KoLessN1KOW.—See Tarchanow. M ace.—Sur la préparation des milieux 4 la gélose pour la culture des bactéries. (On the preparation of gelatin media for the cultivation of bacteria.) Ann. Instit. Pasteur, 1887, pp. 189-90. Situ, 'T.—The relative value of cultures in liquid and solid media in the diagnosis of bacteria. Med. News, 1886, II. p. 571. STERNBERG, G. M.—Bacteriological Notes. The liquefaction of gelatin by bacteria. Med. News, 1887, pp. 372-3. TARCHANOW and KoLeEssnikow.—Die Anwendung des alkalisch gemachten Eiweisses von Hiihnereiern als durchsichtiges Substrat zur Kultur der Bacterien. (The use of alkaline albumen of hens’ eggs as a transparent substratum for the culture of bacteria.) Russkaja Medicina, 1887, No. 11 (Russian). Terry, W. A.—Notes on Diatom study. [Dredging for diatoms. ] Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 44-6. ViGNAL, W.—Etuve pour Cultures. (Culture oven.) Ann. Instit. Pasteur, 1887, pp. 184-8. (2) Preparing Objects. Method for subjecting Living Protoplasm to the action of different liquids.S—Mr. G. L. Goodall, for studying the action of very dilute solu- tions on living protoplasm, obviates the necessity of transferring the specimen from the litre-flask, as in the methods of Loew, Bokorny, and Pfeffer, to the stage of the Microscope, by using an apparatus consisting * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes ; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c.; (6) Miscella- neous. + Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk , i. (1887) pp. 607-10 (1 fig.). t¢ Med. Wochenschr., 1886, No. 17. § Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxiii. (1887) pp. 144-5. 670 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of a small number of “chloride of calcium jars,” i.e. tall slender jars with an opening near the base, which are connected by means of “ three- way ” tubes with a common tube of small size. The latter tube is inserted into the side of a microscopic cell made of soft rubber, firmly cemented to the slide and provided with an inflow and an outflow. The object is held beneath the glass cover either by delicate glass floats or by glass threads fastened by wax. When the object is in situ the liquid is made to flow by opening one of the cocks or one of the way tubes. The stream of fluid may be made slow or rapid, and one fluid may be substituted for another. The same apparatus may be used for differential staining, for plasmo- lytic investigation, and for the cultivation of organisms under different conditions of nutriment. Modes of preparing Ova.*—Dr. H. Henking, in his investigations into the development of the Phalangida, adopted various methods of preparing the ova; the animals were sometimes killed with boiling water, and left in it for some time for the albumen to coagulate; they were then hardened in successive strengths of alcohol up to 80 per cent. The ova were never placed direct in alcohol, in consequence of the shrinking caused by such a process. Other specimens were killed with ether, the back laid open, and the animals placed in Flemming’s chrom-osmic-acetic acid, or in Kleinenberg’s picrosul- phuric acid for some hours before removal to alcohol. Eggs that had been deposited were treated with hot water, and with Flemming’s fluid, as wellas with hot and cold chromic acid, picrosulphuric acid, &c. The best staining reagents were found to be Grenacher’s borax-carmine, Hamann’s neutral acetic acid carmine, and eosin-hematoxylin. Before imbedding, the eggs on being taken from absolute alcohol were placed in a mixture of bergamot oil and absolute alcohol, then in pure bergamot oil, and then in a warmed solution of paraffin in bergamot oil, and finally in quite pure paraffin. By theaid of Spengel’s microtome sections from 1/80 to 1/150 mm. thick were prepared. New Method of distinguishing Vegetable from Animal Fibre.{— Dr. H. Molisch’s process depends on the application of the two new re- actions for sugar lately discovered by the author :t—About 0-01 gram of the sample, previously well boiled and washed with water, is mixed first with 1 ccm. of water, then with two drops of an alcohclic solution of a-naphthol (15-20 per cent.), and finally with an equal volume of concen- trated sulphuric acid. In the case of vegetable fibre the solution assumes, immediately after shaking, a deep violet colour, the fibre being dissolved. If, however, the fibre is of animal origin, the liquid assumes a colour varying from yellow to reddish-brown. By substituting a solution of thymol for a-naphthol a fine carmine colour is obtained in the place of the violet. The author has successfully applied this test to different vegetable fibres, such as cotton, hemp, jute, china-grass, &c.; also to the cellular tissues of wood, cork, and fungi. Moreover, in the case of dyed fabrics the colouring matters do not appear to interfere with the success of the reaction. Mode of examining Mucous Membranes.§—Prof. L. Ranvier describes the following method of studying the membrane which invests the retro- lingual sac of the edible or the grass-frog. The membrane is detached and then extended on the disc of Ranvier’s moist chamber in such a * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 88-90. t Dingler’s Polytech. Journ., cclxi. (1886) pp. 135-8. Cf. Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., Abstr., 1886, p. 1088. t See this Journal, ante, p. 544. § Comptes Rendus, ciy. (1887) pp. 819-20 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 671 way that its epithelial surface is turned upwards. During this operation desiccation of the tissues is avoided by sprinkling them with aqueous humour, blood-serum, or chloride of sodium in 7/1000 solution; the membrane is maintained in a state of extension by a ring of platinum which is fixed on the disc of the moist chamber; the ring must be of a little longer diameter than that of the disc, in order that the membrane may be held between it and the disc. ‘The membrane is covered by a glass plate, which is fixed with paraffin. In such a preparation the cells with vibratile cilia, sensory or glandular cells, striated muscular fibres, and nerve-fibres and cells may be easily observed in the living state. As the ring keeps the membrane in its place, the glass cover may be removed for the purpose of adding reagents. Investigating the Termination of Nerves in the Liver.*—Mr. A. B. Macallum adopted the following method for demonstrating nerve-structures in the liver of Necturus (= Menobranchus). Pieces of the liver were hardened for a week or more in Erlicki’s fluid, or for several days in a 1/6-1/5 per cent. solution of chromic acid. After the hardening was sufficiently completed in alcohol, sections of the frozen tissue were made with a Cathcart microtome. When the gum was carefully removed these were put in a 5 per cent. solution of formic acid for an hour, transferred to a 1 per cent. solution of gold chloride for about twenty minutes, then washed in distilled water, and the gold afterwards reduced in the dark with a 10 per cent. solution of formic acid. About thirty hours suffices for this reduction at a temperature of 20° C., and the sections then have a deep red colour, though the tinge was sometimes violet. The chromatin of the nuclei of the hepatic cells took a deep blue-violet tint, the caryoplasm light violet, while the cytoplasm came out very distinctly as a meshwork with a pink or light carmine colour; the nerve-fibres appeared deep violet, but the connective tissue of the interlobular spaces attained a light, or sometimes a deep red colour. When chromic acid was used as a hardening reagent the addition of any organic acid at the same time, such as acetic acid more especially, seemed to have the effect of robbing the nerve-fibres of their selective capacity for gold. Sections of the liver of Nectwrus are of no value when they are less than 0°02 “m” [mm.] in thickness. With the human liver preparations proved to vary very considerably, but were often not successful. All the sections were cleared in oil of cloves and mounted in balsam. The study of the ultimate terminations of the nerves was made with the Leitz 1/12 in, homogeneous immersion, with special illumination. The author discusses the value of gold chloride as a reagent for differentiating nerves, which is not admitted by all histologists; he thinks that it has many advantages over other reagents; the substance which fixes the gold in a violet form is not confined to nerves, but appears to be diffused to a small degree in other tissue elements; the failures of some histologists are referred to their not having sufficiently hardened the tissues. Osmic acid, although useful in the case of medullated nerve- fibres, is of no value for demonstrating the finest non-medullated fibrils. Preparing the Amphibian Egg.t—Prof. O. Schultze has found that for hardening-fluids the following mixtures give perfectly satisfactory pre- parations when used in the manner described below :—(1) Chromo-osmio- acetic Acid: Chromic acid (1 per cent.) 25 parts; osmic acid (1 per cent.) * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxvii. (1887) pp. 443-8. + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) p. 185. Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1887) pp. 595-6. 672 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 10 parts; water 60 parts; acetic acid (2 per cent.) 5 parts. (2) Chrom- acetic Acid: Chromic acid (1 per cent.) 25 parts; acetic acid (2 per cent.) 5 parts; water 70 parts. The eggs are left in one of these fluids twenty-four hours, then washed in distilled water, which should be often changed. The egg-envelopes are next removed by the aid of needles, and the eggs are then ready for surface-study. For the purpose of sectioning the eggs are transferred from the water used in washing to 50 per cent. alcohol, then to 70 per cent., 85 per cent., and 95 per cent., leaving them twenty-four hours in each grade. The last grade should be changed several times. The eggs are then clarified in turpentine one to two hours, and then placed in paraffin that melts at 50° C. from one-half to one hour. Prof. Schultze states that the success of the method depends on follow- ing precisely the directions given as to time. If the eggs remain longer, either in alcohol, turpentine, or paraffin, the results may be entirely un- satisfactory. If the conditions are strictly followed the eggs have the consistency of the paraffin, and cut excellently without crumbling in sections 1/200 mm. thick. For staining, borax-carmine was used, directly after washing, twenty- four hours. The eggs were next placed in acid alcohol of 70 per cent. (five drops of the pure acid to 100 ccm. of the alcohol) to remove a part of the colour. The first hardening fluid does not penetrate well, and is not well adapted for fixing the central parts of the egg. Preparing Eyes of Molluscs and Arthropods.*—Mr. W. Paiten’s methods for preparing the eyes of Molluscs and Arthropods are as follows :— I. Motuuses (preparation of young Pectens from 1-3 mm. long).— (1) Specimens are placed in a mixture of equal parts of sublimate and picrosulphuric acid. After ten or fifteen minutes they are washed in 25 per cent. and 70 per cent. of alcohol. (2) The shells are then opened, and the mantles dissected out with needles. Thus treated, the shape of the mantle is well preserved, whereas if removed before hardening it becomes much coiled and twisted. (8) Each mantle edge may be cut, according to its size and curvature, into three or four pieces, and these will then lie sufficiently straight for convenient sectioning. It is necessary to use a different reagent for nearly every part of the eye. The Rods.—Chromic acid gives the most varied results according to the strength, time of action, and temperature of the solution, or by various combinations of these three. For instance, 1/20 to 1/5 per cent. for thirty to forty hours failed to give any conception of the structure of the rods, while other parts of the retina, and of the eye itself, were well pre- served; but when allowed to act for half an hour at a temperature of from 50° to 55° C., perfectly preserved rods with their nervous networks are obtained, whilst, on the other hand, the remaining tissues become so granular and homogeneous as to be unfit for study. This treatment allows the rods to be removed in flakes, and their ends examined without the aid of sections. It is only in this way that the axial nerve-loops can be observed. * MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, vi. (1886) pp. 733-8. Cf. Amer. Natural., xxi. (1887) pp. 401-4, and this Journal, ante, pp. 53 and 82. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 673 The Lens.—The lens is best prepared for sections by either sulphuric or picro-sulphuric acid ; by the first reagent its shape is best retained, and the lens itself is less liable to be drawn away from the surrounding tissue ; the latter reagent, however, brings out more sharply the configuration of the cells, and allows a better stain of the nuclei to take place. The Retinophoree.—The retinophore are well preserved by nearly all the reagents; but in sublimate, in picric acid, or in their combinations, they become slightly granular, and remain so closely packed that it is difficult to distinguish the cell boundaries. Chromic acid 1/5 per cent. for three or four days, contracts the cells and gives preparations in which the boundaries and general arrangement of the retinophore are easily studied. Section of the Eye.—In order to obtain the best sections of the adult eye with all the parts in the most natural position, it is necessary to treat them first with 1/10 per cent. of chromic acid for half an hour, then in 1/20 per cent. for twenty-four hours; 1/10 per cent. for twenty-four hours, and finally 1/5 per cent. for forty-eight hours or more. Next to this method, it appears that solutions of sulphuric acid (twenty drops to fifty grammes of water) give the best preparations (for sectioning) of everything except the rods. The double layer of the sclerotica and the fibres penetrating it can be seen in sections of eyes treated twenty-four hours in 1/5 per cent. chromic acid. Maceration and Dissection—The pigmented epithelial cells of Pectens’ eyes and the cells of the cornea are easily isolated by treatment with Miiller’s fluid or bichromate of potash 1/2 per cent. for two or three days. For the maceration of all other elements weak chromic or sulphuric acid is used. For the outer ganglionic cells, which are very difficult to isolate, maceration in 1/50 per cent. chromic acid gives excellent results, after previously fixing the tissue in 1/5 per cent. for a few minutes. For the retinophorx, 1/20 per cent. for four or five days proves very useful. Sulphuric acid 5 drops to 30 grammes of sea-water gives the best results for the nerve-endings in the retinophore (not in the rods), and for the nervous inner prolongation of the outer ganglionic cells. In order to isolate pieces of the cornea with the subjacent pseudocornea and the circular fibres on the outer surface of the lens, it is better to macerate the eyes in sulphuric acid as given above. The same treatment retains to perfection the natural shape of the lens, which may then be isolated, and its surface studied to advantage. It is necessary for the study of the circular retinal membrane, the septum, and the retina itself, to isolate the latter intact. Maceration in chromic acid either makes the retina too brittle or too soft, while the axial nerve-fibres remain so firmly attached to the retina that it is difficult to isolate it without injury. But this may be easily and successfully done by maceration for one or two days in the sulphuric acid solution. By this treatment the retina, together with the septum and circular retinal membrane, may be detached entire. Surface views of the retina show the peripheral outer ganglionic cells. The argentea may be very easily separated in large sheets by macerating for four or five days in bichromate of potash of 1 per cent. Sulphuric acid is a most valuable macerating as well as preservative reagent. In weak solutions (40 drops to 50 grammes) entire molluscs, without the shell, have been kept in a perfect state of preservation for more than six months. For cilia and nerve-endings it is exceptionally good. The eyes of Arca and Pectunculus may be macerated either in Miiller’s 674 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO fluid or chromic acid. Undiluted Miiller’s fluid in twenty-four hours gives more satisfactory preparations than a weak solution which is allowed to act for a longer period. Chromic acid 1/5 per cent. for ten or twelve days gave most of the preparations from which the drawings of the nerve- endings in the author’s paper were made. A few drops of acetic and osmic acid added to distilled water gave a very energetic macerating fluid for the epithelium of marine molluscs. Such preparations led to the discovery of the very delicate outward continuations of the pigmented cover-cells in the compound eyes of Arca. IJ. Artaropops.—In order to demonstrate the presence of the corneal hypodermis in the facetted Arthropod eye, and the connection of the so-called “rhabdom” with the crystalline cone cells, it is necessary to resort to maceration. In most cases it is hardly possible to determine the important points by means of sections alone. The ommateum of fresh eyes, treated for twenty-four hours or more with weak sulphuric or chromic acid, or in Miiller’s fluid, may be easily removed, leaving the corneal facets with the underlying hypodermis uninjured. Surface views of the cornea prepared in this way show the number and arrangement of the corneal cells on each facet. In macerating the cells of the ommateum it is not possible to give any definite directions, for the results vary greatly with different eyes, and it is also necessary to modify the treatment according to the special point to be determined. It is as essential to isolate the individual cells as it is to study cross and longitudinal sections of the pigmented eyes. In determining the number and arrangement of the cells and the distribution of the pigment, the latter method is indispensable ; it should not be replaced by the study of depig- mented sections, which should be resorted to in special cases only. In fixing the tissues of the eye, it is not sufficient to place the detached head in the hardening fluid; antennz and mouth-parts should be cut off as close to the eye as possible, in order to allow free and immediate access of the fluids to the eye. When it is possible to do so with safety, the head should be cut open, and all unnecessary tissue and hard parts removed. With abundant material, one often finds individuals in which it is possible to separate, uninjured, the hardened tissues of the eye from the cuticula. This is of course a great advantage in cutting sections. The presence of a hard cuticula is often a serious difficulty in sectioning the cyes of Arthropods. This difficulty can be diminished somewhat by the use of the hardest paraffin, and by placing the broad surface of the cuticula at right angles to the edge of the knife when sectioning. Ribbon sections cannot be made with very hard paraffin, but it is often necessary to sacrifice this advantage in order to obtain very good sections. Killing Polyzoa.*—Mr. T. Whitelegge writes :—“I place a small twig of Polyzoa in about two or three drachms of water; when fully expanded I add about two drops of chloroform, and these should be dropped in so that they sink to the bottom. In from a quarter to half an hour I add spirits, about six drops at a time, and stir up gently, so that it gets mixed with the water. The spirits and chloroform stupefy them, and I try touching one to see if they are in a .sleepy condition; then I add more spirits gradually, mixing it and the water each time. When the fluid consists of equal quantities of water and spirit, I let them stand for a time, then add spirit very cautiously till they are in nearly pure spirit. This is necessary, as they contract, even after death, if the water is extracted from them too rapidly. When they are killed they should on no account * Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Mier. Soc,, 1886, pp. 30-1. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 675 be lifted out of the vessel, but floated from one vessel to another. If they are lifted out the tentacles become disarranged, and cannot again be put right.” Preparation of Insect Spiracles.*—Mr. F. Dienelt remarks that in most beetles the spiracles are found on the upper part of the abdomen. The insect should be turned on its back and cut across the thorax close to the abdomen ; then turn again, and insert a sharp knife into the opening made, and cut round the whole abdomen. As soon as there is room, insert a small stick of soft wood sharpened to a flat point, by means of which the object can be held securely while cutting. All the cutting should be done on the lower side, so that a margin is left on the upper part, which can be trimmed easily after the object has become softened in liquor potasse. Steeping the insect in this fluid for a couple of hours will destroy all the viscera. Now, hold the part down with the pointed stick, which for this purpose is far superior to mounting-needles, and with a camel-hair pencil remove the viscera and transfer the object to rain-water, removing this two or three times to insure cleansing and to remove the last trace of potash. Keep on brushing until it is certain that the object is clean, and then trim the edges to suit before a final washing. If it be desired to mount the traches in situ, greater care is necessary in treating, but they show very well through the skin. Or after most of the viscera have been removed, the trachez can be torn by a sawing motion with the back of the knife from the spiracles and mounted separate. In mounting larve entire, they should be left in liquor potasse for a longer time; even a whole day without injury. In cleaning, it is necessary to keep them in the position in which they are to be mounted. Larvz of the Lepidoptera show best when mounted on the side. In preparing these, hold the larva under water with the pointed stick, and clear out the viscera with a brush through the anal opening by a rolling motion. After a start has been made the process takes but a short time. Larve will stand considerable pressure in cleaning, but gentle manipulation of course answers best, especially in those covered with hair. It is best to commence with the largest beetles or larvee one can find. lLarvz too large to be mounted entire ought to be opened along the back to give the liquor free access. Twenty-seven grains of potassa fusa to one ounce of water acts but slowly on the chitinous parts of insects, but very promptly on the viscera. It is best kept in a paper-covered bottle, to exclude the light. Botanical Manipulation.;—M. P. Girod’s ‘Manipulations de Bota- nique’ treats, in the first place, of the methods of using the Microscope, reagents, &c. The rest of the work consists of a series of original diagrams illustrative of the histology and anatomy of typical plants, from Dico- tyledones to Alge, ending with cell-tissue for purpose of comparison with unicellular organisms. Short notes explaining the methods of preparing sections accompany the plates. Preparation of Plants in Alcohol.t—M. H. de Vries explains the great brittleness imparted to fresh parts of plants by plunging them in alcohol in the following way:—The alcohol penetrates first into the outer, and only gradually into the inner, layers of tissue. While the outer cells are killed, the inner cells still retain all their turgidity. These inner still living cells prevent the contraction of the cell-walls in the outer layers, and the latter become, therefore, hardened while still in the stretched condition. While * The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 102-3. + Girod, P., ‘Manipulations de Botanique,’ 72 pp. and 22 pls., 8vo, Paris, 1887. t~ Maandbl, vy. Natuurwetensch., 1886. See Bot. Ztg., xly. (1887) p. 31. 676 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO this process is advancing from without inwards, the inner cells also die, and the contraction of their walls is prevented by their connection with the outer layers which have already become stiff; and they also become hard while in the stretched condition. The brittle tissues can be suftened by soaking in water for from half an hour to an hour, and do not then again become brittle if again placed in strong alcohol. Cleaning Diatoms.*—Mr. W. A. Terry recommends the following process for cleaning diatoms. No fumes of any consequence are given off, no artificial heat is required, the process takes only a few minutes, and a much larger proportion of the diatoms are uninjured :— After washing out the coarse sand and straining out the coarse refuse from the gathering which has not been dried, the material is allowed to settle in the vessel; the water is then poured off rather closely, so that the amount remaining shall be about equal in weight to the weight of the material dry. Finely powdered bichromate of potash is then added in amount equal to the estimated amount of organic matter in the material exclusive of the sand. It is then stirred until mixed; for this purpose a glass slip half an inch wide, with rounded edges, is more convenient than a glass rod. Strong commercial sulphuric acid is then dropped in until brisk effervescence is set up, and continued until the acid produces no effect. The whole mixture is then poured into a vessel containing cold water, and after agitation is allowed to settle. The diatoms will now be found to be nearly clean, and only require the usual alkaline treatment and thorough washing. After the addition of the bichromate, the temperature of the material and of the acid should not be less than 70° F. If the diatoms be not sufficiently cleaned, the operation may be repeated or nitric acid used without much danger. If the material have been dried, it will be well to soak or boil it in water before using acid. Marine muds should be first washed in fresh water to remove the salt, and as they contain more refractory material, the action should be proportionately energetic. Fossil marine earths should be thoroughly softened by long soaking and boiling before being treated with acids, otherwise the gases disengaged would tear and fracture very many of the forms. Boiling in alkalies should be avoided, if possible, as many varieties are softened and distorted by even cold and weak solutions. As first washings, both acid and alkaline, settle very slowly, they should be allowed plenty of time, otherwise the lighter and more delicate varieties would be lost. The author states that he usually succeeds in getting the diatoms beau- tifully white and clean at the first operation, but admits that the process is capable of some improvement. Preparing Silver Crystals.;—Mr. F. T. Chapman says that artificially prepared silver crystals make fine opaque objects, either as permanent mounts, or for observing the process of crystallization. They may be readily prepared, although some care is necessary in order to obtain the best results, especially if the preparation is designed to be permanent. The deposition of silver from a solution of silver nitrate by means of copper, preferably a copper-wire ring placed in a sufficiently deep cement cell, gives very good results if the wire ring and the thicker mass of crystals at the edge be removed, and the specimen then thoroughly dried and protected by a cover-glass in the usual way. Much better results, however, can be obtained with a brass cell provided with a removable cover or cap (known as the “ Pierce cell’’), and cemented to a glass slip, the cell being * Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii. (1887) pp. 69-71. + Ibid., pp. 99-100. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 677 backed by dark-coloured wax. When filled with the solution, the deposition of silver crystals on the inner surface of the cell will immediately com- mence and proceed slowly toward, but should not be permitted to reach, the centre. When the crystals have approached so near the centre as to leave a clear space of about 1/8 in. in diameter, the solution should be removed by means of a small piece of blotting-paper placed on top of the cell and allowed to remain for a moment. The strength of the solution is not important, but should not be very weak, as the feathery masses of crystals that add greatly to the beauty and depth of the mount do not then appear. If the crystals, when forming, appear white and brilliant, or darken slightly, or appear to be very fine or small at the sides of the cells, while those at the bottom are spray-like and quite large, the result will usually be successful, although the best conditions are when the bottom of the cell is occupied by several large feathery sprays of crystals, and the sides by shorter sprays or spine-like crystals, the whole being white and brilliant. Sometimes, after the solution has been removed, a deposition of copper on the silver will be found, or crystals of copper salts will intermingle with the silver, and mar its appearance, in which case it is necessary to reprepare the mount. If the silver be permitted to reach the centre, a black pre- cipitate will form and spoil the preparation as a permanent mount, but as the fluid is then filled with a mass of minute sparkling crystals in constant motion, the effect is both interesting and beautiful when viewed with a power of about twenty-five or fifty diameters. The time usually occupied in preparing a silver mount is about five minutes, the preparation being completed when the solution is removed from the cell by the blotting-paper. If the crystallization of the silver be unsatisfactory, the cell may be readily cleaned and another layer of wax applied. In order to apply the wax to the cell, a sheet is placed on the cell, pressed slightly with the finger, and a dise of wax forced into the cell by means of a cork that will snugly fit it, sufficient pressure being applied to cause the wax to adhere to the glass slide or to the wax already in the cell. There seems to be no rule by which the deposition of the crystals can be regulated, as under apparently the same conditions one preparation will be successful and the next one will be a failure. It would seem that a small quantity of gum in the solution would cause the crystals to adhere, and prevent them from breaking or shaking loose when the slide is handled roughly. Gum arabic has been tried without success, as it causes the crystals to turn black. However, the crystals usually adhere firmly enough to the cell and to each other to stand all ordinary usage. A greater mass of crystals may be obtained by repeating the deposition in the same cell, and allowing one mass of crystals to form on the top of the other. When forming in the solution, the crystals seem to almost completely fill the cell, standing out laterally, but when the fluid is removed they fall to the bottom and appear to the eye to form a thin layer, but under the Microscope they stand out in bold relief. Preparing Crystals of Silicon Fluoride.*—Beautiful objects for polar- ized light are produced by the action of undiluted fluoric acid on an ordinary glass slide, the results varying with the composition of the glass acted upon. The best results are to be obtained by using slips of thin polished plate and the following process :—Cut a circular hole in a piece of sheet modelling wax; warm the slide slightly, and make the wax adhere * Scientif. Enquirer, ii. (1887) pp. 128-9, from ‘ Dental Record.’ 678 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO well to it, so as to form a fluid-tight cell. Into this put four or five drops of the acid; watch its action closely when the glass has acquired an opaque film, which will be in from three to five minutes; wash it with a stream of warm water; finish with a camel-hair pencil. Remove the wax and dry the slide. The result shows crystals of silicon fluoride, which require no mounting. Blood, permanent Preparations of. ' (Method taught in Heidelberg. ] The Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 115. BRAMWELL, R.—Process for the detection of micro-organisms in nerve-tissue. Edin, Med. Journ., 1886, p. 324. CASTELLARNAU, J. M. pEr.—Procédés pour Examen microscopique et la Conserva- tion des Animaux 4 la Station zoologique de Naples. (Methods for the microscopical examination and the preservation of animals at the Naples Zoological Station.) Journ. de Microgr., XI. (1887) pp. 183-6, 215-7, 447-53. FrLiows, C. S.—Collecting, dissecting, and mounting Entomostraca. Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr., 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 186-8. Martin, L. J.—Petroleum Spirit as a Plant Preservative. [Recommends petroleum spirit (boiling from 25°-45° C.) for preserving plants intended for the study of chemical constituents. ] Bot. Gazette, X11. (1887) p. 42. Mixes, J. W. L.—The capturing, killing, and preservation of Insects for microscopical purposes. Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, pp. 80-1. Parkes, R.—The preparation of Foraminifera from common chalk. Trans, and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, p. 21. (8) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes. Ryder’s Paraffin Imbedding Apparatus.*—Prof. J. A. Ryder describes a, new paraffin imbedding apparatus which he has designed. Those who have had much experience in imbedding in paraffin are aware of the difficulties and risks which attend the imbedding of delicate objects on account of the danger of overheating the imbedding mass. The trouble with thermostats, or heat-regulators, is that they get out of order and give trouble, apart from the difficulty which arises from the variations in the pressure of the gas in the pipes which supply the burners, and which is entirely beyond the control of most forms of the thermostat. To avoid this, Dr. C. S. Dolley, of the Biological Department of the University of Pennsylvania, began a series of experiments with copper bars, which were heated at one end by means of a Bunsen burner, so that the heat conveyed by conduction to the remote end of the bars gradually diminished in in- tensity, because of its being constantly radiated into the surrounding air, according to well-known laws stated in the text-books on physics. It was found that, with the room at an approximately constant temperature, there was a point along the bar, at a certain constant distance from its heated end, where the temperature of 55° C. could be maintained, and where, if there was placed a copper cup filled with hard paraffin, the latter could be kept just at the point of fusion for a long time without endangering the objects to be imbedded. These results showed that it was possible to utilize an apparatus of this type for imbedding purposes. This led the writer to begin a set of experiments with a very simple modification of the foregoing type of apparatus, with the object of getting rid of the usual water-bath entirely in the process of imbedding, and to also use the paraffin itself as a means to indicate how far away from the source of heat it would be safe to allow an object to remain while it was being saturated. The object was effected in the following manner :—A triangular sheet * Amer. Naturalist, xxi. (1887) pp. 597-600 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 679 of copper, slightly less than 1/16 in. thick, 18 in. long, and 10 in. wide at one end and running to a sharp point at the other, as shown at s in fig. 190, is supported horizontally upon two legs at the wide end, and at some distance from the pointed end by another leg, these three legs constituting a firm tripod base for the whole device. Under the pointed end of the tri- angular plate of copper is placed a small Bunsen gas-burner, with an aperture of about 1/8 in., and connected with the gas-supply of the building by means of a rubber tube. If the flame is allowed to burn Fic. 190. MMM SS Ss SS SS : =a S SW \ ZZ/j°7 steadily at about half its full force, and permitted to play upon the copper plate at a distance of about 1 in. from its extreme point, as shown in the figure, the whole plate will soon be heated, but the temperature will be found to gradually diminish towards the wide end. At a distance of about 12 to 13 in. from the point where the flame acts upon the copper plate the temperature will remain steadily at about 56° C., with the temperature of the room at 22° C. As long as the temperature of the room remains nearly the same the temperature of the plate at any given distance from the burner will also remain at the same point. This constancy is due to the fact that the heat which is conducted through the copper plate with constant rapidity from its souree—the burner—is radiated into the surrounding air at an equally constant rate, and as one passes towards the wide end of the _ plate from the burner, trials with the thermometer show that there may be found an infinite number of points in succession at which the temperature is very nearly constant. In order to use the paraffin itself as an indicator of the proper tempe- rature, and in that way dispense with the thermometer altogether if desir- able, it was necessary to use a new type of cup in which to melt the paraffin. The paraffin-cup or trough p shown in the figure is made of copper, tin-lined, and is 6 in. long, 14 in. wide, and 14 in. deep. In practice the cup is half filled with paraffin and placed lengthwise on the copper plate, with its narrowest side towards the flame, and about 9 in. from it, as shown in the cut. The paraffin-cup may be covered with a slip of glass to exclude dust. If the burner plays upon the plate as directed, and the trough is in the proper position, in about an hour it will be found that the paraffin in the trough has been melted at the end nearest the burner but has remained congealed at the other. Moreover, it will be found that the point where the melted comes in contact with the nearly frozen paraffin is very constant, and it is just at this point where it is safe to place objects which are to be imbedded. The paraffin which remains congealed in the trough is represented in the cut by the shading at the remote end of the trough, the clear space below the dotted lines nearest the flame indicating the portion which remains molten. 680 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO It is clear from what has preceded that a shorter cup or trough filled with soft paraffin melting at 36° C. may be placed still farther away from the burner, alongside of the vessel containing hard paraffin fusing at 56° C., while mixtures of turpentine and paraffin, or chloroform and paraffin, would remain molten at a still greater distance from the flame. The applications and possibilities of this new device will be readily appreciated by histologists and embryologists, since it can be quickly seen if objects are in danger from overheating by simply noting whether the point where the paraffin remains molten in the trough has advanced farther from the flame. This can be easily observed through the transparent cover of the trough. For large laboratories, where a number of students are engaged in im- bedding, a simple modification of this device suggests itself. For such a purpose a horizontal disc of sheet copper, of the same thickness, but 3 ft. in diameter, would afford room for a large number of paraffin im- bedding-troughs, which could be arranged in a circle around and some distance from the centre, at which point a larger burner would be applied underneath. The temperature in such a device would diminish from the centre towards the periphery of the disc. The troughs would be placed upon different radii upon the surface of the disc, just as two or three troughs may be placed upon different radii of the triangular plate, which is practically the sector of a disc, as described above. For imbedding delicate objects, small cups made of tin-foil, pressed into shape in circular tapering moulds, may be satisfactorily employed with this apparatus, in the same way as the troughs. ‘The device described above can be made by any coppersmith for about two dollars. Imbedding Objects for the Rocking Microtome.*—Herr 8. Schonland advises the following method for imbedding objects in paraffin. It is especially intended for use with the Cambridge rocking microtome, which requires perfect saturation of the object with paraffin. The object, first stained in borax-carmine, is placed in 30 per cent. spirit, to which a trace of acetic acid has been added. It is then transferred to stronger and stronger spirit. From the strongest alcohol it is transferred to a vessel (holding 3-4 ccm.) half filled with oil of cloves and half with spirit. When the specimen has sunk to the bottom, it is placed in pure cloves, and after an hour in turpentine oil, wherein it remains for about six hours. It is next immersed in paraffin for eight to ten hours. The temperature of the paraffin, which has a melting-point of about 45° C., is not allowed to rise above 47°, but just before imbedding it is advisable to heat the paraffin a little more, as air-bubbles are thereby avoided. The ordinary paper boxes are used for imbedding. Imbedding Eyes in Celloidin.j—Dr. W. B. Canfield recommends that eyes should be hardened in Miiller’s fluid and then after-hardened in spirit. Schultze’s diffusion apparatus is of great use for preventing shrinking of the eye. A small incision is then made tangentially to the sclera and also on the corneal edges, and the eye put in equal parts of absolute alcohol and sulphuric ether. After twenty-four hours it is transferred to pure ether, and the next day to a thin watery solution of celloidin in ether. In order to get rid of air-bubbles, the eye is to be so immersed that the incisions are uppermost. After twenty-four hours the eye is put in thick celloidin, the vessel being left partially uncovered, until the celloidin is hard enough to * Bot. Centralbl., xxx. (1887) pp. 283-5. + The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 99-101. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 681 be cut. The block is then cut out, softened a few minutes in absolute alcohol, dipped once more in the celloidin solution, and put on a cork. The block when cut out is better softened in ether and at once trans- ferred to the cork. This procedure is not only more simple but more effective. The preparation on the cork is then exposed to the air until quite stiff and then allowed to float in 84 per cent. spirit until required. By this method sections of the whole or any part of the eye may be made. Anilin colours are to be avoided as they stain the celloidin. Logwood also stains it, but acetic acid (1/2-1 per cent. solution) withdraws it in twenty-four hours, leaving the tissue still coloured. Rosin may be used as a contrast stain. Cedar and origanum oils are the best for clarifying. Imbedding in Vegetable Wax.*—Dr. P. Francotte who has recently investigated the qualities of vegetable wax as an imbedding medium, finds, that whatever its potentialities may be, it is inferior to paraffin. The method he advises is as follows :—After the object is fixed, hardened, and stained, or not, it is laid in 94° spirit, kept at a temperature of 48° C. in a water-bath. The wax is then added gradually, and in small pieces, until the consistence is that of soup. If the object be small, the heat is continued until all the alcohol has evaporated. If the object be large, the alcoholic mass and the object are poured into a bulb fitted with a straight cooler or tube, about three feet long; as the spirit condenses, it falls back into the bulb, and when the object is properly saturated it is removed to another vessel and the spirit driven off. The object is then oriented in a metal or cardboard box filled with warm wax. When cool, the mass may be cut with a microtome or by hand. The sections are fixed to the slide with albumen or gum. The slide is then heated in a water-bath to 50° C., and alcohol added until the wax is dissolved. If not coloured en masse, the sections may now be stained and then dehydrated, and afterwards cleared up in cloves, cedar, or bergamot oil, or they may be mounted in glycerin. The advantages this medium has over paraffin are, that it dispenses with such fluids as toluol, xylol, benzine, and chloroform, and hence is suitable for animal tissue where these fluids are contra-indicated. It is available also for the examination of micro-organisms in tissues ; in this it is superior to paraffin, for it is always difficult and frequently impossible to discover microbes in tissues impregnated with paraffin. Its most important dis- advantages are, that it is difficult to obtain sections thinner than 0°01 mm., and to make out when the object is properly saturated. Baskets for the suspension of objects in paraffin.;j—Mr. H. Garman recommends the use of wire baskets for suspending objects in paraffin. Such a basket is easily made by coiling annealed wire as shown in fig. 191, beginning at the centre of the bottom and working outwards to the margin, then making the handle h, and finishing with a triangular base b. In use it is placed in the melted paraffin, the triangular base supporting and keeping it from the bottom of the paraffin basin, and it can be removed by means of the projecting handle, which is made of such length that it does not interfere with the glass cover of the basin. For very small objects a hammered wire spoon, like that used by Dr. Mark, is mounted in the same way as the basket (fig. 192). This method of suspending objects in paraffin * Bull. Soc. Belge Micr., xiii. (1887) pp. 140-4. + Amer. Naturalist, xxi. (1887) pp. 596-7 (3 figs.). 1887. 2.¥ 682 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO has resulted from attempts to avoid long handles or other belongings of the baskets, that prevent the close fitting of the plates of glass used to cover the paraffin dishes. Fig. 191. Fig. 192. Fie. 193. a Francotte’s Sliding Microtome.*—Dr. P. Francotte has designed an instrument capable of making most perfectly regular sections of a limited size, 5 mm. at most. The body of the microtome is like Ranvier’s, and the object to be cut is placed in a cylinder which slides in the microtome tube. The latter piece does not rub against the metal walls, but is supported. in the cylinder by means of pieces of cork. At the base of the tube is a scale for noting the movements of the screw, and at the side is an index for showing in what limits the piece can move. Upon the circular table of the microtome is fixed by three screws a plate larger than the table. In the centre is an opening in order that the piece may be raised, and at the side a groove with triangular vertical section and sharp edges; within this groove the object-carrier runs. The carrier slides merely on two longitudinal bands so as to lessen the friction as much as possible. The groove maintains a rectilinear and regular movement; the two metal bands keep the knife moving in the same plane. The razor is fixed to the carrier by means of a metal piece and two screws, and in order to obtain the desired stability the instrument is fixed to the work-table by a binding screw. For the rest, the manipulation of the instrument is very simple, and M. Francotte thinks it will suffice for most histological investigations. Ryder’s Automatic Microtome.{—This instrument (figs. 194 and 195) has been devised by Prof. J. A. Ryder, in order to facilitate the preparation * Bull. Soc. Belge Micr., xiii. (1887) pp. 149-50. t+ Amer. Natural., xxi. (1887) pp. 298-302 (2 figs.). Cf. also The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 179-83 (2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSOOPY, ETC. 683 of scctions for large classes, and also for the rapid preparation of series of sections in ribbons in embryological work, in which the element of time becomes a serious consideration. One hundred sections per minute can be readily cut with it. : The device is small and compact and is also automatic; the cutting takes place as fast as it is possible to move a vibrating lever up and down through a distance of 3 in. with the right hand. The designer considers that “nearly all other automatic microtomes are costly, unwieldy, large, and heavy, or else very compli- cated and liable to get out of order. The only exception in part to this rule is the rocking microtome, made in Cambridge, England; but it cuts in an arc, so that the sections are segments of a hollow cylinder, and not parts of a perfect plane; besides, the rocking or vibrating arm admits of only a very limited movement, so that the instrument is suitable only for cutting sections of ob- jects of very limited dimensions ; nor is the position of the block adjustable. Moreover, in none of the automatic microtomes now in use is it possible to place the knife at right angles or any other desired angle to the direction in which the block to be cut is moved—a great desideratum in botanical or other work in which an inclined knife is necessary. In order to supply an instru- ment serviceable especially Fig. 195. to teachers, as well as to all classes of students, bota- nists, pathologists, histolo- gists, and zoologists, the designer has attempted to bring together all the de- sirable features of previously invented instruments, in as simple, convenient, and com- pact a form as possible, without sacrificing rapidity and efficiency of action.” The working parts are an oscillating lever, which is provided with a clamp at one end into which paraffin-holders are adjusted, and at the other with a simple handle. This lever rests upon trunnions on either side, and these in turn rest in triangular notches at the top of the two pillars between which the lever oscillates. At the cutting end of the lever a spring pulls the lever down and effects the sectioning and also the adjustment for the next section. The lever is pushed over and adjusted for the successive sections by a hollow screw, through which passes the trunnion on the side away from the knife. This screw is fixed to a toothed wheel, 3 in. in diameter, which revolves close by the side of the oscillating lever. The toothed wheel and screw is actuated by a pawl fixed to the side of the lever near the handle. The number of teeth which this pawl can pass in a single vibration downward is controlled by a fixed stop screwed into the under side of the oscillating lever near the handle; the end of this stop striking on the top of the bed-plate thus brings the lever to rest at a constant point 2x2 684 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO in its downward excursion. An adjustable sector by the side of the toothed wheel throws the pawl out of gear after a given radius of the wheel has been turned through an are embracing the desired number of teeth. This adjust- ment is also effected before the block, containing the object to be cut, reaches the edge of the knife. The adjustment for the next section is there- fore effected while the surface of the block is not in contact with the under side of the knife, so that no flattening or scraping effect is produced on the surface of the block in its upward passage past the knife. The movement of the vibrating lever being arrested at each down stroke at one point and the pawl which catches into the notches in the toothed wheel being released at any desired point by the action of the adjustable sector, it is possible to adjust the apparatus with great accuracy for cutting sections of any desired thickness. If a given radius of the wheel is moved through the arc embraced by a single tooth, sections are cut, having a thickness of only 1/10000 of an inch, or 0:0025 mm.—a thickness which is only practically possible with paraffin imbedding and a very keen razor. If more teeth are taken by the pawl, any thickness of section is possible up to about 1/400 of an inch, or 0°0625 mm. (The screw which adjusts the block for cutting has exactly fifty threads to the inch, and there are two hundred teeth on the periphery of the toothed wheel. The value of a single tooth is, therefore, 1/50 x 1/200 = 1/10000 in.). A freezing attachment, which has lately been appended to the appara- tus, shows that frozen sections can be made with as great rapidity and success as those cut from objects imbedded in the paraffin block, and very nearly, if not quite, as thin. Other auxiliary apparatus makes it possible to cut celloidin sections. This is effected by means of alcohol conducted by a tube from a reservoir to the knife, over which the fluid will run and © drain into a tray below in such a way as not to come in contact with any other parts of the machine. This tray fits into a recess in the side of the bed-plate of the instrument just below the knife, and into this tray the celloidin sections may be allowed to drop as fast as cut. The paraffin-holders are square and 7/8 in. in diameter, so that a block of that size may very readily be sectioned. For the botanist, one of these holders is provided with a movable side and screw for clamping objects, so that rather tough stems may be firmly held between blocks of cork, while the more delicate vegetable tissues, or such as must be im- bedded in fresh carrot, soaked in gum and hardened in alcohol, may also be firmly held for sectioning by the same device, provided the pieces of carrot are first trimmed into the right shape. The same style of holder is equally applicable for holding the corks—if properly trimmed—upon which tissues are imbedded in celloidin or in gum. This style of holder also enables one to imbed very long objects entire in paraffin—such as earthworms—and to cut them asa single piece, provided the surrounding paraffin is carefully trimmed so as to have two opposite sides parallel. An object 6 in. long and 3/4 in. in diameter, imbedded in this way, may be cut into an absolutely continuous series of sections without losing any essential portions. This is accomplished by slipping the block through the quadrangular clamp for the distance of 1/2 in. every time 1/2 in. of the object has been cut off in the form of sections. 1/2 in. is the length of block which can be cut at one time without readjusting the feed-screw which moves the block and vibrating lever over towards the knife, the whole being kept firmly in place against the face of the hollow screw by a strong spring which presses against the end of the trunnion on the out- side of the iron pillar on that side of the instrument where the knife is fastened, so that all the sections are of exactly the same thickness, from ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 685 first to last. “Cutting up large objects in the manner above described is not possible with any other form of microtome yet constructed.” Almost any section-knife—wide or narrow-bladed—will fit into and be firmly held by the knife-clamp, which is, however, intended more especi- ally to hold an ordinary razor. For ribbon-cutting by the paraffin method, the block containing the object, after it is trimmed and soldered to the paraffin with which the holder is filled, by means of a heated wire, is covered with a thin coat of soft paraffin or “ paraffin-gum,” and of which “ chewing-gum” is made. (Chewing-gum may be rendered available for this purpose, if it is melted at a temperature somewhat above boiling, when the sugar which it con- tains will separate as caramel, leaving the pure paraflin-gum, which may be drained off and used as directed, if the manipulator should find it difficult to get the paraffin-gum of commerce.) This enables one to cut ribbons of any desired length, since the softer paraffin at the edges of the successive sections sticks them together by their margins as fast as they are cut. The ribbons may be allowed to fall upon a slip of paper, which may be drawn out, as fast as the sections are cut, from under the bed- plate of the instrument, beneath which there is a space left for this purpose between the three toes or tripod upon which the whole apparatus rests. The edge of the knife also remains in the same plane, no matter at what angle the cutting edge is placed with reference to the direction in which the block to be cut is moved, just as in the best forms of the sledge microtome. A section flattener can be attached in the form of a roller of hard rubber which turns loosely on a rod held parallel with the knife-edge. The roller is placed with its centre somewhat in advance of the knife-edge and the rod supporting it may be fastened to the back edge of the knife or be clamped in the position of the support which holds the tube conveying the alcohol to the knife when cutting celloidin sections. In cutting celloidin or collodion masses, it has been found that the greater the inclination of the knife the better the results, and it may be found expedient to devise a special form of clasp for cutting celloidin. Mall’s Section-smoother.*—Dr. P. F. Mall recommends a section- smoother constructed on the following principle. It consists of a rubber rod about 1} cm. in diameter, which rotates loosely on a solid axis. The Fic. 196. Fic. 197. Fia. 198. rod is so placed that it hangs a little below and in front of the edge of the knife (fig. 196). When the knife passes over the object, the rod is raised * Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol.—Anat. Abtheil., 1887, pp. 2-3 (3 figs.). Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxi. (1887) p. 597 (3 figs.). 686 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO to an extent equal to the thickness of the section, and is thrown above and a little behind the edge of the knife (fig. 197), so that the section is pre- vented from rolling as it slides upon the knife. When the knife is pushed back preparatory to making the next section, the rod rolls over the prepara- tion, and in consequence of the play of its axis, is kept free from the edge of the knife (fig. 198). The section does not stick to the rod as is the case in Jung’s section-smoother. Extemporized Section-smoother.*—Dr. W. C. Borden has invented a device for preventing sections imbedded in paraffin from curling. It consists of a bent glass tube, one end of which is passed through a hole in the table and into the other is fitted a camel’s-hair brush. For most sections a round brush with long hairs is the most suitable, but for large sections a flat brush is tobe preferred. The brush is to be so arranged that it lies lightly yet closely on the surface of the object to be cut. The thinnest and most delicate sections are not injured by this method and as the harder paraffins allow the thinnest sections to be cut, great success is obtainable by the combination of this flattener and hard paraffin. Making Sections of Injected Lung.t—Mr. A. J. Doherty injects the lung in sitw through the right ventricle with a stiff but freely flowing carmine-gelatin mass (Carter’s formula), care being taken to throw the mass in slowly and with a uniform pressure, and not to over distend the vessels, either by injecting too rapidly or for too long a time. When properly filled the pulmonary arteries and veins are ligatured, the lungs are removed from the body, and are then distended with 90 per cent. spirit injected through the trachea, which is afterwards to be closed with a clip or bull- nose forceps. The lungs are then weighted with lead and placed in a quantity of 90 per cent. alcohol. In twenty-four hours they are taken out, the clip is removed from the trachea, and as much alcohol as possible is drained from the organs. After this, they are to be redistended with 90 per cent. alcohol and placed in a fresh quantity of spirits of that grade as before. This process is to be repeated on the fifth and tenth days, and at the end of a month the lungs will be found to be hardened without being in the slightest degree collapsed. Cut from one of the lungs, preferably at the root and transversely across a bronchus, a piece, say 1/2 in. square and 1/4 in. thick; transfer it to a glass beaker half filled with methylated chloroform, place the beaker in a water-bath and heat to 100° F. Shake the vessel occasionally to facilitate the saturation of the tissue with the chloroform, and in half-an-hour, add very gradually (i. e. in small pieces, one after the other) about 50 per cent. of paraffin. Keep the lung in this mixture for one hour, and then transfer to a bath of pure paraffin, kept for two hours at 3° F, above its melting-point. The tissue will then be thoroughly infiltrated with the paraffin and beautiful sections can be made with a hand microtome and a sharp razor. The sections are passed through three consecutive changes of warm temperature, and finally are mounted in balsam and benzole, Grouut, P.—Le nouveau Microtome 4 levier. (The new lever microtome—Hansen’s.) [Constructed generally on the Thoma plan, its characteristics being the use of a lever and the arrangement for cutting either dry or immersion. The object- holder is connected with the short arm of a lever, the arms of which are as 1 to 5. At each complete turn the micrometer-screw on the right, which acts on the long end of the lever, rises or falls 0:5 mm., so that the object- holder is moved 0-1 mm. Lach of the fifty teeth of the head of the screw * The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 97-8 (1 fig.), t Ibid., pp. 101-2, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 687 therefore represents a movement of the section through 0:002 mm. There is also an automatic arrangement. For wet cutting a fixed tray is added. A second form of the instrument has a movable tray, which can be lowered for dry or raised for wet cutting. In the latter case the object-holder is immersed, It is claimed that this plan of construction obviates the inconveniences of those microtomes which are reversible for immersion. Le Naturaliste, VIII. (1886) pp. 241-3 (8 figs.). Journ. de Microgr., 1886, pp. 507-12 (6 figs.). HAENSELL, P.—Le Microtome et ses applications 4 V’anatomie de l’eil. (The microtome and its applications to the anatomy of the eye.) Bull. Clin, Nat. Ophthalm., IV. p. 106. Reppine, T. B.—Uses of Celloidin. The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 43-5. RoOsENBERG, P.—Eine neues Microtom. (A new microtome.) Anat. Anzeig., 1886, pp. 211-3. Tyas, W. H.—Golding-Bird’s small Ice Freezing Microtome. Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, p. 70. (4) Staining and Injecting. Fixing and Staining Nuclei.*—Mr. D. H. Campbell writes, that the following methods have been found to give excellent results in the study of nuclei. The observations were chiefly made with the mother-cells of the spermatozoids of various ferns, but the nuclei of vegetative cells also gave very instructive preparations. In order to fix the nuclei, the prothallia were placed in aqueous solu- tions of chromic or picric acid or corrosive sublimate. The chromic acid solution should be a 1 per cent. solution; the others concentrated. In these solutions they should remain from one to two hours, though in the corrosive sublimate solution less time is required. The chromic and picric acid preparations must be washed in several waters before staining. It has been found a good plan to leave them overnight in abundant fresh water before the final washing. The sublimate preparations may be trans- ferred to absolute alcohol, in which they should remain several hours. The specimens are now ready for staining. The best results were obtained with hematoxylin and gold chloride. The secret of good hematoxylin staining is to use a very dilute solution; three or four drops of the prepared solution in a watchglassful of distilled water, and to allow the specimens to remain in this for at least twenty-four hours. After taking the specimens from the hematoxylin solution, they must be passed successively through 50 per cent., 70 per cent., and absolute alcohol before mounting. Half an hour is usually sufficient for each of the alcohols. For immediate examination they may be mounted in glycerin, but for permanent preparations first in origanum oil, and then transferred to Canada balsam (dissolved in chloroform.) The gold chloride method is simpler, and is found to answer admirably for specimens fixed in picric or chromic acid; but with those fixed with the corrosive sublimate or alcohol, it has not answered so well. A few drops of 1 per cent. gold chloride in water are placed in a watchglass almost half-filled with distilled water, and the specimens are allowed to remain from one-half to one hour, the solution being kept in the dark. Strasburger recommends a trace of HCl, but with the picric and chromic acid preparations, although thoroughly washed, the author found this un- necessary. The specimens are then thoroughly washed, being at the same time exposed to the light and finally mounted in glycerin. With alcohol material, hematoxylin was found to give the best results. The above notes embody (the author says) nothing specially new, but may be useful as a memorandum of work actually done. * Bot. Gazette, xii. (1887) p. 40. 688 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Staining Elastic Fibres with Victoria Blue.*—Dr. L. Lustgarten states that Victoria blue stains elastic fibres in the fresh condition if the prepara- tions are hardened for 24 hours in chrom- osmic-acetic acid and then in spirit. 1—2 parts of an alcoholic solution of Victoria blue are mixed with four parts of water. Then alcohol and bergamot oil. The hue is blue-green. Nuclear staining is more successful with a watery solution, followed by alcohol, bergamot oil, and xylol balsam. Staining Peziza Specimens.j—Mr. C. F. Fairman decolorizes the Pezize by soaking in a solution of corrosive sublimate (1 to 2000 aq. dist.); then washing from precipitated calomel by agitation in distilled water and macerating in 90 per cent. alcohol for twenty-four hours. For immediate examination, lower for a few seconds in a strong hematoxylin solution, wash in distilled water, or if preferred, use the dilute hematoxylin fluid. (See supra, p. 687.) Staining relations of Leprosy and Tubercle Bacilli.t—Dr. F. Wesener, who has recently investigated the receptivity of these bacilli for anilin dyes in order to ascertain if any crucial difference existed between these micro- organisms, finds that a diagnosis between the two must be made from several kinds of proof and not from one alone. With regard to the reaction to the simple anilin solutions (Weigert’s method) he found that methyl- violet was more efficient than fuchsin for tubercle bacilli, but that such dis- tinction did not hold good for leprosy bacilli; nor did he find a minimum time test of a satisfactory nature, although leprosy bacilli took up red dyes rather quicker. Nor did the more complicated solutions (Koch’s, Ehrlich’s, Ziehl’s methods) afford any satisfactory test. The author in view of the fact that a diagnosis must be made from differences of degree, advises the following stains if the Ehrlich method has demonstrated the presence of bacilli, and it is desirable to ascertain if the bacilli be those of leprosy or tubercle. (1) Methyl-violet (in concentrated watery or dilute alcoholic solution) for twenty-four hours: decolorize in nitric acid. (2) Fuchsin as above. (3) Baumgarten’s methods. (4) Four to six minutes in a watery solution of fuchsin : decolorize in alcohol. (5) The same with methyl-violet. Staining Differences of Leprosy and Tubercle Bacilli.s—Prof. Baum- garten controverts the statement of Dr. Wesener with regard to the re- spective receptivity of leprosy and tubercle bacilli for anilin stains. By using a dilute solution of fuchsin and immersing the sections for 12-15 minutes, and then decolorizing in nitric acid (1-10) with after-staining in methylen-blue for 2-3 minutes and dehydration in absolute alcohol 3-4 minutes, the leprosy bacilli show red, the tubercle bacilli are unstained. Or the sections may be stained in the Ehrlich fuchsin for 2-3 minutes with subsequent procedure as above. Cover-glass preparations give analogous results, for leprosy bacilli will stain in 6-7 minutes in a cold dilute alcoholic solution of fuchsin, but tubercle bacilli will not. Yet Prof. Baumgarten would not rely alone on colour reaction—the point at issue, by the way— but would also take into consideration the position and arrangement of the microbes and verify the results by inoculation experiments. Decoloration of Bacteria stained with Anilin dyes,||—Dr. A. Spina, starting from the observation that cotton fibre treated with tannin as a mor- * Medicin. Jahrb, K. Gesell. der Aerzte zu Wien, 1886, pp. 285-91 (1 pl.). + Bot. Gazette, xii. (1887) p. 85. { Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., i (1887) pp. 450-6. § Ibid., pp. 573-6, || Allg. Wien. Med. Ztg., 1887, Nos. 15 and 16. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 689 dant gives up anilin stains to acids very slowly, subjected some fission fungi to a corresponding treatment. Dry preparations of rotting meat infusion treated with a strong tannin solution, and then stained for twenty-four hours with anilin or methyl violet, were found to be thoroughly stained after acid, while the preparations not treated with tannin were either only faintly stained or not at all. The difference became more apparent if a saturated solution of tannin were used, and this peculiarity was found to affect all kinds of Bacteria alike. A similar effect, but less marked, was obtained with various albuminates and fats. By preparing a decomposing fluid con- taining tannin, the author found the same resistance to acids in living Bacteria. Demonstration of Phloroglucin.*—Herr O. Lindt has discovered that vanillin in very dilute solution (1:1000) gives a colour reaction with phloroglucin and orcin, but not with resorcin. Both these bodies are, however, sharply distinguished from each other by the different colour given to these solutions. The phloroglucin is a bright red, assuming a violet-red tone later on. The orcin solution is a bright blue with a trace of red. The reaction is so sensitive that 0°000001 grm. of the dry sub- stance can be easily recognized on the addition of a drop of the vanillin solution made according to the following formula:—Dissolve vanillin 0-005 grm. in spirit 0°5 grm., to this add water 0°5 grm., strong hydro- chloric acid 3:0 grm. ‘The reaction takes place so quickly that the disturbing influence of secondary appearances does not interfere with the histo-chemical investigation. It is, however, necessary that the microscopical sections should be previously dried on the slide, because water impedes the reaction and lessens its intensity. It is further recommended that a control examina- tion should be simultaneously carried on. By means of this solution the author has been able to determine the presence of phloroglucin in tissues which have been hitherto supposed to be devoid of it. On the other hand, phloroglucin was found to exist in considerable quantity in the tissues of certain leaves which later on became crimson, although the leaves of most plants which remain green in autumn contain little or none. Dr. Lindt suspects that the red colour of certain leaves and plant stems is not less dependent on the presence of phloroglucin than on the ex- istence of a certain quantity of tannin, for it is quite possible that the relations which exist between the latter and the red colouring matter may depend on a similar reaction of certain transformation-products due to the action of tannic acid on phloroglucin—a reaction comparable to the effect of vanillin on phloroglucin. It may be mentioned that the presence of a mineral acid does not seem to be indispensable to the appearance of the reaction, for if vanillin, phloroglucin, and oxalic acid be dissolved in water and the solution evaporated to dryness, the residue is bright red. Staining Preparations for Photography.t—Dr. P. Francotte gives the results of experiments in photographing preparations stained with various colours. For picro-carmine preparations two baths are necessary—(1) The plate is steeped for two minutes in distilled water 200 cc.; ammonia 2 ce. (2) Then for two minutes in distilled water 200 cc.; ammonia 2 cc.; alcohol 10 ce. ; solution of cyanin 1: 500 in absolute alcohol 5 ce. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., ii. (1885) pp. 495-9. + Bull. Soc. Belge Micr., xiii, (1887) pp. 151-8. 690 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The plates are placed on blotting-paper and dried rapidly. They only keep for a few days. For preparations stained with vesuvin, Bismarck brown, methyl-green, or picro-carmine with yellow and red stain, the formula which gives the best results is that of Mulman and Scolik:—1 gr. of quinoline red is dissolved in 500 cc. alcohol, and 50 cc. of an alcoholic solution of cyanin 1:50 is added. The plate is steeped for a minute in water 100 cc. ; am- monia1/2cc. Itis then transferred to a bath composed of the quinoline red solution 1 cce.; water 100 cc. ; ammonia 1/2 cc., for one minute. The super- fluous water having been removed with blotting-paper, the plate is dried in a stove at about 30°. For preparations stained with any colour the following formula succeeds well:—Bath for two minutes in a watery solution of erythrosin 1:1000, 25 ce.; ammonia 4 cc.; water 175 cc. If the preparations are stained red, 1 cc. of an alcoholic solution of eyanin 1: 500 is added. Another formula is—Solution of erythrosin 1: 1000, 25 cc.; solution of silver nitrate 1: 1000, 25 cc.; water 50-100 cc.; and if the preparations are deeply stained with red, the author adds 5-10 cc. of an alcoholic solution of cyanin 1 : 500. Dr. Francotte remarks that it is absolutely indispensable to use ortho- chromatic plates when dealing with coloured preparations, and if the stain be blue or violet, a yellow glass must be interposed between the light and the preparation. For developing, the author prefers pyrogallic acid and sulphite of soda. Four baths are required :—(1) 10 gr. pyrogallic acid dissolved in 100 ce. of alcohol at 90°. (2) 100 gr. of pure sulphite of soda dissolved in 200 cc. distilled water. (3) 100 gr. of pure carbonate of soda dissolved in 200 ce. distilled water. (4) An aqueous 10 per cent. solution of bromide of potash. In order to develope, 5 ec. of No. 1, 10 cc. of No. 2, and 5 ec. of No. 3 are poured into a vessel containing 100 cc. of water, and if the time of ex- posure be in excess, a few drops of No. 4 are added. The time of development is about five minutes. Fixing is performed in the usual way. If the plates are still coloured after the operation (and this often happens) they are immersed in a bath of spirit at 90°, to which a few drops of ammonia are added. BipDERT.—Ein Verfahren, den Nachweis vereinzelter Tuberkelbacillen zu sichern, nebst Bemerkungen tiber die Farbbarkeit der Bacillen und Aetiologie der Tuberculose. (A process of authenticating the presence of single tubercle bacilli, with remarks on the staining capacity of the bacilli and the etiology of tuberculosis.) Berl. Klin. Wochenschr., 1886, Nos. 42, 43. Cf. Centralbl. f. Bacteriol., I. (1887) p. 59. DEKHUYZEN, M. C.—Ueber die Tinetion, (On staining.) Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1886, Nos. 51-2. Douerty, A. J.—The Staining of Animal and Vegetable Tissues. {“‘ The object of the present paper, which is addressed to professed biologists as well as to dilettanti, is twofold; firstly, to record the results of my own exten- sive researches into the properties of staining reagents; and secondly, to place before the microtumist in a condensed form an account of various processes adopted by other workers with the Microscope.’’] Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, pp. 1-19. GrRigEeRJEW, A.—[On Ehrlich’s Staining of Micro-organisms.] Russkaja Med., 1886, No. 42. HERXHEIMER, C.—Ein neues Farbungsverfahren fiir die elastischen Fasern der Haut. (A new staining process for the elastic fibres of the skin.) Fortschr. d. Med., TV. (1886) p. 787. KamMENSKI, D, A.—Eine neue Methode die Koch’schen Bacillen im Sputum zu farben. (A new method of staining Koch’s bacilli in sputum.) Wratsch, 1887, pp. 276-7 (in Russian). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 691 Latruam, V. A.—The Microscope and how to use it. XI. Injecting, &c. (contd.) Journ. of Microscopy, V1. (1887) pp. 169-79. LvusTGARTEN, S.—Victoriablau, ein neues Tinctionsmittel fiir elastische Fasern und fiir Kerne. (Victoria blue, a new staining medium for elastic fibres and nuclei.) Wiener Med. Jahrb., 1886, p. 285. (Manton, W. P., AND OTHERS. ]—Stains. (* How often, for instance, we read of a new objective that promises wonders. Such and kindred productions, of great value withal, are examined and discussed, till the next new objective or what-not displaces it. All this is as it should be. But do we show the same enthusiasm and interest over a new stain that allows us, perhaps, to study some object more satisfactorily with a 1/6 than could formerly have been done witha1/8? We think not. All this is wrong. Is the new apochromatic glass—granting, even, all that is claimed for it—of greater importance to us than the results of the studies in the anilin dyes that indi- vidualized the B. tuberculosis? There are many who hold that we have about reached tlie limit of perfection in lenses. Be this as it may, the goal certainly does not seem to be so very far distant. But the province of stains has not as yet been invaded to any very great extent. And especially is this true as regards differential staining.’’] The Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 110. REYNOLDs, R. W.—Injecting and cutting sections of the Cat. The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 156-9. Unna, P. G.—Ueber Erzeugung von Vesuvin im Gewebe und tiber Metaphenyl- endiamin als Kernfarbemittel. (On the formation of vesuvin in the tissues and on metaphenylendiamin for nuclear staining.) Monatschr. f. prakt. Dermutol., 1887, p. 62. V., R. E.—Permanganate of Potash as a Staining Medium for Micro Objects. [For examining tissues of plants. “It defines edges of cells, markings on cell-walls, &c., more strongly than other dyes.’’] Engl. Mech,, XLV. (1887) p. 346. WeEIGERT, C.—Ueber eine neue Methode zur Farbung von Fibrin und von Micro- organismen. (On a new method of staining fibrin and micro-organisms.) Fortschr. d. Med., 1887, pp. 228-32. WELLINGTON, C.—Staining and Mounting Plant Sections. The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 133-4. (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Flask for dehydrating specimens to be mounted in balsam or paraffin.* —Dr. P. Francotte’s dehydrator, the idea of which is taken from Schulze’s apparatus, consists of a broad-necked flask to holdabout halfa litre. This con- tains alcoho] and sulphate of copper. Into this flask is passed a dialysing tube, 5-6 cm. in diameter. It is closed above by a plate of glass, and below by a piece of parchment paper. The flask is plugged with a muslin bag filled with quicklime. The flask contains a float for marking the strength of the spirit from 94°-100°. A similar float is placed in the dialysing tube, and when the spirit in this tube is of 100°, it is emptied into the flask. The specimen is placed in the tube along with alcohol at 94°, and care has to be taken that the level of the liquid in the tube is the same as that in the flask. The apparatus works more quickly in a warm place. Permanent Preparations on firm media.{—Dr. J. Soyka when employ- ing firm opaque nutritive material, as bread, potato, rice, uses round glass vessels about 6 cm. in diameter and 3 cm. high. The edge is bent out- wards at the top for about 1 cm. and well ground, so that a plate of glass about 8 cm. in diameter can be cemented on. These vessels are then care- fully stuffed to the height of 1 cm. with the medium, and the surface of the latter carefully levelled. After having been sterilized and inoculated with the cultivation the sterilized cover is cemented on. Pure cultivations, as bread and potato, will keep for at least two years, and thus are always ready * Bull. Soc. Belge Micr., xiii. (1887) pp. 146-7. + See this Journal, 1886, p. 537. t Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., i. (1887) pp. 542-4. 692 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO for demonstration purposes. In an analogous manner may be preserved macro- and microscopical preparations. For this purpose small glass vessels like watch-glasses with flat bottoms are used. The floor is about 5 cm. in diameter, and the walls may ascend vertically or obliquely. Upon these a thin glass cover is placed, after the nutrient medium, with the bacteria to be cultivated, has been poured in. ‘The organisms may or may not be developed in an incubator. Low powers are always available for inspecting the results of this method through the cover-glass, and if the gelatin or agar layer be very thin higher powers can be used. Before closing permanently it is advisable to wash the surface of the gelatin, &c., with a sublimate solution 1:1000. Drops of moisture which may condense on the cover and so obscure the colonies may be avoided by placing on the top a piece of warm glass or metal. Use of Styrax in Histology.*—Dr. P. Francotte recommends styrax instead of balsam when the latter renders the object too transparent, e. g. for bacteria and in the study of karyokinesis styrax gives a greater resolu- tion than balsam, while its slightly yellow tint is eminently favourable for photographic purposes. The author has obtained with ordinary plates ex- cellent figures of the cells in the branchie of larve of salamander from specimens mounted in styrax, while similar preparations mounted in balsam required isochromatic plates or the use of chrysoidin previous to the eosin. No excess of balsam necessary.|—Mr. J. E. Whitney emphasizes the fact that there should not be any surplus balsam to remove from around the cover. Experience soon learns to graduate the amount so that it will fill the required space. The balsam slide and cover should be exactly centered, and if the balsam happen to be too thick a very slight amount of heat will make it flow to the edge. It is a good rule to mix a little less balsam than seems necessary, as a little pressure will squeeze the balsam right out to the edge. When a cell is used it is impossible, however, to avoid some excess of balsam, as it needs to exude slightly around the cover to drive out the air from the cell; but even in this case, if carefully graduated to the cell, the excess need not be noticeable, and it can be - covered with a ring of cement without being cleaned away at all. Mounting Opaque Objects.t—Mr. C. M. Vorce deprecates the use of pasteboard slides for mounting opaque objects; for even when of heavy tarboard they bend so readily as to crack or loosen the covers very easily, and, unless well saturated with some resinous varnish, are liable to mould or to take up moisture and deposit it under the cover. Even covered with paper they do not stand reasonable wear. Wooden slips are vastly better, and can be cheaply made by boring a hole centrally edgewise through a piece of wood 1 in. thick and 3 in. long of any width, and slitting it upon a saw table. But for this class of objects, for which low powers will ordinarily be sufficient, glass is the best material, and admits of examining both sides of the object. For objects that must be viewed uncovered and on both sides, no other mount will equal two of. Pierce’s capped cells mounted back to back with the object between and fixed in a wooden slip, either temporarily or permanently, or on a metal plate. Mounting Opaque Objects on a Micrometer Background.S—Mr. R. Parkes writes :—“ Most people on looking at an object under the Microscope * Bull. Soc. Belg. Mier., xiii. (1887) pp. 144-6. + The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 98-9. ~ Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii. (1887) pp. 92-3. § Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1886, pp. 58-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 693 for the first time wish to know the natural size of the object exhibited, and for all opaque objects which could be mounted on a white, black, or coloured background, this information can be best attained by printing on the ground a scale ruled, say, one hundred lines to the inch, and upon which the object can be mounted, when its size will be at once apparent. I have engraved and brought down for presentation to the Society a ruled plate and other requisites, which will enable those members who care to do so, to produce any number of scales required. The plate before being used should be cleaned with turpentine, and the colouring matter rubbed in dry, lampblack, or any other powder colour will do, the excess colour being wiped off by passing a piece of tightly wrapped wash-leather across the plate. A piece of smooth wood or glass should then be taken, aud soap or bees’-wax drawn across the face, and the paper about to be printed on should be laid upon it, the soap making it adhere to the face and keeping it straight. The soap or wax should then be passed over the paper, taking care to have a smooth and even film. The paper being thus prepared should be placed on the plate and the back rubbed lightly with the steel burnisher provided, and, on removing it, a clear impression of ‘the scale will be found imprinted on the surface. If ordinary note-paper be used, many objects can be well illuminated by sending light through from the mirror of the Microscope. I have also engraved for the Society a metal micrometer ruled 100, 250, 500, and 1000 lines to the inch, which the members will find useful for measuring opaque objects. It has the advantage of not being so liable to break as the glass micrometers, and can be readily used with all powers up to 1/6 in. objective.” Cover-glass Holder.*—Dr. F. L. James describes the device (fig. 199) for holding cover-glasses after they are cleaned and ready for application to the slip. It consists of a coil of brass spiral spring wire bent round a Fig. 199. Section cork, which has been grooved to receive it. The method of using is illus- trated by the cover-glasses in position on it. * Proc. Amer, Soc. Micr. 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, p. 145 (2 figs.). 694 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO James’s Improved Slide Cabinet.*—Dr. F. L. James fastens, by marine glue, to the under side of each tray, pieces of vulcanized indiarubber, 1/2 in. in diameter, and 1/8 in. in thickness. These pieces are so arranged that one of them comes on each end of the slide beneath it in such manner that the slide is prevented from rising up against the bottom of the superincumbent tray. The slips in the upper tray are held in place by similar bits of rubber fastened to the cover of the box. Griffith’s Pocket Slide Cabinet.t—Mr. E. H. Griffith’s cabinet (fig. 200) is intendcd especially for pocket use. It is similar to another already in the © Fie. 200. market, but in the place of rack-work in that, trays are used in this. A feature in its favour, that will be appreciated by those who carry slides in pockets, is its security from opening. Baxer, S. W.—Wax Cells. {Made by building up layers of artists’ wax on the slide, which is placed on the turning-table, and a cut made through the first layer of wax the size of the cover-glass intended to be used, and the centre taken out; a cut is then made with a needle a little inside of the first cut, extending down to the glass; the centre is then removed and another cut made through the wax a little outside of the first cut, leaving a wall of wax to form the cell. This is finished by smoothing with a piece of ivory, shaped like a chisel, thoronghly varnishing, inside and out, with Brown’s cement. By using dark-coloured wax for the first sheet next the slide, and leaving it as a bottom to the cell, a background can be made to suit any object. ] Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr. 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, p. 196. BROKENSHIRE, F. R.—Mounting without Pressure. Scientif. Enquirer, II. (1887) pp. 135-8. CALDWELL, C. T.—New Cement. [It is simply the article sold at the paint and oil stores under the name of ‘ hard oil finish. . . . It runs freely, makes smooth rings, dries readily and quickly, and is extremely adhesive. It is cleanly.”] Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 98-9. EviEu, L.—Gums and Pastes for Labels. Engl. Mech., XLIV. (1887) pp. 535-6. Horxins, G. M.—A quick method of mounting dry objects. [Recommends metal rings with a narrow internal flange at the top for the cover- glass, and a wider external flange at the bottom for attachment to the slide. ] Engl. Mech., XLV. (1887) pp. 310-11 (2 figs.), from Scientific American. James, F. L.—Device for centering and holding the slide upon the turntable. [It consists of the ordinary triangular jaws pivoted exactly opposite to each other, and the acute end of one of the slips resting against a good strong spring. The slip is shoved into place from the open end of the jaws, opposite to the end held by the spring. A slide placed between these jaws is held as firmly as in a vice, and om cell can be turned down or manipulated exactly as though it were in a athe.” Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr. 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, p. 146. Keuuicort, D. 8.—Kaiser’s Glycerin Jelly for Plant Sections. [‘‘ Stained leaf sections are best shown in Kaiser’s glycerin jelly to which a large per cent. of gelatin has been added.”] The Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 152. * Proce. Amer. Soc. Micr, 9th Ann, Meeting, 1886, p. 146. + Ibid., p. 152. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 695 Laboratory Notes. [Preserving a specimen temporarily by applying a drop of glycerin at the side of the cover-glass in such a manner as to effect a union between the water and the glycerin; value of dried specimens of alge, &c.] Amer, Natural., X XI. (1887) pp. 477-9. TRZEBINSKI, Sr.—Einiges tiber die Einwirkung der Hartungsmethoden auf die Beschaffenheit der Ganglienzellen im Riickenmark der Kaninchen und Hunde. (On the influence of hardening methods on the condition of the ganglion-cells in the spinal cord of rabbits and dogs.) Virchow’s Arch. f. Path, Anat., CVII. (1887) p. 1. Wiuiiams, C. F. W. T.—Mounting in Castor Oil. (Cell to be made with Ward’s brown cement and filled with best castor oil. “ For plant crystals, such as raphides and the like, there is no preservative so good in my opinion as this oil.” Sci.-Gossip, 1887, p. 138. (6) Miscellaneous. New Micro-chemical Reaction for Tannin.*—Experiments were made by Herr J. W. Moll, for the purpose of discovering a good reagent for tannin in the cells of plants, which should give a precipitate sharply sepa- rated from the surrounding fluid, and at the same time should show clearly the distinction between the tannins which colour iron green, and those which colour it blue. He obtained the desired results with lithium chlorate, copper acetate, copper nitrate, lead nitrate, and uranium acetate, the iron- salt used being the acetate. Of these copper acetate answered the best. The living parts of plants to be examined were cut into small pieces and left in a saturated solution (7 per cent.) of copper acetate for from eight to ten days ; longer immersion produces no injurious results. The sections were then placed on the slide in a drop of 0°5 per cent. iron acetate solu- tion, but allowed to remain in it only for a few minutes, as longer action colours the cell-walls brown. After washing with water, and then with alcohol to remove the air and chlorophyll, they were examined in glycerin, or glycerin jelly, in which they remain unaltered for a lengthened period, even as much as two years. Or the sections may be removed directly from the copper acetate into alcohol, and examined afterwards with the assistance of iron acetate. The distinction between the tannins which give green and blue colours with iron were very clearly brought out. Thus in branches of Fagus the tannin-cells of the bark were coloured green, those of the pith blue. Micro-chemical Reactions based on the formation of Crystals.t — MM. Klement and Renard have published an important paper on micro- chemical reactions. The methods available for the qualitative analysis of minute quantities of a substance are spectroscopic analysis, blow-pipe analysis, and micro-chemical reactions. The last method depends on the form and appearance of the crystals deposited by the action of reagents. Availing themselves of the researches of Boricky, Behrens, Streng, Lehmann, Haushofer, and others, combined with the results of their own extensive researches, the authors have produced the most complete account of the subject which has yet appeared. They describe the methods of research and the reactions, simple and characteristic, by which compounds of more than fifty elementary bodies may be identified in minute crystals recog- nizable under the Microscope. They also give a brief description of the processes of isolation and identification applicable to such compounds as the mineral constituents of rocks. The value of the treatise is much enhanced by the accompanying plates, eight in number, comprising nearly 100 figures of the forms of crystals obtained by the various reactions described in the text. * Maandbl. voor Natuurwet., 1884. See Bot. Centralbl. xxiv. (1885) p. 250. + Cf. Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xii. (1886) pp. 11 and 55-6. 696 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETO. ErRMENGHEM, E. vAN.—Manuel technique de Microbiologie d’aprés Vouvrage de Hueppe Bacterien-Forschung. (Manual of Microbiological Technique, after Hueppe’s ‘ Bacterien-Forschung.’) 500 pp., 76 figs. and 2 pls., 8vo, Paris, 1887. James, F. L.—Elementary Microscopical Technology. A Manual for Students of Microscopy. In three parts. Part I. The technical history of a slide from the crude materials to the finished mount. 107 pp. and 15 figs., 8vo, St. Louis, Mo., 1887. 55 sy Clinical Microscopical Technology. IV. The examination of Urine. VY. Urinary Examinations: Inorganic Sediments. St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LILI. (1887) pp. 289-91, 349-51. [Manton, W. P., AND OTHERS.]}—Elementary Department. Third and Fourth Lesson. “Cleanliness is akin to godliness.” The Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 146-7, 172-6. SATTERTHWAITE, T. E.—Practical Bacteriology. 85 pp., 16mo, Detroit, 1887. Sr6uR, P.—Lehrbuch der Histologie und der mikroskopischen Anatomie des Menschen mit Einschluss der mikroskopischen Technik. (Manual of histology and human microscopical anatomy, including microscopical technique.) 199 figs., 8vo, Jena, 1887. Tayutor, T.—Reply to Professor Weber. Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr, 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 116-9 C1 pl.). Weser, H. A.—Microscopic examination of Butter and its Adulterations. [Concludes that “‘the microscopic methods as laid down by Dr. Taylor are of no practical value in the examination of butter for adulterations.”’]| Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr. 9th Ann. Meeting, 1886, pp. 103-15 (1 pl.) Zune, A.—Etude microscopique et microchimique des Farines et des Fecules ou application du Microscope 4 la recherche de leurs falsifications et de leurs altera- tions. (Microscopical and microchemical study of flour and starch, or application of the Microscope to the investigation of their falsifications and adulterations.) Mon, du Praticien, I1, (1886) pp. 166, 183, 211, and 263. ( 697 ) PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Mertine or 8ta June, 1887, ar Ktne’s Cottzcr, Stranp, W.C., THE Prestpent (THE Rev. Dr. Dawiinezr, F.RS.) 1 tHe Cuarr. The Minutes of the meeting of 11th May last were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given to the donors. From Crookshank, E. M., M.B., Manual of Bacteriology, 2nd ed., xxiv. and 439 pp., 29 pls. and 187 figs. (8vo, London, 1887) .. The Author. Lithograph of Microscopie Objects under the same magnifying power (the original was given to the late Dr. Carpenter, C.B., by Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes, by whom it was drawn) .. Dr. P. H. Carpenter, Photomicrographs of Diatoms (x 840). No. 71, Witzchia (?) with membrane attached ; No. 66, Cocconeis (lower plate), with mem- brane attached; No. 175, Cocconeis (another negative) with membrane attached ; No. 73, cast of Heliopelta (?); No.74 do. Col. R. O’ Hara. Col. R. O’Hara’s note on the ‘“‘Means of Movement possessed by the Diatomacee” was read as follows :— “In my former communication on this subject I stated that I believed that in many cases this means of movement consisted in an undulating membrane, and I gave a drawing of the same as attached to Navicula. I send now an enlarged photograph of the membrane as attached to Pinnularia or Nitzchia, and also an enlarged photograph of the lower plate of a Cocconeis with the membrane attached, and showing the undulations exactly, as I thought, I had seen in action as stated in my former note. I further send two photographs of what I take to be casts of Actinocyclus or Heliopelta, many of which were in the gathering ; but as I have not, so far, found them attached, they may be anything else. They will, however, explain most distinctly what I mean by the expressions, cast, and undu- lating membrane.” Mr. J. Deby said that he was stated at the last meeting (ante, p. 533) to have given slides of Pediculus to the Society. This was, however, an error, and the slides were much more interesting, as being the original slides which led to the discovery of the development of Meloé, a parasite of bees. The older naturalists, who did not know what these little lice- looking creatures were, had named them very erroneously Pediculus Melittz. This “ Pediculus” was the larva of a coleopterous insect, and undergoes a metamorphosis which the genuine Pediculi are exempt from. Mr. Crisp read a letter from Mr. L. Dreyfus, late a member of the Council, who was now residing at Wiesbaden, accompanying a notice as to the Scientific Exhibition in connection with the 60th Congress of German Naturalists and Physicians, to be held in Wiesbaden from the 15th to the 24th September next, the attendance usually numbering about 3000. It is intended to be strictly scientific, not mercantile, and as its purpose will be to show at a glance the latest and most perfected instruments and apparatus which have been placed at the disposal of science and medicine in the last few years, anything that cannot lay claim to be ranked in this category will be rigorously excluded. No charge will be made for space, insertion in catalogue, or anything else, and the instruments will be 1887. 22 698 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. covered against risk by fire at the expense of the committee. Among the 17 groups is one for “Instruments of precision, with subdivision for Microscopy,” as well as one for “ Instruments and apparatus aiding instruc- tion in Natural History.” Applications should be addressed to the “ Ausstellungs-Committee der 60. Versammlung Deutscher Naturforscher und Aerzte,’ or to Mr. Dreyfus, 44, Frankfurterstrasse, Wiesbaden, where also further particulars can be obtained. Dr. E. M. Crookshank exhibited a series of, cultivations of micro- organisms, and called attention to the somewhat unusual circumstance of being able to show such a typical series all growing at the same time. Many of the kinds exhibited were by this time tolerably familiar to those who were interested in such subjects; but there were one or two of more particular interest about which he would say a few words. He had some- times drawn attention to the fact that the chromogenic bacteria generally develope their colour only on the surface of the gelatin, but a specimen now shown formed an exception to this rule. It was interesting as being the first Spirillum which had been cultivated artificially, and being a chromo- genic Spirillum had developed its colour in the depths of the gelatin contrary to the general rule. Another specimen was that of Bacillus jigurans, seen growing upon the surface of the gelatin. When first described, some persons were sceptical as to the fact of a Bacillus de- veloping such a symmetrical pattern; but it could now be cultivated quite easily, and he should be happy to supply any one interested in the matter with material from which it could be grown as symmetrically as in the example before them. He also showed a micro-organism which had been said to cause the swine fever—or rather, the swine erysipelas—in Germany. It was to be noted that in Germany there had been many cases of swine disease, and that a different organism had been found associated with it there from the one found here and recognised as the cause of Dr. Klein’s swine fever. So far as he (Dr. Crookshank) had been able to make out, they were not identical, the German form being an extremely minute Bacillus forming only a cloudy appearance, and seeming to be similar to mouse septicemia. He thought there was good ground for regarding the two diseases as distinct from each other, the German form being swine erysipelas as distinct from swine fever. He also exhibited an example of a Bacillus obtained from putrid fish, which caused the remarkable phospho- rescence frequently noticed when fish was decaying. The President complimented Dr. Crookshank on the remarkable series which he had exhibited, illustrative of a department which he had made so much his own. Mr. Freeman exhibited a number of series-sections of the anatomy of spiders, worms, &c., which had been made by Mr. Underhill, of Oxford. They were rather remarkable specimens of section-cutting and mounting, in some instances from 30 to 60 consecutive sections having been obtained from the same spider. Some drawings taken from the slides were also exhibited. The President, referring to a drawing of a longitudinal section through a spider, showing all the organs in situ, asked if the section from which this was taken was included in the series exhibited ? Mr. Freeman said that this drawing was not taken from any one section, but was a composite drawing intended to show the internal structure as revealed by the examination of a great number of sections. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 699 Mr. Eve said that though bringing microscopic sections to the Society seemed like “carrying coals to Newcastle,” he had ventured to bring some specimens of Actinomyces from the jaw of an ox, with a specimen from the Royal College of Surgeons’ Museum of the jaw showing what the disease was. The effect upon the animal was to produce tumours in the jaw, and the disease occasionally spread so as to affect the kidneys, intestines, and other parts of the body. The organism consisted of a number of spheres, each having a structureless centre, round which large numbers of Actino- myces were arranged very much in the same way as pins might be stuck on around pin-cushion. The inflammatory new formation was very much like what occurred in the growth of tubercle or syphilis. The disease could be communicated by inoculation to other cattle, and also in the same way from man to the rabbit. The sections were prepared by staining first with a magenta solution, which selected the micro-organisms, and afterwards with a watery solution of methyl-blue, which stained the tissues. Dr. Crookshank said, with regard to the disease referred to as existing in man, his own view was that there was very little ground for supposing it to be the same as that of the ox. The bovine disease was very clearly marked, and could hardly be mistaken; but he might say that although clinically the two forms of disease might appear very much the same, the fungus which had been found in man differed very materially in its microscopic features from that obtained from diseased cattle. The new method of staining these objects with magenta picric acid would be found very effective ; he had tried a great number with success by using orcin and then gentian violet. Mr. Crisp read a circular which had been sent descriptive of a new glycerin-immersion objective, in which he said were crowded as many optical and other errors as could well be compressed into the space. (Supra, p. 645.) Prof. Rupert Jones and Mr. OC. D. Sherborn’s paper, “ Remarks on the Foraminifera, with especial reference to their Variability of Form illus- trated by the Cristellarians, Part II.,” was read. (Supra, p. 545.) Mr. G. Massee gave a résumé of his paper “ On the Genus Lycoperdon,” illustrating the subject by drawings upon the blackboard. (Post.) Prof. Bell said that the Fellows of the Society would probably re- member that in the course of last winter he took the opportunity of describing what he had been able to observe in the case of some diseased grouse which had been sent to him for examination. Within the last few weeks the disease, whatever it might be, had been killing grouse in con- siderable numbers on the moors in the south-west of Scotland, though it did not appear to prevail to any great extent elsewhere. In the month of May last he received some of these diseased grouse in fairly good con- dition, and he examined them very carefully to see if he could discover any cause of death, because on the former occasion the tape-worms were all that could be found, and these did not seem sufficient to cause death by themselves. The first grouse which he examined this year were fairly well nourished, and again the tape-worms were found ; he looked carefully, as before, for the small round-worm (Strongylus) mentioned by Dr. Cobbold, and again he found it to be absent. In this case, however, he found the intestines were inflamed and gorged with blood; not finding anything further, he wrote to say that they should be examined by a pathologist rather than by a helminthologist. More recently he had received from Sir 700 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. William Wallace a grouse which was in a most emaciated condition, there being hardly anything of it but skin and bone. He examined this, and again found tape-worms, and also Dr. Cobbold’s Strongylus. This being so, they had now three sets of grouse which had died from disease; but the only actual fact before them was that the grouse were dead. In the case of the first, though there were tape-worms, there was no evidence that they were the cause of death. In the second case, the birds had died from inflammation of the intestines, the cause of which was not quite clear; and, in the third case, they died of Strongylus. It would therefore appear that what was called “ grouse disease ” must be either more than one disease, or it must be a disease which would kill the victim in different stages. He was himself disposed to think that there was more than one cause of disease ; but up to that time there was no diagnostic sign internally to show conclusively what those causes were. The gamekeepers were a class who were properly supposed to know a great deal about natural history, and they said there were certain outward signs which were sure indications that birds were affected by the disease—they were, however, not compara- tive anatomists, and perhaps their science generally was to be received with some reserve. Taking as an instance the case of the ptarmigan, a species closely allied to the grouse, it was found that in winter it had a very large number of feathers upon its feet ; but as the spring advanced it lost many of these in a natural way. The gamekeepers said that losing the feathers from the feet was a sure sign that the bird was diseased; but as all kinds of grouse more or less lost these feathers about that time of year, this indication of disease fell to the ground, and it had to be ad- mitted that there really was no definition of grouse disease which was acceptable either to the pathologist or to the helminthologist. The action of ‘Land and Water,’ in proposing to send diseased grouse to M. Pasteur for examination, had caused great excitement in some quarters, but he would venture to say that, as it was impossible to keep these wild birds healthy in confinement for any length of time (after undergoing the journey from Scotland to Paris) the conditions would not be favourable for the formation of an opinion of great value. What he suggested to the owners of moors was that some professed bacteriologist should proceed to the affected districts and examine the matter on the spot—at their expense, not at his own. The President said that the Fellows would probably remember Prof. Bell’s remarks upon the subject last winter, and his exhibition of the actual tape-worms which he had then found. They would not fail, therefore, to be much interested by his additional very practical and interesting series of remarks. Mr. J. G. Grenfell’s paper “On New Species of Scyphidia and Dino- physis” was read (supra, p. 558). The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :— Mr. Bolton :—Bulbochexte gigantea in fruit. Mr. Crisp :—Hooke Microscope. Dr. Crookshank :—Series of Cultivations of Micro-organisms. Mr. Eve :—Actinomyces from jaw of ox. Mr. Freeman :—Series-sections of the anatomy of spiders, worms, &c. New Fellows:—The following were elected Ordinary Fellows :— Messrs. William Ball, Henry F. Dale, and George Day. - The Journal is issued on the second Wednesday of February, April, June, August, October, and December. me YA eC; ts Lae tr 18987. Part 5. OCTOBER. ees aha mde rae & JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL ~MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, &c. Edited by FRANK CRISP, LL.B., B.A, One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A,, F.Z.S8., Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, . Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, JOHN MAYALL, Joy., F.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D, (Cantab.), AND J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, FELLOWS OF. THE SOCIETY, WILLIAMS & NORGATE, kaye LONDON AND EDINBURGH. PN EX es Soho _ = : - 2 - C2) PRINTED BY WM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED») [STAMFORD STREET AND CRARING CROSS, CONTENTS. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SoOlETY—- XII—A Monogrars or THE Genus eS (Tourer.) Fr By G. Massee, F.R.M.S. (Plates XII. and XTIL) — (Plate XI, is not yet ready.) SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. - ZOOLOGY. PAGE 701 A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, at General = a. Embryology. AGEDDES, P. —Theory of Sex and Reproduction Geppes, P., & J. AnTHUR THomson—History and Theory of Spermatogenesis. va Brenna, C. ~ Spermatogenesis of Mammalia... oe ae Princz, E. E:.—Significance of the Yolk in Osseous Fishes . Leeienp eee Sarasin, P. & F.—Development of Ichthyophis glutinosa .. 1. «» Ryper, J. A— Why do certain Fish-ova float? . Forrer.—Fermentations by Protoplasm of a recently- killed ‘animal . LIEBERMANN, L.—Embryo-chemical Investigations -.. ‘se ss. ‘es 3. INVERTEBRATA. Deace, Y.—Otocysts as Organs of Locomotor Orientation. _.. Zaouarias, O.—Pelagic and Littoral Fauna of North German Takia ; Mollusca. oe os Jousin, L.—Anatomy and Histology of Salivary Glands of Cophalicnda 5 VIALLETON, L.—Development of the Squid .. .. oe Semper, O.—Development of Reproductive Organs in Gasteropods ae pues B.-—Central Nervous System of Acephalous Mollusca .. Pocus, ,—Jouannetia, cumingtt Bow. ee A LOG, aa eee eee Molluscoida. a. Tunicata, Cuazry, L.—Normal and Be: Embryology of Assididnte pe B. Polyzoa. : Ostroumorr, A.—Development of Cyclostomatous Marine Bryozoa .. Seaeeey A.—Development of Alcyonella fungosa .. sss ss oe ee os Ruivtey, S. O.— Characters of the Genus Lophopus .. 1. ss we Arthropoda, ; Marg, E. L.—Simple Eyes in Arthropods +1 se se ee we ay a. Insecta. BiLocuMann, F.—Directive Corpuscles in Eggs of Insects .. .. .. Kowaevsxy, A.—Post-embryonal Development of Muscide .. .. Limeecks, R. v.— Histology of Insect Muscle .. 1» s» ee ee oe WiriaoziL, E.—Halobates .... rates. ye Bryerincx, M. W.—Cecidia caused by Nematus caprese Re Rare ise: Masxein, W. M,— Honeydew of Coccide .. 61 ue tet ws os e 728 732 733 a Sa 'y. Prototracheata. - Sonater, W. L.—Pertpatus of British Guiana .. .. 0 6. Arachnida. Lenpvi, A.—Homologues of Arachnid Appendages .. «. Karpeites, L.—Interesting New Mite .. 06 +e ono e. Crustacea. Rawitz, B.—Green Gland of the Crayfish .. Grarp, A.—Castration of Decapodous Crustacea by parasites Vermes. Pe ea e. Annelida, ~ Cxworostansky, O.—Development of Ovum of Hirudinea... - Bepparp, F.. E.—New Genus of Lumbricidz ae Gee Scuarrr, R.—Ctenodrilus parvulus.. .. . BovusrFie.p, E. C.—Natural History of the Genus Dero _.. JourDAn, C.—Histology of the Integument and Sensory Appendages hystrix and Polynoe Grubiana of Hermione - Joveux-Larrule—Chlorema Dujardint and Siphonostoma diplechaites . + 8. Nemathelminthes. Rirzema Bos, T.—Tylenchus devastatriz =... 4. we y- Platyhelminthes, Hovsrecut, A, A. W.—Relation of the Nemertea to the Vertebrata - Bouves Ler, A.—Spermatogenesis in Nemerteans .. .. Jounin, L.—Anatemy of Langia obeckiana .. .. Ee - Haupez, P.—Development of Fresh-water Dendrocela * ZscHonKE, F'.—Helminthological Observations .. .. 4. $6. Incertez Sedis, Pian, L.—Eetoparasitic Rotifere from the Bay of Naples.. Wee F. v.—Myzostoma Bucchichtt ..- ++ se us ws Echinodermata. PREYER, W.—Movements of Star-fishes.. a pag 2 .—Circulatory Apparatus of Ophiurids IF Haacnr, W.—Radial Symmetry of Echinoids _ .. WacusmutTH, C., & F, Sprincer— Morphological Relations Blastoids, Crinoids, and Cystids .. 1. 4. ee a Semon, R.—Synaptidz of the Mediterranean... ss, Coelenterata. adgainas, R. v.—Stinging-cells cs Maver, P.— formation of fresh stalks in “Tubulorta _ Fewxes, J. W.—New Rhizostomatous Medusa... .. Korornerr, A.— Anatomy and Histology of Veretillum Protozoa. _. Maupas, E.—Conjugation of Ciliate Infusoria .. .. .. _ Masset, W. M.—New Fresh-water Infusoria ..> .. 4, >. Eserru, C. J.—Thalassicola cxerulea > .. * ~~ Grouper, A.— Artificial Development in Actinospherium ts Daneearp, P. A.— Researches on Lower Organisms .. .. Rosoz, Z, v.—Structure of Gregarines .. ., wcesy - Hennecvy, L. F.—Spore-formation in Gregarines ee Montez, R.— Revision of the Microsporidia .. ei of Summét-plates ve oe in . - PAGE 747 747 748 748 750 750 751 751 752 752 733 753 754 755 756 757 757 797 758 758 761 762 763 764 765 765 765 765 766 767 767 768 769 769 770 770 C433 BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy. @) Cell-structure and Paola nieet. Rébnaniee 3 —Structure of the: Nucleus. 25-2 ss ie ood, Sue ee ue a = Kisses; G.—Hunctions-of the- Nucleus (oo 20-2. 54.> aa ae se wel oatne alee gas (2) Other Cell-contents. ‘Manrtin, §.—Proteids of the Seeds of Abrus precatorius 1. +» os os oe Scuuize, E.—Cholin in Seedlings .. ey ea ET RAUNKIAER, C—Crystalloids in Stylidinm and Aischynanthus per i ae pee is feats Westermaier, M.—Occurrence and Function of Tannin in Tissues. . Migidccretateeas GuressmayEer——True Nature Of Starch GoW ulose-- 55 ce ower ee ie tetas Peoes (4) Structure of Tissues. Henricuer, E.—Diferentiation of Epidermal Cells .. 2. as TizcHem, P. van—Network of Cells surrounding the Endoderm in the. Roots of Cruciferz / Harroc, M — Cortical Fibrovascular Bundles tn Leen ythidex and Barvingtonien: a “ACQUA, C. —Passage of Fibrovascular Bundles:from the Branch to the Ones oe Tircnem, P. vaNn—Second Primary Wood of the Root.. ~.. oveee's Wirier, A.— Formation of the Annual Ring and. Growth in Thickness bac Cs terran Hituovse, W.—Autumnal Fall of Leaves i ve ee es ee ee ge Now ase = _ ©) Structure of Organs. - ~ Winsrier, A.—Seedlings of Salicornia herbacea «. Tirenem, P. vaN—Formation of Rootlets and position of Buds in the ee Roots of Phanerogams.. TrncHEmM, P. van, & H. Dovr1or—Origin of. Rootlets and Lateral Roots in Rubiacez, Violacex, and Apocynacez .. +. i Wt eS Vocutine, H.—Formation of Tubers .. Bote, apse Bower; F. O.— Positively geotropic Shoots of Cordujline australis - SABLON, LECLERC Du—Siructure and Development of the es es clipes pratense .. $8) ne oars Sin bee! Maury, P.—Ascidia of Cephalotus follicularis FPP Uhh ee es et ee Pics1, P.—Histolugy of Vine-leaves” .. 2 ee dee ieee RED Navmann, A.—Structure and Development of Palm-leaves ane CMS ee Grevitiius, A. Y.—Stipular Sheath of Polygonum .. 26. ee ss an os Brccari, O.—Turgidity of Petals ..° .. oa Ela coe rey L.—Spike-like partial inflorescence of the Rhyneosporeee ecg e ue « DELPINO, F'—Zygomorphy of Flowers: 2.0). a8, ok Sede! a wie ane eee wel Cape eae Focke, W. O.—Origin of Zygomorphic Flowers... .. pa eae a ogee tae Outver, F. W.— Conduction of Irritation in irritable stigmas Meine neta roars Perino, F.—Nectary of Galanthus nivalis’ ., © 62-< sas Pee ne ae ee a Cattont, S—Nectary and Aril of Jeffersonia --... s,s ne ae nas Hatsrep, B, D.— Crazy” pollen of the Bell-wort 4. 08 au ae ne ee ap Poutsen, Y. A,—Anatomical studies on Mayaca .. ss se ae as on wwe Bp. Physiology, (1) Reproduction and Germination. Wesster, A. D,—Fertilization of Epipactis latifolia .. 1. 20 ae tet VocEL, A.— Influence of Ozone on Germination 4, 4s 40 ae ne ne se (2) Nutrition and Growth, ‘ Crson1, G—Transpiration and Assimilation in Leaves treated with Milk of Lime @) Movement, Janse, J. M—Part taken by the Medullary Rays in the Movement of Water pe C55) he (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation), _ Jortssun, A.—Supposed Reduction of Nitrates by Barley and Maize... . be: ATWATER, W. 0.—Liberation of Nitrogen from its cle hig a and acquisition of atmospheric Nitrogen by Plants .. 1s es ae ee oe tee vy. General. Martin, W. K., & 8. B. Toomas—Autumnal Changes in Maple Leaves .. Méuzr, H—Phy ysiological Role of Vine Leaves .. se ne : — VALLOT, J.—JInjfluence of soil on the vegetition on the summits of the ‘Alps Savastano, L.—Gummosis ne aon eb Tasst, F.— Anesthesia and Poisoning of Planis Bower, F. O.— Humboldtia laurtfolia as a m yrmecophilous ‘plant Sieh eae ks B. CRYPTOGAMIA. TomascueK, A.—Symbiosis of a Bacterium and Alga .. Cryptogamia Vascularia. Rapeynorst’s Oryptogamic Flora of Germany (Vascular Cryptogams) Muscines. Mccann, G.—Leaves of Mosses .. «. -s JENSEN, C.— Analogous variations in Sphagnace Se tu SRE he oe cera ad Algee, Bennett, A. W.— 'S Clasetpoation Aah ee Ro Panis ogee ee Iles Harz, C. O.—Cause of the Turbidity of Water -.. 0° 1 se ene Picconn, A.— Dissemination of Algx by Fish ou ee ce ne ne Cuase, H. H., & C. W. Watker—New Diatoms so oe eee ee Fungi. LINDNER, P.—Prolification in the Mycelium of Fungi...» Morin, F —Saccharine Substances in the Phalloider.. Marsuatt Warp, H.—Tubercular Bree: on the Roots ‘ Leguminoser Dowac, J.—-Phosphor escent Fungus oF Z ae Roux, W.— Mycelites ossifraqus—a Fungus i in Bone nc Picut, P.—Peronospora umbelliferarum on the Vine Priuiinvx, E.; Frionov, & ei sesergne i Selon ad of Perononpora “vilicola. by by means of Oospores TER Dr eee es a COsuANEIN, Je — 4 piblyoaporittyN so r4 F< 4k caw Sao oo See wel o> ber ye dele ee Gatioway, B. Es Celeryleay SUG hts 052 Since StS Oy Pas tee abe gwar be ee at . Marrtiroto, 0.—Cyphella “e PEAS a Om Savastano, L La Porasttesin of ‘Agaricus qmellenage Score ek Passerini, J.— Fungi parasitic on Camellia. A Martriroio, O.—Parasitism of Tuber 6. 0. ee ee ae ee OUTMANNE, He -ONBIONIUNY, ive Sate Va oan 94 Pia canis oh ks Lecomte, H.—Mycorhiza.. .. ates Sai eae Linpr, W.—New pathogenous species of “Mucor “Grove, W. B.—Fungous Diseases of Plants <. Hisincer, E.—Tubercles on Ruppia rostellata sand Zannichellia ‘pol yearpa pr oduced by Tetramysa POTAS LC! te shies Sve Sse PE Sa AMEN pe Protophyta, i Puavr, H. C.—Oidium albicans — .. Pe aca ys Bornet & Fuanavuit— Heterocystous Nostocacex _. Hininovsz, W.—Beggiatoa alba... Bee ah ae ges - Brown, A. ‘J.—Chemical Action of Bacterium aceti iy Cellulose formed by Bacterium xylinum ! HAnrroe, M., & A. P. Swan—Anaerohic culture of aerobic Bacteria’. : Buswip, O —Ohémical reaction for Cholera Bacteria . : % es ea T.—Changes induced in water by the development of Bacteria C8 29 MICROSCOPY. ¢, Instruments, Accessories, &c. (1) Stands. Tuury’s (M.) Multiocular Microscope (Figs. 201-205)... BE ae saa Aurens’s (C, D.) Triocular Microscope (Yigs. 206 and 207) =... ss oe ae we CrooxsHang’s (KE, M.) Bacteriological Microscope (Fig. 208) - Bites Pa StepHEenson’s (J. W.) Erceting Binocular Microscope (Figs. 209 cee 210) Caer Gomont’s “new” Botanizing Microscope ~ . ight teh hvaate oe Rocuester Magic Lantern and Projection Microscope (Fig. 212) MeL zine tea sects Scuort’s Microscopes (Wigs: 212 and 213) © 2.00 26a. ek ee oe eel wet ow Linperktun’s Microscope (Fig. 214) .. Set, WenziErw’s Simple Microscope for the Examination of Seeds (Fig, 215) esas Vocrt’s (H. C.) Lens-stand for Entomoloyical purposes (Fig. 216) .. +» ee +s Wesrien’s (H.) ¢mproved Universal Clamp for Lens-holders, ce. (Fig. 217) eset Swirr’s Lever and Parallel-spring Fine-adjustment (Fig. 218)... 2. 2. +0 (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. . (8) INuminating and other ees ; Bauseu & Lome Oondenser and Substage (Fig. 219) © Bie oe RricHerr’s improved Mechanical Stage (Fig. 220) Borven’s (W. C.) Electrical Constant-temperature pay (Figs. 291 at 292) : Licuton’s (W.) Analysing Diaphragm for the Polariscope (Pigs. 223 and a) ah Auvzr’s Incandescent Gas-burner ina Microscope Lamp... = Martinorti, G.— “Old and New Microscopical Instruments, ”_Apparatus Sor testing Refractive cae CBigs 229). ce apeieen eee eh eee oe oe ees (4) Photomicrography. CROOKSHANK’s (E. M.) Reversible Photo-micrographic Apparatus (Fig. 226) aera Rarrer’s (G. W.) “ Professional Photo-Micro-Camera (Figs. 227-229), oe _ Hartnaon’s (H.) Cupro-ammonia Cell ss se sn ou eo ww # os {5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. é Limit of Visibility Heat's (BR. 58.) ‘ 4 Geoiiedrical ' Optics. "Measure ‘of the Aperture of | the incre M‘KEnpsicg, J. G. — Binocular Vision with the Microscope +. «sae oe (6) Miscellaneous. Rig eay Roya Microscopical Society of the Sandwich Islands Sane Wetht weak tah Dae: Cuniositias of Microscopical Literature vel jicae, le ve oA tatiana tae: erga leammnaC ay B. meciasane: (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Scuenk—Solid Medium for the Culture of Micro-organisms ie Sen baie ie) ty Unna, P. G.—New kind of solid Blood-serum—Blood-serum Plates .. er Guat GarreE, C.—Preserving cultivations made by Koch's plate method 9. ©... 4. Esmancu, E.— Modification of Koch's plate method for the isolation ae quantitative determination of Micro-organisms PINT A ee Spina, A. Pactenjelogtant experiments with cited nutrient media Bp Rarer np (2) Preparing Objects. ie ag es) Scnuirzn, F. E.—Wethods for killing Invertebrata... Be Hurtwic, O. & R.—Influence of reagents on the Fertilization Tita Segmentation of $s the- Animal Ovum .. Dore, A.— Preparing Tendon-cells and Celle of the loose Subcutaneous Tiseue Boveri, T.—Preparing Medullated Nerve-fibres ws. 6s ee fae ne ae KO6uiixnr, A. —Dewonitienn Sharpey’s Fibres... 1+ 6 as BLASCHKO, A.— Physiological Silvering-of Elastic Tissue .. .. SouiEFFERDECKER, P.—Preparation of the Retina ENS ER oe ce Benpa, C.—Preparing the Mammalian Testis +s 14 ve tn Peeyvelye, G.— Preparing Cochlea of Guinea-pig ys Rawirz, B.—Preparing the Central Nervous System of 'Acephala ew oe oe. we Cate) NPthnas iin: Pr Preparation of Ova of Ants and Wasps .. +» «+ +s Nospavm, J. —Preparing Ova of Mysie Chamzxleo— .. ' et Ne STAHLMAN, F.—Preparation of Male Reproductive Organs of Cypridz ¥ VIALLANES, H.—Preparation of endothelium ee the general cavity of Arenicola and LIumbrica gs Ue eRe ke beni; bo uns Hoe Tessin, G.—Preparing. Eggs of MaRS TSE (oreo ek Sats ects ok Srapuer, §.—Examination of Nectarial Tissue... +s ee oe oe we - LAruam, V. A.—Mounting Mosses .. .. Ay eee See _ Newcomer, F. S—Cleaning and arranging Diatoms ,. BPC PR oe Taytor, G. H.—Cleaning Diatomaceous Mud _ .. matt rog.* heh we z ~ Lonp, E.—Preservation of recent Pathological Specimens Ngai ele PVN Sao (8) Cutting, including Imbeddine and Microtomes. ‘ Kuutscuizky—Celloidin-Parafin Imbedding —. 3 Mayer, P., W. Girssrecut, & G.-C. J. Vosuasn—Water-bath for ty Tmbedding (Fig. 230) ... aes as toe, we List, J. H.—Modification of Reichert’s Object-holder His Mayer, P.—Modification of the Naples Section-smoother .. «+ «+ ~Rercuert’s (C.) small Rivet’s Microtome (Fig. 231) +, «+ ews _ (4) Staining and Injecting. Cuccati’s, G.—Carmine solution made with Carbonate of Soda.. Mayer’s (P.) Modification of Grenacher’s Carmine 41 +e ae we we Kuxitscuizky—Acid Chloral hydrate Carmine 2.0 ee ee ae oe ae LOWENTHAL, N.—New method for making Picrocarmine .. Ranvinr, L, —Employment of Perruthenice Acid in eee Researches ARNSTEIN, C.—Methylen-blue Staining .. .. Svar Gina rt “A Krause, W,—New Green Dye.. aear Sie des eae te oe Burrivy, T. J—New Formula for Burrills Bilar cnc ie teen Martinotti, G.—Staining Elastic ees ks s UN eee Cee eR Pat, J. — Nerve Staining «. MS ners ears wade Creed Euruicu, P.—Staining Tiherebe Baciess sec Pek se he a ye Unna, P. G.—Chemuistry of Staining 1 to ve ae te te ees (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Srrasser, H.— Treatment of Sections which have been imbedded in Paraffin Frxine Sections .. Area ETERNOD’s (A.) Turntable “ to serve several purposes “ (Fig. 232) aes ae Wuitney, J. E.— Waa asa Cell Material... us ee oe ee te Warp, E "Mounting in Fluids Jounston, O.—Media for mounting very 7 perishable Artificial Crystal ‘Sections _Bausca & OMe Optical Co.’s Spirit-lamp (Figs. 233 ae DOR) Shae. (6) Miscellaneous. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SocIETY BB as a aR easy PAGE 841 841 841 842 842 842 843 844 844 845 845 845 847 848 848 Corresponding Angle (2 2) for I.—APERTURE TABLE. 82° 51’ Homogeneous | Immersion } (uv = 1752). Wumerical Aperture. Air Water (~ sinu=a.)}| (7 =1°00). | Gv= 1°33), 1-52 : oe 1:51 A eS 1:50. ; ; 1:49 as ee 1:48 oe os 1:47 5 AS 1:46 oe a 1:45 % 5 1°44 Be ie 1°48 S5 ‘ 1-42 a s 1-41 oe se 1:40 ; ar, 1°39 i; ie 1°38 : os 1:37 - oe 1°36 ; 1°35 56 f 1:34 as °S; 1°33 a3 180° 0’ 1:32 ss 165° 56’ 1°si ate 160° 6’ 1:30 - “a 155° 38’ 1°29 Se 151° 50’ -1-:28 i 148° 42' 1°27 F 145°: 27’ 1:26 i 142° 39’ 1:25 oe 140°. 3’ 1°24 Be 137° 36’ 1:23 ee 135° 17! |; 1:22 133° 4’ a FP Kee 130° 57' 1-20 128° 55” 1:19 ze 126° 58’ | 1:18 ois pA Spe 1:17 Ap $23°°137 1-16 a8 121° 26’ 1°15 ae 119° 41’ 1°14 Ae, 118° 0! 1:18 ap 116° 20’ 1-12- me 114° 44’ 1-11 uP 113° 9! 1:10 35 111° 36’ 1:09 fe 110° 5’ _ 1:08 oe 108° 36’ 1:07 ae 107°. 8’ 1-06 be 105° 42’ 1:05 2 104° 16’ 1°04 102° 53! 1:03 101° 30’ 1:02 100° 10’ 1:01 aa 98° 50’ 1:00 180° 0’ 97° 31’ 0:99 163° 48’ 96° 12’ 0:98 LSTSE 94° 56’ 0:97 pap hoses p ed 93° 40! 0-96 147° 29' 92°94" 10°95 143° 36’ 91° 10’ 0:94 140° 6 89° .56/ 0:93 136° 52’ 88° 44' 0:92 a Bars 87° 32’ 0:91 TSS! 86° 20' 0:90 128° 19’ 85° 10’ 0-89 125° 45’ 84° 0’ 0°88 123° 17’ White Light. (A = 075269 pu, Line E.) 146,543 145,579 144,615 143,651 142,687 141,723 140,759 139,795 138,830 137,866 136,902 135,938. 134,974 134,010 133, 046 132,082 131,118 130, 154 129, 189 128, 225 127,261 126,297 125,333 124,369 123,405. 122,441 121,477 120,513 119,548 118,584 117,620 116,656 115,692 114,728 - 113,764 112,799 111,835 110,872 109,907 108,943 107,979 © 107,045 106,051 105,087 104,123 * 103,159. 102,195 101,231 100,266 , 99,302 98,338 97,374 96,410 95,446 94,482 93,518- 92,554 91,590 90, 625 89,661, 88, 697 87,733 86,769 85, 805 84,841 Monochromatic! (Blue) Light. (A= 0"4861 p, Line F’.) 158, 845. 157,800 156,755 ~ 155,710 154,665. — 153,620 — 152,575 151,530 150,485 148,395 147,350 146, 305 145,260 144-215 143,170: 141,080 © 140,035 138,989 137,944 136,899 133,764 132,719 131,674 130,629 129,584 128,539 127,494 126,449 125,404. 124,359 123,314 122,269 121,224 120,179 119,134 118,089 117,044 115,999 114,954 113,909 112,864 111,819 110,774 109,729 * 108,684 106,593 105,548. 104,503 103,458 102,413 101,368 100,323 99,278 98,233 97,188 96,143 95,098 94,053 93,008 91,963 149,440 | 142,125 © 135,854 |. 134,809 107,639. - | Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. Photography. (A= 074000, # Z near Line h.) Pies - 193,037. 191,767 190,497 189.997 | 2: 187,957 _ 186,687 185,417 | 184,147 |. 2: 182,877 | 181,607 180,337 179,067 — SWEATS Vike re 176,527 ~ 175,257 173,987 172,717 | 171,447 170,177 168,907 167,637 166,367 165,097 163,827 SN iS 162,557 — 161,287 160,017 158,747 — 167,477 156,207 | 154,987. 153,668 - 152,397 151,128 149,857 148,588 147,317 146,048 TA TEE: 143,508 142,937 140,968 139,698 | 138,498 | ~ 137,158 134,618 133,348 132,078 4 130,808 129,538 4 128,268 — 126,998 125,728 124,458 - 185,888 | 123,188 — 121,918 120,648" 119,378 _ 118,108 116,838 115,568 114,298 113,028 111,758 4 aipigteliedisd ed ett tet tet eee nnn en ar ere eg rere a rere sey es enter eran arn cy SSSSSSA AMAA NOOY DUDEK Her ASSSIaIaIaHSHsSoode S Tlluminating Power. ~ (a2) } 2°310 2*280 OD Re raieree < Mites”, Va siete Y eRe RE AG ibe S HS Pene- trating Power. - 1\. CG) “658 -*662 *667 "671 “676 “680 “685 “690 “694 “699, “704 . ~*709 © “714 “719. *725 “739. “435 “746 “74 “759, “758 “763 APERTURE TABLE—continued. <4 Regi Corresponding Angle (2 w) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch, Pies Numerical Madochtoueine luminating} trating ' Aperture, Air Water Lomogencous White Light. | (Blue) Light, | Photography. } POWer Li Pa Ss Hae ak Immersion (A = 0°5269 p, |(A = 074861 p, (A=0"4000 h (a2.) (=) (nein ts =4.)| (n=1:00). | (m= 1°33). | (nm = 1°62). Line E.) Line F.) | near Line h.)’ a 0:87 120°. 55! 81° 42’ 69° 49’ 83,877 90,918 110,488 “TST 1°149 0:86 118° 38’ 80° 34’ 68° 54’ 82,913 89,873 109,218 *740 1°163 ~~ 0°85 116°. 25’ Mas VAs 68° 0’ 81,949 88,828 107,948 *723 1-176 0°84. -|| 114° 17’ 78° 20' 67° 6’ 80,984 87,783 106,678 *706 1-190 0-83. 112° 12’ 77° 14’ 66° 12’ 80,020 86,738 105,408 “689 1°205 » 0°82 110° 10’ 76° 8 65° 18’ 79,056 85,693 104,138 672 1°220 0°81. 108°. 10’ 15% <3! 64° 24’ 78,092 84,648 102,868 “656 1*235 ~ 0:80 106° 16’ 73° 58’ 63° 31’ 77,128 83, 603 101,598 -640 1°250 - 0:79 104° 22' (2s. Do. 62° 38’ 76,164 82,558 100,328 “624 1°266 0°78 102° 381' 71°..49/ 61° 45’ 75,200 81,513 99,058 *608 1°282 0:77 100° 42’ 70° 45’ 60° 52’ 74,236 80,468 97,788 +593 1°299 . 0:76 98° 56’ 69° 42’ 60° 0’ 73,272 79,423 96,518 “578 1°316 0°75 SOL 68° 40’ 59° = 8’ 72,308 78,378 95, 248 +563 1-333 0°74 95° 28! 67° 37’ 58° 16’ 71,343 77,333 93,979 *548 1-351 0°78 93° 46’ 66° 34’ 57° 24’ 70,379 76,288 92,709 *Dad 1°370 0°72 92° s-6! 65° 32’ 56° 32’ 69,415 75,242 91,439 "518 1°389 0:71 90° 28’ 64° 32’ 55° 41’ 68,451 74,197 90,169 *504 1°408 0:70 88° 51’ 63° 31’ 54° 50’ 67,487 73,152 88,899 -490 1:429 0:69 87° 16’ 62° 30’ Dae. 59" 66,523 72,107 87,629 *476 1°449 0:68 85° 41’ 61° 30 Os REN 65,559 71,062 86,359 *462 1°471 0-67 84° 8 60° 30’ 52°. 18’ 64,595 70,017 85,089 *449 1°493 0:66 82° 36’ 59° 30’ D1° 28" 63,631 68,972 83,819 *436 1°515 0:65 81° 6’ 58° 30’ 50° 38’ 62,667 67,927 82,549 “423 1°538 ~ 0°64 492° 864 Bio OL, 49° 48’ 61,702 66, 882 81,279 *410 1°562 ~ 0°63 Vhs eae ou 56° 32’ 48° 58’ 60,738 65, 837 80,009 “397 1:'587 0-62 716° 38’ 55° 34’ 48°. 9’ 59,774 64,792 78,739 “384 1°613 0'61 75° 10’ 54° 36’ 47° 19’ 58,810 63,747 77,469 *372 1°639 0:60 73° 44’ 53° 38’ 46° 30’ 57,846 62,702 76,199 - +360 1-667 0:59 12° 38! 52° 40’ 45° 40’ 56,881 61,657 74,929 “348 1:695 0:58 70° 54’ 51° 42’ 44° 51’ 55,918 60,612 73,659 *336 1°724 0:57 69° 30! 50° 45’ 44° 9’ 54,954 99,567 72,389 *325 1°754 0°56: 68°. 6’ 49° 48’ 43° 14’ 53,990 58,522 71,119 "314 1-786 0:55 66° 44’ 49° 51’ 42° 25’ 53,026 57,477 69,849 +303 1-818 0:54 65° 22’ 47° 54’ 41° 37’ 52,061 96,432 68,579 "292° 41-852 . 0°58 64°. 0’ 46° 58’ 40° 48’ 51,097 55,387 67,309 *281 1°887 0:52 62° 40’ 46° 2! 40°. 0’ 50,133 94,342 66,039 *270 ¥:923 0-51 61° 20’ 45° 6’ 392-12’ 49,169 53, 297 64,769 *260 1°961 0-50 60°. 0’ 44°10’ 38° 24’ 48,205 52,252 63,499 *250 2-000 0:48 — HY pein) 42° 18’ 36° 49 46,277 50,162 60,959 2230 2°083 0-46 54° 47’ 40° 28’ 35° 15’ ‘44,349 48,072 58,419 *212 2°174 — 0:45: 53°30" 397.33" 34° 27’ 43,385 47,026 57,149 “203 2-222, | 0:44 52° 13’ 38° 38’ 33° 40’ 42,420 45,981 55,879 “194 2-273 - 0°42 49° 40’ 36° 49’ 3205! 40,492 43,891 53,339 +176 2°381 ~. 0:40 47° 9! Boe | 302.31’ 38,564 41,801 50,799 -160 2-500 - 0°38 44° 40’ 383°°12! 28° 57’ 36,636 39,711 48,259 *144 2°632 . 0°36 422.12’ 31° 24’ 27° 24’ 34,708 37,621 45,719 -130 2-778 ~ 0°35. 40° 58’ 30° 30’ 26° 38’ 33,744 36, 576°- 44,449 +123 2857 — 0:34. 39°. 44’ PS edits y ba 25° 51’ 32,779 35,531 43,179 *116 2°941 0°32 37° 20’ 27° 51’ 24° 18’ 30,851 33,441 40,639 "102 3°125 0°30 34° 56’ 26°. 4’ 22° 46’ 28,923 31,351 38,099 *090 37333 0:28 . Ooo BD! 24° 18" |= 219-14" 26,995 29,261 85,559 “078 3°571 _ 0:26 30° 10’ 229° 331-199 42? 25, 067 27,171 33,019 ‘068 3°846 0°25 = 28°:58’ 21° 40’ 18° 56’ 24,103 26,126 31,749 ‘063 4-000 0:24 27° 46’ 20°. 48’ 18° 10’ 23,138 25,081 30,479 *058 4°167 a OF QO 25° 26’ POO wid" 16° 38’ 21,210 22,991 27,940 -048 4°545 ~ 0°20 — 23°. 4" 17° 18’ TSO ATE. 19,282 20,901 25,400 *040 5°000 ~.. 0°18 20° 44’ 15° 34’ 13° 36’ 17,354 18,811 22,860 °0382 | 5°555 pe O-16 18° 24’ |. 13° 50’ 12° 5’ 15,426 16,721 20,320 *026 6° 250 0-15 17° 14’ 12° 58’ 11° 19’ } 14,462 15,676 19,050 -023 6+ 667 - 0714 T6o2.5/ 12° 6’ 10° 34’ 13,498 14,630 17,780 -020 7°143 Be O12 13° 47" 10° 22’ go 4’ 11,570 12,540 15,240 “O14 8°333 i 0:10 11° 29’ “8° 38! 7° 34’ 9,641 10,450 12,700 *010 410-000 — 0°08 9° 11’ 6° 54’ Co 7,713 8,360 10,160 -006 412-500 Ke oon 6°03" B10" 4° 32’ - 9,785 6,270 7,620 ‘004 [16°667 5° 44’ 4° 18° 3° 46" | 4,821 5,225 6,350 “003 20-000 a ail ( 10 , : a fe : oe GREATLY REDUCED PRICES 6 OBJECT- GLASSES MANUFACTURED BY R. & J. BECK, | 68, CORNHILL, LONDON, ee PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OByROT.GLASSE, & ee Linear magnifying-power, th ro-inch — No. Focal length. | aper-| Price. Dod yebERE ene eye PEteae ture, | - Dye eR Se about No, 1.|No. 2.|No, 8.| No, 4.| No. 5. Solis a Coe de 100 a beets Spe eres 9 : ihe e ike) 16 30 40 |. 50 101 | Sinches’ =... 7 : : Pee) j 102 | Binches 4. ..| 12; 210 0 } TS ot PAA MOS ABO ee ae 103°} 2 inches Pat een (ekO 110 0 2 ai cease ee rmaeaet 104 | 2inches. .. .. | 17 210 0 \ a2 oP 67 res ate 105 | 14 inch ‘ 23 5 a ° 30 48 go | 120) 150 106 | 2 inch ; aie 107 3 inch : 2 210 0 \ JO] BERG BIO RAO a sha 108 | 4 inch 45 210 O | r00} 160} 300) 400 500 109 | =, inch . | 65 4 0 0O-| 125 | 200} 375 |. 500) 625 41045 amphi 4% 95 5 O O} 150} 240] 450 | 600} = 750 111 dinch 75 3°10. 0 | 2004 320° 600 | 800} 1000 112 | 2 inch 120 410-0 | 250 |° 400:|. 750 |-t000 | 1250 113 | finch, 130 5 O O 400} -640 | 1200 | 1600'| 2000 114 | 3, imm. -. | 180 5 5 O |} ‘500° 800 | 1590 | 2000 | 2500 115 | + imm. s+ | 180 8 O O | 750'|. 1200 | 2250 | 3000 | 3750 116 | 3, imm. 180 | 10 O Q | 1000 '| 1600 | 3000 | 4000-| 45000 117} 3, ‘inch 160 | 20. O..O | 2000 | 3200 | 6000 |. 8000_| 10,0G0 ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, ; - APPLICABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE UNIVERSAL ScREw. Angle MAGNIFYING-POWER, | & of ~ with 6-inch body and |. No. Focal length. aper- Price. eye-pieces, — ture, eee ae ee about | | No. 1.|No. 2. No. 3. es Sie 85 le 150 | Sinches’ 2... 6 | 1 0 0 12 ER: | 429 151) 2inches «©... .. 8 10.0 18 23-1 4T Lp Qael aneb 3s Soe de ede 15 0 46 |. 62. | 106 LSS.) 4 neh see a ee A 38 1.5.0 go | 116. | 205 154 | finch .. .. .. | 80 1 5: O } 170 | 220 |-415 155 z NCHS eiat eee pk IE 2 5.0 | 250 | 330 | 630 156 a inch ~. ..« .. | 110 | 3.10.0. '| 350 | 450 | 800 157 Be imm. A ain opiate BOO 6 O O-§ | 654 | 844 {1500 Revised Catalogue sent on application to R. & J. BECK, 68, Cornhill. West, Newman &O* ath G. Massee, del. Lycoperdon. G@.Massee, del. 5 West, Newman 3-C? lith Lycoperdon. JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. OCTOBER 1887. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. XII.—A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon (Tournef.) Fr. By G. Massux, F.R.M.S. (Read Sth June, 1887.) Piates XII. anp XIII. THE earliest systematic account of the genus Lycoperdon is contained in Fries’ ‘Systema Mycologicum,’ published in 1829, where nine species are described, including L. Brasiliense Fr., the only extra-Kuropean species then known. Afterwards (1841) Vittadini published his ‘ Monographia Lycoperdineorum,’ in which sixteen species, all European, are described. Of these, two have been removed to the allied genus Bovista. During the past forty years, botanical research in every quarter of the globe has added over one hundred additional species, the Rev. M. J. Berkeley alone, EXPLANATION OF PLATES XII. anp XIII. Fig. 1.—Lycoperdon Colensoi Cke. & Mass.; nat. size. », 2.—Section of base of same; nat. size. », 3.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 4.—L. Capense Cke. & Mass.; nat. size. »» 9-—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 6.—L. Berkeleyi Mass.; nat. size. » 7-—Spores of same; x 400. » 8—L. oblongisporum Berk. & Curt.; nat. size. », 9.—Spores and thread of same; x 400. », 10.—L. stellatum Cke. & Mass. ; nat. size. », 11.—Vertical section of same; nat, size. », 12.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 13.—Z. elatum Mass.; nat. size. », 14.—Section of base of peridium of same; nat. size. », 15.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 16.—L. calyptreforme Berk. ; nat. size. », 17.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 18.—L. Natalense Cke. & Mass.; nat. size. » 19.—Section of same; nat. size. : » 20.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. », 21.—L. violascens Cke, & Mass.; nat. size. », 22.—Section of base of same ; nat. size. », 23.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 24.—L. Cookei Mass.; nat. size. » 25.—Section of same; nat. size. » 26.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. » 27.—L. flavum Mass.; nat. size. » 28.—Section of same; nat. size. », 29.—Spores and threads of same; x 400. 1887, 3A , 702 Transactions of the Society. or jointly with other authors, having described forty-four new forms. The present paper contains descriptions of one hundred and twenty-nine species, forty-nine of which are European, if Bonorden’s imperfectly described species are included. The genus is cosmopolitan, extending from Disco Island, 70° N. lat., to the extreme south of New Zealand, 47° S. lat. It occurs in all low- land tropics, and ascends the Himalayas to between seven and eight thousand feet, where DL. gemmatum Batsch, a common British species, was collected by Dr. (now Sir Joseph) Hooker. Highty-five species are confined to the northern hemisphere, twenty-seven to the southern, and fifteen are common to both. ‘Ten species are peculiar to Cuba, and seven to Ceylon. LL. pusillum Batsch, a common British species about the size of a marble, is represented in the Royal Herbarium, Kew, from Europe, Tropical and South Africa, Lower Pegu, East Nepaul, China, Java, Ceylon, Bonin Islands, North America, South America, Australia, and New Zealand. The species vary much in colour, shape, and surface texture at different ages, being usually white, and warted or spinose when young, becoming brownish or silvery with age, and frequently perfectly smooth, owing to the falling away of the “cortex”; hence the difficulty, in the absence of type specimens or figures, of ascertaining exactly what species correspond to the meagre descriptions, drawn up almost entirely from external characters, by the pioneers of mycology, who in many instances have given different names to the same species at various stages of growth. Vittadini was the first to employ microscopic along with external characters in the discrimination of species, and he appears to have con- sidered that when once the structure had been worked out, external characters alone were sufficient for the recognition of the species, as three specimens sent to the Rev. M. J. Berkeley as L. defosswm Vitt., and which externally presented no differences, proved on microscopic exami- nation to be three distinct species: one the true plant intended, another with coarsely warted spores, and the third imperfect, but with a well- developed sterile basal stratum, and smooth spores almost twice the size of those in the species intended. The spores are supported on pedicels or sterigmata springing from basidia, and in some species the pedicels break away from the basidia and — remain attached to the spores, a character considered by Peck, in his arrangement of the United States species of Lycoperdon, as being of primary importance ; but the examination of a large series of specimens proves this character to be of little or no value, the persistence of the pedicels depending entirely on the relative development of the specimen when collected, and in almost every instance where the plants have been for many years in the herbarium, the pedicels have broken away. The spores are very constant in size, shape, surface marking, and colour, but the last character is only of specific value when the plant is quite ripe, and the spores readily fall out of the ruptured peridium, as in almost every instance they are at first some shade of yellow, and only attain the darker tints when ripe. The colour characters used in the present work refer to the tint of spores in the mass when thrown down on a white surface. A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 703 The threads of the capillitium afford good specific characters, depend- ing on the mode of branching; their consistency, whether firm or col- lapsing when dry; and their thickness compared with the diameter of the spores. The colour of the capillitium is usually some shade of yellow or brown when the spores are thoroughly blown away. The relative development of the sterile basal stratum varies much in different species, being frequently continued downwards into a more or less elongated stem-like base. The species are arranged under the following groups :— A. Sterile basal stratum, well developed, cellular or compact. I. Spores globose, rough, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. II. Spores globose, rough, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. III. Spores globose, smooth, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. IV. Spores globose, smooth, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. V. Spores elliptical or subglobose. B. Sterile basal stratum, rudimentary or obsolete. I, Spores globose, rough, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. II. Spores globose, rough, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. III. Spores globose, smooth, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. IY. Spores globose, smooth, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. V. Spores elliptical or subglobose. In attempting to unravel the synonymy of the old authors, it must be distinctly understood that references to figures only implies that they externally resemble the species under which they are placed, and it has already been shown that external characters alone are of little value. I take this opportunity of acknowledging my great indebtedness, and also of tendering my best thanks, to Dr. M. C. Cooke for the valuable assistance rendered during the preparation of this paper. Lycoperdon (Tournef.), Fries, Syst. Myc. i. p. 27.—Peridium membranaceous, single, the subpersistent cortex becoming broken up into warts or spines, dehiscing by a small apical mouth, or the whole of the upper part evanescent. Capillitium dense, springing from the more or less developed sterile basal stratum ; spores globose or elliptic, externally rough or smooth. The genus was founded by Tournefort,* who included under it a heterogeneous assemblage of Trichogastres, Fries being the first to use it * Inst. R. Herb., p. 563, 3a 2 704 Transactions of the Society. in the restricted sense as defined here. Bovista differs in having the eapillitium springing from every part of the peridium, in the more com- pact nature of the cortex, and in the entire absence of a sterile basal stratum. The last-mentioned character, along with the thick corky peridium, separates Scleroderma. Tulostoma differs in having the peri- dium distinct from the stem, and Hippoperdon in the labyrinthiform eae of the capillitium, which is adnate to the peridium on all sides. A. Sterile basal stratum well developed, cellular or compact. I. Spores globose, rough, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. 1. L. Hoyle, B. & Br., Ann. Nat. Hist., No. 1037.—Peridium stipitate, subglobose, densely covered with long purple-brown stout spines. stem stout, spinulose, inner substance bright olive, root of long white fibres. Capillitium dense, thickest threads wider than diameter of spores, sparsely branched, passing into the compact sterile portion; spores bright lilac, globose, warted, 5 w, often furnished with a long hyaline pedicel. Stem from 1/2 to 1 in. long, 3/4 in. thick ; peridium, 2 in. diam. Resembling L. echinatum in general appearance, differmg in the presence of a stem, the colour and size of the spores, and in the very compact non-cellular sterile stratum. England (Reading). Oct. 2. L. echinatum, Pers. Symb. Myc., p. 36.—Peridium obovate, covered with long stout purple-brown spines, between which are minute mealy warts of the same colour, root consisting of long white fibres. Capillitium purple-umber, dense, persistent, barren basal portion well developed, cellular, pale ochre, threads about equal to diameter of spores, much branched ; spores purple-umber, spherical, strongly warted, 6 wu diam.—Pers. Syn., 147. L. gemmatum y echinatum, Fr. G. M., ii. p. 37. Utraria echinata, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., i. t. 3. Rabenh. Krypt. Fl., figs. 1-2, p. 894. The spines are often curved, and when they have fallen away, the peridium presents a tesselated appearance, due to the pale scars being surrounded by the small persistent dark warts. From 1/2-14 in. diam. In woods amongst leaves, generally solitary. Autumn. Europe. It is doubtful what species Peck has in view under the name of L. echinatum Pers., in U.S. Sp. Lycop., as he considers a distinguishing feature to be the smooth surface of the peridium after the spines have fallen off. It cannot be the true echinatwm of Persoon. 3. L. constellatum, Fr. Syst. Myc., ui. 39.—Subglobose, or sub- turbinate and tapering towards the base, peridium membranaceous, per- sistent, clothed with stout, spreading reddish-brown spines ; between the spines are minute warts of the same colour, which remain after the spines fall off, and form a reticulated pattern. Capillitium lax, threads firm, variable in thickness, branched, axils rounded, tapering, bright brown by transmitted light, sterile base cellular; spores purple-brown, globose, warted, sometimes stipitate, 5-6 w diam. a ig wumnbrinum, FI. Dan, MDCCC. Peck, N.Y. Nat. Hist. Mus. Bot. Report (29th), pl. 2 2, f 13-14. A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 705 Related to L. echinatum and L. Hoylet; distinguished from the former by the much weaker spines and rounded axils of the branching threads, and from the latter by the absence of a true stem. On the ground, amongst leaves. Europe, United States. 4, L. pulcherrimum, B. & C., Grev., ii. p. 51.—Broadly obovate, bristling with crowded whitish, stout, elongated pyramidal spines with minute warts between, base smooth and plicate. Capillitium dense, threads usually thicker than diameter of spores, firm, branched, tapering, sterile base cellular, well developed; spores brownish purple, globose, very minutely warted, usually pedicellate, 5 uw diam. About 1 in. in diam. On the ground. Pennsylvania. In the original description of this species, the spores are described as being smooth and olive. The specimens received by Berkeley, and from which the specific character was drawn up, are still in that gentleman’s herbarium in excellent preservation, and are one of the many examples met with, in going over the specimens, of a change in colour, always verging on purple, having taken place in the spores after drying. The very minute warts may possibly have been overlooked in the first instance. As the spines on the peridium become old and dry, they have a tendency to split up in a fibrillose manner from the base. 5. L. Frostii, Pk. U.S. Sp. Lycop., p. 17.—Peridium subglobose, 1-2 in. broad, generally narrowed into a short stem-like base, echinate or shaggy, with long, stout, whitish spines, which are generally curved or stel- lately united, and which at length fall off and leave the peridium brown and smooth. Capillitium and spores purplish brown; spores rough, 0*00016- 0:0002 in. (= about 5 ») in diam. Said to differ from D. constellatum in its longer paler spines, and in having the denuded peridium smooth. In the absence of specimens it is impossible to say with certainty, but I strongly suspect that this species is the same as L. pulcherrimum B. & C. See notes under last-mentioned species. Ground in meadows. United States. 6. L. hirtum, Mart. Crypt. Erl., p. 386.—Broadly turbinate, con- tracted into a rather thick root; peridium thin, persistent, densely covered with soft slender spines, which fall away, leaving a smooth, non- reticulated surface, reddish umber, mouth small. Capillitium dense, threads firm, thickness variable, tapering, branched, axils rounded, sterile base well developed, slightly cellular; spores brownish purple, globose, minutely warted, 5 w.—L. umbrinum y hirtum, Pers. Syn., 147-148 (non Bon.). Utraria hirta, Quel. Jur. et Vosg., 358. From 13-2 in. high. On the ground. Europe. 7. L. atropurpureum, Vitt. Lycop., 186.—Peridium thin, flaccid, subglobose or pyriform, stipitate or sessile, base more or less plicate, with slender spinules, becoming glabrous above, dehiscing by a minute irre- gular mouth, brownish above, becoming paler downwards, spinules darker. Capillitium continuous with the well-developed cellular sterile base; spores blackish purple, spherical, warted, sometimes pedicellate, 6-7 w diam.—Vitt., t. 2, £ 6. LD. esculentum, &c., Mich. Gen., t. 97, f. 4. L. quercinum, Pers. Syn., pp. 147-8. L. atropurpurewm, Sci. Gossip, Dec. 1866. Cke. Hdbk., 1085. 706 Transactions of the Society. Size variable, from 1-24 in. across. In oak woods, &c. Autumn. Europe, United States. 8. L. velatum, Vitt. Lycop., p. 187.—Peridium subglobose or tur- binate, umbonate, with a rooting base, flaccid, cortex at first continuous, white then pallid, becoming broken up into irregular adnate patches with fibrillose margins, between the patches ochraceous with minute per- sistent warts, dehiscing by a minute aperture. Capillitium dense, floccose, threads rarely branched, thicker than diameter of spores, tapering, con- tinuous with the compact minutely cellular sterile base; spores olive, then brownish purple, spherical, warted, sometimes pedicellate, 4—5 u diam.—Vitt. Lycop., t. 2, fig. 3. L. album, &c., Mich. Gen., t. 97, f. 2. L. mammeforme, Pers. Syn.,145. L. lanatum, Batsch, Elench., p. 147. Utraria velata, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., 358. From 1 to 2 in. diam. In oak woods. Autumn. Italy, France. 9. L. eyathiforme, Bosc., in Berlin Mag., Ixxxvii., t. 6, f. 11.— Subglobose, peridium thick, cortex mealy, becoming broken up into angular adnate patches, root stout, elongated. Threads of capillitium rather thinner than diameter of spores, lax, branching, axils acute, taper- ing, sterile base cellular ; spores brownish purple, globose, strongly warted, often pedicellate, 8 « diam.—Ravenel, Fungi Carol. Exs., No. 4. Rather more than 1 in. across. On the ground, in sandy places in pine woods. Europe, Somerset East, South Africa, North America. 10. L. lilacinum (Berk.) Mass.—Broadly obovate or turbinate, and contracted into a stout cellular stem-like base. Peridium thin and evane- scent above, dehiscing by a large irregular opening, cortex white, polished, breaking away in papery patches. Threads of capillitium thinner than diameter of spores, flaccid, simple, continuous with the convex cellular sterile basal stratum ; spores violet, with a tinge of ochre, echinulate, glo- bose, 6 «.—Bovista lilacina, Berk. & Mont., Hook. Lond. Journ., 1845. From 2-4 in. high, and 2-3 in. broad. On the ground. Australia, Tasmania, Ceylon, Madras. 11. L. violascens Cke. & Mass., nov. sp.—Globose, sessile, some- times rather plicate below, and terminating in a short slender root. Peridium papyraceous, persistent, at first covered with minute granular warts, becoming smooth and shining, persistently white, dehiscing above by a large irregular opening. Threads of capillitium variable in thick- ness, often nodulose, tapering, free from the large, convex, cellular sterile base ; spores lilac, globose, minutely warted, 6 w. Plate XIII. figs. 21-23. About 13 in. across. On the ground. Australia. 12. L. Curreyi Mass.—Globoso-depressed passing into a short thick stem, or subturbinate, with a long thick root, peridium papyraceous, fragile, almost smooth, the upper part breaking away in patches, leaving a cup-shaped opening with an irregular margin. Threads of capillitium thin, rarely branched, colourless by transmitted light, sterile base well developed, cellular ; spores violet, globose, minutely warted, 6 » in diam. —L. radicatum, Welw. & Curr., Fung. Angol., Trans, Linn. Soc., xxvi. p. 289, tab. 20, figs. 8-9 (1868). There is a L. radicatum D. R. & Mont. of slightly prior date. 3-4 in. high, 2-4 in. broad. In grassy places amongst bushes. Loanda, West Africa, Cape of Good Hope. A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 707 13. L. fucatum, Lev. Ann. Sci. Nat., 1844, 219.—Sessile, subglo- bose, glabrous, white. Capillitium continuous with the cellular sterile base, threads firm, thin, flexuous, frequently branched, axils rounded ; spores dark lilac, becoming vinous brown, globose, strongly echinulate, 5 y.—Lev. in Voy. Bonite, t. 140, f. 3. From 1-2 in. diam. On the ground and on old trees, &c. Monte Video, New Mexico, East Nepal, Ceylon. 14. L. fragile, Vitt. Mon., p. 180.—Peridium thin, very fragile, evanescent above, subglobose or pyriform, more or less plicate below, irregularly rooting, minutely warted or subtomentose, becoming almost glabrous from ochraceo-cinereous to brownish purple. Capillitium con- tinuous with the subcompact floccose basal sterile portion ; spores passing from bright ochre to blackish purple, globose, minutely warted, 5 w diam. —L. bovista, Vitt. Mang., t. 3, f. 2. Vittadini says that it varies in size from a walnut to that of the closed hand. When old the capillitium disappears, and the peridium stands up like a cup, with the margin irregularly laciniated. Grassy places. Summer and autumn. Italy, Algeria. 15. L. Caffrorum, K. & C., Grev., x. p. 109 (1882).—Peridium turbinato-giobose, 2-3 in. diam., base attenuated, rooting, at first almost smooth, then broken up into minute scales, ferruginous brown. Capil- litium continuous with the sterile base ; spores echinulate, brownish. Somewhat resembling L. Gardneri B., but smaller, deeper coloured, and spores not so rough. Somerset East, South Africa. 16. L. glabellum Peck, N.Y. Nat. Hist. Mus. Bot. Report (31st), p- 39.—Subglobose or turbinate, sometimes narrowed below into a short stem-like base, yellow or brownish yellow, furfuraceous with minnte nearly uniform persistent warts ; capillitium and spores purplish brown, columella present; spores rough, 0°0002-0-00025 in. diam. (= about 6 w).—USS. Sp. Lycop., p. 20. From 2/3 to 14 in. in diam. Ground in pine woods and bushy places. United States, Somerset East, South Africa. 17. L. asterospermum, D. R. & Mont., Fl. Algér., 379.— Peridium obovate-pyriform, dirty rufous, rather rigid above, flaccid below, covered with minute crowded spinose warts; dehiscing by a well-defined small circular mouth; root long, tapering. Capillitium continuous with the yellowish floccose minutely cellular sterile base, threads often nodulose, branched, axils acute, varying in thickness, tapering; spores brownish purple, globose, warted, 7 « diam. Externally resembling L. pyriforme, about 1 in. across. In sandy woods. Algeria. 18. L. decipiens, D. BR. & M., Fl. Alg., 380.—Peridium mem- branaceous, flaccid, obovate at first with spinulose warts, becoming smooth, dark grey and shining, dehiscing by a small lacerated orifice, root tapering. Capillitium continuous with the copious very cellular sterile stratum; threads branched, axils rounded, thinner than diameter of spores, often verrucose, tapering; spores purple-umber, globose, warted, 6 w diam. About 3/4 in. diam. On the ground, Algeria. 708 Transactions of the Society. 19. L. cupricum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 625.—Peridium obconic, depressed, plicate below, tapering to an acuminate rooting base, at first greyish flesh colour, then coppery, becoming umbonate, and dehiscing by a small laciniate mouth. Spores purple-umber, spinulose. In shady woods. Germany. 20. L. elongatum, Berk. Hook. Journ., vi. (1854) 171.—Stipitate ; peridium obovate, minutely verrucose, dehiscing by a large opening, stem long, thick, tapering downwards. Threads of capillitium flexuous, branching at wide angles, axils acute, sterile portion cellular; spores umber, globose, strongly echinulate, 6 w diam. Stem 2 in. high, 3/4 in. thick above. On the ground, amongst moss. Nepaul and Sikkim Himalayas. II. Spores globose, rough, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. 21. L. saceatum, Vahl. Fl. Dan., t. 1139.—Stipitate, spherico- depressed, obtuse, above with small spinulose warts becoming smaller and fibrillose below and on the stem, dehiscing by an irregular aperture ; stem stout, more or less elongated, nearly equal, often more or less lacunose, cellular within. Capillitium compact, persistent, threads branched, axils not rounded, thinner than diameter of spores; sterile basal portion convex, cellular ; spores olivaceous umber, strongly echinu- late, spherical, 6 w diam.—Fr. Syst. Myc., iii. 35. Cke., Fung. Brit. Exes., No. 214. Price, pl. 8, f. 14. Hussey, i. pl. 26. Sci.-Gossip, Dec. 1866. Cke. Hdbk., 1087. Krombh., t. 30, £ 11-12. Utraria saccata, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., 361. Peridium 1-2 in. in diam., stem 2-3 in. long, 1 in. or more thick. In thickets and open woods, amongst moss. Europe, North America, Somerset East, South Africa. 22. L. excipuliforme Scop.— Peridium subglobose or depressed, passing into a stout stem, at first with spinose warts which partly disappear leaving the surface tomentose, stem rather plicate at the base. Threads of capillitium flexuous, rarely branched, continuous with the sterile cellular base; spores globose, dirty olive, minutely warted, 4-5 w diam.—Vitt. Lyc., 198. Schaeff. Ic. t. 187. Bull., t. 450 and t. 475? Paulet, p. 121, t. cci. f 6. Karst. Myc. Fenn., p. 362. Nees, Pilze, t, 11, f. 126. Sverig. Svamp., pl. Ixxiiii Pers. Syn. 143. Pabst, Crypt. Fl, t. 23. LZ. gemmatum y exctpuliforme, Fr. 8. M. ii. 87. Utraria exctpuliforme, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., 360. L. excipuliforme, Vitt. Lyc., 193. Variable in size, from 1-4 in. high. In woods and meadows. Europe. 23. L. cinereum, Bon. Bot. Ztg. 1857, 615.—Peridium capitate, umbonate, narrowed downwards into a stem-like base, at first livid-grey, verrucoso-floccose, becoming smooth and obscure brown. Spores globose, spinulose, olive. In woods. Europe. A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 709 ILI. Spores globose, smooth, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. 24. L. marginatum, Vitt. Lye. 185.—Turbinate or broadly obconic, obtuse, bristling with various sized pyramidal spines becoming smaller downwards and eventually disappearing above, permanent below and defined by a marginate line ; dehiscing by a small apical aperture ; root elongated tapering. Capillitium continuous with the prominent convex cellular sterile base, and forming an imperfect columella, threads firm, rarely branched, mostly thicker than diameter of spores, tapering ; spores purple-brown, smooth, globose, sometimes pedicellate, 5 w diam. —Vitt. Lycop., t. 1, f. xi. DL. echini, &., Batt, t. 31, £ CO. L. papillatum ? Schaeff., t. 184. An inch or more across. In sterile sandy places. Europe, Algeria. 25. L. Natalense Cke. & Mass., nov. sp.—Globose, sessile, passing abruptly into a short tapering root; peridium thick, minutely warted becoming smooth, mouth small, irregularly torn. Capillitium dense, free from the well-developed, convex, cellular sterile base, threads very thick, firm, flexuous, simple; spores olive with a tinge of purple, globose, smooth, 3 w diam. Plate XIII. figs. 18-20. From 1/2—2/3 in. diam. Ochraceous. On the ground. Quanda, Natal. 26. L. bicolor, Welw. & Curr., Fung. Angol., Trans. Linn. Soce., xxvi. p. 290, t. 20, f. 12.—Stipitate 14-2 in. high, stem white, sub- cylindrical, attenuated towards the base; peridium brownish lead colour, papyraceous ; capillitium brown; spores brown, globose, smooth, 5-6 yw diam. : In moist open places in woods. West Africa. 27. L. zstivale, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, p.‘ 630.—Peridium globose, granuloso-floccose, papyraceous, dehiscing by an irregularly toothed orifice, white, then brownish or greyish ochre; stem very short, stout, passing into the fusiform root. Capillitium fugacious, threads about equal to diameter of spores ; sterile basal portion cellular, well developed ; spores dark umber, globose, smooth, 6 « diam. Pileus 1/2 in. or more diam. Grassy places. August. Europe. 28. L. rubecula, B. & Br., Fungi Ceylon, No. 720, Journ. Linn. Soc., xiv. p. 80.—Peridium whitish, glabrous downwards, above with very minute rufous warts, conico-turbinate passing into the thick stem, which is more or less rugose at the base. Capillitium ochraceous, sterile portion well developed, spores ochraceous brown, globose, smooth, 3-4 wu diam. On the ground. Ceylon. Peridium with stem 2/3-1 in. high. When dry altogether dirty ochraceous red, paler below. Mycelium fibrillose, white. In one of the types in Herb. Berk. the spores have a lilac tinge, and possibly they may be purplish when old. 29. L. sericellum, Berk., in Hook. Journ., 171.—Subglobose, obtuse, passing into a stout stem, silky or velvety, dehiscing by an apical _ aperture. Capillitium very dense, continuous with the compact silky sterile stratum, threads about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, branched, often nodulose ; spores cinnamon, smooth, globose, 4 « diam. Peridium from 2 to 3 in. diam. On the ground. Darjeeling, India. 710 Transactions of the Society. IV. Spores smooth, globose, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. 30. L. elatum Mass., nov. sp.—Stipitate, peridium globose, sub- umbonate, thin, with a few evanescent furfuraceous squamules, lacunose below; stem elongated, equal, cellular, lacunose. Capillitium dense, persistent, continuous with the copious cellular base, threads lax, thinner than diameter of spores, sparingly branched, firm; spores ferruginous- olive, globose, smooth, shortly pedicellate, 5 ~ diam. Plate XIII. figs. 13-15. In Herb. Berk. placed with L. saccatwm, probably without examina- tion. Allied to L. perlatum. Peridium 2 in. across, stem 6 in. long, 2/3 in. thick, reddish ochre when dry. On the ground. New England. 31. L. perlatum, Pers. Syn., p. 145.—Peridium variable, subglobose with an elongated stem, subglobose or depressed and nearly sessile, um- bonate, ochraceous or dirty brown, at first covered with spinose warts, which are smaller downwards, disappearing with age, mouth small, torn, at apex of umbo. Capillitium continuous with the convex cellular sterile base and forming a columella, threads rarely branched, about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, flexuous; spores olivaceous, globose, smooth, 4 w diam.—L. perlatum, Barla, pl. 46, f. 8. L. gemmatum, Fr. S. M., ii. 36. Sverig. Svamp., tab. Ixxmi. Fl. Dan., mcxt. Krombh., t. 30, f. 6. Cke. Hdbk., 1088 (including L. gemma- tum). Palist, Crypt. Fl, t. 23. ZL. constellatum, Sturm, t. 7? LL. lacunosum,. Bull. t.52? L. hirtum, Bull. t. 340? L. perlatum, Vitt. Mon., 194. Allied to L. gemmatum, but readily distinguished by the umbonate mouth and distinct columella. The peridium is often plicate below, and the stem more or less lacunose. Often occurs in pairs from the same base. In woods, especially of oak. Summer and autumn. LHurope. 32. L gemmatum, Batsch, Elench., p. 147.—Stipitate, subglobose, depressed above, or lens shaped, obtuse, with prominent spinose warts of various sizes, which eventually fall off, leaving the surface smooth and shining, dehiscing by a small opening ; stem stout, tapering downwards. Capillitium continuous with the well-developed cellular sterile base, threads lax, rarely branching, axils acute, tapering; spores olivaceous umber, globose, smooth, 4 w diam.—L. gemmatum, Hussey, i. pl. 54. Sci. Gossip, Dec. 1866. Eng. Flor., 304 (including L. perlatum). Karst. Myc. Fenn., iii. 861 (including L. perlatum). Cke. Hdbk., 1088 (including L. perlatum). L. gemmatum 8 perlatum, Fr. 8. M., ii. 87. Utraria gemmata, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., p. 358. Peridium 1-2 in. diam. Amongst grass, &c., in woods and shady laces. rc There is a form in Herb. Berk. from Sikkim Himalayas with the peridium fusiform, in some of the specimens elongated and not much thicker than the stem, but it agrees with the present species in the capillitium and spores, and is connected with the typical form by transitional states from various countries. Europe, North America, Sikkim Himalayas (7-8000 ft.), Simla, A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. TT11 India, Tihri-Garhwal, N.W. India, Somerset East, South Africa, Algeria, Swan River, Hlawarra, Solomon Islands, Tasmania, New Zealand. 33. L. Berkeleyi Mass.—Peridium subglobose or slightly depressed, delicate, prunioso-furfuraceous, stem stout, cellular. Threads of capil- litium about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, branched, angles acute, free from the cellular base; spores ochraceous with a tinge of pink, smooth, globose, 3 diam.—L. delicatum, Berk. & Curt., Grev., ii. p- 51. There is a L. delicatum Berk. of prior date. Plate XII. figs. 6 and 7. Peridium about 23 in. across, cellular stem-like base, 1-14 in. long and of equal thickness. Pennsylvania. 34. L. Colensoi Cke. and Mass., nov. sp.—Subcylindrical, peridium thin collapsing, dehiscing by a small apical torn mouth, above with scattered spinose warts which become smaller, shorter, and more crowded downwards, ochraceous when dry. Capillitium dense, threads thicker than diameter of spores, flaccid, basal sterile stratum well de- veloped, very cellular; spores olivaceous-brown, smooth, globose, 4 wu diam. Sometimes subclavate and plicate at the base. Plate XII. figs. 1-3. : From 13-23 in. high, ? in. across. On the ground. New Zealand. 35. L. echinulatum, B. & Br., Fungi Ceylon, No. 722, Linn. Journ., xiv. p. 80.—Turbinate, passing into a short obconic stem, bristling with rather stout spinose warts, which are largest above. Capillitium continuous with the dense indistinctly cellular sterile base ; spores citrin, globose, smooth, 3 mw diam. (= L. echinellum, B. & Br., in Herb. Berk.). From 1-1} in. diam. On the ground. Ceylon. 36. L. pyriforme, Schaeff. Icon., t. 185.—Pyriform, membranaceous, rather umbonate, dehiscing by a small torn mouth, covered with minute pointed warts, becoming smooth ; root of numerous white, long, branching fibres. Threads of capillitium thicker than diameter of spores, branched, continuous with the slightly cellular sterile base forming a columella; spores olive, smooth, globose, 4 w diam.—L. pyriforme, Price, pl. 15. Schaeff., 185. Sci. Gossip, Dec. 1866. Fr. 8. M., 3, 38. Hussey, i. pl. Ixx. Cooke, Exs., No. 215. Fuckel, Exs., No. 1260. Grev., t. 304. Cke. Hdbk., 1089. Eng. Flor., 304. Karst. Myce. Fenn., iii. 362. Barla, t. 46, f. 10-11. Utraria pyriformis, Quel. Jur. et Vosg., 360. L. ovoideum, Bull., t. 435, f. 38. DL. pyriforme, Vitt. Mon., t. 2, f. 9, » 196. : Generally in clusters. Variable in form and size, from 1-3 in. high. On decaying trunks or on the ground. Kurope, North America, Venezuela, Cuba, Arctic America, Gala- pagos, Sikkim Himalayas (4~7000 ft.), Bombay, New Guinea, Japan, ‘l'asmania, New Zealand, Australia. Var. eacipuliforme Desm.—Cespitose, subglobose, rufous-umber, rough with very slender warts, with a distinct elongated stem; root of long fibres.—Desmaziéres, Crypt. France, ser. 1., No. 1152. Differs from type in having a slender stem of equal thickness. Autumn. France. 37. L. glabrescens, Berk. Fl. Tasm., ii. 226.—Subhemispherical, 712 Transactions of the Society. mouth conical, plicate below, at first covered with slender floccose spines, becoming glabrous ; stem short, stout, tinged violet inside. Capillitium dense, continuous with the cellular sterile base, threads firm, about as thick as diameter of spores, often nodulose, branching, axils rounded, tapering; spores dark cinnamon, tinged olive, smooth, globose, often pedicellate, 5-6 w-diam. Peridium 14 in. diam. Tasmania, Australia. 38. L. hiemale, Bull. Champ., t. 72, figs. B, D, EH, and t. 475, fig. E.—Subglobose or broadly turbinate passing into the narrowed base- like stem, flaccid, collapsing, at first covered with prominent pointed warts, becoming smooth, dehiscing by an irregular apical pore, often rooting. Capillitium distinct from the well-developed cellular sterile base, threads firm, variable in thickness, branched, axils rounded ; spores olivaceous umber, globose, smooth, 5-4 jw diam.—Vitt. Lycop., 190, t. 2, f.5; Sace. Mycotheca Ven., 1103 ; Sacc. Mycol. Ven., 71; L. echi- natum Schaeff., t. 186, f.2; L. gemmatun, Schaeff., t. 189, f. 4-5. In dry grassy places. Summer and autumn. urope, Algeria. 39. L. molle, Pers. Syn., 150.—Turbinate, base broad, abrupt, peridium papyraceous, collapsing, furfuraceous, becoming smooth, de- hiscing by a small irregular mouth. Threads of capillitium thicker than diameter of spores, collapsing, sterile base well developed, slightly cellular, marginate, almost distinct from the capillitium; spores ochraceous-olive, globose, smooth, 4 yw diam. Size of L. pyriforme, colour much darker, almost dilute olive, very soft to the touch, root none. Pers. | On the ground in oak woods. Autumn. Germany, France, United States. 40. L. Curtisiz, Berk. Grev., ii p. 50.—Subglobose, contracted into a short rooting base, pallid, with dense stout spinose warts, which become smaller downwards. ‘Threads of capillitium twice as thick as diameter of spores, flaccid, sterile stratum large, cellular ; spores dirty ochraceous, smooth, globose, 3-4 mw diam. About 1/3 in. diam. Connecticut, Upper and Lower Carolina, Somerset Hast, Africa. 41. L. leucotrichum, D. BR. & M., Fl. Alg., 8383.—Subglobose, base abruptly narrowed, peridium membranaceous, thin, fragile, everywhere covered at first with soft spinose warts, becoming partly smooth, de- hiscing by a laciniate orifice. Capillitium white, at length separating from the cellular base, spores smooth, yellowish olive. Peridium about 1 in. across. In grassy places. Algeria, France. 42. L. pedicellatum, Peck, N.Y. Nat. Hist. Mus. Bot. Report (26th), p. 73.—Peridium globose or depressed-globose, sessile or narrowed below into a stem-like base, whitish or cinereous, becoming dingy or smoky brown with age, echinate with rather dense spines, which are either straight or curved or stellately united, and which at length fall off and leave impressions or obscure reticulations on the surface; capilli- tium and spores greenish yellow, then dingy olive, columella present ; spores smooth, pedicellate, 0-00016—0:00018 in. in diameter, the pedicel three to five times as long (= about 4 «).—U.S. Sp. Lycop., p. 22. “ The pedicellate spores constitute the peculiar feature of this species,” A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 713 consequently I presume the species could not be recognized from a specimen that had been collected say thirty years. This species is certainly not synonymous with L. pulcherrimum B. & C., as stated by Peck. From 2/3 to 13 in. diam. Ground and decaying wood in woods and bushy places. United States. 43. L. Bonordeni Mass.—Peridium umbonate capitate or obconic, contracted into a short stem-like base, covered with ventricose spines, white then umber, dehiscing by a torn umbonate mouth. Capillitium forming a columella; spores globose, smooth olivaceous, minute.—L. hirtum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, p. 632. L. hirtwm Mart. has priority. In woods. Europe. 44. L. Kakavu (Zipp.), Lev. Ann. Sci. Nat., 1844, p. 220.—Peridium rotundato-depressed, covered with minute granular warts, plicate below and passing into the furfuraceous obconic cellular stem. Capillitium and lobose smooth spores olive-brown.—Bovista Kakavu Zipp. (Herb. Lugd. © atav.). About 1 decimetre high. On the ground. Java. 45. L. bovista L., Sp. Pl., 1653.—Peridium spherical or depressed, sessile ; cortex thick, fragile and evanescent above, breaking up into polygonal pieces, at first sub-tomentose, then smooth ; white, becoming darker. Capillitium compact, continuous with the sterile cellular base ; spores dusky olive, globose, smooth, rather variable in size, 5-6 wu diam. In Greville’s fig. some of the spores are shown with a pedicel.— LL. bovista, Vitt. Mon., p. 181. Fr. 8. M., i. 29. Karst. Myc. Fenn., ii. 360. Fr. Sverig. Svamp., Ixxii. Bull, 447. Vitt. Lye, 181. L. giganteum, Fl. Dan., mpccccoxx. Hussey, i. pl. 26. Pabst, Crypt. Flor., t. 23. Cke. Hdbk., 1083. Eng. Flor., 303. Batsch, Elench., p- 238, t. 39, f. 165. Sow., t. 332, upper fig. Corda, Ic, v. f. 40. Bovista gigantea, Nees, Pilze, t. xi. f. 124, C. Grev., 336. LZ. maximum, Schaeff. Ic., 191. Langermannia gigantea, Sturm, t. 10. Globularia gigantea, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., 362. Grows to a large size, sometimes a foot or more in diameter. Grassy places. Summer and autumn. Europe, North America. 46. L. Fontanesii, D. R. & Lev., Fl. Alg., 381, t. 22.—Peridium globose or broadly obovate, passing into a narrow strongly plicate base, whitish becoming reddish ochre, thick and leathery, areolate or broken up into soft elongated warts, fragile and breaking away in patches above ; root stout, elongated. Capillitium dense, threads thicker than diameter of spores, rarely branched, soon separating from the dense minutely cellular, purple-brown prominent sterile base ; spores ferruginous olive, globose, smooth, often pedicellate, 4 ~ diam.—L. complanatum, Desf. Fl. Atl., p. 435. Solitary or gregarious, varying in size from an apple to a child’s head. In sterile elevated limestone districts. Algeria, New Zealand. 47. L. cxlatwm, Bull. Champ.,t. 430.—Peridium sessile or stipitate, subglobose or depressed, cortex pale creamy ochre, very thin, minutely furfuraceous, breaking away above in areole ; inner coat thicker, smooth, 714 Transactions of the Society. ashy grey. Capillitium ochraceous olive, threads frequently branched, axils rounded, thicker than diameter of spores at thickest parts, tapering, evanescent, sterile basal portion well developed, cellular, dense, free from capillitium ; spores dirty olive, spherical, smooth, 5 » diam., frequently furnished with a hyaline pedicel 2-3 times as long as diameter of spore.— L. celatum, Fr. 8. M., i. 32. Vitt. Lye, 188. Berk. Outl., t. 20, f. 7. Eng. Flor., 303. Krombh., t. 30, f. 7-10. Harzer, t. xxiv. Schaeff., t. exc. Nees, Pilze, t. 10, f. 1. Hussey, ii. pl. 238. Cke. Hdbk., 1084. Barla, pl. 46, f. 4. LZ. gemmatum, Schaeff. Ic., t. 189, figs. 1-3. L. bovista, Nees, Pilze, t. 11, £125. Bovista officonarum, Sturm, t. 1. Utraria celata, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., p. 360. Very variable in form, generally spherico-depressed and sessile or with a short thick stem, or with a thin stem from 1-2 in. long. Peridium from 1-4 in. in diameter. Common in fields, woods, roadsides, &c. Autumn. All Europe, North America, Behring’s Straits, Falkland Islands, Cuba, Neelgheries, Darjeeling, Kuram Valley, India, Tasmania, New Zealand, Algeria, Australia. . 48. L. favosum (Rostk.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.—Broadly turbinate, depressed, contracted into a more or less plicate short stem-like base, upper part of peridium fragile, evanescent, leaving a wide opening with torn edges, lower portion with polygonal depressions, presenting a honey- comb-like appearance. Capillitium compact, threads branched, sterile cellular base well developed; spores smooth, globose, blackish olive.— Bovista favosa, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 3. L. celatwm, Barla, pl. 46, f. 5. 2-3 in. across. On the ground. Europe. 49. L. capense, Cke. & Mass., nov. sp.—Globose, sessile, minutely furfuraceous becoming smooth, plicate below, with a long stout tapering root. Capillitium dense, threads of uniform thickness, equal in diameter to spores, simple, much interlaced and curled, continuous with the com- pact basal stratum, spores bright ochre tinged citrin, smooth, globose, 4A wdiam. Plate XII. figs. 4 and 5. . About 2 in. diam. On the ground. Cape of Good Hope. 5U. L. depressum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, p. 611.—Obconie, obtuse or lens-shaped passing into a thick stem, base often plicato-sulcate, covered with small spinose warts, becoming granular or furfuraceous. Threads of capillitium lax, collapsing, thickness about equal to diameter of spores, sterile base well developed, cellular; spores olivaceous umber, smooth, globose, 3-4 p, diam.—Oudeman’s Fungi Neerlandici Exs., No. 118. About 1 in. high. On the ground. LEurope. 51. L. calvescens, B. & C., Grev., i. p. 50.—Subglobose, spring- ing from a short thick rooting base, peridium thin, at first with sub- tomentose spinose warts which fall away above, leaving the surface minutely velvety. Threads of capillitium variable in thickness, often contorted, basal stratum cellular, spores dirty dark ochre, globose smooth, 3-4 w diam. Connecticut. 52. L. Cooket, Mass., in Herb. Kew.—Hemispherical or globose, abruptly contracted into a short thick stem-like base, smoky brown above, white below, minutely areolato-furfuraceous, dehiscing by a small irre- A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 715 gular mouth. Capillitium continuous with the well-developed cellular sterile base, threads varying in thickness, simple, firm; spores bright citrin, then olivaceous-umber, globose, smooth, sometimes stipitate, 4 wu diam.—L. puszllum, Cooke, in Science Gossip, Dec. 1886. Plate XIII. figs. 24-26. From 1/2-2/3 in. across. Gregarious. On the ground. England (Kew Gardens, Norfolk), Albany, U.8., Port Jackson, Australia. 53. L. rugosum, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 504, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. p. 345.—Irregularly subglobose or turbinate, peridium thick tomen- tose, rugoso-plicate below, stem very short, thick, ending in a knob- like root. Capillitium continuous with the ample, convex, compact, sterile stratum, threads equal, width about same as diameter of spores, rarely branched, much curled and intricately woven into a dense felted mass ; spores ochraceous, globose, smooth, 4 w diam. 2-3 in. in diam. Hard and woody when dry. Sometimes two or three spring from the same root. On the ground. Ceylon, Cuba, Niger Expedition. 54. L. polymorphum, Vitt. Mon., 183.—Peridium flaccid, persistent, subglobose or depressed, sessile, or passing into a short stout stem, often more or less plicate below, dehiscing by a small orifice, minutely warted, cinereous. Capillitium continuous with the more or less developed floccose compact sterile basal portion, and forming a slightly elevated columella ; spores dark dirty olive, globose, smooth, pedicellate, 3-4 wu diam.—Vitt. Mon.,t. 2, £8. L. furfuracewm, Schaeff., t.294. L. cepx- forme, Bull. t. 435, f. 2 (bottom row). Very variable in size and form; never cup-shaped and open when old. In sterile places. Summer and autumn. Europe, Algeria. 55. L. ericeum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 628.—Peridium subrotund contracted into a very short plicate base, granulose, always obtuse, de- hiscing by an apical laciniate mouth, yellowish brown when mature; spores minute, globose, smooth, olivaceous. Europe. V. Spores elliptical or subglobose. 56. L. radicatum, D. R. & Mont., Fl. Alg., p. 383.—Globose or obovate, outer coat smooth, breaking away in patches, upper portion eventually evanescent, leaving an irregular large opening, root stout, elongated. _ Threads of capillitium much and irregularly branched, variable in thickness, tapering, continuous with the well-developed cellular base ; spores umber, broadly elliptical, smooth, often pedicellate, 6 x 4 pw diam. In sandy places. Algeria. Size variable, up to about 14 in. diam. 57. L. phlebophorum, B. & Br., Fungi of Ceylon, No. 719, Journ. Linn. Soc., xiv. 79.—Irregularly reniform or subglobose, ochraceous, with raised reticulations, between which are minute mealy warts; stem short, attenuated downwards, and terminating in a few branched white fibres. Threads of capillitium thinner than diameter of spores, equal, sterile base cellular; spores broadly elliptical, smooth, ochraceous, 5 x 3-4 w diam. Amongst leaves. Ceylon. 716 Transactions of the Society. 58. L. Sinelairi, Berk., in Herb.—Globoge, produced into a short thick rooting base; peridium smooth, almost polished, cortex rufous, broken into adnate patches by growth and showing pale ochre between, base reticulato-plicate, upper portion evanescent, forming a large aper- ture with torn edge. Capillittum separating from the copious slightly cellular sterile base, threads branched; spores bright olive, smooth, broadly ohovate, frequently furnished with a short pedicel, 5 x 4 p. On the ground. New Zealand. 59. L. Gardneri, Berk., Ceylon Fungi, No. 716, Journ. Linn. Soc., xiv. 79.—Peridium subhemispherical, fulvous, minutely floccose or mealy, plicate below and passing into the stout obconic stem. Capillitium per- sistent, threads rarely branched, flaccid, flexuous or contorted, sterile base compact; spores pale ochraceous, subglobose, slightly produced at the point attached to the persistent pedicel, smooth, longest diameter 5 p diam. Peridium 3-5 in. diam. Some of the specimens in Berkeley's herbarium have a stout long root. In shady woods. Ceylon, Venezuela, South Africa. Species belonging to Group A, but owing to absence of type specomens and information as to surface of spores, could not be arranged under the sections. I. Spores purple, lilac, or various shades of brown or umber. 60. L. lawwm, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 614.—Peridium capitate con- stricted into a soft often lacunose stem-like base, cortex woolly, breaking away in woolly warts; spores becoming dusky purple. Europe. 61. L. rusticum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 614.—Peridium large, - capitate, contracted into a stout stem-like base, at first yellowish grey, bristling with spines, then greyish umber and areolate, at length alutaceous, cracked. Spores dusky. In pine woods. Europe. 62. L. clavatum (Fr.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.—Clavate or elongato- pyriform, peridium papyraceous, tough, brownish, dehiscing by a large irregular opening. Capillitium compact, with the spores brown, sterile stem-like base ample. Bovista clavata, Fr. Syst. Mye., iii. 23. On the ground. Iceland. 4 in. high by 2 in. wide above. 63. L. pistilliforme, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 613.—Peridium pistilli- form, capitate, yellow-brown, stem long, elastic, bright brown inside. Capillitium and subpedicellate spores brown. Europe. 64. L. alveolatum, Lev. Ann. Sci. Nat., 1846, p. 163.—Peridium subglobose, membranaccous, passing into a short _obconic stem-like base, covered with small angular micaceous warts, broken up in an areolato- sinuous manner. Capillitium and spores fulvous. From 4—5 em. diam. On the ground. Neilgherries, India. 65. L. aculeatum (Rostk.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.—Spherico- depressed, obtuse, plicate below, densely covered with long spinose warts, A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 717 very fragile above, breaking away in patches, leaving a wide irregular opening, stem stout, cellular. Capillitiuam and spores umber, evanescent. —Langermannia aculeata, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 13. About 23 in. high, 1 in. broad. Europe. 66. L. areolatum, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 5.—Spherico-depressed, taper- ing into the stem-like base ; peridium membranaceous, persistent, cortex broken up into areolz, dehiscing by a small toothed umbonate mouth, stem cellular. Flocci forming a columella, spores brown. About 2 in. high, 14 in. broad. Europe. 67. L. flavescens (Rostk.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.—Pyriform with a stout cellular stem-like base, very obtuse, yellowish, very brittle above where it is covered with minute scale-like warts, breaking away in areole and leaving a wide opening. Capillitium evanescent, with the spores brown.—Langermannia flavescens, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 14. L. truncatum, Batsch, t. 42, f. 230, a, b? LL. defossum, Batsch, t. 42, f, 229, a? About 2 in. high, 13 in. broad above. On the ground in pine woods. Europe. 68. L. punctatum (Rostk.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.—Peridium depresso-globose, contracted into a stout, equal, lacunose, cellular stem, yellowish, minutely punctate, above fragile, breaking away in areole and leaving a wide cup-like opening. Capillitium evanescent, with the spores brown.—Langermannia punctata, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 12. Europe. 69. L. pertusum, Sow. Fungi, t. 412, f. 2.—Subglobose or slightly contracted into a short thick stem-like base. Peridium membranaceous, evanescent above, at first covered with minute furfuraceous warts, at length smooth and becoming perforated by numerous irregular holes. Capillitium pallid—Berk. Ann. Nat. Hist., vii. 454. About 1 in. across. “Tt is remarkable for bursting extremely raggedly, and having a number of holes in it, at first sight looking very much like insect holes ; it is also generally so weak, that it becomes almost pendant by the root.” —Sow. Among moss on the stem of a beech. England (Berks). The Rev. M. J. Berkeley, F.R.S., has described a plant from Arctic America which he considers to be identical with the present species, which has not been recognized in England since Sowerby’s time. “ About the size of a hazel nut. Precisely the plant of Sowerby, except that his species is figured with a spurious stem. It is clearly no Rhizopogon as asserted by Fries.”—M. J. B. 2. Spores olive or various shades of yellow. 70. L. suberosum (Fr.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.—Depresso-globose contracted into a stout cellular stem-like base, peridium very thick, corky, bark breaking away, dehiscing by an irregular large opening. Capillitium compact, and with the spores obscure alive.—Bovista suberosa, Fr. Syst. Myc., ii. 26. Rostk., in Sturm, t. 2. About 2 in. across. Europe. 1887. o B 718 Transactions of the Society. 71. L. candidum (Rostk.), Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857.— White. Spherico- depressed, obtuse, above very fragile and breaking away, leaving a very wide irregular opening. Capillittum evanescent, with the spores yellow, sterile base well developed, continued into a stout twisted taperimg root. —Langermannia candida, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 11. About 14 in. wide by 3/4 in. high. Europe. 72. L. letum, Berk. Hook. Journ., 1843, p. 419.—Peridium sub- globose or lenticular, contracted into a stout stem-like cellular base, at first covered with pyramidal warts, subcoriaceous, becoming rimoso- areolate and breaking away above, leaving a cup-like opening. Spores at first yellow, becoming smoky yellow. Peridium about 14 in. high, 13 in. broad, pale; stem 3/4 in. high, 1 in. thick, reddish brown, furfuraceous. On the ground. Cape of Good Hope. B. Sterile basal stratum, rudimentary or obsolete. I. Spores globose, rough, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. 73. L. tephrospermum, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 509, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 345.—Sessile, globose, peridium thick, leathery, whitish, with minute tomentose warts; root consisting of a dense mass of white fibres. Capillitium umber, threads firm, rarely branching, wider than diameter of spores at thickest part, tapering, sterile stratum obsolete ; spores dark brown, globose, minutely warted, 3-4 p. From 1/2-1 in. in diameter. On the ground. Cuba. 74, L. velutinum, B. & C., Herb. Berk.—Subglobose or broadly obovate, sessile, peridium thick, persistent, bright brown, velvety ; root of numerous dark fibres. Capillitium dense, threads about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, sterile base obsolete; spores ochre with a tinge of lilac, globose, very minutely warted, 4 w diam. About 1 in. across. On the ground. Venezuela. 75. L. delicatum, Berk. Hook. Journ, vi. 172 (1854).—Globose, membranaceous, thickly covered with minute granules, dehiscing by a small irregular mouth. Threads of capillitium varying in thickness, often contorted, tapering, frequently branched, axils acute, sterile base small; spores brownish purple, globose, echinulate, often with a long pedicle, 6 w diam. From 1-2 in. across. On the ground. Khasia Mountains, N.W. Himalayas. 76. L. epiaylon, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 508, &c., Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 345.—Sessile, hemispherical, rufous densely covered with minute adnate granules. Threads of capillitium flexuous, branched, very delicate, sterile portion obsolete; spores umber, globose, strongly echinulate, 6 w diam. Peridium 1/2-1 in. diam. On rotten wood. Cuba. II. Spores globose, rough, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. 77. L. fuliginewm, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 506, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 345.—Peridium subglobose or obovate, fuliginous, becoming A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. Dy G. Massee. 19 paler towards the base, minutely tomentose, debiscing by a small dentate mouth. Threads of capillitium flaccid, sterile stratum obsolete ; spores pale reddish ochre, globose, echinulate, 4 « diam. Peridium 1 in. or more in diam. On rotten trunks. Cuba. 78. L. Vittadinit Mass., nov. sp.—Globose, sessile ; peridium rigid, woolly, mouth small, irregular, rufous when dry. Capillitium dense, threads firm, flexuous, about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, sterile base obsolete. Spores brownish olive, globose, strongly echinulate, 4 w diam. Sent by Vittadini to the Rev. M. J. Berkeley as L. defossum, along with another specimen which was the true L. defosswm, as described by Vittadini. A striking illustration of the worthlessness of external characters alone in the discrimination of species. About 2/3 in. across. Italy. 79. L. subincarnatum, Peck, N.Y. Nat. Hist. Mus. Bot. Report (24th).—Peridium globose, rarely either depressed or obovate, gregarious or cespitose, sessile, with but little cellular tissue at the base, covered with minute nearly uniform pyramidal or subspinulose at length deciduous warts, pinkish brown, the denuded peridium whitish or cinereous, minutely reticulate-pitted ; capillitium and spores greenish yellow, then dingy, olivaceous, columella present ; spores minutely rough, 0°00016-0°000L8 in. in diameter (= about 4-5 ,). From 1/2 to 1 in. broad. Sometimes has white fibrous roots like L. pyriforme. Prostrate trunks, old stumps, &c., in woods. Common. Aug.—Oct. United States. III. Spores globose, smooth, purple, lilac, or various shades of brown. 80. L. pusio, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 503, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 344.—Globose, smooth, thick, corrugated when dry, mycelium forming a dense fibrous rooting mass. Capillitium dense, threads often two to three times thicker than diameter of spores, firm, tapering, sterile base obsolete ; spores purple-umber, globose, smooth, from 2-3 mw diam. About 1/3 in. diam. On rotten wood, into which the mycelium penetrates deeply. Cuba. 81. L. Astrocaryz, Berk. & Cke., Brazil Fungi, Journ. Linn. Soc., xv. 393.—Sessile, globose, attached by a broad base, brown, minutely granulate, dehiscing by a small subrotund mouth. Threads of capil- litium slender, collapsing, sterile base almost obsolete; spores dirty ochre, eventually assuming a lilac tinge, smooth, globose, 3 w diam. From 1/4—1/2 in. across. On petioles of Astrocaryum. Brazil. 82. L. Emodense, Berk., in Hook. Journ., vi. 172 (1854).—Ovate, passing into a very short stem, peridium minutely furfuraceo-squamulose, rufous, dehiscing by a large irregularly torn mouth ; root of long white branched fibres. Threads of capillitium branched, axils acute, varying in thickness, flexuous, basal barren stratum obsolete; spores brownish umber, globose, smooth, 4 » diam. About 1 in. high, 3/4 in. thick. On the ground, sometimes growing in clusters. Sikkim Himalayas (9-10,000 ft.), E. Nepaul (9000 ft.). ong 720 Transactions of the Society. 83. L. australe, Berk. F]. Tasm., ii. 266.—Sessile, globoso-depressed, densely covered with small pointed warts, which are smaller and granular towards the base, eventually disappearing and leaving the surface smooth and shining, dehiscing by a small raised mouth, root long, tapering. Capillitium very dense, persistent, threads very variable in thickness, branched, axils rather acute, scanty sterile base cellular; spores umber, globose, smooth, generally furnished with a long pedicel, 5 » diam. 1 in. or more in diameter. On the ground. Melbourne, Tasmania. 84. L. rubellum, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 507, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 345.—Sessile, obovate or subglobose, rufous, rough with minute spinose warts, becoming smooth, dehiscing by a small apical opening, often with white fibrous mycelium. Capillitium dense, threads gene- rally thicker than diameter of spores, much branched, axils rounded, sterile base scanty, compact; spores umber, globose, smooth, 5 diam. From 1/2-2/3 in. diam. On rotten wood. Cuba. 85. L. Brasiliense, Fr. Syst. Myc., iii. 40.—Globose, sometimes with a short stem, brownish when dry, peridium membranaceous, flaccid, persistent, with minute adnate warts, mouth small, obtuse, root white, branching. ‘Threads of capillitium equal, about same thickness as diameter of spores, rarely branching, lax, sterile base almost obsolete ; spores brown, globose, smooth, 3-4 wu diam. From 1/2-2/3-in. across. Czespitose, on trunks. Brazil, Pegu. 86. L. Wright, B. & C., Grev., i. p. 50.—Sessile, globose, papy- raceous, at first covered with minute spinose warts, becoming smooth, dehiscing by a minute silky orifice. Threads of capillitium firm, sparsely branched, axils acute, often contorted towards the lips, sterile base obsolete ; spores umber, globose, smooth, 4 w diam.—L. separans Peck, N.Y. Nat. Hist. Mus. Bot. Report (26th). 3% in. diam. In Berkeley’s description the spores are said to be clay- coloured. Connecticut, New Jersey. IV. Spores globose, smooth, brownish olive, olive, or various shades of yellow. 87. L. stellatum, Cke. & Mass., Grev., March 1887.—Sessile, sub- globose ; peridium thin, flaccid, at first covered with stout stellate spmose warts, which break away in patches, leaving a smooth surface, mouth minute, torn. Threads of capillitium firm, rarely branched, equal in thickness to diameter of spores, continuous with the scanty floccose sterile base ; spores dirty olive, smooth, globose, 5 w diam. Plate XII. figs. 10-12. About 14 in. across. On the ground, in clusters of two or three. Israelite Bay, 8.W. Australia. 88. L. substellatum, B. & C., in Herb. Berk. — Globose, sessile, whitish, covered with delicate flocculose spines, becoming smaller down- wards. ‘Threads of capillitium collapsing, simple, sterile base obsolete, spores ochraceous, globose, smooth, 3 w diam. From 1/4—1/2 in. across. On rotten wood. Cuba. 89. L. crue atum, Rostk., in Sturm, t. 8.—Subpyriform or sub- globose, bristling with stout spinose warts which are often split up at A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 721 the base in a cruciate manner, breaking away in patches and leaving a brown minutely velvety surface. Threads of capillitium thicker than diameter of spores, flaccid, often contorted, tapering, barren basal stratum almost obsolete; spores ochraceous-cinnamon, smooth, globose, 4 w diam.—Utraria cruciata, Quel. Jur. et Vosg., 359. From 2/3 to 1 in. high. Sometimes rooting. Europe. Rhode Island. 90. L. grwmosum, B. & C., Herb. Berk.—Globose, sessile, plicate below and passing abruptly into a slender root, peridium thin, tough, almost smooth. Capillitium very dense, continuous with the compact scanty sterile base, threads about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, much interlaced ; spores ochraceous-olive, globose, smooth, 4 wu diam. About 13 in. across. On the ground. Cuba. 91. L. muricatum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 612.—Obconie or lenti- form contracted into a very short furrowed base, at first white and above covered with triangulose spinose warts, then umbonate, becoming smooth and brown. Threads of capillitium about thickness of diameter of spores, flexuous, tapering, sterile base almost obsolete; spores umber, tinged olive, smooth, globose, often with a long pedicel, 5 w diam.—Fuckel, Fungi Rhenani, Exs., No. 1257. From 1—2 in. broad. In pine woods and sandy pastures. Germany. 92. L. turbinatum, B. & €., Cuban Fungi, No. 510, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 345.—Turbinate, passing into a long tapering root, glabrous, reddish umber. Capillitium dense, threads about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, flexuous; scanty sterile base compact; spores dirty cinnamon, globose, smooth, 4 « diam. Peridium about 14 in. diam. On rotten wood in dense forests. Cuba. 93. L. microspermum, Berk. Hook. Journ., vi. p. 172 (1854).— Subglobose, flaccid, persistent, at first with small acute warts, becoming smooth, dehiscing by a small round mouth, root usually elongated. Threads of capillitium much wider than diameter of spores, firm, branched, axils rounded, tapering flexuous towards the tips; sterile base obsolete ; spores brownish olive, globose, smooth, 2-3 wu diam. Peridium 1/2-1 in. across. On the ground. Darjeeling, India, New Zealand. 94. L. citrinum, B. & Br., Ceylon Fungi, No. 724, Journ. Linn. Soc, xiv. 80.—Broadly elliptic, sessile, pale citrin minutely warted, dehiscing by a small apical opening, root long cord-like. Threads of - capillitium of varying thickness, tapering, frequently branched, sterile base cellular, scanty ; spores pale olive, globose, smooth, often pedicellate, 5 m diam. From 1/2—2/3 in. diam. On the ground. Ceylon. 95. L. flavum, Mass., nov. sp.—Globose, yellowish olive, fibrillose or minutely furfuraceous, dehiscing by a small apical mouth. Threads of capillitium very variable in thickness with slender scattered spines, rarely branched, sterile base obsolete, spores dirty lemon yellow, globose, smooth, 5 w diam. Plate XIII. figs. 27-29. About | in. across. On the ground. Cape of Good Hope. 96. L. dermoxanthum, Vitt. Mon., p. 177.—Peridium very thin and flaccid, persistent, sessile, irregularly globose, base more or less 722 - Transactions of the Society. plicate, root rather long, slender; minutely furfuraceous, dehiscing by a minute opening, bright yellow, becoming brownish. Threads of capillitium very slender, lax ; sterile portion obsolete ; spores ochraceous- olive, globose, smooth, 3-4 w diam.— Vitt., t. 2, f. 2. Mich. Gen., t. 97, f. 3. Variable in size, from 1/2-14 in. In grassy places. July—Oct. ltaly, Algeria. 97. L. defossum, Vitt. Mon., p. 177, t. 2, f. 2.—Peridium thick, rigid, globose, sessile, floccose, dehiscing by a small aperture. ‘Threads of capillitium thicker than diameter of spores, branched, tapering, basal sterile stratum obsolete; spores ochraceous olive, becoming almost umber, globose, smooth, with a short pedicel, 5 mw diam. From 1/2-3/4 in. across. In sandy places. At first subterranean, emerging from the ground when mature; the floccose cortex generally carries along with it a quantity of sand which hecomes agglutinated by mucus from the inner diffluent wall of the peridium. Italy. 98. L. conspurcatum, B. & Br., Ceylon Fungi, No. 723, Linn. Journ., xiv. p. 80.—Globose, sessile, peridium thin, minutely warted, here and there cracked into areole, base short, rooting. Capillitram floccose, continuous with the minute sterile base; spores olive, globose, smooth, often pedicellate, 4 diam. Scarcely 1 in. in diameter. On the ground. Ceylon. 99. L. reticulatum, Berk., in Herb.—Peridium globose or broadly obovate, with slightly raised reticulations which eventually disappear, leaving a polished surface. Capillitium persistent, threads slender, flaccid, barren stratum scanty, cellular; spores pale yellowish grey, globose, smooth, 4 w diam. About 3/4 in. diam. Australia, New Zealand. 100. ZL. cepxforme, Bull, t. 403, f. 2 (upper row).— Sessile, subglobose, peridium papyraceous, persistent, cortex white, minutely furfuraceous, breaking away in patches, dehiscing by a minute torn mouth, root long, cord-like. Threads of capillitium much branched, thicker than diameter of spores, much branched, axils rounded, sterile base obsolete, spores bright citrin, smooth, globose, often with a short thick pedicel, 4 mw diam.—L. pratense, Pers. Syn. Fung., p. 148. Globularia furfuracea, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., 361. Vittadini’s figure of L. plumbeum, t. 33, f. 1, Fung. Mang., very much resembles Bulliard’s figure, but in the former the spores are said to be “fusco- purpurea.” About 1 in. across. Europe. 101. L. Cubense, Berk., in Herb.—Subglobose, peridium thick, tomentose, root a dense mass of white fibres. Threads of capillitium flaccid, simple, barren stratum almost obsolete, spores ochraceous, globose, smooth, 3 w diam. From 1/2-1 in. across. Amongst decayed leaves. Cuba. 102. L. leprosum, B. & Ray., Fungi Car. Exs., No. 14.—Sessile, globose, whitish, with scurfy granules, mouth small. Capillitium continuous with the minute sterile base, threads about three times as thick as diameter of spores, flaccid, not branched; spores yellowish olive, globose, smooth, often shortly pedicellate, 3 diam. A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 728 Scarcely 1/2 in. across. Amongst moss on trunks. §. Carolina, Georgia, Florida. 103. L. tephrum, Berk., in Herb.—Sessile, globose, peridium thick and rigid, brown, minutely velvety. Capillitium scanty, threads delicate, sterile base obsolete; spores pale ochraceous olive, globose, smooth, 3-4 w diam. From 1/2-2/3 in. across, sometimes with a branched rooting base. Brisbane. 104. L. serobiculatum, Ces. Myc. Born., 12.—Subspherical, bay coloured, scrobiculate. Sterile base inconspicuous, spores globose, smooth, yellowish. Size and general appearance of Lycogalus epidendrwm (Ces.). On decayed grass stems. Sarawak. 105. L. albinum, Cke., in Herb.—Sessile, globose, white, minutely mealy. Threads of capillitium scanty, slender, flaccid, sterile base almost obsolete ; spores clay colour, smooth, globose, 3 w diam. Peridium 1/2-1/3 in. across. On rotten wood and branches. Brazil. 106. L. pusillum Fr.—Peridium subglobose, sometimes slightly attenuated below, flaccid, persistent, with minute adpressed scurfy squamules, becoming smooth, dehiscing by a minute irregular apical pore, pale olivaceous ochre, furnished with a cord-like root. Capillitium dense, threads much branched, axils well rounded, lax, flexuous, sterile base obsolete ; spores olivaceous ochre, glovose, smooth, 4 mw diam.— L. pusillum, Fr. 8. M., i. 33. Cke. Hdbk., 1086. Eng. Fl, 304 (in part). Karst. Myc. Fenn., ii. p. 360.. Batsch, Elen., f. 228, var. Bolt., t.117, f. C. Schaeff. Ic., t.294. Bull, t.435, £2. Eckl Exs., No. 1261. Globularia pusilla, Quel. Champ. Jur. et Vosg., ii. t. 3, f 7. From 1/4-2/3 in. diam. Europe, North America, Bonin Islands, Lower Pegu, Hong Kong, Whampoa, East Nepaul, Rio Janeiro, Ceylon, New Zealand, Melbourne, Somerset East (Africa), King George’s Sound. 107. L. calyptreforme, Berk. Greyv., ti. p. 50.—Ovate, apex papillate, farfuraceous or with minute mealy warts, base rooting. Threads of capillitium much thicker than diameter of spores, sterile stratum obso- lete; spores dirty ochraceous, smooth, globose, 3 w diam. Plate XIII. figs. 16 and 17. About 1/3 in. across. Upper Carolina. V. Spores elliptical or subglobose. 108. L. oblongisporum, B. & C., Cuban Fungi, No. 505, Journ. Linn. Soc., x. 345.—Sessile, subglobose, pale brown, with minute persistent warts. Capillitium continuous with the minute sterile base, threads about equal to short diameter of spores, branched, axils acute ; spores brown, smooth, elliptic-oblong, 6 x 3 u diam. Plate XII. figs, 8 and 9. Up to 1 in. diam. Amongst leaves. Cuba. 109. L. Hongkongense, B. & C., Proc. Amer. Acad., 1859, 124. —Pyriform or elliptical, with minute warts above, becoming smooth, de- hiscing by an irregular apical aperture; rooting. Capillitium reddish ochre, sterile base obsolete ; spores subferruginous, elliptic, smooth, pedi- cellate, 4-2 w diam. About 2/3 in. high. On the ground. Hong Kong. 724 Transactions of the Society. 110. L. plicatum, B. & C., Proc. Amer. Acad., 1859, 125.— Sub- rotund or depressed, white becoming pale brown, cortex with minute warts, splitting away above, plicate below and produced into a very short stem. Capillitium continuous with the scanty sterile base; spores broadly elliptic, smooth, often shortly pedicellate. From 1/2-2/3 in. diam. On the ground. Japan. 111. L. gauterioides, B. & Br., Fungi Ceylon, No. 718, Journ. Linn. Soc., xiv. p. 79.—Irregular, suborbicular, leathery, citrm, minutely fur- furaceous, rugoso-lacunose especially below, stem very short. Threads of capillitium much branched, axils rounded, sterile base scanty ; spores olive, smooth, broadly elliptic. 5 x 4 w diam. A little over 1 in. diam. On scorched ground. Ceylon. 112. L. coloratum, Peck, N.Y. Nat. Hist. Mus. Bot. Report (29th) —Peridium globose or obovate, subsessile, radicating, yellow or reddish- yellow, brownish when old, slightly roughened with minute granular or furfuraceous persistent warts; capillitium and spores at first pale, in- clining to sulphur. colour, then dingy olive; spores subglobose, smooth, about 0:00016 in. diam. (= about 4 ~).—U.S. Sp. Lycop., pp. 2-30. “There is a slight depression in one side of the spore, so that when viewed in a particular direction, it appears flattened or depressed on oue side, although if viewed in a different direction it may appear globose.” Less than 1 in. across. Ground in thin woods and bushy places. Rare. July and August. United States. 113. L. wxanthospermum, Berk. Hook. Journ., vi. p. 172 (1854).— ~Globose or broadly obovate, peridium thin, persistent, yellowish with minute brown specks of outer peridium remaining. ‘Threads of capillitium firm, simple, about equal in thickness to diameter of spores, continuous with the scanty cellular base; spores dark yellow tinged olive, smooth, subglobose, generally pedicellate, about 5 » diam. About 1 in. diam. Not furfuraceous. On the ground. Khasia, India. Species belonging to group B, but owing to absence of type specimens and information as to surface of spores, could not be arranged under the sections. 114. L. tomentosum, Vitt. Mon. Lyc., p. 179.—Peridium very; thin, persistent, chestnut brown, covered with evanescent tomentum, dehiscing by a minute mouth. Sterile base none, spores olive-brown.—Vitt., t. 1, £10) In dry pastures, semi-immersed. Aug.—Sept. Italy. 115. L. purpurascens, B. & C., Proc. Amer. Acad., 1859, 124,— Small, subglobose, contracted into a sub-aculeate base, purplish then brown, innato-squamulose above. Sterile stratum obsolete, spores yellowish olive. On decayed trunks. Bonin Islands. . 116. L. mundula, Kalch, Grev., ix. p. 3 (1880).—Peridium floccose, becoming smooth, white, size of a hazel-nut. Spores and capillitium carneo-rufous, 0° 004 mm. diam. Similar to L. pusillwm, but colour of spores different. Australia. A Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon. By G. Massee. 725 The following species could not be arranged under Groups A or B, owing to imperfect descriptions, and absence of type specimens :— 1. Spores purple, lilac, or various shades of wmber or brown. 117. L. asperrimum, Welw. & Curr., Fung. Angol.. Trans, Linn. Soc., xxvi. p. 289, t. 20, f. 14.—Subglobose, 1 in. or more high, peridium cinnamon, papyraceous, when young bristling with spines, becoming smooth, capillitium reddish; spores same colour, globose, minutely echinulate, 4 diam. Amongst bushes in sandy places. West Africa. 118. L. Welwitschit Mass.— Peridium globose or subturbinate, horny, fragile, blackish purple, clothed with dense rufous tomentum. Capillitium brown, spores brown, very minutely echinulate, about 3 wu diam.—L. tomentosum, Welw. & Curr., Fungi Angol., Linn. Trans., xxvi. p. 289, t. 19, f 7-8 (1868). There is a L. tomentosum Vitt. of prior date. On damp ground, amongst rotten leaves. Golungo, West Africa. 119. L. Nove Zealandiev, Lev. Ann. Sci. Nat., 1846, p. 164.— Peridium globose, sessile, papyraceous, evanescent above and opening by a very large mouth, at first covered with minute white shining warts, lacunoso-plicate below, flesh and smooth spores violet. From 5-7 cm. diam. On the ground. New Zealand. 120. L. cxspitosum, Welw. & Curr., Fung. Angol., Trans. Linn. Soc., xxvi. pp. 289--90, t. 20, f. 1-2.—Subglobose; 1/4-14 in. high, 1/4-1} in. across, rooting, white when growing, yellowish when dry, papyraceous, at first warted then almost naked; capillitium argillaceous lilac, yellowish under the Microscope; spores same colour, globose, smooth, 5-6 w diam. In grassy places. West Africa ; Somerset East, Africa. 121. L. serotinum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 631.—Globose, always obtuse, contracted into a short rooting base, above with rufous-brown spines, yellowish-white becoming ochraceous brown, dehiscing by an entire mouth. Spores brownish ochre, minute, globose, smooth. Near trunks and roots. Europe. 122. L. fuscum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 626.—Small, pyriform or obconic, at first with white spines of various sizes, becoming yellowish and granuloso-floccose, umbonate, at length brown, mouth entire or laciniate. Spores yellow-brown, minute, smooth. Kurope. 123. L. cretacewm, Berk. Linn. Journ., xvii. p. 15.—Sessile, globoso- depressed, pale fulvous, scabroso-pulveraceous, above broken up into rigid chalky pyramidal areole ; mycelium creeping, white. Capillitium brown, threads coarse, irregular, spores 0-005-0°007 mm. Bellot Island (Arct. Exp.). 124. L. gossypinum, Bull. Champ., p. 147, pl. 435, f. 1—Minute, subturbinate ; peridium flaccid, minutely woolly, spores brown. From 2-3 lines across. Peridium white, becoming brownish. Gregarious on rotten wood. France. 726 Transactions of the Society. 2. Spores tinged with olive or various shades of yellow. 125. L. foetidum, Bon. Bot. Ztg., 1857, 629.—Shape variable, often deformed, brown or bay, bristling with simple and angular spinose warts which fall away leaving reticulate markings, becoming subumbonate and dehiscing by a terminal mouth. Spores small, globose, smooth, rufous-olive or greenish brown. Smell like Scleroderma vulgare. In woods. Europe. 126. L. sculptum, Harkn. Bull. Calif. Acad. Sc., Feb. 1885, p. 160, pl. 1—Subglobose or obovate, 8-15 cm. in diam., pure white. Outer peridium very thick, forming pyramidal masses 2—4 cm. in breadth and 13-3 in. in height, which are longitudinally grooved by many parallel lines; in age dividing vertically imto several segments which usually remain attached at the apex: spore mass bright yellow, becoming cinereous ; flocci yellow, 6-10 «4; spores smooth, pale, 5-8 pw. Sierra Nevada, 6—8000 ft. 127. L. Gunnit, Berk. Fl. Tasm., ii. 265.—Sessile, subglobose, with very minute stellate warts. Columella short, spores bright olive, globose, with long pedicels, 1/6000 in. diam. Olive, 1-2 in. diam. In pastures. ‘Tasmania, Australia. 128. L. golungense, Welw. & Curr., Fung. Angol., Trans. Linn. Soc., xxvi. p. 289, t. 20, f. 13.—Peridium globose or obovate, clothed with delicate fastigiate tomentum, springing from a dense mass of mycelium ; capillitium and spores unknown. At the base of rotten trunks. West Africa. 129. L. furfuracewm, Batsch, Elen., p. 145.— — = ata 1 : } yi g P Pp € and Loin a cl ema Nawal (2-1): P P g" P Pp g' By substituting in equation f these values, g a ( ped ——— + BITE ; (n' = le ie Lad A 1) a or iS g gf = Piss n — 1), oar Uae gD ( ) from which 4 (9 1G 7-4) n=1+ (n' 1), and lastly, This calculation is for Brewster’s instrument, in which the artificial lens is plano-concave. In Smith’s apparatus, in which the lens is plano- wn ee ay In the two equations which express the law of conjugate foci, convex, the fraction as changes sign, so that by subtraction i 1 1 a E I a ae eT ae I ‘agen e “ Oe ae a Substituting for 5 its value we get 1 yiot 1 1 818 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Now We ee ee eo then il 1 Sn aly ph pee Cran from which n-1=r(5--) 1 rs) 2 whence ee By substituting the value of r in the equation a we get pat DG i)(5—2) pp jee V2 w 'p legal tsk ! p mn=1+4+(W—1)F ‘ poe But i 1 pr f : pp pp lp pnp) + BOL De eee Loo lope), PP eA 2) 12 Oa) eae Be bah 7) then n= 1 pie 1) PoP eee Sia er B By substituting for pp'p" their values in functions of gg'g", and remembering that UPA gp=9 Pp =9'p'; and that consequently patie =, we get gP 1D aig LA py gp) aig ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 819 Furthermore, P—P =p 2h =4(1 a) a Noa pe tare a ate 3 lI —_ + rae a | _ <7 ’ Pslt+(@- Yo In conclusion, it only remains to be said that these formule do not take into account certain values which, if absolute precision were required, ought to come into the calculation (distance of the objective from the artificial lens, radius of curvature of the latter, &c.). Hence these formule give only an approximate result, but one which is sufficient for ordinary and practical purposes. Dr. Martinotti might we think have found many better instances to illustrate his text as to the want of novelty in sub-solar matters, as Prof. Smith’s apparatus is certainly a very useful device, and one for which he is entitled to all the credit of independent invention. Davis, T. S.—New Stage Accessory. [Consisting of a slip of glass, from the surface of which a brass pin projects at each end. Over these pins another piece of glass, with corresponding holes drilled in it, slides, and thus objects requiring to be flattened may be conveniently secured for observation. ] 16th Ann. Rep. 8S. Lond. Micr. and Nat. Hist. Club, 1887, p. 12. Fasoldt’s (C.) Eye-piece Micrometer. ; | The lines are said to be ground in the glass, not ruled.”] Journ. New York Micr, Soc., III. (1887) p. 40. Rogers’ (W. A.) Stage Micrometer. [In squares upon speculum metal—parts of an inch and millimetre. ] Journ. New York Mier. Soc., IIL. (1887) p. 40. Winket, R.—Apparat zum Markiren mikroskopischer Objekttheile. (Apparatus for marking parts of microscopic objects.) {Same as that described, ante, p. 468.} German Patent, Kl. 42, No. 38858, 15th Sept., 1886 (1 fig.). (4) Photomicrography-. Crookshank’s Reversible Photo-micrographic Apparatus.*—Dr. E. M. Crookshank’s apparatus (fig. 226) consists of a camera fixed upon a base- board 4 or 5 feet in length, upon which the Microscope is clamped, and * Journ. and Trans. Photographic Soc. of Great Britain, xi. (1837) pp. 141-52 (1 fig.). See also Crookshank’s ‘ Photography of Bacteria,’ 1887, p. 22. 820 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO which carries also an oxyhydrogen lantern. In order to photograph miero- organisms in liquids or the colony growths in gelatin which has been partially liquefied, the apparatus can be placed in the vertical position so that the stage is horizontal. To place the apparatus in the vertical position, two small hinged brackets at the end, distant from the camera, are forced up with a smart blow of the hand. The corresponding ends of the stretcher bars are dis- lodged from their fittings, and allowed to descend; when horizontal, the opposite extremities of the bars are easily released from their sockets. The leg or support at this end can then be turned up and fixed underneath Fig. 226. < ASS i = AAT OA HN th the apparatus by a button, and the end of the apparatus itself gently lowered to the ground. A hinged end-piece is also to be turned out to increase the base upon which the whole apparatus will stand when raised to the vertical. The two-legged support at the opposite end of the apparatus is next worked down by a quick thread screw, and, on raising the apparatus to the vertical, the two-legged support drops to the ground, and assists in maintaining the stability of the whole. If it be thought necessary, a simple means can be readily devised for clamping the apparatus in either position to the wall of the room, so as to eliminate as much as possible all chances of vibration. A second quick thread screw moves the base-board upon which the camera ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 821 and central sliding-board are mounted, so that the camera, Microscope, and lantern can be raised to a convenient height above the ground. The various parts of the apparatus are described more in detail as follows:—The Microscope utilized was one constructed by Zeiss, but any good stand may be adapted in the same way. The advantage of Zeiss’s stand, for bacteriological photography, is that the wide stage forms a steady support for cultivations on small panes of glass coated with nutrient jelly. A mechanical stage greatly facilitates manipulation with the highest powers ; but it is not indispensable, for Dr. Crookshank has taken, without the use of one, a large number of photographs, though employing, as a rule, a 1/25 hom. imm. It is most essential that the Microscope should be perfectly steady. To ensure this the horseshoe foot-piece of the Zeiss stand fits under a projecting ledge, and is then clamped by a cross-piece, so that it is firmly fixed. , The Microscope, with the means for clamping it, and the oxyhydrogen lantern are carried upon an independent sliding-board, which admits of movement to or from the camera. The sliding-board also moves upon a centre, which enables the Microscope to be turned out from the median line ; in fact, to be turned at a right angle to the position it occupies when ready for the exposure. The object of this contrivance is to enable the operator to sit down by the side of the apparatus, and with comfort to arrange the object in the field of the Microscope. On turning the Micro- scope back into the median line, it is fixed in the optical axis of the apparatus by means of a stop. The sliding-board was originally provided with a small grooved wheel receiving an endless cord, made of silk or fishing-line, which passed round the grooved, milled head of the fine adjustment. When the sliding-board was returned to the median line of the apparatus, the milled wheel connected with the fine-adjustment im- pinged upon the wheel of the long focusing rod. The latter was provided with an indiarubber tyre, which gripped the teeth of the milled wheel, and thus the long focusing rod was placed in connection with the fine-adjust- ment. Dr. Crookshank now dispenses with this arrangement, as he believes it to be a mistake to strain the objective by having the screen at a greater distance from the object than, say, 30 inches, and with that distance of screen one can easily move the fine-adjustment with one hand, while holding the focusing glass in the other. Of equal importance to the objective is the sub-stage condenser, and this, for the best results, must be provided with arrangements for focusing and accurate centering. For illumination the author has. chiefly employed the oxyhydrogen light, which can be used without the interposition of a mirror in either position of the apparatus. In the horizontal position a paraffin lamp may be employed by simply removing the lantern and substituting the one for the other; but to employ this illumination when the apparatus is vertical would obviously entail another arrangement. It would in this case be necessary to adjust the mirror of the Microscope and to place the lamp in such a position that the light would be reflected in the ordinary way. If the paraffin lamp be preferred, it should be provided with a large broad wick and a metal chimney. The burner may be made to revolve, so that either the edge or the flat of the flame may be utilized. The metal chimney has an aperture in front, giving exit to the rays of light, which is closed in bya slip of glass. The glass is very liable to crack when exposed to the full force of the flame, and it is as well, therefore, to be provided with a stock of glass slips, which have been annealed by being enveloped in a cloth and boiled for two or three hours. 822 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Dr. Crookshank has, so far, been so satisfied with the oxyhydrogen light; both for taking direct pictures and enlarging, that he has not deemed it worth while to substitute any other. He more frequently employs it than the paraffin lamp, partly on account of the diminished time in exposure, especially when employing very high powers; this is of great importance where there is likely to be vibration from passing traffic. With rapid plates and the highest powers, the exposure has only been two or three seconds, whereas, with the paraffin lamp, it may vary from three to ten minutes, or even longer. . The illuminating apparatus here shown consists of a lantern which not only moves together with the Microscope on the central sliding-board, but can be moved independently to or from the Microscope, and be clamped with screws at the requisite distance for obtaining the best illumination. The lime cylinders should be of the best quality, of hard lime. Oxygen should be supplied preferably in a compressed state in iron bottles. Not only are the bottles much less cumbrous than the bags, but a small quantity of gas can be used, and the residue left for an indefinite time, and is always at hand to be turned on when required. On the other hand, the retention of unused gas in the bags is liable to cause their corrosion, owing to the impurities which are carried over in the manufacture of the oxygen. . A half-plate camera is employed, which is mounted upon a sliding platform. This admits of the camera being pushed up to the Microscope when it is in the long axis of the apparatus, so as to make a light-tight combination. The opening occupied in an ordinary camera by the lens, can be shut off by means of an internal shutter, which is opened and closed by turning a screw at the side of the camera. The dark-back is provided with plate-carriers, so that either half, quarter, or lantern-size plates can be employed. It is found convenient to have two or more dark-backs, so that several plates may be exposed without re-arranging the light for each exposure. Rafter’s ‘‘ Professional Photo-Micro-Camera.”*—Mr. G. W. Rafter criticizes a statement of the Hon. J. D. Cox that he obtained the best results in photomicrography by using a No. 1 eye-piece in the Microscope and no other amplifier. In his view the use of an eye-piece causes not only great loss of light, but also great loss of distinctness in the image. He also condemns the use of the Zeiss projection eye-pieces, on the ground that “any process that necessitates the removal of one piece of apparatus and the substitution of another in its place is for high-power work funda- mentally defective,’ the inevitable disturbance of apparatus in making such changes leading not only to loss of time, but usually to deterioration of the negative. The author considers that the use of the simpler optical combination of the adjustable achromatic amplifier for correcting micro- scopic objectives when they are required to be used for projection is on the whole preferable, and hence he included in a new camera which he recently devised an arrangement for adjusting the amplifier so that the best correction of the objective can be readily obtained. After a very full exposition of the optical principles involved, the camera is described as follows :—- ‘In order to get such ready means of adjusting the amplifier and to * Rafter, G. W., ‘On the use of the Amplifier, With observations on the Theory and Practice of Photomicrography, suggested by the design of a new Photo-micro- camera,’ sep. repr. from Rochester (N. Y.) Odontographic Journal, viii. (1887) pp. 110- 44 (14 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 823 develope a photo-micro-camera which would answer all the demands which might be made upon it I have designed the apparatus shown in fig. 227. This is really a photo-micro-camera complete within itself, and not a Microscope and camera combined. I found early in my experience as a photomicrographer that one instrument could not be made to do the work Fig. 227. of two, and that it was only possible to use photography as a real aid to microscopical investigation by having photomicrographic apparatus which in addition to being always ready, also possessed the quality of easy adjustment to any and all kinds of work. The present design possesses not only all these qualities, but it can also be furnished at a price quite Fig. 228. within the reach of any person really desiring such an aid to scientific investigation. _A reference to fig. 228 in conjunction with fig. 227 will show the novel points. A in fig. 228 is the stage, B is a nose-piece which carries the objective 824 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and also a removable collar carrying the tube C, which is supported by a removable pillar shown in fig. 227. Inside the tube C is a second tube made to work back and forth very easily, and carrying at its lower end a right-angle prism set for total reflection. This tube is of such a length as to give, when in position for receiving the image from the objective through the prism, a length of 10 in. measured along the optical axis.. The eye- piece in the outer end has cross-hairs set in the diaphragm, so adjusted in relation to the prism at the other end as to correspond with cross lines on the ground glass of the camera screen. The tube C, therefore, gives Fie. 229. the opportunity to examine the object under the conditions of microscopic vision, and with the cross-hairs in the eye-piece farther enables the operator to exactly centre the object on the screen. F is an adjustable tube carrying within it a second tube, which may be slid back and forth. This interior sliding tube has an adapter at the front end, into which an amplifier may be screwed, and the whole racked back and forth by the pinion EH, which also carries between the thumb-screw and the body a pulley over which a band canbe passed for working the amplifier from the rear of the camera screen. This inner tube also has a graduation on the side, in order to facilitate recording the proper position of the amplifier for various extensions of the screen. In working with high powers where it is desirable to use the amplifier, the objective is set to normal working distance by observing the object through the tube C. The operator then, from the rear of the camera, by use of the band over the pulley at H, racks the amplifier to such a position as to give a sharp and distinct image on the ground glass, the objective in the meantime remaining undisturbed. It is of course understood that after having adjusted the objective to normal working distance the inner tube at C, carrying the prism and eye-piece, has been sufficiently withdrawn to allow the rays of light to pass unobstracted to the camera screen. This gives us almost instantly the conditions which have been shown above to be necessary for production of the highest results, and with this apparatus the most difficult tests are easily photographed. When working with low powers the amplifier is not essential for the production of sharp images, and the tube C and nose-piece B are removed by simply slipping off the collar from the nose-piece, and unscrewing the nose-piece from the body, an operation which may be performed in a moment. Fig. 229 shows these parts when detached. After removing B and C, the inner tube F is drawn forward so that the front end of it occupies approximately the position of B when in place, and the objective is screwed into the adapter in the end of said tube F, which in high-power work carries the amplifier. D is a second tube back of F, with prism and eye-piece with cross-wires, precisely asin C. With this tube the object is examined and centered on the ground glass, as above described, for work with C. After such centering ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 825 the focusing is completed either by use of the band passing over the pulley at E, or by use of the long rod and fine-adjustment to be described below. ‘The inner tube at D is shown as drawn back in such position as to allow the rays of light to pass unobstructed to the screen. The camera itself has both bellows and base made in sections, each two feet in length. The sections of the bellows can be readily removed, or additional sections inserted, when greater extension is required.... The plate and screen-holder is racked back and forth as clearly shown in fig. Gn the side of the base is a graduation in feet, tenths and hundredths of a foot, which enables one to record positions of the screen for producing given magnifications easily. The fine motion is communicated to the stage, and not to the objective, as is shown in fig. 227. The camera, as shown in the fig., admits of an extension of 8 feet, and sections of base and bellows similar to those above described can be added, extending it almost indefinitely. The extension above given will, however, answer all ordinary demands. In its present form the camera takes a 63 x 83 plate, and all sizes less than that down to the smallest. This apparatus has been specially designed with reference to doing photo- micrographic work of a high character with the greatest possible economy of time. It is for this purpose that the second prism-tube has been added specially for low-power work without the amplifier, and I have no difficulty in making with this camera a half dozen negatives in an evening, when working with lamplight and the amplifier, or from eight to ten in the same time when working with low powers and without the amplifier, in each case doing my own developing. In working by sunlight, where much shorter exposures are required, the same length of time gives an additional amount of work. In case one has an extra Microscope, the new apparatus for working the amplifier may be adapted to it at moderate expense, and, by construction of the bellows and extension arrangements as above described, the more important advantages of the camera gained. I desire, however, to put myself on record as opposed to the combination instruments—those which are to be used for microscopy ordinarily, but which can be, when one has something worth photographing, for the time being transformed into a camera, The trouble with all such instruments is, they have in general failed to do satisfactory photomicrographic work. For rapid work the camera should be placed on a shelf on one side of the room at such a height as to bring the horizontal prism-tubes level with the operator’s eye. The position of the camera at one side of the room insures economy of space, and does away with the objection that the camera, even though of considerable size, takes up much room. When it is intended to work by lamplight only it will not matter which side of the room is used for this purpose, and the operator may locate the camera to suit his surroundings ; care must be taken, however, to have the graduation of the base on the side away from the wall. If one has plenty of room, the best arrangement would of course be to erect a shelf on horses in the middle of the room, so that the camera is accessible on both sides. When it is intended to work by sunlight the camera must of necessity be at either the east or west side of a room with an exposure to the south, or when economy of space is of no importance, it can be conveniently placed in front of a window facing the south, in which may be fitted up the neces- sary arrangements for heliostat, mirrors, or condensing lens. $26 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO In any case, the surroundings will decide to some extent just what arrangement will be adopted. The following are, so far as I know, the new features embodied in this camera :— (1) The application of specific appliances for moving the amplifier back and forth, in order to find by trial, for any given extension of the camera, the best position of the amplifier for projecting the image upon the screen. (2) The application of two horizontal prism-tubes, one for use with high powers and the amplifier, and the other for use with low powers without the amplifier. (83) The detachable nose-piece and prism-tube for high powers only (fig. 228). (4) The cross wires in the diaphragm of the eye-piece of the prism-tube, giving an immediate centering of the object on the camera screen. (5) The making of the bellows in sections in such manner as to admit of their easy removal or of a ready indefinite extension. (6) The making of the base in sections in combination with the focusing- rod, connected by an automatic coupling. (7) The plate-holder, which admits of all sizes of plates, from the maximum of 64 x 83 to the smallest, without the use of kits. Another new feature, which, however, is not specifically claimed, is this : If one has a prejudice in favour of photographing with an eye-piece, or if, from motives of economy, one desires to dispense with the amplifier and work with the eye-piece, this may be done by simply inserting an eye-piece in the back end of the amplifier-tube. For so working, an adjustable nose- piece for carrying the objective without the high power prism-tube may be furnished, thus dispensing with one of the prism-tubes, which, however, can be added at any time by change of nose-pieces. The object can be still centered by the posterior prism-tube, which is permanently fixed to the body, and the projection of a sharp image upon the screen completed by moving the eye-piece with the pinion E (fig. 228). The general claim is made, therefore, that this camera embodies more nearly all the conditions necessary for rapid and successful work than anything heretofore produced. I have no doubt, however, but that a very considerable improvement can still be made, and confidently expect, in view of the great interest now centering in photomicrographic work, that the next few years will develope such improvements.” It should be added that the author is not unmindful of his obligations to the photomicrographic Microscope of Nachet,* as he says, ‘“‘ The novel point of this camera is the use of the prism-tube somewhat as I have arranged it in my camera, and I very willingly acknowledge my indebtedness to M. Nachet for the suggestion. He has, however, used the tube vertical, and as a fixed part of the apparatus.” Hartnack’s Cupro-ammonia Cell.{—Dr. EH. Hartnack has ingeniously modified the form of this cell, so as to enable a thicker or thinner stratum of the blue fluid to be used at pleasure in photomicrography, thus varying the illumination according to the requirements of the particular object. The apparatus consists of two ebonite rings, each closed on one side by a parallel plate of glass. The rings slide in one another (hermetically), and when pushed together part of the liquid is forced into a lateral reservoir, from which it is drawn again when the rings are separated. * See this Journal, 1886, p. 840. + Journ. de Microgr., ix. (1885) p 366. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 827 Cox, C. F.—Remarks on Photomicrography. [Principally as to letting the negatives alone after they are taken. ] Journ. New York. Micr. Soc., 1887, pp. 18-9. H., G. M.—A simple Photographic and Photomicrographic Apparatus. Engl. Mech., XLV. (1887) p. 503 (12 figs.), from Scientific American. Kine, Y. M.—The Photomicrography of Histological Subjects. New York Med. Journ., II. (1887) pp. 7-11. Photo-Microscopy. L., II. Charterhouse Phot. Art. Journ., I. (1887) pp. 2-4. Rovx, E.—La Photographie appliquée a l’étude des microbes. (Photography applied to the study of microbes.) Ann. de I’ Institut Pasteur, 1887, pp. 209-25. (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Limit of Visibility.—In his Presidential Address at the Manchester Meeting of the British Association, Sir H. Roscoe appears to have fallen into a not unimportant mistake with regard to the smallest dimensions which can be distinguished by the Microscope. In dealing with atoms he said :— “Next let us ask what light the research of the last fifty years has thrown on the Daltonian atoms: first, as regards their size; secondly, in respect to their indivisibility and mutual relationships; and, thirdly, as regards their motions. As regards the size and shape of the atoms, Dalton offered no opinion, for he had no experimental grounds on which to form it, believing that they were inconceivably small and altogether beyond the grasp of our senses aided by the most powerful appliances of art... . But modern research has accomplished, as regards the size of the atom, at any rate to a certain extent, what Dalton regarded as impossible. Thus, in 1865, Loschmidt, of Vienna, came to the conclusion that the diameter of an atom of oxygen or nitrogen was 1/10,000,000 part of a centimetre. With the highest known magnifying power we can distinguish the 1/40,000 part of a centimetre; if now we imagine a cubic box each of whose sides has the above length, such a box when filled with air will contain from 60 to 100 millions of atoms of oxygen and nitrogen. A few years later William Thomson extended the methods of atomic measurement, and came to the conclusion that the distance between the centres of contiguous molecules is less than 1/5,000,000 and greater than 1/1000,000,000 of a centimetre; or, to put it in language more suited to the ordinary mind, Thomson asks us to imagine a drop of water magnified up to the size of the earth, and tells us that the coarseness of the graining of such a mass would be something between a heap of small shot and a heap of cricket- balls. Or, again, to take Clifford’s illustration, you know that our best Microscopes magnify from 6000-8000 times; a Microscope which would magnify that result as much again would show the molecular structure of water. Or again, to put it in another form, if we suppose that the minutest organism we can now see were provided with equally powerful Microscopes, these beings would be able to see the atoms.’’* Microscopists will readily recognize that the 1/40,0U0 of a centimetre —which is approximately 1/100,000 of an inch—is vastly too low a figure, which should be at least 5 times smaller. Dr. Royston-Pigott claims to have seen the 1/1,000,000 of an inch, but, whether he has or not, it is certain that the 1/500,000 of an inch has been distinctly recognized. Moreover, Sir Henry himself, as will be seen, states that a power of 8000 times is attainable “with our best Microscopes”; multiply 1/100,000 in. * Cf. Nature, xxxvi. (1887) p. 417. 828 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO by 8000, and we get nearly 1/12 in., which it is obviously absurd to put as the limit of visibility in the microscopic image. The difference does not affect Sir H. Roscoe’s argument, for the capacity to see even the 1/1,000,000 of an inch would still leave us far from the point when atoms would be visible, but we call attention to his statement because, coming from so high an authority as a President of the British Association, it may give rise to a serious misapprehension as to the powers of the Micro- scope of the present day. Heath’s ‘Geometrical Optics.’*—Measure of the Aperture of the Microscope.—Dr. R. 8. Heath’s book is, we believe, the first Hnglish treatise on optics in which aperture is dealt with. The following is the author’s treatment of the subject :— It has been shown that the brightness of an image given by a Micro- scope is determined by the formula M2 uw? sin? a pe ae where A is the conventional image distance, p the radius of the pupil of the eye, m the magnifying power, and a the divergence of the cone of rays proceeding from the object in a medium whose refractive index is wu. Thus for an instrument of given magnifying power, I a (wsina)?, and accordingly, usin a may be taken to be the numerical measure of the aperture. This measure of the aperture may be expressed in terms of the focal length of the objective, and diameter of the pencil passing through it. The diameter of the pencil as it passes through the object. varies from the first to the last surface. We shall suppose that the diameter is taken at the back surface of the objective as the pencil emerges from it. This will be so close to the second principal focus of the objective in microscopic objec- tives of the ordinary type of construction, that the difference in the distance may be disregarded. We shall therefore suppose that b is the semi-diameter of the pencil at the second focal plane of the objective, and that fis the focal length of the objective. Let u' be the distance of the image from the second principal focus; then, using the ordinary notation, B' Oh B ip Also by Helmholtz’s theorem, we have uBsina = u' B' sing’, and therefore usina = wu — sina’ ys == 0 sina’, The angle a’ is always very small in Microscopes, never exceeding a a few degrees, and therefore u'sina’ will not differ sensibly from w’ tan a’, But b = — w' tana’, and therefore ul b usina = * Heath, R.S., ‘A Treatise on Geos wilzall Optics,’ xvii. and 356 pp., figs., 8vo, Cambridge, 1887, pp. 294-6. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 829 The last image is always formed in air, so that u’ = 1, and therefore finally usina =-—- ai This numerical measure of the aperture may be justified by general reasoning. Other things being equal, it is clear that the numerical measure of the aperture ought to vary as the diameter of the pencil. Next suppose we have objectives of the same diameter of opening, but of different focal lengths. Imagine rays traced backwards through the two objectives in succession from the same object. The incident rays are nearly parallel, and since the openings of the objectives are the same, they will admit backwards the same number of rays. But these rays will be concentrated to a smaller area by the lens of shorter focal length than by the other, the linear dimensions of the areas varying as the focal lengths, but their brightness being the same. Reverting to the original arrangement of the instrument, the objective of shorter focal length will admit the same number of rays from the smaller area as the other will admit from the larger area. The real aperture of the former is therefore greater than the other in the inverse ratio of their focal lengths. The value 6/f is independent of the medium in which the object is placed; it is the same for air, water, balsam, or any other immersion system. A numerical aperture unity would correspond to an incident cone of rays in air whose vertical angle is 180°, while with homogeneous immer- sion the same aperture would correspond to a cone of angle 82° 17'; and with modern objectives the apertures reach 1°40, and sometimes more than this. The magnifying power of an objective may be measured for a definite position of the image by projecting the image of a stage micrometer upon an eye-piece micrometer. And then we can find the numerical aperture of the objective by means of the formula b 5 m usina = —;: U An auxiliary Microscope may be focused to the focal plane, and the linear diameter 2b of the emergent pencil measured there ; then we have only to measure w', the distance of the focal plane from the image to which m refers, and we have the means of finding the value of w sin a. Conversely, if we know the numerical aperture, the focal length of the object-glass may easily be measured; for using the formula » wsina = —> I we have only to measure micrometrically the diameter 2b of the pencil as it emerges at the principal focal plane. Binocular Vision with the Microscope.—It will be remembered that Prof. Abbe a few years back startled microscopists by the statement * that the action of the binocular Microscope was quite different from ordinary vision, a view which produced an energetic protest from the late Dr. Carpenter,} who had not, however, apprehended the point of Prof. Abbe’s argument, which was left untouched. In the last volume of the Encyclo- pedia Britannica ¢t we observe that Prof. J. G. M‘Kendrick (under the head of “ Stereoscope ”) very tersely sums up the result of the controversy (if it can be so called) as follows :— * See this Journal, 1884, p. 20. + Ibid., p. 486, { Ency. Brit., xxii. (9th ed. 1887) p. 541. 1887. 31 830 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO “ Prof. Abbe shows, however, that ‘oblique vision in the Microscope is entirely different from that in ordinary vision, inasmuch as there is no perspective, so that we have no longer the dissimilarity which is the basis of the ordinary stereoscopic effect, but an essentially different mode of dissimilarity between the two pictures. In the Microscope there is no perspective foreshortening. There is no difference in the outline of an object viewed under the Microscope by an axial or by an oblique pencil. There is simply a lateral displacement of the image—an entirely different phenomenon to that which occurs in non-microscopic vision. Thus, whilst the mode of formation of dissimilar pictures in the binocular Microscope is ditferent from the production of ordinary stereoscopic pictures, the brain mechanism by which they are so fused as to give rise to sensations of solidity, depth, and perspective, is the same.” Hanks, H.—Eryrors likely to occur in Microscopical Observations. {(Abstract only). “The hemispherical bosses upon certain diatoms are persistently seen by some as cup-shaped depressions or concavities.”’] Report of Proceedings of San Francisco Micr. Soc., July 13th, 1887. Magnifying-power of Objectives, Measurement of. [Further letters by F. R. Brokenshire and F. J. George.] Engl. Mech, XUV. (1887) pp. 540, 561-2. MarsHaut, W. P.—On the measurement of the magnifying power of Microscope Objectives; with exhibition of 1/25 in. water-immersion objective of Powell and Lealand. [Camera lucida method. ] Midi. Natural., X. (1887) pp. 226-8. Pout, A.—I recenti progressi nella Teoria del Microscopio, (Recent progress in the theory of the Microscope. ) 25 pp. 8vo, Firenze, 1887. (Sep. repr. from Rivista Scientifico-Indusiriale. ) Royston-Picort, G. W.—Microscopical Advances. XXII., XXIII. [Diffraction ancient and modern—Insects’ scales. ] Engl. Mech., XLV. (1887) pp. 547-8; XLVI. (1887) pp. 1-2 © As.) (6) Miscellaneous. Royal Microscopical Society of the Sandwich Islands.—In 1878* we referred to the establishment of this Society by King Kalakua, a Society which we gather has now ceased to exist. ‘This would appear to be the case from a report of a recent meeting of the San Francisco Microscopical Society, where Prof. F. L. Clarke, of Honolulu, is stated to have “ given an interesting account of microscopical matters in the Hawaiian Islands,” and in the course of which he “ narrated the career of the Microscopical Society which once existed there.” The king is now desirous to perfect arrangements for the systematic exploration and study of the natural history of the islands, and in pursuance of this plan the San Francisco Society is to be plentifully supplied with collections of objects suitable for microscopical investigation, and it has been “selected as an agent for the distribution of such material to societies with similar aims in other parts of the world.” Curiosities of Microscopical Literature.—A recent paper { on “ Mount- ing Media, so far as they relate to diatoms,” may certainly be ranked amongst the curiosities of microscopical literature, and we are at a loss to understand how it came to be printed. We quote below in full that part of the paper which is headed “ Fluids” and it will be seen that the author begins by the statement that he “cannot too emphatically condemn” certain media, such as biniodide of mercury and iodide of potassium, “simply from “the fact that the diatoms will not remain on the cover-glass, but must “necessarily fall to the bottom of the cell.” This, to begin with, was a most astounding statement to make after all that has been said on the subject, * See this Journal, 1878, p. 152. t Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1887) pp. 108-14. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOCROSOOPY, ETO. 831 but it is made even more surprising when we come upon the statement lower down in the paper, “I have never seen a slide of diatoms mounted “in biniodide of mercury and iodide of potassium,” so that the cannot-be- too-emphatic condemnation of the medium with which the author began was not founded on any practical experience whatever. The climax, however, is not yet reached, for in a footnote the author, it will be seen, states that he has now learnt that the diatoms will not fall to the bottom of the cell, as he had asserted, but will float and press upwards against the cover-glass! The following is the paragraph :— “ Fluids. —Although certain of these media, such as biniodide of mercury with iodide of potassium, as well as oil of cassia, can be ob- tained with fairly high refractive indices, yet I cannot too emphatically condemn them for use with the higher powers of the Microscope, simply from the fact that the diatoms will not remain on the cover-glass, but. must necessarily fall to the bottom of the cell, which consequently must be very shallow, otherwise the diatoms will be beyond the focus of the objective. With shallow cells in fluid mounts the diatoms can easily get crushed on cleaning the cover-glasses. If it were not for these fatal objections, I should be disposed to regard oil of cassia very favourably as a mounting medium, as these essential oils give great brilliancy ; but whether they can be effectually sealed for a permanency I cannot say. I once mounted a slide in oil of cloves, and it remained perfect for some considerable time, but eventually a bubble made its appearance. I have never seen a slide of diatoms mounted in biniodide of mercury and iodide of potassium, and am inclined to think that this medium is very little used. [Since writing the above I have learnt, with respect to the solution of biniodide of mercury and iodide of potassium, that the medium is of such high specific gravity—viz. 3:02—that any diatoms which may chance to become detached will float in the fluid and press upwards against the covering- glass, instead of falling to the bottom of the cell.’’| The paragraph headed “ Canada Balsam” is, however, still more won- derful than the preceding, as the author makes this statement :—“ The only “objection, to my mind, against this medium is that its refractive index “is not sufficiently high for the new immersion lenses”! Let us put the refractive index of Canada balsam at its lowest limit and call it 1°52, where are these new immersion lenses which, according to the author, have a higher “refractive index”? The simple explanation no doubt is that the author was quite unaware of the principle on which the use of media of high refractive index depends, but that does not make it any the less lamentable that such matter should have been presented in a scientific paper to a Microscopical Society at the present day. “A QureKEeTtT CLivus-MAN.”—My Microscope and some Objects from my Cabinet. A simple introduction to the study of the “infinitely little.” 78 pp., 5 figs., 8vo, London, 1887. American Society of Microscopists—Pittsburgh Meeting. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 156-7. Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 248-50, 269-74. DALLINGER, W. H.—The Marvels of Microscopy. [Presidential Address to Devonshire Association for the Advancement of Science, Literature, and Art. | Western Daily Mercury, 17th July, 1887. Ma Hd ye jun.—tonférences sur le Microscope. (Lectures on the Microscope.) ond, [ Transl. of the Cantor Lectures. ] Journ. de Microgr., XI. (1887) pp. 240-6 (1 fig.), 269-75 (2 figs.), ae (9 figs.). = ae * 832 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO B. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Solid Medium for the Culture of Micro-organisms.t{—Dr. Schenk recommends the outer layers of the white of the eggs of marsh fowl and waders as a suitable medium for breeding micro-organisms, on account of its great transparency when coagulated at temperatures of 65°-70° C. This albumen can be diluted with a fourth of its volume of water before coagu- lation, and can be mixed with salt, dextrin flour, sugar, glycerin, &e. Of course discontinuous sterilization must be employed as usual. New kind of solid Blood-serum—Blood-serum Plates.{—Dr. P. G. Unna states that by the addition of peroxide of hydrogen and carbonate of soda to blood-serum he produces a fluid which coagulates at a high temperature, can be easily sterilized, and preserves its transparency and suitability as a nutritive medium for micro-organisms. The procedure is as follows:—To a small quantity of calf’s blood-serum hydrogen peroxide is added drop by drop, and the mass kept agitated until the brownish-yellow mixture clears up and assumes quite a white colour. The quantity of peroxide of hydrogen added is equal to about half the volume of the serum, and as the commercial fluid is acid, a 2 per cent. solution of sodium carbonate must be added until a slight alkalinity is perceived. It is then filtered until quite clear. The serum is then solidified in Koch’s apparatus at a temperature of 90°-120°, according as less or more peroxide and carbonate have been added. The condensation water having been poured off, discontinuous sterilization is continued until sufficient. For serum plates the author adds 10 per cent. gelatin or 6 per cent. agar-agar to the mixture if the blood-serum have lost its susceptibility to coagulate owing to an excessive addition of alkali. Preserving cultivations made by Koch’s plate method.§-—Dr. C. Garré removes a piece of gelatin 2-5 sq. em. in size, and in which is the colony to be transplanted to a slide, with a thin moistened knife. Should the gelatin layer roll up, it is to be immersed in water, and then the piece is dried under a bell-jar or in a sulphuric acid apparatus until it is reduced to one- half or one-third its original volume. A drop of glycerin-gelatin fluidified at a gentle heat is then added in order to prevent the gelatin tablet from erumpling up. The cover-glass is next imposed. This manipulation must be carefully carried out, otherwise the colonies, especially if luxuriant, might be damaged. As the drying stops develop- ment the organisms may be fixed in any stage of their existence ; the colonies do not undergo any change with keeping, and, if desired, by merely removing the cover, they are always available for cover preparations or pure cultivation. Modification of Koch's plate method for the isolation and quantitative determination of Micro-organisms.||—Dr. E. Esmarch’s modification simply consists in the use of a test-tube, the interior of which is covered with a layer of some nutritive medium, e.g. gelatin. The test-tube, the mouth being covered with a rubber cap, is laid horizontally on a vessel filled with ice- cold water, and turned round with the hands until the gelatin has set. * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes ; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c.; (6) Miscella- neous. + Allgemein. Wiener Med. Ztg., xxxii. (1887) p. 214. I Monatshefte f. pract. Dermatologie, v. (1886) No. 9. § Fortschr. d. Med., iv. (1886) p. 392. | Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, i. (1886) p. 293. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 833 When developed the colonies may be examined with low powers, and even photographed. Individual colonies may also be taken out for further examination. The estimation of the number of germs is made in the ordinary way. The enumeration of the colonies may be made by placing a piece of paper divided into parts of a centimetre and multiplying the number in a given square by the superficies, or a special apparatus devised by the author may be used. If instead of gelatin agar be desired, it is advisable to add to each 10 cm. of agar 2 or 3 drops of a neutral sterilized solution of gum arabic or isinglass, If anaerobic bacteria are to be studied, the central space must be filled with gelatin while the tube is still in the ice-water. The advantages of this method over the ordinary plate cultivation are its safety against impurities, the simplicity and rapidity of its execution, the small amount of apparatus, and its facility of transport. Bacteriological experiments with coloured nutrient media.*—It is well known, says Dr. A. Spina, that indigo-blue turns white when acted on by reducing agents, and recovers its former colour on exposure to the air. It was this property which induced the author to make some experiments in order to ascertain if it could not be made available for cultivation research. A test-tube was half filled with the following solution :—0°5 phosphate of potash, 0:5 sulphate of magnesia, 1°0 tartrate of ammonia, and 100 dis- tilled water ; and this stained with two or three drops of a watery solution of sulphindigotate of soda. The coloured fluid was inoculated with some drops of putrid blood, the test-tube plugged with cotton wool, and incubated at 388°. After three or four days the fluid was decolorized, and the bacteria much augmented in number. The nutrient medium acquired the appearance of thin milk, and only on the surface was a blue layer evident. If the tube was shaken the fluid became blue again, and white when put in the incu- bator again. Methylen-blue behaves in a manner quite similar. The objection might be raised that the loss of oxygen was due, not to the bacteria, but to the nutrient medium. That this is not the case the fol- lowing experiments prove :—(a) If a test-tube filled with the coloured medium be inoculated, and after having been decolorized in the incubator, and then sterilized, it rapidly becomes blue, but no further decoloration ensues, although it remains several daysintheincubator. (b) If a test-tube filled with the coloured medium, and having been sterilized, be kept for a week at a temperature of 38°, no decoloration of the fluid takes place. Experiment also shows that the loss of oxygen was not produced by means of the chemical products of the proliferating bacteria. It was remarked before that shaking or warming restored to the decolorized fluid its original hue. This is explicable only on the assumption that the white methylen-blue or indigo takes up oxygen, and the correctness of this view is shown by the following experiment :—A glass tube filled with the stained and inoculated fluid is melted up at the open end after all air has been expelled, and de- colorized in the incubator. In this case shaking will not bring back the blue colour. From fluid the author passed to solid media, of which he employed twc— (1) meat-peptone-gelatin and (2) meat-peptone-agar. A weak solution of the former, stained and inoculated, and kept at a temperature of 22°, became decolorized below the colony in about three days. (The bacteria used were developed on potato, and from the air, but no nameis given.) Ina few days the decolorized column was quite large, but at the surface the layer in con- * Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., ii. (1887) pp. 71-5. 834 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO tact with air still blue. When the tube was shaken up, the whole of the fluidified gelatin became blue. The return of the blue obviously depended on the inclosed air, for it disappears almost completely if the fluid be kept from contact with air by pouring oil over it. (2) Meat-peptone-agar pos- sesses an advantage over the foregoing in that it does not reduce the methylen-blue. For staining, one-third of a tube full of this medium with two drops of a watery sterilized concentrated solution of methylen-blue were em- ployed. After sterilization and inoculation with the potato-grown bacillus, there appears, after about three days at a temperature of 22°, a decoloration of the superficial layers of the agar, and this in six days amounts to about 1:5 cm., while the colony itself seems slightly blue. The loss of colour proceeds more rapidly than the growth of the vegetation, and the decolorized geiatin is, as is shown by microscopical examination and inoculation, free trom bacteria. Numerous bacteria were found to be incapable of reducing either of the dyes, and the author believes from this that he has hit upon a way of ascertaining certain chemical relations between bacteria and nutrient media. HEYDENREICH, L.—Sterilisation mittels des Dampfkochtopf (Papin’scher Topf) fiir bacteriologische Zwecke. (Sterilization by the steam digester (Papin’s digester) for bacteriological purposes.) (‘The author finds that a nutrient fluid placed close to the source of heat, in the water, quickly acquires the surrounding temperature of the superheated steam, if only the walls of the glass vessels be not too thick, the air as far as possible removed, and the quantity of the nutrient fluid not too great. And also that as no bacteria or fungi can withstand steam at a temperature of 120° for 5-10 minutes, it may therefore be considered that 15-20 cc. of fluid is safely sterilized if the thermometer keeps at 120° for 5-10 minutes, and if the air has been previously carefully removed (the manometer marking two atmospheres.) | Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., LV. (1887) pp. 1-24 ( figs.). KELLIcoTT, D. S.—Notice of some Fresh-water Infusoria, with remarks on collecting and preserving these delicate animals. Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 225-33 ( figs.). Nasmyvu, T. G.—Methods for cultivation of micro-organisms from water. Sanit. Record, 1887-8, pp. 16-9. RouHRBECK, H.—UVeber storende Einfitisse auf das Constanthalten der Temperatur bei Vegetationsapparaten und iiber einen neuen Thermostaten. (On disturbing in- fluences on the constancy of the temperature in culture-apparatus, and on a new thermostat.) Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., I. (1887) pp. 262-5, 286-90 (8 figs.). ViGNAL, W.—Sur un moyen d’isolation et de culture des microbes anaérobies. (Ona method of isolation and culture for anaerobic microbes.) Ann. Instit. Pasteur, 1887, pp. 358-9. WiLFARTH, H.—Ueber eine Modification der bacteriologischen Plattenculturen. (On a modification of the bacteriological plate-cultures.) Deutsche Med. Wochenschr., 1887, pp. 618-9. ZASLEIN, T.—Ueber den praktischen Nutzen der Koch’schen Plattenculturen in der Choleraepidemie des Jahres 1886 in Genua. (On the practical use of Koch’s plate- cultures in the Genoa cholera epidemic of 1886.) Deutsche Medicinische Ztg., 1887, pp. 389-91. (2) Preparing Objects. Methods for killing Invertebrata.*—For the preservation of animals, Prof. F. E. Schultze points out, it is desirable that they should seem as lifelike as is possible, or that no changes should occur to prevent them from being useful for fine microscopical work. Care must be taken to fix the animal in the extended condition, and to prevent the tendency to contrac- * Tageblatt 59 Versamml. Deutscher Naturf. u. Acrzte, 1886, pp. 411-4. Cf. Biol. Centralbl., vi. (1887) pp. 760-4, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 835 tion. To effect this two methods are in vogue; the one acts with rapidity sufficient to prevent contraction, the other kills slowly by means of some paralysing medium. Absolute alcohol, osmic acid, sublimate solution, chromic acid, and other mineral acids are agents of the rapid process. Paralysis is produced by slow cooling, or gradual warming, or even by immersion in boiling water; but good service is rendered by alcohol chloroform in watery solution or vapour, sulphuric ether, prussic acid, carbonic acid, atropin, nicotin, strychnin, chloral hydrate, cocain. As suitable reagents for some of the divisions of the Invertebrata, the follow- ing are recommended :— Rhizopoda.—For rapid fixation, osmic acid, and after-treatment with picrocarmin, or absolute alcohol, sublimate, and chromic acid. Chinin in weak solution produces palsy of the protoplasm. |}; Infusoria.—For paralysing ciliary action, chloroform, soda or seltzcr water. For killing quickly, osmic acid, sublimate, absolute alcohol, or chloral hydrate. Keeping animals alive but paralysed, salt solution. Regulated compression under cover-glass for purposes of observation effected by melting away wax supports with heated needles. Spongia and Celenterata.—For sponges no reliable method is known. For Hydromedusa, Scyphomedusa, and Ctenophora, the rapid action of osmic acid. At Naples, polyps are killed rapidly with success by a boiling mixture of equal parts of sublimate and acetic acid. With Siphonophora, paralysing with chloral hydrate is excellent. For Pennatulida with large polyps the gradual addition of fresh water. For histological work, Anthozoa may be paralysed with chloral, but this, like cocain, sometimes gives rise to contraction and deformity. For museum specimens, Anthozoa should be killed suddenly as with glacial acetic acid. Echinodermata.—Casting of the arms may be avoided by imbedding star-fish in sand. The colour of star-fishes may be retained by immersing them for about 6 hours in Wickersheimer’s solution. Worms.—Some alcohol poured on the surface of the water in which the worms are, or chloroform water, acts as a paralysing agent. Warm solution of corrosive sublimate or picro-sulphuric acid. Nemertines remain extended in chloral hydrate, yet much depends on the degree of concentra- tion of the paralysing fluid. Sudden heating over the flame of a spirit- lamp kills Trematoda. For Polycheta, alcohol. It is very difficult to obtain Rotifera in the extended condition. Carbonic acid water, chloral hydrate, cocain, followed by hardening in osmic acid or cocain solution cooled in ice, all recommended. On Bryozoa the last named medium has the same effect; chloral is not always satisfactory for the marine forms. Mollusca.—Hot water for fixation. For slugs, tobacco smoke or con- centrated sublimate may be used. Chromic acid should be altogether avoided as it renders them too brittle. Tunicata.—Large animals are killed by passing a glass tube into the two openings and then injecting glacial acetic acid, alcohol, or Kleinen- berg’s fluid. Small species may be killed by pouring some alcohol or Kleinenberg’s fluid and spirit on the top of the water. Influence of reagents on the Fertilization and Segmentation of the Animal Ovum.*—Drs. O. and R. Hertwig who have previously demon- strated that the ova of the sea-urchin became weakened by immersion in sea water, and therefore became more susceptible to hybridization or poly- spermia, i.e. to the penetration of several spermatozoa, now discuss the * Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 120-4 (7 pls.). 836 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO eficct of various chemical reagents of higher temperature, and of mechanical injury on the ova of Strongylocentrotus lividus, and also the effect of external agents on the sperma. : (1) Ova before fertilization. (a) Nicotin. A mixture of one drop of concentrated nicotin solution with 100 grms. sea water acting for 3-5 minutes, or with 1000 grms. sea water acting for 10-15 minutes. By stronger solutions or by longer immersion the degree of over-fertilization can be increased. By immersion for one hour in a solution of 1:100 the ova were not killed. (b) Morphia hydrochlorate solutions of 0°1-0°2 per cent. must act for one hour. Solutions of 0:4-0°6 per cent. produced after 1/2-1/4 hour a few cases of polyspermia. (c) Strychnine. Solutions of 0-005 per cent. produced a notable influence in 10 minutes, a remarkable © one in 20 minutes. Solutions of 0-1 per cent. in 5 minutes effected strong olyspermia; in solutions of 0:25 the ova died in 25-60 minutes. (d) Chloral hydrate. A 0-2 per cent. solution produced polyspermia in 43 hours, while a 0°5 per cent. solution did so in 5 minutes, but after 4 hours the ova did not seem susceptible of fertilization. (e) Chloroform (the eggs placed in watch-glasses filled with sea water were exposed to the vapour of chloroform under bell-jars). The ova died in 15-20 minutes, a shorter time produced polyspermia. Chloroform water (chloroform shaken up with sea-water) prevented fertilization, the membrane immediately separating from the ovum. (/f) Cocain. Solutions of 0-025 and 0-05 per cent. produced polyspermia in 5 minutes. A longer action weakened the ova too much. (gy) Chinium sulfuricum. A solution of 0-005 per cent. produced perfect polyspermia in 75 minutes; in a shorter time the action was correspondingly less. A solution of 0°05 per cent. produced in 10 minutes and still more so in 15 minutes, very considerable polyspermia. (2) Sperma before fertilization. (a) Nicotin. In solutions ten times as strong as used for ova the spermatozoa were mobile and quite fertile after two hours. (6) Chloral hydrate. In 0-5 per cent. solution motion ceased in 5 minutes, but returned on addition of fresh sea water even after 35 minutes’ action of the solution, and were fertile. (c) Chinin. GROBBEN, oe eee Example of Tenia saginata =... ~ Boumic, L.—Sensory Organs of Peer beware er 0s ek ee ae re z Planeria ERErin gee ees. 60s eek ek Saas? Tew abr we Scumipt, F.—Grafilla Braunt 60 ae te ete tes — Weitner, W.—Dendrocelum punctatuma +. os we ws ip 3. Incerteo Sedis, Braun, M.—Dicyemidz .. ia Remuarp, W.—Anatomy and "Systematic Position of Eehinoderes ReriaKnorr, W.—Dinophilus gyrociliatus .. .. ~ Tren, R.—Bipalium kewense Es AND ge cbs WEN a PP ree TN oS Hoop, J.—New Rotifer .. * ’ x eee W. FR —Balanoglossus Larva from the Bahamas :. Echinodermata, Canc ee J. W.—Development of eat te Plates of Amphiura. - KOLEscn, : K, —Hocidaris oe oo oe oe o- os > . Beit, F. Jerrrry—New Holothurians . PEN Cer ey ae ea er yi _ Herovarpd, E,—Colochirus Lacazti ee PAGE 944 945 945 945 946 947 947 948 948 949 949 950 « 4) Coelenterata. Nvsspaum, M.—Regeneration of Polypes .. « ; os - Wusoy, H. V.—Structure of Cumoctantha octonaria in 7 adult and larval ‘tages ae ISHIKAWA, 0.—Origin of Male Generative Cells of Hudendrium racemosum .. es A.—Polyparium and Tubularia = oe, Exters, E.—Polyparium ambulans «1 ne ne te te Cuun, C.—Morphology of Siphonophora Haacke, W.—New Scyphomeduse nas Fow ier, G: H.—Anatomy of the Madreporaria ee oe ee, on a8) on ee ae os os oe.” ee Bourne, G. C.—Anatomy of Mussa and- Euphyllia, and ‘the “Morphalagy of the aaah tgs. Skeleton ov ee oe en oe a ge ete wets Porifera. ia ees DENDY, K Citi tn pentacrinus ee me os oe ae os oe ee ; ‘oe as wee Se re Protozoa. Mavpas, E Theory of Sexuality oe se oe oe et- of ee 4 ae KELLicort, D. S—New Infusoria Bi Cd ea sate Strokes, A, C.—New Fresh-water Infusoria.. es 5. New Hypotrichous Infusoria from daseatains Fresh ‘Waters Danvsz, J.—Development of fresh-water. Peridinez: Biocumann, F.—Reproduction of ee: SES ScHLUMBERGER, C.—FPlanispirina .. -. Giarp, A.—New Parasitic Rhizopod .. .. 1. Lorrr, A. VAN DER—Amebz of Variola vera “Pane oe PrRERASLAVTZEvA, B.—Protozoa of the Black Sea DanitEwsky, B.—Parasites in the Blood Preirrer, L oe aS oe ae ae ee oe oe ae ee oe oe BOTANY. L.— New Parasite of the Podk-process be belonging to the Sporotoa wes se » - 967. - 967 968 “968 = D6 4 970 . 971 971 972 A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology = of the Phanerogamia. a, Anatomy. (1) Cell-structure and Exphaalans Scnwarz, F.—Morphological and Chemical Composition of Protoplasm « ae Hasertanpt, G.—Position of the Nucleus in Mature Cells .. Krasser, F.—Albumen in the Cell-wall . Lirrzmann, E.—Permeability to air of Cell-walls. O° -— 2S pega Ces oe oe ScHWENDENER, S.— Swelling and Double Refraction of Cell-walls oe 2s eee Motiscu, H. —Silicified Cells in Calathea .. (2) Other Cell-contents. CHMIELEWSEY, V.- — Structure of Chlorophyll-grains .. bees Peynov, J—Hourly Variations in the Action of Chlorephal =e Meves, A. —Starch-grains coloured red by Iodine, 36 s CuMiELEWsKY, V.—Proteinaceous bodies in Epa po s ° 6 se 6 .' ee Arnaup, A.—Carrotene in Leaves... .. oo ERS Kay oe ae eens TscuincH, A.—Calcium oxalate in Aleurone-grains pais Fae Smee 8 eal cama yarnana® Mouiscu, H.— Nitrates and Nitrites in Plants Sei wart a gee fee en STAuL, E. —Biological Import of Raphides .s + «2 se ee) ne on ewe (8). Secretions. Ss. Hecnen, E., & F. ScunacpENHAUFFEN—Sccretion of Araucaria 4. .- .. (4) Structure of Tissues. Argscnouc, F. W. O.—Aquiferous Tissue in the Leaves of Sansevieria .. eo Pmorra, J. R, & L. Mancatt11—Laticiferous Vessels and Assimilating Sten : FiscHER, A— Sieve-tubes a Bateson, A., & F. Darwin—Bifect of Stimulation on “Turgeseent Vegetable Tissues : Lestois, A. — Formation of Tyloses in the interior of Secretory Canals .. TrecHEM, P. vAn—Super-endodermal Network in the Root of Rosacew .. Saupe, A.—Anatomical structure of the wood of Leguminosz .. sc eke (8S) mR (5) Structure of Organs. PAGE ~~ Bercoren, 8.—Formation of Roots in Austral Coniferz .. +» ve s+ +e ve 986 Wicanv, A.—Swellings on the Roots of Papilionaces.. ++ ++ ++ se os 987 Tscutrc, A.—Root-tubers of Legwminose ..° s. -+. ss- te ne we we we 987 Sv. Gueoreurerr—Structure of Chenopodiace® .. ss vs +6 ee ve oe oe 987 ~ Catimi, A.— Biaxial Shoots of Carex .. oo as OST _ Saston, Lectero pu—Development of the Suckers of Thesium humifusum ger, 6s, OOM. - Eyeenmann; T. W.—Colour of Coloured Léaves.. 2. +» +» oe se es oe 988 Soraver, P.—Yellow Spots on Leaves .. .. oe) on te te ne ee oe 989 Capura, R.—Bud-seales . oe ee oe ee ee oe ee ee oe o* oe oe 989 Hvxtey, e He Gentiaka oe . ee se oe os Pad oe oe ee oe 989 Kronrerp, M .—Inflorescence of Typhi. ig, Meet ee a eRe CT ea Te TO 2 Dennert, E.—Azis of the Inflorescence fos “se eae Oe Besser, F.—Comparative Anatomy of Plower- on Frut-salta ©... 11 8 990 Essrr, P.—Blossom on Old Wood ..> os ee oe ou oe eee te 990 : MEEHAN, T.—Stipules and Petals oe oe ee oe oe ee oe ee oad oe oe 991 - Zari, C—Amyloid Corpuscles in Pollen-grains .. .. ba cee oe _ Lossocs, Joun—Forms of Seedlings and the causes to which they are due... 991 B. Physiology, (1) Reproduction and Germination. Outver, F. W.—Pollination of Pleurothallis ornatus ., 2. +e oe we ee we 992 (2) Nutrition and Growth. Parson, N.— Conditions of Assimilation... Sash een tts et Boe Scuoitz, M.—Influence of Stretching on the growth of Plants oA SEL wees, be ae Pee Anescuous, F. W. C.—Reproduction of parts of Plants .. .. ss s+ « «« 994 : -(4) Chemical Changes (including Fermentation). Emaeriine, A.—Formation of Albwmen in Plants .. +s ss 4s oe ee ow ODE 5 ee N. W.—Theory of Fermentation Bb Stet Seat na oa SO Seep ee teed GOO Dexrino, F.— Alcoholic Fo ermentation .. RE PETE ae RS Pay etn el) Lintner, C. J.—Chemical nature of Diastase CG OT Rw RET OT RE RE ERO ES y. General. ‘Wut, N. adaption of Plants to rain and dew +s +e us ee ow we OSS : Kraus, C. — Bleeding . . oe oe ee oe oe oe ee oe oe 996 Sacus’s (J. vox) — Vegetable Physiology PTR oa Batre en eet ET ce) Re BLS, B. CRYPTOGAMIA. KRonretD, M.—Symbiosis of a Bacteriumand Alga .. s+ +» os os o» »» 996 Cryptogamia Vascularia. Bower, F. 0.—Apospory.. 996 Garprner, W., & Toxvraro Lro—Structure of Mucitage-ods 4 Blecknum osnk- dentale and Osmunda PAGOIES oes ed Re SEA OL ee SRR be ae ONE Vince, A.—Leaves of Fern +. so ss ev oe oe ne oe oe ewe we 998 Muscines. : Partrear—Fructification of Grimmia Hartmanni 1. +s es ewe ewe 998 Carport, J,—Sphagnacexz of North America .. 14 se an ee ae eee 998 Alges. Aaanrpu, J. G.—Siphonez _., £9) EOS Nott, F.—Growth of the Cell-wall and other phenomena in the ‘Siphonew Piers ee Lacernem, G.—Fresh-water Chetomorphas die Wh) See ee ae Bb 5 aie BN Oe ~ Courter, 8.—Sensitiveness of Bnicvayee 1B SROETE 6 bay 0 eas he hee eee, Oe _ Reson, P. F.— Gynandrous Vaucheria ge Leet eel os se 88 ee LOUD Norpstept, O.—Fresh-water Algz of New Poaland. ie Ee SOO Innor, O. E.—Pores in Diatom-valves .. 1. +1 0s vee eee ee we 1000 :% Lichenes. ~~ Morn, F.—Apotheeia of Lachnea theleboloides .. 1 ++ 4s ae oe ae we: 1000 ~ Yorr, W.—Double Lichen pe Peete es ns Ste So LOOL BACHMANN, E.—WMicrochemical reactions of Tichons Soo he est Sas oe ee AOOL ag 4, Emodin in Nephroma lusitanica _.. ., Vidiet LOOk Wuuury, H.— Introduction to the Study of Lichens .. .«. Sy ieee POOE Ce - Fungi. REINscH, P, F,—Aetion o of Pyrofuscin on Fumgs.. ss ee of OOKke ee -- eo > ee es oo oe oo oe bie ae. Rosny, F.—New Section of Chytridium aa Sime io bon eae ato cpa een gee Biscun, M.— —Cladochytrium eo ‘ee oe we jee oo ee oe ae, “ae ee a Lenmann, F—Lophiostoma .. ss os +e ee be ee ae ee F'IscHEr, E.—Phalloidet ve eo ee ee we rx oo! eo! oe “ee : eo ee ; Srynes, J, De—Peziza oe se we, Owe Shee hee ewe ee Werrstrr, R. v.—Helotium Wallkommé bene ae ae ee ee ee oe Boupier— Ptychogaster Rett fee eel ne ae we ee ne ae PLOWRIGHT, C. B Heer scraun Ueodinen: sib, eel teas wewet gs ates pate ae aca Soums-LAUBACH, Grar zu—Ustilago Treubtt «. aes ae eee Montez, R.— Fungus parasitic in Lecanium hesperidum 4. 1. <0 se ve BERLESE, A. N.—Fungi parasitic on the Mulberry 02 se oe ae a ue Harrie, BR.—Fungi parasitic on the Savin, Larch, and, Aspen .. ateke iar re Masser, G.—Colocasia Disease — :% Bo a Tan Pais Oca hte pm: Pala a8 Scrisner, L., & P. Viara—New Disease in Vines oie rere it ‘Warp, H. Mansaatt—Tubereular Swellings on the Roots of Vaca 2 Faba.. Scurarer, J.—Cohn's Cryptogamic Flora of Silesia (Fumgt) .. .. +. e. RABENHORST’S 0; ‘yptogamee Flora of Conan (Fu ungty ee ae ae ae es Protophyta. Rene Fiveccr, M, 5G Migresorintsie: A AP ekrs ciate eae SCHNETZLER, J. B.—Rose-tinted Growth on Fresh Water aa om eck wach: be am Winocrapsky, ‘S.—Sulphur-bacteria .. ae ee ne on) on Ue ae Prove, O.—Micrococcus ochroleucus —«. Se WENN? stn Te nce Ss “CELUI, A., & EF. Marino- -Z0co—Nitrification oe ESRC eet yneed _ ALVAREZ, B—New (Indigogenous) Microbe... - ee J. & Oo. B. Tanve—Ceriain pee of Phinplorescnt 3 Bacteria | ‘MICROSCOPY. Ge Instruments, Accessories, &e. (a) Stands. Scuuuze’s (E.) Aquarium Microscope (Fig. 285)... . ee hai Gites’s (G. M.) Army Medical Microscope (Figs. 236 and an) Vent eetehitreat Netson’s (EH. M.) Portable Microscope (Figs. 238 and laos ae ee eee WoopHeEAv’s Microscope with large Stage .. 3 Sevenka’s (E.) Electric Projection-Lamp for Mier oscoptc Purposes Gig ‘240) Lracu’s (W.) Lantern Microscope Perales 0 eae LP eet emt ans” Geeks wiser Newton's Electric Polarizing Projection-Microseope ” =. cee eh ee ae ee, LEBREE’S Cee holes (Hig, 241) co ue te nee ee te te ) Eye-pieces: and Objectives. a odosphaira minor Howe, and itiorsaphatra Fibber >. PAGE 1001 1002 , 1002 ~ 1002. “43 1008. nan 2003 « 1003: - 1003 » 1003, *1004 ~1004 1004... - 1004 “1005 “1005: - -.. 1005 ‘1005 1005 *1006;, _ 1007 1007 1007 - 1008 — 1008 1009 1009 1010; 1012 1013 1015 1015230 1019 - 1021 A021 Gace, S. H. —Thickness of cover-glass for which unadjustable objectives are corrected 1022 | (2) Tluriinating and other Apparatus. pre ‘Borprn’s (W. ©.) Electrical Ph kate ae Apparat Fig. 242), ve 5h ae Macer’s (R.) Insect-holder (Fig, 243) -s 1. + ee ne ae one ke (4) Photomicrography. , Pres Oe "Newson anp Curtins’ Photomicrographic Camera (Fig. BAS) ono a oe Se His, W.—Photographing Series of Sections (Fig. 245) sy bes Et1is’s (JoHn) Focusing Arrangement for Photomicrography Fig. 2)" eee - Neuson’s (EH. M.) Photomicrographie Focusing-screen 4. se ssw nw (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. oo GAceg, 8. H.—Microscopical Tube-length, its length in millimetres, ae the ports included in tt by the vartous opticians of the world (Wig. 247) 6 wn ae Newson, E. M.—Measurement of Power 5 said Hirst, G. D.; & BE. M. ee of Tntensifying ‘the ‘Ratoing Power fe Microscope Objectives... ., Ah a Cantol villi a ee 1024 ° 1025 . 1027 + 1028 1028 1029 Ay 1032. ~ S ~ Perayyr’s (J. v.) Mikrolektron, for hardening, staining, and imbedding (Figs. 250- 252 ait Paes |” Dy re a Sa oe (6) Miscellaneous. PAGE Rogers, WwW. A—* ie Microscope as a ec in the establishment of a constant of nature” ERE ome SA dale Mek oo Raine Be ga eNO Fasoipt's (C.) Ruling ore satay tea 112 Ts NAGELI AND on wiew siren ‘The "Microscope in Theory and Practics’., .. .. 1039 - DEATH of Mr. A be Bolton oe oe 7 of ef ee ee ve se *e ee “* oe 1040 8. Technique. (1), Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. OLTMANNS, F.— Cultivation of Chetomium .. .. wie genet ay aa Re Scuorrerius, M.—Some Novelties in Bacteriological Apparatus y" doi 3 ROS RozsaunGyi, A, v.—Oultivation of Bacteria on Coloured Nutrient Media... 1044 (2) Preparing Objects. ve Cucoaro G.—Preparing Supra-esophageal Ganglia of rile alte cole e ae: LOD NoOrwer, C.—Freatment of Acari -.. Rg avvea es Ma Jiaehiieed RUSO Sross— Preparation of Microscopical Parasites SCARE? lees UIE Oa pa Fae 8 JourDAN, Ei.— Investigation of Histology of Eunice 2. s+ se se ae ee ne 1047 Last, J. H.—Preparing Epithelia of Actiniwa «. ee ee ae ee oe ww oe 1047 Guinarp—Breaking up Diatomaceous Rocks 4. ss ew ae we ets, ee 1047 (3) Cutting, including Imbedding. “BLACKBURN, J. W.—Myrtle Wax Imbedding Process ache t wae Soe eh heel eee USS Der Groor’s (J..G.) Automatic Microtome (Fig. 248) .. ++ ae) oe ae ve we 1049 Hayes’s (R. A.) Ether Freezing Microtome (Fig. 249) 2. 4s eee ew 1051 Paonermt’s (E.) Automatic Microtome .. «, ss ne oe ae ye we ee wy 1082 (4) Staining and Injecting, ) oe ee 1053 GAULE, Axton L—Method of Staining and Fixing the Blements es Blood .. .. 1054 ZWAARDEMAKER, H.—Mitosis Staining .. aitee wae «» 9» 1056 CampBeLL, D . H.—Oolouring the Nuclei of Living Celle “e WNC reba Dees cee SL DIE Absorption of Anilin Colours a Living Cella... ‘ day eur LOOT Ginrner, C. — Staining Pathogenic Bacteria with Anilin Dyes bist dor aa peep ed OOS Srrernperc, G. M.—Staining the Bacillus of { GaN OTE sg oe ge. Sad eiiewy ve 1008 Gaispacn,. 8.—Anilin Stains ..- .. ge a ae AlAs Se OE a ea Sac LOS Unna, P. G.—Rosanilin and Pararosanilin .. : wwe ee LOS9 Panetu, J.—Fxtract of Logwood as a substitute for pure Hematoxylin A 1060 _ Unna, P. G.— Reduction of Chromic Solutions in Animal. Tissues athe by Re- Otel ACCONs MEAT ED, Oe se oe as cele ot SBC Sy yaa wh ls «. 1060 _ (6) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Weicert, C.—Mounting Sections without Cover-glassea .. 4. se oe we ow 1061 JAMES) SEY Gane Danica at 8 Aa ee RG. Suc, wd ee owes) ee ewes oe HOOKS MartTINnorti, @.—Xylol-Dammar we LOGE (6) Miscellaneous. James, F. L.—Crystallization by Cold... soo haar eee LOGS Hauuisurton, W. D.—Method of obtaining Methaemoglobin Crystals ey ee ber) apne Oas Frarnwey’s ‘ Elementary Practical Histology’ «2. ee ee ee ew tee 1068 = Proomepines or TH Socmty .. 2 on wee wea vs 1067 PREF AOE. Tas Journal has now completed the tenth year of its publication, since it was launched on the extended basis which was inaugurated after a first year, when it formed a volume of 402 pages only, = 9 = Throughout this period I have had no reason to complain of any want of appreciation, but on the contrary have to acknowledge a veritable load of congratulations of a very demonstrative character, not only from _ microscopists but from biologists generally who have recognized the value of a publication—the only one in the English language—which enables its readers to make themselves acquainted without delay with the. contents of the enormously scattered literature of Biology and Microscopy throughout the world. It is the fact of this consensus of opinion that leads me to add this Preface to the present volume, as the approbation that has been showered on the J ournal has not = reached those nee are most worthy of it. In the case of a battle, it is pee cea that it should pass as the victory of the particular general in command, however much it may have been due to the skilful arrangements of the commanders of divisions: or to the general valour of the rank and file, but we are not trammelled by any such rules in the case of this Journal, and it is proper therefore to call attention to the extent to which its success ‘Is due to my Co-editors, — Re In the departments of Botany and Rilons Mr. AL Ww. Bennett and Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell have now for ten years analysed the various papers which have been recorded in thé Summary of Current Researches. No one who has. not actually undertaken it can have any idea of the extent: of the labour which this involves. My own preliminary work in advance of the actual analyses has required a certain amount of reso- lution to face week after week, but this labour has been very small in comparison with that undertaken by Mr. Bennett and Prof. Bell, who have had to read through the whole of the papers and then to produce those analyses which have appeared in number after number. Moreover, — the length of the notes is practically in inverse proportion to the difficulty of writing them. It is easy to produce an extended abstract ; PREFACE, - the difficulty is to condense the leading ideas of the author into a brief compass, so that any one who desires to know its scope, and to determine whether it is desirable to refer to the original paper, can have before him the necessary guidance. All this has been done by Mr. Bennett and Prof. Bell, with an amount of skill and with a degree of regularity which at the outset I could not have believed possible. What is still more remarkable, is the punctuality which has been observed throughout. In no single instance has the MS. been received after the appointed time; in most cases it has been in advance of time. A striking testimony to what has thus been accomplished is to be found in the - yiew of an eminent biologist, who, in the earlier days of the Journal expressed the opinion that the Summary must necessarily in a short time’ “run thin”: ‘the same biologist last year spontaneously declared that “the Journal got better and better.” I claim therefore for Mr. Bennett and Prof. Bell that botanists and zoologists owe them a large debt of gratitude for the good work they have done with so much - gelf-sacrificing perseverance. The Microscopical division of the J ournal is in like manner indebted _to Mr. J. Mayall, jun., for a large amount of assistance which for the same length of time he has rendered in this department, assistance of such a character that without it it would have been impossible to produce the varied assortment of matter which has kept microscopists so fully, and I may say so completely, informed as to all that is novel, interesting, or curious in the various sections of the subject. I have left unnoticed the services of Mr. J. Arthur Thomson, who has recently undertaken, with no little success, a part of the Zoology, and of Dr. Hebb, who has practically had complete charge of the Technique section, with what result the pages of the last two volumes of the Journal abundantly show. ‘This omission arises from the fact that I have been _ dealing not only with the quality of the services rendered by the - three senior Co-editors, but also with the remarkable length of time oyer which those services have extended, and in which respect they at present stand alone. It is to be hoped that the increased circulation of the Journal outside the Society may allow of some adequate return in a substantial form being made to the Co-editors, and pending the arrival of the day when that will be possible, I tender to them not merely my own thanks but those of the Fellows of the Society at large, and I hope and believe those of a still wider circle of biologists and microscopists also. Frank Crisp. — (10) GREATLY REDUCED PRICES - OBJECT- “GLASSES. MANUFACTURED BY R. & J. BECK, 638. oie LONDON, EC. PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT.GLASSES. [Angle Linear anatase with ro-inch No. Focal length. aper- Price. body ie id eye De : $ ture. SS a about No. 1,| No. 2.| No, 8.|No. 4,| No. 5. re} £ 3s in d. ae 100 3 siehes eouee 9 : ie O IO 16 30 40 50 101 inches =... e. 7 0 i 102 | 3inches .. -.| 13 | 210 0 } U5) 2A et od eat eo 108 | 2inches ..... 10- 10 ; : 104 | Qinches .. ..| 17 | 210 0 } Ae BEL OEY = BOK TIS 105 | 14 um Fase eget e ke 3 ee 2 30 48 go |. 120 150 = i eo ee os < = : = 1S . 107 Rasch Oe oe 32 | 210 oO} SPAN SS a coed eee 108 2 Inch’ 55 S08 Sen \ 4b + A ReLOe O02) 160") ~~ 160") 3004 400-4— ago 109 | 4,inch,. .. .. | 65. 4 0O.QO| 125 | 200 | 375 | 500 625. 110 | 4 imch.. se 2. | 95 5 O O}| 150] 240] 450} Goo}. 750 111 f° INCH 6.0) oe ee} 7S 810 0] 200} 320} 600 | 800] roca 412 | Saneh sch eines] 120 410.0 | 250] 400) 750 | Io0o0 | 1250 113 A INOW 2 sik weno 130 5 O QO | “400 | 640 |*1250 | 1600} . 2000 114 pe imm. awed LEO 5 65 QO} 500] 800} 1500 | 2000 | 2500 115 | #. imm. Wegeen PE) Fes 5 (0) 8 O O| 750 | 1200 | 2250 | 3000 |. 3750 116 | 3, imm. eee ea LOO 10. 0 O | 1000 | 1600 | 3000 | 4000] 5000 117 | Binch.. .. «. | 160-| 20 OQ O | 2000 | 3200°| 6000 | 8000 | to,0c0 - ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, APPLICABLE T0 ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE UNIVERSAL Sornw. Angle} MAGNIFYING-POWER, Ae OF with 6-inch body and Focal length. aper- Price. eye-pieces. ure, SS about No. 1.| No. 2.| No. 3. 5 £8. a. 1e 3 inches se Get d= OOO 12 15 27. 2 inches eo 3 1.0 0 18-1 23 41 Waneh 80° eons 18 1 56.0 46 61- | 106 PANCh 25 a ae 38 15 0 gO | 116. |.205 RANCH: fs se4 eh eee OO 1 5-0.) 170° | 220° |} 415° nC Soi a. eas LO 2 56 O | 250 |} 330 | 630 A neh: 60 sig oie ps DLO 3:10 O | 350 | 4t0 | 800 Cen ee j; imm, see aw at LOO. 6 0 O |} 654 | 844 |1500 | - Revised Catalogue sent on application to R. & J. BECK, 6S. Cornhill. . N.R.MICR.SOC.1887.P1. XIV. R JOU West Newman &Co Jith. PH.G.del admnat eS ie New Rotifera. JOURN.R.MICR.SOC1887 Pl. XV. PH G.deladnat. Wost Newman & Co.lith. New Rotifera. JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. DECEMBER 1887. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. XIL.— Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera. By P. H. Gossz, F.B.S., Hon. F.R.M.S., &e. (Read 12th October, 1887.) Puates XIV. anp XV. Recent investigations having still further augmented the list of our native Rotifera, I am enabled to present to the Society diagnostic descriptions and delineations of twenty-four new species. 1. Philodina microps. Body very slender, closely resembling Rotifer vulgaris, both in form and manners, but with eyes distinctly pectoral, small, round, of very pale red hue. Column thick, rounded, with minute hooked proboscis at front: spurs rather small, separated by a horizontal edge: corona in action not wider than head. Length 1/80 in. Marine. This can scarcely be confounded with any recorded Philodina. For some time I felt sure it was Rotifer vulgaris, and marvelled that I could EXPLANATION OF PLATES XIV. anp XV. Fig. 1.—Philodina microps. a, dorsal; 6, lateral; c, corona expanded ; d, retracted; e, antenna. Fig. 2.—Notommata Theodora. a, dorsal; }, lateral; c, foot retracted. » a linaz, a, dorsal; 0, lateral; c, brain and eye, 5, 4.—Proales coryneger. a, dorsal; }, lateral. » 0.—Furcularia lactistes. a, dorsal; 6, lateral. » b— “¢ molaris. a, dorsal; 6, lateral. tad Fee) e spherica. a, dorsal; 6, lateral. » &— as sterea. a, dorsal; 6, lateral. » 9 bs Eva. a, dorsal; }, lateral; c, mastax, from the right. 5, 10.—Diglena aquila, a, dorsal ;*b, lateral; c, beak, dorsal; d, lateral. » ll— ,, . Rosa. a, lateral; 6, dorsal. 5, 12.—Distemma platyceps. a, dorsal; 0}, lateral. », 13.—Wastigocerca Jernis. a, lateral; 6, foot-bulb enlarged. 5, 14.—Diaschiza fretalis. a, dorsal; 6, trophi dorsal; c, 2b. lateral. Pg ee acronota. Lorica, lateral. » 16.—Distyla lipara, dorsal. » 17.—Metopidia pygmxa. a, dorsal; 5, lateral; c, transverse section. 3, 18.—Dispinthera capsa. a, dorsal; 6, lateral. » 19.—Wonura Bartonia. a, lateral: 6, ventral. » 20.— ,, loncheres. a, lateral; 6, posterior sinus. » 21.—Wytilia pecilops. a, dorsal; 6, lateral; c, transverse section. » 22— ,, producta. a, dorsal; }, lateral. » 23.—Anurea schista. a, dorsal; b, lateral. 24.—WNotholca labis. a, dorsal; 6, lateral. 1887, 34 862 Transactions of the Society. not see the eyes in the column. But when I looked tothe pectus, they were plain enough, though very pale. I know no other species, whether of Rotifer or Philodina, with so very small a corona in rotation. The whole trunk is fluted. The viscera are tinged with pale smoke-brown, deepest in the abdominal canal. In some examples the hue is rather of a chestnut-brown. I have examined perhaps half-a-dozen specimens, inhabiting the conferva of marine rock-pools in the Firth of Tay. The species is very shy of rotating, thus differing from other Philodinw, which are characteristically free. At the moment of extruding the column, its broad extremity opens a central orifice (d), which is strongly ciliated around its margin, while a row of cilia, apparently few and distant, is seen fringing the outer edge. The antenna (e) consists of (two ?) telescopic joints, its extremity dilated, carrying four divergent sete. (Fig. 1, plate XIV.) 2. Notommata Theodora. Near to N. aurita, naias, and potamis ; from all which it differs in that the eye is small, and quite frontal, while the slender straight foot is protrusile to an immense length, or wholly retractile. Length, when fully extended, about 1/60 in. Lacustrine. A noble form, of great elegance, and of glassy clearness; colourless, save for a tinge of pale-orange in the tissues of the head (frequent in the kindred species), and the occasional hue of the contents of the stomach. The body has the massive aspect of the species named, but the position of the eye is notable, close to the frontal edge of an ample brain. The form and extreme versatility of the foot, too, are quite peculiar. Some- times the body is truncate behind, and only the tips of the tiny toes are seen protruding from the hyaline cavity (c); when, with lightning suddenness, the foot, like a slender rod of glass, is shot out to a length equalling the whole trunk; and so carried, while the animal darts along with headlong swiftness. The only parallel to this, that occurs to me, is the case of Rotifer macrurus. The toes are often turned suddenly, to the right or left, at a joint just above them, the long foot else preserving its perfect straightness. When smoothly swimming, the front often appears as if awricles were on the point of developing, but I have not seen them extruded. In retractation the front often becomes pursed-in at the middle. (Fig. 2.) 3. Notommatalimax. Body vermiform, integument soft ; alimentary canal ample, thrown into apparent annulation by alternate constrictions and swellings: brain having a globose terminal bulb partly filled with opaque chalk-masses, and partly with a large eye: foot-bulb contained within the body; toes long, slender, acute, decurved. Length 1/173 in. Lacustrine. The slug-like softness of the skin gives this species some resem- blance to Diglena permollis ; but it is less versatile in outline. The brain recalls N. awrita, the ample sac having a slender tube running through it occupied with opaque specks, which terminates in an ovate expansion. This is, in part, opaque with chalk deposits, and its rounded extremity is filled by a large crimson eye (c). ‘There is a likeness to NV. cyrtopus in the toes; but the general facies is very diverse. Swimming it will suddenly augment its speed by pushing out for an Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera. By P. H. Gosse. 863 instant a pair of auricles. ‘There is a distinct tuberculous tail. The whole animal is tinged with pale-yellow. I have seen two examples in Utricularia from a lough near Carrick-on-Shannon. (Fig. 3.) 4, Proales coryneger. Body nearly cylindrical, rounded in front and rear: foot stout, apparently one-jointed ; toes two, furcate, rod-shaped, thick at base, tapering to an obtuse point, very slightly recurved, half as long as body-and-head. Length 1/130 in. Lacustrine. This obscure form I cannot, on the evidence of a single specimen, identify with any species known to me; though I own it presents little distinctive character. Its long, thick, club-shaped toes form its most obvious distinction: these are usually carried wide apart. The figure suggests Diaschiza ; but I could not detect any dorsal fissure, and the soft skin seems destitute of a lorica. There is a minute red eye in the occiput. In swimming it is rapid, smoothly gliding ; darting to and fro, without any appreciable aim. It, like the following, occurred in the swift mill-stream of Kingskerswell. (Fig. 4.) 5. Fureularia lactistes. Back much arched, soft and plump, smooth, round: foot stout ; toes long, slender, acute, decurved ; foot and toes together equal in length to the trunk: a short pointed tail. Length 1/175 in. Lacustrine. It possesses much elegance of form, and a most restless activity, every instant retrojecting the long foot and toes, with the action of a kicking horse, very forcibly and pertinaciously. It has one very curious habit: it constantly insinuates itself between two stalks of conferva, where it immediately begins to make itself a cell (only just large enough to hold it) by incessantly turning head over heels. As soon as it has got its place, it bends the front down to the belly, and begins to roll round and round, without a moment’s cessation, for hours. If forced out, it at once begins the same process somewhere else. The habit, which is not that of an individual, but is characteristic of the species, may be compared with the tube-making propensity of F. forficula (See H. and G. Rotif. 1. 40, 41). In other respects it has the manners of its genus; as in its sudden and rapid motions, its volutions, and its swift shooting way of swimming. The incus-fulcrum appeared to be a massive pillar, with long, slender, divergent, arching rami: the mallei evanescent. I met with several examples of this interesting species, inhabiting floating tufts of a floccose conferva, that waved in a rapid rivulet in the village of Kingskerswell. And, a few weeks later, two more occurred in water from Carrick-on-Shannon, Ireland. These had the same form, and identically the same habits, as the Devonshire specimens. And, more recently, I have detected the species in other waters. (Fig. 5.) 6. Furcularia molaris. Body ovate, with a thick truncate head, and suddenly diminishing to a long foot, terminated by two blade-shaped, straight, acute toes: back elevated; belly straight. Length 1/240 in. Lacustrine. A single round eye, well-defined, of ruby brilliance, near the frontal part of a clear saccate brain, marks this rather insignificant species. The trophi are nearly as in F’. lactistes just described; but the mallei are more developed. An ample alimentary canal, undivided, nearly fills the trunk; and a clear ovary crosses it obliquely, having in oL 2 864 Transactions of the Society. general embryonic vesicles more or less conspicuous. The long foot and toes are carried straight behind, and both extended are about as long as the trunk. It is, as usual, restless, moderately swift, with a smooth gliding course. It is an elegant and attractive little species, which, for lack of any very marked characteristics, I name from the locality in which I found it, —the Kingskergwell mill-stream. Here, on different occasions, I have met with several examples. (Fig. 6.) 7. Furcularia spherica. Body globose dorsally, nearly flat ventrally : foot short, thick; toes small, straight, acute; the dorsum projecting over them with a slight rim or margin, which, laterally seen, looks like a tail. Length 1/240 in. Marine and lacustrine. In lateral aspect this pleasing little form may easily be mistaken for a deep Colwrus, till the trophi reveal its true Furcularian character, confirmed by a minute ruby eye at the extreme front; as also by its motions. ‘The head seems not retractile. I first formed acquaintance with it, in half'a dozen examples on different occasions, from tide-pools in the Firth of Tay. Then a specimen, recently dead, occurred in fresh water among Myriophyllum, thickly studded with Melicerta ringens and Floscularia cornuta. And presently, to confirm the amphibious habitat, I found one alive in Utricularia from a lough in the centre of Ireland. These fresh-water specimens I could in no wise distinguish from the marine. (Fig. 7.) 8. Furcularia sterea. Body ovato-cylindriec, with a thick truncate head, and subprone face ; behind ending in a short, decurved, acute tail : foot short and thick, apparently one-jointed; toes moderate, acute, scarcely decurved. Length 1/173 in. Lacustrine. Having much in common with F. molaris, this is yet quite diverse in facies and habit. ‘The head is of nearly the same thickness as the trunk ; the little overarching tail (seemingly a stiff point), and the short but massive foot, are differences that strike one at first sight. ‘The eye is distinct, quite prominently frontal; immediately beneath it the face recedes, and becomes a subprone ciliate surface, applied to the feeding- ground. It is much larger than F’. molaris. The single specimen seen had a great contractile vesicle, and a small undeveloped ovary. ‘The stomach seemed undivided. ‘lhe fore-parts were tinged of a delicate yellow hue. It was not much addicted to swimming, but crept viva- ciously about the vegetation, grubbing and browsing. I obtained it in water from a little rockery-pond in the grounds of Watcombe Park, the beautiful estate of Colonel Wright, near Torquay. (Fig. 8.) 9. Furcularia Eva. Body stout, fusiform, strongly elevated on the shoulder: foot short, indistinct ; toes more than half as long as body- and-head, thick for half this length, then abruptly attenuated for the remainder. Length 1/144 in. Lacustrine. The great length and peculiar form of the toes, which are often thrown back and carried over the back, give a facies to this rather fine species, which at once strikes an observer. Sometimes these organs are extended in opposite directions in a horizontal line, imparting to the animal the figure of the letter T reversed. The mastax is ample; the incus a thick rod, bent in the middle backwards, and ending occipitally in a pair of long and broad scythe-shaped processes: the mallei indistinct. Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera. By P. H. Gosse. 865 A slender brain descends behind; but no eye is visible, unless two very pale globules, close side by side, in the very front, are such. A single specimen only has occurred, whose activity mainly consisted in the vigorous throwing into different positions of the characteristic toes. (Fig. 9.) 10. Diglena aquila. Body fusiform: head furnished with a beak : foot short, thick; toes nearly as long as trunk, thick to half-length, then diminished to stiff, straight rods with obtuse points. Length 1/65 in. Lacustrine. The long straight blunt toes are very characteristic. ‘The proboscis is a broad shield, somewhat as in Stephanops, permanent, surrounded by a ring of very long vibratile cilia. It forms, indeed, a hooked beak, shaped like that of an eagle, the edges of which, converging to a point (¢), are distinctly visible from above, through its hyaline substance. In manners it is headstrong, abrupt, vigorous; most restless, never pursuing one course more than an instant, but suddenly stopping, and turning round on itself, augmenting its speed greatly for a moment, rushing, or rather shooting, forward for three or four times its length, then again and again, but never springing sidewise. I first received it from the middle of Ireland, by the kindness of Mr. Hood, jun. ; then in a pond near my own residence; and on several occasions since. It bears a very close resemblance to a species discovered by Mr. E. C. Bousfield, of which he courteously sent mea drawing, under the name of Notommata rapae. This has two conspicuous styles (antenne ?) projecting straight from the head, which I do not see in D. aquila. If, however, the two are identical, his specific name has the priority. None of my earlier examples showed any trace of an eye-spot; but since this article was written I have met with a specimen, in another missive from Mr. Hood, jun., in which was conspicuous a very large black occipital eye, if, indeed, it was not an opaque chalk-mass of the brain. (Vig. 10.) 11. Diglena Rosa. Body lengthened, fusiform, annulose, larva-like : proboscis frontal, beak-shaped, within which are two colourless eyes : foot minute; toes small, straight, acute. Length 1/150 to 1/115 in., average width 1/475 in. Lacustrine. The strong division of the body into annular false-joints recalls Taphrocampa. The head, too, resembles that of an insect-larva. The frontal beak is broadly triangular, like that of D. aguila just described, and its sharp point, hooked downward, can be seen from above, through its transparent substance. ‘Two well-defined, perfectly colourless bodies, side by side, are also seen through the base of the beak, apparently eyes without pigment. A ring of close-set cilia surrounds the front, behind the base of the beak. The face is truncate, studded with warty eminences. The body terminates in a distinct bulbous tail. Several examples occurred in conferva-tufts waving in the swift mill- stream at Kingskerswell. All were of a clear horn-yellow hue, with the long alimentary canal full of opaque food-matter. They were restless and swift ;—the jaws often protruded from the face, more generis. The beak was much more acute and better-shaped in some than in others. Numbers 2, 9, and 11 of the present series I owe to the kind efforts 866 Transactions of the Society. of three young ladies, the lovely and accomplished daughters of R. W. Beachey, Esq., of Kingskerswell. I have honoured these three species with their names, as an expression of gratitude for the zeal with which they have kept me supplied—themselves skilful microscopists—from the waters within their reach. ach of these three species was discovered in the prolific mill-stream so often mentioned in this article. (Fig. 11.) 12. Distemma platyceps. Body subfusiform; belly flat ; head broadly truncate: eyes two colourless globules, remote, occipital: foot rounded ; toes taper, acute, slightly decurved. Length 1/144 in. Marine. Though not unlike certain conditions of Diglena suilla and permollis, this is distinguished by its two large colourless eyes; and by the fact that while the trophi are of the usual calliper-form, the mallei are (or seem) attached to the bases, rather than to the ends of the circular rami ; while the fulcrum is nearly as long as the mallei. An inconspicuous hooked proboscis is present, which appears retractile. The broad face is of hyaline delicacy, free from corrugations and marks, as if clear gelatinous flesh, and this well defined from surrounding tissues, in all aspects. Young specimens are very restless and mobile, but an adult was of slow movement. Five or six examples occurred to me in water from a tide-pool near Carnoustie, in Forfarshire. In one the jaws were about half extruded from the face, and (as if by paralysis) couid not be re- tracted, or even moved :—an accident, the occurrence of which I have observed on repeated occasions, in predatory Rotifera. The species is numerous also in a ditch near Goodrington, South Devon. - (Fig. 12.) 13. Mastigocerca Iernis. Body long-oval; a low dorsal ridge throughout, rising abruptly with an oblique edge in front: toe not so long as lorica; sub-styles two, unequal, the chief one about one-third as long as the toe, remote from it at the base. Length 1/80 in.; of head and body, 1/173; of toe, 1/185. Lacustrine. This species has much resemblance to M. scipio ; but the regular form of the lorica, and that of its ridge; and the origination of the toe and of the main sub-style, on opposite sides of the foot-bulb, so as to be remote from each other,—seem sufficient peculiarities to warrant its distinct- ness. Several examples have occurred in Utricularia vulgaris, sent me by Mr. W. R. Hood from a lough in the heart of Ireland. Most of these were dead, mere empty lorice, affording excellent opportunities for precise observation and delineation ; others were alive and active. I subsequently found it in. water from Cannock Chase, sent by Mr. Bolton. The dis- tinctive characters noted above were conspicuous in all; as also in some vigorous examples from Perthshire. In these the extremities of the jaws were occasionally protruded. I detected, moreover, on the front, three tubercles (one central and two lateral), which seemed fleshy, extensile, and retractile. (Fig. 13, plate XV.) 14. Diaschiza fretalis. Lirica pyriform in outline, viewed dorsally ; gibbous laterally; each plate cut off obliquely behind, and somewhat excavate: belly nearly flat: toes long, blade-shaped, regularly decurved, acute: head furnished with a beak-like projection. Length 1/185 in. Marine. Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera. By P. H. Gosse. 867 This form comes very near to D. rhamphigera, but the oblique excavation of each of the dorsal lorica-plates is much more distinct, the frontal beak is more slender, nearly evanescent, and does not appear to be a prolongation of the trophi, which, moreover, are somewhat diversely shaped. There is a red eye on the inner surface of the brain, which I did not perceive in D. rhamphigera; and, above all, it is marine. Only a single specimen has been observed, and that dead; but so recently as to leave the internal organs and viscera well-defined, and im situ. It was from a tide-pool at Invergowrie. Both species, if they are distinct, require further study. (Fig. 14.) 15. Diaschiza acronota. Lorica much elevated, heart-shaped in lateral outline ; the dorsal cleft very manifest : head globose, prominent : foot thick ; toes stout, long, nearly straight, tapering: eye occipital, pale, very large. Length 1/140 in.; depth 1/400. Lacustrine. This very remarkable form is another novelty yielded by the mill- stream at Kingskerswell. It seems a very distinct and interesting species ; though known, as yet, only by a single dead specimen, in which the eye and the trophi remained in position. The eye is a remarkable feature, from its great size, irregular shape, and pale hue. It occupies nearly half the vertical depth of the body, of a very pale salmon-red. In all these points it resembles the organ in D. peta. The mastax is small: the toes have a backward curve, so slight as to be scarcely perceptible. (Fig. 15.) 16. Distyla lipara. Lorica skin-like, flexible, plicate: body flask- shaped, soft and very plump, not pointed behind : toes large, blade-shaped, not shouldered: brain simple; eye minute, occipital. Length, total ex- tended, 1/162 in.; of lorica alone, 1/260 in. ; but being very flexible, it contracts to 1/350 in. Lacustrine. This differs, at sight, from its known congeners by its round, manifestly soft, body, properly egg-shaped, specially in its hind parts, scarcely at all flattened, and destitute of the usual inangulation ; the edges of the dorsal and ventral plates approaching close in the middle, and diverging at both extremities, so that the rounded surface is scarcely broken. The soft integument is constantly thrown into deep irregular plic, which do not appear to be permanent. A great foot bears, on a condyliform joint, two toes which are widely blade-shaped, longer than the mastax, acute, but not in the least shouldered at the tips. ‘They are habitually thrown up under the belly. The eye is minute, pale-red, occipital. The trophi are normal, long, and capable of being brought to the very front, — they work vigorously. The whole head is protrusile, and very mobile. The entire animal is transparent and nearly colourless; but the numerous folds and corrugations impart an appearance of a blue-black tinge to the body. The form and outline are subject to slight but continual changes, contracting and expanding. ‘The animal is lithe and active, but not locomotive. A single specimen has occurred in water from Sutton Park ditch, Birmingham, in the orange-coloured sediment which abounds with fine Desmidiex. (Fig. 16.) 17. Metopidia pygymza. Lorica ovate, much elevated, the back rounded, the edges overhanging; hind margin rounded ; ventral surface 868 Transactions of the Socvety. flat: foot stout, long; toe apparently single, small, acute. Length, extended, 1/350 in.* lLacustrine. This seems the smallest of the genus; smaller than emarginata, or than triptera, which latter was in sight at the same time, for comparison. It is very transparent and colourless, the viscera only just discernible ; the trophi, though working, were but shadowy lines. The extremity of the lorica is neither pointed, nor sinuate, but evenly round: its over- hanging margins are remarkable, recalling Notholca scapha. There are two clear colourless globules at the very front, remote from each other, probably eyes. ‘The frontal hook is carried rather close to the front, and seems incapable of independent motion ; it is visible in a dorsal view, as a line parallel to the front. Two minute air-bubbles were in the alimentary canal of the individual examined ; but no particles, nor stain, of food, though the tiny creature was industriously picking all the.time it was under observation,—an hour or more. It was active and restless, creeping about the floccose, but rarely swimming, and then laboriously. A single specimen occurred in a phial of Utricularia sent by Mr. W. R. Hood, from the middle of Ireland. (Fig. 17.) 18. Dispinthera, gen. noy., Fam. Coluridx. Gen. Char.—Body sub- cylindric, inclosed, in part, within a lorica open in front and in rear, apparently cleft down the venter: head and foot habitually protruded : head distinct, protected by horny plates, but without a frontal hook: two cervical eyes. D. capsa. Lorica in most parts soft and flexible: foot stout; toes two, furcate, thick, straight, tapering, acute. Length 1/250 in. Lacustrine. This apparently new form I found in the sediment of water dipped by Mr. Bolton from “ ditch No. 2,” in Sutton Park, Birmingham, crowded with fine Desmidiew. The facies strikes one as very peculiar, and difficult to explain. The front is capable of much protrusion, in a conical form, where a globose tubercle is visible, but only occasionally ; and a similar one, but more constant, on the occiput (or rather crown of the head), just below the point of the occipital sheath. ‘he lorica is discernible chiefly about the head; it there projects into several points, which seem very flexible, but constant. When the head is far retracted (which is seldom), an array of spears is left bristling up. Now and then, at the pectus, the integument is seen to fall into a flap, or hanging lip, to be presently withdrawn. The principal shield protects the back of the head, but does not form an arching hood, or frontal hook. The trophi, in several good views, seemed of the pattern (fig. 39 of my paper “On Manducatory Organs,” Phil. Trans. 1856) ; assigned to Notomm. gibba. The whole facies recalls one of the smaller Notommatz ; yet the two well-defined eyes remove it from them; besides the manifest lorica. it seems to approach the marine genus Mytzlia, but not very close. Only a single specimen occurred, in June. It was active and busy, constantly turning and wheeling about, but little given to locomotion. * The figures in the plates are not drawn to one scale ; if they were, this would be not one-fourth as long as No. 13 on the left of it. Hach figure is drawn as the containing area will permit, the object being to show as much structural detail as possible. Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera. By P. H. Gosse. 869 It suggests the odd notion of a creature carrying its great clumsy head in a bandbox. (Fig. 18.) 19. Monura Bartonia. Lorica ovate, moderately compressed, dorsal outline (viewed laterally) one-third of a circle, ending in triangular points, which have the dorsal side slightly excavate: one eye frontal: toe straight, slender, acute, more than half as long as the lorica, shouldered dorsally. Length, from frontal hook to tip of toe, 1/173 in. Lacustrine. The genera Colurus and Monura (if, indeed, they are not one) appear to contain a large number of species, peculiarly difficult to define satis- factorily. Yet this and the following are, I think, to be distinguished. The toe and foot together are nearly equal in length to the lorica. I could find no trace of a median line in the toe. Its extreme length and tenuity are notable. Each posterior point of the lorica forms an equi- lateral triangle, clearly defined from the general area of the lorica, by a line—the base of the triangle. These two triangular termini are of ex- cessive delicacy, and may easily escape a cursory notice. On the extreme front, under the frontal hook, is a small dark crimson eye, like a wart on the face. Its manners are those of so many of its fellows, remaining long totally withdrawn between the closed lorica-plates in front, pivoting and swaying on the toe-tip incessantly for hours. I first obtained it, in the spring of this year, from a pond known as the Reservoir, at Barton, near Torquay. Since then I have met with single specimens from many localities, and in abundance in the Kingskerswell mill-stream. (Fig. 19.) 20. Monura loncheres. Dorsal outline narrowly ovate, lateral nearly semicircular ; lorica rounded behind, with a median angular notch : toe shouldered dorsally, excessively long and slender. Total length 1/200 im. ; vertical depth 1/550 in. Marine. The most striking points in this beautiful species are its great depth (from back to belly), making about a half-circle, and the tenuity of the toe, which seems indivisible. This runs to so exceedingly fine a point as to escape notice, except with the most delicate focusing; even with a quarter objective, and the best possible light. The foot, of two condyh- form joints, and the toe, together, are fully equal to the lorica in length; viz. 1/400 in. ‘The ventral cleft is narrow, straight-sided, slightly approximate in front, and reaching round to the occiput, posteriorly to a short acute sinus (0), whose sides form aright angle. There is a brilliant ruby eye about the middle of a saccate brain, and therefore cervical. I have examined a number of examples, at different times, in sea-water obtained by Mr. Hood from the Invergowrie tidepools. In one of these I timed the period of emptying the contractile vesicle to be just three minutes. It had this peculiarity, that the emptying was but partial on each occasion : that the bladder suddenly diminished its volume, but not to a point, nor nearly. The animal’s posturing manners are exactly the same as described in the preceding species. (Fig. 20.) 21. Mytilia peecilops. Lorica pergamentaceous, very flexible, con- stantly thrown into irregular folds, whence the outline is very variable : the face, in particular, is capable of great protrusion in wide plicate mem- branes : prevalent figure, foot, and toes, much as in WM. Teresa. Length of lorica 1/240 in.; depth 1/480 in. Marine. 870 Transactions of the Society. Though this has many features in common with Tavina and Teresa, particularly the foot and toes, it has important peculiarities. The dorsal outline is like that of the latter, the lateral that of the former; but both more rough and uncouth. The skin thrown irregu- larly into coarse rude folds, occurring at intervals at every part, precludes any fixed form, so that the figure accurately copied has become in a few minutes, though gradually, flagrantly incorrect. The front is large and broadly truncate, capable of pushing out, from its lower part, great membranous sacs and folds, which slowly change every moment, and the use of which is inexplicable. These expansions do not appear to be ciliated. The mastax and trophi are as in its congeners ; there is an ample brain, which carries a cervical red eye. The whole back is ridged, —tectiform, not keeled (c). I have observed numerous examples in sea-water from the Invergowrie tide-pools. They have all been remarkably heavy and sluggish in manners, little given to locomotion, wholly lacking the sprightly vivacity of the kindred species. With one of these specimens a curious phenomenon occurred, which I cannot at all explain (see 6). The animal was jerking and shaking itself, as if either wishing to be free from an annoyance, or else tearing some prey. Having got it somewhat turned, I saw that it carried, between its bent-up foot and its much developed face, what appeared an egg, of dark granular substance, as if just laid, of a pointed-oval form, reminding me, in shape and spotting, of a tern’s egg. Whether it was a real egg, or no; if so, whether its own ;—I could not tell. It appeared uninjured ; and was firmly held for several hours,—as long as the Mytilia lived. By-and-by the interior of the “egg” displayed many clear circles (of which I could count about twenty), closely like the nucleated embryonic vesicles often seen in the ovary ;—a fact which adds to the inexplicability of the phenomenon :—for they certainly were not visible at first. Another thing was remarkable. The carried “egg” had sensibly become less in bulk, while it retained its perfect form and out- line; yet it had not been sucked, for the Mytzlia’s mouth was not, nor had been, in contact with its surface. After three hours, the egg was not more than one-third of its original bulk. Unfortunately no further change occurred during the lapse of a night; the next morning both the animal and the egg were unaltered in appearance, and the former evidently dead. The species seems unusually intolerant of captivity. The abdominal viscera are generally of a rich orange-brown hue, and the whole tissues are more or less suffused with the same colour. (Fig. 21.) 22. Mytilia producta. Skin flexible, plicate: body slender, very extensile: eye single, frontal: foot and toes nearly as in M. Teresa. Length 1/100 in. Marine. | The lorica, flexible in M. pceecilops, is perhaps even more so in this species, and recognizable only at the posterior extremity, where each lateral plate can be traced, as, with a rounded end, it curves under the trunk, to approach its fellow-plate, leaving a narrow ventral cleft. ‘The face is quite truncate, slightly oblique, not abnormally developed. When gliding rapidly along a seaweed, the animal is very worm-like, the body and the foot, about equal in length, forming two successive cylinders, Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera. By P. H. Gosse. 871 the latter half as thick as the former. But both, especially the foot, are capable of sudden elongation at will. ‘hus the creature has a facies which distinguishes it from either of its congeners. Perhaps it comes nearest to Teresa. The toes are even broader proportionally; together much exceeding the width of the foot whence they issue. ‘The eye is conspicuous, nearly frontal, but changes its position with the brain. The whole animal is colourless, but very full of folds and corrugations. Very long mucus-glands proceed from the toes through the whole of the foot. The species first occurred to my observation on the 7th of May, 1887, on very fine seaweeds (Ceramium), which I gathered in the deep cup- like pool in limestone rock at Oddicombe Point. I met with about half- a-dozen examples. (Fig. 22.) 23. Anurza schista. Lorica oblong, tapering to a short spine behind; dorsal plate tesselated in polygonal areas on each side of a mesial ridge, and punctured; ventral plate much shorter, produced into a projecting sharp point, divided from the dorsal by a deep cleft. Length 1/162 in., width 1/470 in. Lacustrine. It has relations with stipitata and cochlearis ; in tesselation agreeing with the latter, and with tecta. The anterior spines are straight. It is evidently an approach to Notholca, but I do not see the ridges and furrows descending from the spines. The tessele are somewhat coarse and ill-defined. The straight short antlers, and the great descending point of the ventral plate, distinguish it at once from every known species. This point is a stiff taper spine: sometimes it projects obliquely (6) ; then, in a moment it is jerked in, so as to be quite hidden, only to be as rapidly thrown out again. ven in a dorsal view it can be clearly seen, through the transparent tissues. I believe I have seen, on two occasions, a discharged egg, carried under the belly, in the manner of tecta, &e. The eye is a ball of deep red, of enormous size. A very large contractile vesicle, when full, forces up the other viscera to the middle of the body ; when, often, the well-defined contrast between the dark turbid contents of the intestine, and the crystal clearness of the bladder, is curious and striking. The bladder has no effect on the ventral spine, whose move- ments are manifestly voluntary. (Fig. 23.) I have seen nearly a score of specimens in water sent by Mr. Bolton from the Botanic Garden, Birmingham. It is a sprightly active swimmer. 24. Notholea labis. Almost the very counterpart of N. scapha, save that the outline is a longer oval, and the lorica is prolonged into a short, broad, truncate tail behind. Length 1/216 in.; width 1/370 in. Lacustrine. One of the discoveries of Mr. Hood of Dundee, who finds it numerous in a pool in Emmock Wood, near that city. He has repeatedly sent me specimens, but hitherto all have been dead on arrival. As, however, the » internal organization is probably normal, the correctness of the diagnosis and delineation is not lessened by the fact that perfect lorice are at absolute command. The little tail to the lorica reminds one of the handle of a dust-pan, if so homely an illustration can be tolerated. The ridges and furrows from the frontal spines are almost obliterate. (Fig. 24.) 872 Transactions of the Society. XIV.—A Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By Henry B. Brapy, F.RS., F.GS. (Read 9th November, 1887.) Nearty thirty years have elapsed since the publication of Prof. W. C. Williamson’s memoir on the ‘ Recent Foraminifera of Great Britain’—a work in which the scattered threads of earlier investigation were collected into an orderly skein, and interwoven with the results of a large amount of independent research. Whatever be its imperfections—and, consider- ing the circumstances of the time, they are fewer and less important than might reasonably have been anticipated—that memoir represents fully and adequately the state of knowledge with respect to the organisms of which it treats up to the date of its publication, and practically marks the commencement of the recognition of the recent Foraminifera of the British Islands as a distinct branch of study. The material to which Prof. Williamson had access consisted chiefly of shore-sands from various parts of the coast, together with a few dredgings obtained by the late Mr. Barlee and the late Mr. Jeffreys from the Shetland Seas, the western shores of Scotland, and one or two points on the south-west coast of England—all from comparatively. shallow water. Of recent years, thanks partly to the periodical money-grants of the British Association, partly to the organization of local field-clubs, and most of all to the enthusiasm of amateur naturalists, the area of research has been vastly widened, and at the present time there are few promising portions of our coast that have not been explored more or less by means of the dredge; and our knowledge of every section of the marine invertebrate fauna has been correspondingly enriched. So far as the Foraminifera are concerned, the additions to the British list have been so numerous as to be bewildering, notwithstanding the efforts that have been made from time to time by means of catalogues, printed privately or otherwise, to keep pace with the record of fresh occurrences. ‘The latest catalogue of this sort, that drawn up by Mr. Siddall in 1879, though complete or approximately so when issued, even now requires an amount of revision that much diminishes its practical value. The recent dredging operations on the south-west of Ireland have added to our list a number of the deep-water species that venture within the limits assigned to the British area; and we seem to have arrived at a point from which we may profitably review our position. Whether the time has yet come for a fresh attempt to treat the subject fully and exhaustively, as was done by Prof. Williamson, may be open to question ; but if so, the present paper can in no way prejudice such an effort—indeed it has been intended in some measure as a preliminary step in that direction, the aim having been to collect and sift existing material, and to draw attention to some of the numerous points concerning which our knowledge is defective. The employment of modern dredging appliances, and the prosecution of researches in deeper water and further from land than was customary a few years ago, have opened a new question, namely,—what is to be understood by the term “British,” as applied to the marine fauna and Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 873 flora? ‘This subject was raised in the Biolological Section of the British Association at the Birmingham meeting in 1886, and a Committee was appointed to consider it and report. ‘The report, laid before the Man- chester meeting (1887), which may be summarized as follows, will probably find general acceptance. It proposes to recognize a “ British Marine Shallow-water District,” and a “ British Atlantic Slope District ; ” the former bounded to east and south by the half-way line between Great Britain and the continent of Europe, and to the west and north by the 100 fathom line, which corresponds roughly with the beginning of the declivity of the continental plateau; the latter, that is the “ British Atlantic Slope District,” extending from the 100 fathom line on the north and west coasts to say 1000 fathoms, that is to the commencement of the abyssal floor of the ocean. These definitions are doubtless intended for general guidance rather than as the embodiment of fixed and absolute rules; and in the following Synopsis, which is otherwise limited to the “Shallow-water District,” I have not felt at liberty to exclude the results of some of the recent dredgings on the south-west of Ireland at depths a little exceeding 100 fathoms; still less those of soundings from even deeper water in localities like Loch Fyne, which are geographically within the normal 100 fathom line. The arrangement and nomenclature of the Synopsis are based upon the ‘ Report on the Foraminifera of the Challenger Expedition.’ Refer- ence is given to the original description of each species and, as far as possible, a further reference to the first record of its occurrence in a British locality, not, however, in the latter case going back further than Williamson’s monograph. For synonyms, which have only been given in a few needful cases, the reader may be referred to the ‘Challenger’ Report. "T have had the advantage of the assistance of my friend Mr. W. Archer, F.R.S., of Dublin, with respect to the Gromide. ‘The treat- ment of the Family, however, must be regarded as purely provisional. Those genera only have been included that are known to possess “reticulated” (as distinct from “ lobose” or “ filose”) pseudopodia. There are a certain number of species that, at one time or other, have found place in works on the British recent fauna, which are omitted in the present Synopsis. Of these the most important are Peneroplis planatus and Vertebralina striata, the specimens of which are now known to have been interlopers, due to the use of sieves previously em- ployed for Mediterranean sands, and not properly cleaned; Cristellaria strigilata (C. subarcuatula, var. costata, Will.), Frondicularia complanata (Ff. spathulata, Will.), Frondicularia archiaciana, and Nummulites radiata (N. planulata, Will.), which are without doubt “derived ” fossils from early Tertiary and Cretaceous strata. Possibly the broken speci- men figured by Williamson (Plate ii., fig. 44), referred with reservation by some subsequent authors to Nodosaria raphanistrum, also pertains to the same category. With respect to Nummulites radiata, I may say that the late Mr. Jeffreys was kind enough to give me a considerable number of the specimens dredged off Portsmouth, and their fossil condition appears to 874 Transactions of the Society. admit of no question. I am informed by Prof. Williamson that the Scarborough specimen has been lost, but that it was of precisely similar character. A mounting from the Portsmouth gathering has been placed with the series of British Foraminifera in the British Museum. There are a few other names that will not be found in their old places, partly owing to needful generic changes; of these the following are the more important :— Biloculina contraria and Hauerina compressa—are now transferred to Planispirina contraria. Reophax moniliforme, is referred to R. findens. Teatularia difformis—to Bolivina difformis. Textularia pygmxa—to Bolivina dilatata. Cassidulina pulchella and Cassidulina oblonga,—to C. levigata and C. crassa respectively. Lagena jeffreysii—to L. hispida. Lagena lyelli—to L. sulcata and L. costata. Nodosaria (Dent.) guttifera,—referred to N. pyrula. Marginulina lituus—to Cristellaria elongata. Polymorphina orbigniit.—Fistulose specimens of Polymorphina are associated with the forms to which they respectively belong, and not treated collectively as a single species. Discorbina obtusa—has been transferred to D. wrightit. Discorbina ochracea—to Trochammina ochracea. Pulvinulina saceulata.—The locality given by Messrs. Parker and Jones for this form—50 miles south-west of Ushant—is outside the British area. Attention may be directed to certain species and varieties which have been retained in the list, but concerning which considerable uncertainty still exists; namely,—Valvulina conica, Trochammina macrescens, Tr. plicata, Bathysiphon filiformis, Placopsilina bulla, P. varians, Reophas findens, Ramulina globulifera, Spirillina tubereulata, Nonionina boueana, and N. asterizans. Further observations are still required on these, as well as on a few other forms that need not here be enumerated, to place our knowledge of their characters and distribution on a satis- factory footing. I have now only to thank most cordially the naturalists who have aided me with notes and suggestions embodied in the following pages. I have already expressed the obligation I am under to Mr. Archer, and my acknowledgments are also due in an especial manner to Messrs. Joseph Wright, F.G.8., of Belfast, F. W. Millett, F.R.MLS., of Marazion, and David Robertson, F'.G.8., of Millport, N.B., whose labours in con- nection with the British marine Rhizopoda are widely known, for much assistance, ever most kindly and freely rendered. ‘To the friendly co-operation of these gentlemen any claim the present Synopsis may have to approximate completeness is largely due. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 875 BIBLIOGRAPHY. The following list embraces only such works on the British Recent Foraminifera as have been employed in the compilation of the present Synopsis, commencing with Prof. Williamson’s Monograph in 1858; and is not in any way intended as a complete bibliography even of the limited field to which it refers. 1858. 1862. 1863. 1864. 1865. 1865. 1866. 1867. 1870. 1870. 1870. 1870. 1874. 1875. 1877. 1877. 1878. 1879. 1880. 1880. Wituiamson, W. C.——On the Recent Foraminifera of Great Britain. (Ray Society.) Parker, W. K., and Jonus, T. Rurpert.—Appendix to Carpenter’s ‘ Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera,’ pp. 309-312. Brapy, Henry B,—Notes on Foraminifera new to the British Fauna. (Report Brit, Assoc., Newcastle-upon-Tyne Meeting, Trans., pp. 100, 101.) On the Rhizopodal Fauna of Shetland. (Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. pp. 463-475, pl. xlviii.) ———_ —— A Catalogue of the Recent Foraminifera of Northumberland and Durham. (Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durham, vol. i. pp. 83-107, pl. xii.) Axcock, Dr. T.—Notes on Natural History Specimens lately received from Con- nemara. (Proc. Lit. and Phil. Soc. Manchester, vol. iv. pp. 192-208.) Brapy, Henry B.—On the Rhizopodal Fauna of the Hebrides. (Report Brit. Assoc., Nottingham Meeting, Trans., pp. 69, 70.) WaALter, Epwarp.—Report on the Foraminifera obtained in the Shetland Seas. (Report Brit. Assoc., Dundee Meeting, pp. 441-446.) Brapy, Henry B.—On Brackish-water Foraminifera. (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 3, vol. vi. pp. 273-309, pl. xi., xii.) Catalogue of British Foraminifera in the Edinburgh Museum of Science and Art. ARCHER, WILLIAM.—On some Freshwater Rhizopoda, new or little-known. (Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. x. N.S. pp. 101-124 ;—vol. ix. pl. xx.) Carter, H. J.—On two New Species of the Foraminiferous Genus Squamulina, and on a New Species of Diflugia. (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 4, vol. v. pp. 309-326, pl. iv., v.) Rosertson, Davip.—Notes on the Recent Foraminifera and Ostracoda of the Firth of Clyde. (Trans. Geol. Soc., Glasgow, vol. v. pp. 112-154.) (G. 8. Brady and Robertson), Report on Dredging off the Coast of Durbam and North Yorkshire in 1874. (Report Brit. Assoc., Bristol Meeting, pp. 185-199.) ArcuEerR, WILL1AM.—Résumé of Recent Contributions to our Knowledge of Freshwater Rhizopoda. Part. IV. (Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., vol. xvii. N.S., pp. 107-124, pl. viii.) Wrieut, JosepH.—Recent Foraminifera of Down and Antrim, (Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1876-77, Appendix, pp. 101-105, pl. iv.) Swwpa1, J. D.—The Foraminifera of the River Dee. (Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Science, pt. ii., pp. 42-56, woodcuts.) Catalogue of British Recent Foraminifera, for the use of collectors, pp. 10. On Shepheardella, an Undescribed Type of Marine Rhizopoda, with a few Observations on Lieberkuehnia. (Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., vol. xx. N.S. pp. 130-144, pl. xv., xvi.) Ropertson, Davip.—Remarks on a few hauls with the Dredge in Portree Bay, Skye. (Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, vol. v. pp. 11-13; also 1881-1883—further notes at pp. 17, 107, 163, 268 and 274 of the same volume). 876 Transactions of the Society. 1881. ARCHER, WiLLIAM.—A New Sarcodine, possibly to be referred to the Genus , Microgromia. (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 230, 231.) 1881. Wricut, JosrpH.—Foraminifera found during the Belfast Naturalists’ Field Club’s Excursion to South Donegal, 1880. (Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1880-81, Appendix, pp. 179-187, pl. viii.) 1884, Batxwitt, F. P., and Mintert, F. W.—The Foraminifera of Galway. Journ. Microsc. and Nat. Sci., vol. iii. pp. 19-28; pp. 78-90, pl. i—iv.) 1885. Bawukwitt, F. P., and Wricut, Jos.—Report on some recent Foraminifera found off the Coast of Dublin and in the Irish Sea. (Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. [Science] pp. 317-372, pl. xii.—xiv.) 1885. Mititert, F. W.—The Recent Foraminifera of Mount’s Bay. (Trans. Penzance Nat. Hist. and Antiq. Soc., N.S. vol. ii. pp. 26-28.) 1886. Wricut, Jos—EPpH.—First Report on the Marine Fauna of the South-west of Ireland. (Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. [Science |—Foraminifera, pp: 607-614.) | - Foraminifera of the Belfast Naturalists’ Field Club’s Cruise off Belfast Lough, in the Steam-tug ‘ Protector, June, 1885; also Foraminifera found by Dr. Malcomson at Rockport, Belfast Lough. (Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1885-86, Appendix, pp. 317-325, pl. xxvi.) 1886. SippALt, J. D.—Report on the Foraminifera ;—Liverpool Marine Biological Com- mittee Report, No. 1. (Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl. Appendix, pp. 42-71, pl. i.) 1886. ——— 8 Sus-Kinepom—PROTOZOA. CLASsS—RHIZOPODA. ORDER—Foraminifera (Reticularia). Family I. GROMIDA. LIEBERKUEHNIA, Claparede and Lachmann. Lieberkuehnia wageneri, Claparéde and Lachmann. Lieberkuehnia wagenert, Clap. and Lach, 1859, Mém. de l'Institut genevois, vol. vi. ;—1868, Etudes des Infu- soires, pt. i. p. 465, pl. xxiii. 3 5s Siddall, 1879, Catal. Brit. Rec. Foram., p. 10; —1886, Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl., Appendix, p. 48. “Colwyn Bay, near Little Orme’s Head, on Algee and Hydrozoa. &c., from low water” (Siddall). Gromia, Dujardin. Gromia oviformis, Dujardin. Gromia oviformis, Dujardin, 1835, Ann. Sci. Nat., sér. 2, vol. ii. p- 313 ;—vol. iv. p. 343, pl. ix. fig. 1. 4 3 Siddall, 1879, Catal. Brit. Rec. Foram., p. 3;— 1886, Proc. Lit. and Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl., Appendix, p. 49. “Muddy shores around the coast generally ” (Siddall). Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 8717 Gromia dujardinit, Schultze. Gromia dujardinii, Schultze, 1854, Organ. Polythal., p. 55, pl. vil. figs. 1-7. ms 7" Siddall, 1879, Catal. Brit. Rec. Foram., p. 3;— 1886, Proc. Lit. and Phil, Soc. Liverpool, -vol. xl, Appendix, p. 49. “Muddy shores around the coast generally,” with the last-named species (Siddall). Microgromia, R. Hertwig. Microgromia socialis, Archer. Gromia socialis, Archer, 1870, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. x. N.S. p. 124; vol. ix., pl. xx. figs. 7-11. Microgromia socialis, Id. 1877, Ibid., vol. xvii. N.S. p. 115; pl. vu. fig. 8. Glen-ma-lur Valley,—Co. Wicklow, and in some other subalpine districts in Ireland, rare (Archer). Microgromia mucicola, Archer. Microgromia mucicola, Archer, 1877, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xvi. NS. p. 12], pl. viii. fig. 9. “Nidulates in mucous envelope of certain unicellular Alge” (Archer). Microgromia ambigua, Archer. Microgromia ambigua, Archer, 1881, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. p. 230. “Only probably belonging to this genus. Not rare in Midland pools, Ireland” (Archer). DiapHoropopon, Archer. Diaphoropodon mobile, Archer. Diaphoropodon mobile, Archer, 1870, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci, vol. x. NS. p. 123 ; vol. ix. pl. xx. fig. 6. . Glen-ma-lur Valley,—Co. Wicklow, very rare (Archer). SHEPHEARDELLA, Siddall. Shepheardella teniformis, Siddall. Shepheardella teniformis, Siddall, 1880, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci, vol. xx. NS. p. 180, pls. xv., xvi. » FP Id. 1886, Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl., Appendix, p. 49. “On Hydrozoa dredged in Colwyn Bay. Frequent in spring at Tenby ” (Siddall). 1887. 3M 878 Transactions of the Society. Family II. MILIOLIDZ. Sub-family 1. Nubecularinz. Squamutina, Schultze. Squamulina levis, Schultze. Squanulina levis, Schultze, 1854, Organ. der Polythal., p. 56, pl. vi. figs. 16, 17. a » Siddall, 1886, Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl., Appendix, p. 50. “Occurring on the polypidoms of zoophytes round the coast generally ” (Siddall). Nosecunartia, Defrance. Nubecularia lucifuga, Defrance. Nubecularia lucifuga, Defrance, 1825, Dict. Sci. Nat., vol. xxv. p. 120 ;—Atlas Zooph., pl. xliv. fig. 3. 3 : Brady, 1879. Siddall’s Catal. Brit. Rec. Foram., 10 p. 10. Cornwall coast, 60 fathoms; off Guernsey, dredged (Brady) ; Mouth of the Dee? (Siddall); Mount’s Bay (Millett); Kilchattan Bay, Bute, 25 fathoms (Robertson). Sub-family 2. Miliolininee. Binocunina, d’Orbigny. Biloculina irregularis, dOrbigny. Biloculina wrregularis, VOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Meérid., p. 67, pl. vu. figs. 20, 21. Small specimens, apparently belonging to this form, occur in dredged sands from the Hebrides. Biloculina sphera, @Orbigny. Biloculina sphera, @Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 66, pl. viii. figs. 13-16. : - » Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 466, pl. xlviii. fig. 1. Shetland, Hebrides, dredged (Brady) ; south-west of Ireland, 79 to 200 fathoms (Wright). Biloculina ringens, Lamarck, sp. Miliolites ringens, Lamarck, 1804, Ann. du Muséum, vol. v. p. 351, No. 1 ;—vol. ix. pl. xvii. fig. 1. ; Biloculina ringens, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 79, pl. vi figs. 169, 170. Common all round the coast. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 879 Biloculina depressa, d’Orbigny. Biloculina depressa, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 298, No. 7 ;— Modéle, No. 91. ringens, var. carinata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 79, pl. vii. figs. 172-174. Common everywhere. ? Biloculina elongata, @Orbigny. Biloculina elongata, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 298, No. 4;—Soldani, Testac., vol. 1. pt. 5, p. 228, pl. chii. fig. M, Q; p. 231, pl. clvi. fig. v v. a ringens, var. patagonica, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 80, pl. vii. figs. 175-6. A common shallow-water form, hardly distinguishable varietally from B. ringens. Sprrotocuuina, d’Orbigny. Spiroloculina planulata, Lamarck, sp. Miliolites planulata, Lamarck, 1805, Ann. du Muséum, vol. v. p. 352, No. 4;—1822, Anim. s. Vert., vol. vii. p. 613, No. 4. Spiroloculina depressa, var. rotundata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 82, pl. vi. fig. 178. A common shallow-water form. Spiroloculina limbata, dOrbigny. Spiroloculina limbata, dOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 299, No. 12;—Soldani, Testac., vol. ii. p. 54, pl. xix. fig. m. i depressa, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 82, pl. vii. fig. 177. Widely distributed. — Spiroloculina tenuiseptata, Brady. Spiroloculina tenuiseptata, Brady, 1884, ‘Challenger’ Report, p. 153, pl. x. figs. 5, 6. Common in Mr. Wright’s dredgings from the south-west of Ireland. Spiroloculina acutimargo, Brady. Spiroloculina acutimargo, Brady, 1884, Challenger Report, p. 154, pl. x. figs. 12-15. i fs Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science), p. 8328, wood- cut. Lambay, 45 fathoms, specimens small and poor (Balkwill and Wright) ; Estuary of the Dee (Siddall). Spiroloculina canaliculata, dOrbigny. Spiroloculina canaliculata, dOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 269, pl. xvi. figs. 10-12. 3 2 880 Transactions of the Society. Spiroloculina depressa, var. cymbium, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gr. Br., p. 82, pl. vu. fig. 179. Frequent. Spiroloculina excavata, dOrbigny. Sptroloculina excavata, d’Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 271, pl. xvi. figs. 19-21. — x » Brady, 1865, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durham, vol. i. p. 93, pl. xu. fig. 1. Widely distributed, but less common than some other species of the genus. Mintonina, Williamson. Here, as in the ‘Challenger’ Report, I have retained the generic term Miliolina in the sense in which it is employed by Williamson. I do not, I hope, in the least underrate the value and importance of the researches of MM. Munier-Chalmas and Schlumberger on the embryology of the group, but I confess I am unable, in the present state of our knowledge, to see any way to the application of embryological characters to a practical and convenient system of generic nomenclature. So far as I understand, it is admitted that, whilst general rules may be laid down with relation to the embryological differences of certain subordinate eroups, the “ distinctive” features have a considerable range of variation, and are in fact not much more constant than those more easily recognized external peculiarities which serve as the basis of classification amongst other Foraminifera. We have, however, still much to learn in the matter, and everything to hope from M. Schlumberger’s further investiga- tions. Perhaps the difficulty may be eventually solved by the recognition of certain subgeneric types; the d’Orbignyan genus ] Sprroptecta, Ehrenberg. Spiroplecta rosula, Ehrenberg. Npiroplecta rosula, threnberg, 1854, Mikrogeologie, pl. xxxu, II. fig. 26. Textularia complexa, Brady, 1865, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durham, vol. i. p. 101, pl. xii. fig. 6. Northumberland and Durham coast, very rare. Spiroplecta biformis, Parker and Jones, sp. Textularia agglutinans, var. biformis, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv. p. 370, pl. xv. figs. 23, 24. Spiroplecta biformis, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 333, pl. xi. fig. 21, and woodcut. Belfast Lough (Malcomson) ; Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright). Gavupryina, d’Orbigny. Gaudryina scabra, Brady. Gaudryina pwpoides, Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 300, pl. xii. fig. 5. 3.N 2 896 Transactions of the Society. Gaudryina scabra, Id., 1884, Challenger Report, p. 381, pl. xlvi. fig. 7. Montrose Basin, very rare. It may here be mentioned that in Mr. Wright’s cabinet there are small specimens of the typical Gaudryina pupoides, dOrb., from 110, 160, and 200 fathoms respectively, on the south-west of Ireland. Gaudryina filiformis, Berthelin. Gaudryina filiformis, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France, sér. 3, vol. i. No. 5, p. 25, pl. 1. fig. 8. a 2 Wright, 1882, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club (1880-1), Appendix, p. 180, pl. viii. fig. 3, 3 a, b. Killybegs Harbour, 17 fathoms, and south-west of Ireland (Wright) ; Dublin coast, rather rare (Balkwill and Wright); Galway (Balkwill and Millett); west of Scotland (Robertson); Mount’s Bay, Cornwall (Millett). VERNEUILINA, d’Orbigny. Verneuilina polystropha, Reuss, sp. Bulimina jpolystropha, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. Bohm. Kreid., pt. ii. p. 109, pl. xxiv. fig. 53. scabra, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Brit., p. 65, pl. v. figs. 136, 137. K arenacea, Id., Ibid., p. 98. Generally distributed. 39 Verneuilina spinulosa, Reuss. Verneuilina spinulosa, Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. 1. p. 374, pl. xlvui. fig. 12. Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 301, pl. xii. fig. 6. Westport, Ireland (Brady); Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall). Vaxtyuuina, d’Orbigny. Valvulina fusea, Williamson, sp. Rotalina fusca, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Brit., p. 55, pl. v. figs. 114, 115. Valvulina triangularis, var. austriaca, Parker and Jones, 1862, Carpenter’s Introd. Foram., Appendix, p. 311. Found on almost all parts of the coast. 3) 39 Valvulina conica, Parker and Jones. Valvulina triangularis, var. conica, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans. vol. cly. p. 406, pl. xv. fig. 27. Es conica, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 3. The only British specimens of this species I have seen were from Shetland and the Hebrides, and were doubtfully separable from V. fusca. Somewhat further north, and in deeper water, it is not very rare. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 897 Sub-family 2. Buliminine. Bouimina, d’Orbigny. Bulimina pupoides, VOrbigny. Bulimina pupoides, @Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 185, pl. x1. figs. 11, 12 » Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Brit., p. 62, pl.v. figs. 124, 125. Bulimina ovata, d@Orbigny. Bulimina ovata, VOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 185, pl. xi. figs. 13, 14. : Brady, 1884, Challenger Report, p. 400, pl. 1. fig. 13. As I have elsewhere stated (Challenger Report, p. 400), Bulimina pupoides and B. ovata (and it may be added B. affinis) “cannot be separated except by comparative characters too variable to be of any real zoological value.” I see no advantage in referrmg Williamson’s B. pupoides var. fusiformis to B. ovata, as proposed by Parker and Jones; indeed it seems to be a fairly distinct form more nearly allied to B. pupoides. B. ovata stands about midway between B. pupoides and B. pyrula. These Buliminz are common all round the coast. Typical specimens of B. ovata are very abundant in some of Mr. Wright’s material from the south-west of Ireland. Bulimina fusiformis, Williamson. Bulimina pupoides, var. fusiformis, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p- 63, pl. v. figs. 129, 130 + presli, var. ovata, Parker and Jones, 1862, Carpenter’s Introd. Foram., Appendix, p. 311. 7 distributed. Bulimina pyrula, dOrbigny. Bulimana pyrula, @Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 184, pl. xi. figs. 9, 10. South-west of Ireland ; small specimens, fairly typical, at 40 fathoms, larger examples at 160 and 200 fathoms (Wright). Bulimina marginata, dOrbigny. Bulimina marginata, VOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 269, No. 4, pl. xii. figs. 10-12. _ pupoides, var. marginata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 62, pl. v. figs. 126, 127. Common. Bulimina aculeata, d’Orbigny. Bulimina aculeata, VOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 269, No. 7 -—Soldani, Testaceosraphia, vol. i. pt. 2, p. 118, pl. exxvii. fig. I; pl. exxx. fig. vv. 898 Transactions of the Society. Bulimina pupoides, vax. spinulosa, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p- 62, pl. v. fig. 1 Widely distributed but not so common as the last-named species, from which it is often with difficulty separable. Bulimina convoluta, Williamson. Bulimina pupordes, var. convoluta, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 68, pl. v. figs. 182, 138. Shetland, Skye (Williamson) ; an exceedingly rare form. Bulimina subteres, Brady. Bulimina presl, var. elegantissima, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. cly. p. 374, pl. xv. figs. 12-17. subteres, Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. N.S. OD: Shetland, west coast of Scotland, Irish Sea, north and west coasts of Ireland, and elsewhere. Bulimina elegans, dOrbigny. Bulimina elegans, dOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. Pp 270, No. 10 -—Modele, No. 9. = _ Siddall, 1886, Proce. ite Phil. Soc. Leen vol. xl. Appendix, p. 55. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; south-west of Ireland (Wright). Bulimina elegantissima, d’Orbigny. Bulimina elegantissima, d’Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Meérid., p. 51, pl. vu. figs. 18, 14. ; A Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Brit., p. 64, pl. v. fios, 134, 135. Sparsely distributed all round the coast. Bulimina squamigera, d’Orbigny. Bulimina squamigera, VOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 137, pl. 1. figs. 22-24. ee Ba Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. u. p. 49. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall). Vireuuina, d’Orbigny. Virgulina schreibersiana, Cajzek. Virgulina schrecbersiana, Ozjzek, 1847, Haidinger’s Naturw. AbhandL., vol. i. p. 147, pl. xi. figs. 18-21. Bulimina pupoides, var. compressa, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. ou Br., p. 63, pl. v. fig. 131. Generally distributed. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 899 Borrvina, d’Orbigny. Bolivina punetata, d’Orbigny. Bolivina punctata, VOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 68, pl. viii. figs. 10-12. 2 9 Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 468, pl. xlvii. fig. 9. Generally distributed. Bolivina plicata, dOrbigny. Bolivina plicata, @Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 62, pl. viii. figs. 4—7. jg » Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. p- 302, pl. xii. fig. 7. Found sparingly at a considerable number of localities, often in brackish water. Bulimina buchiana, @Orbigny. Bulimina buchiana, VOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 186, pl. xi. figs. 15-18. Me é Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 610. South-west of Ireland, 48 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Bolivina costata, d@Orbigny. Bolivina costata, dOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 62, pl. viii. figs. 8, 9. . » Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. . 302. In shallow-water mud, Eastbourne, Sussex (Parker). Bolivina difformis, Williamson, sp. Textularia variabilis, var. difformis, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 77, pl. vi. figs. 166, 167. i, agglutinans, var. difformis, Parker and Jones, 1862, Car- penter’s Introd. Foram., Appendix, p. 311. Bolivina pygmxa, Brady, 1884, Challenger Report, p. 421, pl. liii. figs. 5, 6. This is doubtless, as Messrs. Balkwill and Wright observe, a true Bolivina ; and if so, the Bolivina pygmeza of the ‘ Challenger’ Report may be merged into the same species. It is a comparatively rare form on the British coast. Williamson gives no localities. It is, however, recorded from Shetland (Brady, Waller); estuary of the Dee (Siddall); Mount’s Bay (Millett); Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); Galway (Balkwill and Millett); and the south-west of Ireland (Wright). 900 Transactions of the Society. Bolivina dilatata, Reuss. Bolivina dilatata, Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. 1. p. 381, pl. xlviii. fig. 15. Textularia variabilis, var. spathulata, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 76, pl. vi. figs. 164, 165. Bolivina dilatata, Robertson, 1880, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, vol. Vs ps 12, Torquay, Shetland (Williamson); Mount’s Bay (Millett) ; Portree Bay, Skye (Robertson); Irish Sea, very rare (Balkwill and Wright) ; south-west of Ireland, common (Wright). Bolivina levigata, Williamson, sp. Textularia variabilis, var. levigata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br, p. Us, pl. v1. tig: 168: Bolivina textilarioides, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 81, pl. x. fig. 1. ie Bs Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 334. Off Dublin coast, rare (Balkwill and Wright); Mount’s Bay (Millett) ; south-west of Ireland (Wright) ; shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett). Messrs. Balkwill and Millett are probably correct in associating Williamson’s Teatularia variabilis, var. levigata with Reuss’s better known species. The change of name, however, entails a certain amount of inconvenience, as the term “levigata” has been recently used by Karrer for a somewhat different modification of the type. Bolivina znariensis, Costa, sp. Brizalina senariensis, Costa, 1856, Atti dell’ Accad. Pont., vol. vii. (Os Pe Ob see ates, IL Boliwina costata, Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. 11. p. 95. es anariensis, Id., 1886, Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl. Appendix, p. 56. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall). Sub-family 3. Cassidulinine. Cassipunina, d’Orbigny. Cassidulina levigata, dOrbigny. Cassidulina levigata, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 282, No. 1, pl. xv. figs. 4, 5 ;—Modele, No. 41. Ze * Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 68, pl. vi. figs. 141, 142. Rare at depths of less than 30 fathoms or thereabouts, but compara- tively common in deeper water off Shetland, the west of Scotland, and the west and south of Ireland. No good purpose is served by attempting to separate Cassidulina Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 901 pulchella, VOrbigny, from the typical C. levigata; a few specimens with the sharp peripheral edge becoming slightly carinate are generally met with where the typical form abounds. Cassidulina crassa, d Orbigny. Cassidulina crassa, dOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 56, pl. vi. figs. 18-20. a obtusa, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 69, pl. vi. figs. 143, 144. Distribution similar to that of C. levigata, but it appears to frequent somewhat shallower water, and is not unfrequently found under such conditions where its congener is absent. The Cassidulina oblonga of Reuss cannot be separated from this species. Cassidulina bradyz, Norman. Cassidulina bradyi (Norman MS.), Wright, 1880, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club (1879-80) Appendix, p. 152. rr » Brady, 1884, Challenger Report, p. 451, pl. liv. figs. 6-10. 8 South and west of Ireland, 54 to 120 fathoms (Norman, Wright, Brady). Family VI. CHILOSTOMELLIDA. CHILOSTOMELLA, Reuss. Chilostomella ovoidea, Reuss. Chilostomella ovoidea, Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. i. p. 380, pl. xlviii. fig. 12. a “ Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix. N.S. p. 66, pl. viii. figs. 11, 12. Off Valentia, 112 fathoms (Norman) ; south-west of Ireland, 48 to 110 fathoms (Wright). Family VI. LAGENIDZ. Sub-family 1. Lagenine. Lacena, Walker and Boys. Lagena globosa, Montagu, sp. Vermiculum globosum, Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit., p. 523. Entosolenia globosa, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 8, pl. i. fig. 15, 16. Common. Lagena levis, Montagu, sp. Vermiculum leve, Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit., p. 524. Lagena vulgaris, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 4, pl. 1. figs. 5, 5a. Common. 902 Transactions of the Society. Lagena clavata, VOrbigny, sp. Oolina clavata, d Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 24, pl. 1. figs. 2, 3. Lagena vulgaris, var. clavata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br, Pp. 9, ple i fe, 6. The fusiform, pointed variety of L. levis, and probably equally common. Lagena gracillima, Seguenza, sp. Amphorina gracillima, Seguenza, 1862, Foram. Monotal. Mess., p. 51, plow. fis or: Lagena gracillima, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 4. Not unfrequent on muddy bottoms. Lagena aspera, Reuss. Lagena aspera, Reuss, 1861, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. xliv. p- 305, pl. 1. fig. 5. » siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. 1. p. 48. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; Dublin coast and Trish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); Galway (Balkwill and Millett); Killybegs Harbour (Wright). Lagena hispida, Reuss. Lagena hispida, Reuss, 1858, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell., VOL Patots » Jeffreys, Brady, 1866, Report Brit. Assoc, Nottingham Meeting,—Trans. p. 70. ; West of Scotland, and various points on the coast of Ireland, rare ; estuary of the Dee, rare. Lagena jeffreysvi appears to have no distinctive characters sufficiently constant to entitle it to separate treatment. Lagena lineata, Williamson, sp. Entosolena globosa, var. lineata, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., po, plaatie nd. Lagena caudata, Packer and Jones, 1862, Carpenter’s Introd. Foram., Appendix, p. 309. Widely distributed. Lagena distoma, Parker and Jones. Lagena distoma, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 467, pl. xlvui. fig. 6. Lagena sulcata, var. distoma, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv. p. 356, pl. xiii. fig. 20. Found sparingly all round the coast. Lagena curvilineata, Balkwill and Wright. Lagena cwrvilineata, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish. Acad., vol, Xxviil. (Science) p. 088, pl. xiv. figs. 21-24, Trish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; shore sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett) ; Loch Fyne (Robertson) ; Mount’s Bay (Mallett). Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 903 Lagena suleata, Walker and Jacob, sp. Serpula (Lagena) sulcata, Walker and Jacob, 1798, Adams’s Essays, Kanmacher’s ed., p. 634, pl. xiv. fig. 5. Lagena vulgaris, var. perlucida (pars), Williamson, 1885, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 5, pl. 1. fig. 8. var. striata, Id. Ibid., p. 6. pl. i. fig. 10. var. interrupta, Id. Ibid., p. 7, pl. i. fig. 11. » ” Common. The apiculate forms of Lagena sulcata and L. costata constitute the Amphorina lyellii and A. costata of Seguenza ; and it is probable, as suggested by the Rev. Dr. Norman, that portions of Nodosaria sealaris, var. separans have also been assigned to this group. Lagena williamsoni, Alcock, sp. Entosolenia williamsoni, Aleock, 1865, Proc. Lit. and Phil. Soc. Man- chester, vol. iv. p. 195. Lagena williamsoni, Wright, 1877, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1876-77, Appendix, p. 104, pl. iv. fig. 14. Common. Lagena costata, Williamson, sp. Entosolenia costata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 9, pl. i fig. 18. Lagena costata, Wright, 1877, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1876-77, Appendix, p. 103, pl. iv. figs. 11-13. Not uncommon in dredgings from moderate depths. Lagena striata, dOrbigny, sp. Oolina striata, dOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 21, pl. v. fig. 12. Lagena vulgaris, var. substriata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 7, pl. i. fig. 14. Common. Lagena gracilis, Williamson. Lagena gracilis, Williamson, 1848, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. i. p. 13, pl. 1. fig. 5. vulgaris, var. gracilis, Id. 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 7, pl. 1. figs. 12, 13. Generally distributed, though scarcely so common as L. striata. ” Lagena semistriata, Williamson. Lagena striata, var. senistriata, Williamson, 1848, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. i. p. 14, pl. 1. figs. 9, 10. vulgaris, var. semistriata, 1d. 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 6, pl. 1. fig. 9. Common. >? 904 Transactions of the Society. Lagena striatopunctata, Parker and Jones. Lagena sulcata, var. striatopunctata, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv. p. 350, pl. xii. figs. 25-27. » striatopunctata, Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. i. p. 53. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall); Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; Strangford Lough (Wright). Lagena feildeniana, Brady. Lagena fieldeniana, Brady, 1878, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. i. p. 434, pl. xx. fig. 4. J i Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviil. (Science) p. 339, pl. xiv. fig. 19. Trish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall). Lagena erenata, Parker and Jones. Lagena crenata, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. cly. p. 420, pl. xviii. fig. 4. - Brady, 1866, Report Brit. Assoc., Nottingham Meeting, Trans., p. 70. Dog’s Bay, Connemara (Alcock); Hebrides (Brady); Shetland (Waller); Dublin Bay (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Ireland (Wright). Lagena squamosa, Montagu, sp. Vermiculum squamosum, Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit., p. 526, pl. xiv. fig. 2. Entosolenia squamosa Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 12, pl. 1. fig. 29. Common. Lagena hexagona, Williamson, sp. Entosolenia squamosa, var. hexagona, Williamson, 1848, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. i. p. 20, pl. ui. fig. 23. 2) ss iy Id., 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 13, pl. 1. fig. 32. vi 3 var. scalariformis, Id., Ibid., p. 13, pl. 1. fig. 30. Common. Lagena melo, d@Orbigny, sp. Oolina melo, d’Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 20, pl. v. fig. 9. Entosolenia squamosa, var. catenulata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 18, pl. 1. fig. 31. Probably widely distributed, but characteristic specimens are certainly less common than the allied reticulate forms. Lagena levigata, Reuss, sp. Fissurina levigata, Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. 1. p. 366, pl. xlvi. fig. 1. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 905 Lagena levigata, Robertson, 1883, Trans. Geol. Soc. Glasgow, vol. vii. p. 24. Common. Trifacial specimens of this species have been named by Seguenza Trigonulina oblonga, by Siddall Lagena trigono-oblonga, and by Balk- will and Millett Lagena trigono-levigata. Such examples are rare, but are occasionally met with when the typical form is plentiful. Lagena faba, Balkwill and Millett. Lagena faba, Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr. and Nat. Sci., vol iu. p. 81, pl. i. fig. 10. Galway (Balkwill and Millett). The authors above quoted describe trifacial specimens of the same variety under the name Lagena trigono-faba. A very similar form to the Fisswrina aperta of Seguenza, the latter being slightly carinate. I greatly doubt the wisdom of attempting to separate such specimens from Lagena leviguta and L. marginata. Lagena marginata, Walker and Boys. Serpula (Lagena) marginata, Walker and Boys, 1784, Test. Min., p. 2, pl i fie, 7. Entosolenta marginata (pars), Williamson, 1848, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. i. p. 17, pl. u. figs. 15, 16. 35 Ls (pars), Id., 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br. p. 10, pl. i. fig. 21. Common. Trifacial specimens are described under the name Trigonulina globosa by Seguenza, and as Lagena trigono-elliptica by Balkwill and Millett. The mucronate form is the Fisswrina pedunculata of Seguenza, and the Lagena marginata, var. pedunculata of Balkwill and Millett. Lagena lucida, Williamson, sp. Entosolenia marginata, var. lucida, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 10, pl. 1. figs. 22, 23. Not uncommon. : A variety of L. levigata, broadest near the base. Apiculate speci- mens of the same form constitute the Fisswrina acuta of Reuss. Lagena quadrata, Williamson, sp. Entosolenia marginata, var. quadrata, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 11, pl. 1. figs. 27, 28. Scarcely separable in point of distribution from the other varieties of L. marginata. Partially carinate specimens are named Lagena quadrata, var. semialata by Messrs. Balkwill and Millett. Lagena bicarinata, Terquem, sp. Fissurina bicarinata, Terquem, 1882, Mém. Soc. géol. France, sér. 3, vol. i. Mém. IIT. p. 31, pl. 1. fig. 24. 906 Transactions of the Society. Lagena bicarinata, Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ Microsc. and Nat. Sci., vol. 11. p. 82, pl. i. fig. 9. Shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett); Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; south-west of Ireland (Wright) ;—very rare. Trifacial specimens constitute the Lagena trigono-bicarinata of Messrs. Balkwill and Millett’s memoir. Lagena orbignyana, Seguenza, sp. Fissuwrina orbignyana, Seguenza, 1862, Foram. Monotal. Mess., p. 66, pl. 11. figs. 25, 26. Entosolenia marginata (pars), Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., os G), Tole th wiles US), 20) Common. The trifacial form is named Lagena trigono-marginata by Parker and Jones, and Lagena trigono-orbignyana by Balkwill and Millett ; and quadrifacial specimens Lagena quadrigono-orbignyana by the latter authors. Lagena castrensis, Schwager. Lagena castrensis, Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped., geol. Theil, vol. i. p- 208, pl. v. fig. 22. Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 341, pl. xu. figs. 20, 21. Off Lambay, 45 to 50 fathoms, very rare (Balkwill and Wright). 39 93 Lagena clathrata, Brady. Lagena clathrata, Brady, 1884, Challenger Report, p. 485, pl. Ix. | fig. 4 g. 4. Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Microsc. and Nat. Sei, vol. mi. p. 82, pl. u. fie. TA. Shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett). The same authors record quadrifacial specimens under the name of Lagena quadrigono-clathrata. 39 9) Lagena pulchella, Brady. Lagena pulchella, Brady, 1866, Report Brit. Assoc., Nottingham Meet- ing, Trans., p. 70. Id., 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 204, ple 12) ie. I. Granton Harbour, Fintry Bay, Cumbrae (Brady) ; Oban (Robertson) ; shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett); Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright). oe Balkwill and Millett have also trifacial specimens which they name Lagena trigono-pulchella. 39 bb Lagena lagenoides, Williamson, sp. Entosolenia marginata, var. lagenoides, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 11, pl. 1. figs, 25, 26. Sparsely distributed all round the coast. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 907 Messrs. Balkwill and Wright regard the form which I have named Lagena trigono-ornata (Challenger Report, p. 483, pl. Ixi. fig. 14), as the trifacial modification of this species. To me the ‘ Challenger’ speci- mens appear to be in closer relationship with Lagena ornata, Will.; it is probable, however, that both varieties (if they are separable) are represented in the trifacial series. Lagena lagenoides, var. tenuistriata, Brady. Lagena tubulifera, var. tenwistriata, Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. N.S. p. 61. » lagenoides, var. tenuistriata, Id., 1884, Challenger Report, p. 479, pl. lx. figs. 11, 15, 16. 5 . ¥ Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Microse. and Nat. Sci., vol. i. p. 82, pl. i. fig. 12. Shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett); occasionally met with round the Irish coast (Wright). From the same locality the last-named authors obtained trifacial specimens which they call Lagena trigono-tenwstriata. Lagena ornata, Williamson, sp. Entosolenia marginata, var. ornata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Be pally. pla fies 24. Whitehaven ; Shetland (Williamson). This form has been so much associated with D. lagenoides, that it is difficult to lay down the distribu- tion of either as distinct from the other. Lagena fimbriata, Brady. Lagena fimbriata, Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. N.S. 61 p. 61. 5 5 Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Microsc. and Nat. Sci., vol. iii. p. 82, pl. ii. fig. 5. Shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett); south-west of Ireland, 40 to 110 fathoms (Wright). Sub-family 2. Nodosarine. Noposaria, Lamarck. Nodosaria levigata, dOrbigny. Nodosaria (Glandulina) levigata, VOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 252, No. 1, pl. x. figs. 1-3. Glandulina levigata, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 468, pl. xlviui. fig. 7. Shetland (Waller, Brady); Cumbrae (Robertson); south-west of Treland (Wright). Nodosaria rotundata, Reuss, sp. Glandulina rotundata, Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. i. p. 366, pl. xlvi. fig. 2. 908 Transactions of the Society. Nodosaria (Glandulina) rotundata, Wright, 1886, Proce. BR. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 612. South-west of Ireland, 79 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Nodosaria radicula, Linné, sp. Nautilus radicula, Linné, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed., p. 1164, 285 ;— 1788, Ibid. 13th (Gmelin’s) ed., vol. i. pt. 6, p. 3373, No. 18. Nodosaria radicula, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 8. West of Scotland (Brady); estuary of the Dee (Siddall); off the Isle of Man (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Ireland (Wright) ; in all localities very rare. Nodosaria pyrula, d Orbigny. Nodosaria pyrula, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vi. p. 258, No. 13 -—-Soldani, Testac., vol. ii. Pp: @;, pl. x. figs. b, c. es 2 Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 17, pl. i. fig. 39. Dentalina guttifera, Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 296, pl. xu. fig. 2 Found sparingly in dredged sands from almost every part of the coast. Curved specimens of this form have been recorded under the name of Dentalina guttifera. Nodosaria consobrina, dOrbigny, sp. Dentalina consobrina, d’Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 46, pl. ii. figs. 1-3. cS is Robertson, 1875, Report Brit. Assoc., Bristol Meeting, p- 190. Durham coast (Robertson) ; Trish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; south- west of Ireland (Wright). Nodosaria humilis, Roemer. Nodosaria humilis, Roemer, 1841, Verstein. Norddeutsch. Kreid., pt. u1. p; 95; pli xv. fig: G: » siddall, 1879, Cat. Brit. Rec. For., p. 6. Shetland (Brady). Perhaps a needless species, the specimens of which might be assigned either to NV. radicula or to N. (Gl.) zequalis. Nodosaria communis, dOrbigny. Nodosaria (Dentalina) communis, dOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vu. p. 254, No. 35. Dentalina subareuata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 18, pl. i. figs. 40, 41. Generally distributed. Short stout specimens, with few chambers, have sometimes been separately treated under the name Dentalina brevis, Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 909 Nodosaria pauperata, dOrbigny, sp. Dentalina pauperata, dOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 46, pl. 1. figs. 57, 58. Robertson, 1875, Report Brit. Assoc., Bristol Meeting, p. 190. Found occasionally with the allied unornamented varieties. 39 9 Nodosaria hispida, dOrbigny. Nodosaria hispida, @Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 35, pl. 1. figs. 24, 25. Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science), p. 348, pl. xii. fig. 31. Irish Sea, off the Isle of Man (Elcock, Balkwill and Wright) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall). 9) 9 Nodosaria scalaris, Batsch, sp. Nautilus (Orthoceras) scalaris, Batsch, 1791, Conchyl. des Seesandes, No. 4, pl. 1. fig. 4. Nodosaria radicula, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 15, pl. ui. figs. 36-38. Generally distributed. Mr. Wright reports specimens of N. scalaris, var. separans, from south-west of Ireland, 40 to 200, fathoms. Nodosaria raphanus, Linné, sp. Nautilus raphanus, Linné, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed., p. 1164, 283 ;— 1788, Ibid., 13th (Gmelin’s) ed., p. 33872, No. 16. Dentalina subarcuata, var. jugosa (pars), Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 20, pl. 11. fig. 43. Shetland (Brady); south-west of Ireland, 100 to 200 fathoms (Wright). Nodosaria raphanistrum, Linné, sp., has been sometimes admitted to the list of British recent species on the evidence of one of the figures in Prof. Williamson’s work (PL.ii.fig.44). The drawing in question is from a broken specimen, and is associated by the author with two others, which are now regarded as representing Nodosaria obliqua and N. raphanus respec- tively. The habitat is not given, and it appears even possible that the specimen, like some other Nodosarine on the same plate, may be a derived fossil. Whilst there is this uncertainty it is evident that N. raphanistrum is better omitted from our list. Nodosaria obliqua, Linné, sp. Nautilus obliquus, Linné, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed., p. 1163, 281 ;— 1788, Ibid., 13th (Gmelin’s) ed., p. 3372, No. 14. Dentalina subarcuata, var. jugosa (pars), Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 20, pl. ii. fig. 42. 2 bie lamar Robertson, 1875, Report. Brit. Assoc., Bristol eeting, p. 190. Widely distributed, but the number of specimens generally small. 1887. 3.0 910 Transactions of the Society. Specimens with oblique costa cannot be separated specifically from the straight-ribbed forms ; every shade of variation in this particular is to be met with. Dentalina obliqua, “ d’Orbigny,” is noticeable in several British lists, a perpetuation probably of an error of my own, the present form being intended. D’Orbigny’s “obliqua” is now known under Neugeboren’s name Nodosaria (Dentalina) mucronata, and there is no certain evidence of the occurrence of this variety on our shores. Lineviina, d’Orbigny. Lingulina carinata, dOrbigny. Lingulina carinata, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 257, No. 1 ;—Modele, No. 26. om ie Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 14, pl. u. figs. 833-35. Shetland, Skye, Plymouth Sound (Williamson) ; Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett); Killybegs Harbour (Wright). Vacinuxina, d’Orbigny. Vaginulina legumen, Linné, sp. Nautilus legumen, Linné, 1758, Syst. Nat., 10th ed., p. 711, No. 248 ;—- 1767, Ibid., 12th ed., p. 1164, No. 288. Dentalina legumen, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 21, pl. u. fig. 45. Widely distributed. Vaginulina linearis, Montagu, sp: Nautilus linearis, Montagu, 1808, Test. Brit., Suppl., p. 87, pl. xxx. fig. 9. Dentalina legumen, var. linearis, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 23, pl. ii. figs. 46-48. Widely distributed. RaABpoGontium, Reuss. Rhabdogonium tricarinatum, dOrbigny, sp. Vaginulina tricarinata, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 258, No. 4;—Modele, No. 4. Rhabdogonium tricarinatum, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 344, pl. xii. figs. 17, 18. Lambay ? (Balkwill and Wright) ; south-west of Ireland, 100 to 200 fathoms (Wright). Mareinvuuina, d’Orbigny. Marginulina glabra, dOrbigny. Marginulina glabra, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vil. p. 259, No. 6 ;—Modéle, No. 55. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 911 Marginulina glabra, Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 296, pl. xii. fig. 3. Occasional specimens at many points both of the British and Irish coast. Marginulina costata, Batsch, sp. Nautilus (Orthoceras) costatus, Batsch, 1791, Conchyl. des Seesandes, 2 pl), fig. 1. Mae iiiulina raphanus, Brady, 1866, Report Brit. Assoc., Nottingham Meeting, Trans., p. 70. Hebrides (Brady); estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Ireland (Wright); specimens rare and except in the last-named locality usually small. CrISTELLARIA, Lamarck. Cristellaria elongata, Williamson. Cristellaria subarcuatula, var. elongata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 30, pl. i. fig. 62. Marginulina lituus, Parker and Jones, 1862, Carpenter’s Introd. Foram., Appendix, p. 310. Killybegs Harbour (Wright). Williamson gives no locality for his specimen. In so far as the generic distinction is of any value, Williamson’s figure is that of a Cristellaria, not a Marginulina. It differs little, if at all, from the Cristellaria obtusata of Reuss. Cristellaria crepidula, Fichtel and Moll, sp. Nautilus crepidula, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Mier., p. 107, pl. xix. figs. g—7. Cristellaria subarcuatula, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 29, pl. ii. figs. 56, 57. Widely distributed. Cristellaria rotulata, Lamarck, sp. Lentieulites rotulata, Lamarck, 1804, Ann. du Muséum, vol. v. p. 188, No. 3 ;—Tablean Encyel. et Méth. , pl. eecelxvi. fig. 5 5. Cristellaria calear (typica), Williamson, "1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br. pag pl. ii. figs. 52, 53. Widely distributed. Cristellaria cultrata, Montfort, sp. Robulus eultratus, Montfort, 1808, Conchyl. Systém., vol. i. p. 214, 54° genre. Cristellaria cultrata, Brady, 1866, Report Brit. Assoc., Nottingham Meeting, Trans. 5 p00: Carinate Cristellarie are rare in the British seas. Occasional specimens are found associated with C. rotulata, but they are invariably small and the peripheral keel only slightly developed. 30 2 912 ' Transactions of the Society. Cristellaria vortex, Fichtel and Moll, sp. Nautilus vortex, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 33, pl. ii. figs. d—7. Cristellaria vortex, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 8. Small starved specimens, doubtfully referrible to this species, from the west coast of Scotland. Cristellaria variabilis, Reuss. Cristellaria variabilis, Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. i. p. 869, pl. xlvi. figs. 15, 16. Ff - Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 612. South-west of Ireland, 100 to 200 fathoms, rare (Wright). Cristellaria ttalica, Defrance, sp. Saracenaria italica, Defrance, 1824, Dict. Sci. Nat., vol. xxxi. p. 177 ;— vol. xlvii. p. 844 ;—Atlas Conch., pl. xiii. fig. 6. Cristellaria subarcuatula, var. scapha, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 30, pl. 11. figs. 60, 61. Estuary of the Dee, rare (Siddall). Williamson gives no locality for the broken specimen figured in his work. AmMpPHiIcorYyNE, Schlumberger. Amphicoryne fala, Jones and Parker, sp. Marginulina falz, Jones and Parker, 1860, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xvi. p. 802, No. 28. South-west of Ireland, 79 to 400 fathoms, rare (Wright). Sub-family 3. Polymorphinine. Potymorpuina, d’Orbigny. Polymorphina lactea, Walker and Jacob, sp. Serpula lactea, Walker and Jacob, 1798, Adams’s Essays, Kanmacher’s ed., p. 634, pl. xiv. fig. 4. E Polymorphina lactea (typica), pars, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 70, pl. vi. fig. 147. 9 » var. communes, Id., Ibid., p. 72, pl. vi. figs. 153-155. Generally distributed. Polymorphina gibba, dOrbigny. Polymorphina (Globulina) gibba, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 266, No. 20 ;— Modéle, No. 63. Mi gibba, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 5. _Scarcely separable either in characters or distribution from the fore- going species. Futile attempts have been made (by myself amongst others) to distinguish the more or less compressed specimens both of Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 913 P. lactea and P. gibba by varietal names—P. lactea, var. amygdaloides, Reuss, and P. gibba, var. xqualis, d’Orbigny—respectively ; but the distinction has not been found to possess the least zoological value. Polymorphina problema, @Orbigny. Polymorphina (Guttulina) problema, dOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol, vii. p.266, No.14;—Modele, No. 61. H FA communis, Id., Ibid., p. 266, No. 15, pl. xii. figs. 1-4 ;—Modele, No. 62. - communis, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 5. Widely distributed. It is quite impossibie to separate Polymorphina communis from P. problema, and as d’Orbigny’s model of the latter form presents the best developed characters, I have followed Reuss in accepting it as the type. Polymorphina lactea, var. oblonga, Williamson. Polymorphina lactea, var. oblonga, Williamson, 1858, Kee. For. Gt. Br., p. 71, pl. vi. figs. 149, 1494. Widely distributed. I have for the moment retained the trivial name “ oblonga” just as given by Williamson, that is to say varietally. The same term had been used twice previously in connection with the genus, namely by Roemer (Neues Jahrb. fiir Min., &., 1838, p. 386, pl. ui. fig. 54) and by dOrbigny (For. Foss. Vien., p. 232, pl. xii. figs. 29-31). Roemer’s specimens, so far as can be judged from his figure, may be disposed of by referring them to P. communis or P. problema; and those from the Vienna Basin might be fitly assigned to the earlier d’Orbignyan species P. soldanii (Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vi. p. 265, No. 12). If this course be adopted Williamson’s form, which has tolerably distinctive characters, will stand as Polymorphina oblonga. Polymorphina thouini, d Orbigny. Polymorphina thouini, VOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 265, No. 8 ;—Modele, No. 23. ra » Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sei. pt. u. p. 48. Estuary of the Dee, very rare (Siddall). Polymorphina lanceolata, Reuss. Polymorphina lanceolata, Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell., vol. iii. p. 88, pl. vi. tig. 50. fusiformis, pars, Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. vol. xxvu. p. 219, pl. xxxix. fig. 5, b,'¢. 35 lanceolata, Robertson, 1882, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soe. Glasgow, vol. v. p. 268. Robin Hood’s Bay, Yorkshire; Loch Fyne (Robertson) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Ireland (Wright). Probably this list is far from complete. 914 Transactions of the Society. Polymorphina eylindroides, Roemer. Polymorphina cylindroides, Roemer, 1838, Neues Jahrb. fir Min., &., p. 385, pl. in. fig. 26. et lactea, a He Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Dips aly, ple vis fic. 148. Skye (Williamson) ; Shetland (Waller). Polymorphina compressa, d’Orbigny. Polymorphina compressa, VOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 233, pl. xi. figs. 82-34. 3 lactea (typica), pars, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 70, pl. vi. figs. 145, 146. Generally distributed. Polymorphina complanata, dOrbigny. Polymorphina complanata, V@Orbigny, 1846, For. Fos. Vien., p. 234, pl. xii. figs. 25-30. a a Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Microsc. and Nat. Sci., vol. in. p. 84, pl. iv. fig. 9. Shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett). Polymorphina sororza, Reuss. Polymorphina (Guttulina) sororia, Reuss, 1862, Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg., sér. 2, vol. xv. p. 151, pl. 1. figs. 25-29. He sororia, Robertson, 1882, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, vol. v. p. 268. The cuspidate variety of this form has been dredged by Mr. Robert- son in Loch Fyne, and by Mr. Wright off the south-west of Ireland. Polymorphina rotundata, Bornemann, sp. Guttulina rotundata, Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell., vol. vii. p. 346, pl. xvii. fig. 3. Polymorphina rotundata, Robertson, 1882, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soe. Glasgow, vol. v. p. 268. Oban and Loch Fyne (Robertson); north of Ireland (Wright) ; Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright). Polymorphina coneava, Williamson. Polymorphina lactea, var. concava, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Bry p> (2, pl. vietige aloe 152. Brixham (Williamson) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; South Donegal (Wright) ; south-west of Treland, 110 fathoms (Wright) Mount’s Bay (Millett) ; Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright). Polymorphina myristiformis, Williamson. Polymorphina myristiformis, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p- 73, pl. vi. figs. 156, 157. Widely distributed, and in certain localities very common. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 915 Polymorphina spinosa, dOrbigny, sp. Globulina spinosa, d’Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 230, pl. xiii. figs. 23, 24. Polymorphina spinosa, Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. il. p. 48. Estuary of the Dee, very rare (Siddall); Dublin coast, very rare (Balkwill and Wright). Uviaerina, d’Orbigny. Uvigerina pygmea, d Orbigny. Uvigerina pygmexa, dOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 269, No. 2, pl. xii. figs. 8, 9 ;—Modele, No. 67. i as Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 66, pl. v. figs. 158, 139. Not uncommon at depths of 30 fathoms and more; rarely met with in shallower water. Uvigerina angulosa, Williamson. Uvigerina angulosa, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 67, pl. v. fig. 140. Much more frequent in our seas than the typical form U. pygmea, and occurring in shallower water. Uvigerina canariensis, d@Orbigny. Uvigerina eanariensis, d’ Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 138, pl. i. figs. 25-27. 3 irregularis, Brady, 1865, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durham, vol. i. p. 100, pl. xii. fig. 5. Off Holy Island (Brady); estuary of the Dee (Siddall); south-west of Ireland (Wright) ; in all of these localities very rare. Saarina, Parker and Jones. Sagrina dimorpha, Parker and Jones. Uvigerina (Sagrina) dimorpha, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. ely. p. 420, pl. xvii. fig. 18. Mr. Robertson has tolerably well-marked specimens of this form from low-water, Howport, Girvan. Sub-family 4. Ramulinine. Ramutina, Rupert Jones. (?) Ramulina globulifera, Brady. Ramulina globulifera, Brady, 1869, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix. NS. p. 58, pl. viii. figs. 52, 35. + sp. Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Microsc. and Nat. Sci., vol. ili. p. 83, pl. iv. fig. 7. Shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett). 916 Transactions of the Society. I have placed the broken specimen, figured by the authors above named, provisionally under this species, but it is impossible to speak with much confidence on so slender a groundwork. Family VII GLOBIGERINIDA. GuLopigERINA, d’Orbigny. Globigerina bullocdes, d’Orbigny. Globigerina bulloides, dOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vi. p. 277, No. 1 ;—Modeéles, No. 17 (young) and No. 76. af ¥ Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 56, pl. v. figs. 116-118. Comparatively rare on the east coast ; common at some distance from land on the Atlantic shores. Globigerina inflata, d’Orbigny. , Globigerina inflata, @Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 134, pl. i. figs. 7-9. - Ks Wright, 1881, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1880-81, Appendix, p. 186. South Donegal (Wright); Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); south- west of Ireland (Wright) ; shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett) ; Mount’s Bay, Cornwall (Millett); Shetland (Brady). Globigerina rubra, d’Orbigny. Globigerina rubra, VOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 94, pl. iv. . figs. 12-14. BS ee Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 613. South-west of Ireland, 100 to 200 fathoms, rare (Wright). Globigerina xquilateralis, Brady. Globigerina sxquilateralis, Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol, xix. N.S. p. 2865. ~ 3 Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 613. | South-west of Ireland, 48-120 fathoms, rare (Wright) ; Shetland (Brady). Onpuuina, d’Orbigny. Orbulina universa, d’Orbigny. Orbulina universa, d’Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 3, pl. 1. fig. 1. * i Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 2, pl. i. fig. 4. Rare near land, but im deeper water not uncommon, especially on the south and west coasts, Shallow-water specimens often of brown colour. Double specimens, the Globigerina bilobata of d’Orbigny, occasionally met with where the species is plentiful, Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 917 PutventA, Parker and Jones. Pullenia spheroides, dOrbigny, sp. Nonionina sphzroides, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 293, No. 1 ;—Modéle, No. 43. Pullenia spheroides, Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. ii. p. 49. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright). Pullenia quingueloba, Reuss. Nonionina quinqueloba, Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell., vol. i. p. 71, pl. v. fig. 31. Pullenia quinqueloba, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxvii. (Science) p. 348, pl. 12, figs. 29 a, b. Lambay Deep, 45 fathoms (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Treland (Wright) ; Shetland (Brady). Spozrorwina, d’Orbigny. Sphzroidina bulloides, @Orbigny. Sphxroidina bulloides, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 267, No. 1 ;—Modéle, No. 65. Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 613. South-west of Ireland, 54 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Mr. Siddall informs me that the specimen assigned to this species in the Dee Catalogue of 1878 appears to be a starved example of Sph. dehiscens, under which it is now placed. 3” 3) Sphzroidina dehiscens, Parker and Jones. Sphexroidina dehiscens, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. ely. p- 369, pl. xix. fig. 5. Siddall, 1886, Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Liverpool, vol. xl. Appendix, p. 58. One example from the Dee estuary (Siddall). 39 9 Family IX. ROTALIDA. Sub-family 1. Spirillinine. SPIRILLINA, Ehrenberg. Spirillina vivipara, Ehrenberg. Spirdllina vivipara, Ehrenberg, 1841, Abhandl. k. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p- 442, pl. ii. fig. 41. perforata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 92, pl. vii. fig. 202. Generally distributed ; specimens, however, not very common. 39 Spirillina limbata, Brady. Spirillina limbata, Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., vol. xix. N.S. p. 278, pl. viii. fig. 26. 918 Transactions of the Society. Spirillina limbata, Siddall, 1886, Proc. Lit. Phil. Soe. Liverpool, vol. xl. Appendix, p. 59. Estuary of the Dee, very rare (Siddall). Spirillina margaritifera, Williamson. Spirillina margaritifera, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 93, pl. vii. fig. 204. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall); Mounts Bay, Cornwall (Millett ; Williamson gives no locality. Spirillina tuberculata, Brady. Spirillina tubereuwlata, Brady, 1878 (in Siddall’s ‘ Foraminifera of the Dee’), Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. i. p. 49 ;—1879, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., vol. xix. N.S. p. 279, pl. vii. fig. 28. Off Eddystone (Robertson); estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; at several points off the coast of Dublin, and in the Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright). T am not by any means confident that this form, or at any rate the British specimens that have been assigned to it, can be separated from Sp. margaritifera. Some of the Challenger specimens, notably those from Kerguelen, differ strikingly from Williamson’s figure; but then Williamson had only a single specimen, and it may be questioned how far it was typical. Sub-family 2. Rotaline. Paretiia, Williamson. Patellina corrugata, Williamson. Patellina corrugata, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 46, pl. iii. figs. 86-89. Occurs at intervals all round the coast, usually on muddy bottoms. Discorpina, Parker and Jones. Discorbina globularis, dOrbigny, sp. Rosalina globularis, d@’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vil. p. 271, No. 1, pl. xiii. figs. 1-4 ;—Modeéle, No. 69. Rotalina concamerata (young), Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p- 53, pl. iv. figs. 104, 105. Common everywhere. Discorbina rosacea, dOrbigny, sp. Rotalia rosacea, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vil. p. 273, No. 15 ;—Modéle, No. 39. Rotalina mamilla, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 54, pl. iv. figs. 109-111. Widely distributed. Discorbina orbicularis, Terquem, sp. Rosalina orbicularis, Terquem, 1876, Anim. sur la Plage de Dunkerque, fase. ii. p. 75, pl. ix. fig. 4. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 919 Discorbina orbicularis, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 349, pl. xui. figs. 31-33. At several points off the Dublin coast, and in the Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); Mount’s Bay, Cornwall (Millett); shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett). Discorbina parisiensis, d’Orbigny, sp. Rosalina parisiensis, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vil. p. 271, No. 1 ;—Modéle, No. 38. Discorbina parisiensis (pars), Wright, 1877, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1876-7, Appendix, p. 105, pl. iv. fig. 1. South Donegal; Down and Antrim (Wright); Dublin coast and Trish Sea (Balkwill and Wright); shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett) ; Mount’s Bay (Millett). Discorbina wrightii, Brady. Discorbina wrightii, Brady, 1881, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlii. p. 104, pl. i. fig. 6;—Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. p. 413, pl. xxi. fig. 6. parisiensis (pars), Wright, 1877, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, 1876-7, Appendix, p. 105, pl. iv. fig. 2. Coasts of Down and Antrim, and of South Donegal (Wright) ; various points in the Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; shore-sand, Galway (Baliwill and Millett). In Mr. Siddall’s Catalogue of British Recent Foraminifera (1879), Discorbina obtusa, dOrbigny, sp., was included, on the evidence of one or two small specimens, found by myself many years ago in sands dredged amongst the Hebrides; 1 am now inclined to think, however, that these are better referred to the present closely allied species. » Discorbina tuberculata, Balkwill and Wright. Discorbina tuberculata, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviil. (Science) p. 350, pl. xiii. figs. 28-30. Off Dublin coast, and in the Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall). Discorbina berthelott, d Orbigny, sp. Rosalina bertheloti, dOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 135, pl. i. figs. 28-30. Discorbina bertheloti, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 469, pl. xlviu. fig. 10. Shetland (Brady, Waller); various points on the coast of Ireland and in the Irish Sea (Wright, Balkwill and Wright, Balkwill and Millett). Discorbina biconcava, Parker and Jones. Discorbina biconcava, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv. p- 422, pl. xix. fig. 10. 920 Transactions of the Society. Discorbina biconcava, Siddall, 1878, Proc. Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., pt. i. p- 00. Estuary of the Dee (Siddall). PLANoRBULINA, d’Orbigny. Planorbulina mediterranensis, dOrbigny. Planorbulina mediterranensis, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p- 280, No. 2, pl. xiv. figs. 4-6 ;—Modéle, No. 79. fe vulgaris, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 57, pl. v. fies. 119, 120. Generally distributed. Truncatuuina, d’Orbigny. Truncatulina refulgens, Montfort, sp. Cibicides refulgens, Montfort, 1808, Conchyl. Systém., vol. i. p. 122, 31° Genre. Truncatulina refulgens, Brady, 1865, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durham, vol. i. p. 105, pl. xii. fig. 9. Not uncommon in coarse rough sands, from 20 fathoms downwards, on the Atlantic coasts of Scotland and Ireland ; rare on the east coast. Truneatulina lobatula, Walker and Jacob, sp. Nautilus lobatulus, Walker and Jacob, 1798, Adams’s Essays, Kan- macher’s ed., p. 642, pl. xiv. fig. 36. Truncatulina lobatula, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 59, pl. v. figs. 121-123. One of the commonest British species. Specimens closely resembling a compact many-chambered variety of Truncatulina, recently described by Messrs. Parker and Jones and myself in a paper on some Foraminifera from the Abrohlos Bank (Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., vol. xii., in the press), are common in Mr. Wright’s material from south-east of Ireland. This has been named Truncatulina mundula, and the following characters are given for its identification, loc. cit. Morphologically its place is near Tr. haedingeri, or between that species and Tr. ungeriana, its nearest isomorph being Pulvinulina karstene. “ Truncatulina mundula, B. P. and J.—Test free, rotaliform ; com- posed of about three convolutions, which are evolute on the superior and completely involute on the inferior side ; the outermost whorl of the adult shell consisting of from ten to twelve segments. Superior face slightly convex or subconical, generally coarsely perforate, the sutures and periphery marked by thickening of the chamber-walls; inferior face convex, sometimes a little depressed at the umbilicus, perforations inconspicuous, sutures slightly excavated or marked by fine lines only. Diameter ~yth in. (0°42 mm.).” The Irish specimens have rather fewer chambers than above indicated, but otherwise present very similar characters. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 921 Truncatulina haidingerii, d’Orbigny, sp. Rotalina haidingerii, VOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 154, pl. viii. figs. 7-9. Planorbulina haidingerii, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol, xxiv. p. 469, pl. xlviii. fig. 11. Shetland, 79 to 90 fathoms (Brady, Waller); estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ;—the examples, so far as they have come under my notice, not very typical. Truncatulina ungeriana, dOrbigny, sp. Rotalina ungeriana, d’Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 157, pl. vii. figs. 16-18. Planorbulina ungeriana, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 469, pl. xlvii. fig. 12. Shetland, 75 to 90 fathoms (Brady, Waller); estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; south-west of Ireland (Wright). Anomatina, d’Orbigny. Anomalina coronata, Parker and Jones. Anomalina coronata, Parker and Jones, 1857, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. xix. p. 294, pl. x. figs. 15, 16. bs 44 Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 469, pl. xlvii. fig. 13. Shetland, 75 to 90 fathoms (Brady, Waller). Puntyvinuwina, Parker and Jones. Pulvinulina repanda, Fichtel and Moll, sp. Nautilus repandus, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 35, pl. ii. figs. a-d. Rotalina concamerata (mature), Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p- 52, pl. iv. figs. 101-108. The typical Pulvinulina repanda is represented by Fichtel and Moll as a Rotaline shell with its two faces nearly equally convex. ‘The form figured by Williamson, and generally met with on our shores, is much more convex on the superior side than on the inferior, and the sutures of the superior aspect are marked by a certain amonnt of external thickening or limbation. ‘lhe latter form may be distinguished as var. concamerata, Montagu, but it is impossible to separate the two by any very constant characters. I find no record of the occurrence of Pulvinulina repanda on the east: coast of England or Scotland, nor in the Irish Sea. It is not uncommon in coarse sands dredged on the north and west coasts of Scotland and Ireland, and in the English Channel. Pulvinulina concentrica, Parker and Jones. Pulvinulina concentrica, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv. p. 893 922 Transactions of the Society. Pulvinulina concentrica Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 470, pl. xlvii. fig. 14. Shetland, 75 to 90 fathoms (Brady, Waller). Pulvinulina auricula, Fichtel and Moll, sp. Nautilus awricula, var. a, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 108, pl. xx. figs. a, 0, ¢. 5 x var. 8, Id., Ibid., figs. d,e, f- Rotalina oblonga, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 51, pl. iv. figs. 98-100. Widely distributed. Pulvinulina menardit, dOrbigny, sp. Rotalia menardii, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vil. p. 273, No. 26,;—Modéle, No. 10. Pulvinulina menardii, Brady, 1863, Report Brit. Assoc., Newcastle- upon-Tyne Meeting, Trans. p. 101. Off Laxey, Isle of Man, 15 fathoms (Brady) ; Irish Sea and coast of Dublin (Balkwill and Wright). Pulvinulina canariensis, d’Orbigny, sp. Rotalina canariensis, VOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 130, pl. 1. figs. 34-36. Pulvinulina canariensis, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 8. Hebrides (Brady) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett); south-west of Ireland (Wright). Pulvinulina patagonica, dOrbigny, sp. Rotalina patagonica, @Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amér. Mérid., p. 36, pl. 1. figs. 6-8. Pulvinulina scitula, Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr. and Nat. Sci. vol. ii. p. 85, pl. iv. fig. 12. ; Shore-sand, Galway, a single specimen (Balkwill and Millett); south- west of Ireland, 54 to 120 fathoms, rare; off Belfast Lough, 30 to 60 fathoms, very rare (Wright). Pulvinulina micheliniana, dOrbigny, sp. Rotalina micheliniana, VOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soc. géol. France, vol. iv. p. 31, pl. i. figs. 1-3. Pulvinulina micheliniana, Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 614. Various points to the south-west of Ireland, 48 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Pulvinulina erassa is inserted in the ‘ Edinburgh Catalogue’ (p. 8), on the ground of one or two specimens believed to be referrible to that species obtained from Mr. Jeffreys’ Hebrides dredgings. The mounting has unfortunately been mislaid, but it appears to me not improbable that the shells in question may have belonged to the present closely allied form; at any rate, without more evidence than at present exists, the retention of the name in the British list is scarcely warranted. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 928 Pulvinulina karstenz, Reuss, sp. Rotalia karsteni, Reuss, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell., vol. vil. p. 275, pl. ix. fig. 6. Pulvinulina karsteni, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 470, pl. xlvii. fig. 15. Shetland, 75 to 90 fathoms (Brady, Waller); South Donegal (Wright); Trish Sea and Dublin coast (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Ireland, 79 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Pulvinulina elegans, VOrbigny, sp. Rotalia (Turbinulina) elegans, ? Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p- 276, No. 54 ;—Soldani, Saggio Oritt., p. 99, pl. ii. fig. 15. Rotalina partschiana, VOrbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 153, pl. vii. figs. 28-30; pl. viii. figs. 1-3. Pulvinulina elegans, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 7. Off Laxey, Isle of Man, 15 fathoms; Guernsey, dredged (Brady) ; south-west of Ireland, 48 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Rorauia, Lamarck. Rotalia beccarii, Linné, sp. Nautilus beccarit, Linné, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed., p. 1162 ;—1788, Ibid., 18th (Gmelin’s) ed., p. 3370, No. 4. Rotalina beecarii, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 48, pl. iv. figs. 90-92. Generally distributed. Rotalia orbicularis, d’Orbigny. Rotalia (Gyroidina) orbicularis, @Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vil. p. 278, No. 1 ;—Modéle, No. 13. 2 orbicularis, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 470, pl. xlvui. fig. 16. Trish Sea; Shetland (Brady); south-west of Ireland, 100 to 200 fathoms (Wright). Rotalia nitida, Williamson. Rotalina nitida, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 54, pl. iv. figs. 106-8. Found at intervals all round the coast. Sub-family 3. Tinoporine. Gypsina, Carter. Gypsina vesicularis, Parker and Jones, sp. Orbitolina vesicularis, Parker and Jones, 1860, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol. vi. p. 31, No. 5. Tinoporus levis, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 470, pl. xlvui. fig. 17. Not uncommon on the Atlantic sea-board and in the Irish Sea; not recorded from the east coast of England or Scotland. 924 Transactions of the Society. Gypsina globulus, Reuss, sp. Ceriopora globulus, Reuss, 1847, Haidinger’s Naturw. Abhandl., vol. 1. p- 33, pl. v. fig. 7. Gypsina globulus, Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2, vol. iv. (Science) p. 614. A single large specimen reported by Wright from 110 fathoms, south-west of Ireland. Gypsina inherens, Schultze, sp. Acervulina inherens, Schultze, 1854, Organ. der Polythal., p. 68, pl. vi. fig. 12. Tinoporus lucidus, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 8. Generally distributed. Family X. NUMMULINIDZ. Sub-family 1. Fusulinine. Sub-family 2. Polystomelline. Nontonina, d’Orbigny. Nonionina asterizans, Fichtel and Moll. Nautilus asterizans, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Mier., p. 37, pl. ii. figs. e—-h. Nonionine asterizans, Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 8. Since becoming better acquainted with the typical Nonzonina aster- izans, through the ‘ Challenger’ collections, I have had considerable doubt whether the species has any claim to a place in the British list. The British specimens which have come under my notice have all been minute, and their characters ambiguous; and I am inclined to think they might generally be referred either to N. depressula on the one hand, or N. stelligera on the other. Of the distribution of N. asterizans as distinet from these two forms there is no satisfactory information. Nonionina depressula, Walker and Jacob, sp. Nautilus depressulus, Walker and Jacob, 1798,.Adams’s Essays, Kan- macher’s ed., p. 641, pl. xiv. fig. 33. Nonionina umbilicatula, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 97, pl. i. figs. 70, 71. - erassula, Id., lbid., p. 33. Generally distributed; one of the commonest Microzoa of shallow pools and estuaries, and of brackish water. Nonionina umbilicatula, Montagu, sp. Nautilus umbilicatulus, Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit., p. 191 ;—Suppl, p- 78, pl. xviii. fig. 1. Nonionina barleeana, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 32, pl. ii. figs. 68, 69. Widely distributed ; affecting much deeper water than the last-named species. Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 925 Nonionina orbicularis, Brady. Nonionina orbicularis, Brady, 1881, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xliii. p. 105, pl. ii. fig. 5 ;—Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 415, pl. xxi. fig. 5. _ bs Robertson, 1882, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, vol. v. p. 274. Loch Fyne, 25 fathoms (Robertson); off Valentia, 112 fathoms (Norman) ; south-west of Ireland, 79 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Nonionina boueana, dOrbigny. Nonionina boueana, d’Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 108, pl. v. figs. 11, 12. a 4, Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr. and Nat. Sci., vol. iii. p. 85. Shore-sand Galway ? (Balkwill and Millett). This is not a very satisfactory “species” at best. The shell figured by Messrs. Balkwill and Wright (Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) pl. xiii. fig. 27) shows the double rows of sutural orifices characteristic of Polystomella arctica, and I learn that the authors are now disposed to transfer it to that species. The right of Nonzonina boueana therefore to a place in the present list depends upon Messrs. Balkwill and Millett’s doubtful specimens. Nonionina pauperata, Balkwill and Wright. Nonionina pauperata, Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxvii. (Science) p. 353, p. xiii. figs. 25, 26. Dublin coast, and various points in the Irish Sea, rather frequent (Balkwill and Wright); south-west of Ireland, 26 fathoms (Wright). Possibly only the starved condition of Nonionina scapha. Nonionina turgida, Williamson, sp. Rotalina turgida, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 50, pl. iv. figs. 95-97. Tolerably frequent all round the coast. Nonionina scapha, Fichtel and Moll, sp. Nautilus seapha, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 105, pl. xix. figs. d—f. Nonionina scapha, Brady, 1865, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durhan, vol. i. p. 106, pl. xii. fig. 10. Durham coast (Brady); west of Scotland (Robertson); estuary of the Dee (Siddall); shore-sand, Galway ? (Balkwill and Millett); coast of Down and Antrim; south-west of Ireland, 40 to 120 fathoms (Wright). Nonionina stelligera, dOrbigny. Nonionina stelligera, d’Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 128, pl. iii. figs. 1, 2. 1887. 3 P 926 Transactions of the Society. Nonionina stelligera, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 471, pl. xlvii. fig. 19. Shetland, 80 fathoms (Brady, Waller) ; estuary of the Dee (Siddall) ; Mount’s Bay (Millett); shore-sand, Galway (Balkwill and Millett) ; Dublin Bay and Irish Sea (Balkwill and Wright) ; south-west of Ireland (Wright). PotystomELLA, Lamarck. Polystomella crispa, Linné, sp. Nautilus erispus, Linné, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed., p. 1162, 275 ;— 1788, Ibid., 13th (Gmelin’s) ed., p. 3370, No. 3. Polystomella crispa, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 40, pl. ii. figs. 78-80. Common at all parts of the coast. Polystomella subnodosa, Minster, sp. Robulina subnodosa, Minster, 1838 (fide Roemer), Neues Jahrb. fiir Min. &c., p. 391, pl. i. fig. 61. Polystomella subnodosa, Wright, 1886, Proc. R. Irish Acad., ser. 2 vol. iy. (Science) p. 614. South-west of Ireland, 100 to 120 fathoms, frequent (Wright). Polystomella striatopunctata, Fichtel and Moll, sp. Nautilus striatopunctatus, Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Mier., p. 61, l. ix. fig. a-c. Polystomella wmbilicatula, Williamson, 1858, Ree. For. Gt. Br., p. 42, pl. i. figs. 81, 82. ty a: var. incerta, Id., Ibid., p. 44, pl. iu. fig. 82 a. Generally distributed., Polystomella arctica, Parker and Jones. Polystomella crispa, var. arctica, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv. p. 401, pl. xiv. figs. 25-30. + arctica, Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxiv. p- 471, pl. xlvui. fig. 18. Shetland, 75 to 90 fathoms (Brady, Waller) ; between Portincross and Ardrossan, 30 fathoms (Robertson); Kish Bank, 24 fathoms, very rare (Balkwill and Wright—described and figured as Nonionina boueana in their memoir). Sub-family 3. Nummulitine. Oprrcutina, d’Orbigny. Operculina ammonotides, Gronovius, sp. Nautilus ammonoides, Gronovius, 1781, Zooph. Gron., p. 282, No. 1220; Te abo Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 35, pl. 11. figs. 74, 75. Shetland, Hebrides (Williamson, Brady, Waller); Scarborough (Williamson) ; south-west of Ireland (Wright). Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera. By H. B. Brady. 927 Postscript.—Since the foregoing Synopsis has been in type I have received from my friend M. Schlumberger a copy of a valuable communi- cation, recently made by him to the Zoological Society of France, on the genus Planispirina (Bull. Soc. Zool. France, vol. xii. pp. 105-118, pl. vii.), containing a further instalment of his interesting researches on the construction of the test in the various types of Miliolide. M. Schlumberger’s examination of the forms referred to the genus Planispirina in the ‘Challenger Report’ has led him to the conclusion that they exemplify two diverse types of structure sufficiently distinct for generic separation,—one group, for which the term Planispirina is retained, embracing Pl. (Biloculina) contraria, VOrb., Pl. communis, Seg., and Pl. carinata, Seg. (and, I suppose, Pl. ewigua, Brady) ; the other, for which the generic name Sigmoilina is proposed, including Planispirina sigmoidea, Brady, Pl. (Spiroloculina) celata, Costa, and. a new species Sigmoilina edwardsi, Schlumberger, together with Quinqueloculina secans, dOrb., and Quinqueloculina tenwis, Czjzek. It is not needful here to discuss the relative value of the characters upon which this arrangement is founded. The construction of the test in the species concerned has been worked out with the author’s accus- tomed skill and accuracy, and so far as can be judged the results bear out the conclusions at which he has arrived. That the difficulties referred to on a previous page, as to the position of apparently intermediate forms, like Quinqueloculina tenwis and Q. secans, are thereby disposed of, is an additional argument in favour of the suggested relationship. The acceptance of this view would only affect the nomenclature of the present paper in connection with three species, namely,— Planispirina celata, Miliolina secans, and Miliolina tenuis, which would stand respectively as Sigmoilina celata, Costa, sp., Sigmoilina secans, d’Orb., sp., and Sigmoilina tenwis, Czjzek, sp. oP? 928 Transactions of the Society. XV.—A New Hye-piece. By EH. M. Netson. (Read 9th November, 1887.) Unrm quite lately, there have been among Microscopists only two kinds of eye-pieces in general use, viz. the Huyghenian and the Kellner. Recently, however, Prof. Abbe’s compensating eye-pieces have been introduced with beneficial results. Of these three forms the Kellner may be dismissed by saying that although one of its lenses is achromatized, its defining power is undoubtedly considered bad by general consent. The compensating eye-pieces, while being absolutely necessary to some of the apochromatic series of objectives and beneficial to others, improve the definition of ordinary objectives also. Having for some time past made a great many experiments with achromatic eye-pieces of doubles, triples, and other forms, I may sum up my results by saying that I had not succeeded in producing any combination whose defining power surpassed that of the Huyghenian. When I saw the increase of defining power given by the compensat- ing eye-pieces, I determined to reopen my investigations. The theoretical action of the Huyghenian eye-piece requires that an over-corrected image should be received by the field-lens, the over- correction to be of such an extent that the under-corrected field-lens of the eye-piece is not able to neutralize it, but leaves it still over-corrected by an amount equal to the under-correction of the eye-lens. I must say that my surprise was great on obtaining better definition with Prof. Abbe’s over-corrected eye-pieces used in conjunction with the supposed over-corrected ordinary achromatic objectives. I concluded, therefore, that by reducing the under-correction of the eye-lens of the Huyghenian eye-piece better definition would be secured. We know that in the formula for aberration— ay Fa sats CH NG Me and where f = principal, focus; y = semi-aperture ; ~ = ref. index and Y,r, = radii; if we putr = o,and—7 = 5 We get the aberration for a plano-convex lens having its convex side to the focus; in other words, ; 2 the eye-lens of a Huyghenian eye-piece, viz. Af = — : ; . 2 If, however, we invert the lens, A f = -i Y or about 1 /4 of what it was before. I therefore concluded that by the inversion of the eye- lens there would be an improvement in the definition though a loss in the size of the field. In practice I found these conclusions verified. The best results were obtained by achromatizing the eye-lens, i.e. by making it of a biconvex and a plano-concave, with its convex side towards the eye. The aperture in the diaphragm was reduced until the diameter of the field was equal to that of the Abbe compensating eye-piece. This eye-piece, with the achromatized eye-lens, gives the sharpest images I have seen. It works perfectly well with the 24 mm. and 3 mmm. Zeiss apochromatic objectives. ( 929 ) SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, &c., INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND OTHERS.* ZOOLOGY. A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology.t Fertilization and Segmentation of the Animal Ovum.{—Drs. O. and R. Hertwig have made a series of experiments on animal ova with the object of affecting, by chemical, thermal, and mechanical agencies, (1) ferti- lization, (2) the process of the internal phenomena of fertilization, and (3) segmentation. In considering the mode of action of the reagents used, attention must be given to the degree of concentration of the chemical reagents, and the differences in the temperature applied; the time, also, during which the modifying influence is allowed to exert itself is important. The movements of spermatozoa were found to be stopped by slight doses of quinine or chloral, but as, on addition of fresh water, they recovered themselves it is clear they were not killed, but only had their contractility affected ; their reproductive power was not impaired. Morphia, moderately strong solutions of strychnine, and nicotine seem to exert no influence on spermatozoa; a very strong solution of nicotine, acting for an hour, appears to produce changes in the spermatozoa. The formation of the fertilization-sphere, or that elevation of the ovarian protoplasm which marks the point of entrance of the spermatozoa, appears to be affected by chloral or quinine; slight heating (up to 31° C.) produces at first an increase in the size of the sphere; higher temperatures and ereater length of exposure have the same effect as quinine. Morphia, strychnine, and nicotine have no effect. As to the effect of reagents on segmentation, it was found that 0°6 per cent. solution of morphia does not affect the ova, and that they will continue to divide for a day in a 1 per cent. solution; strychnine and nicotine have no, but quinine, chloral, and heat have a distinctly weakening effect. Hggs placed in water of 32° C. for ten minutes never completely regain their power of segmentation. * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “ we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. . + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, on ; also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied subjects. ¢ Jenaisch, Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 120-241, 477-510 (6 pls.). 930 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The changes produced by quinine and chloral on dividing ova affect the nucleus as well as the protoplasm, and the phenomena of karyokinesis may be seen to be disturbed by these reagents. It would seem to be certain that the most important matter is the diminution of the contractile power of the reproductive elements, and this is proved not only by the quiescence of the spermatozoa, but by the stop- page of segmentation and the retrograde metamorphosis which is undergone by the nucleus. If the view be correct that quinine and chloral have weakening, and nicotine and strychnine slightly stimulating effects on the contractility of the egg, it is clear that we have fresh means for investigating the significance of the formation of rays in the interior of the ovum. The authors regard the sperm-nucleus and the ends of the segmentation-nucleus as centres of stimuli whieh have an effect on the protoplasm. It is natural that the homogeneous constituents of the protoplasm, which are the seat of contrac- tility, should stream towards the point of stimulation, and they produce an aggregation of elements; but it is further probable that the movement should take place in a radial manner, and should thus exercise a directive influence on the passive parts—the granules. But this directive influence can only be exercised so long as the movement which causes it is energetic ; if it is slowed by any agent, the granules would retain their position, and the homogeneous protoplasm would alone be collected around the nucleus. Armed by the knowledge of abnormal phenomena which they have acquired, the Drs. Hertwig regard the ray-figures given by Carnoy as pathological conditions. Increased irritability, weakening, and polyspermy are not the only changes which may be caused in eggs by external in- fluences ; in addition, there are changes in the chemical composition of the substances forming the egg, and that even before the approach of death. In dealing with the process of fertilization, it is pointed out that abnormal fertilization may occur when spermatozoa of another species come in contact with the egg, or if many spermatozoa of the same species enter the egg (polyspermy). In inquiring as to the arrangements which prevent abnormal fertilization, the first point of importance is this: no peculiar properties can be observed in the egg which can be regarded as aiding in normal fertilization; spermatozoa appear to have the tendency to enter any eggs, and in any quantities. Few experiments have been made on this point, but it has been observed that eggs which were sufficiently under the influence of chloroform showed no increased tendency to bastardation. It would, therefore, appear that the chemical bodies which aid fertilization offer no assistance to bastardation. Polyspermy can be brought about by chemical, thermal, and mechanical agencies, and the number of spermatozoa increases with the intensity and duration of the agents used; with heating, however, there is a point at which fertilization stops. Two hypotheses suggest themselves as explaining how polyspermy is ordinarily prevented ; one is that the fertilizing spermatozoon causes a con- traction of the egg-cell, which prevents the entrance of other spermatozoa: * and the other is that the spermatozoon stimulates the ovum to produce a firm membrane—the vitelline—through which other spermatozoa cannot make their way. ‘The former of these may be dismissed now that we know that polyspermy may be aided by reagents which increase the contractility of the egg; the latter has the support of Fol, and seems to find support from some experiments made by the writers. If ova be placed in sea- water with which chloroform has been shaken up, the membrane appears ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 931 exactly as it does after fertilization, and such ova cannot be fertilized by spermatozoa. In investigating this matter a little further it is necessary to distinguish the two peculiarities of protoplasm which are exhibited in the formation of the yolk-membrane; these are its secretory activity and its irritability. The egg must have a minimum stimulus to produce its membrane, and this minimum stimulus is, in normal eggs, the entrance of one spermatozoon. We now pass to the changes in the conjugation of the sexual nuclei and the internal processes of fertilization. The experiments which have been made show that, with the aid of reagents, the copulation of the nuclei may be hindered or stopped. It seems to be certain that nuclei provided with all the vital properties which are necessary for further development only appear when the substances are thoroughly impregnated by the male and female nuclei ; however, even when the nuclei do not unite, they have properties which they had not originally ; the male and female nucleus are both capable of undergoing fibrous differentiation and forming chromatic loops and a chromatic filament, even if they are kept separate from one another. If portions of ova without nuclei are separated from the rest of their cell, they may be penetrated by spermatozoa which in them form spindles ; or, in more general terms, we may say that the protoplasm of the egg alone is able to give the male nucleus the power of forming spindles. In ova, however, which possess germinal vesicles, the spermatozoa undergo no changes and are not acted upon by the protoplasm of the egg; if the directive spindle is in the process of formation the heads of the spermatozoa remain unaltered, but there is a slight radiation of the proto- plasm. No exchange of substance takes place between the male nucleus and the ovarian protoplasm until after the formation of the first directive corpuscle, In observing the fate of the female nucleus the authors found three classes of results: the ovarian nucleus copulates with only one male nucleus, and in division only one spindle is formed ; the ovarian nucleus copulates with two or more male nuclei, and produces four-poled or many-poled karyokinetic figures; or the ovarian nucleus remains by itself, and by the imbibition of fluid increases rapidly in size. The last phenomenon is common in proportion to the number of spermatozoa that enter the egg. Two or three male nuclei may certainly fuse with the female nucleus, so that the capacity of the female nucleus for receiving spermatic nuclei appears to be considerable, and to last even after several copulations have taken place. The male nuclei undergo fibrous differentiation, and become converted into small spindles, which in course of time also divide; nothing, however, is yet known as to the fate of these products of division. The last point to be noticed concerns the variations in the phenomena of cleavage. In their experiments, the Drs. Hertwig altered the process of cleavage in three ways; the eggs, after fertilization, were treated with reagents, or they were fertilized by several spermatozoa, or the completion of fertilization was hindered. In the normal stages of cleavage two processes go on simultaneously in the nucleus; one is an increase in size, and the other is karyokinesis. The latter, but not the former, is affected by quinine and chloral ; similar changes may be seen in polyspermy. When this last is brought about by the aid of morphia, strychnine, or nicotine, or, in other words, by reagents which do not of themselves influence the process of division, there appear tetraster or polyaster figures, which are to be explained not by the action of the reagents, but by polyspermy. There can be no doubt that fertilization by two spermatozoa leads to the forma- tion of tetrasters; but all tetrasters must not be referred to this cause, as 932 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the result may be sometimes due to nothing else than a certain increase in the size of the nucleus. The authors have made numerous observations with especial reference to the formation of double monsters, and they see no reason to suppose that these are to be regarded as due to the fertilization of one egg by two spermatozoa. Human Ovum.*—Dr. W. Nagel communicates a description of the human ovum, in regard to which there has been a lack of precise informa- tion. His material was obtained from ovaries removed in operations. Healthy follicles were isolated and examined, and in other cases sectioned in situ. The zona pellucida is very distinct, and is separated by an extremely fine “perivitelline space” (apparently containing clear fluid) from the vitellus. Within this is the narrow clear “cortical layer” of the vitellus, then a somewhat broader finely granular “ protoplasmic zone,’ then the *deutoplasmic portion” with abundant globules, more abundant and less refractive than in the ova of domestic mammals. The nucleus is round, clear, double-contoured, always excentric, and in the protoplasmic zone. There is a distinct nuclear network. The nucleolus exhibits amceboid movements. The corona (epithelium of ovum) was always well developed on ripe eggs. The diameter of the ripe ova varied from 124-128 p. The various zones vary somewhat in different regions. The nucleus measured 19-20 p. In the ovaries of new-born subjects, besides the usual primordial follicles, larger follicles were observed (Waldeyer-Slavjansky). In these, sections revealed normal ova, and the author does not therefore regard the presence of these large follicles as indicative of incipient cyst-formation. In development, the protoplasm and nucleus increase in size, the follicular cells multiply, the deutoplasm is formed, the nucleus is pushed to the side, and a zona pellucida begins to appear. Fertilization of Ovum of Lamprey.t—Herr A. A. Bohm has studied the phenomena of fertilization in the ovum of Petromyzon plameri, and gives the following summary of his results :— (1) The substance of the germinal vesicles spreads out on the surface of the ovum at the animal pole to form the pole-plasma. (2) During impregnation, pari passu with the formation of the vitelline membrane, the pole plasma is covered with a fresh, thick, folded membrane. This concentrates the fertilization to a limited area, and disappears after fertilization is accomplished. (3) The pole-plasma with the elements concerned in fertilization is retracted inwards, but remains connected with the surface of a thin proto- plasmic strand which lies in the axis of the ovum in the plane of the first meridional segmentation, (4) The male and female nuclei fall into portions (spermato- and karyo- merites ). (5) For a while these can be microchemically distinguished. (6) The merites do not at first intermingle, but form two closely apposed groups. The plane separating these two groups coincides with a meridian of the ovum. (7) Each merite consists of a body with little chromatin and a body rich in chromatin (the microsome). (8) The final nucleus of segmentation arises by the fusion of the * SB. K. Preuss. Akad. Berlin, 1887, pp. 759-61. t SB. Bayer. Akad. Wiss. Miinchen, 1887, pp. 53-62. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 933 spermato- and karyo-merites into a homogeneous mass. The included microsomata are no longer distinguishable as regards their origin. (9) From these microsomata the chromatic portion of the karyokinetic figure is formed. Intra-Ovarian Egg of some Osseous Fishes.*—Dr. R. Scharff has ex- amined the ova or ovaries of several osseous fishes, among which the gurnard was a very suitable object of investigation. In speaking of the nucleus and its changes in the smaller ova, the author announces his agreement with the opinion of Dr. Will, that no morphological significance is to be attached to the nucleoli; they must be regarded as large masses of chromatic substance. With regard to the dark and light-coloured proto- plasm, it is suggested that the dark central protoplasm owes its origin to the nucleus. ‘The egg-membrane, or more or less thick layer which surrounds the egg, and which has been called by seven different names, of which “ zona radiata” is here preferred, is, in the gurnard, often granular ; within is a much broader layer, which, by its semifluid condition, may be dis- tinguished from the much firmer or elastic zona radiata. In the ripe ova the zonoid layer entirely disappears. The follicular layer of the ripe gurnard’s egg consists of a layer of closely set cells. With regard toits development, the author’s observations are incomplete, but he is inclined to think that it owes its origin to the connective tissue; at any rate it is formed before an egg-membrane can be seen. Development of Osseous Fishes.t—In his first chapter Dr. J. H. List deals with the morphological results which he has obtained by the study of the Labride, a family which is well represented in the Adriatic. The ripe ovum of Crenilabrus tinca, before fertilization, has a diameter of about 0-9 mm.; the zona pellucida has an interesting structure, for it consists of two layers. Of these, the outer is formed of regular six-sided prisms, and the inner, which is more homogeneous, exhibits merely a feeble parallel striation. The germinal substance is only incompletely differen- tiated from the yolk in C. tinca, but in C. pavo it forms a clearer layer round the yolk. On the whole, the arrangement of the germinal substance in the ovum of Crenilabrus exhibits a close resemblance to that of the herring, as described by Prof. Kuppfer ; there are no signs of any germinal processes extending into the yolk. ‘The spermatozoa of C. pavo are 18 » long, of which the tail is 14; at the moment when the spermatozoon is swallowed by the micropylar canal the inner part of the latter is blocked by a feebly refractive mass, and by this means the entrance of other spermatozoa is prevented. Seven minutes after the entrance of the spermatozoa into the egg the directive corpuscle was seen projecting from the funnel-shaped entrance of the micropyle, and within half an hour was extruded. The ovarian contents next underwent con- traction, and within three-quarters of an hour after impregnation a clear space could be noticed between the zona pellucida and the contents; this space was filled by a colourless fluid, which was probably partly squeezed out from the yolk. The contraction of the germinal substance ceases after about an hour and a half; and the first segmentation groove appears. This is somewhat excentric. Almost simultaneously an equatorial groove appears at right angles to the first. From the next series of changes it became clear that the form of the nutrient yolk is dependent on the direction of the * Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xxviii. (1887) pp. 53-74 (1 pl.). } Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 595-645 (3 pls.). 934 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO greatest growth-energy in the germinal substance; this energy seems to depend on the direction of the planes of segmentation. Six hours after impregnation the blastodise is formed, and lies flattened on the now completely spherical yolk; its outer surface is bounded by a layer of flattened cells. Seven hours and a quarter after impregnation nuclei appear in the part of the intermediate layer which is visible around the margin of the blastodisc; these group themselves in almost concentric rows round this margin, and the rows are arranged in such a way that an interspace of the succeeding row corresponds to every nucleus. After pointing out the views held by previous writers with regard to these bodies, the author states that he himself has observed clear vesicular nuclei appearing round the edge of the blastodisc, and has found that they were derived from the nuclei of its marginal cells. Nuclear figures were never observed, but the author distinctly saw these nuclei constricted off from those of the marginal cells; the newly-formed structures increase in size rapidly, and soon become disposed in rows. As to the significance of the periblast the author hesitates to form a judgment, but the view that we have to do with a conversion into nutrient material does not recommend itself to him. In his second chapter the author deals with the formation of the embryo, and compares his results with those of other embryologists who have studied the development of fishes; in the third chapter the development of the eyes and ears, of the central nervous system and notochord, of the intestinal tract and other parts of the body is described. Polar Bodies and Theory of Heredity.*—Prof. A. Weismann publishes a confirmation and résumé of his previous conclusions which have been embodied in various papers since 1881. He regards it as a firmly estab- lished and fundamental fact that all animal eggs which demand fertilization give off two polar bodies as preparation for embryonic development, while parthenogenetic eggs never extrude more than one. This fact, he says, dismisses any merely morphological explanation of the precedents. If it had no physiological signification, parthenogenetic eggs could retain the portion of nucleus separated by a second division, no better than those which demand fertilization. Dr. Weismann’s opinion is as follows :—The first polar body represents the extrusion, after maturity is reached, of the too active protoplasm of the nucleus; the second is the extrusion of part of the germ-plasm itself, through which the quantity of original protoplasm from the parent is reduced by one-half. A similar reduction must take place in the male germinal cell, but it is impossible as yet to show this definitely from the observed histology of spermatogenesis. Parthenogenesis occurs when the whole of the germ-plasm from the parent is retained within the egg-cell. Sexual reproduction demands that half the germ-plasm be extruded from the egg, so that the remaining half may again reach the required size by uniting with the sperm-nucleus. In both cases the beginning of development depends on the presence of a certain, and indeed of the same quantity of germ-plasm. ‘The fertilized egg gains this by the addition of the sperm-nucleus, and the commencement of embryonic change follows right on the heels of fertilization. The parthenogenetic egg contains from the first the necessary amount of germ- plasm, and it becomes active as soon as the extrusion of the single polar body has freed the egg from the “ oogenetic ” nuclear plasm. * Weismann, A., ‘ Ueber die Richtungskérper, und iiber ihre Bedeutung fir die Vererbung,’ 1887. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 935 In regard to the theory of heredity, Dr. Weismann concludes that the germinal cells of a single individual do not embody similar hereditary tendencies, but that in this relation they are all different, and that no two provide quite the same combination of tendencies. This he thinks explains the long-recognized differences between the children of the same father and mother; and he adds that the deeper import of this arrangement must be seen in freely-conditioned ever-newly-blending individual variability, for sexual reproduction appears more and more in the light of an arrange- ment by which an ever-changing wealth of individual conformations is handed on. &. Histology.* Theory of Cell-division.t—Herr G. Platner has been led by the results of his study of karyokinesis in Lepidoptera to seek to lay the foundations at least of a theory of cell-division. He has tackled the problem of cellular mechanics, and finds the condition of nuclear division to be in part at least streaming of the protoplasm, such as is familiar in pseudopodia and Myxomycetes. The phenomena of karyokinesis can be explained as the results either (1) of chemical processes influencing the cellular substance, or (2) of protoplasmic movements due to the above or to external influences, or 3 of unknown molecular and attractive forces. According to Platner, the separation of the daughter elements on the dislocation of the equatorial plate (Flemming’s metakinesis) is the result of a circulating stream. The form and position of the nuclear spindle are mechanically conditioned by fluid movements within the latter, and radiating from the poles. The appearance of the primary asters depends upon the direction in which the stream of nutritive fluid circulates through the cell, and the spindle developes at right angles to this. 'The same causes effect the movements of the nucleus. The formation of the nuclear coil, and the disposition of the equatorial plate is the result of plasmic streams penetrating the nucleus in given direction. The achromatic substance is the active element in karyokinesis. The division of the protoplasm is a purely mechanical process. Synthetic Processes in Living Cells.t—Friulein J. Brinck and Herr H. Kronecker submit the results of numerous observations on the physio- logical relations between living cells and various substances. Their ex- periments led to the following conclusions :—(1) Serum-albumin is more surely characterized by its nutritive relation to muscle, than by physical and chemical reactions; (2) stomachic peptones are still albuminoids in the physiological sense, pancreatic peptones are not; (3) Stomachie peptones are reconverted into serum-albumin by many kinds of living cells ; (4) a bacillus has the same useful property of forming serum-albumin from stomachic peptones ; (5) pathogenic bacilli have a destructive influence. Structure and Distribution of Striped and Unstriped Muscle in the Animal Kingdom.§—Mr. C. F. Marshall has endeavoured to trace the distribution of the intracellular network of the striped muscle-fibre in the animal kingdom. It is pointed out that the striation of muscle must not be confounded with the transversely striated appearance which is caused by the corrugation of the outline of the fibre, and which is probably due to a state of over-contraction. * This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. + Internat. Monatschrift f. Anat. u. Histol., iii, (1886) p.10. Naturforscher, xx. (1887) p. 315. ¢ Archiv. f. Anat. u. Physiol., 1887, pp. 347-9. § Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1887) pp. 75-107 (1 pl.). 936 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The vacuolated condition seen in the protoplasm of various Protozoa may, perhaps, indicate the starting-point of the differentiation of an intra- cellular network, or, in other words, the differentiation of the cell into firmer and less dense portions, the former of which takes on the form of a network ; the highly contractile fibril of Vorticella shows no trace of the presence of fibrils, and appears to be simply undifferentiated protoplasm. Of the Celenterata Hydra was found to have a network in the body of the ectoderm cells, but this was not continued into the “muscular process ”’; Aurelia has striped muscles in which the distinct transverse striation is due to the presence of a network which is similar in all respects to the network described by Retzius and Melland in striped muscle; in Actinia the muscle showed no trace of any intracellular network or of any fibrillation. Here, then, as with the Echinodermata, in which there is no trace of a network, the author agrees with Dr. Hamann. Among worms, the leech and the earthworm were examined; in the former the muscle-fibres are very peculiar, consisting of an outer clear portion and a central granular part; no distinct fibrils could be detected. In the earthworm the muscle is found to contain large elongated cells with longitudinal lines, which under a 1/10 immersion objective present a dotted appearance; the dots, however, are quite irregular, and do not extend into the body of the cell. In the Mollusca, the limpet was found to have the network of striped muscle in its muscle, and the same was found in the muscle of the snail’s odontophore, and in the adductor muscle of Pecten, which differs from most of its class by using that muscle to propel itself through the water. Striped muscle was found in various Arthropods, and in the muscular bands of Salpa. As to the Vertebrata, it is to be noted that the striation of cardiac muscle appears to be due to an intracellular network similar to that of ordinary striped muscle. If we resume these facts, we find that striped muscle is ordinarily associated with energetic animals or movements; the presence of such in some sluggish animals, such as certain insects, may be supposed to be due to inheritance. We find that (1) an intracellular network of a definite character is present in the fibre of striped muscle throughout the animal kingdom. (2) This network is developed where rapid and frequent move- ments have to be performed. (3) The striped muscle-fibre consists of sarcolemma, network, and sarcous substance; and, so far as at present determined, there is no other structure present in the fibre (except muscle- corpuscles and nerve-endings). With regard to the mode of action of striped muscular fibre, Mr. Marshall is of opinion that its construction is due to the active contraction of the longitudinal bars of the network, and that the transverse networks are probably passively elastic, and cause by their rebound relaxation of the fibre. It is possible that the transverse networks and the muscle-corpuscles with which they are said to be continuous, furnish paths by which the nervous impulse is conveyed from the nerve- ending to the longitudinal bars. As to the contraction of unstriped muscle, it is probably due to the active contraction of its longitudinal fibrils, when such, as in vertebrate muscle, are present; when they are absent the contraction must be referred to the whole protoplasm of the cell, for there is no special part differentiated to perform the function. The author is aware of two objections to his suggested explanation ; the first affects the supposed difference between the longitudinal and transverse bars of the same network ; but it is possible that the latter are really, as Retzius thinks, direct processes of the muscle-corpuscles. The ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSCOPY, ETC. 937 second objection is that the theory attributes the function of contraction to the network which forms much less of the bulk of the fibre than does the sarcous substance; but the latter may have to perform thermogenic functions which must absorb a far greater amount of its energy than does the contractile function. Comparative Size of Blood-corpuscles in Man and Domestic Animals.* —Miss F. Detmers considers that she has established, by a series of measurements, that there can be no question but that the blood of human beings can readily be distinguished from that of such animals as the mule, cat, calf, and horse, and more readily from cattle, sheep, and pigs. Blood-corpuscles of the Cyclostomata.j—Prof. D’Arcy W. Thompson traverses the generalization found in many text-books that the red blood- corpuscles of Cyclostomata are round and not oval. He finds, as indeed did J. Miiller, that the red corpuscles of Mywine are large and oval, being -025--028 mm. in length, about -01 mm. in breadth, and about -003 mm. in thickness. In Petromyzon marinus, the red blood-corpuscles are circular, and about *013 to -014 mm. in diameter, and the nuclei are excentric and stain very slowly and feebly with magenta, whereas in Mywxine they are central and stain easily. Shipley, who has recently stated that the red corpuscles of the ammoccete are oval, confirms his statement; this note- worthy difference between the larval and adult forms recalls the differences in the red corpuscles of the tadpole and the frog. The white blood-corpuscles of Myxine are nearly or sometimes quite as numerous as the red, are of about the same size as in man, and have a very large granular nucleus. In P. marinus they are three or four times as numerous as the red, their nuclei are small and stain well; forms transi- tional in shape and size to the red corpuscles may be recognized. Hematocytes.{—M. Fokker gives a somewhat astounding account of some observations on the behaviour of blood. He has previously sought to show that protoplasm from a healthy organism, placed in a nutritive medium, with the exclusion of microbes, may remain alive and cause fermentations. He now seeks to prove that such protoplasm may develope a vegetative form, different from that exhibited in the body of the animal from which it was taken. Some blood was taken with all necessary precautions from a healthy animal, placed in distilled sterilized water, and kept at the ordinary temperature, and at 37° C. It remained alive, but above 37° died. If the distilled water be replaced by a very weak solution of nutritive salts, or even by drinking water, the blood remains at the ordinary temperature alive, for a year even. But at 37°, and above, a sediment ig formed. The amorphous molecules in the debris increase gradually and form small vesicles which may attain the dimensions of the blood-corpuscles! These little knobs M. Fokker calls hamatocytes, and the process is designated heterogenesis. These vesicles have nothing in common with any elements previously described in the blood. They may be stained with iodine, or with methyl-violet, fuchsine, and eosin. They have often a regular form, and their size is very variable. They do not multiply in cultures. That they are really alive is demonstrated by their growth as observed under the Microscope, and by the fact that they do not develope in the absence of oxygen. * St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., liii. (1887) pp. 209-15. + Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., xx. (1887) pp. 231-3. } Comptes Rendus, cy. (1887) pp. 353-6. 938 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO He kept dilutions of blood in drinking water at the ordinary tempera- ture, and others in saline solution at 37°. At the end of a year in the one case, and of three months in the other, he placed the dilutions in a temperature of 52°. By the end of 24 hours both dilutions had gone in for almost normal heterogenesis. y- General.* Phosphorescence.}—On this subject, Dr. C. F. W. Krukenberg reviews the literature up to the present time, referring to Ehrenberg, Milne- Edwards, Panceri, Pfliiger, and other investigators. He then gives in detail, and at considerable length, the results of his own recent experiments and observations in three special directions. The first and second of these are the cases of Pieroides griseum, and Agaricus (Crepidotus) olearius. The third deals with the luminosity of the Red Sea, and includes some very graphic descriptions of phenomena observed. The experiments, which are described at length and also given together in tabular form, consisted principally in watching the light-producing organisms in very widely varied circumstances as to medium and temperature, and also in treating them with various anesthetics and other chemical reagents. Dr. Krukenberg emphasizes as the most general ana important conclu- sion from the investigations, and that likely to afford most guidance in future research, that, in both animals and plants, whenever phosphorescence is truly present, it is caused by certain vital processes being applied to the production of light in a manner exactly parallel to those in which heat and electricity are produced in living beings. Function of Otoliths.{—Prof. T. W. Engelmann made some observa- tions on the functions of the so-called otoliths in the sensory bodies of Ctenophores previous to the appearance of Dr. Delage’s paper. He thinks what he has seen confirms the views of the French naturalist, and hopes that the investigation will be carried further. The author regards the so-called otoliths which are placed at the aboral pole of the body of Cteno- phores as an apparatus for preserving the equilibrium of the body. After a reference to the discoveries of Chun, he concludes that there is no reason for adhering to the old view that the bodies in question have any auditory function, and he thinks it clear that the object of the otolith is, by means of the ctenophoral plates, to keep the primary axis of the body in its normal upright position. When this axis is vertical, the otolith presses with equal force on the four pinnate bands which extend up to it; if the axis inclines at all it presses more strongly on the corresponding band, and less on the others. This pressure is, by means of the cellular cords connected with the band, which are nervous in function, conveyed to the ctenophoral plates, and thus a compensating movement of the body is brought about, and the body returns to its normal vertical condition. We have here a reflex process of the most elementary kind—a process of regulation in which it is not necessary for either conscious sensation or will to take any part, but which may be altogether mechanical. Reference is made to a number of illustrative and instructive facts, such as the very general presence of otoliths in freely moving animals, their absence in many fixed or slowly creeping forms, and their loss in fixed forms which have large otoliths in their freely moving early stages ; in many cases (Mollusca) they are imbedded in soft inelastic tissue which. * This section is limited to papers which, while relating to Vertebrata, have a direct or indirect bearing on Invertebrata also. + Vergleichend-physiologische Studien, iy. (1887) pp. 77-142. t Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 4389-44. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 939 is by no means adapted to carrying waves of sound; they are very generally connected with cellular outgrowths which are necessarily pressed upon when the equilibrium of the body is disturbed. These considerations may be extended to the Vertebrata, and it is suggested that the criste acoustice of the ear with which no otoliths are connected may perform the acoustic functions of the ear, while the macule acoustice have an equilibrating function. The well-known observation of Hensen as to the casting of the otoliths in certain Crustacea seems to be of great significance in connection with the real function of these organs. B. INVERTEBRATA. Pericardial Gland of Opisthobranchs and Annelids.*—Prof. C. Grobben endeavours to demonstrate the homology of the pericardial gland of Molluscs with structures which are found in Annelids. He points out that the peri- cardial gland of Molluscs is a local glandular development of the epithelium of the secondary ccelom, as the pericardial space must be regarded as being. Similar glandular difierentiations of the ccelomic epithelium are to be seen in the chlorogogue cells of many Annelids, and they too are found on the blood-vessels. In some cases these bodies form special organs; they are best developed in the well-known tubular contractile appendages of the dorsal vessel of the Lumbriculide, and the structures described by Claparéde in Lumbricus as best developed on the vascular loops of the septa are bodies of the same kind. The excretory function of the pericardial gland and epithelium is best shown in the Mollusca; these are cells heavily laden with concretions which can hardly make their way to the exterior save by the kidney ; similar bodies escape outwards by the nephridia in Annelids. Singular Parasite on Firola.t— Prof. H. Ludwig has a note on the remarkable parasite in Firola (Trichoelina paradowa), lately described by Dr. J. Barrois,j showing that it is nothing more than the separate capitulum of a gemmeform pedicellaria, and almost certainly of Sphzrechinus granularis.§ Mollusca. Structure of Branchia of Prosobranchiate Gastropoda.||— M. F. Ber- nard has investigated the structure of the gill of various prosobranchiate gastropods. He finds that the epithelium always consists of two kinds of elements—columnar ciliated cells, inserted on a basilar membrane by a narrow prolongation which is sometimes branched, and muciparous cells arranged in small scattered groups. The basilar membrane does not contain any cartilage; what has been regarded as such is a thickening formed of superposed layers, and contains no trace of cells. Between the two layers of the membrane are stellate cells, with anastomosing pro- longations ; these, which may be isolated or connected, form the ordinary connective tissue of the lacune. There are longitudinal and transverse muscular fibres. Although the author has been able to reproduce the appearances figured recently by M. Wegmann, he does not believe that the “ vessels ” are anything more than portions of the lacunz where the connective tissue is scattered, and where therefore the injection circulates easily. The space contained by the double basilar membrane is only a simple diverticulum of the general lacuna which extends between the two folds of the mantle. * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 479-81. t Ibid., pp. 296-8. t See this Journal, ante, p. 373. § This note, owing to a misprint, was wrongly placed at p. 598, and Trichodina was printed for Trichoelina. | Comptes Rendus, cy. (1887) pp. 316-8. 940 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Structure of False Gills of Pectinibranch Prosobranchs. *—M. F. Bernard has examined the so-called false gills in Cassis, Buccinum, Nassa, Murex, and various other genera of pectinibranch gastropods. He thinks we must consider the organ as formed of a series of folds of the internal layer of the mantle. The space in the interior of each lamella is a lacuna which communicates by a cleft with the large intrapallial lacuna which extends under the false gill. The afferent branchial canal which extends between this organ and the true gill is well provided with muscular walls on the side of the latter ; but on the side of the false gill itis only separated from the intrapallial lacuna by a spongy connective tissue perforated by a large number of orifices by which the blood of the false gill passes to the canal and thence to the heart; the canal is not therefore strictly a vessel. A principal nerve, sometimes formed of several anastomosing bundles, penetrates into each lamella where it gives off ramifications ; among these are found multipolar connective cells identical with those found in the true gills. The nerve has been easily studied by the aid of the double chloride of ruthenium and potassium (or ammonium), which was found to be more useful than hyperruthenic acid. By its means the fibres may be seen to become gradually isolated and to terminate in large rods placed among epithelial cells. The epithelium contains mucous cells, ciliated cells as in the gill, and elements which end in a pretty long delicate rod. The basilar membrane presents crests, folds, and thickenings directed along the courses of the nervous ramifications, but there are never the double longitudinal thicken- ings which are characteristic of the branchial lamelle. The muscular fibres are numerous and varied, and may, by their com- bination, diminish the size of the blood-sinus, but their irregular arrange- ment, and the presence of connective elements in the interior of the sinus prevent our regarding the latter as a vessel. In some Strombide and in Pterocera, the nerve bifurcates several times and branches in a fanlike fashion. On the whole, the author regards the false gill as a sensory organ formed by folds of the mantle in which there are a number of nerve formations. In some of the higher forms the connective elements are so arranged as to form a respiratory apparatus no less differentiated than the gill-lamelle themselves. Renal Organs of German Prosobranchiata.;—Herr G. Wolff has in- vestigated the structure of the renal organs of Paludina vivipara, Bithynia tentaculata, and Valvata piscinalis. He has been able to detect the internal orifice of the organ, though it is considerably degenerate. The ductus renopericardialis appears to be least atrophied in Valvata, which so far stands nearest to the pulmonate gastropods ; the well-developed cilia found on its epithelial cells are wanting from Paludina and Bithynia. In P. vivipara the duct is placed at the point where the renal organ opens into what Leydig called the water-reservoir, and it is clear that the pericardial orifice of the kidney is physiologically connected with the opening of the kidney into the reservoir, since the muscular fibres which surround it are connected with the sphincter which surrounds the other opening of the kidney. The glandular organ of Bithynia has two openings which lead to the exterior, one superior, and one inferior. The pericardial orifice is placed near the upper of these. Oogenesis of Chiton.{—M. P. Garnault has studied the development of the ovum and its follicle in Chiton cinereus and Chiton fascicularis, and * Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 383-5. t Zool, Anzeig., x. (1887) p. 317. t Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 621-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSCOPY, ETO. 941 has been led to results somewhat different from those of Ihering and Sabatier. According to Sabatier, the ova are formed at the expense of the con- nective cells of the ovarian wall. As they grow they raise the connective padding (feutrage) which surrounds them. They are covered by a non- cellular membrane. Nuclei arise within the protoplasm and shift to the periphery. M. Garnault maintains that the ova arise from a germinal epithelium, that the follicle consists distinctly of cells homologous with those which form ova. The internal corpuscles said to move to the periphery are not really nuclear, but only intra-vitelline, albuminoid bodies. The stalked ovum exhibits on its surface and in relation to each of the follicular cells, protrusions of the vitellus, especially marked in C. cinereus. The summit of each vitelline expansion is in close association with the nucleus of the follicular cell. Soon these protrusions retract, dragging with them the nucleated portions of the several follicular cells. The stalk degenerates, and before the final rupture is represented only by a mem- branous shred, The point of rupture corresponds to the micropylar orifice. The follicular membrane becomes thickened and depressed; it ought not to be spoken of as coque or chorion. The final non-cellular membrane, described by Sabatier, does not exist. Nephridia and “Liver” of Patella vulgata.*—Dr. A. B. Griffiths has made a chemical examination of the nephridia of the common limpet, and has been able to isolatéwuric acid, and to obtain successfully the “ murexide test.” He finds that, with regard to the “liver,” its secretion converts starch into glucose-sugar, as proved by the use of Fehling’s solution; the secretion produces an emulsion with oils and fats, yielding subsequently fatty acids and glycerol; when a few drops of the secretion were examined with chemical reagents under the Microscope a brown deposit was obtained with a solution of iodine in potassium iodide; with concentrated nitric acid there was a yellow coloration, due to the formation of xantho-proteic acid ; both these reactions show the presence ‘of albumin in the secretion of this organ. On the soluble ferment being isolated by the method of Wittich and Kistiakowsky it was found to convert fibrin into leucin and tyrosin, no glycocholic or taurocholic acid could be detected, and no glycogen was found in the organ or its secretion; but this secretion does contain leucin and tyrosin. ‘The author concludes, therefore, that the “liver” of the limpet has a similar function to the pancreas of the Vertebrata. Morphology of Epipodium of Rhipidoglossate Gastropoda.j—M. P. Pelseneer, in consideration of the very various opinions that have been held as to the morphology of the epipodium in rhipidoglossate Gasteropods, has reinvestigated the anatomy of Trochus. He finds that in it each pedal cord has an external longitudinal groove, but it is, nevertheless, not composed of two nerves, the peculiar conformation being due not to the fusion of two different centres, but to the commencing separation of a single one; this specialization is due to the development of the epipodium. The pleural ganglion lies at the commencement of the pedal cord, where the visceral commissure commences to be formed. M. Pelseneer finds, therefore, that the pedal cord of Trochus is single, and that the epipodium is a part of the foot ; it would, indeed, be hard to conclude otherwise, when we examine a Trochus externally, for it may then be seen that the epipodium has no * Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., xlii. (1887) pp. 392-4. + Comptes Rendus, cy. (1887) pp. 578-80. 1887. 3 Q 942 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO relation to the mantle, but is placed quite beneath the foot, and surrounds the operculum, as to the pedal nature of which there is no doubt. Byssus Gland of Lamellibranchs.*—Herr L. Reichel is of opinion that the byssus of Lamellibranchs is a cuticular structure, the roots of which are formed in the byssus-cavity, and the filaments in the groove of the foot. The glandular cells which should be present, were the secretion-theory correct, are never to be found. ‘The groove can, by the approximation of its edges, be converted into a complete canal, the lumen of which is semilunar in shape. The epithelium of the canal and of the cleft continuous with it are distinguished by two characters: in the latter the cilia are placed on a cell-membrane, which, in cross-section, has a distinctly double contour; in the former there is but a single line between the byssus-substance and the epithelial cells; each cell of the canal has only one process, while those of the cleft have each several cilia. Other objections are raised to the secretion-theory. New Sensory Organ in Lamellibranchiata.j — Dr. J. Thiele has examined the two yellow papille found near the anal papille in Arca Nox. He finds that they are closely covered by long immobile hairs, and that in transverse sections their epithelium has a striking resemblance to that of the lateral organ of the abdomen, described by Lisig in the Capitellide. Internally there is a considerable layer of granules, among which is a network of processes, and thin spindles and rods. The author proposes to call these bodies abdominal sensory organs. They are supplied by a nerve which branches off from the most median of the nerves which extend backwards from the visceral ganglia; beneath the organ is a small ganglion, whence the separate nerve-fibres pass to the sensory cells. Similar sonsory spheres have been found not only in the closely allied Pectunculus, but in Aviculide, Pectinide, and Ostreide; they are dis- tinguished fro mHisig’s organs by their want of retractility, but this may be explained by their protected position in the mantle space. The author has not yet been able to find these organs in siphoniate Lamellibranchs, but the specimens examined were not very satisfactorily preserved. a Molluscoida. a. Tunicata. Observations on Ascidians.{—Miss L. Sheldon commences with a note on the ciliated pit of Ascidians in its relation to the nerve-ganglion and so-called hypophysial gland. In the adult forms examined four main variations of the pit were observed ; in Clavellina it is simple in shape, its opening into the mouth being round in section; it is situated ventrally to the nerve-ganglion into which it leads by a wide opening ; in Amaracium the pit is shorter and simpler, and has no connection with the ganglion ; the mass of spongy tissue into which it opens appears to be degenerated, and somewhat resembles the notochordal tissue of vertebrate embryos. In Ascidia and Ciona the pit consists of a ciliated funnel passing into a canal ; and in Phallusia mammillata there is a large reservoir lying ventrally to the ganglion which communicates with the mouth by a comparatively small orifice. In the embryo of Amarecium the nervous system consists of four portions ; an anterior dorsal part which exactly resembles in structure the ganglion * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 489-90. t Ibid., pp. 413-4. t+ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1887) pp. 131-48 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 943 of the adult, a mass which lies ventral and posterior to it, and is composed of very large ganglion-cells with very distinct nuclei and nerve-fibres ; from the latter a nerve-cord passes off into the tail, and on one side of it there is a hollow sense-vesicle which has thin anterior and thick posterior walls ; the unpaired eye is imbedded in the antero-dorsal angle of the wall, and the otolith is situated on its floor, and projects upwards into its cavity. This last is the only part of the nervous system which is hollow at this time. The ciliated pit opens into the solid nervous substance at about the middle point of the ventral surface of the first portion, and on the dorsal surface of the second. As the ciliated pit of the embryo Amarecium is connected exclusively with the brain, it seems probable that its original function was the aeration of the brain (compare the Nemertinea). In Ascidia and Ciona, and pro- bably most other simple Ascidians, the function of the pit is that of a duct for the so-called hypophysial gland, while in Clavellina it communicates with the brain and probably aerates it, and also acts as a reservoir to carry off the secretion of the gland; or, in other words, has retained its primitive while taking on its secondary function. The pit is probably homologous with the hypophysis of vertebrates, in which the pineal gland possibly represents the dorsal continuation of the ciliated pit. Some notes on the anatomy of Cynthia complete the paper. Anatomy of Distaplia.*—M. F. Lahille describes the anatomy of the genus Distaplia, which has hitherto received but scant attention, though the form in question appears to be of some importance as a synthetic type. There are 6 buccal, and 4 cloacal lobes, the latter forming a long tongue in the adult. Four rows of very long bars (trémas) are united medianly by transverse anastomosing vessels. The latter support the “ inter-trematic ” sinuses which much increase the respiratory surface. The transverse vessels, which in the high Phlebobranchs form what are called the ribs of second and third order, very rarely interrupt the bars in Distaplia. They are formed from the fusion of bifurcating papille which spring from the middle of each inter-trematic sinus. The transverse sinuses are in their disposition intermediate between that of the Diplosomiz and that of the Aplidiz. The pericoronal groove (gouttiére) is homologous with the vibratile arcs in Appendicularias and morphologically independent of the branchize in all Ascidians. Into it the vibratile oval organ opens, and two nerves occur on the base of the groove. The tentacles, at first two, then four in number, increase by the formation of four other pairs appearing on the neural side. As in the Aplidie, the posterior portion of the branchia, to the side of the cesophagus, gives origin to the two endodermic tubes. These are, however, unequal and separate, do not involve heart or genital organs, and exhibit several muscle bundles and an ectodermic epithelium. ‘hey dis- charge the asexual multiplication, and correspond to stolon-tubes. Their marked development affects the other organs. The intestinal gland is greatly developed, its ducts anastomose abund- antly. It opens into a reservoir which communicates by a canal with the stomach. There is a cloacal diverticulum for incubation. In all their characters the young forms are Diplosomida, and the Leptoclinid connect them with Pyrosoma. The adults are Distomide as regards the position of their viscera, but in general structure Aplidix. * Bull. Soc. d’Hist, Nat. Touiouse, xxi. (1887) pp. 30-3 (de Q 2 944 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Are the Tunicata degenerate Fishes? *—Prof. HE. van Beneden dis, cusses the arguments of Prof. A. Dohrn in favour of the degeneration of the Tunicate from fishes. He regards those arguments as based on the belief that the pseudobranchiai grooves of the Cyclostomata are derived from a pair of branchial clefts, and that the rudiment of the thyroid of fishes, the hypobranchial organ of the Cyclostomata, the hypobranchial band of Amphioxus, and the endostyle of Tunicates, are the modified remains of another pair of branchial clefts. But the study of the innervation of the branchial apparatus of Ammocetes shows that the first branchial cleft of the Cyclostomata is the homologue of the spiracle of Selachians, and the true branchial nerves of one have just the same disposition as those of the others. If its innervation is to be the criterion the thyroid body represents several segments. In the answer which Prof. Dohrn has made to these criticisms he denies the statements of M. Julin as to the innervation of the branchial apparatus of Ammocetes. Prof. van Beneden points out that the German naturalist has studied very small larve, whereas Julin examined such as had nearly completed their development. M. Julin is to investigate young forms in order to control the observations of Dohrn. In a further answer Dr. Dohrn refers merely to a slight criticism of Prof. Beneden. Arthropoda. Structure of Alimentary Canal.t—Prof. A. Schneider communicates a series of notes on the anatomy and histology of the alimentary canal of Arthropods. (1) The hypodermis of insects consists, as Schneider and others have previously maintained, of a nucleated protoplasmic layer, without distinct cells, continuous with the sarcolemma and neurilemma of muscle and nerve, a literal ecto-mesoderm. Chitin is not an excreted substance, but a slow modification of the protoplasm. There is no real difference between that formed from muscle insertion, and that formed from the protoplasm. (2) Fore- and hind-gut have the structure which one would expect in invaginations of the ectoderm,—internally a chitinous layer, not sharply defined from the outer homogeneous hypodermis, which is succeeded by a layer of transverse and longitudinal muscle-fibres, the sarcolemma of which is continuous with the hypodermis. The ridges of the hind-gut of cater- pillars are formed from longitudinal muscle-fibres. (3) The mid-gut exhibits (a) the cellular digestive and absorptive layer, (b) chitinous lamellz, (c) hypodermis, and (d) rouscle-fibres. The chitin- ous layer of this region is renewed like that of other parts during skin- casting. These results hold true of other Arthropods as well as insects, to which they principally refer. (4) Special structures. (a) In many insects the hind-gut exhibits spinous modifications of the chitin, These are briefly referred to. (6) Similar chitinous thickenings in the fore-gut are much more frequent. Their disposition in various insects is simply noted. (5) Musculature of fore-gut. The fibres are longitudinal and transverse, the latter occasionally radial. No notice has hitherto been taken of the occurrence of what way be called a “ proboscis” (Riissel). Posteriorly the fore-gut is in some cases evaginated forwards and outwards, projecting into the lumen of the mid-gut. This is associated with an alteration in the * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 407-13, 433-6, and 582-3. ¢ Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), ii. (1887) pp. 82-96. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 945 disposition of the muscle-fibres of the fore-gut. A second type of ** proboscis ” occurs in Hymenoptera, where a modification, originating as above, under- goes a second turning, the primary portion remaining undifferentiated and non-muscular. 6) The memoir concludes with a description of the so-called funnel (Trichter), beginning at the end of the fore-gut. The first and ogee ce form arises on the outer surface of the proboscis, near its free end, the form of a tube continuous with the chitinous layer, and eneateee on to the anus. A somewhat divergent modification occurs in ants, wasps, hornets, &c. In all cases it arises at first as a blind tube from the fore-gut. It appears to grow gradually by chitinous secretion at its anterior end, and to be dissoived posteriorly, passing out with the feces. The common closed form protects the mid-gut from contact with hard substances. Its presence or absence, its closed or open form, depend on the nature of the food. a, Insecta. Spermatogenesis.*—Prof. v. la Valette St. George adds a fifth com- munication to his recent series of studies on spermatogenesis. He discusses the formation of the spermatocysts in Lepidoptera, and particularly the nature of the ensheathing membrane (Cystenhaut). What he long since stated, he still maintains, that the membrane arises from the apposition of individual cells. Recent observations have only confirmed his opinion. He also noticed the frequent occurrence of processes of various length and breadth arising from the membrane of the spermatocysts. The function of the “ceystenhaut”’ is to inclose, separate, and bring to contemporaneous maturity its content of spermatocytes. Its réle is fulfilled by other structures in other cases of spermatogenesis. The author notes the increasing adoption of his well-known nomenclature of spermatogenetic phases. The paper contains some lively criticism of recent investigations and investigators. In concluding, Prof. v. la Valette St. George reiterates his classic law of spermatogenesis. The mother sperm-cells or spermatogonia (Stam- samenzellen, cellules de souche, &c., &c.), form by division an aggregate of cells —the spermatogemma—which i in insects, as in Amphibia, acquires by the apposition of the peripheral cells a special sheath, and becomes a spermatocyst (Samenschlauch). The contents of this—the spermatocytes (Samenvermehrungszellen, cellules proliferatives, &c.), multiply by repeated division to form the immature sperms or spermatides (Samenausbildungs- zellen, &c.), from which finally the spermatozoa or spermatosomata result. Tannin in Insects.,—Mr. Slater communicates the results of certain researches on the. colours of insects. He considers that tannin, which is found in some leaf- and wood-eating species, may be the cause of certain of the yellow and yellowish-brown colours. Mr. Slater refers also to the experiments of M. Villou, who has extracted tannin from the corn-weevil. Black patterns Mr. Slater considers may be produced by the deposition of iron in the parts of the chitinous tissue, which readily takes up colouring matters when tannin is present. Similar lines and spots may be made to appear artificially by steeping the elytra in iron solution. Histology of Enteric Canals of Insects.t—Herr v. Faussek has dis- covered tkat in the mid-gut of Hremobia and the larva of Afschna, there are glandular crypts, formed by special cell-complexes, in addition to the * Arch, f. Mikr. Anat., xxx. (1887) pp. 426-34 (1 pl.). + Proc. Entomol. Soc. ‘Lond., 1887, pp. 32- } Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 694- 712 (1 pl.). 946 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO cylindrical cells. In the cells of these glands, but not in those of the epithelium, mitotic division of the nucleus was observed. The rectum of Eremobia consists of two divisions which are separated from one another by a muscular valve ; in both, the epithelial layer is well developed, and in that of the rectal glands there are mucous cells in addition to those of the ordinary cylindrical form. The rectum of the larva of Afschna also consists of two divisions, but these are not separated by any valve. Through its whole extent the epithelial cells are of two kinds, some being large with large nuclei, and the others small. The latter form compact folds, and the former either lie close to the muscular wall or give rise.to simple folds widely separated from one another. In addition to its exterior gills, the rectum of these larve is provided with typical rectal glands. Protective Value of Colour and Markings in Insects.*— Mr. EH. B. Poulton has made a large series of experiments with the object of proving the protective value of colour and markings in insects in reference to their vertebrate enemies. He concludes that the extremely specialized defence of the larval stage follows from its delicate anatomical construction and the necessities which are imposed upon it as the great feeding stage. Highly conspicuous insects nearly always possess some unpleasant attri- bute, such as disagreeable taste or smell in the tissues and fluids of the body, irritating hairs, or stings, but in a small number of cases a con- spicuous appearance has not yet been shown to be attended by any unpleasant attribute. In various species the same colours and patterns are again and again repeated, so that the vertebrate enemies are only com- pelled to learn a few types of appearance, and these types are of a kind which such enemies most easily learn. Certain appearances are especially impressed on them by highly aggressive insects, feared because of stings and so on; and hence, there is especial advantage in any approximation to such types. In a relatively few cases aggressive forms among the Vertebrata (serpents), are mimicked, though the insect itself is quite harmless. Insects which are protectively coloured not uncommonly assume, when detected, a terrifying aspect, and in some cases take up offensive measures, such as the discharge of irritating fluid. A few forms, which are probably transitional, may be unconcealed, and yet not very conspicuous; these may possess unpleasant qualities, or may be eaten readily. As the likes and dislikes of insect-eaters are purely relative, and as, if pressed with hunger, they may eat the most disagreeable and highly conspicuous insects, we may here find an explanation of the fact that only a relatively small number of insects adopt such a means of defence. It seems probable that when one vertebrate eats an unpleasant insect and another refuses it, the former has conquered its prejudices, having originally disliked the insect. In the sexually mature forms warning colours can be distinguished from sexual colours by their distribution on the surface of the body, by the way in which they are displayed in flight, by their type of pattern, and by the colours employed. The sexual colours or patterns are beautiful, the others conspicuous. ‘I'his conspicuous appearance has relation to the injury which would be inflicted by the experimental “tasting” of certain enemies, such as birds or lizards; though enemies which, like frogs, inflict no injuries in tasting, have, to a limited extent, taken advantage of the warning colours. Insects which evade their enemies by protective resemblance and attitude, by rapid movements or habits of concealment, are generally palatable, but they may possess an unpleasant taste or smell which may or may not protect them from their enemies; in a very small number of species the most perfect * Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 191-274. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 947 form of protective resemblance may coexist with a most unpleasant taste. Mere size alone may protect a species against certain of its smaller foes. Comparing the different stages in Lepidoptera, unpleasant attributes appear to arise in the larval stage, and they then often pass through the two other stages attended or unattended, in one or both, by warning colours. The most highly specialized protective colours probably also possess value as sexual adornments. Considerably more than one hundred species or stages of insects have been experimented on. Lepidopterous Larve, &c.*—Mr. E. B. Poulton sums up the results of his observations during 1886 on Lepidopterous larve. He shows that in the young conditions of Smerinthus and of Sesia there are characters present, many of which, though disappearing in later stages, serve to link together several of the allied genera. Special reference is made to the red spots upon certain of the segments of Smerinthus which are considered as due to the modifications of a coloured border in ancestral forms. A new species of Sphinx larva from the Celebes with protective markings, as in Cherocampa, and with certain distinctly ancestral characters, is described. Interesting details are given as to the highly protective specialization which is met with among the Geometre, in regard to their attitude and colour; and also as evident from the presence of certain otherwise useless processes on the body. Further mention is made of the defensive structures of the larva of Dicrania with their histo- logical characters. Such defensive reversible glands must be considered as of fairly common occurrence, the Liparide affording many examples. Further facts are noted with reference to the life-history of Paniscus cephalotes. Suggestions are made as to the deposition of pigments in the superficial layer of the cuticle in many larve immediately before pupation, and upon the hereditary transmission of pink colour in the tubercles of Saturnia carpini. Attention is called to the high protective specialization of the imago of Gonoptera libatriz, where the otherwise conspicuous eyes and antenne are hidden when the insect is at rest. The paper also contains remarks upon the advantage resulting from the late emergence of females from the pupa, and upon the greater readiness of larve in the younger than in older stages to feed on different plants. It is suggested that carnivorous habits are induced by a lack in the supply of the normal vegetable food. Mr. Poulton and Dr. Dicey have both noticed the tendency of young larvz to seek the light. Some kept in a glass cylinder congregated always where light was strongest. Larve also seem to appreciate the influence exerted by the force of gravitation. Sound Organs of the Green Cicada.t—Dr. A. H. S. Lucas, after referring to the theory of Landois, mentions the recent defences of the older explana- tion of Réaumur offered by Prof. Lloyd Morgan and himself. He then states that the stridulating organ of the male Cyelochila Australasiz is formed by a specialization of the tergum of the first abdominal and the sterna of the last thoracic and first abdominal segments. A pair of rattle membranes with chitinous ridges is borne dorsally, and these are moved, to produce the sound, by tendinous slips from the exaggerated abdominal muscles of the two segments involved. Ventrally, on each side, two delicate tense * Trans. Entomol. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 281-321. + Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1887) pp. 173-8. 948 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO membranes inclose three air-spaces which act as resonators, and are formed by the suppression of visceral and muscular elements. These essential organs are covered and protected by stout chitinous plates—a pair projecting forwards over the sclerous rattle membranes, and another pair arising externally to the legs in the mesothorax, and extending backwards to cover the air-chambers. The modifications are merely suggested in the female. A series of experiments is described which point clearly to the functions of the various organs as assigned to them by Mr. Lucas, and dissections and plates accompany the paper. Structure of the Head of Blow-fly Larva.*—Prof. B. T. Lowne has come to the conclusion that embryology shows the futility of discussion with regard to the segmentation of the head in insects; he compares them with those which have been held with regard to the vertebrate skull ; no segmentation occurs in the pre-oral region, and the head consists of an unsegmented pre-oral cap, developed from the cephalic fold, of two lateral procephalic lobes, and of three post-oral segments with their three pairs of lateral appendages. The antenne are developed from the non- segmented pre-oral region, and, like the eyes, have no homologies with limbs. “A comparison between these structures and the post-oral appendages has no more basis in their developmental history than a comparison of the trabecule cranii with the ribs, or of the sense corpuscles of a vertebrate with its limbs.” Mr. Lowne is of opinion that the whole exterior of the proboscis, except the labrum, represents the galez and stipes of the maxille, while the edges of the labrum and its apodemes represent the lacinia; if this view be correct there is nothing abnormal in the position of the maxillary palpi. Sexual Generation of Chermes.t—Dr. F. Blochmann has elucidated an obscure point in the life-history of Chermes in discovering the sexual generation. The observations of Ratzeburg, Leuckart, and others had long since demonstrated (a) that a parthenogenetic, wingless generation passed the winter and deposited eggs at the base of the buds of the pine, (b) that their progeny developed in the galls and emerged in early summer as a parthenogenetic winged brood, and (c) that these produced a small yellowish wingless generation. It was supposed, direct evidence not being forthcoming, that the latter became the parthenogenetic winter generation (a) above referred to. This Blochmann has shown to be a mistaken inference. The yellow coloured brood are sewual. Males and females are readily distinguishable, the former by the brown colour of the posterior portion of the body and by their very active habit. They possess two conspicuous testes and a penis beset with barbs. The females are yellow and not brown posteriorly, and of sluggish habit. They possess a single oviduct, two accessory glands, and a receptaculum seminis full of sperms. Both sexes exhibit a well- developed proboscis and alimentary canal. After impregnation, the females hide at the bases of the needles on the somewhat thicker branches. There they lay a few eggs and die. From these fertilized ova the winter (a) parthenogenetic forms result. These are found at the bases of the buds from October onwards. The entire life-history thus closely resembles that of Phylloxera. * Journ. Quek. Mier. Club, iii. (1887) pp. 120-4. + Bio]. Centralbl., vii. (1887) pp. 417-20. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 949 B. Myriopoda. New Species of Myriopoda.*—Mr. J. M‘Neill gives descriptions of twelve new species of Myriopods, chiefly from Indiana. Hexaglena is the name applied to a new genus, in which there are six eyes, arranged in two divergent lines, close to the bases of the antenne ; the head is conical and minute, and there are spiracles in one row on each side of the body. The new genus differs from its nearest allies Octoglena and Petaserpes, in that the former of them has eight eyes, and the dorsal aspect of its head exposed, and the latter has only two eyes, while its spiracles are arranged in two rows. 4H. eryptocephala is a new species. The other new forms are Polydesmus castaneus ; Trichopetalum bollmani, which is allied to T. glomera- tum; Lisiopetalum endasym ; Iulus multiannulatus, which is 165 mm. long, and is the largest species of the genus yet described from North America; Geophilus brunneus, G. indiane, and G. varians ; Mecistocephalus strigosus, and M. foveatus ; and Scolopocryptops nigridius, which in general appearance and habits resembles Lithobius, 6. Arachnida. Phylogeny of Arachnida.{—In discussing the systems of organs in the Arachnida, Herr B. Weissenborn rightly commences with the nervous system, as questions of homologies between the appendages can only be answered by reference to the innervation. The nervous system of Arach- nids is distinguished from that of most Arthropods by the absence of antennary nerves, but there are many points of agreement which show us that the system in all Arthropods exhibits a more or less well-marked segmental development and distribution ; they all agree in having the parts derived from epiblastic thickenings, but in the Crustacea the rudiments are continuous, while in Arachnids and Myriopods, the rudiments of the central portion are distinct from those of the ventral medulla, and in insects they are only loosely connected. So far then the Arachnida agree with the Insecta and Myriopoda. With regard to histological structure and composi- tion they all agree. The Tardigrada and the Pyenogonida present con- siderable variations from what is normal among the Arachnida. The dermal skeleton of Arachnids, like that of other Arthropods, is a product of the integument, and differs considerably both in its qualitative and its quantitative development; the most various relations obtain with regard to external jointing. Here again the Tardigrada and the Pycnogonida are the most abnormal. In the former, and in the Acarina, the homonomy of the body segments, and the union of the anal and genital orifices are sharp marks of distinction, and coupled with other causes, seem to show that the Tardigrada are the offshoots of a branch of the articulate phylum, which separated off much earlier than that of the Arachnida, and perhaps even than the Arthropoda. The appendages are next considered; the diminution in the number possessed by the Linguatulida and their small size may be explained by the cestode-like mode of life of these forms. Here, as in the dermal skeleton and the nervous system, the Scorpionida and Solpugida are groups which exhibit'a primitive character in many of their characters, and they must therefore be regarded as standing near an older stem-group. The Pycnogonida are again aberrant, while the Tardigrada give just the same kind of evidence with their appendages as with their dermal skeleton. The respiratory organs are not to be regarded as modified gills, but * Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum, 1887, pp. 323-34 (1 pl.). t Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 33-119. 950 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO merely as modifications of the respiratory organs which are found in Peripatus, the Myriopoda, and insects. There has been an adaptation to a. lively mode of life, and, in correlation with the fusion of the segments and contraction of the hind body, a diminution in the number of stigmata. The great development of the skeleton of some has led to a marked localiza- tion of the respiratory apparatus of e.g. scorpions. The Solpugide present the most primitive relations of the thoracic stigmata, and the Scorpionid of the abdominal. While it may be supposed that the Tardigrada have lost their respiratory organs, the absence of them in the Pycnogonida must be referred to a primitive condition. Questions as to the homologies of the various stigmata can only be answered after an investigation into their developmental history ; the original position of the openings may well be supposed to have been lateral and symmetrical. The diminution in the number of the stigmata has led to an increase of complexity in the trachez connected with those which are persistent. e. Crustacea. Green Gland of Crayfish.*—Prof. C. Grobben replies to the memoir by Herr B. Rawitzt on the green gland of the crayfish. In that memoir almost all Grobben’s previous results were declared by Rawitz to be erroneous. In replying to the criticism Professor Grobben reasserts his original conclusions, ard as a comparison of the two reports will show, is in direct conflict with Rawitz on six important points. (1) The canal of the green gland does not exhibit any division near its passage into the sac. The terminal sac of the gland passes into the green portion, and that into the white region which expands into the sac. (2) The yellowish-brown terminal portion of the green gland is distinctly a sac with folded walls. (8) Its colour does not depend on a yellow colour of the nuclei, but on yellowish-brown bodies in the protoplasm of the epithelial cells. (4) The cells of the green portion of the gland exhibit towards the lumen of the duct a thick cuticle (Stabchencuticula). (5) The occurrence of strands in the protoplasm of the cells is to be seen in the white portion also, and in fact very distinctly. (6) The terminal sac is richly provided with blood-vessels. Embryology of Mysis Chameleo.t—Herr J. Nusbaum commences his account of the embryology of Mysis Chameleo with a description of the external changes undergone by the egg in the course of development. Perhaps the most interesting point is that which treats of the blastoderm ; like E. van Beneden, the author finds that the blastoderm appears in the form of a disc, the edges of which grow around the entire egg ; but Herr Nusbaum finds that this disc appears on what will be the ventral surface of the egg. The egg is covered by a delicate homogeneous or transparent mem- brane; the contents are largely composed of the nutrient yolk, formed of more or less large spheres, round grains, and droplets of fat. At what will be the ventral pole of the egg, and just below the membrane, appears a disc formed by a finely granular protoplasm, having in its centre a rounded and slightly elongated nucleus; the plasma, which is granular at iis centre, is converted at the side of the yolk into a homogeneous proto- plasmic layer, which refracts the light strongly. Later on two nuclei are formed by the segmentation of the primitive nucleus. After a lacuna in * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxx. (1887) pp. 323-6. + See this Journal, ante, p. 748. {~ Arch. Zool. Expér, et Gén., v. (1887) pp. 123-44 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 951 his observations the author observed a stage in which the formative proto- plasm was differentiated into two layers, the outer of which was finely granular, while the inner was more coarsely so, and contained large highly refractive granules; the nuclei of both these layers appear to be the products of the segmentation nucleus. The division of the nucleus of the outer layer gives rise to a small blastodermic disc, formed of a single layer of hexagonal cells. The mesoderm is originally paired, and is formed by the division of the ectodermal cells on the thickened borders of the ventral streak; it con- tinues even to develop during the naupliiform stage, in which three pairs of rudimentary appendages have the form of small sacs, made up by a layer of hexagonal cells. Corresponding with the segments indicated by these appendages, the mesoderm undergoes a rudimentary segmentation. The body-cavity is formed in the anterior part of the body by the absorption of the yolk which is surrounded by the mesoderm; in the hinder part of the body the yolk is surrounded by endoderm, and the space between ectoderm and endoderm is filled by isolated mesodermic cells; these, later on, become connected with the ectoderm and endoderm, and between them the body-cavity appears. The types of segmentation hitherto observed in the Crustacea are essen- tially four, three of which are holoblastic. In Palzmon Bobretzky has found it to be complete and regular; after the division of the nucleus the ovum divides into two segmentation spheres ; the internal portions of all the cells fuse into a central vitelline mass, which is surrounded by a blasto- dermic layer. Mayer found in Eupagurus Prideauaii that the nucleus divided into two, four, eight parts; the independent cells thus developed migrate towards the surface of the egg, and there is then a total and regular seg- mentation of the egg. Here also the internal ends of the cells fuse into a single central vitelline mass. In Calianassa mediterranea and in Asellus aquaticus the nucleus and the surrounding protoplasm undergo segmenta- tion in the interior of the egg, and after the formation of a certain number of cells these migrate, as in Hupagurus; the yolk then commences to undergo superficial segmentation in such a way that a vitelline segment is differentiated around each blastodermic cell, while the centre of the mass undergoes no segmentation; this type reminds us of what happens in insects. In the Schizopoda and in Oniscus a mesoblastic segmentation has been observed. Brain of Mysis flexuosa.*—M. R. Koehler finds that the elements of the nerve-centre of Mysis flexuosa offer no special characters, but that the dotted substance is a good deal reduced. The greater part of the non-cellular portions are formed of packets of parallel fibres, which form very distinct bundles; the masses of granular dotted substance interposed among the fibrils are neither numerous nor extensive, and most are easily resolved, with a high magnifying power, into a close plexus of anastomosing fibrils. The topographical relations were studied by sections taken along varying planes, but the descriptions refer so closely to the illustrations that a general account is here impossible. The structure of the ventral chain is extremely simple, and the ganglia only project slightly beyond the connectives; in the abdomen the ganglia are even more reduced than in the other parts of the body; the connectives are formed of longitudinal fibres ; those of the first three ganglia are separated by a certain quantity of connective tissue, but beyond it they approach one another, and are only separated by a delicate partition. * Ann. Sci. Nat.—Zool., ii. (1887) pp. 159-88 (2 pls.). 952 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Shell of Hermit-crab.*—Mr. A. H. 8. Lucas, commenting upon the usually accepted statement that hermit-crabs appropriate empty shells for protecting the defenceless part of the body, instances a case in which he observed the crab attack a living Fasciolaria, which it pulled out piece- meal after some time. From the appearance of the shells of tropical species of hermit-crabs Mr. Lucas is led to think that living rather than empty shells are usually seized. Polar Globules in Isopoda.t—Herr G. Leichmann has observed the formation of two polar globules in Asellus aquaticus, and so has established an example of the ovum of a Malacostracan, richly provided with yolk, developing in the ordinary manner. As the presence of a nucleus in this stage has been denied by some writers the author desires to put its exist- ence on record. New Type of Compound Eye.{—Mr. F. E. Beddard finds that in the retinula of Serolis there are only four cells. The rhabdom is not imbedded between them, but is only in contact at its upper part; the lower portion is surrounded by two large spherical transparent cells, which fit in closely between the four retinula-cells. The author has been able to find these hyaline cells in several species of Cymothoide. Aiga has seven cells to each retinula, but the presence of the hyaline cells tends to confirm the view of many carcinologists as to the close relationship between the Serolide and the Cymothoide. Pale variety of Asellus aquaticus.§ — Dr. R. Schneider gives the name of Asellus aquaticus var. Fribergensis to a pale variety of A. aquaticus, which has been found in the caves of Freiberg. The author considers that this new variety is of great interest as representing an intermediate stage between the two very closely allied species A. aquaticus and A. cavaticus. Another point of importance is the support afforded to the belief that forms which have become accommodated to subterranean life have a tendency to resort to young or embryonic conditions. In A. aquaticus the pigment is well developed, and the general colour of the animal is, therefore, a deep brownish grey; its variety and A. cavaticus have no pigment, and are consequently milk-white in colour. The eye of A. aquaticus consists of four well-developed ocelli, almost imbedded in a continuous pigment-mass, and over each there is a closely connected and distinct cornea ; in the variety the pigment-mass is by no means continu- ous, the cornea is indistinct and not closely connected with its ocellus ; A. cavaticus has no eyes. The outer antenne of A. aquaticus have about 60 joints, the variety 50-60, and these are more delicate and elongated ; the other species has from 25-55. A. aquaticus and its variety have four coarse tactile setee on the endopodite of the first pair of maxilla, A. cavaticus has five, one of which is larger than the rest. The pedes spurii of the variety stand almost midway between those of the two species. The cuticular calcification of A. aquaticus is slight, and there are not many crystalline elements as there are in the variety, where, as in A. cavaticus, the calcification is well marked. In the characters of its long hepatic tubes the variety resembles the species with which it is associated. The excretory organ of the adult A. aquaticus forms a continuous tube on either side of the digestive heart, while in the variety these are more broken up, * Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxii. (1886) pp. 61-3. + Zool. Anzeig., x. pp. 533-4. ¢ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., xx. (1887) pp. 233-6. § SB. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., 1887, pp. 723-42 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 953 just as they are in the young of A. aquaticus: those of the other species are not known. Other juvenile characters which may be noted, are the reduction in the numbers of joints of the outer antennz, and the presence, last of all, of pigment on the head, and especially near the eye. Australian Cladocera.*—It is a well-known fact that the eggs of various fresh-water animals (notably those of Entomostraca) will withstand long desiccation, but still the experiments detailed by Prof. G. O. Sars have con- siderable interest. A correspondent sent him some dried mud from the shores of a fresh-water lake in tropical Australia. This mud was placed in water, and from it were hatched out one Copepod, one Ostracode, a species of Polyzoan, apparently belonging to the genus Plumatella, and five species of Cladocera. These last are made the subject of an exhaustive paper. The species all belonged to genera (Daphnia, Diaphanosoma, Cerio- daphnia, Moina, and Leydigia) already known from European waters, and the species of these genera themselves closely resemble those of the anti- podes, notwithstanding that they came from localities thousands of miles apart, and which have entirely different environments. These facts recall to the author the close similarity, even identity, of the crustacean species of Italy and Norway, and he concludes that one cannot lay too great stress on the importance of birds in the distribution of these forms. Vermes. a, Annelida. Anatomy of Earthworms.j—Mr. F. E. Beddard describes in Eudrilus sylvicola n. sp. an arrangement of the ovary and oviduct in which these parts occupy precisely the reverse positions to those figured by Prof. Perrier ; in fact, the oviduct lies in front of and not behind the ovary. Attention is further drawn to the fact that the ovary and its duct are connected with one another, and that, therefore, there is not the difference between Annelids and Hirudinea which is ordinarily stated to obtain. The organs called testes by Prof. Perrier are reaily the vesicule seminales.{ The terminal portion of the male generative apparatus of Eudrilus offers some points of interest; the glandular nature of the prostate gland is masked by the great development of its muscular layers, which give to it its characteristic nacreous appearance; the thick muscular coat is formed, for the greatest part, by longitudinal fibres; the glandular tissue is divided into two layers, which present an unmistakable resemblance to the epidermis of the clitellum ; in its posterior half the prostate is divided into two independent tubes; one contains the continuation of the lumen of the prostate, and the other at first contains merely a mass of glandular cells; a lumen is soon developed. The vasa deferentia, after entering the prostate, become very fine tubes. Each portion of the prostate becomes continuous with a narrow tube that leads to the penis; this last is a muscular process of the walls of the bursa copulatrix, and contains a median canal which is continuous with the lumen of the duct of the prostate gland. In the possession of a muscular coat to the vas deferens Eudrilus presents another point of resemblance to the * Forh. Vidensk. Selsk. Christiania, 1886, 49 pp. and 8 pls. Cf. Amer. Natural., xxi. (1887) p. 186. ; + Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 372-91 (1 pl.). ~ It seems to be but little known that in his ‘Forms of Animal Life,’ the late Professor Rolleston correctly figured the position of the testes in the common earth- worm, so that he comes between Hering (1857, not 1852) and the rediscovery by Professor Bourne. 954 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO leech. It will be necessary to form a new family for the reception of Eudrilus. Mr. Beddard next makes some corrections, and gives some further in- formation as to the reproductive organs of Acanthodrilus, and concludes with a note on the genital sete of Perichzta houlleti, which have the general shape of imperfectly developed ordinary sete, but terminate at their free end in a distinctly bifid extremity, the ends being connected by a delicate membrane. New Species of Earthworm.*—Mr. F. HE. Beddard describes Cryptodrilus fletcheri, a new species of earthworm from Queensland, which appears to be closely allied to C. rusticus Fletcher. The calciferous glands occupy an unusual position, for, instead of lying to the sides of the intestine, they are placed below it, and each gland comes into close relations with its fellow. The nephridia are on the type of Mierochxta and some species of Acanthodrilus; they consist of a complicated coil of glandular tubules ; their orifices alternate in-position from segment to segment, but always correspond to one of the sete. The seminal vesicles present the remark- able arrangement described by Mr. Fletcher, for a pair is placed in the ninth and another in the twelfth segment, the intermediate segments being without them, and, as in C. rusticus, the prostates are large. There are four pairs of spermathece, and these are interesting as presenting a difference in the minute structure of the spermatheca and its diverticulum, the latter having a very delicate epithelium, and the former tall columnar epithelial cells. Anatomy of Hirudinea Rhynchobdellida.t—M. G. Dutilleul commences his notes on some points in the anatomy of the Rhynchobdellida with a discussion on the dorsal organ of Glossiphonia, which was first detected by Herr Nusbaum in G. complanata, where it is, however, provisional ; it is also provisional in G. marginata, and the author believes that it is homologous with the permanent dorsal organ of G. bioculata ; in this last it is nothing but a chitinous layer in a cutaneous depression, and M. Dutilleul thinks it would be well to call it the dorsal chitinous layer. With regard to the male apparatus of G. sexoculata, which it has been difficult to associate with that of allied species, on account of its abnormal form, the author states that he has discovered that the external branch of the U-shaped tube does not terminate in a free point, but is folded, directed backwards parallel to the axis of the body, and that it receives on its outer side the short deferent canals of the ten testicles of the corresponding side. The wart-like tubercles of Pontobdella are found to be richly vascular and well provided with muscles, so that they represent differentiated respiratory organs, from which may be derived those of Glossiphonia and Branchellion. Histology of Nervous System of Polycheta.t—Dr. E. Rohde gives an account of his researches on the histology of the nervous system of the Aphrodite. His investigations mainly refer to Aphrodite aculeata Lin., Hermione hystrix Quatr., Sigalion squamatum Delle Ch., Sthenelais dendro- © lepis Clap., Polynoe elegans Gr. (Lepidasthenia elegans Mlmgr.), Psammolyce arenosa Delle Ch. He prefaces his memoir with an historical résumé of the relative researches of the last twenty-five years. He discusses in order (a) the ganglion-cells, (b) the central substance, (c) the nerves, (d) the relation of the ganglionic processes to (b) and (c), (e) the subcuticular fibrous tissue. His principal results are as follows :— * Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 544-8. + Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 128-30. { Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), ii. (1887) pp. 1-87 (7 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 955 (1) All the parts of the system consist of an internal nervous substance and an external sheath. (2) The latter (the subcuticular fibrous tissue) is a fibrous modification of the subcuticula. (3) The former consists of a cortex of ganglion-cells imbedded in the meshes of the subcuticular fibrous tissue, and of a central substance inclosed by the above and formed from ganglionic processes. (4) The ganglion cells are all unipolar and membraneless. They are either (a) small, clear, pyriform, disposed in packets, and with numerous equal-sized nucleoli, or (b) large, darkly granular, round isolated cells, with one large refractive nucleus, or sometimes two differing in character. They are sometimes of enormous size. The two types are connected by transition forms. (5) The cell consists of two substances (a) a granular, fibrillar mitom, and (b) an apparently homogeneous intermediate substance, the paramitom. (6) The central substance consists of fine, non-anastomosing fibrille, regularly disposed across one another in the brain, but longitudinal else- where. The central substance is but sparsely penetrated by processes of the subcuticular sheath. In the nerves the fibrils do not form fibres. (7) The delicate processes of the first type of ganglion-cell pass directly, those of the others by brush-like terminations, into the fine fibrils of the central nervous substance. The length of the processes before they fall into fibrille is very variable, it depends partly on the size of the cell. Most of them break up in the same segment, while others are extremely long (giant fibres), extending along the entire system, and even following the nerves to the periphery. (8) The giant nerve-fibres consist of an axial cylinder (the process of the giant-cell), and a fibrous sheath. In those of the ventral nerve-cord, there is a wide space between sheath and axis; this is traversed by fine lateral fibrils penetrating the fibrous sheath, and possibly connecting the axial cylinder with the fibrils of the central substance. (10) Both the giant fibres and the central substance include very peculiar, small, round elements, like small multipolar ganglion-cells. They give off 3-4 fine fibrils, which, in the central substance, mix with the ordinary nerve-fibrils, and in the giant-fibres pass across the space like the fibrils above noted as arising from the axis-cylinder. This arrange- ment probably secures a second connection between the axis-cylinder of the giant-fibres and the central nervous substance. (11) The processes of the peripheral ganglion-cells stand in the same relation to the nerves, as the processes of the central ganglion-cells to the brain and nerve-cord. Formation of Germinal Layers in Dasychone lucullana.*—M. L. Roule has endeavoured to settle the question as to the origin of the mesoblast in polycbetous annelids, which has been differently answered by Dr. Hatschek and Prof. Salensky. He finds that the ova of Dasychone, which are richly supplied with yolk, segment very irregularly ; of the first two segmentation- spheres, one is small and contains the greater part of the germinal material, and the other is larger and is formed of a compact mass of vitelline granu- lations. The former divides more rapidly than the latter, and its segments gradually surround the yolk until only one point is left uncovered. This corresponds to the blastopore of the larve of Hupomatus studied by Hatschek ; at this stage a cavity appears in the region opposite to the blastopore. From the inner layer, at the time when the blastopore closes, some cells separate which will give rise to the mesoblast; in all the sections which the author examined, the number of initial mesoblast cells appeared to be more than two. ‘he central mass of elements charged * Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 236-7. 956 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO with vitelline granulations corresponds therefore to a meso-endoblast, from which the future mesoblast cells are the first to be differentiated. Organization of Chetopterus.*—M. J. Joyeux-Laffuie has examined Cheetopterus Valencinti. He finds that the median hinder groove does not stop at the level of the first pair of appendages of the median region, or continue on to the second, as various authors have stated, but that it bifurcates and goes on as two deep grooves; their function is to conduct to the oral infundibulum the food-particles brought by the current of water which passes through the tube of the worm, and they are therefore analogous to the endostyle of Ascidians. The nephridia are remarkably developed in Chetopterus, but they are not found in the most anterior division of the body. The infundibulum is semilunar, and the whole of its internal surface is covered uniformly with long vibratile cilia. At the level of each appendage the tube is enlarged to form a pouch, which is of considerable size, and opens to the exterior by. a short canal. The cilia on the lining epithelium are very well developed. The tissue of the walls of the nephridium is formed of elements which resemble the cells of the organ of Bojanus; when separated they are spherical in form, and they contain a large nucleus which has one or more concretions in its interior; they sometimes increase in size and unite, when they form a calculus which almost completely fills the cell. Free calculi are often found in the excretory canal or in the pouch, and then the cells which give rise to them disappear. The sexes are separate, but the male and female gonads have the same form and position ; the products accumulate in large quantities, and give to the male a pale white, and to the female a slightly rosy colour. Histology of Eunice.j—Prof. EH. Jourdan describes the histology of two species of the genus Hunice—EH. Harassii and EH. torquata. The cuticle is remarkable for its thickness, and is seen by the use of reagents to consist of superposed lamelle, which sometimes give it a regularly striated appear- ance; the existence of pores is best demonstrated after the use of such reagents—e. g. Hoffmann’s green—as colour the contents of the underlying glandular cells. The epidermis is formed of cylindrical epithelial elements and glandular cells; the former are connected with one another by basal anastomosing branches, and give rise to the arrangement which Claparéde distinguished as stellar connective tissue. ‘The glandular cells are irregu- larly disposed on the body, being very rare on the dorsal surface, and most common at the edges of the ventral; some of these cells are hyaline and some are granular in appearance, but both are modifications of a single type of anatomical element. When the muscular fibres are teased, the irregularity and often the bizarre appearance of their forms are the first point to attract attention; they seem to be very long, are irregularly flattened, and indicate waves of contraction by thickenings scattered very irregularly along their whole extent. The author thinks that he has found evidence of true nerve-endings in the muscles, and states that he has observed similar arrangements in Holothurians. In the account of the central nervous system we must content ourselves with noting a few points: the dotted substance is composed of very deli- cate, homogeneous fibrils quite like those which are met with in the peri- pheral nerves ; they form so inextricable a plexus that the dotted substance cannot be separated out; the spaces of the close and delicate plexuses are occupied by an interfibrillar protoplasm which is sufficient to convert the * Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 125-7. + Ann. Sci. Nat.—Zool., 1i. (1887) pp. 239-304 (5 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 957 central nucleus of the brain into a homogeneous mass. In the ventral cord we find, below the central mass of nerve-fibres, a hyaline structureless space, which corresponds to what other authors have called a giant nerve-fibre. M. Jourdan refuses to regard this structure as nervous, and looks upon it as being an organ of support for the ventral nervous system. Among the investments of the cord is a pigmented mass, which is specially accumulated above it. This mass is lodged in a plexus of cells with branched and anastomosing prolongations, and the cells themselves appear to be com- parable to the plasmatic cells of the connective tissue of vertebrates. After some account of the process of regeneration of the central nervous system, the author passes to the sensory organs, where the antennz are first described; the eye has a crystalline lens provided with a capsule, formed by the folding over of a delicate portion of the body-wall; the body of the lens itself is semi-liquid, and is, possibly, analogous to the mucus secreted by the animal; the cells beyond it form the retina and vitreous body, and are nothing more than modified epithelial cells of the hypodermis; the author compares this simple eye with those of Patella, of Lamellibranchs, and with the simple eyes of Insects. The digestive tract exhibits no indications of any glandular organ; the gills are essentially formed of two vessels covered by a layer of longitudinal muscles, and protected by an epithelium which is similar to that of the general surface of the body. The author thinks that there is no endothelial lining to the vessels of the Chetopoda; but as this would be a remarkable divergence from what obtains in other forms, he thinks it ought to be verified. The observations on the “pedal glands,” the lateral pigment-organs, and the segmental organs are collected into one chapter, as these parts have been long regarded as the same. The term of pedal gland is applied to the organ which Claparéde regarded as pouring its secretion on to the sete. Immediately beneath the setz of each segment there is a mass of cells, which form a sort of epithelial bud on the internal surface of the integument. A superficial examination will suffice to show that these cells do not differ from the glandular elements which are found in the epidermis. They are so pressed against one another as to form a sort of multilobate racemose gland, the product of which passes to the exterior by a number of pores; these glands are better developed in Eunice Harassii than in E. torquata. The lateral pigment-organs were rightly regarded by Claparéde, in opposition to Ehlers, as quite independent of the segmental organs; as to these last, which are very difficult to observe in most species of the genus, the great Swiss naturalist was unable to detect the external orifice. M. Jourdan comes to the conclusion that the organ opens to the exterior immediately below the pedal gland; the peripheral portion is formed of a membranous tube with flat cells on either surface, and appears to be rather an efferent vessel for the genital products than an organ of secretion. Nervous System of Opheliaceze.*—Dr. W. Kiikenthal gives a detailed account of the structure of the nervous system in the Opheliacez. Along the median line of the ventral surface there extend two parallel strands, which diverge and run to points at both ends, forking anteriorly so as to surround the gut. In two regions the strands are united, in the anterior portion of the head, and along the whole region from the anus to the third tail-segment. The two fibrous strands are surrounded by groups of ganglion-cells, and a common neurilemma ensheathes the entire system. Each segment contains two or three ganglionic aggregations. These give * Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 511-80 (3 pis.). 1887, oR 958 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO off processes, in part to the nerves, in greater part to the longitudinal strand of the opposite side, and to a small extent to the longitudinal strand of the same side. ‘The differentiation of ganglia and connecting com- missures is not yet complete. Hach complex of nerve-cells, the processes of which form part at least of each pair of nerves, is to be regarded as a ventral ganglion. There are four pairs of aggregates in each group, two lateral and two internal, two ventral, and two dorsal. Asa portion of the processes of the lateral cells passes to the other side, two bridges are formed, one ventral and one dorsal. In each segment there are two or three such double bridges, and corresponding to these two or three pairs of nerves passing out from the same plane. The strands surrounding the gut have the same structure. On their lower portion lies a ganglion, which in structure corresponds to half of a ganglion from the ventral cord. The same groups of cells are present except the median internal. Since the strongly developed sympathicus springs from this cesophageal commissure, the latter may be termed the stomatogastric centre. The brain exhibits three pair of ganglia. Into both brain and ventral cord ectodermic elements enter. The upper surface of the brain exhibits a group of large round cells, possibly remnants of the apical plate of the larva. The free-living forms (Armandia, Polyophthalmus) have a perfectly developed brain, while the ventral cord is still associated with the ecto- derm; those creeping in the mud (especially Travisia) have the ventral nerve-cord completely separate from the ectoderm, but a reduced brain and sensory system. The memoir concludes with a comparison of Opheliacez and Archiannelids. 8. Nemathelminthes. Anatomy of Gordiide.* —M. A. Villot is of opinion that Prof. Vejdovsky would have avoided some of the errors into which he has fallen with regard to the structure of the Gordiide, if he had made sections, had been able to examine the worms in the fresh state, and had a knowledge of their larval development. The French author has lately been so fortunate as to get examples of the parasitic stage of G. violaceus, which is passed in the abdominal cavity of Procrustes coriaceus. The resemblance of the rings of the integument of embryos and larve to the segmentation of Annelids is apparent only, for they are merely due to folds of the integument. The fibrillar and nervous nature of the hypodermis is maintained, but M. Villot finds he was wrong in regarding the so-called nuclei as having any relations to the fibrillar elements; they are vascular organs which are connected with the pores of the epidermis and the aquiferous canals which traverse the dermis. To understand the origin and histological significance of the elements of which the integument is composed, it is necessary to study them in the parasitic larve before the formation of the dermis. Beneath the epidermic cuticle, there is a layer of embryonic cells, which, seen from above, is very like a pavement- epithelium ; in each cell there is a large nucleus which stains well with carmine ; on making a longitudinal section, it is seen that these embryonic cells nave their protoplasm formed of developing fibrils, while their nucleus becomes vesicular and gives off at each pole a tubular prolongation; the ventral plexus and the central nervous system are only a special develop- ment of the fibrillar elements of the hypodermis, and the author was, therefore, wrong in previously ascribing to them a mesodermal origin. * Ann. Sci. Nat.—Zool., ii. (1887) pp. 189-212. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 959 On a previous occasion M. Villot has insisted on the homology of the muscular fibres of Gordiide and Nematoids; he has since been able to detect a phase in the development of the muscular fibre of Gordius in which it is for a time in the stage in which those of Nematoids are permanently ; the fibrillar substance only invests part of the inner wall of the embryonic cell, and the as yet unchanged portion is represented by a vesicular enlargement which is adherent to the parenchyma. Some additions are made to our knowledge of the interesting phenomenon of the retrogression of the digestive tube, and it is found that what has been hitherto taken for the mouth of young Gordii is really an invaginated proboscis; it is the rostrum of the embryo which persists during the whole duration of the parasitic life, and only disappears in the adult when its cuticle is completely chitinized. The fibrous layer in the wall of the intestine is not muscular, but elastic in nature, and its development is more marked as the tube diminishes ; in fact, it is these fibres which cause the contraction of the intestine. There is really but one pair of ovaries, but each divides into two tubular branches, while the dorsal canal of Vejdovsky is a fifth unpaired and rudimentary branch; the receptaculum seminis is homologous with the ovaries; various points in which Vejdovsky appears to be in error with regard to the genital organs and the parenchyma are indicated. The Gordiide are essentially characterized by their embryonic rostrum and the structure of their genital organs, as well as by the relative superiority of their integument, parenchyma, muscular and nervous system, and they should be distinguished from the Nematodes. Development and Determination of free Gordii.*—M. A. Villot urges again attention to certain points in the life-history of Gordius, which appear to be still insufficiently recognized. They are: (1) these parasitic worms may leave their hosts at very different stages in development; (2) the chitinization of the cuticle causes, in adult individuals—whether free or parasitic—changes in coloration, form, and structure; (8) individuals of the same species may, even when completely developed, present very con- siderable differences in size. Having given evidence in support of these statements, the author proceeds to point out the importance of their bear- ing on the specific distinctions of various Gordii. We must be careful only to compare individuals of the same sex and age—in other words, forms of the same degree of chitinization, and we must be careful about the differ- ent phases of the chitinization of the cuticle in individuals of the same species. The forms lately described by Camerano—@. Perronciti, G. Rosz, and G. Piotti, are all examples of the polymorphous G. aquaticus (or G. subspiralis). To be quite certain about the characters of a species of Gordius a large series of specimens must be compared. Brown Cysts of Anguillula of the Beetroot.t—M. J. Chatin finds that under certain circumstances, and especially on the approach of winter, the females of Heterodera Schachtii undergo peculiar changes. The delicate integument gradually thickens, its glands furnishing an abundant secretion, which agglutinates organic and mineral substances, and so forms a sort of adventitious test around the female; this carapace closes up the buccal, anal, and vulvar orifices, and all connection between the worm and nourish- ing plant is broken. We have now a cyst filled with eggs, and comparable to an ootheca. It is easy to see how such a cyst can withstand the in- fluences of bad weather. Later on, under more favourable conditions, the * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 505-9. t Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 136-2. 3S Bye 960 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO walls will swell and soften, and allow the eggs to escape. The importance of the knowledge of the life-history of this parasite will be obvious. Anatomy of Echinorhynchi.*— The Acanthocephali have been regarded as devoid of a digestive apparatus, and Lespé’s discovery of what he-con- sidered the elementary tract in the pyriform body in the proboscis of Echinorhynchus claviceps met with put little acceptance. Recently M. P, Mégnin has been studying the subject, and gave the result of his researches before the Scientific Congress of Paris. In order to settle the question, it was necessary to study these worms at a period before the development of the sexual organs, and when the nutritive system was in full function. Mégnin found Echinorhynchi encysted in the cellular tissue of Varanide from the Sahara. These proved to be ina larval stage, and to have a digestive apparatus composed of two long convoluted tubes, each giving rise to numerous cecal diverticula. The whole presents an analogy to the alimentary tract of the Trematodes. In some species, as the EH. brevicollis found in Balznoptera sibbaldi, the digestive apparatus persists and acquires considerable development. In others it undergoes a degeneration, and is to be sought in the “lemnisci,” structures, heretofore, of problematical nature, occasionally regarded as salivary glands. The larvee have a rudimentary dorsal vessel, and this, with their proboscis and aquiferous apparatus (which, however, is well developed in the adult), shows the relation of the Acanthocephali to the Nemerteans or Rhynchoceela, while the digestive apparatus is more like that of the Trematodes. They can no longer be arranged with the Nematodes. Development of Echinorhynchus gigas.;—Herr J. Kaiser has a pre- liminary report on the development of Echinorhyncus gigas. He finds that the ovaries, as soon as they are set free from the ligament, appear as elongate oval plasmatic discs, in which there are a number of granules of various sizes, and a considerable quantity of fat-like nuclei. The latter, with growth, either pass to the periphery of the ovary, increase in size at the cost of the rest, and form a simple layer of polyhedral cells, which invest the ovarial disc completely, or serve as nutrient material. As the cells of the epithelial investment grow, their colourless protoplasm becomes granular and turbid, and forms spherical structures, which move about freely in the cell-capsule. The spherical gives way to a spindle-shaped body, which bursts away from the ovary, and comes into contact with the spermatozoa. When impregnation is effected the egg becomes surrounded by a delicate clear membrane; the nucleus disappears, and the yolk begins to divide; segmentation is very irregular. When there are about a dozen blastomeres a second embryonic envelope appears beneath the first; on the inner surface of the outer membrane a number of dark lenticular bodies become developed, and give rise to a shell, with which, in course of time, two other supporting membranes become connected. During the development of these coverings the embryo has made further progress; there is an epibolic gastrula, and at one end the epiblast forms a considerable projection, in the centre of which there are six to eight nuclei; this syncytium is clearly the commencement of the nerve-centre. Later on a similar but less well developed cone appears at the aboral pole of the body. The embryo now obtains its covering of spines; between every four approximating epiblast cells there arises, a8 a secretion-product, a small thorn-like process. Amer. Natural., xxi, (1887) pp. 187-8. + Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 414-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 961 When the last sign of the central yolk disappears the embryo under- goes histolysis, the cell-walls disappearing, and the plasmatic bodies uniting ; the nuclei are completely filled with highly refractive chromatin, and pass to the centre of the body, where they unite to form the so-called embryonic granular masses. The syncytial plasma becomes differentiated into two layers; the inner one has in its centre the nuclear masses. In this condition the eggs pass out with the feces of their host, and make their way into the intestine of the larva of Cetonia aurata. The embryos, by the aid of their boring apparatus, bore through the chitinous lining of the lumen of the intestine, and through the glandular into the subjacent muscular layers. The free and exceedingly agile embryo has the form of a wide flask with a spherical base; besides the numerous small spines, which thickly cover the whole body, it bas five large hooks, which are placed at the anterior end, and can be withdrawn into it. In their resting-place the embryos increase considerably in size; the first change which becomes apparent is that six nuclei become set free from the anterior end of the central nuclear mass ; these become surrounded by a common plasmatic mass, which gradually assumes the form of an equilateral cone. On each of the six nuclei a small hook appears, in which it is not difficult to recognize the spinous process of the definite holding organ ; when they have attained a certain size they pass forwards, and six fresh hooks appear ; this process is repeated for from five to seven times. Almost simultaneously with the proboscis the rudiment of the body-covering of the definite worm is laid down in the form of a large-vesicled syncytium. In the anterior region the nuclei are laid down in two parallel zones. When the larva is from 4—5 mm. long the chief syncytium becomes con- verted into a simple layer of high cylindrical cells. The latter secrete a colourless mass, which later on hardens into the fibrous tissue of the sub- cuticula. But before this happens the first primitive muscle-fibres appear in the vertical walls of the cylindrical cells; these increase in number very rapidly; they break through the outer limiting membrane of the cells, and make their way into the still soft fibrous tissue of the subcuticula. The endoderm gives rise to the body-musculature, the gonads, and the efferent genital ducts; the syncytial origin of the first of these is described. y. Platyhelminthes. Developmental Cycle of Tenia nana.*—Prof. B. Grassi, in commencing his observations on the developmental history of Tzenia nana, believed that the intermediate host of this human parasite was the mealworm. But all the experiments which he made were useless, as were also those made on animals, such as edible molluscs, lice, and so on, with which man comes into contact. ‘The suggestion then recommended itself that, neither with this worm nor with 7’. mwrina was there an intermediate host at all. Trying this with young white mice, and carefully looking to their food after having fed them with 7’. murina, Prof. Grassi found that in fifteen days the Tzeniz had mature proglottids, and after about thirty days the eggs appeared in the feces. Closer investigation showed that within fifty hours after feeding with proglottids the oncospheres of T. murina were found greatly increased in size in the terminal ten centimetres of the small intestine, where they were flask-shaped, and not unlike the bodies seen by Melnikow in Tricho- dectes. ‘The embryonic hooks are ordinarily: placed on the neck of the * Centralbl. f, Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., i. (1887) pp. 305-12. 962 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO flask ; about the middle of the belly calcareous corpuscles were sometimes observed, and what appeared to be rudiments of suckers were seen on the neck. By the time that seventy hours have elapsed six embryonic hooks were observed on the neck; only a very narrow cavity, filled with fiuid, lies between the scolex of the Txnia and the simple cyst which encloses it. There is no definite boundary between the scolex, the cyst, and the “neck” ; and this last may be called the caudal appendage. After these experiments with T. murina, which served to convince the author that he had here to do do with a direct development of a tapeworm without the assistance of an intermediate host, he and Calandruccio made experiments with the same Tenia on six human beings—four adults and two boys. A boy of five years of age, fifteen days after swallowing a number of proglottids of T. murina, had a certain quantity of ova of T. nana in his fasces, and, on being treated medicinally, passed fifty pieces of the latter tapeworm. Although these experiments are not conclusive, they lead to the supposition that this worm also ordinarily developes directly, and Prof. Grassi thinks that the same is true also of T. elliptica; at times they may develope indirectly, and, as the cysticerci of T. mediocanellata are very rare, it, too, may perhaps be another example of direct development. Malformed Example of Tenia saginata.*—Prof. C. Grobben describes a specimen of T. saginata taken from a child six years old. Its form and coloration was such as to call to mind Cerebratulus marginatus. The portion examined was found to consist of a broad lower piece, and an upper some- what narrower portion, separated by a constriction, and it measured in all 128 mm. There was no sign of jointing, so it was clear that the author had to do with a portion of a Tzenia in which the formation of proglottids had not taken place; examples of this kind of arrest of development has already been put on record by Prof. Leuckart. Sensory Organs of Turbellaria.t—Dr. L. Béhmig publishes a pre- liminary account of his investigations on the sensory organs of Turbellaria. In Planaria gonocephala the eyes have a long diameter of about 0-18 mm., while the other two dimensions are about 0-1 mm.; each eye has an invest- ment of pigment formed of small blackish-brown spherules, and its convex side is surrounded by a delicate fringe of finely granular protoplasm, in which a number of distinct rounded nuclei can be made out. The presence of them would seem to show that the pigment-covering is derived from several cells, whereas in the eyes of Polyclads there is only one nucleus in the protoplasmic fringe. The’so-called optic ganglion consists of a central ball of dotted substance, around which retinal cells are grouped. The optic nerve arises from a part of the brain where the dotted substance is distin- guished by its greater fineness and more homogeneous appearance; this is the case also in some snails. The cells of the optic ganglion have a large nucleus, and though unipolar, each process soon divides into a number of smaller ones, The end-bulbs are not merely hyaline structureless bodies, but present a longitudinally striated thickening, which is separated by a thin hyaline plate from a finely granular terminal cap. As no lens could be detected, the author suggests that its function is performed by the parenchymatous tissue between the retina and the epithelium, which is viscous and transparent during life. Among the rhabdocclous Turbellaria, the Plagiostomida, which may have four eyes, have these organs more complicated than the Monotide. * Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien, xxxvii. (1887) pp. 697-82. t Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 484-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 963 A brief account is then given of the eyes of Vorticeros auriculatum, and FEnterostoma striatum; in the latter the pigment-capsule contains two spherical structures, which, in well-preserved examples, exhibit a distinct longitudinal striation, due to the presence of extremely delicate bacilli, enclosed in a delicate intermediate substance. In these two forms lenti- cular cells are probably present. In Plagiostoma Girardi, the contents of the pigment-capsule consists of two distinct substances ; the larger hinder part of the cup is filled by a completely homogeneous substance which is only faintly stained by reagents ; in front of it is a delicate band which is not coloured, but has no distinct horizontal striation. In front of the pigment-capsule is a group of cells, of which the central are larger than the peripheral. The structure regarded by Graff as the lens, consists of the contracted contents of the pigment-capsule which ought to be considered as the nerve-end apparatus. The subcutaneous nerve-plexus, which, according to Lang and Ijima, is most apparent on the dorsal surface of Planarians, is to be seen in P. gonocephala, where it is best developed in the cephalic and auricular portions, and connected with it is an apparatus developed on the auricule, which may be regarded as an end-organ. On the dorsal surface of these processes there are small pits with a sharp and fine contour; at the base numerous nerve-fibres enter the pits from the subcutaneous plexus, and pass to a reniform body which fills the median third of the depression ; this body is fibrous in structure, and! from its free surface there project a number of thick round set, provided at their free ends with small capitula. The author suggests that the function of these organs is tactile. Planaria Iheringii.*—Dr. L. Bohmig gives a general account of a new tricladid Planarian from Brazil. The worms are from 3°5-5 mm. long, 2-3 mm. broad, and 0°05 to 0:75 mm. thick. The ground-colour is bright yellowish-brown, or dirty whitish-yellow. At the edge of the head there are two whitish spots which project slightly beyond the margin of the body, and are the auricular processes. In the hinder third of the body are two orifices, one of which is the oral and the other the genital; the former leads to a pharynx, which, when completely protruded, is 1-4 mm. long; the latter to a narrow cleft which opens into a space largely occupied by the muscular penis; this space is the atrium genitale, and into it there open the vasa deferentia. The saccular uterus is of some size, and lies between the wall of the atrium and that of the pharyngeal space; its duct is provided with a highly developed musculature, and the two oviducts open separately into it. The paired germaria lie at about 0-8 mm. from the anterior pole of the body, while the vitellaria and testes lie in front of and behind the copulatory apparatus. The structure of the generative apparatus of this new species is of the type found in Planaria polychroa. Graffilla Brauni.|—Herr F. Schmidt has discovered a fourth species of Grafilla, which he calls G. Brauni ; it lives parasitically, and apparently abundantly, in Teredo ; the iargest specimens are from 2°5 to 3°2 mm. long, and about 1 mm. broad; the colour is generally whitish yellow. The protoplasm of the epithelial cells is, as in G. muricicola, finally striated ; no rhabdites were observed; the dermomuscular tube is fully developed. The meshwork which forms the supporting substance of the body- parenchyma is extraordinarily fine, so that with low powers, the parenchyma has almost the appearance of a completely homogeneous mass, The new * Zool. Anzeig., x. (1887) pp. 482-4. t Arch. f. Naturgesch., lii. (1887) pp. 304-18 (2 pls.). 964 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO species agrees generally in the disposition of its venous system with G. muricicola; well-marked eyes are present. Like the just-mentioned species, G. Brauni has a kind of boring apparatus by means of which it is able to penetrate the body-wall of its host. The successive hermaphro- ditism of the genital products is not quite so well marked as in G. muricicola or G. thetydicola, for in moderately sized examples all the parts of the male apparatus are developed, while the female germ-glands were already ripe, and it was only in the largest individuals, where the ovaries were greatly developed, that the tubes were found to have completely disappeared. The female apparatus consists of germ-glands, vitellaria, atrium genitale with its appendix, receptaculum seminis, and shell-glands; the uterus com- municates with the exterior by a very narrow genital canal. As in the two species already mentioned, the germaria have no membrane. In quite young individuals the ovary consists of a mass of finely granular proto- plasm in which numerous nuclei are scattered; in the organs of older animals the protoplasm breaks up into the characteristic germinal discs. G. Brauni appears to have an excretory system which differs a good deal from that of G. muricicola. Where a specimen is examined from the dorsal side, two large pyriform vesicles may be seen in the anterior fourth of the body; these open to the exterior by an extremely short fine canal between the epithelial cells. From each vesicle a ramifying canal extends backwards and forwards, but these could not be traced far, and they doubtless become very fine. The vesicles are invested by an extremely delicate membrane. Dendrocelum punctatum.*—Dr. W. Weltner gives a description of the large Planarian Dendrocelum punctatum Pallas, which he found in the Tegelsee and also in the Spree near Berlin. He notes the external characters, the formation of cocoons, the number and appearance of the larve, but as his results are for the most part corroborations of the investi- gations of de Man and Hallez, the communication is almost exclusively of faunistic interest. 5. Incertz Sedis. Dicyemide.{—Prof. M. Braun gives an account of what is known as to the curious parasites called Dicyema, first observed by Krohn in the “venous appendages” of the Cephalopoda, which will be useful for those who are unacquainted with the investigations that have been made on them. He concludes with a list of known species taken from Prof. Carus’s ‘Prodromus Faune Mediterranee.’ Anatomy and Systematic Position of Echinoderes.{—Prof. W. Rein- hard gives a detailed account of the anatomy of this enigmatic worm, and discusses the various suggestions that have been made as to its systematic position. He is himself inclined to associate it most closely with Annelids. With regard to its segmentation he is unable to accept the view of Hatschek that it is merely external and due to their mode of locomotion. The forward movements of Hchinoderes are performed by the aid of the proboscis, and all other movements are very feeble. In his view, segmentation has not been independently acquired, but has been inherited ; it is not only the outer covering that is segmented, but the whole body-wall corresponds, while in each segment there is a thickening separated by a constriction from its successor. The most important peculiarity, in Prof. Reinhard’s opinion, is the * SB. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., 1887, pp. 795-804 (1 pl.). + Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., ii. (1887) pp. 386-90. t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 401-67 (3 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 965 presence of set which traverse the carapace and are connected with the body-wall. ‘hese setze completely correspond to the sete of Annelids, and they form a transverse row in the midst of each segment in some species. Although, as a rule, Annelids are characterized by the presence of circular muscles, yet such are absent from Polygordius. The external heteronomy of the segments in Echinoderes is almost as well marked as in Annelids. The excretory organs of the two groups un- doubtedly correspond, and, as their number varies among Annelids, we need not wonder at their being reduced to a minimum in Echinoderes. The absence of an orifice from the anterior end of the segmental organ of the latter may be only apparent. On the other hand, we must not omit to notice the important differences which undoubtedly exist between these two groups. These are the charac- teristic union of the plates of the carapaces between the separate segments, the absence of a distinct head, and the peculiarities of the musculature in Echinoderes ; this form wants the parapodia, cirri, and gills so characteristic of Annelids, and cilia are found only in the excretory organs. Unless the muscles which extend from the back to the ventral surface are dissepiments, septa are wanting, and there is no ventral nerve-cord. No less important differences are presented by the reproductive organs, the absence of a circulatory system, the digestive organs, and the mode in which Echinoderes moves by the aid of its characteristic proboscis, All these are sufficient to prevent the union of Hchinoderes and Annelids in a single class, and for the former it is proposed to establish a special class, which, from the mode of locomotion, may be called the Kinorhyncha. The characters which the two groups possess in common may be explained by the supposition of the previous existence of a group of Proto-annelids (!), whose body was segmented, and had sete and segmental organs of the primitive form, terminating as do those of Cestoda and Trematoda. All the suggestions here made must, however, be regarded as open to revision when the development of Echinoderes has been studied ; of this at present nothing is known. The species of the genus appear to live at the bottom of the sea in muddy and sandy places; near shore, where sheils of Mollusca abounded, it was not found. In the neighbourhood of Odessa they do not live in any number at less than seven or eight fathoms depth, but in the open sea they were found in shallower waters. Eighteen species are already known, and the genus is very probably cosmopolitan. Dinophilus gyrociliatus.*—Herr W. Repiakhoff has made a fresh study of the much discussed worm Dinophilus. (a) In regard to the species, the author maintains that the D. apatris so carefully described by Korschelt, and other species described by various authors, are identical with the original species discovered in 1848 by O. Schmidt, D. gyrociliatus. (6) His anato- mical and embryological investigations corroborate those of Schmidt and Korschelt, and the new points elucidated are relatively unimportant. The author’s attention was concentrated on the female form. (c) In regard to the much discussed question of the systematic position of Dinophilus, Repiakhoff canvasses the various opinions, and especially those represented by Lang and Korschelt, who refer it respectively to the Proto-annelids and to the T'ubellarians. He sums up by defining its position as that of a “ side branch from the Annelid stem, extricating itself from the Trochozoon type, and developing between the Rotatoria and the Proto-annelida.” * Mem. Soc. Néo-Russ. Nat. Odessa, x. (1886) p. 2. Cf. Arch. Slav. de Biol., iv. (1887) pp. 112-3. 966 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Bipalium kewense.*—Though Mr. R. Trimen has found Bipalium kewense at the Cape of Good Hope, he is unable to give us any information of its exact habitat, for all the specimens seen by him have been found in cultivated grounds. He has observed multiplication by transverse fission, and the growth of the pieces. Abundant moisture is necessary to keep the worms alive. New Rotifer.,—Mr. J. Hood describes a new species of the Rattulide, Mastigocerca bicristata, which he has found in marsh pools in Fifeshire and Perthshire. It is about 1/40 in. in total length, the long slender toe being nearly as long as the body. It feeds on Conferve, desmids, and diatoms, and deposits its eggs among Conferve or vegetable debris. The female only has been observed. Balanoglossus Larva from the Bahamas.{—In reference to his com- munication § on this subject, Mr. W. F. R. Weldon states that Prof. Spengel has convinced him that his series really belong to the normal order of development. He withdraws, therefore, his previous statement, and expresses regret for having published “ an erroneous doctrine.” Echinodermata. Development of Calcareous Plates of Amphiura.|—Mr. J. W. Fewkes has studied the development of the well-known viviparous Ophiurid, Amphiura squamata. He finds that the intestine of the bisymmetrical larva is early developed, and later in development undergoes atrophy ; the mouth, and possibly the cesophagus of this larva are formed by an epiblastic in- vagination during the time that the larva is still inclosed im its sac, and remains attached to the parent. The provisional skeleton of the bilateral larva is not always symmetrical, and sometimes developes on one side; the first formed rod is not always a trifid calcification; the first calcareous plates which form on the abactinal hemisome are the first five radials, and a little later, the dorso-central ; the radials arise before the terminals. The first ambulacral are the plates which are first formed on the actinal hemi- some; the second pair of adambulacral plates bear club-shaped spines, which are homologous with the spines of the lateral plates of the arms. The first-formed ventral plate belongs to the first pair of adambulacral plates, and not to the lateral arm-plates; though not belonging to the portion of the arm which is free from the disc, this ventral plate is homologous with the other ventral arm-plates. ; The radial shields arise before the “ underbasal” is formed between the dorso-central and the primary radials, and while there are but two inter- mediate plates in each of the interradii; the author discusses the homology of the plates which are looked upon by Carpenter as the basals, and doubts whether the particular ones selected by him are truly basals. ‘The ambu- lacral plates do not always arise in the form of trifid spicules, for they sometimes appear as parallel unbranched rods. The ova of a parasitic Crustacean (? Copepod) { were often found, and the specimens which contained them were distinguished by having one or more of the interradial regions of a reddish colour, and more swollen than the rest. While the eggs of the Crustacean are bright red or pink, and arranged in packets, those of Amphiura are red and orange and are not in free packets. The adult form of this parasite is also found in Amphiura. * Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 548-50. + Sci.-Gossip, 1887, p. 173 (2 figs.). t Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., xlii. (1887) p. 473. § See this Journal, ante, p. 597. || Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Cambridge (U.8.A.), xiii. (1887) pp. 107-50 (3 pls.). { Cf this Journal, ante, p. 587. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 967 Focidaris.*—Dr. K. Kolesch has made a study of the characteristics of Eocidaris keyserlingi. In contrast to the true Cidaride it is pointed above ; there are three different kinds of spines; individual variations were observed. It is not a Palechinid, but a Euechinid, for there are always two rows of interambulacral plates; mathematical computations show that there were twenty rows of plates, all the plates are pentagonal, and the lateral bounding line of the interambulacral areas is zigzag or notched. New Holothurians.{—Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell gives descriptions of some new species of Holothurians from various localities. Cucumaria sancti- johannis is remarkable for the great reduction of the calcareous ring, the interradial pieces of which are fine filaments, and for the fact that the retractors of the pharynx are two-thirds the length of the whole body, and macroscopically, though not microscopically, seem to be tendinous for the greater part of their length. Cuc. inconspicua has the suckers almost, though not quite, regularly restricted to the ambulacral are, and so affords an argument against the distinction of the species of Cucumaria into two genera, according as the suckers are confined to the ambulacra, or scattered over the body. Holothuria inermis is remarkable not only from the want of spicules, but also by the absence of the calcareous cesophageal ring ; H. szcularis has none of the turriform spicules which are. so generally present in the integument of the species of this genus. Colochirus Lacazii.t—M. E. Herouard describes a small Holothurian found near Roscoff at very low tide, which is interesting as being the first representative of this genus which has been found in European seas. It is white in colour and may reach a length of 70 to 80 centimetres. Its affinities with described forms are not pointed out. Ccelenterata. Regeneration of Polypes.s—Prof. M. Nussbaum reports that the con- tinuation of his experiments confirms the experiences of Trembley. Arms of polyps cut off without any of the substance of the body attached always perish, but tentacles that retain ever so small a portion of the mouth-ring can form new polyps. This, he says, is owing to the absence in the tentacles of undifferentiated cells, which in the stomach portion replace the loss of the older and necessary tissues, and can be applied to the formation of the reproductive products. Structure of Cunoctantha octonaria in adult and larval stages.||— Mr. H. V. Wilson gives an account of this medusa, whose larval existence in the bell-cavity of Turritopsis nutricola has been described by M‘Grady and by Brooks. The history of the form does not seem to confirm Prof. Hiickel’s idea that the difference between the Narcomeduse and Trocho- medusz has been brought about by the migration of the tentacles from the umbrellar margin dorsalwards, for in Cunoctantha the four primary tentacles do not reach their ultimate position by a migration from the margin of the umbrella. Their final position is due to the outgrowth of intertentacular lobes, and to the growth of the velum, which fills up the interlobular notches, and then bends in to form the horizontal velum. The * Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 639-65 (1 pl.). + Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1887, pp. 531-4 (1 pl.). t{ Comptes Rendus, ev. (1887) pp. 234-6. § Verh. Naturh. Ver. Bonn, xliv. (1887) pp. 10-11. || Studies Biol. Laborat. Johns-Hopkins Univ., iv. (1887) pp. 95-107 (8 pls.). 968 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO differences, however, are almost certainly of secondary origin, and due to the early development of the tentacles. It is impossible to place Cunoc- tantha in any one of Hickel’s four families of the Narcomeduse; the great German naturalist placed it with the Cunanthide, but, as it has no canal- system at all, it belongs rather to the Solmaride, from which, however, it is distinguished by the possession of otopupe. In the shape of the true umbrellar edge it belongs to the Peganthidz. The difficulties raised by this form, as by Cwnina proboscidea, which Metschnikoff has shown to have otoporp and canals when produced from a fertilized egg, and no otoporp or canals when produced asexually, compel us to acknowledge that Hackel’s classification is so far unsatisfactory. Origin of Male Generative Cells of Eudendrium racemosum.*—Mr. C. Ishikawa has investigated Hudendrium racemosum with the object of seeing whether the theory of Prof. Weismann that all sexual cells in the Hydromeduse were primitively of ectodermal origin is correct. He finds that, in the males, the young germinal cells which are found in the endo- derm of quite young gonophores, attached to the supporting membrane, are really derived from the ectoderm. In some fortunate sections the author was able to find the young on the outer side of the supporting membrane, lying in the ectoderm ; in later stages they had disappeared therefrom, and were only found in the endoderm. A young blastostyle of EH. racemoswm already carrying a number of gonophores with ripe sperm-cells exhibits the following appearance in transverse sections: in sections taken through the base of the gonophores groups of small rounded primitive germ-cells were found partly lying directly on the supporting membrane, and partly deeper among the endo- dermal cells. Nearer the base of the blastostyle (but still in its capitulum) sections reveal the presence of these cell-groups not only in the endoderm, but also in the ectoderm, where they lie directly on the supporting mem- brane. They are exactly similar to the primitive germ-cells found in the endoderm, and the author thinks there can be no doubt that they are primary male germ-cells which have not yet made their way into the endo- derm. Mr. Ishikawa is not, however, able to say whether all the male cells are differentiated in the blastostyl from the ectoderm, and whether some are not formed in the stalk of the hydranth, from which the blasto- styl is developed. Polyparium and Tubularia.t—Dr. A. Korotneff gives a full account of the remarkable Polyparium ambulans, the preliminary description of which we have already noticed.{ The following is the author’s opinion as to the systematic position of this peculiar form. The chief characters are the absence of tentacles, the presence of various oral cones which lead into a common cavity, but have no cesophageal tube, the apparent absence of radial septa, and the presence of peculiar septa which divide the body into segments. When we make a comparative survey of other Ceelenterates we find that in Mzeandrina separate polyps, or rather oval cones, like those of Polyparium, are arranged in band-like fashion on the surface of a spherical polyp-stock; the chief difference between them is that the cones are more numerous in the latter. In Meeandrina the tentacles do not surround every oral orifice, but are placed along the margin of each band. It must be supposed that in Polyparium also the tentacles migrated to the margin, and afterwards became lost ; such * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlv. (1887) pp. 669-71. + Ibid., pp. 468-90 (1 pl.). { See this Journal, 1886, p. 627. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 969 a disappearance may be partially explained by a change in the mode of life, for the creature is able to move about, and has not, therefore, the same need for tentacles as has a fixed form. The number of mouths may be supposed to be due to division, and the absence of an cesophagus to each supports this view. The change has had its influence on the internal organization, the septa especially having undergone a fundamental modification. If we suppose that a polyp were to lose its cesophageal tube the septa would project freely into the gastric cavity ; if, further, the primary were to divide into a number of secondary mouths, and the colony were to be greatly elongated, the radial arrangement of the septa would disappear. The free mode of life has not been without its influence ; to produce the definite movements the parieto-basilar muscle has become transverse, and the corresponding septa have become altered into partition-like structures. Thus the radial type of a polyp may be easily converted into the bilateral. From the same island of Billiton Dr. Korotneff obtained a new species of Tubularia—T. parasitica—which he found living on a Gorgonian. The head of the polyp had the ordinary structure, and the genital products presented nothing remarkable. In endeavouring to settle how the two forms could become as intimately connected as they are, it is necessary to remember that a hollow Gorgonian is not rare, while a one-stemmed Tubularian is a really exceptional case. It must, therefore, be supposed that it is the Tubularian which has undergone an adaptive change which has suited its form to that of the Gorgonian—the latter then was the original host, and the former the parasite. It is possible that an embryo fixed itself either to the end or to the side of a branch of the Gorgonian, and then, if at the end, made its way in by boring, possibly with the aid of an acid, to the internal axial cavity, where it commenced to grow; in the neighbourhood the mantle of the host would be more feebly coloured, and much fewer polypides would be developed. If the embryo fixed itself to the side there would be no need for it to bore its way in, and the Gorgonia would in time grow over the Tubularian. Polyparium ambulans.*—Prof. E. Ehlers has some suggestions as to the characters of Dr. Korotneff’s form (see supra). He calls attention to Ricordea florida, in which from single persons there are developed colonies with incomplete division of the several persons. He differs from Korotneff in regarding Polyparium as one person, and he thinks that it has tentacles, but no mouth—the mouth-cones not being mouth-orifices, but tentacles ; the observations of Prof. R. Hertwig on the Actiniaria of the ‘ Challenger’ would support this view. If this be the right way of looking at the matter, the septa would be found to present no really abnormal characters. The most important question is raised when we come to discuss the phylogenetic origin of Polyparium, and the suggestion is made that it is a “ paranomally” (as opposed to eunomally) developed animal, or one that, owing to the influence of external conditions, has departed from the typical mode of development, comparable to what is seen among fishes in the Lepto- cephalide. In fine, Prof. Ehlers is inclined to think that Polyparium ambulans is a mouthless single animal, derived from a unioral Actinian with wide degenerate tentacles, and that under the conditions of its life it has paranomally developed its band-like form ; it may be able to reproduce itself asexually by fission. But Prof. Ehlers is careful to remark that his suggestions are made after reading Dr. Korotneff’s paper only, and not after a personal examination of specimens. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xly. (1887) pp. 491-8. 970 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Morphology of Siphonophora.*—Prof. C. Chun commences by dis- cussing the structure of the pneumatophore, which is shown by recent observations to be certainly a modified Medusa. He denies the accuracy of Korotneft’s statement that it contains any gastric cavity. The pneuma- tophore consists, as is well known, of two lamelle, an outer one which represents the continuation of the trunk, and an inner one which excretes the air—this inner layer may be called the air-sac, and the outer one the air-umbrella. Both consist of ectoderm and endoderm separated by a sup- porting lamella. As the air-chamber is an invagination of the apical end of the trunk, its inner surface is lined by ectcderm. In all the species there is a constriction at the lower pole of the air-sac which may be called the air-funnel. The lining ectodermal layer early forms a flattened epi- thelium, and even in the embryo gives off a delicate chitinous lamella, which forms a ring at the orifice of the sac; this lining is, moreover, multi- laminate; the cells bounding the air-space are small and filled by a finely granular protoplasm; the underlying vacuolated cells gradually diminish in size, and are so packed as to be polyhedral in form. There are a number of variations in the structure of the air-funnel which appear to be characteristic of different species; the structure is simplest in Apolemia uvaria ; the endodermal investment of the funnel and the lowest part of the air-sac consists of long cells ,;radially arranged in groups; the ectodermal cells, which are separated from them by a delicate supporting layer, form a thick multilaminate cushion. Part of this forms a secondary investment over the chitinous ring, and it was this that Korotneff mistook for a secondary stomach. In Stephanomia picta (= Halistemma tergestinum Claus) the pneumatophore is provided with internal septa, and these are swollen at their base owing to the entrance between the endo- dermal of large ectodermal cells, which form a solid mass. In Physalia hydrostatica, the structure of whose pneumatophore has never yet been completely understood, the number of septa varies, but is ordinarily seven; the so-called septal canals represent branched solid “cellular tubes” which are formed of ectodermal cells, and which make their way from the air-funnel between both the septa and the finely granular ectodermal cells which grow into the lower fourth of the air-funnel. They are the homologues of similar cells in Stephanomia. The remarkable structure of the pneumatophore of Rhizophysa filiformis is due to the loss of the septa, while the ectodermal cellular cords between them persist. With regard to the physiology of the several parts of the pneumato- phore, it is clear that itis the function of the ectodermal lining and of the secondary ectoderm to secrete air ; the latter is larger in proportion to the size of the organ—in Physalia, for example, it forms a disc as broad as the hand, though, strangely enough, it has never yet been noted by any observer. The taking in of air from without is only possible in the Velellide and Porpitidee, where there are a number of air-pores; they have no secondary ectoderm or air-funnel, and their camerate pneumatopore is completely invested by a thick chitinous layer. Though Rhizophysa and Physalia have an air-pore, it serves merely for the egress, and not for the entrance. of air. In investigating the morphology of this organ it is necessary to inquire whether the pneumatophore is a characteristic of the higher Siphonophora, or whether it has its homologue in a medusoid appendage of the Calyco- phoride ? Chun has shown that the definite nectocalyces of the latter are * Zool. Auzeig., x. (1887) pp. 511-5, 529-33. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 971 probably preceded by a heteromorphous primary bell, and it is this which he regards as the homologue of the pneumatophore of the Physophoride. In other words: all Siphonophora have at the commencement of the trunk a heteromorphous medusoid appendage, which is after a time cast off by the Calycophoridx, while it persists in other Siphonophora as a pneuma- to phore. New Scyphomeduse.*—Dr. W. Haacke gives an account of the Scypho- meduse which he collected and studied from the Gulf of St. Vincent. (a) Charybdea (Charybdusa) rastonii n. sp. is especially interesting on account of the structure of its sensory organs which differ somewhat from the typical Charybdea. (b) Cyanea muellerianthe n. sp., a southern representa- tive of this beautiful genus. (c) Monorhiza heckelii n. g. et n. sp. forming along with Lendenfeld’s genus Pseudorhiza the important family of Chaunostomidx. Although both are certainly Rhizostomee with eight arms, it is peculiarly interesting that the Rhizostomatous condition is much re- stricted, so that they appear rather like Semostomex. In the genus described the Rhizostomatous condition was in the dozen specimens observed always restricted to one oral arm, which in contrast to the other seven exhibited a large, long and thick, three-cornered, terminal knob. This arm was always the left member of one of the four pairs. Young and adult specimens exhibited the same condition. The interest of this asymmetry is emphasized. Of three species, both young and adult forms are described at length. The memoir concludes with a faunistic chapter, in which the author discusses the geographical distribution. There are three coloured plates. Anatomy of the Madreporaria.j— Dr. G. H. Fowler, in his third memoir on the anatomy of the Madreporaria, deals with Turbinaria, Lopho- helia, Seriatopora, and Pocillopora. With regard to the first of these, the most important points that have been made out are that the polyps are of the normal actinian type, and are bilateral but not rigidly bisymmetrical ; the septa, and, possibly, the tentacles are entoccelic only; the number of the septa is inconstant and bears no relation to any multiple of six; the general body-wall of the colony is supported upon the echinulations of the ccenenchyme, but this may be a secondary arrangement, which has been acquired for the purpose of support, contemporaneously with and in consequence of the development of ccenenchyme. The polyps of Lophohelia prolifera are of the normal actinian type, save for the absence of directive mesenteries; this is, as yet, unique; its septa and tentacles are both ectoccelic and enioccelic, and, again, the number of septa are not necessarily a multiple of six; in the skeleton three series of centres of calcification are to be made out; of these, one lies in the theca itself; while the other two are at the summits of the ectoccelic and ento- ceelic septa respectively. In Seriatopora the polyps are of the actinian type of structure; the septa are ecto- and entoccelic, and the body-wall is. supported upon the echinulations of the caenenchyme. ‘The tentacles are remarkable for undergoing intro- version, but no special musculature for effecting the contraction could be detected. Of the twelve mesenteries six are of some length, and six are rudimentary. Pocillopora brevicornis closely resembles Seriatopora subulata in ana- tomical structure, but the tendency towards the exclusive assumption of * Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 588-638 (3 pls.). t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1887) pp. 1-19 (2 pls.). 972 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO functions by six mesenteries is not so well marked; the polyps are monc:- cious. In a concluding note, Dr. Fowler points out the logical fallacy of Dr. Koch’s argument that the skeleton of Flabellum is an epitheca, and urges that there is nothing in the structure of its corallum which is really inconsistent with the idea that it is a theca. Anatomy of Mussa and Euphyllia, and the Morphology of the Madreporarian Skeleton.*—Mr. G. C. Bourne gives an account of the anatomy of Mussa and Euphyllia, two genera of Madreporaria aporosa. In the former the soft tissues of the polyp extend downwards for a consider- able distance on the outside of the corallum; so that there is a well- developed “ Randplatte,” and this contains extrathecal continuations of the exoceeles and entoccles. The only point of divergence from the normal actinian type is the absence of directive mesenteries; this is the case also with Huphyllia and with Lophohelia (see Fowler, supra). The caliccblasts are either rounded or polygonal, or are drawn out into very long, narrow, columnar cells; the pyramidal or oval cells, which have been regarded by Sclater and v. Heider as calicoblasts, are always associated with the mesogloea of the mesenteries, and are, as Fowler suggests, connected rather with the attachment of the mesentery to the corallum than with the secre- tion of coral. Mussa, Euphelia, and Lophohelia show no indication of bilateral symmetry, but are perfectly radial; this may be a primitive con- dition or may be connected with fissiparity. In Huphyllia the stomodeum is very long, and is converted into a ramifying and inosculating system of canals; the endoderm is greatly vacuolated, and becomes a reticulated tissue filling up the celenteron, in the meshes of which are numerous nematocysts and symbiotic alge. In the stomodceal canals there are nume- rous fragments of vegetable matter; this observation is of interest, as it seems to be the first instance recorded of a coral feeding on a vegetable diet, and also as proving the digestive function of the enormously and peculiarly developed stomodceum. The author suggests the following as the best provisional arrangement of the Madreporaria :— I. M. with no directive mesenteries and a perfectly radial symmetry— Lophohelia, Mussa, and Euphyllia. II. M. with directive mesenteries and a combined radial and bilateral symmetry—Turbinaria, Rhodopsammia, Fungia, &e. III. M. with reduced radial symmetry and marked bilateral arrange- ment of parts—Madrepora, Pocillopora, Seriatopora. IV. M. with a basal pseudotheca and no “ Randplatte ”—Flabellum. The Madreporaria differ from the Alcyonaria in that the calcareous tissue is always external to the polyp; in the latter ectodermic cells become imbedded in the mesogloea and there develope spicules. Porifera. Cladorhiza pentacrinus.;—Mr. A. Dendy describes a very remarkable Monaxonid sponge, which has a curious external resemblance to the pentacrinoid larva of Antedon. 'The sponge has a long slender stem, which terminates above in a subglobular body bearing a circlet of short pinne or * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1887) pp. 21-51 (2 pls.). ft Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist,, Xx. (1887) pp. 279-82 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSOOPY, ETO. 973 arms; these curve upwards and inwards over the top. Below, the stem terminates in a number of very slender, long, branching rootlets. With the single exception of Chondrocladia clavata it is the smallest sponge known to the author, its total length being only 24 mm., of which the stem measures 11 mm. It was taken off the north-east of New Zealand, at a depth of 700 fathoms, and, like other deep-sea Monaxonids, it has a definite and symmetrical shape. The peculiar curvature of the pinnw suggests that they may, during life, have the power of bending and unbending, but unfortunately the condition of the specimen did not admit of any investiga- tion into the presence of those contractile fibre-cells, which Prof. Sollas has lately suggested should be called myocytes. Of the spicules, some of the microsclera are peculiar for the possession of three elongated, fang-like teeth at the small end of the spicule. Protozoa. Theory of Sexuality.*—M. E. Maupas sums up in a theory of sexuality the results of his recent beautiful observations on the conjugation of ciliated infusorians. It will be remembered that according to Maupas the micro- nucleus is a hermaphrodite sexual element, of sole importance in conjuga- tion. In the stage (A) it increases in size; it then divides twice (B and C), and eliminates the “corpuscles de rebut.” This effected, it divides again (D), differentiating a male and female pronucleus, In the next stage (E) the male elements of the two conjugating Protozoa are exchanged, and the new male nucleus fuses with the original female portion. In the next two stages (F and G) the nuclear dualism characteristic of the Ciliata is re-established (the old macronucleus having broken up and been eliminated meanwhile). In the last stage (H) the ex-conjugates reassume their original organization before dividing for the first time. What is the meaning of all this? There is no special sexual reproduc- tion or generation. There is no acceleration of division after conjugation. It is a period of risk, especially during the inertia of reconstruction. It is a loss of time. An Onychodromus grandis had from 40,000 to 50,000 descendants while a pair were indulging in a single conjugation. It is a source of destruction, not of the multiplication of individuals. The riddle was solved by a long series of careful observations. In November 1885 M. Maupas isolated a Stylonychia pustulata, and observed its generations till March 1886. By that time there had been 215 fissi- parous generations. But at that time the colony gave in; the individuals had lost the powers of nutrition and reproduction. Individuals removed at various stages, however, had conjugated with members of different origin. The same experiment was repeated with other forms. In March 1886 an ex-conjugate from one of the couplings just referred to was removed and watched till the 10th July, when the family again gave in. During that time 315 divisions had been observed, Numerous conjugations had been effected with members removed to other families. This was done till the 130th generation, and till then all the conjugations were fertile. About the 180th generation individuals of the same family which had not hitherto been in contact with one another began in despair to conjugate. The results were, however, nil ; the conjugates did not even recover from the effects of their forlorn hope. Other cases are related. The result is evident. The process is essential for the species. The life runs in developmental cycles of multiplication by division, which are strictly limited. If conjugations with unrelated forms do not then occur * Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 356-9. 1887. 38 974 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the life ebbs. The sexual conjugation of the Ciliates is thus a rejuve- nescence, as Biitschli and Engelmann maintained. It is essential as a reorganization of the nucleus. After a prolonged series of divisions the nucleus undergoes senile degeneration. Without conjugation death would be inevitable. The death is a natural one, the occurrence of which some would deny. Sexual conjugation is the necessary condition of their “eternal youth and immortality.” New Infusoria.*—Prof. D. S. Kellicott describes four new species of Infusorians:—(1) Podophrya inclinata, spherical in young, pyriform in adult stages; sub-central spheroidal nucleus; rarely more than two small, slowly pulsating contractile vacuoles; few slightly capitate tentacles ; curved pedicel, narrowed towards fixed base ; on swimming feet of Cambarus from Magara river. (2) Podophrya flexilis, sub-spherical, plastic, with many granules in larger specimens ; sub-central, ovoid, granular nucleus ; single, anterior, slowly pulsating contractile vacuole; two to four, extensile, ap- parently capitate tentacles; short pedicel ; on pedicels of Hpistylis digitalis on Cyclops. (3) Carchesium granulatum, elongate, sub-cylindrical, slightly constricted below thickened peristome border; rows of cuticular elevations; _ moderately elevated, convex, tumid ciliated disc; long, twisted, longitudinal nucleus; two contractile vacuoles, slowly and alternately pulsating ; pedicels dichotomously branched without septa; on Cambarus and plants. (4) Opercularia humilis, fusiform, transversely striated; U-shaped trans- verse nucleus; low contractile vacuole; peristome border thickened and slightly dilated; narrow, convex, moderately elevated lid; ample cilia; slightly elevated collar; very short pedicel; on Gammarus and Entomo- straca ; also notes on Lagenophrys discoidea and Gerda sigmoides. New Fresh-water Infusoria.t—Dr. A. C. Stokes describes (1) Antho- physa stagnatilis, the colonies of which may consist of more than fifty zooids ; » its pedicle does not branch distinctly, the nucleus is placed in the posterior part of the body, and the contractile vesicle is near the centre of the same region. (2) Hexamita gyrans appears to carry the contractile vesicle along the course of its semifluid endoplasm; this vesicle appears to expand when near the posterior extremity, and to contract and disappear near the antero- lateral border. (83) Chloromonas pulcherrima has irregular and vacillating movements. (4) Balanitizoon gyrans executes movements by rapid revolu- tions on its longitudinal axis, with sudden lateral leaps; it is reproduced both by transverse and longitudinal fission. (5) Gerda vernalis was taken from beneath ice a quarter of an inch thick, but was quite lively. (6) Bhab- dostyla vernalis has a shorter pedicle, and a more posteriorly placed contrac- tile vesicle than R. invaginata Stokes; it is reproduced by longitudinal fission and by encystment; the former takes place rapidly, the body widen- ing until the breadth is nearly equal to the length ; it then divides into two longitudinal parts, the half which will finally develope an independent” pedicle remaining attached to the original foot-stalk by the tip of its pos- terior extremity until it has produced a ciliary girdle, by means of which it swims about freely for a short time. In encystment the animalcules remain quiescent and unchanged for an indefinite and unknown time. (7) R. che- ticola was found attached to the dorso-lateral sete of Nais. (8) Vorticella similis has considerable resemblance to V. pattelina Mill. but differs, not only in its fresh-water habitat, but by its striated surfaces, revolute edge to the peristome, and much smaller size. (9) V. vernalis belongs to the group in which the surface is ornamented by cuticular monilations, but is distin- * Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 226-33 (4 figs.). t Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii. (1887) pp. 141-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 975 guished from all known forms by the combination of rounded prominences and transverse striations. (10) V. parasita was found attached to the body of an aquatic worm. (11) V. conica has a much elongated body, and when contracted exhibits posterior annulations. It appears to be much less timid than most Vorttcelle, for the cover-glass may be repeatedly and somewhat violently disturbed without in any way altering the expanded animal ; this may be explained as due to the activity of the supporting host, for the Cyclops leaps through the water with rapid and often long-continued move- ments, (12) Epistylis tincta resembles E. flavicans somewhat closely in some of its characters, but differs in having the contracted zooids pyriform and not subspherical in shape, and the ultimate divisions of the pedicle more than twice as long as the expanded bodies. In the hinder part of the bodies of most representatives of this new species there was a cluster of refractive and apparently crystalline bodies, the nature of which is quite problematical ; they often occur in young colonies composed of only two zooids, and are absent from older zoodendria formed of many. (13) The last new form is Lagenophrys obovata, which in form and size most nearly resembles L. vagi- nicola, but differs from it in the less cordate aspect of the lorica, and the narrower anterior region. A woodcut is given illustrating these forms. New Hypotrichous Infusoria from American Fresh Waters.* — Dr. A. C. Stokes describes as a new genus Onychodromopsis, which differs from Onychodromus chiefly on account of the soft, flexible, and uncuirassed condition of the body. On the dorsal surface there are numerous short, hispid sete ; O. flewilis is the new species. Tachysoma agile is the type of a new genus which is distinguished from Pleurotricha by the absence of the supplementary ventral series of styles, and the softness and flexibility of the body; these latter characters, with the absence of caudal sete, distinguish it from Stylonychia, which it otherwise somewhat closely resembles; as it has the marginal sete of the posterior border interrupted it cannot be placed with Oxytricha ; its systematic position is probably between the last-named genus and Histrio ; T. mirabile, and T. parvistylum, are the other new species of the genus. The other new species described in the paper are Litonotus vermicularis, which may be 1/60 to 1/30 in. long, and the largest and mature forms are visible to the naked eye as fine white threads gliding through the water; Loxodes magnus, which is 1/40 in. long; Oxytricha bifaria, O. hymenostoma, O. acuminata, and O. caudata ; Histrio inquietus and complanatus ; Euplotes variabilis ; and Chilodon voraz, as to which we have the following very interesting account :— *‘'The infusorians under observation fed voraciously on certain linear diatoms (probably a species of Nitzschia), with which the water teemed, the frustules often being considerably longer than the body of the animal- cule in its normal condition, and after being engulfed, consequently, extending through the entire length of the infusorian, and stretching the cuticular surface at both extremities until at these points the limiting membrane became the merest film. Before the process of engulfing was actually witnessed, it was an interesting problem as to how the diatom became freed from the posterior region of the pharyngeal passage which extends almost to the centre of the body. . . . During the passage of the frustule, when the cuticular surface of the rear margin of the body has reached its limit of extension, the pharyngeal tube, containing one end of the long diatom, suddenly and violently rotates forward until its normal position is completely reversed, and the diatom consequently slips out. The act is probably only to a certain extent voluntary, being effectually * Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., xx. (1887) pp. 104-14 (1 pl.). 38 2 976 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO aided by the strong pressure from the extended cuticular surface, which tends to force the pharyngeal fascicle forward.” Development of fresh-water Peridinee.*—M. J. Danysz comes to the conclusion that there is great uniformity in the developmental history of widely separated genera of Peridinex, and is of opinion that these forms should be associated rather with plants than animals. The following seem to be the successive stages :—Active individuals multiply by successive fissions, and become smaller and smaller. Not- withstanding the great differences in the structure of the body and of the nucleus, the process of division is identical in all; it is always effected along the longitudinal axis of the body, the line of separation being a little oblique to the transverse axis. Phases of multiplication similar to those seen in active forms are to be observed in individuals, which, owing to the liquid which contains them being less fluid than pure water, are in a state of repose. The author thinks that the cause of this phenomenon is purely mechanical. The conditions which M. Danysz looks upon as those of fission were regarded by Stein as states of conjugation. The period of multiplication is followed by that of spore-formation, which has been followed in Gymnodium musci D. and G. glaciale sp. n. The spores are spherical bodies quite unlike their mother-cells; the protoplasm is covered by two membranes, the outer of which is thick, and formed of two layers of different chemical properties, while the inner is delicate and hyaline; the protoplasm, which is finely granular, contains a large number of various kinds of corpuscles; these are very small chromo- leucytes which are scattered through the bodies of active individuals and localized into one or several corpuscles in the cysts; when these are differently coloured, those of distinct colours separate from each other, Drops of oil and of fatty bodies in the solid state, which are probably due to the transformation of starch or granulose, are either found scattered irregularly, or arranged in order in the protoplasm of the spore. The inner lamella of the outer range appear to be pure cellulose, while the outer lamella is probably chitinized cellulose. The inner hyaline layer appears to be the membranous layer of the protoplasm. Reproduction of Euglypha.{—Dr. F. Blochmann describes experiments. which supplement Gruber’s observations on the division process amongst shell-bearing fresh-water Rhizopoda, which showed that these forms multiply by a budding process. The bud is covered with shell plates as it is formed, and a division of the nucleus occurs at the same time. Separation usually occurs when the bud has reached the size of the parent ; but Dr. Blochmann observes that, in very many cases, further changes before separation end in the death of the budded off portion, so the pro- cess results in no multiplication of individuals. A drawing back of the protoplasm into the original shell leaves the new one empty of all but the young nucleus, which had been pushed into it. This nucleus remains attached to the base of the new shell, and evidently dies as soon as the protoplasm becomes separated from it. Now either of two things may happen. The shell and dead nucleus may fall off together; or the dead nucleus may again be drawn into the original shell—a pseudopodium flowing round it, and holding it for a time, but ultimately again extruding it. No change in the individual was noted after this curious phenomenon, which Dr. Blochmann compares to the extrusion of polar bodies from the eggs of Metazoa. He thinks a similar process was mistaken by Jickeli for * Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 238-40. Tt Morphol, Jahrb., xiii, (1887) pp. 173-83 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSOOPY, ETO, 977 conjugation in Difflugia globulosa, He further describes cases of actual conjugation in Euglypha, and enumerates the points by which these can be distinguished from cases of division. ‘I'he individuals, after conjugation, either divided or encysted in the manner which Gruber describes ; but, in one instance, two conjugated Euglyphze formed one large one, which in- cluded the protoplasm and fused nuclei of both elements, and which finally encysted. Planispirina.*—M. C. Schlumberger describes the three most import- ant species of the genus Planispirina, whose dimorphism has not yet been noticed: they are, P. sigmoidea Brady, P. celata Costa, and P. edwardsi n. sp. He next proceeds to discuss the opinion of Mr. H. B. Brady as to the generic distinctiveness of these and some allied forms, and, contrary to the judgment of that naturalist, comes to the conclusion that the mode of disposition of the chambers of their tests is sufficiently characteristic to justify the creation of a new genus, for which M. Schlumberger proposes the name of Sigmoilina. New Parasitic Rhizopod.j—M. A. Giard finds that at Concarneau, and especially at Fécamp, the Cancerilla, which is parasitic on Amphiura squamata,t has on its own carapace a fine parasitic Rhizopod. This, which may be called Podarcella Cancerille g. et sp. n., is a pedunculated Arcellid. The peduncle adheres to the cephalothorax of the host by a small discoidal expansion ; it is once and a half as long as the funnel-shaped cupule which terminates it, and, like it, it is formed of a substance which is apparently chitinous. The ameboid body moves slowly in this cupule. Amebe of Variola vera.s—Dr. A. van der Loeff placed some pock matter taken from two persons suffering from confluent small-pox in sterilized tubes, and examined it on the evening of the same day in hanging drops. The same corpuscles—Proteide or Amebe—were found in large numbers and of various configuration, as were found by the author in fresh animal lymph. Even in cover-glass preparations the Amebz could be easily recognized after staining with fuchsin. Protozoa of the Black Sea.|; —Miss B. Peréraslavtzéva has endeavoured to make the list of Black Sea Protozoa more approximately complete. The memoir includes a list of 100 species. Of these 18 are new, and are described and carefully figured. The author has also sought to test the accuracy of the generalizations formulated by Merejkowski in regard to the geographical distribution of the Protozoa, and has been forced to refute them. Parasites in the Blood.{{/—Prof. B. Danilewsky concludes his study of the hematozoic parasites of the tortoise. In investigating the different organs, he found but little of importance in the spleen or kidney, except that in the latter he detected the presence of the Gregarinoid spores in the pseudonavicella stage. The study of the medulla in the bone-cavities yielded valuable results, especially in young tortoises. In this tissue the hemo- Gregarinid parasites are extremely abundant in all stages of development— young, adult, and free. The various forms are described in detail. The investigation of the marrow was the more important since Bizzozero and Torre have maintained that this tissue is in the tortoise the sole seat of the manufacture of red blood-corpuscles. In the hematoblasts, as was to * Bull. Soe. Zool. France, xii. (1887) pp. 475-88 (1 pl.). + Comptes Rendus, ciy. (1887) p. 1191. ¢ See this Journal, ante, p. 587. § Monatshefte f. prakt. Dermatol., 1887. || Mem. Soc. Néo-Russ. Natural. Odessa, x. (1886) p. 2 (8 pls.). Cf. Arch. Slay. de Biol., iv. (1887) p. 116. q Arch, Slav. de Biol., iii. (1887) pp. 370-417. 978 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO be expected, abundant hematozoic embryos were found. In the same region Prof. Danilewsky also observed within the corpuscles oval masses, which divided by a process of (muriform) segmentation (hardly to be described as sporulation) into a number of embryos. In other cases the minute embryos were seen apart, evidently liberated from a ruptured cytocyst. According to the author, each corpuscle containing a hemogregarine parasite, has received the latter from a hematoblast. The hematoblast may itself have engulfed a germ, or may have received it from a leucocyte. Germs originating from a spore-forming Gregarine in some part of the alimentary canal or urino-genital ducts may readily become included in the leucocytes. In the interior of the latter the germ undergoes a solitary and progressive development, while the containing cell is transformed into a blood-corpuscle. In this intracellular life the parasite passes through the stages which in the normal history of Gregarines are known as primitive germ, pseudonavicella, falciform body, and mobile adult. In contrast to the usual history the hemogregarine developes within the corpuscle from an almost imperceptible germ to maximum size, and that at the expense of extrinsic nutritive material. There is a certain parallelism, not without exceptions however, between the blood-corpuscle and the included hemo- gregarine. The presence of the parasite does not appear to affect the vitality of the developing blood-corpuscle. As to the mode of introduction into the tortoise, Prof. Danilewsky is inclined to regard the alimentary canal as the most probable entrance, and there is no doubt that in the insects, myriopods, &c., eaten as food, there is an abundant source of supply for Gregarinoid parasites. mt New Parasite of the Pock-process belonging to the Sporozoa.*— Dr. L. Pfeiffer has found a coccidia-like parasite which, in company with fungi and bacteria, lives in the pocks of various mammals and of man, and passes its first stages in the epithelial cells of the rete Malpighii: in this respect it would agree with the coccidia inhabiting epithelia (e. g. Coccidium oviforme Leuck.). The author found it very frequently in sections through the rete, partly in layers, partly within the epithelial cells, which were swollen up by the growth of the spherical parasites and finally destroyed. The smallest examples are 0°009 mm. large, and show a bright nuclear-like spot about 0-005 mm. in size. Like Coccidia, this Monocystis epithelialis, as the author calls it, forms a thick sheath, the original capsule is thrown off and a new one formed. Several examples are rarely found in one cyst. After incapsulation sporulation begins. The spores which are found in quantity in the lymph appear to pass directly into amoeboid, slightly mobile embryonic bodies. The author regards the transparent blood-corpuscle-like discs as the young condition of the parasite, and is disposed to think that the entrance into the epithelial cells is perhaps not necessary for its deve- lopment, as the parasites are found free in the protoplasm of the vesicles, and as it is possible to breed and propagate them in the artificial media up to the third generation. * Correspondenz-Blatter allg. arztl. Vereins v. Thiiringen, 1887, No. 2, 12 pp. (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 979 BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a Anatomy.* (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. Morphological and Chemical Composition of Protoplasm.j—In this very exhaustive treatise Herr F. Schwarz enters into great detail with respect to the behaviour of the different constituents of the protoplasm of the vegetable cell with various reagents; only the more important results can be indicated here. The varying acid or alkaline reaction of the cell-sap in different cases he attributes to the pigments or other substances contained in solution in it; in no case has he found the protoplasm to have an acid, but in most cases a distinctly alkaline reaction ; and this applies equally to the cytoplasm, the nucleus, the chromatophores, and the microsomes, and in some cases also to the protein-grains. This alkaline reaction is not due to the presence in the protoplasm of ammonia or other free alkalies, but probably to alkaline salts, especially phosphates, combined with the albuminoids in the living cell. The author regards the chlorophyll-bodies as having a fibrillar structure ; the fibrille do not, however, form a network, but lie side by side, filling up the entire mass of the chlorophyll-body. The fibrille, composed of a sub- stance which he calls chloroplastin, are not uniform in colour, but contain globular bodies of a deeper green than the rest, the vacuoles or “ grana” of Meyer; between the fibrille is a colourless substance, the metaxin. These two components of the chlorophyll-bodies can be separated by the action of water, in which the fibrille swell up strongly, but are entirely insoluble, while the metaxin is finally completely dissolved. They may also be distinguished by other chemical reactions. As components of the nucleus, Schwartz distinguishes the following substances :—(1) chromatin, the portion most sensitive to staining, occurring in the form of larger or smaller globules or granules, the “nucleo-micro- somes” of Strasburger; (2) pyrenin and amphipyrenin, which constitute, respectively, the body and the membrane of the nucleus ; these differ widely in their reactions from chromatin, and from one another, the former taking up staining reagents much more readily; (8) linin and paralinin, the substance respectively of the nuclear threads, the “‘ nucleo-hyaloplasm ” of Strasburger, and of the intermediate matrix or “nuclear sap.” The behaviour of these various substances towards different reagents is given in great detail. The cytoplasm has, as a rule, no reticulate or fibrillar structure ; though in Spirogyra and some other cases a certain amount of differentiation does occur. It is made up of three distinct substances :—the substances dissolved in the vacuoles or cell-sap; the microsomes, insoluble both in water and in the cytoplasm ; and the mucilaginous constituent or cytoplastin ; this is the. only proteinaceous substance invariably found in the cytoplasm, except in the youngest cells. The chemical properties of these various ingredients are again gone into in great detail. The formation of vacuoles the author regards as the result of the separation of substances previously combined, the more soluble of these collecting in the form of drops within the less * This subdivision contains (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm; (2) Other Cell- contents; (3) Secretions; (4) Structure of Tissues; and (5) Structure of Organs. + Cohn’s Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanzen, v. (1887) pp. 1-244 (8 pls.). 980 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO soluble. The membrane which bounds the cytoplasm outwardly and inwardly is not distinguishable chemically from the rest of its substance, and is formed out of the cytoplastin. The cytoplastin is coagulable by hot water, but is altogether insoluble in it. The following is a summary of the more important chemical reactions of the substances above described :—The plastins (chloroplastin and cyto- plastin) are insoluble in concentrated potash-lye and in a 10 per cent. solution of sodium chloride; while all the nuclear substances are soluble in these reagents; the plastins are not digested either by trypsin or pepsin, while the nuclear substances are all dissolved, at all events by trypsin. Chloro- plastin is distinguished from cytoplastin by swelling up strongly with a 1 per cent. solution of hydrochloric acid, by which the latter is precipitated ; chloroplastin is insoluble, or swells up slightly in a 5 per cent. solution of sodium phosphate, in which cytoplastin swells up strongly or is entirely dissolved. Among the nuclear substances, chromatin and pyrenin are distinguished by their great absorptive power for pigments; their respective solubility differs with various reagents; chromatin is rapidly, pyrenin only very slowly digested by trypsin. Amphipyrenin absorbs pigments much less rapidly than pyrenin; it dissolves with difficulty in a 10 per cent. solution of sodium chloride, while pyzenin is readily soluble in it; on the other hand it is soluble in a 1 per cent. solution of potash-lye, pyrenin only with difficulty. lLinin and paralinin are distinguished by their strong power of swelling with various substances, including water: paralinin is digested by pepsin, while linin is not. Metaxin is distinguished from the plastins by being digested by pepsin and trypsin; and from the nuclear substances by swelling up or dissolving in a 1 per cent. solution of sodium chloride, in which the latter are completely insoluble. Position of the Nucleus in Mature Cells.*—Observations made by Herr G. Haberlandt lead him to the conclusion that the position of the nucleus in mature cells is not arbitrary, but depends on its function as the bearer of the idioplasm which governs development, this idioplasm being invariably seated in the nucleus. When any particular wail or part of a wall is more strongly thickened than the rest, the nucleus is usually in immediate contact with this wall, and is sometimes connected with it by a string of protoplasm. A good example of this is the aquiferous epidermis of many orchids, where the nucleus is usually in contact with the outer wall. In other cases, when the inner wall is the thickest, it is in contact with it. In the guard-cells of stomata it is invariably in apposition with the thickened ventral walls. The rule is strikingly exhibited also in cells containing cystoliths. In the branching palisade-tissue of some Ranunculacew and of Sambucus, the nucleus has a central position, and is connected with the thickened portions of the wall by strings and plates of protoplasm. In young roots (Pisum sativum, Triticum vulgare) the root-hair originates from a protuberance of the portion of the wall immediately over the nucleus, or the young root-hair is connected with the nucleus by one or more strings of protoplasm. In branched hairs it lies in their basal portion. In multinucleated unicellular plants (Saprolegnia, Vaucheria), branches always originate immediately over a nucleus placed close against the cell- wall. The process of regeneration which takes place in many species of acters is always intimately connected with the presence of at least one nucleus. * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 205-12. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 981 Albumen in the Cell-wall.*—Herr F.. Krasser, following up the observa- tions of Wiesner } on the presence of albuminoids in the cell-wall, discusses «the value of the reagents at present used to determine the presence of albuminoids. He finds that they fail in either not staining all albuminoid substances, or they stain not only albuminoids, but also other substances resulting from their decomposition. This is the case even with Millon’s reagent, which colours also tyrosin, hydroparacumaric acid, and phenol. The copper test, and sulphuric acid containing molybdic acid, are the least reliable of any. A new test for albuminoids is proposed, viz. alloxan. As regards special tissues, in a very large number of plants examined, the author was unable to determine with certainty the presence of albuminoids in the cell-wall, either in the growing point of the stem or in the root. None was found in the cell-walls of the root-cap, while those of the cambium, pericambium, and phellogen were strongly coloured. In all the cases examined—sixty-two in number—the cell-walls of the epidermis gave the albuminoid reaction. This was also commonly the case with the elements of the soft bast; less often with those of the fundamental parenchyma and pith. In ten cases a positive result was obtained with collenchyma. With the endosperm the result varied in different cases. As regards the source of the albuminoids found in the cell-wall, Herr Krasser comes to the conclusion, from the phenomena connected with its development, that they are not the result of infiltration, but have been formed in the course of its formation. Permeability to air of Cell-walls.j}—By the use of the air-pump Herr E. Lietzmann has investigated the extent to which cell-walls, in various conditions, can become permeated with atmospheric air, carrying out the subject especially from a mathematical point of view. The objects specially examined were cork, lamella from the tissue of the leaf of Peperomia magni- folia, and lamelle of the wood of Pinus Laricio and P. sylvestris. With the pressures employed, cork was impermeable in the axial direction, while the cuticle of Peperomia, the walls of the tracheids of Pinus, and other cell-walls, were permeable. All cell-walls on which experiments were made were more permeable to air in a saturated than in a dry condition. The wood of P. Laricio was more permeable in the tangential than in the radial direction. In P. sylvestris open tracheid-bundles were met with as long as 22 centimetres, or perhaps longer. The living parietal utricle of protoplasm is altogether impermeable, or permeable only to a very slight degree. Swelling and Double Refraction of Cell-walls.s—Herr S. Schwendener discusses this subject from an experimental and mathematical point of view. He agrees rather with the older view of Nigeli than with that of v. Héhnel,|| believing that the phenomenon in question is accompanied by shortening in the direction of one axis as well as by lengthening in that of another, as is shown by certain lines on the membranes. When the conditions of elasticity in the direction of these lines are different from those in a vertical direction, torsion must result. ‘The phenomena connected with swelling are described in detail in the case of static-mechanical cells, of dynamic cells (bastlike stereids with transverse cleft-shaped pores), of cork-cells with cellulose- thickenings, and of the elongated cells of Caulerpa. * SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xciv. (1887) pp. 118-55. t See this Journal, 1886, p. 818. } Flora, Ixx. (1887) pp. 339-86 (1 pl.). § SB. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, xxxiv. (1887) pp. 659-702 (4 figs.). || See this Journal, 1883, p. 90. 982 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO In connection with the relationship between swelling and double refrac- tion, the author agrees with Zimmermann’s statement * that all non- cuticularized cell-walls show such optical properties as if they were compressed in the direction of the strongest capacity for swelling, or with that of the strongest shrinking when dried; the strongest swelling takes place in the direction of the shortest axis of the ellipsoid of elasticity, the least in that of the longest axis, and a medium degree of swelling in that of the medium axis. This is shown in the cases of ordinary bast- cells with longitudinal pores, of specific dynamic cells, of dynamic hairs and pappus branches, of thick-walled cork-cells, and of Caulerpa. Molecular tensions, such as those assumed by v. Hohnel, do not occur in any direction, and the hypothesis that double refraction in starch-grains or cell-walls is caused by such tensions must be abandoned. Such double refraction is dependent on a different arrangement in different directions of the minutest particles (molecules or micelle) of the substance. The author accepts, with some limitation, Nageli’s conclusion of the absence of optical susceptibility of cell-walls to traction or pressure. This is especially true of normal stereids. With regard to any change in the optical properties of the cell-wall resulting from the imbibition of fluids, the author’s experiments gave negative results. Silicified Cells in Calathea.j—Dr. H. Molisch describes peculiar cells in the bracts of Calathea Seemannii, surrounding the vascular bundles, especially the bast-cells, completely filled by silica, or possibly by a silicate. They occur in such numbers as to form a complete coat of mail around the vascular bundles. The walls of these cells are not silicified. ~ (2) Other Cell-contents. Structure of Chlorophyll-grains.{—From an examination of the small chlorophyll-grains containing very large “ grana,” in the creeping stem of Goodyera (Hzmaria) discolor, Herr VY. Chmielewsky confirms Schimper’s and Meyer’s hypothesis that the matrix (stroma) of the chloroplast is colourless, the coleur residing only in the vacuoles or “ grana.” He was also able to follow out accurately the development of the starch-grains. As these are being formed the chlorophyll-grain gradually increases in size, while its grana diminish ; and finally the entire chloro- phyll-grain, with its grana, altogether disappears. In mature starch-grains not the least protoplasmic remains of the chlorophyll-grain can be detected. The first layer of the starch-grain is formed on the periphery of the chlorophyll-grain, from where it gradually extends to the interior. Hourly Variations in the Action of Chlorophyll$—M. J. Peyrou, with the aid of a new instrument which he has lately had made, has inyesti- gated the variations in the action of chlorophyll. He finds that the function, at different hours of the day, is proportional to the intensity of the light. His experiments were always made with an atmosphere saturated with moisture in the case of terrestrial plants. Corresponding results were obtained with aquatic plants. Starch-grains coloured red by Iodine.||—-Herr A. Meyer replies to Dafert’s contribution on this subject, whom he charges with inaccuracy and confusion on the chemicdllisice of the question. He epitomizes the * See this Journal, 1885, p. 476. : + Verhandl. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien, xxxvii. (1887) pp. 30-1. t Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) pp. 57-9 (1 pl.). § Comptes Rendus, ev. (1887) pp. 240-3, 385-8. | Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 171-81. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 424. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 983 difference in the chemical and physical properties of starch-substance and amylodextrin; and states that none of the dextrins resulting from the action of ferments or acids on starch-substance are coloured by iodine. Erythro- dextrins do not exist; even dextrins of high rotating power can be so completely purified that they are no longer coloured by iodine. A dextrin can be produced for which (a) D = 194°8, and which is nevertheless not coloured by iodine. Where the red colouring is exhibited, it results from an admixture of amylodextrin. Proteinaceous bodies in Epiphyllum.*—Herr. V. Chmielewsky has reinvestigated the bodies found by Molisch in the parenchymatous and epidermal cells of the branches of Epiphyllum (truncatum), and corrects his description in one respect, stating that they are insoluble in alcohol. From their chemical reaction he regards them as of the nature of globulin, and believes them to be excretory rather than reserve-substances. He finds them in quite as large quantities in old as in young branches, and also that they are not used up when the plant is starved. Carrotene in Leaves.j—M. A. Arnaud states that carrotene is always found in the leaves of plants in full vegetation. The amount is equal on an average to about 0-1 per cent. of the weight of the dried leaves, and it must exert a considerable influence on their colour. Calcium oxalate in Aleurone-grains.{—According to Herr A. Tschirch, the crystals of calcium oxalate found in aleurone grains of seeds are some- times again completely dissolved when the seeds germinate, showing that they must have a function as reserve food-materials. This is especially well seen in the lupin. Herr Tschirch also describes the various crystalline forms which the calcium oxalate assumes in the aleurone-grains of seeds. Nitrates and Nitrites in Plants.s—Dr. H. Molisch states that nitrates occur more abundantly in herbaceous than in woody plants, while in no single instance has he been able to detect the presence of nitrites, which are injurious to plants even in very dilute solutions, and are reduced by them with extraordinary rapidity. Nitrates can, on the other hand, remain weeks, or even months, within the cells of plants without being decomposed. The nitrates found in plants are never the result of the oxidation of nitrites or of ammonia salts in the cells, unless under the influence of bacteria, but are always absorbed as such from the soil. Biological Import of Raphides.||—Prof. E. Stahl calls attention to the less obtrusive protective features exhibited by many plants. Numerous points of external and internal structure are, he maintains, only fully understood when considered in relation to the fauna which would destroy the plants if not in some way protected. At present, however, he only notes that the abundant raphides in plants are not wholly to be regarded as useless excretions, but also as protections against snails and other destruc- tive foes, which are at least thus restricted in their ravages. Snails have been observed to confine their voracity to those parts of certain plants where crystals were absent. Arum maculatum, usually regarded as poisonous, owes its burning and repulsive taste solely to the presence of very numerous raphides which penetrate the mucous membrane of the mouths of those animals which attempt to devour it. * Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) pp. 117-9 (1 pl.). Cf. this Journal, 1886, p. 89. + Comptes Rendus, civ. (1887) pp. 1293-6. Cf. this Journal, 1885, p. 670. { SB. Gesell. Naturf. Freunde Berlin, April 19, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxvi. (1887) p. 223. § SB. Akad. Wiss. Wien, May 5th, 1887. See Bot. Ztg., xlv. (1887) p. 454. || Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xx. (1887) pp. 145-7. 984 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (8) Secretions. Secretion of Araucaria.*—MM. E. Heckel and F. Schlagdenhauffen have demonstrated an interesting fact in regard to the secretion of Araucaria. The secretions of Conifers are known to be oleoresins, consisting of an essential oil and of a resin. But in the section Araucarieex, it would appear that the secretion is not a resin nor an oleoresin, but a resinous gum. The observations proving this interesting exception were made on a large number of Araucarias, so that the fact may be safely affirmed as true of the genus. The chemical investigations, the details of which need not be repeated, were based especially on the exudations of Araucaria Cooki R. Br. It is interesting to find a distinct genus thus marked off by chemical as well as morphological peculiarities. (4) Structure of Tissues. Aguiferous Tissue in the Leaves of Sansevieria.t—A similar function to that of the peculiar structures in the roots of austral Conifere is, according to Prof. F. W. C. Areschoug, exercised by certain cells with fibrous thickenings in several species of Sansevierta. Almost the whole of the internal fundamental tissue of the very thick leaves is transformed into aquiferous tissue, except a portion immediately surrounding the vascular bundles. The cell-wells of this tissue are very thin and porous, the pores having the form of a flat ring. The whole of the inner surface, even of the horizontal walls, is covered by slender branching fibre-like thickenings arranged spirally, which prevent them from contracting, so that they may serve as a perpetual reservoir of water. Laticiferous Vessels and Assimilating System.t—From an examina- tion of the orders Apocynacee, Asclepiadez, Huphorbiacee, Campanulacez, and Lobeliacee, Sigg. J. R. Pirotta and L. Marcatilli endeavour to trace the relationship between the laticiferous vessels and the assimilating tissue in the leaves. They find that, in the greater number of cases, the laticiferous vessels follow the course of the veins, and form in the leaves a more or less close network. In other cases they leave the veins and spread through the mesophyll. In all cases the authors believe that the latici- ferous vessels are so arranged as to receive the products of assimilation from the parts where they are elaborated and transport them to the different parts of the plant. Sieve-tubes.§—Dr. A. Fischer defines a sieve-tube as active so long as, on making a section of the living plant, it forms “Schlauchképfe,” i. e. so long as the sieve-pores are open and the contents fluid. Of active sieve- tubes he distinguishes three kinds, viz. (1) With coagulable sap; the contents consist of a slight parietal layer of protoplasm, and a clear sap which coagulates on heating (Cucurbitacee). (2) With mucilage; the contents consist of a delicate parietal layer of protoplasm with a larger or smaller admixture of mucilage, and a clear watery not cvoagulable sap (Humulus). (3) With starch-grains; the contents consist of a delicate parietal layer of protoplasm containing a small quantity of mucilage, and a clear not coagulable sap with starch-grains (Coleus). Most Dicotyledons belong to the third type; the rest, with the exception of Cucurbitaces, to * Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 359-60. + SB. Bot. Verein Lund, March 17, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 258. i Annal. Ist. Bot. Roma, 4 pp. See Bull. Soc, Bot. France, xxxiv. (1887), Rev. Bibl, p. 51. § Ber. K. Sachs. Gesell. Wiss., 1886, 48 pp. and 2 pls, See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 8. Cf. this Journal, 1886, p. 268. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 985 the second. In all, the sieve-plates are covered by a very thin layer of callus, which is either completely covered with mucilage, or only at the margins of the sieve-pores on both sides of the plate. In the development of all three types, drops of mucilage are first formed in the parietal protoplasm. In the Cucurbitacee these are soon again absorbed ; in other cases they remain ; in the third type the starch-grains are formed at the same time. The author agrees with Russow that the callus is separated from the contents of the sieve-tube and not from the cellulose-plate. In Cucurbitaceze the sieve-plate is slightly pitted before the formation of the callus, but the pitting is in all cases a secondary process after the tubes have emerged from the condition of cambium-cells. The obliteration or cessation of the functions of the sieve-tubes, com- mences with changes in both the contents and the sieve-plates, which vary in different plants. They finally become completely empty ; when they contain starch-grains, these are the last to disappear. The pores also be- come completely closed. Dr. Fischer affirms that the sieve-tubes are in connection with one another and with the conducting cells, but not with the cambiform. Effect of Stimulation on Turgescent Vegetable Tissues.*—Miss A. Bateson and Prof. F. Darwin have tried a series of experiments on the effects of water and other reagents on the increase in length of the turgescent pith of a growing shoot when freed from its surrounding tissues. The plants. experimented on were Helianthus tuberosus and H. anwuus. The increase in length was measured by means of an auxanometer-lever. One end of the pith was attached to the bottom of a narrow glass jar, the upper end being connected, by means of a thread of plaited silk, with the short arm of the lever. The following is a summary of the chief results. Turgescent pith placed in water increases in length, at first slowly, then more quickly; and then again the rate of increase becomes more slow. The rate of increase in length increases as the temperature of the water rises, reaches an optimum, and suddenly falls as a temperature sufficient to cause flaccidity is approached. The following reagents cause distinct acce- leration:—Alcohol, ether, ammonia, hydrocyanic acid. The first three produce a very temporary effect, whereas prussic acid has a prolonged action. The following reagents produce retardation :—Acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, and probably nitric acid. Dilute solutions of quinine chloride and of carbolic acid produce a remarkably rapid shortening of the pith. Formation of Tyloses in the interior of Secretory Canals.;—Mdlle. A.. Leblois states that she has lately made a series of researches on the origin and development of secretory canals. In the course of the investigation which was made on the branches of Brucea ferruginea, cells projecting: into the interior of the secretory canals were observed. These cells were sometimes in the form of a hair or papilla, but more often they were club-- shaped, and were formed by the projection of the cells at the border of the eanal. Afterwards these cells were observed to divide by transverse septa. In the older branches, on account of their number, these cells somewhat filled up the canal; they then took on the appearance of tyloses. The author concludes by stating that two types of tylosis might be: distinguished : firstly, those that occur in the old vessels and which were described in 1845, and, secondly, those shown to oceur in old secretory: canals. * Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.—Bot., xxiv. (1887) pp. 1-27 (5 figs.). t+ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxiv. (1887) pp. 185-6. 986 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Super-endodermal Network in the Root of Rosacex.*—M. P. van Tieghem has already described the structure of the cortical layer of the young root in Coniferee and Cruciferae in contact with the endoderm, which is furnished with a network of lignified thickenings. In this paper he continues this work with the Rosacez. In a young root of the pear, each cell of the super-endodermal layer has a lignified thickening-band in the middle of the radial and transverse walls. This band projects towards the interior in a semicylindrical form, and incloses a rectangular cell. From each side of the common partitions the two bands correspond exactly, and unite to form one thick cylindrical — band. The longitudinal and transverse bands constitute a network with rectangular meshes, and this forms a strong support for the young root. Of forty genera of Rosaceze examined by the author, thirty possess a super-endodermal network, and ten are destitute of one. These ten genera are confined to the three tribes Potentilles, Poteries, and Quillajaez; but the first two also contain genera which possess a network. Among the Poteries, for instance, the Sanguisorbes have a network, while the Pim- prenellez (sic) are destitute of one. Among the thirty genera of Rosacew which possess a network, various slight modifications are to be found ; these the author describes in detail. In conclusion, it will be seen that there are now three great families of plants in which the young root is provided with a super-endodermal network —the Conifere, Rosacez, and Crucifere. In the latter case only the meshes of the network are reticulated. Anatomical structure of the wood of Leguminosz.}—Herr A. Saupe finds that the separation of the order Leguminose into the three suborders Papilionacese, Czsalpiniex, and Mimosez, does not correspond to any general differences in the structure of the wood. All the species of parti- cular tribes do, on the other hand, present common characters in this respect, as, for example, in the tangential section of the medullary rays. This is especially the case in the tribes Genistezx, Dalbergiee, and Galeges. Certain nearly related genera exhibit also a more exact resemblance in their microscopical characters, as, for example, Gymnocladus and Gleditschia among Cesalpiniesw, and Colutea, Halimodendron, and Caragana among Papilionacez, and especially Wistaria and Robinia, which is the more remarkable from the difference in habit of these genera. Only rarely could the histological character of the wood be used in the discrimination of species, but this occurs in the genera Cassia, Cercis, Podalyria, and Sophora. The climbing Acacia sarmentosa agrees altogether in the struc- ture of its medullary rays with the rest of the genus. (5) Structure of Organs. Formation of Roots in Austral Coniferze.t—Prof. S. Berggren describes a structure of the roots peculiar to certain Conifere from the southern hemisphere. In Podocarpus there are formed, along all the younger branches of the roots, two or three moniliform rows of globular or elliptical secondary roots, of constant length in each species, varying in different species from 0°25 to2 mm. They consist, for the larger part, of spongy cortical tissue, the cell-walls of which have spiral or reticulate thicken- ings, which prevent their shrivelling up when dry. The function of these peculiar bodies appears to be the same as that of the aerial roots of * Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxiv. (1887) pp. 221-3. t Flora, lxx. (1887) pp. 259-68, 275-82, 295-316, 323-35. ¢ SB. Bot. Verein Lund, March 17, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 257. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 987 Orchidem, to serve as a storehouse for water. These structures attain their largest development in Araucaria, where their branching gives them a coral-like appearance. In the Cupressinesw of the southern hemisphere they are altogether wanting. Northern representatives of those genera which are most abundant south of the equator, display this structure to a modified extent only. Swellings on the Roots of Papilionacee.*—Herr A. Wigand gives a résumé of the extensive literature on this subject, and sums up in favour of Brunchorst’s view, that the so-called “ bacteroids” are true bacteria. Root-tubers of Leguminose.{—Herr A. Tschirch describes a pecu- liarity in the structure of the digitate tubers in the root of Vicia sepium, in which there is no suberous sheath to prevent the passage of the food- material into the surrounding empty tissue. The same result is attained by the separation of a layer of parenchymatous cells, which divide by tangential walls into tabular cells, and the walls of these cells become strongly suberized. Structure of Chenopodiacew.{—From the examination of the compara- tive anatomy of the stem and root of a large number of species of Chenopo- diacew, belonging to many different genera, Prof. St. Gheorghieff comes to the following general conclusions :— The abnormalities in the stem and root are more frequent in the latter than in the former, being often found in the root and not in the stem, but never in the stem when they are not also in the root. They are especially characteristic of perennial, and more particularly of climbing species, or of the perennial parts, sometimes not making their appearance till the third or even the fourth year. It is only rarely that neither stem nor root displays abnormalities in its structure. The main point of the exceptional structure is the large number of concentric secondary zones of increase in thickness, and the separation of the phloem into separate bundles distributed over the whole of the transverse section of the stem and the root. There are some species in which the peculiarities of structure are so specialized that they can be distinguished from one another by the stem or root only. This is the case with Haloxylon Ammodendron, Halostachys caspia, Grayia Sutherlandi, Suzeda fruticosa, and Kochia prostrata. A general review of the structure of the natural order is given, with especial reference to the genera Bosea, Kochia, Suzda, Halostachys, Eurotia, Haloxylon, Hablitzia, Boussingaultia, Basella, and Grayia. Biaxial Shoots of Carex.s—While the mode of growth of the majority of species of Carex is a uniaxial sympodium, Herr A. Callmé points out that in two species, C. digitata and ornithopoda, the primary shoot remains sterile, producing leaves only, while in its axis arise leafless and fertile lateral shoots of the second order. Development of the Suckers of Thesium humifusum.||—M. Leclere du Sablon states that the structure of the suckers of Thestwm humifusum has been studied with care by MM. Chatin and Solms-Laubach. Their develop- ment has, however, not been followed. In the neighbourhood of the grow- ing point of the root a slight swelling can sometimes be noticed, analogous * Wigand’s Bot. Hefte, ii. (1887) pp. 88-97 (1 pL). Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 429. + SB. Gesell. Naturf. Freunde Berlin, April 19, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 224. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 429. t Bot. Centralbl., xxx. (1887) pp. 117-21, 150-4, 183-7, 216-9, 245-9, 280-3, 328-30, 359-65, 369-80 ; xxxi. (1887) pp. 23-7, 53-7, 113-6, 151-4, 181-5, 214-8, 251-6 (4 pls.). § Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 203-5. || Bull. Soc. Bot, France, xxxiv. (1887) pp. 217-21. 988 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO to that of a very young root. Ifa transverse section be made in the middle of the swelling, it will be seen that the tissues of the root are modified. Some cells of the pericycle elongate radially, and divide by radial and tan- gential septa; the cells composing the endoderm and internal portion of the cortex also elongate and divide. In the middle portion of the cortex a separation is also produced. Thus it will be seen that, as in the case of Melampyrum,* the pericycle, endoderm, and cortex take part at the same time in the new formation. From this point the growth of the sucker is rapid. The author concludes by stating that the development of a sucker differs from that of a root, and its structure only accords with that of a root in a few characters. Colour of Coloured Leaves.|—Prof. T. W. Engelmann has investigated the cause of the colouring of the leaves in a large number of plants in which they are normally coloured, and its relationship to the decomposition of carbon dioxide in the light. The colouring may depend on two different causes: on a variation in the colour of the assimilating chromophyll-bodies, or on the occurrence in the leaf of special pigments in addition to the normal chromoplasts. In the first case, the colouring appears to be invariably light, and either pure yellow or yellow-green, with easy transition to ordinary chlorophyll-green ; in the second case it is usually red-brown, dark purple-brown, purple-red, or violet. In the first group of cases there appears to be frequently a definite quantitative relationship between the amount of colouring matter and that of chlorophyll. The colouring matter of the leaves of the yellow variety of Sambucus nigra was especially investigated and described. The yellow tint does not appear to be due here to a pure xanthophyll, but to a mixture containing a small quantity of true chlorophyll and of chlorophyllan. In more refrangible light (about A = 0°53 y), the yellow cells decompose relatively, if not absolutely, more carbon dioxide than the green, while in red and green light the green cells decompose, both absolutely and relatively, more than the yellow. In the second group the seat of the pigment is usually the cell-sap ; less often the cell-wall. In the latter case the colouring is mostly confined to small portions of the surface, causing variegated leaves. Of leaves coloured by a soluble pigment, about fifty kinds were examined. ‘These may be divided into two groups, connected with one another by intermediate forms: those in which the leaves are normally coloured during the whole or the greater part of their existence, and those which are coloured only when young. The colouring is, in both these cases, usually, but not always, spread over the whole surface of the leaf. With regard to the distribution of the pigment in the component tissues of the leaf, all the cells of the epidermis and its appendages, as well as the assimilating parenchyma, may contain coloured sap. In other cases only some of the epidermal cells of definite position are coloured. A red pigment is commonly contained exclusively in the assimilating tissue, especially in the palisade cells. That cells containing a purple sap can decompose carbon dioxide as energetically as those which contain pure chlorophyll is shown, among other examples, by the great size attained by the copper-beech, and the vigour of growth of the various species of Coleus. Neither the size, form, arrangement, colour, nor number of the chlorophyll-grains presents any peculiarity in such leaves. Only those rays appear to be absorbed by * Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 778. { Bot. Ztg., xlv. (1887) pp. 393-8, 409-19, 425-36, 441-50, 457-70 (2 pls.), and Arch, Néerland. Sci. Exact. et Nat., xxii. (1887) pp. 1-57 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 989 the pigment which are of the least importance in assimilation. A number of tables of wave-lengths and curves complete the paper. Yellow Spots on Leaves.*—Dr. P. Sorauer has investigated the cause of the yellow spots on the leaves of a number of plants, and finds it due in all cases to a stretching of the cells of the mesophyll. The cells are at first empty, but become afterwards filled with a brown substance resulting from the breaking up and disintegration of the chlorophyll-grains in adjacent cells. Bud-scales.j—Herr R. Cadura classifies the coverings of the buds of exogenous trees under four types, viz. (1) Collenchymatous coverings, consisting of elongated collenchymatously thickened parenchyma; (2) Parenchymatous coverings; (3) Periderm-like coverings, with parenchy- matous cone and suberized apex ; (4) Stereid-like coverings, with specific mechanical tissue. In the seventeen species examined, he finds one or other of these modes present, according to the need of the species for protection against excessive evaporation, radiation, cold, &e. The casting-off of the bud-scale is brought about by the formation of a zone of tissue at their base, the phelloid, the cells of which contain large quantities of starch and granular protoplasm, and in which intercalary growth takes place owing to the traction exercised by the swelling bud. Gentians.{— Prof. T. H. Huxley gives the results of a survey of the natural order Gentianacexw. Confining himself almost entirely to the study of the structure of the flower, he was able to distingush some seven or eight modifications ; and these were found to fall into two series, characterized by a peculiar disposition of the mechanical organs. The corolla presents a gradation of forms from the rotate, or rather stellate, condition, through the campanulate, to the extreme infundibuliform character. In one of these series the nectarial cells are situated on the inner surface of the cup, from the edge of which the lobes of the corolla proceed, and towards its basal end. The Gentianacee of this series the author terms Perimelite. In the other series there are no such patches of secreting cells visible on the corolla; but in many members of the series there is a zone of such cells, encircling the base of the ovary. These are termed Mesomelitz. In the series of the Perimelite four modifications of floral structure are discernible, and about the same number in the Mesomelitz. The author gives names to each of these groups, and traces their relationship one to another, and also the geographical distribution of each. Inflorescence of Typha.§—From a comparison of the structure of the inflorescence in the few species of Typha, Dr. M. Kronfeld supports Celakovsky’s view that it is essentially of the same type of structure as that of Sparganium, and that the distinct zones of flowers are in reality axillary shoots. Even the female partial inflorescence is composed of several, or at least of two, internodes. Axis of the Inflorescence. |—Dr. E. Dennert discusses in great detail the variations in the anatomical structure of this organ, to adapt it to different conditions. At the time of flowering the passage from the leafy * Forsch. a. d. Geb. d. Agriculturphysik, ix. pp. 387-96. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 279. ¢ Cadura, R., ‘Physiol. Anat. d. Knospen-decken dikotyler Laubbiaume,’ 42 pp., Breslau, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 87. { Journ. Linn. Soc, Lond.—Bot., xxiv. (1887) pp. 101-24 (1 pL). § SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xciv. (1887) pp. 78-108 (1 pl. and 2 figs.). Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 114. || Wigand’s Bot. Hefte, ii. (1887) pp. 128-217 (1 pl.). 1887. 37 990 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO stem to the immediate flower-stalk is marked by a decreased development of tissue, a rapid diminution in the number of bundles, and reduction of the pith. When the fruit is ripe the difference consists only in a diminished number of bundles and reduction of the pith, together with the absence of secondary vessels. Up to the period of ripening, the mechanical elements within the inflorescence are becoming gradually strengthened, which may take place either in the woody parenchyma or in the hard bast. In other cases, an extra-cambial sclerenchymatous ring or other form of scleren- chyma, makes its appearance, or a secondary sclerosis takes the place in the pith. The conducting tissue is also strengthened, and in some cases the cortical tissue. Not unfrequently the fruit-stalk is thickened imme- diately beneath the fruit. Comparative Anatomy of Flower- and Fruit-stalks.*—Herr F. Besser classifies under four heads a large number of flower- and fruit-stalks examined by him, viz. (1) The flower-stalk has no mechanical tissue and the fruit-stalk only bast (Linum usitatissimum, Prunus Cerasus, Platycodon grandiflorus, Monocctyledons); (2) The flower-stalk has collenchyma, the fruit-stalk also bast (Cucurbita Pepo, Citrullus vulgaris, Papaveracez) ; (3) The flower-stalk has collenchyma, the fruit-stalk also libriform (Cam- panula lactiflora, Scabiosa, Asterocephalus brachiatus); (4) The flower-stalk has collenchyma, the fruit-stalk also libriform and a much smaller quantity of bast (Malvaceze, Solanacee). Asparagus officinalis stands alone with its strongly developed sclerenchymatous tissue. Bast-cells with vertical transverse walls are common; libriform fibres also occur. Notwithstanding the temporary duration of these organs, it is not uncommon to find a more or less complicated assimilating system. Blossom on Old Wood.j—Dr. P. Esser remarks that many plants, especially tropical ones, produce flowers on parts of the wood which are several years old. After enumerating examples, he refers to Wallace’s suggestion that flowers so produced near the stem, and under the shadow of the leaves, are for fertilization by the shadow-loving butterflies of tropical forests, and also to Johow’s belief that by flower-bearing on old and hard parts, a plant is enabled to bear the weight of much larger and heavier fruits that it could otherwise support. He then gives the details of his own experiments on Cercis, Goethea strictiflora, Theophrasta, Ficus Roxburghii, and Chrysophyllum Cainito. He treats, in each case, of the anatomy of the wood ; of the formation of a larger number of buds than is common; of the way in which these buds develope further; and of the manner in which their connection with the vessels of the stem is ultimately recovered. | The conclusions from these observations he sums up as follows :— (1) There is no such thing as the production of adventitious buds upon wood whose development is once completed; but flowers appearing on old wood come rather, as Johow correctly indicated, from early formed buds which have been resting. (2) With regard to the formation of these buds, which are all placed in the axils of leaf-shoots, we must distinguish between the following cases :— (a) In each leaf-axil several buds are formed in series, most of which produce inflorescences after shorter or longer periods of rest. (Chryso- phyllum.) * Besser, F., ‘Beitr. z. Entwickelungsgesch. u. Vergleich. Anat. v. Bliiten- u. Frucht-stielen,’ 32 pp., Lossnitz, 1886. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 93. + Verh. Naturh. Ver. Bonn, xliv. (1887) pp. 69-112 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 991 (b) In each leaf-axil a bud is placed, which in turn produces other buds in the axils of some of its lower leaves. These, often simultaneously with their mother-bud, are applied to flower-bearing after rest during several years. (Ficus Roxburghii.) c) In each leaf-axil two or more buds are placed in a row, which, on their part, form other buds in the axils of their leaves, the lower ones placed on the production of the leading shoot, and these buds appear one after another. (Theophrasta, Goethea.) (d) In each leaf-axil a meristem is formed, from which, very slowly, it would appear that many buds are produced in rows, which develope after several years of rest. (3) In some cases, not only single inflorescences are produced, but flowering shoots, that continue to blossom for many years. Stipules and Petals.*—Observation of the stipules and flowers of the rarely flowering Magnolia Frazert has confirmed Mr. T. Meehan in the conclusion previously arrived at by him that the petals of most flowers should be considered enlarged stipules, or thinly dilated bases of petioles, rather than modified leaves. This is especially the case with many kinds of rose. In the Magnolia the transition from stipules to petals is very well seen. Amyloid Corpuscles in Pollen-grains.t—Investigating the starch-like structures found in the fovilla of pollen-grains, called by Saccardo “somatia,” in upwards of two hundred plants, Sig. C. Zatti finds that some of them are coloured blue, others a light yellow by iodine-reagents. To the former, which vary greatly in size and form in different species, he applies the term eusomatic; to the latter, which are minute and globular, notosomatic. This difference does not correspond closely to any natural system of classification. Thus, among the Ranunculacee, the Clematidea, Anemone, and Poniexz are notosomatic, while the Ranunculee are eusomatic. All the species of Malvaceze and Rosacee are eusomatic; while, on the other hand, all the Papaveraceee, Crucifere, and Caryophyl- lacez are notosomatic. Forms of Seedlings and the causes to which they are due.{—In the second part of his paper on this subject, Sir John Lubbock continues his phytobiological observations as to the influence of the leaf on the cotyledon. He describes in detail the seedlings of various Onagrariew, some of which have very curious cotyledons. For instance, in Cinothera Bistorta, the cotyledons are long and linear, but suddenly widen at the end into a large orbicular expansion, which gives them a very peculiar appearance. In the case of unequal cotyledons, the instance of Coreopsis Atkinsoniana is well worth a little attention. The seeds are obovate, curved longitudinally, and compressed dorsiventrally, conforming to the interior of the fruit. The embryo is slightly bent, following the direction of the seed. Consequently the one cotyledon occupies the inner, the other the outer side of the curve; and the outer one is distinctly larger than the other. As to the position of the embryo in the seed, the genus Plantago is noticed, the position varying with the different species. Divided cotyledons are far from frequent; an instance occurs in the lime (Tilia vulgaris). The author concludes with some remarks on the form of the leaf in the tulip-tree, Liriodendron, which he regards as being determined by the exigencies of the folding up of the lamina and the stipules within the leaf-bud. * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1887, pp. 155-6. + Bull. Soc. Ven.-Trent. Sci. Nat., iv. (1887) pp. 40-1. t Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.—Bot., xxiv. (1887) pp. 62-87 (42 figs.). Cf. this Journal, ante, p, 112. on 992 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO B. Physiology.* (1) Reproduction and Germination. Pollination of Pleurothallis ornatus.;—Mr. F. W. Oliver describes the peculiarities of the structure of the flower of this orchid. Each sepal is fringed with a row of cilia rendered vibratile by their very narrow base, and conspicuous from containing nothing but air. ‘Their swaying backwards and forwards with every breath of wind renders them much more conspicuous to visiting insects. The labellum is small, and moves narrowly on its narrow neck when touched. Being quite hidden, this motion cannot be for the pur- pose of rendering the flower more conspicuous, as in the case of some other orchids, but appears to insure the insect’s head being thrust against the stigma or pollinia. (2) Nutrition and Growth. Conditions of Assimilation.{—Dr. N. Pringsheim communicates a pre- liminary account of his researches on the dependence of assimilation in green cells on the liberation of oxygen, and on the locality within the cell where the oxygen formed in assimilation actually originates. He notes the limitations of the prevalent method of gas analysis, and has striven by direct observation of the protoplasm to determine the seat and relations of the various functions. It seemed likely that the observation of protoplasmic movements in varying conditions of light and darkness, and in partial or total removal of oxygen, would afford a suitable starting-point for his researches. Previous experiments had forcibly suggested that observed differences in the assimilative energy did not in any way depend on dif- ferences in the number of chlorophyll-bodies, nor on the abundance of chlorophyll within these, but on the oxygen respiration of the protoplasm. This point Pringsheim sought further to investigate. It has been known for long the green cells can break up carbonic dioxide in the absence of oxygen, where the carbonic dioxide is mixed with some innocuous gas. It is also known that protoplasmic movement is dependent on the presence of oxygen. If this be so, the protoplasmic movement in a green assimilating cell, in a medium free from oxygen, should not come to a standstill as long as it is illuminated, and the conditions of carbonic acid analysis fulfilled. With these facts in view, Pringsheim tried by experi- ment to answer the question whether a plant normally assimilating would cease to assimilate, without any alteration of the chlorophyll relations, if it were deprived, even for a short time, of the oxygen which is essential for respiration and plasmic movement, and whether it would recommence to assimilate whenever fresh oxygen was supplied. His experiments answered this in the affirmative. The naked terminal cells of Chara leaves were placed in suspended drops in 2 microscopic gas-chamber; oxygen was as far as possible excluded; a continuous stream of carbonic acid and hydrogen passed through; and the amount of light caused to vary. In darkness the rotation of the protoplasm gradually ceases, the length of time before stoppage varying with the degree to which oxygen is successfully excluded, with the specific nature of the cell, and with the mass of the protoplasm. The final result isa state of complete “asphyxia,” when the cell is dead, though still normal morphologically. * This subdivision contains (1) Reproduction and Germination; (2) Nutrition and Growth; (3) Movement; and (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). + Nature, xxxvi. (1887) pp. 303-4 (4 figs.). t SB. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1887, pp. 763-77, and Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. v. (1887) pp. 294-307. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 993 If the cells be taken just before asphyxia, just when the protoplasm is ceasing to move at all, it will be found that they are no longer able to assimilate. They are still quite normal, but if now placed in an illuminated chamber, and supplied as before with carbonic acid, the rotation will not return. A little free oxygen restores the original state, but without this, in spite of the presence of light, chlorophyll, and carbonic dioxide, no oxygen is formed, This state Pringsheim calls “inanition” or “ Ernaihrungs- ohnmacht.” What has been noted in regard to its occurrence goes to show the dependence of assimilation on the absorption of oxygen. But it is also a fact that the same phenomena of inanition occur when cells in similar circumstances are kept continuously in the light. Repeating the above experiment with continuous illumination instead of darkness, Pringsheim again observed the stoppage of rotation, and with it the cessation of the liberation of oxygen. The absence of free oxygen is again the condition of cessation of function ; if a small quantity be introduced the life revives, if at least the inanition has not gone too far. How is this to be explained in terms of the generally accepted theory of assimilation? If the disruption of carbonic diowide within the cell furnishes oxygen directly, how should any assimilating cell suffer from want of oxygen ? Pringsheim does not admit the usual assumption italicized above. His opinion is that the analysis of the carbonic dioxide in assimilation does not directly furnish oxygen, but that some other substance is formed, which, passing diosmotically to the surface, breaks up and liberates free oxygen. He criticizes the usual arguments based on the results of gas analysis, What the substance is which forms oxygen at the surface he is not yet prepared to state. If this be so, the breaking up of carbonic dioxide and the liberation of oxygen are two processes, distinct both in space and time, the one occurring within the cell, the other at its surface. This view is supported by reference to the peculiar liberation of oxygen exhibited in darkness by both green and unpigmented cells towards death. The bacterium-method proves this fact incontestably. This liberation of oxygen in darkness, and quite indepen- dent of contemporaneous assimilation, may be termed “ intramolecular liberation of oxygen,” and, according to Pringsheim, the normal liberation is an essentially similar process, resulting from the disruption of an exos- mosing substance. He advances other arguments to show that we are not warranted in con- cluding, as has been hitherto done, that the presence of chlorophyll, light, and carbonic dioxide exhaust the conditions of assimilation, and that in estimating its amount no other factors but light-energy and the absorption of light by the chlorophyll have to be taken into account. Assimilation is, on the contrary, a physiological function of the protoplasm, and, like the movement, depends on the presence of free oxygen. Physiologists will look with interest for Pringsheim’s detailed account of his investigations on this important subject. Influence of Stretching on the growth of Plants.*—Dr. M. Scholtz has experimented on the influence on the growth in length of various plants —Helianthus annuus, Tropeolum majus, Fagopyrum esculentum, Linum usita- tissimum, Ipomxa purpurea, Sinapis alba, Cucumis sativus—of weighting the growing stems with small weights, varying from 5 to 150 grammes. The possibility of heliotropic curvatures was carefully excluded. He finds that the weight exercises on the growing stems two opposite influences, the one accelerating, the other retarding the growth. Both take * Cohn’s Beitr. z. Biol. der Pflanzen, y. (1887) pp. 323-64. 994 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO place at the same time, and their relative intensity determines whether the erowth of the plant is accelerated, retarded, or remains the same. With more sensitive plants (Ipomxa purpurea, Linum usitatissimum, Tropzolum majus) the retardation is the stronger force ; in those which are less sensitive (Helianthus annuus, Cucumis sativus, Fagopyrum esculentum) the retardation is perceptible to measurement only during the first days, when the weight is not nearly sufticient to rupture the tissues. With greater weight it can- not be measured even on the first day, although no doubt present. But while with more sensitive plants the retardation is permanent, with the less sensitive it disappears altogether, and after the first day a distinct accelera- tion is perceptible. Differences are also dependent on the amount of weight and the age of the plant. The growth of the plant in thickness is not reduced. Reproduction of parts of Plants.*—Prof. F. W. C. Areschoug explains the tendency of some parts of plants to produce leaf-buds, and others roots, or of the same part to produce buds or roots under different conditions, by the hypothesis that buds are produced by those parts where there is a larger, roots by those parts where there is a smaller, accumulation of nutrient material ; stems requiring a larger amount of nutriment than roots, in con- sequence of their larger size and greater complexity of structure. Thus in all trees the strongest shoots spring, not from the lower, but from the upper part of the previous year’s shoot, where there is a larger supply of nutri- ment. Again, leaves, in which the supply of food-material is limited, as a rule produce roots only, but occasionally shoots from their basal portion. (4) Chemical Changes (including Fermentation). Formation of Albumen in Plants.;—According to Herr A. Emmerling, the total amount of nitrogen increases during the first period of growth of plants, especially in the leaves, until the commencement of the formation of the seeds. From this time it remains nearly constant in the leaves, but increases very rapidly in the fruits. The same is the case with the albuminoids, The non-albuminous nitrogen decreases, as a rule, as the amount of albuminoids increases, especially in the seeds and seed-vessels ; while in the leaves it retains nearly the same proportion until the seeds are ripe, but increases again, during the last stage, owing to retrogressive metastasis. Of the non-albuminous nitrogenous constituents, the amido-acids occur in especial abundance in the leaf-buds, floral organs, young seeds, and seed-vessels. In the leaves the amount of these acids remains constant for a long period, decreasing afterwards considerably ; and this is the case also in the roots, seeds, and seed-vessels. From this it is seen that the amido-acids formed in plants are gradually transformed into other nitro- genous substances, and especially into albuminoids; and that the capacity of the plant to produce these acids decreases with age, The course of the formation of nitrogenous substances in Vicia Faba appears to favour the hypothesis that the amido-acids are formed synthe~- tically in the plant, especially in the leaves, and that they are conveyed to the plants where fresh formation of cells is taking place, such as the growing-points and the seeds, where they are then transformed into albuminoids. Since therefore it must be supposed that every young cell * Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) pp. 186-8, 220-3. + Landwirthsch. Versuchs-Stat., xxxiv. (1887) pp. 1-91. See Naturforscher, xx. (1887) p. 267. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 995 constructs the albuminoids of its protoplasm out of amido-compounds, the formation of amido-acids is a very important item in the processes of metastasis. Theory of Fermentation.*—Herr N. W. Diakonow has published the first part of a detailed account of his investigations on “the réle of the fermentable nutritive substance in the life of the vegetable cells.” His results will be summarized when his memoir is completely published. He gives a clear historical introduction, resuming the progress of investigation in regard to fermentation from the researches of Thénard onwards. The various theories are briefly stated and compared. The point on which his own researches were first concentrated was that of the influence of the composition of the nutritive substances transformed by the fungus on the nature of the gaseous transformations effected in the surrounding medium. The nature of the gaseous exchange with the exter- nal medium, as determined by the fungus, varies according to the chemical composition of the nutritive substances taken in, and differs of course markedly from what takes place in a simple combustion of the same substances. The relation between the quantity of oxygen absorbed and carbonic acid gas given off is determined by the proportion of oxygen in the nutritive substance. The author has sought to determine what relation obtains between the intensity of the liberation of carbonic acid in the absence of atmospheric oxygen and the quantity of oxygen in the nutritive material. The nutritive substances used were glucose, lactose, chinic acid, and tartaric acid. The fungi experimented on were Penicillium glaucum, Aspergillus niger, and Mucor stolonifer. A detailed description is given of the methods of research. Alcoholic Fermentation.t—Prof. F. Delpino contests the modern view that the process of the fermentation of grape-sugar is a complicated one, in which succinic acid and glycerin are produced. These substances he believes not to be the direct products of fermentation, but, when fonnd in the fermented liquid, to be degraded substances resulting from processes connected with the plastic or proteinaceous nutrition of the saccharomycete. He reverts to the older view that the effect of the ferment is to decompose the sugar directly into alcohol and carbon dioxide. Prof. Delpino proposes to unite the forms known as Saccharomyces cerevisie, minor, and ellipsoideus, into a single species with the name S. zymogenus. Chemical nature of Diastase.t—Dr. OC. J. Lintner contests Hirsch- feld’s statement that vegetable diastase is a special molecular modification of a particular germ. He asserts, on the contrary, that it contains nitrogen, and presents many points of similarity to the albuminoids, although it cannot be included under this group of substances. A more exact com- position he is not able to give. y- General. Adaptation of Plants to rain and dew.$—Prof. N. Wille records the results of a series of experiments for the purpose of determining the extent to which plants can absorb moisture through their aerial organs, The experiments were made on a number of species, by placing on them * Arch, Slav. Biol., iv. (1887) pp. 31-61. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 619. + Nuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xix. (1887) pp. 260-2. { Pfliiger’s Arch. f. Ges. Physiol., 1887, pp 311-4. : § Cohn’s Beitr. z. Biol. d. PHanzen, iv. (1887) pp. 285-321. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 119. 996 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO drops of a 1 per cent. solution of lithium chlorate, and then determining, by means of the spectroscope, the extent to which the lithium was absorbed. The general results obtained were that water is absorbed so slowly and in such small quantities through these organs in comparison to the root, that it is without physiological value to the plant. This applies both to the ordinary leaves and to those parts which are designated by Lundstrém as specially constructed organs for the absorption of water. Bleeding.*—Herr C. Kraus has examined the phenomena of “ bleed- ing” in a number of species, both woody and herbaceous. He finds it to be invariably the case that when the plant is still attached to the soil by its root, the sap that first exudes from the wound is acid, while that which flows out later is either neutral or slightly alkaline; and the same is the case with cut shoots of the vine. The exuding sap is derived partly from the vessels and tracheids of the wood, partly from the tissue immediately adjacent to the wound. A larger amount of bleeding takes place, as a rule, from younger than from older shoots. Sachs’s Vegetable Physiology.{—This most important work, an enlarge- ment of a portion of Prof. J. von Sachs’s ‘ Text-book of Botany, is divided into six sections, viz.:—(1) Organography; (2) The External conditions of Vegetable life; (8) Nutrition; (4) Growth; (5) Irritability; (6) Reproduction. Under the head of Organography all the organs of a plant are classified under five heads, viz.:—(1) Root; (2) Shoot (including leaves); (3) Sporangia and Spores; (4) Archegonia; (5) Antheridia. In the section on Nutrition, a very large space is devoted to the phenomena connected with the absorption of water and the passage of nutritive material from one part of the plant to another ; and the author adheres to his previous view that the transfer is effected through the lignified tissues. B. CRYPTOGAMIA. Symbiosis of a Bacterium and Alga.t—Dr. M. Kronfeld objects to Tomaschek’s description of the association observed between a Bacillus and a Gleocapsa as “symbiosis,” § on the ground that it is not shown that the latter can derive any possible benefit from the former. He considers it more probable that the so-called bacillus is really the product of the breaking up of the filaments of an alga, a similar phenomenon having already been described by Zukal in the case of Drilosiphon.|| Cryptogamia Vascularia. Apospory.{—Prof. F. O. Bower repeats in detail the phenomena con- nected with the aposporic reproduction already described by Drewry and himself in the ferns Athyrium Filia-femina var. clarissimum, and var. plumosum elegans, and in Polystichum angulare var. pulcherrimum. He points out that sporal arrest may occur, irrespective of the presence or absence of these substitutionary vegetable growths which so often accompany it. In the first and last varieties mentioned above the arrestin the deyelop- ment of the spores is, in the majority of cases, complete, not advancing * Forsch.a.d. Geb. d. Agricultur-physik, x. (1887) pp. 67-144. See Bot. Centralbl., XxXxi. (1887) p. 137. + Sachs, J. v., ‘Lectures on the Physiology of Plants,’ translated by H. Marshall Ward, 836 pp. and 455 figs., Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1887. + Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) pp. 350-2. § See this Journal, ante, p. 785. || Ibid., 1884, p. 601. 4, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond.—Bot., ii. (1887) pp. 301-26 (3 pls.). See this Journal, 1885, pp. 99, 491; ante, p. 622. lord ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 997 beyond the appearance of the archespore. Substitutionary growths may take the form of (1) simple prolification; (2) sporophoric budding; or (3) apospory. The secend of these forms includes the well-known develop- ment of bulbils on the fronds of some ferns. Apospory includes all those cases in which the substitutionary growth following sporal arrest results in the formation of organs having the characteristics of the oophore. This occurs naturally in the cases of the ferns above-mentioned, and may be induced artificially in mosses. In two of these there is a distinct transition from the sporophore to the oophore without the intervention of spores, and by a simple vegetative budding. In A. Filix-fem. var. clarissimum, the sub- stitutionary growths which accompany the arrest of spore-formation are restricted to the sporangium itself; while in P. angulare var. pulcherrimum, the prothalloid growths may either proceed from the sorus, or may appear at quite distinct spots, and even on fronds which bear no sori at all, and comparable therefore in position to the common formation of sporophoric buds on the fronds of ferns. The author concludes by comparing the aposporic phenomena in ferns to the cases of arrest which occur either exceptionally or nominally in mosses in Chara and in Isoetes, and to the phenomenon of parthenogenesis in flowering plants. Structure of Mucilage-cells of Blechnum occidentale and Osmunda regalis.*—Messrs. W. Gardiner and Tokutaro Ito have examined the cells which secrete the slimy mucilage in Blechnum occidentale, wherein each hair of the terminal cell is glandular, and Osmunda regalis, where all the cells of the hair are usually secretory in function. They found that the mucilage arises from the protoplasm only, and not from the cell-wall, and that the whole process is distinctly intraprotoplasmic. The very words used by Langley in the description of certain animal secretory cells may be used of these ferns, for the cell-substance of the mature cells is com- posed of a framework of protoplasm connected at the periphery with a thin continuous layer of modified protoplasm (ectoplasm), while the meshes of the framework inclose two chemical substances at least, a hyaline substance in contact with the framework, and spherical granules imbedded in the hyaline substance. In other words, the mucilage is secreted in the form of drops, and each drop is further differentiated into a ground substance as mucilage), in which are imbedded numerous spherical droplets gum). ares commences by the breaking down of a portion of the inner- most layers of the protoplasm at a number of contiguous but isolated areas ; the result is the formation of small but rapidly growing mucilage drops. These last are at first watery and by no means well defined, but they soon become denser, and tannin is uniformly distributed throughout their struc- ture. A delicate reticulation may now be observed in the drops, and this finally gives way to the appearance of numerous minute and brightly shining droplets, all separate and distinct. Usually plant-cells are incapable of the active and repeated secretion which is seen in the animal secretory cells; and those of Blechnum and Osmunda die when they have formed their secretion; but in other cases, as e.g. the glands of Dionxa, it appears exceedingly probable that there are periods of rest and of repeated secretion, as in animals. The secretion of the cells escapes by the rupturing of the cell-wall. In Osmunda the whole system is perforated by fine holes, which in the * Ann. of Bot., i. (1887) pp. 27-54 (2 pls.), and Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., xlii. (1887) pp. 353-5. 998 " SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO functional cell are filled by delicate strands of protoplasm; these establish a direct continuity between the protoplasmic contents of the various cells of the hair. The authors believe that, in their main features, the phenomena attending the formation of the secretion are very widespread, and limited neither to ferns nor to the particular case of secretion of mucilage. Leaves of Ferns.*—Herr A. Vinge notices some peculiarities in the structure of the leaves of ferns, corresponding to the needs of the species as regards transpiration. Im many thin-leaved ferns the mesophyll is almost entirely undifferentiated. Not unfrequently we find intercellular prolongations from the walls of the mesophyll-cells, especially in the neighbourhood of the stomata. The thick leaves of Adiantum macrophyllum have a very loose tissue; while, on the other hand, the mesophyll of Polypodium treoides is very dense. The greatest differentiation of tissue was found in Niphobolus Lingua. Beneath the upper epidermis, a hypoderm consisting of two layers, then a palisade-parenchyma of from one to three layers with the ordinary isodiametrical layers within, the whole structure closely resembling that of a dicotyledonous leaf. Muscinee. Fructification of Grimmia Hartmanni.t—M. Philibert describes this moss as resembling in the sterile state Rhacomitrium sudeticum, from which, however, it is distinguished by the tissue of the leaves. The perichetial leaves are of the same shape as the caulince leaves, only their base is rather more sheathed, and the tissue in the lower part is composed of rectangular cells, which are looser and more transparent. Rarely two fruits come from the same perichetium. The pedicel is three or four millimetres in length and twisted into a spiral; when moist, it is bent in an are, so that the capsule is at an angle of about 45° with the vertical. The capsule is oval-oblong, very smooth, and is pale in colour with a reddish margin. Its length without the operculum from 1°5 to 1:7 mm., the diameter from 0:75 mm. The operculum is conical, subulate, and slightly oblique. The teeth of the peristome are linear-lanceolate, obtuse, entire, and of an orange-red colour; the two lower rows are very smooth. In conclusion, the author states that Grimmia Hartmann ought to be placed among the true Grimmiz near to G. contorta Wahl. Sphagnaceze of North America.{—In a revision of the Sphagnacez of North America, M. J. Cardot states that that continent possesses several subtropical types not found in Europe, while only one Huropean form (S. Angstroemii) is at present absent from it. Alge. Siphonee.§ —The most recently published part of Prof. J. G. Agardh’s Classification of Alge refers to this group, in which he includes Dasycla- daceze and Valoniaceze. The whole group is divided by him into six families as follows:—I. Bryorsipem (Bryopsis, Derbesia?). II. Sponcopinm (Codium?, Cladothele). III. Upvornacem (Chlorodesmis, Avrainvillea ?, Espera, Penicillus, Rhipocephalus, Callipsygma nu. gen., Udotea, Rhipido- siphon?, Halimeda). IV. VauontaceHT ( Valonia, Siphonocladus, Ascothamnion?, * Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) pp. 290-3. + Rev. Bryol., xiv. (1887) pp. 49-52. + Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg., xxvi. (1887) pp. 44-61. § Agardh, J. G., ‘Till Algernes Systematik,’ in Lunds Univs. Arsskr., xxiii. (1887) 180 pp. and 5 pls. Sce Mrs. Merrifield, in Nature, xxxvi. (1887) p. 313. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 999 Trichosolen?, Apjohnia, Struvea, Chamedoris, Dictyospheria, Anadyomene). V. Cavcterrem (Caulerpa). VI. Dasycouapem (Dasycladus, Chlorocladus, Botryophora, Cymopolia, Neomeris, Bornetella, Halicoryne, Polyphysa, Aceta- bularia, Pleiophysa?). Under Avrainvillea are included Fradelia, Chloro- plegma, and Rhipilia. Chlorodictyon and Codiolum are altogether excluded, The position of a number of these genera is provisional only, as ina considerable proportion of them the fructification and mode of reproduction are unknown, and for the same reason the delimitation of the families depends on characters which have no permanent value. Growth of the Cell-wall and other phenomena in the Siphoneee.*— In order to determine the question whether the growth of the cell-wall takes place by apposition or by intussusception, Herr F’. Noll suggests the use of staining reagents which shall colour the fully formed parts of the cell-wall, while the parts in process of formation are left uncoloured. For this pur- pose he employed Berlin blue or Turnbull’s blue, and applied the test to marine alg in which the cell-wall grows with great rapidity, viz. Caulerpa prolifera, and species of Bryopsis and Derbesia. Having coloured the cell- walls already formed in the way indicated, their growth was then continued without further staining, when new colourless lamelle of the cell-wall were found to be formed within those coloured blue, showing that the growth takes place by apposition only. In the transparent tubes of Bryopsis and Derbesia it was clearly seen that no increase of thickness took place by intussusception, and the same was the case also with the apical growth. Herr Noll also investigated the function of the remarkable bands of cellulose within the tube of Caulerpa, which have generally been supposed to be for the purpose of strengthening. He found that they could have no appreciable value for this purpose, but that they display an extraordinary power of conduction in the direction of their length. Their object appears to be to promote the rapid passage of oxygen and other substances to the interior of the elongated cell, where they are required for respiration and other purposes. The seat of the phenomena of heliotropism and geotropism displayed by these algee was determined to be the parietal layer of protoplasm. In these plants of low organization external forces have much more direct influence than in higher plants, where morphological differentiation of organs for special purposes has already taken place. Fresh-water Chetomorphas.t—Herr G. Lagerheim describes a new species of Chetomorpha (C. Herbipolensis) from water in a conservatory at Wiirzburg, and discusses also all the species of this genus that are brackish or fresh-water in contrast with the larger number of marine species. Sensitiveness of Spirogyra to shock.t—Mr. S. Coulter records the observation that if filaments of Spirogyra are cut through as carefully as possible with the sharpest instrument, eight or ten cells nearest to the laceration showed striking changes in their protoplasmic contents, the spiral bands of chlorophyll being broken up and exhibiting a tendency for the protoplasm to collect round certain definite centres. It was a note- worthy fact that the pond from which the Spirogyra was taken contained water which was always at a comparatively high temperature; under ordinary conditions the same sensitiveness was not displayed by the Spirogyra. * Bot. Ztg., xlv. (1887) pp. 473-82. + Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 195-202 (1 pl.). t Bot, Gazette, xii. (1887) pp. 153-7 (5 figs.). 1000 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Gynandrous Vaucheria.*— Under the name Vaucheria orthocarpa Herr P. F. Reinsch describes a new species, distinguished (in addition to other characters) by displaying gynandry. Besides the antheridium which springs laterally from the base of the oogonium, the latter organ produces a second antheridium at its apex, which developes precisely like a normal one. Only partial impregnation appears to take place in these cases, and the resulting oospore not to be capable of germination. Fresh-water Alge of New Zealand.{—Dr. O. Nordstedt describes the fresh-water algee (except diatoms) brought from the hot-lake district of the Northern Island, New Zealand, and the Alps of the Southern Island— 305 species and 55 varieties. They present but few novel features, and include 28 species of Gidogoniacer, 8 of Chetophorex, 1 of Chroolepide, 17 of Confervacese, 1 of Ulvaceee, 8 of Pediastreze, 4 of Protococcacer, 9 of Palmellacesze, 3 of Volvocineze, 2 of Vaucheriacez, 5 of Siphonex, 1 of Mesocarpee, 7 of Zygnemex, 152 of Desmidiee, 5 of Rivulariacee, 7 of Sirosiphonacez, 7 of Nostoceze, 10 of Oscillariew, 2 of Chamesiphonacez, 10 of Chroococcacer. The new species include 1 of Aphanochxte, 1 of Rhizoclonium, 1 of Desmidium, 1 of Hyalotheca, 1 of Micrasterias, 5 of Huastrum, 5 of Staurastrum, 4 of Xanthidium, 9 of Cosmarium, 2 of Triplo- ceras, 1 of Closterium. Pores in Diatom-valves.{—Herr O. HE. Imhof claims to have detected, in large species of Surirella and in one of Campylodiscus from the Cayloccio lake in Upper Engadin, very fine canals in the wings, which open out at the edges in minute elliptical openings, through which pass protoplasmic filaments united into a continuous thread. These he regards as the true motile organs of diatoms. Lichenes. Apothecia of Lachnea theleboloides. §—Sig. F. Morini describes the development of the apothecia of this lichen, which resembles that of Ascobolus furfuraceus. On the mycelium appears a short thick branch, rich in granular protoplasm, which shows spiral curves to the extent of 2-24 coils. At the free end of this branch is differentiated, by the forma- tion of a septum, a terminal cell which soon assumes an ovate-spherical form. ‘This is the mother-cell of the asci. The spirally coiled cell is segmented in the middle by a septum; the protoplasm passes out of the two cells thus formed into the terminal cell, and the basal cell dies away. At the base of the terminal cell now appears a conical thick-walled prominence, which is preceded by the formation of a number of hyphal branches, which have sprung from the mycelium, and have invested the carpogonium. A dense ball is thus formed, in the centre of which the carpogonium and terminal cell can scarcely be distinguished. These investing hyphe form the principal mass of the apothecium, as well as the subhymenial layer and paraphyses. From the terminal cell spring a number of branches which terminate in asci. A number of the apothecia always remain small in the form of parenchymatous balls in which no carpogonium can be detected. Sig. Morini believes these to be the “ spore- bulbils” of authors. * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 189-92 (1 pl.). + Bot. Verein Lund, April 18, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 321. { Biol. Centralbl., vi. (1887) p. 719. § Rend. R. Accad. Sci. Bologna, March 27, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 382. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1001 Double Lichen.*—Herr W. Zopf has observed upon Physma compactum and on other Collemacei, reddish-brown warty protuberances, which were found to be the imbedded flask-shaped perithecia of an Ascomycete, Pleospora Collematum n. sp. This fungus is not parasitic upon the lichen, but is in direct connection with the constituent alga, a species of Nostoc ; and we have here a lichen made up by the symbiosis of two fungi with one alga. The mycelium of the Pleospora, easily distinguished by its yellow colour, penetrates the lichen to the base of the perithecia. When ready for fructification the perithecia emerge on the surface of the lichen in the form of reddish-brown protuberances; the thallus of the lichen surrounds the perithecia like a wall. Microchemical reactions of Lichens.t—According to Dr. E. Bachmann, the chemical reaction characteristic of certain species of lichen, the appear- ance of a yellow colour, afterwards turning to red, when a drop of potash- ley is placed on the thallus, depends on the formation of very minute needle-like crystals, of a rusty or blood-red colour, collected in groups or in a dense felt. These are insoluble in glacial acetic acid, but are dissolved by concentrated hydrochloric acid with a yellow colour. This reaction occurs in Urceolaria ocellata, Pertusaria levigata, Lecidea lactea, L. Pilati, Lecanora subfusca f. chlarona, Aspicilia adunans f. glacialis, A. alpina, A. cinerea, and Parmelia acetabulum. The yellow colour appears at once, the separation of crystals after a few minutes. Hesse obtained from Calyciwm chrysocephalum a yellow crystallizable pigment, insoluble in and unchanged by potash-ley, to which he gave the name calycin. The same reaction is exhibited by Physcia mediana, Cande- laria vitellina, C. concolor, and Gtyalolechia aurella. Other microchemical tests are given, by which particular species of lichen can be distinguished from their nearest allies, Emodin in Nephroma lusitanica.{—In the medullary tissue of this lichen, Herr E. Bachmann finds a pigment closely allied in its products to chrysophanic acid, but still differing from it. It appears to be identical with emodin, known at present in the root of the rhubarb, and in the bark and berries of Rhamnus Frangula. Introduction to the Study of Lichens.§—Mr. H. Willey’s work under this title is a revised edition of his ‘List of North American Lichens,’ published in 1873, with an enumeration of all species discovered since that date, and descriptions of eleven new species. It contains also a condensed account of the main facts concerning the structure of Lichens and their classification. The plates represent the spores of North American genera. Fungi. Action of Pyrofuscin on Fungi.||—Herr P. F. Reinsch finds that a solution of pyrofuscin acts rapidly and destructively on living mould-fungi such as Aspergillus. He suggests that this discovery may have an important bearing in medicine, in the treatment of diseases due to parasitic fungi, such as croup; pyrofuscin being entirely without any injurious influence on living human tissues. * Verh. KK. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien, 1887 (1 pl.). + Flora, Ixx. (1887) pp. 291-4. * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 192-4. § Willey, H., ‘An Introduction to the Study of Lichens, 43 pp., Suppl. and 10 pls. New Bedford, U.S.A., 1887. See Prof. W. G. Farlow in Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxiy. (1887) p. 75. || Deutsch. Chem. Ztg., 1887, 2 pp. 1002 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Identity of Podosphera minor Howe, and Microsphera fulvofulera Cooke.*—Miss M. Merry states that, in M. fulvofulcra Cooke there is clearly a single ascus in each perithecium, thus placing it in the genus Podosphzra. It agrees with the description of P. minor Howe, thus necessitating the cancelling of Microsphera fulvofulcra Cooke. New Section of Chytridium.}— Under the name Chytridium Zygnemaitis, Herr F. Rosen describes a new species parasitic on species of Zygnema, especially Z. cruciatum. The swarmspores have a diameter of 3-4 », with a single cilium from six to ten times the length of the body. Hach spore has a large eccentric oil-drop, and a less refrangible crescent-shaped body, probably composed of nuclein. On coming to rest the cilium shortens and winds itself round the spore, and then disappears, while the spore clothes itself with a thin and very extensible membrane. It then puts out a germinating tube, with a small vesicle at its apex, from which it branches into a mycelium within the host; on this are produced the nearly globular or slightly ovate zoosporangia, the formation of which is, under certain conditions, preceded by that of vesicles containing a drop of oil. Each sporangium is surmounted by a double crest of teeth or elevations, and contains from eight to sixty zoospores. The species is characterized by its great dependence on air, and has unusual capacity for resisting desiccation. It appears nearly allied in some respects to C. Hydrodictyi ; in the mode of escape of the zoospores it resembles C. Mastigotrichis. Herr Rosen proposes the establishment from this species of a new section of Chytridium, which he names Dentigera, with the following characters:—Unicellular Chytridia with a bladder in the cell of the nutrient alga, from which proceeds a branched mycelium, and a more or less nearly spherical zoosporangium, at the apex of which are (four) two-cleft teeth. ‘lhe zoosporangium is either sessile on the portion contained in the nutrient cell, or one or two sometimes stalk-like vesicles are interposed. The swarm-spores are globular with an eccentric oil-drop and a single cilium. Resting-spores unknown. To this section belong, in addition to Chytridium Zygnematis, C. dentatum n. Sp., parasitic on Spirogyra orthospira, and C. quadricorne dBy., parasitic on Cidogonium rivulare. Cladochytrium.{—Nowakowski included under this genus some forms of Chytridiaceze with terminal or intercalary zoosporangia borne on branches of a mycelium partially or entirely projecting above the surface of the host ; the zoospores producing again a similar mycelium without conjugat- ing. Other forms producing resting-spores were believed by de Bary to be stages of development of the same fungus; and this has now been confirmed by Dr. M. Biisgen, who has followed out the whole cycle in Cladochytrium Butomi, parasitic on the stem and leaves of Butomus wmbellatus. The development is characterized by the formation within the host-cell of swellings, within which are stored substances which are subsequently used up in the production of hyphe and of resting-spores. In the same nutrient cell will sometimes be produced two kinds of swarmspore: one penetrates into the host and produces plants which bear resting-spores; the other kind is transformed almost directly into a second generation of zoosporangia. In Cladochytrium Flammule, parasitic on Ranunculus Flammula, and C. Menyanthis on Menyanthes trifoliata, Dr. Biisgen has been able at present to detect the formation of resting-spores only. * Bot. Gazette, xii. (1887) pp. 189-91 (1 pl.). + Cohn’s Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanzen, iv. (1887) pp. 253-67 (2 pls.). {t Ibid., pp. 270-83 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 10038 Lophiostoma.*—Herr F. Lehmann contributes an exhaustive mono- graph of this genus, belonging to the Spheriacee. Together with Glyphium, Lophium, and Mytillinidion, it makes up the family Lophiostomez. The following is the diagnosis given by the author:—Perithecia car- bonacea, globosa v. ellipsoidea, ostiolis pro ratione magnis, labiato-dehis- centibus v. poro rotundato pertusis instructa. Spor fusiformes v. oblonga, rarius ovate, 2—12-cellulares, v. rarius muriformes, hyaline v. fuscee. The species are all epiphytic, more often on dead than on living plants, as many as 15 species on Salia; the other three genera of the family are most com- mon on Conifers. In most species the only internal organs of reproduc- tion are the asci; in a few, spermatia also have been found. In one species only are pycnidia known, producing stylospores. The number of species at present known, and described in this mono- graph, is sixty-eight, of which twenty-six are new. Phalloidei.j—Herr E. Fischer gives a monograph of the eleven known genera and seventy-three species of Phalloidei, chiefly exotic. He divides them first into two groups, the Phallei and Clathrei. The Phallei are again divided into Phallei mitrati, composed of the two genera Dictyophora and Ithyphallus (the latter including our native Phallus impudicus), and the Phallei capitati, also made up of two genera, Mutinus and Kalchbrennera. The Clathrei include seven genera not sharply defined, viz.:—Simblum, Clathrus, Colus, Lysurus, Anthurus, Calathiscus, and Aseroé. Peziza.{—This genus, now numbering about 370 known species, has been split up into about 100 distinct genera. M. J. de Seynes proposes: to reunite them as sub-groups of the old genns. Details are here given of the structure of several species. P. tuberosa exhibits in its young mycelium the unusual phenomenon of dichotomy. Jis hyphe display one of the few examples among Ascomy- cetes of a parasitism or symbiosis with the cells of an alga, probably Cystococcus humicola. A difference in the mode of absorbing the nutriment from the host is exhibited, according as the parasitism belongs to the hyphe of the mycelium or of the “ cupule.” P. melastoma displays a peculiar mode of rejuvenescence in the cupule. If this organ is cut through, the uninjured hyphe elongate themselves over the cut surface, and cover it with a young delicate tissue. Helotium Willkommi.s—Dr. R. v. Wettstein gives a description of the geographical distribution of Peziza (Helotium) Willkommi, and the injury caused by it on larches. He regards it as nearly allied to Helotium calyciforme, forming a section of that genus, to which belong also H. Abie- tinum, Ellisianum, and chrysophthalmum. Ptychogaster.||—-M. Boudier points out that the forms included under the genus Ptychogaster are nothing but species of Polyporus, in which there is a large development of conidia in the interior of the tissue, which causes the individual to become sterile. In this way he proposes for a conidial form of Polyporus amorphus the name Ptychogaster citrinus ; Ptychogaster albus is identified with Polyporus borealis or P. destructor, and Ptychogaster * Nova Acta K. Leop. Carol. Deutsch. Acad. Naturforscher, 1. (1886) pp. 45-152 (6 pls.). See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 265. + Jahrb. Bot. Gart. Berlin, iv. (1887). See Hedwigia, xxvi. (1887) p. 113. Of. this Journal, 1886, p. 833. ¢ Seynes, J. de, ‘ Rech. pour servir 4 Vhist. nat. des végétaux inf€rieurs,’ iii., part 2, Paris, 1886. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 70. § Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) pp. 285-7, 317-21. || Morot’s Journ. de Bot., i. (1887) p. 7. 1004 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO aurantiacus with Polyporus sulfureus; for the conidial state of Polyporus vaporarius the author proposes the name Pétychogaster rubescens. Hetereecious Uredinee.*—Mr. C. B. Plowright describes two new species of Puccinia, and also gives the results of some experiments on the Gymmnosporangia. Puccinia Phalaridis u.sp. The ecidiospores of this Uredine, known as Zicidium Ari Desm., occur on Arum maculatum; the uredospores and teleutospores on Phalaris arundinacea. The author states that it is speci- fically distinct from the plant described by Schneider as P. sessilis. Puccinia arenariicola n. sp. The ecidiospores of this species occur on Centaurea nigra; the uredospores and teleutospores on Carex arenaria. It was conclusively demonstrated that P. arenariicola is distinct from P. Caricis and P. Scheleriana. The author gives the details of some experiments on the Gymnosporan- gia, and states that the life-history of these fungi is not so simple a matter as the statements of Oersted would lead us to suppose. Ustilago Treubii.t—Graf zu Solms-Laubach describes under this name a fungus which produces galls of two different kinds on Polygonum chinense in Java. One of these kinds of gall is composed of growths caused by the parasite proceeding from the cambium of the host. From the galls issue club-shaped outgrowths composed of parenchymatous tissue pene- trated by an irregular string of meristematic vascular bundles. By the penetration into the tissue of a number of hyphe proceeding from this structure a kind of capillitium is produced, among which are formed the minute spores, about 4 » in diameter. This capillitium assists the dissemi- nation of the spores by preventing their soaking by the tropical rain. Fungus parasitic in Lecanium hesperidum.{—M. R. Moniez finds that the parasite first seen by Prof. Leydig in the blood of Lecanium hesperidum is a fungus. He proposes for it the name of Lecaniascus polymorphus ; its appearance varies considerably, according to the different stages of its mycelium. Its simplest stage is that of an ‘ovoid body, 4-5 » long, and it is then difficult to distinguish developed conidia or ascospores ; in this stage budding is often observed. The mycelium sometimes presents a series of very distinct swellings, which the author regards as the homologues of conidia; in this condition the mycelium itself may be 50—60 mu in length. In highly developed individuals the mycelium, instead of being perfectly homogeneous, is entirely filled with a finely granular protoplasm ; M. Moniez is inclined to think that this is a stage preparatory to the complete trans- formation of the mycelium into an ascus. A somewhat similar fungus has been described by Metschnikoff in the blood of Daphnia magna, undez the name of Monospora bicuspidata, and another by Biitschli from Tylenchus pellucidus. Fungi parasitic on the Mulberry.s—Sig. A. N. Berlese enumerates as many as 176 species of fungus found on the mulberry in Hurope and America, growing chiefly on the branches, and either parasitic or not. Of these 25 belong to the Hymenomycetes, 4 to the Discomycetes, 72 to the Pyrenomycetes, 27 to the Spheropsidew, 41 to the Hyphomycetes, and 2 to the Myxomycetes. No species belonging to the Hypodermiz is known to grow on the mulberry, and the same is true also of the fruit-trees * Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.—Bot., xxiv. (1887) pp. 88-100. Cf. this Journal, 1885, pp. 288, 503. + Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, vi. (1887) pp. 79-92 (1 pl.). See Bot. Ztg., xlv. (1887) p. 469. { Bull. Soc. Zool, France, xii. (1887) pp. 150-2. § Bull. Soc. Ven.-Trent. Sci. Nat., iv. (1887) pp. 9-38. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1005 belonging to the Aurantiaceew. Of the Melanconie very few species are moricolous, and none of these are Italian. Fungi parasitic on the Savin, Larch, and Aspen.*—Herr R. Hartig identifies Czoma pinitorquum, parasitic on the savin, with C. Laricis, parasitic on the larch, and has established that both these species are represented by the teleutospore-form Melampsora Tremulz, which hibernates on the aspen. Colocasia Disease.t—The edible tubers of Colocasia esculenta are, in Jamaica, subject to a disease which Mr. G. Massee finds to be caused by the attacks of a hitherto undescribed fungus Peronospora trichotoma. It appears in the form of yellow spots corresponding to the vascular bundles, which are always first attacked, the mycelium spreading through the entire substance of the tuber along the cavities of the tracheids, from which it passes to the adjoining parenchyma. Two forms of reproductive bodies, conidia and resting-spores, have been met with; the former are produced only on hyphe exposed to the air; the latter on threads in the substance of the tuber; the conidiophores form a delicate white bloom on the surface of the diseased tubers. The Peronospora is undoubtedly the cause of the disease, but is accompanied by two other fungi, Heterosporium Colocasize n. sp. and Cephalosporium acremonium, parasitic on the preceding. New Disease in Vines.t—MM. L. Scribner and P. Viala describe a new fungus, Greeneria fuliginea, parasitic on vines. It has made its appearance in vineyards in the United States of America, and is found to attack the fruit just before it reaches maturity. A coloration is noticed which is rose-coloured in the white varieties of fruit, and reddish-brown in the dark varieties; this extends by concentric zones. The mycelium, which is very abundant in the berry, is whitish, and much branched and septated. The only reproductive bodies observed by the authors are peculiar ; their structure is intermediate between the pycnidia and conidio- phores. On account of the colour of the spores this fungus belongs to the Pheosporee. Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of Vicia Faba.§—Prof. H. Mar- shall Ward comes to the conclusion that the tubercles on the roots of Vicia Faba always contain a fungus, allied to the Ustilaginee, which enters the root by the root-hairs. The ultimate branches of the hyphe in the cells of the tubercle bud off gemmules, which are afterwards scattered in the soil. This process resembles the budding discovered by Brefeld in the Ustilaginee. By means of cultures and observations the author found that the infection from the soil is probably due to these minute gemmules acting as spores. Cohn's Cryptogamic Flora of Silesia (Fungi).||—In the second part of Herr J. Schreeter’s account of the fungi of Silesia, contributed to this work, we find the conclusion of the description of the Myxogastres. The Schizomycetes he divides into Coccobacteria, Eubacteria, and Des- mobacteria. Under Micrococcus he describes a new species (M. sordidus), and two under Streptococcus (8. lacteus and S.margaritaceus). From Fried- linder’s Pneumoniecoccus is founded the new genus Hyalococcus, with globular * SB. Gesell. Morphol. u. Physiol. Miinchen, 1887, pp. 43-4. See Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxiv. (1887) Rev. Bibl., p. 76. ¢ Journ. Linn. Soc. Loud.—Bot., xxiv. (1887) pp. 45-9 (1 pl. and 2 figs.). t~ Comptes Rendus, cy. (1887) pp. 473-4. § Proc. Roy Soc. Lond., xlii. (1887) p. 356. || Cohn, F., ‘Kryptogamen-Flora v. Schlesien, Bd. iii. Pilze; bearbeitet v. J. Schroeter. Lief. 2; Breslau, 1886. 1887. oe 1006 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO or elliptical cells, single or in pairs, rarely in rows of 4—6, inclosed in simple, (distant, sharply-defined capsules. Besides H. Pneumoniz, he regards Pleuro- coceus Beigelii as a second species. Of Sarcina three new species are described: S. paludosa in the water of sugar-factories, S. rosea in bogs, and S. lutea. Bacterium termo the author regards, not as a distinct species, but as the short-rod form of several filiform bacteria. Bacillus furnishes the following new species :—B. sanguineus from bogs, B. Lacmus in greenhouses, B. melleus on feces, B. pallidus, brunneus, corruscans, and melanosporus on potatoes, and B. fusisporus in the water from sugar-factories. Under Eubacteria a new genus (Cystobacter) is described, consisting of short rods imbedded in a gelatinous mass, afterwards connected into filaments. The gelatinous mass divides into irregular lumps, which are afterwards inclosed in solid horny envelopes. It comprises two species, C. fuscus on hare’s dung, and C. erectus. The Chytridiacei are divided into three families, the Olpidiacei, Rhizi- diacei, and Zygochytriacei. Belonging to the last is a new genus, Urophlyctis, in which the zoosporangia are seated on the living cells of the plant, and only the tufts of rhizoids remain imbedded in it; the resting sporangia are formed within the host by the conjugation of two similar cells. To this genus belongs Physoderma pulposa Wallr. Several new species are described, belonging to this family. The order Zygomycetes comprises the Mucorinei and Entomophthorei, the former being again divided into the Mucoracei, Chetocladiacei, and Piptocephalidei. The Mucoracei include the Mucorei (Mucor, Phycomyces, Sporodinia, Thamnidium), Pilobolei (Pilaira, Pilobolus), and Mortierellei (Herpocladium, n. gen., Mortierella). ‘The Cheetocladiacei comprise the single genus Chetocladium ; the Piptocephalidei the three genera, Pipto- cephalis, Syncephalis, and Syncephalastrum, n. gen. Under Entomophthorei are included Empusa, Entomophthora, Tarichium, Conidiobolus, and Basi- diobolus. The new genera are thus characterized.—Herpocladium :—The twining uniformly thick sporangiophores develope, at the apices of the uniformly thick lateral branches, globular sporangia without a columella. The only species (H. circinans) was found on hare’sdung. Syncephalastrum :—The capitulate sporangiophores, produced at the apices of branches, are densely covered with cylindrical sporangia, in which the spores are found in rows. The only species (S. racemosum) was found among Aspergillus Oryzx on rice and bread. The Oomycetes are divided into Ancylistacei (Myzocytium, Lagenidium), Peronosporacei (Pythium, Cystopus, Phytophthora, Sclerospora, Plasmopora, Bremia, Peronospora), and Saprolegniacei (Leptomitus, Saprolegnia, Achlya, Aphanomyces). Rabenhorst’s Cryptogamic Flora of Germany (Fungi).—Parts 27 and 28 of this work are now published, elaborated by Dr. G. Winter, whose services to the publication are now lost by his death. In Part 27 the review of the suborder Spheriaceze is completed with the genus Xylaria (twelve species) and its allies, and to itis appended a very useful clavis of the genera. This is followed by a description of the species belonging to the small suborder Dothideaces, completing the Pyrenomycetes. In Part 28 the Hysteriaceee are commenced with a general account of the order, with its families, Hysterinex, Hypodermiex, and Dichznacex (seventy-three species in all). This part finishes with a general description of the fourth order, Discomycetes, divided into the orders Pezizaceze and Helvellacex, and of the suborder Phacidiacee. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1007 Protophyta. Micro-organisms.*—In his work ‘ Die Mikroorganismen,’ Prof. M. C. Fluegge adopts the classification of de Bary and Frank, and passes in review all the pathogenic species of Hypodermii, Peronosporee, Pyrenomycetes, and Mucorini, as well as those of Schizomycetes. In the case of Aspergillus fumigatus and glaucus, he states that the spores, if injected in sufficient quantities into the veins of a rabbit or guinea-pig, rapidly cause death. If rabbits, pigeons, or other small birds are placed in an atmosphere holding Aspergillus spores in suspension, the bronchials and kidneys become rapidly filled with the mycelial filaments; and the same is the case with Hrysiphe and Oidium. With Grawitz, the author identifies Oidiwm lactis, Achorion Schenleinii, Trichophyton tonsurans, and Microsporon furfur as forms of the same species. The Schizomycetes are classified by Prof. Fluegge under four principal groups, viz.:—(1) Micrococcus (including Staphylococcus, Streptococcus, Diplococeus, Ascococcus, and Sarcina) ; (2) Bacillus (including Bacterium) ; (3) Spirillum ; and (4) a group allied to Nostocacex, comprising Leptothria, Crenothrix, and Beggiatoa. Each of the first two groups is again divided into pathogenic and saprophytic forms. The phenomena connected with gelatin culture are dwelt on in detail with each species. The author inclines to the view of Koch and Cohn with regard to the genetic distinction of the various forms, rather than to that of Zopf. Rose-tinted Growth on Fresh Water.{—Herr J. B. Schnetzler, confirm- ing the observation of Dr. Harz, describes a red substance floating on the surface of the Lac de Bret (Switzerland) due to the coccus-form of Beggiatoa roseo-persicina. In the same lake he found the dead bodies of flies attacked by the slender colourless leptothrix-filaments of the Beggiatoa, accompanied by its blackish zooglcea-form. From this latter the leptothrix was found to spring directly without any intermediate bacillus-form. Sulphur-bacteria.{—Herr 8. Winogradsky proposes this term for that group of non-chlorophyllous protophytes distinguished physiologically by the property of reducing sulphur out of its solutions. In this group he includes Beggiatoa alba and its varieties, Monas Okenii, M. vinosa, Clathro- cystis roseo-persicina, Sarcina sulphurata n. sp. (possibly identical with S. rosea), Ophidiomonas sanguinea, and probably others. His observations were made chiefly on Beggiatoa alba obtained from natural sulphur-springs. The author finds that the presence of sulphates, especially calcium sulphate, in the water, is not only advantageous, but is absolutely essential for the healthy growth of Beggiatoa ; but that, although, under such circum- stances, reduction of the sulphates and formation of sulphuretted hydrogen takes place, the Beggiatoa takes no part in this reduction; the source of the sulphur in its structure is invariably the oxidation of sulphuretted hydrogen already present in the water. He confirms Hoppe-Seyler’s state- ment that it cannot maintain its existence without access of free air. It appears, however, to require much less oxygen than most organisms; and where the supply of air is abundant it rapidly perishes. An excess of sulphuretted hydrogen also destroys it. By culture-experiments the author * Fluegge, M. C., ‘Die Mikroorganismen,’ 692 pp. and 144 figs., Leipzig, 1886. See Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxiv. (1887) Rey. Bibl., p. 77. ¢ Bot. Centralbl., xxxi. (1887) p. 219. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 787. { Bot. Ztg., xlv. (1887) pp. 489-507, 513-23, 529-39, 545-59, 569-76, 589-94, 606-10 (3 figs.). 3 U2 1008 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO determined that water containing calcium sulphate is not capable of sus- taining the life of Beggiatoa, unless the sulphuric acid is at the same time being reduced to the condition of H,S8. ' he granules of sulphur found in greater or less abundance in the filaments of Beggiatoa are not, as stated by Cohn, crystalline, but consist of amorphous masses of the pure element of a soft consistency. It is com- pletely soluble in carbon bisulphide. As soon as the filaments are dead the sulphur at once assumes the crystalline form, large crystals, formed from the contents of several cells, breaking through the cell-walls. With regard to the further chemical process which takes place in the filaments of Beggiatoa, Herr Winogradsky came to the conclusion that the sulphur is there subject toa process of oxidation, resulting in the production of sulphuric acid, which, passing into the surrounding water, forms sulphates with evolution of carbonic acid ; and this process goes on very energetically within the filaments. This is regarded by the author as a kind of respira- tion; though whether it altogether takes the place of the ordinary respira- tion, consisting in the oxidation of carbon compounds, he was unable to determine. This organism appears, at all events, to be able to exist in water which contains but a very small amount of organic matter. The entire removal of sulphur either entirely destroys its life, or possibly induces a resting condition. The source of the sulphuretted hydrogen in the water appears to be the reducing effect on soluble sulphates of the process described by Hoppe-Seyler as the “ fermentation” of cellulose. Micrococcus ochroleucus.*—Herr O. Prove finds in human urine a new chromogenous micrococcus, in colonies about 2 mm. in size, at first, and when light is excluded, colourless, but assuming, on exposure to light, a sulphur-yellow colour. ‘The pigment is entirely insoluble in water, but easily soluble in alcohol with a yellow colour. This Micrococcus ochroleucus n. Sp. is most easily cultivated on nutrient substances containing a consider- able quantity of albuminoids, and with a slightly alkaline or a neutral reaction; solid nutrient substances are more favourable than liquid. Carbohydrates alone hinder or prevent the formation of mucilage and of the pigment. Under all these conditions the coccus-form remains unchanged, though the size of the individual micrococci varies. The formation of colonies is to a high degree dependent on the nutriment. In all cases in which there is a considerable separation of mucilage, especially, therefore, when there is abundance of albuminoids, chains of from 8-12 micrococci are produced ; while in those cases where little or no mucilage is formed, or when supplied with carbohydrates only, or in certain saline solutions, the cocci are either isolated or are only associated in small numbers. In the former case it may be termed Streptococcus ochroleucus. 'The decompositions caused by the microbe vary according to the nutrient substance ; if this is rich in albuminoids, the products are strongly alkaline ; with carbohydrates or certain saline solutions they are, on the other hand, acid. For the production of the pigment abundance of nitrogen is required. A temperature of 386° C. is unfavourable to the vegetative development of the fungus; endogenous resting-spores are then produced, which germinate at 27°. Hard-boiled white of egg made slightly alkaline by dilute ammonia produced the most favourable results. The paper contains also a review of the other known yellow chromogenous microbes. Nitrification.t—Sigg. A. Celli and F. Marino-Zuco state that in the course of analyses of water from the subsoil of Rome, amongst other * Cohn’s Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanzen, v. (1887) pp. 409-40 (1 pl.). + Gazetta, xvii. pp. 99-103. See Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., 1887, Abstr., p. 858. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1009 organisms a micrococcus of globular form (Micrococcus cereus) was dis- covered ; this was found to be a very efficacious nitrifying agent. The authors quote experiments to prove that for the process of nitrification the presence of bacteria is not absolutely essential. Itis further shown that among the organisms which liquefy nutritive gelatin Bacillus saprogenus, B. fluidificans, and Micrococcus luteus, when thrown on to sand in cultivating liquids, not only do not produce nitrates, but even destroy them completely ; on the other hand, these same organisms, taken from potato-cultures, far from destroying the nitrates, are among the most active agents in producing them. New (Indigogenous) Microbe.*—M. E. Alvarez reminds us that the indigo of commerce is obtained by the maceration of the leaves of Indigo- fera, which contains a glucoside which is soluble in water; the solution is allowed to be exposed to the air. He finds from the experiments he has made, that indigo is a fermentation-product, and that this fermentation is caused by a special microbe, which is rod-shaped and much resembles the microbes of pneumonia and rhinoscleroma. These latter also produce the indigo-fermentation, while the indigogenous bacterium has pathogenetic properties, causing either a temporary local inflammation, or death with congestions and fibrous exudations; the parts especially affected are the genito-urinary organs. Certain Properties of Phosphorescent Bacteria.t—Prof. J. Forster, in conjunction with Dr. C. B. Tilanus, has made pure cultivations of bacteria which produce phosphorescence, and found that these micro-organisms have special properties. By Koch’s plate method those bacteria which under the Microscope appear as short thick rods, are easily cultivated if the gelatin contains 2-8 per cent. of salt. Bacteria obtained pure (bacilli) which do not liquefy gelatin, live and multiply in neutral or slightly alkaline nutritive media, even if very dilute, provided the necessary quantity of salt be present. In a gelatin made from fish they grew well with 6 per cent. of salt, while 7 per cent. decreased, and a still higher percentage altogether stopped their multiplication. On the other hand, an admixture with distilled water soon killed the bacilli, so that a weak salt solution was compulsory when a gelatin culture was placed on a cover-glass. Pure cultivations of these bacteria, so long as atmospheric air is present, emit light in proportion to the size and age of the colonies, so that a plate- cultivation looks like the sky on a starry night. Plate or tube cultivations may be photographed in a perfectly dark room and a very clear picture obtained of the colonies. Although the light emitted even from large colonies is not strong, it is strong enough to suffice for a microspectro- metric examination. Observed in the dark with the Zeiss-Abbe micro- spectrum ocular and 3 Leitz upper lens with a slit 1/3 mm., it was seen that a colony 1 mm. in diameter gave an apparently continuous spectrum between A 0:°58-0°438, the brightness of which was greatest between 0:48-0:51, and diminishing more quickly towards the red end than towards the violet. The spectrum of a weak galvanic incandescent light of about the same intensity was brightest at \ 0°60, while at 0°50 no light was perceptible, so that the slight extension of the bacterial spectrum towards red and violet is dependent on the feebleness of the light of the spectrum. Colour differences in the spectrum are not recognizable, and * Comptes Rendus, ev. (1887) pp. 286-9. + Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., ii. (1887) pp. 337-40. 1010 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO examined without the prism the phosphorescent colonies seem greenish, or even greenish blue. Transmitted light is absorbed by the colonies, although absorption- bands are to be perceived. Examined with Zeiss objective A, microspectro- photometer, comparing prism, two Engelmann incandescent lamps, three large Groves, both spectra with a slit of s = s, = 20 (wherefore 1 = 0-01) were approximately equal, and gradations of light were found which on interposing the colony required for given wave-lengths the following decrease in the slit of the comparing prism :—— ; A = 0°66, 0°63, 0:60, 0°57, 0°54, 0-51, 0°48, 0-45. s, = 12-1, 12-4, 12-0, 10-8, 9-9, 94, 7°7, 6-3. By multiplying the numbers found for s, by 5, the per cent. equivalent of the absorption is obtained. These micro-organisms moreover show a vital phenomenon in which they differ from other phosphorescent bacteria. Pure cultivations in salinated gelatin, bouillon, potato, &c., emit light equally well at tempera- tures from 0°-20° C., but cease to give off light at from 32°. So far these properties agree approximately with the results of Pfliiger, but if these bacilli be kept at 35°-37° C. for some hours, their vitality is so im- paired that inoculation from colonies thus treated can no longer be repro- duced in a nutritive medium previously found quite suitable. Yet they will grow almost equally well in a refrigerator, and even if the test-tube be surrounded by finely-powdered ice and then placed in the refrigerator, that is to say, at a temperature of 0° C. MICROSCOPY. a Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (1) Stands. Schulze’s Aquarium Microscope.—Prof. EH. Schulze has designed and Messrs. Klénne and Miller have made the Microscope shown in fig. 235, for the observation of small aquatic organisms in an aquarium specially constructed for the purpose. There are three parts,—(1) the stand, the greater part of which is nickel-plated; (2) the aquarium; (3) the illuminating mirror. The stand consists essentially of a Microscope-tube which is supported in a horizontal position upon a tripod in such a way that it can be moved in three different directions by rack-and-pinion. ‘The column of the tripod carries a rack-and-pinion by which the tube is moved vertically. On the tube which carries the rack is a sliding-piece with a second rack for the horizontal movement from right to left; upon this slide the Microscope is fixed in a horizontal position and can be moved backwards and forwards in a tube provided with rack-and-pinion. There are therefore three move- ments, vertical, horizontal-lateral, and horizontal-sagittal, so that the organism observed can be followed by the tube as it moves upon the glass wall of the aquarium. * This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Dlumi- nating and other Apparatus; (4) Photo-micrography; (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1011 The aquarium consists of a stand with a frame which carries the aquarium proper, 10 cm. in breadth and height, and 10 mm. in thickness ; this may be replaced by others. The frame is made of brass lacquered black. The aquarium itself consists of a horseshoe-shaped piece of glass, both sides of which are closed by plates of cover-glass leaving the upper end open. It is thus possible to observe an organism upon either of the Fig. 235. i (dla m Ia | P17 / i ul N a ae ST two thin sides with an objective giving a linear amplification of 200-300. To screen off the superfluous light and the numerous reflections in the aquarium, the frame carries a diaphragm arrangement which can be applied on either side at pleasure. This consists of a sliding-plate which moves in two horizontal guides; it is divided into three parts, and has an oblong opening in one of the divisions. In this opening a thin plate slides and can be clamped at any point. In this plate again is a circular aperture, which can be closed to a greater or less extent by various diaphragms kept in position by a small spring. If an animal is on the upper left-hand corner of the side turned towards the Microscope, the sliding-plate is first moved so that the vertical longitudinal opening lies in the left-hand third, the small plate is then set so that its opening lies in the upper third. If, on the other hand, the animal is on the right-hand side, the larger sliding-plate is moved so that the longitudinal opening lies on the right, and if the animal is towards the bottom, the small slide with its opening is moved downwards. The two sliding-plates are now so directed that light may be thrown by the mirror through the aquarium and upon the animal on the front side. The aperture can be further reduced by diaphragms. The mirror is concave, 10 cm. in diameter, and fixed upon its stand with a ball-and-socket joint so that it can be adjusted in any position. 1012 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Giles’s Army Medical Microscope.— Mr. G. M. Giles, Surgeon- Naturalist, Indian Marine Survey, writes, that “to the military surgeon, or explorer, who has to carry a Microscope with him, bulk and weight are considerations of the first importance. Even in peace time the former is so often on the move, that he early learns to dispense, as far as possible, with bulky and heavy articles.” Hence he was “anxious to devise an instrument which while it should pack into a moderate-sized box, should not be open to the objections of some of the existing forms, and in fact should be applicable to all the work of the military surgeon in station as well as in camp life.” This is shown in fig. 236. “The great obstacle in the way of making a sufficiently portable stand is that, in all previous patterns, the stage is permanently fixed to the body, and so has to be limited in size in order not to unduly increase the cross measurement of the box. This difficulty has been met by making the stage and foot in one piece, arranged so as to fold up flat, for packing (fig. 237), the body and pillar being keyed on to the stage and fixed in position by the arm carrying the mirror being used as a nut. When set up, the instrument is about 9 in. high, and the stage measures 2°5 in. by 2°2 in., and is quite adequate to all ordinary pathological work. When folded up, it packs, including the centering substage described below, into a strong box 5°8 in. by 3°2 in. by 2°75 in. outside measurement. By making the box a little longer (7 inches) an extra objective, double nose-piece, and polariscope can be carried in addition, the last-mentioned piece of apparatus being a special desideratum to the geological explorer. Every microscopist knows how much definition is improved by the use of the German form of diaphragm, the aperture of which is level with the stage, and does not markedly exceed the field of the objective. Ina portable instrument, these can hardly be used except in a centering substage, of which I have devised a very simple and inexpensive form for the purposes of this instrument. It consists of a short, stout brass tube, screwing into the opening in the stage. The tube carrying the diaphragms, polarizer, condenser, &c., is provided with a double collar, and is supported within the larger tube by means of three screws. One of these has a thread only at 1ts point where it screws into the inner tube, its shaft working freely in a hole in the outer. Between the two tubes it pierces a small piece of solid ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1013 rubber which acts as a spring. The other two screws are provided with milled heads, and work in holes tapped in the outer tube, their points alone being free from thread, and made to fit exactly into the slot of the double Fic. 237. gi aa © Ae Cc : : 6 a Elevation of stage and foot when folded. a, transverse limb of foot ; b, antero-posterior ditto; ¢, pillar; d, stage. collar, which they press against the resistance of the rubber spring. The second objective is carried within the tube of the Microscope, screwing for packing on to the upper side of an adapter. This also serves to carry the analyser when the polariscope is in use.” Nelson’s Portable Microscope.—Mr. E. M. Nelson exhibited at the November meeting of the Society a new portable Microscope (figs. 238 and 239), made by Messrs. Powell & Lealand from his drawings. Fic. 238. Mi SAN TCC The instrument is adapted for three different modes of use, viz. :—(1) As a small table Microscope for home use (a very useful adjunct to a large instrument) ; (2) as a portable Microscope for the exhibition of objects at 1014 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Societies, &c. (fig. 238); (3) as a field Microscope and class demonstration instrument (fig. 239). The instrument has two objectives, a 4/10 in. and a 1 in., which, with two eye-pieces, give the following powers :—35, 70, 100, 200. The 4/10 is of 0°65 N.A. The highest power, therefore, is equivalent to a 1/2 in. of Fig. 239. 80° with a C eye-piece, or a 1/4 of 80° with an A eye-piece, on an ordinary full-sized English Microscope. The lowest eye-piece is on the Abbe compensating principle. In the mechanical portion of the instrument are several new features. The design of the Microscope is that which is generally known as the bar movement. It has a rack-and-pinion coarse-adjustment, and no fine-adjust- ment, thereby following the dictum of the great master (the late Hugh Powell), who said, “In an elementary Microscope a good coarse-adjustment without any fine is better than one with a second-rate fine and no coarse- adjustment.” The truth of this statement is daily verified in the shaky condition of the fine-adjustments of students’ Microscopes which are fitted with a direct-acting screw fine-adjustment and a sliding-tube coarse-adjust- ment. The body of the Microscope is 3 inches long. ‘he stage is of Mr. Nelson’s horseshoe pattern, and the spring clips are those of Hugh Powell. Although strongly opposed to all kinds of clips, Mr. Nelson found they were necessary in this instance to permit of the complete inversion of the instrument. The great difference between these clips and those of the usual form is that these being fixed underneath the stage, allow a smoothness of action to the slip which is totally foreign to the others. To the underneath side of the stage is fixed the substage which carries an achromatic condenser, focusing by. means of a sliding-tube. The stage and substage rotate on an axis, so that they may be turned into the plane of the trunk for packing. There is a plane mirror mounted on a crank arm. The foot is circular, rests on three points, and has an upright rod capable of extension like a ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1015 bull’s-eye stand. On the top of the upright there is a short horizontal arm, to which the Microscope is attached. For portable and exhibition purposes the instrument fits on to the Microscope lamp-stand, the same apparatus being used to attach it asin the first case (fig. 238). When the Microscope is required for field or class purposes this attaching piece is taken off, and is replaced by a handle (fig. 239). The handle and the attaching piece are so arranged that the Microscope cannot shake loose or twist off, or get off the square. When the instrument is used in the field, the mirror is swung to one side, and the condenser is pointed to the sky. Woodhead’s Microscope with large Stage.—This Microscope, devised by Dr. Woodhead and made by Mr. H. Crouch, has a stage of unusually large size, 113 by 9% in., for the examination of sections through entire organs. Selenka’s Electric Projection-Lamp for Microscopic Purposes.*— Prof. E. Selenka describes a Projection-Microscope constructed for him by Herren Reiniger, Gebbert, and Schall, of Erlangen, “‘ which, by its practical and convenient construction, fulfils its purpose in a remarkable manner.” He describes the apparatus fully “in the expectation that it will soon be more largely used; for thousands of microscopic objects can in this way be used without difficulty for demonstration, and although there is no question that the ordinary diagrams and lithographs have done, and will do good service, yet the impression made by the exhibition of the object ‘itself is much more vivid and permanent than that produced by a representation.” To show what objects are of value for demonstration in zoological lectures, for a large circle of students, the author states that at a distance of 5 metres from the screen the contractile vacuoles and the so-called streaming of granules in living Amebez are clearly visible, as are also the ciliary movements and ingestion of food by Infusoria. “In stained calcareous sponges the flagellated chambers and spicules may be shown, as may also the cellular structure of the arms of hydroid polyps, and the entire sexual apparatus in the proglottides of tape-worms. Trichinz, Echino- rhynchi, Trematodes, worm-larve, small Annelids mounted in balsam, Rotatoria, and Copepoda in the living condition give incomparable images, as also the larve of Echinoderms and Molluscs, Sections of the embryos of vertebrates stained with carmine or hematoxylin make excellent objects to show the development of the vertebre, heart, nerve-fibres, sense-organs, amnion, allantois, and urogenital system. I can show without any difficulty the cleavage of the egg, gastrulation, rudiments of the ccelom, and even the formation of yolk-rays in the segmenting ovum, and the filamentar loops in the dividing nucleus. Charming images are given by the membrane between the digits of the foot of the living frog or the gills of the Salamander larva, the trachez of the flea or the louse, &e. And how quickly and simply is the demonstration effected! In those lectures in which I intend to project microscopic objects, the discourse proceeds without interruption, and the last five to ten minutes are used for the demonstration. At a given signal the projection-lamp is put into action, and then all that is required is the complete darkening of the auditorium. This is rapidly and easily effected by lowering canvas blinds covered on both sides with a thick coating of oil-paint of any desired colour. The blinds are raised and lowered by means of a winch; the demonstration is made without any assistance. The light is obtained from a dynamo machine driven by an engine of * SB. Physikal.-Med. Soc. Erlangen, 1887, Heft 19, 8 pp. (1 fig.). 1016 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO two horse-power, and supplying an arc light of about 1200 candle-power. This is sufficient for a linear amplification of 1000; but for oil-immersion or for high-power dry systems an illuminator is required. An achromatic condenser has accordingly been designed by Prof. Abbe, as the ordinary chromatic Abbe condenser cannot be used for the purpose. The bright- ness of the image is increased to an extraordinary extent by the achromatic Abbe condenser, and, so far as I can estimate, is nearly equal to that which, without this system of lenses, would only be attained by an are light of 2500 candle-power. Since the condenser is only used with the higher powers, it requires a simple adjustment by which it can be removed. ‘The brightness of the image can, of course, be considerably increased by using a more powerful source of light. The construction of the lamp (fig. 240) has been left entirely to the Hic. 240. SN —= SSSSSSSSSSSMASSSSSSS SS aroma kY aa ai i ZZZIZZIEE,(g/ EDITED EEE TTT WU TTT TT TTT TTT TT mechanician. A is a rectangular plate of cast iron into which the cylin- drical iron rod B is set, and fixed by two iron stays. At the height of the table is a shelf © for the objects not in use. Above the shelf are the two iron ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1017 tube-pieces which slide upon the rod B and are clamped by the screws O, and O,; the lower and shorter of these tubes D carries on the horizontal ribbed arm F, the plate G with the condensers H, and H,, and also the plate J with the Microscope K. To the upper and longer tube E is fixed the light-chamber L with the arc-lamp M screwed to its upper side. The light used is that known as the Piette-Krizik lamp which, on account of its accuracy of regulation, has been very largely used, and for this very reason has been better tested than many other systems, and which, in spite of its excellent construction, is moderate in price. Since, however, with the best regulated lamps the point of light after long use is invariably shifted slightly upwards or downwards, the piece which carries the lamp and the light-chamber is made to slide up and down the fixed part which supports the condensers and the Microscope, so as to bring the point of light back into the axis of the condensers. This movement is effected by means of a nut N which works between the parts D and E upon the screw-thread of D, so as to raise or lower the light-chamber L and the lamp M, and bring the point of light X to any desired height. A rotation of E with the light-chamber is rendered impossible by bringing the plate G close against the front side of L and making it fit in grooves upon the front of the light-chamber, so that the two parts can only move upon one another in a vertical direction and keep the source of light completely inclosed. The light-chamber is made of strong oak, and to the top is screwed the lamp from which the two iron rods which carry the carbons project into the chamber. In the top are also, besides the aperture for the carbon- holders, several ventilating holes to carry off the hot air; these holes are covered with tin caps to screen the light. The left side of the chamber is entirely closed, while the right side is provided with a door to allow the insertion of new carbons, &c. In the centre of the door isa circular hole closed with dark glass through which to observe the glowing carbon points. At the bottom of the chamber is a circular opening through which the shelf for the objects is illuminated, and which serves for ventilation ; above the opening is a dark glass to moderate the light and to catch the ash which falls from the carbons. The front side of the chamber has an aperture into which the condenser- holder projects. This aperture is made large enough to allow free play for the chamber; the source of light being brought into the axis of the con- densers, as was said above, by a motion of the chamber. In the axis of the lenses H, and H,, is the Microscope K, supported on the plate J which is attached to G. For the lenses I use the ordinary horseshoe stand with the following alterations: (1) the upper piece for rotating the Microscope is unscrewed from the foot, turned through 180°, and fixed again to the foot so that the stage is not over the horseshoe, but projects behind it; the horizontal Microscope can then be brought as near as is required to the large con- densing lens H,, which with low powers is necessary to secure a colourless image. (2) Instead of the small thick stage, a large plate O with diaphragm U and two clips is used ; (3) in place of the tube moved with rack and pinion, there is an arm P, moved in the same way and carrying the nose-piece Q, which allows arapid change of objectives. A metallic screen R, of 15 cm. diameter, serves to arrest the rays which pass beside the objective ; this is placed immediately behind the nose-piece. With high powers the object must be brought near to the focus of the condensers, while with low powers it must be moved beyond the focus and 1018 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO brought nearer to the condenser. This movement is effected by a sliding motion of the stand K between two wooden guides, by means of rackwork. Between the two condensing lenses it is necessary to insert a glass trough 8, with plane sides filled with concentrated alum solution, to prevent the over-heating of the object. Thick or dark-coloured objects are very easily over-heated ; an energetic and invariably sufficient means of cooling is obtained by a current of air directed upon the surface of the object or upon the cover-glass. Compressed air is obtained from a loaded india- rubber bag (above A). The delivery tube is of brass, with an aperture of 1/2-1 mm., and is fixed to the stand at an angle of 45° on the under side of the objective; the distance of the aperture from the cover-glass being about 1 to 14 em. The coarse-adjustment is effected by the rackwork on P, the fine- adjustment by the micrometer-screw T. The objects are held by one or two of the usual clips against the vertical stage. The nearer the lamp is to the white paper screen, the brighter will be the images, but the less the amplification. After several trials a distance of 5 metres between the object and the screen has proved the most con- venient. By using a stronger source of light, this distance may easily be increased to 6-10 metres. To bring the projected image as near as possible to my audience, I place the electric lamp in the middle of the amphitheatre, and the screen in front of the first row of seats, an open passage being left between the lamp and screen. There is no objection to the image being seen obliquely fore- shortened by those of the audience who are at the sides; it scarcely loses in clearness thereby. White paper does not give nearly such bright and clear images as a plaster surface. This is made by bending an iron band into a circular or rectangular form, making a network of wire across it, and placing the whole upon a glass plate which has been rubbed over with powdered talc. Alabaster plaster is poured upon the network, and when it is cool the whole mass is lifted off. The projection plate should have a diameter of 1:2 to 2 metres. Trials with transparent screens, such as oil paper, tracing paper, or ground glass plates gave unsatisfactory results. After numerous experiments it has been found that the finest images are given by those objectives which have been made for a long tube, especially the so-called photographic objectives. It is not advisable to make use of an eye-piece for projection purposes. To cut off all extraneous light, it is a good plan to place over the condensing lens H, and the alum trough §, a light cardboard case which is prolonged into a cardboard tube towards the stage of the Microscope in the direction of the beam of light. Finally it may be mentioned that it is possible to use a horizontal stage. The beam of light is then reflected upwards by the ordinary plane mirror, and again deflected into a horizontal direction by a prism of flint glass, which rests against the upper nose-piece aperture. Of the objectives which I have employed, the following give the best defined images :—Hartnack, objectives 1 and 2; Seibert, 1 in., 1/2 in., and 1/4 in. photographic objectives; Winkel, objective 7; as well as water- and oil-immersion objectives of various makers. Absolutely colourless images of extraordinary clearness are given by the combination of the new Zeiss apochromatic objectives with the correspond- ing ‘ projection-eye-pieces. Though this combination is unrivalled for photographic purposes, it is not convenient for demonstration, since the image is too faint and of too limited dimensions.” The whole apparatus is supplied in this country by Mr. K. Schall, of ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1019 55, Wigmore Street, W. It was exhibited at the meeting of the Medical Congress at Dublin in August, where it was reported * to have “ proved itself infinitely superior to the oxyhydrogen limelight as a means of class demonstration.” At the Hygienic Congress in Vienna, Prof. 8. Stricker also gave demon- strations with the electric Microscope, which, it is claimed, conclusively prove the value of this new method of medical teaching. Among other things, Prof. Stricker exhibited photographs by transmitted light, with 1400 linear amplification, and a section through the spinal marrow of an adult man, in which the ramifications and crossings of the nerves could be most clearly seen. A demonstration was also made with incident light and an amplification of 72,000 times, the object being the exposed pulsating heart of a turtle. “The whole action of the heart could be followed in the most surprising manner, the flow of blood to the great aorta could be observed, and an insight obtained into the inner life to an extent which is seldom realized by experienced students of hygiene.” Leach’s Lantern Microscope.}—At the Soirée of the Manchester Micro- scopical Society, on the 29th January, 1887, Mr. W. Leach exhibited a Lantern Microscope, attached to a photographic camera, the bellows body of which opened out to thirty-six inches. With a 4/10 in. objective, images were shown upon the screen magnified eighty diameters, and “ were seen well defined, brilliantly and equally lighted, without covering being placed over the camera, notwithstanding the gaslights overhead and all around the room. The field was noted for being as even as a sheet of writing-paper. When the lantern door was opened much astonishment was expressed, when it was seen that all this illuminaticn was obtained from a small paraffin lamp burning with a single half-inch wick.” The author in his paper describes his experiments and results as follows :— “Tt is some eight or ten years since I felt dissatisfied with the results which I was then able to obtain with the ordinary lantern arrangements for projecting microscopic objects upon the screen, and began to make experi- ments with the aim of getting more successful illumination. The amount of light transmitted through the bi-lens lantern condenser being in the inverse ratio of the square of the distance between it and the luminant, I tried to shorten the space by the well-known device, first introduced by the Rev. W. T. Kingsley about 1855, of adding a third lens to the other two, and thus shortening the compound focus. But this I soon found was, without further addition, of no use whatever, as the cone of rays at its apex was so large, or the light passed through it at so great an angle, that it was impossible to transmit it through both the object and the objective. Thus the beam of light, however strong it might be at the focus of the condenser, did not reach the screen, and therefore served no purpose except that of boiling the object in the balsam used in mounting it. I next placed another lens in the cone of rays a little beyond the focus, and hoped by this means to so lessen its diameter as to make it capable of transmission. This was a sort of substage arrangement, and was found to be a great improvement when the lens was of the right focus for the objective, and was situated at the right distance from both it and the object. To be able to thus place it at the right distance from both, meant having a substage lens for all objectives differing widely in power, the focus of each being such as the power and construction of the others might require. Brit. Med. Journ., 1887, Aug. 27, p. 470. Central-Ztg. f. Opt. u. Mech., viii. (1887) p. 250. Brit. Journ. of Phot., xxxiv, (1887) pp. 153-4. tt + & 1020 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Rack-and-pinion movement was also found to be necessary, so that the rays might be properly focused on either side of the object. The lenses used should be large enough to take in the whole cone of the principal condenser, and for the higher powers it is requisite to combine two or three of them together. The highest as well as the lowest powers may thus be made useful for lantern projections. Mr. Kingsley stated in his paper upon this subject at the time I have just named that he could transmit as much light through the higher as through any of the lower powers, and gave diagrams of the arrangement which he made use of. So much for the past; now we come to the present. The objectives which I shall use this evening are 2 in., 1 in., and 4/10 in. The 2 in. requires the substage lens to be a little over 2 in. focus, 12 in. diameter, plano-convex. A similar kind of lens, 1? in. focus, proves in my hands to be a good all-round condenser for all powers from 13 in. up to 4/10 in. objectives. By liberal use of the rack-and-pinion and of the concave lens to be presently described, this substage lens gives the most brilliant results throughout this wide range of powers. The 1/4 in. objective, when it is desirable to use it for photographic purposes, requires two lenses ; the back one to be 24 in. focus and 13 in. diameter, and the front one 1} in. focus and 1 in. diameter, both plano-convex. ‘This also makes a good condenser for the 4/10 in. objective. All the lenses must have the curved surfaces turned towards the lantern. The luminant goes to within 13 in. of the back lens of the principal condenser with the 2 in., and to within 2 in. with the other two objectives. I have tried it closer than this, by using a back lens of shorter focus, without advantage—in fact, considerably other- wise. Ifa flint concave lens is placed in the cone of rays about one or two inches before the really active ones begin to cross, the light is much improved. The concave which I use is about 6 in. focus and 1? in. diameter. It is so placed in the tube which carries the other substage lenses that its distance from the principal condenser can be altered so as to modify the length of the cone of rays to adapt the focus of the other lenses to the objective when they do not exactly meet its requirements. The concave lens was, I believe, first introduced into the lantern cone of rays by J. T. Taylor in 1866, for the purpose of parallelizing them, but I do not use it for any such purpose in this lantern Microscope. In my lantern polariscope I imitate Taylor in the use of the concave, but here the purpose served is quite a different one. My lantern condenser is 3? in. diameter, with a plano-convex 34 in. diameter and 7 in. focus, mounted upon the back of the tube which carries the other lenses. In lantern Microscope projection three things are essential. The first is brilliant illumination, the second large amplification, and the third clear display of detail. But brilliant illumination does not mean a dazzling display of light upon a large white screen, showing a dark, patchy outline of an object, without detail. Objects shown in this way are far inferior to an enlarged woodcut. The light must be made to enter the object so as to bring its structure out to the eye of the onlooker. But no amount of light will do this if its dimensions are too small ‘for the crystalline lens to form an image of it upon the retina. With high-power objectives the light must, in the nature of things, be greatly subdued. Still, a large image, mode- rately but properly lighted, can be far better seen than a small one many times as bright. An object may in fact be too bright to be seen. If rays of great angle are too powerfully converged upon it the image becomes as bright as that part of the screen which represents nothing but bare glass. It is in this case just like an over-exposed photograph, fiat and without contrast. The image may, therefore, be too bright for the screen, just as it ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1021 may be too black for it, and what we have to aim at is that mean which will show the detail in one without making the other too glaring. Having made our arrangements according to what is here advanced, we ought to be able to show the various minute organs of insects and the details of vegetable and animal tissue. JI have shown very finely the blowfly’s tongue over sixteen feet long, and the male flea with its outstretched legs twelve feet long. Sections of spine of Echinus may be magnified to seven or twelve feet diameter, and sections of a rat’s tail eight feet diameter. Mites in cheese with such powers become large as guinea-pigs, and Volvox globator gracefully rolling over a sixteen-feet screen are larger than tennis-balls. The cornea of the Dytiscus is a most wonderful object when shown eight to ten feet in diameter. When I say that such things can be shown in such enormous sizes, you must not suppose that the display will be like an outline map, black and skeleton-like in appearance upon a white ground. Instead of that the small capillary blood-vessels in anatomical sections, the various appendages of the feet of insects, the hairs of plants, the rings of insect trachex, the eyes of insects with the light gleaming through each facet of the cornea, with other equally minute details, can be displayed to an audience with very great satisfaction. That, you must admit, far surpasses anything ever achieved by the old lantern Microscope, and we boldly challenge any admirer of the old method to show that he is not now left as far behind by the new one as the old stage-coach is left behind by the railway train. I think I ought to say that my lantern Microscope has been made by myself. All its details have been worked out by myself. I have, of course, utilized any old photographic lens mount, or old Microscope fittings which I could get to work up into my arrangement, so as to save mechanical labour. It fits, as you will see, into the ordinary lantern front. The alum trough goes into the place which holds the slider when the lantern is used for ordinary pictures. The stage is one of Dancer’s old lantern Microscope stages, but is modified so as to hold and enable me to change the substage condensers, which can be done more easily and with less loss of time through mine than it can be done through any other arrangement. The compactness of the instrument is also something worth considering. Since the foregoing pages were written I have fitted up a l-inch objective which is very satisfactory. It transmits a large beam of light, and gives a flat field of great size, the central and marginal definition being fairly good at the same time. Asa rule the best ordinary objectives give no definition beyond a small circle in the middle of the field.” Newton’s Electric Polarizing Projection-Microscope.—This instru- ment, constructed for the Science and Art Department, South Kensington, by Messrs. Newton and Co., and exhibited at the Conversazione in November, is of similar construction (with only necessary modifications) to the oxynydrogen projection Microscope which was described by Mr. L. Wright in this Journal, 1885, p. 196. It will give govud results with im- mersion lenses up to 6000 diameters and upwards; the magnification possible depending chiefly upon the opacity of detail necessary for a large screen image. In addition to the usual polarizing effects it is fitted with lenses for exhibiting the brushes and coloured fringes in crystals, and also for use with the oxyhydrogen jet. Lehrke’s Lens-holder.*—Herr J. Lehrke’s arrangement (fig. 241) consists of a cylindrical metal- or horn-mounted lens, 2-4 cm. long, and * Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenk., vii. (1887) pp. 218-9 (4 figs.). 1887. 3 x 1022 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 2-43 em. in diameter, and magnifying from 1-2 times, whose side is provided with a contrivance for holding a copying needle, a protractor, &c. While hitherto the architect, in using millimetre paper, must hold separately in his hands a magnifying glass and needle, while the engraver holds the engraving tool inclined in one hand and the magnifying glass in the other, or must work under a large lens standing on three feet, it is now possible, by a firm connection between the lens and needle or other Fic. 241. instrument, to draw directly with one hand, and under the lens. One of these lenses is shown in section at A, the glass is set obliquely, the needle a being in the focus. The stud s, projecting a little near the glass, is for the purpose of preventing the instrument from leaving the position coinciding with the plane of the drawing. For architects and engineers is provided a small compass b (about 2 em.), for laying off parallel divisions, for making smaller scales, and the like. In these cases it is substituted for the needle. In like manner, for reading parallel divisions, for estimating areas, or revising maps, a finely divided, prismatic, ivory rule ¢ can be placed under the glass B. Im this case the plane of the lens must be perpendicular to the axis of the tube. For draughts- men a parallel drawing-pen, something like b, is used, which gives several lines at once, perfectly parallel and close together ; or a drawing-pen with which the smallest names, such as boundary stones and figures, can be made neatly and exactly. Thus a whole series of instruments can be used with the lens. For instance, a naturalist can use with it a knife or other instrument. HENNEGUY.—Sur un nouveau Microscope de voyage construit par Dumaige.. (On a new travelling Microscope made by Dumaige.) CR. Soc. Biol., LV. (1887) No. 7. Linnzus’s Microscope. i [At the Pittsburg meeting of the American Society of Microscopists, “‘a_very curious Microscope, once the property of Linnzeus, was described by C. C. Mellor,” President of the Iron City Microscopical Society.] Wicroscope, V11. (1887) p. 271. (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Thickness of cover-glass for which unadjustable objectives are cor- rected.*— Prof. S. H. Gage communicated to the Pittsburg Meeting of the American Society of Microseopists the following paper :—‘ As the thick- * Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 292-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1023 ness of the cover-glass as well as the tube-length has an important in- fluence on the perfection of the microscopic image, and as almost all objects for microscopic examination are covered, the objective must be adjustable to compensate for the various thicknesses of cover-glasses used, or some uniform thickness of cover-glass must be selected, for which the optician corrects or adjusts the objective once for all. The thickness for which such unadjustable objectives are adjusted varies with the different opticians, as shown in the table below. The information in the table was obtained by direct inquiry as for the information concerning ‘ tube-length’ hereinafter mentioned.’ * Tas eE showing the Thickness of Cover-glass for which unadjustable objectives are corrected by various Opticians. _J. Green, Brooklyn. | J. Grunow, New York. 0°25 mm. < Powell & Lealand, London. H. R. Spencer & Co., Geneva, New York. : W. Wales, New York. 0-18 mm. Klénne & Miiller, Berlin. - 0-17 sa E. Leitz, Wetzlar (when tube 160-170 mm.) 0-16-25 ,, Ross & Co., London. 0-16 a Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., Rochester. 0-15-20 , (16 mm. apochromatic oil-immersions), C. Zeiss, Jena. 0°15-18 ,, C. Reichert, Vienna. Gundlach Optical Co., Rochester. 0-15 s W. & H. Seibert, Wetzlar. R. & J. Beck, London. 0-12-17 ,, J. Zentmayer, Philadelphia. : Nachet et Fils, Paris. a Bezu, Hausser et Cie, Paris. 0-1 rs Swift & Son, London. A uniform thickness of cover-glass for unadjustable objectives seems also desirable; then by the use of some cover-glass measure, like the one made by Zeiss, the microscopist could select covers of the proper thickness to be used for the specimens to be studied with unadjustable objectives.” Objectives. [‘“ An optical firm offers for sale ‘ homogenerous’ immersion objectives.” ] Queen’s Mier. Bull., [V. (1887) p. 39. PELLETAN, J.—Les Objectifs. (Objectives.) Journ. de Microgr., X1. (1887) pp. 446-8, 476-81 (in part). Ross, W. A.—New Optical Substance for Objectives of Microscopes, &c. [* A transparent substance (it is not glass, for no alkali is employed in its manu- facture)” having “a hardness and specific gravity equal to that of emerald, whilst its refractive index is obviously very high.” And reply by F. H. Wenham that he has “ seceded from the ranks of the ‘ Diatomaniacs,’ and ceased to take any interest in dots and strie, and it is not probable that I shall ever again work at the Microscope or its appliances.’”] Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1887) pp. 278 and 301. Scuttze, A—On Abbe’s Apochromatic Micro-objectives and Compensating Eye-pieces, made of the new optical glasses in the works of Dr. Carl Zeiss in Jena, with some _ general remarks on object-glasses, Proc. Phil. Soc. Glasgow, X VIII. (1887) pp. 28-40. * Cf. infra, p. 1029. 3x2 1024 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Borden’s Electrical Constant-temperature Apparatus.*—Referring to this apparatus described ante, p. 810, Dr. W. C. Borden writes that, owing to some mistake, the latter part of the description of the regulating thermometer was not clear. After describing the regulating thermometer made from a glass tube and small vial, and filled with 95 per cent. alcohol and mercury, which will keep the temperature within one-half a degree, it was intended to say that a simpler one, which will keep the temperature within two degrees, can be Fig. 242. made by simply blowing a bulb on a glass tube and filling the bulb and a portion of the tube with mercury alone. Frog-holder. | — Mr. W. Fearnley describes the frog- -holder, fig. 242, which he re- commends, as enabling the frog to be placed “in a com- fortable position.” It consists of a piece of cardboard 13 x 8 em., bent at right angles across its larger axis, the angle being main- tained by two copper rectangu- lar straps riveted to the card- board. A rectangular piece is cut out of the middle of the horizontal halt and a glass slip put in between the cardboard and the copper straps. Two slits in the upright half, 1 cm. apart, admit a length (12 cm.) of broad tape. “The frog sits quietly for half an hour at a time upon this contrivance with or without whiffs of chloroform.” Macer’s Insect-holder.—This (fig. 243) has been designed by Mr. R. Macer for showing the head, eyes, proboscis, &c., of insects in their living state, with their mode of taking food. : The cones are made of pieces of writing-paper gummed together, and left to dry. Some small discs about 5/16 in. in diameter are cut, and a hole made in the centre with a No. 3 or 4 saddler’s punch. These are blacked and gummed on the cone near to the apex, and, when dry, the apex is cut off level with the disc. With a small stiletto the hole should be made round and smooth. It is necessary to make the holes of different sizes, viz. Nos. 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 B.W. gauge, to suit the various-sized insects. The disc on the top of the cone is to lay a piece of honey on, to tempt the insect to extend its pro- boscis in order to show the act of sucking. For catching the fly, glass tubes, 24 in. long by 1/2 in. in diameter, with corks to fit, are useful, having a V groove cut in the cork in order to let air into the tube. At the other end of the tube is placed a small plug of cotton-wool. To pass the fly into the cone, hold the tube upright, shake the fly to the bottom (the wool being at the bottom), draw the cork, and place the base of the cone on the tube; then hold the apex of the cone to a bright light, and gently push the plug of wool up Fig. 243. * Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii: (1887) p. 175. + ‘A Course of Elementary Practical Histology,’ 1887, pp. 194-5 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1025 the tube with a pencil, and the fly will soon show its head through the hole in the disc. The tube is then taken away, and the wool plugged up in the cone to keep the fly in its place. A pair of stage forceps, with the ends made hollow like a pair of gasfitter’s pliers, can be used to hold the cone. Mr. Macer showed a living house-fly with this apparatus, at the November Conversazione, in a very effective manner. (4) Photomicrography. Nelson and Curties’s Photomicrographic Camera.—At the November meeting of the Society Mr. E. M. Nelson read the following description of his photomicrographic camera (fig. 244) * :—‘* Mr. C. L. Curties and myself have designed this camera in the hope of combining efficiency with simplicity. The points in its construction are as follows :—A board on indiarubber feet of sufficient length to take lamp, Microscope, and camera when fully extended. The usual chocks to hold the Microscope feet, and the fine-adjustment focusing-rod on the right-hand side of the board. The camera made of two square f tubes of cardboard sliding one inside the other. Upright wooden ends to hold the cardboard tubes; these slide in grooves in the base board, and are fixed by clamping-screws. The front board has a brass nozzle to fit into the light-excluding cap on the Microscope. The back board is grooved to receive the focusing-glass and the double back. The light- excluding cap is made of cardboard covered with leather, which is as efficient, and not so heavy, as the ordinary brass ones. The double backs are of iron ; they are about one-sixth of the cost, and far smoother in their action, than mahogany ones. There is a fitting to hold diaphragms in the back. The method of working is as follows:—The Microscope, inclined to a horizontal position, is placed in the chocks, the camera closed up, and slid back as far as it will go to the other end of the board. There will now be plenty of room between the camera and the Microscope for the eye to be conveniently placed to the eye-piece. The lamp, condenser, &c., are now centered in the usual manner, and a critical image of the object received by an ordinary eye-piece. When all the necessary adjustments are completed, the ordinary eye-piece is removed, and a projection eye-piece substituted for it. The camera, still closed, is now slid up to the Microscope, leaving suffi- cient distance between them to allow the hand to focus the eye-lens of the eye-piece. Next let a piece of paper be held up in the position the back will occupy when the photograph is being taken, and the diaphragm of the eye-piece focused, by means of the eye-lens, sharply upon it. The camera is now slid up to the Microscope, and the nozzle inserted in the light- excluding cap. The camera is now extended to the required distance, and the object focused on the plate in the usual manner. The following are a few hints in the use of the above camera :— It is not advisable to push magnifying power more than ten times the initial power of the objective. To this end the camera has been designed for use with Prof. Abbe’s lower-power projection eye-pieces, as he recommends the lower- power eye-pieces in preference to the higher when sufficient camera length can be obtained. . A plain glass screen is recommended in place of the usual ground glass. The best focusing-lens is an aplanatic lens of six power by Zeiss (Catalogue No. 127). * Described ante, p. 661. + As shown in the fig. these are round; they were subsequently made square on the suggestion of Mr. J. Mayall, junr., as being more serviceable in that form. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 1026 ‘VEINV) OIKdVUNOMOINOLON 8SAILyAQ aNV NosTaN : pe 7 | on ae cg ml im \ i PG SA ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1027 To find out the length of exposure, use a Warnerke’s sensitometer, in conjunction with the table and directions in Mr. Bousfield’s ‘Guide to Photomicrography.’ ” Photographing Series of Sections.*—Dr. W. His photographs serial sections with a magnification of 10-20 diameters with the following appa- ratus :—A toothed bar carries at its front end a plate with the photographic objective Ob: a second plate, moved by a rack and provided with a central aperture, serves as object-carrier T: the two plates are united by bellows. The source of light is an Argand burner B, movable along the toothed stage. The light is concentrated by two plano-convex lenses L, with a Fia 245. diameter of 11°5 cm. and a focal distance of 8cm. Diffuse light is avoided by the tin case Gh, in one side of which a broad valve or door is situated, in order to obtain access to the inclosed parts. The objectives used were a Steinheil’s antiplanatic of 12 cm. focal distance or an aplanatic of 14 em. The latter, though not so powerful as the former, gives a correcter and more definite image. Instead of a camera, the wall of the dark chamber W is used as a reception surface ; the latter is divided into two halves and fitted with a door and shutter S. By means of S the light is thrown on or turned off the sensitized paper. The apparatus rests on a board Br which can be moved along the surface of the wooden stand G. This suffices for rough focusing. Finer focusing is obtained by moving the object-carrier T with ascrew. Exact focusing is made by turning the objective, which works in a tube provided with a fine screw-thread. ‘lhe sensitized paper is, if small, fixed down by small pegs; if large it must be fitted into a frame OC, fastened to the wall. The image is first focused on a picce of white paper placed behind the glass plate of the frame, and, this done, the sensitized paper is introduced while the shutter 8 is closed. The paper employed is Eastman’s silver bromide paper, which is sensitive enough to artificial light, * Arch, f. Anat. u. Physiol—Anat. Abtheil., 1887, pp. 174-8 1 fig.). 1028 SUMMARY OF OCURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and requires but simple manipulation. The length of exposure varies with magnification and the diaphragm; with Steinheil’s aplanatic of 14 em. focal distance, with diaphragm 4 for a magnification of 10 times, 6-8 minutes are required. Thin sections require longer than thick or deeply stained specimens. All the necessary details of manipulation are given with each packet of the Eastman’s paper, but it may be mentioned that after exposure the paper is moistened with water and the image developed with acetate of potash and sulphate of iron. It is then washed in acidulated water, and having been fixed with hyposulphite of soda, is frequently washed, and the sheet is then dried. The time occupied in taking four slides with twenty-five sections each, magnified 10 times, is from an hour to an hour and a quarter. In addition to giving an accurate copy of the sections, the method is most useful for reconstruction of the image, and if before cutting Kastschenko’s definition planes * are applied, the fine lines appear on every negative, and this renders the copies still more suitable and convenient for reconstruction purposes. Ellis’s Focusing Arrangement for Photomicrography.— Mr. John Ellis writes us:—‘ All the focusing arrangements for photomicrography have appeared so defective to me, that I venture to send a description and drawing of the one use. The rod running the length of the camera carries imag | un I Ee MTT gu HALA } AT cn i a loose arm, at the end of which is a roller, covered with indiarubber, which is made to revolve by an endless strap passing round a wheel upon the rod. The roller is kept in contact with the fine-adjustment screw of the Micro- scope by an indiarubber band attached to the base-board and the arm.” Nelson’s Photomicrographic Focusing-screen.—This (the design of Mr. E. M. Nelson) is made by engraving the English and metrical scales, as well as a crossed diagonal, on the plane-glass plate which is used by nearly all photomicrographers. 'The engraving, which forms a convenient object to focus on, is a scale for measuring the magnifying power. The English scale is divided into inches, tenths, and half-tenths, and the metrical intocm. and mm. ‘The scales are ruled horizontally, one inch apart, across. — the plate, one on either side of the cross made by the diagonals. The diagonals are not ruled at the points where they pass.through the scales, in order that they may not interfere with the divisions. Fig. 246. DrnaryeER, A.—Résumé de la conference publique sur les procédés de reproduction aux encres grasses des clichés photomicrographiques et des images d’objets scien- tifiques. Exposé d’un procedé nouveau de photolithographie, avec demonstrations. * See this Journal, ante, p. 511. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1029 pratiques. (Résumé of the public lecture on the processes of reproducing with printing inks photomicrographie clichés and images of scientific objects. Description of a new method of photolithography, with practical demonstrations.) Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., X11. (1887) pp. 182-5 (1 pl.). HeNsEN, V.—Ein photographisches Zimmer fiir Mikroskopiker. (A photographic room for microscopists. ) Kiélliker’s Gratulationschrift, 1887, pp. 61-71 (1 pl). Kine, Y. M.—The Photomicrography of Histological Subjects. Journ. of Micr., VI. (1887) pp. 205-16, from New York Med. Journ. MARKTANNER, G.—Bemerkungen iiber Mikrophotographie. (Remarks on photo- micrography.) Phot. Corresp., 1887, p. 237. (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Microscopical Tube-length, its length in millimetres, and the parts included in it by the various opticians of the world.*—Prof.S. H. Gage read a paper with the above title to the Pittsburg Meeting of the American Society of Microscopists. “Jn the construction of microscopic objectives, the corrections must be made for the formation of the image at a definite distance, or, in other words, the tube of the stand of the Microscope on which the objective is to be used, must have a definite length. Consequently, the microscopist must know and use this distance or ‘microscopical tube-length’ to obtain the best results in using the objective in practical work. In order to obtain the exact distance in millimetres for which objectives are corrected, and the parts of the Microscope included in this distance or ‘tube-length, the following questions were submitted to all the opticians of the world whose addresses could be obtained:—1l. For what ‘ tube-length’ do you correct your microscopic objectives? Please give the length in millimetres or inches. 2. Please indicate on the diagram on the opposite page (fig. 247) exactly what parts of the Microscope you include in ‘tube~ length.’ From nearly all precise and satisfactory answers were received, and I wish to express here my appreciation of their courtesy. The answers. received are given below, and indicated on the accompanying diagram. TABLE giving Length in Millimetres and showing parts included in ‘ Tube- Length’ by various Opticians. Parts included in ‘ Tube-length,’ ‘Tube-length’ in See Diagram. millimetres. Grunow, New York .._... 208. a-d .. {x achet et Fils, Paris : 146 or 200. Powell and Lealand, London 254. = i Reichert, Vienna 160-180. W. Wales, New York fl le nator mae 5 Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., Rochester 216. Bézu, Hausser et Cie., Paris... 220. »-d Klénne und Miiller, Berlin 160-180 or 254. W. & H. Seibert, Wetzlar .. 190. Swift & Son, London .. 165 to 2284. C. Zeiss, Jena . Te Sach) ac 160 or 250. a-q Gundlach Optical Co., Rochester 254. c—d Ross & Co., London .. - 254. e-e R. & J. Beck, London Be Ae LANDES eres c-g H. R. Spencer & Co., Geneva, N.Y... 254, cf J. Green, Brooklyn ..0 2. (“0 "129204 c'-e E. Leitz, Wetzlar re 125-180.. For Oil-immersions .. 160. * Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 289-92 (1 fig.). 1030 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO A glance at the table and diagram is sufficient to show that there is about as great diversity as possible in the parts included in ‘ tube-length,’ and that the length in millimetres, including these parts, is likewise very diverse. This has, doubtless, come about simply because there was no general standard, and each optician selected for himself a standard. For the sake of those who use the Microscope, it is hoped Fic. 247. that a uniform standard may be chosen, or that, at most, but two standards should be decided on by all opticians. These two lengths in millimetres would probably best be 254 mm. for a long or English ‘tube-length,’ and 160 mm. for the short or Con- tinental ‘tube-length.’ Furthermore, the same parts of the Microscope should be included in the ‘ tube- lest length,’ and the parts included should be readily lieslit determinable by the youngest student. The parts included by six of the opticians named above, viz. : from the top of the tube (b) where the ocular is inserted, to the lower end (d) where the objective is screwed in, answer this requirement of simplicity. Without urging this as the best possible selection, it will readily be seen that this ‘tube-length’ may be easily measured where the ocular and objective are | not in position, and that makers of stands who do if not also make objectives could easily make the tubes Ay {coe d LJ e ocular of} of their Microscopes of exactly the right length for rs rel aie the objectives of all objective-makers. While it is pt crap es true that the objectives of various makers are in mountings of different lengths, and therefore, other Diagram showing the things being equal, tend to increase or diminish the parts of the Micro- actual or optical ‘tube-length, and thus to vary the scope included in magnification of the Microscope, if each maker would ‘Tube-length’ by vari- ghoose the length designated above (bd) for which ous opticians of the t lis once = aes ti th world. (See table *° correct his objectives in their mountings, then no above.) matter how long or short that mounting might be, the microscopist would be able to measure off the right length on the tube of his Microscope, for which the objective was corrected, and having this length once determined, it would not need to be changed when an objective of different length of setting was used. Furthermore, the convenience of the microscopist and uniformity in ‘tube-length’ would be both subserved if the eye-pieces or oculars were ~ made ‘ parfocal,’ * that is, the settings be so adjusted that the lower focal points of all the eye-pieces shall be at the same level when in position in the tube of the Microscope, then no refocusing of the Microscope would be necessary upon changing oculars. If also the level of the ‘lower focal points’ of the different oculars were made to fall at the level of the top of the body-tube of the Microscope, one end of the so-called ‘ optical tube- length’ would be always determinable, and correspond with one end, that is the upper end, of the tube of the Microscope. So long as no common standard is employed, it seems to the writer that every objective should be accompanied by a statement and a diagram indicating the tube-length in millimetres for which it was corrected, and showing also the parts of the Microscope included in this measurement. * See this Journal, 1886, p. 1050. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY; MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1031 If the objective is unadjustable, a statement should also accompany it, giving the thickness of cover-glass for which it was adjusted.” On this paper the editor of ‘The Microscope’ * writes as follows :— “Every microscopist will thank Prof. 8. H. Gage for publicly calling attention, in his article, read at the recent meeting of the American Society of Microscopists, to the remarkable lack of uniformity which exists among opticians in their standards of tube-length and in the parts which they include in their computation of it. ; All who seek and desire accuracy in their objectives, understand that they are corrected for a definite tube-length, and that perfect performance is possible only when that tube-length is used. The lack of knowledge, even among expert microscopists, of the exact length for which given objectives are corrected, and the difficulty of measuring it from the hidden points adopted by many makers, have led them frequently to disregard the perfect accuracy which they should observe in adjusting their Microscopes, and to be satisfied with an approximation to the proper tube-length. Text- books and makers’ catalogues, also, are almost silent in the matter, and microscopists who use the Microscope in their every-day business, but who give but little attention to the optical principles of its construction and working, have remained in ignorance of any necessity for such an adjust- ment. Prof. Gage’s article, with its complete tables, brings the subject forcibly to the mind of every microscopist, and makes clear the necessity of the adoption by makers of a uniform tube-length, and of uniform and easily accessible points between which to compute it. Prof. Gage, in his remarks, rather hesitated to ask opticians to change their various standards to a common one. From conversations with several opticians we have learned that there are no serious objections to such a change, and we urge upon manufacturers that it be made. The committee appointed by the American Society of Microscopists to investigate the subject and report at the next meeting, may, if their judgment agree with ours, accomplish much to this end. A tube-length of 254 mm. is generally spoken of as the standard, and is adopted by the majority of opticians, and this, we believe, should be the only one chosen. In determining the parts to be included in the measurement of tube- length there is more opportunity for diverse views. The most scientific measurement probably, would be between the optical centre of the objective and the optical centre of the ocular. These points are, however, the most difficult to determine, and they vary with each objective and each eye-piece. The same objections hold good with any measurement which has for its lower extremity any part of the objective. Uniformity in the length of the setting, and the position of the lenses of objectives, is practically impossible. The lower extremity of the tube (d in Prof. Gage’s figure) is the only lower fixed point, and is the point selected by all but a very few opticians. For the upper point c and c’ can be excluded, a and b being the only points that are fixed and accessible, and the majority of opticians include the parts between one of these points and d in their measurement of tube- length. These points can be determined by the youngest student, and variations in objectives will not affect the length. Prof. Gage prefers the measurement b to d. This is, perhaps, the simplest, but is open to the objection that different opticians use eye-pieces of different construction. European makers use the Continental pattern, in which the eye-lens is but 1 or 2 mm. above the body, while Americans prefer the eye-piece with * Microscope, vil. (1887) pp. 305-6. 1032 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO neck, which brings the eye-lens 12 to 15 mm. above the body. This, of course, increases the optical tube-length just so much, and it would be necessary for opticians to indicate on the objective whether it was corrected for the Continental or the American ocular. With the measurement a to d each microscopist could easily adapt his tube-length to suit either style of ocular. We can join Prof. Gage also in his plea for ‘ par-focal’ oculars. Their adoption would be another step in the development of a uniformity in apparatus, which is of so great convenience to busy workers, and which tends so much to harmonize the work of various manufacturers. We believe that these subjects, so tersely brought foward by Prof. Gage, should be agitated until manufacturers adopt them ; and to further this end we shall be glad to publish correspondence from all interested opticians and microscopists.” Measurement of Power.*—Mr. H. M. Nelson says that it is sometimes useful to know the “initial” magnifying power of an objective, by “ initial ” power meaning the size to which an image will be magnified by an objective alone when projected on a screen at a distance of 10 in. In practically measuring this power, it will be found a more accurate plan to increase the distance to, say, 60 in., and divide the result by 6. These measurements are very easily performed when one has a camera, but it is not so easy to do them without. Therefore, another and somewhat loose way of getting at the initial power is adopted, viz. as follows :— Measure the combined magnifying power of the objective, and say 2 in., or A, eye-piece, and divide the result by 5. This method would do very well if the exact multiplying power of the eye-piece was 5, and if the length of the body remained constant. As it is not an easy matter to find out the exact multiplying power of an eye-piece, Mr. Nelson recommends any one desirous of knowing this to measure or get measured the initial power of one of his objectives; then measure the combined power of this lens and his eye-plece, paying great attention to his tube-length during the operation: This will give him once for all the multiplying power of his eye-piece with that tube-length. He will then be in a position to ascertain the initial power of any other lens with that eye-piece and the same tube-length. But as the optical tube-length may differ from the actual tube-length, and does differ to a certain extent, with objectives of ordinary construction, this process is not so simple as it appears. In order to get fairly accurate results with the higher powers, a certain percentage must be deducted. To give some examples: Thus, 1 in. at 60 in. increases the image of -01 in. to -66 in., its power, therefore, is 66, which at 10 in. = 11 = initial power. The combined power of this lens with an A eye-piece is 55, which gives 5 as the multiply- ing power of the eye-piece. Now, if the combined power of this eye- piece with a 2/3 = 75 we may assume the initial power of the 2/3 is 15. If, however, we treat higher powers in the same way, we shall get too high values. Thus the combined power of a 1/4 and the eye-piece is 203; dividing by 5 we get 40°6 as the initial power, whereas 39°3 is the real ower. . Again, the combined power of a certain 1/12 and the eye-piece is 600, which, divided by 5, gives 120 as its initial power, whereas it is in reality 113-2. The empirical rule Mr. Nelson employs is to deduct 2 per cent. for 1/2, 3 per cent. for 1/4, 4 per cent. for 1/6, 6 per cent. for 1/8, 1/12, * Eng. Mech., xlvi. (1887) pp. 188-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1033 &e. Thus taking the 1/4 above and deducting 3 per cent. from the 203, we get 197, which, divided by 5, gives 39:4, a result very near the truth. A certain 1/8 gives a combined power of 450, deduct 6 per cent. = 423, divide by 5 = 84:6, the actual being 85. For short bodies of 64 in., or Continental size, a different percentage must be employed. The following gives fair results :—2 per cent. for 1/2, 4 per cent. for 1/4, 6 per cent. for 1/6, 8 per cent. for 1/8, and 10 per cent for 1/12. Method of Intensifying the Resolving Power of Microscope Ob- jectives.*—Mr. G. D. Hirst describes a simple way of vastly improving the definition of objectives on close-lined test objects, which has lately come under his notice. The credit of the discovery is due to Mr. Francis, of Sydney. Take a valve of, say, Amphipleura pellucida, and, having got the best results obtainable with mirror and condenser, let the analysing prism belonging to the polarizing apparatus be placed over the eye-piece, and rotated until it darkens the field, which it will do, though not to the same extent as when used with the polarizing prism. On carefully focusing the diatom, the lines will show themselves with an extraordinary increase of definition. Valves that without the aid of the prism only show a washy sort of resolution, will now show the lines as black as the bars of a gridiron. On P. angulatum by central light the result is also splendid. The same effect can also be obtained, though perhaps to a slightly inferior degree, with the objective, or, as it is placed in some stands, in a sliding box in the body of the Microscope ; in the latter case, as it cannot be rotated, the valve of A. pellucida should lie horizontally. For general purposes, it is better for the prism to fit over the eye-piece, as besides giving better definition in that position, with a diatom like P. angulatum and prism over the objective, the diffraction spectra would be cut out of the top and bottom of the back lens and the effect spoiled. Of course, in the case of A. pellucida, with the valve lying horizontally, it does not matter, as the dioptric ray and single spectrum are not cut off in any way by the prism or the box in which it is set. The prism has the effect of greatly diminishing the light of the dioptric beam ; at the same time it scarcely touches that transmitted by the diffraction spectra. The application of the prism will not of course make an objective resolve a test beyond the reach of its aperture ; but it often happens that in the case of close-lined objects we can see the spectrum at the back of the objective when the lines cannot be seen in the object itself. It is then that the prism shows its power, as its use will at once bring out the lines with the greatest ease and sharpness. Mr. E. M. Nelson ¢ found, while investigating the matter, that the diffraction spectrum of A. pellucida (illuminated by oblique beam from oil- imm. achromatic condenser, and with a water-imm. 1/12) showed all the green, but no red. On examining the spectrum through the analysing prism without an eye-piece he found that when the prism was in a line with the dioptric beam and the diffraction spectrum, the brightness of the green was intensified. On replacing the eye-piece, and viewing the image through the prism used above the eye-piece, as directed by Mr. Hirst, there could be no doubt that the transverse stris were much sharper and blacker than when viewed without the prism. The prism must, of course, be kept in a line with the dioptric beam and the diffraction spectra. Should the prism be turned across, even if it does not cut off aperture, the definition will be impaired. * Eng. Mech., xlvi. (1887) p. 232. t Ibid., p. 254. 1034 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO He next changed the water-imm. 1/12 for a water-imm. 1/16 of less angle, which would barely resolve the A. pellucida—that is to say, would only resolve it in patches, and not from end to end. On examining this with the prism, he found that the parts which were unresolved were still unresolved ; but those parts which were resolved were intensified. “The image of A. pellucida with an apochromatic 1/8 (1:4 N.A.), my new eye-piece, and the prism is something very fine, such as I have never seen before.” He also tried the prism with several very subtle direct light tests, but cannot say that he found any improvement in the image. On the whole, he should think this class of objects would be seen better without the prism. Probably the efficacy of the prism, when used with a lined test, lies in the fact that it intensifies the diffraction spectra when it is placed in a certain direction to it. BROKENSHIRE, F. R.—Measurement of Magnifying Power of Micro-objectives. [Complaint that the subject has not received the elucidation he anticipated. ] Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1887) p. 300. DipeEtot, L.—Du pouvoir amplifiant du Microscope, détermination théorique et ex- perimentale: suivi d’une table 4 quatre décimales, des inverses de 1000 premiers nombres de 0:01 4 10°00. (The magnifying power of the Microscope. Theoretical and experimental determination: followed by a table to four places of decimals of the reciprocals of 1000 prime numbers from 0:01 to 10°00.) 2nd ed., 90 pp., 2 pls., 8vo, Paris, 1887. GARTEL.—Quelques genéralités sur les instruments d’optique. (Some general con- siderations on optical instruments.) Arch. Sci. Phys. et Nat., XVIII. (1887) pp. 339-41. HopGxinson, A.—On the Diffraction of Microscopic Objects in Relation to the Re- solving Power of Objectives. Proc. Manch. Lit. and Phil. Soc., XXV. (1886) p. 263. (6) Miscellaneous. ““The Microscope as a factor in the establishment of a constant of nature.”’—The following is the first part of the Presidential Address delivered by Prof. W. A. Rogers before the American Society of Micro- scopists at the Pittsburg Annual Meeting :*— “‘ Microscopy is a cosmopolitan science. We may go farther than this, and say that microscopy is more nearly cosmopolitan in its character than any other science. If I did not believe this to be true I should not have consented to occupy the honourable position which I now hold by your suffrages, for there are many members of this Society to whom the honour more justly belongs by virtue of greater familiarity with the technics of our science. I suppose that I am indebted to this expression of your confidence on account of the use which I have made of the Microscope as an essential factor in a single line of research. _ | It is the glory of our science that the Microscope supplements the natural vision to such an extent that we can submit nearly every theory, nearly every deduction from experiment, nearly every fact of observation, to the supreme and only test by which a real truth in nature can be established, viz. through the medium of one of the senses with which we ~ have been endowed by the Creator. It has been said that microscopy has no claim to be regarded as a science, and that the Microscope is simply an instrumental agent occupying with respect to other sciences a position similar to that which the telescope sustains in its relation to astronomy. A convincing answer to this criticism is found in the fact that the telescope is limited in its application to a comparatively narrow field of research. Where the telescope answers a single question the Microscope answers a * Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 257-61. Corrected by Prof. Rogers. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1035 thousand. Spectroscopy has become a recognized science, not so much because of its revelations in regard to the nature of light, as on account of the application of the spectroscope as an instrument to the study of the physical properties of matter and of motion not only on the earth, but in worlds other than our own. In discussing the question whether microscopy can be regarded as a science, we must always bear in mind the fact that a science is only a con- venient name for a group of similar laws of nature, and that the term is properly applicable not only to the development of these laws, but to their application to the useful economies of life. Thus we have the science of engineering, in which mathematical analysis is as much an essential part as skill in mechanical construction. But this analysis would serve no useful purpose if did not rest ultimately on facts of observation. The limitations which necessarily belong to a definition of physical science are clearly expressed by Tate in his most admirable treatise on Heat. He says: ‘ Nothing can be learned as to the physical world save by observation and experiment, or by mathematical deductions from data so ob- tained. Now the Microscope as an instrument of research stands un- rivalled, not only in respect to the precision of the observations made with its aid, but also in the universality of its application in furnishing what Tate calls ‘ the data so obtained.’ Each succeeding year witnesses an extension of the range of its applica- tions. Within a few years, while retaining its claim as an essential factor in scientific research, it has also become a very material aid in many mechanical industries. It is a common impression that the Microscope is too delicate an instrument to be used in the ordinary operations of me- chanical construction, and that the apparent necessity of using transmitted light for the purpose of illumination is an absolute barrier to any extended employment of the instrument. The latter difficulty is entirely obviated by the use of the opaque illuminator invented by Tolles, by which a bright metal surface can be examined with the utmost ease, while actual experience has shown that it is by no means necessary that the instrument should be mounted upon massive piers insulated from surrounding objects. I cannot more forcibly combat this impression than by referring to two cases within my own experience. The ‘ Proceedings’ of the Society of Mechanical Engineers for 1884 contains a description of a method of cutting a screw in which each thread is made to correspond in pitch with equal subdivisions of a standard yard traced upon a metal bar. The screw for the engine constructed for Cornell University was made in this manner. Prof. Anthony has shown that the maximum accumulated error of the screw does not reach 2 mikrons for a limit of 20 inches, while the actual error at any selected point will not reach 1 mikron. This screw was cut in the manner indicated, in the third storey of a building occupied by machinery, which produced a decided tremor in every room. It was only found neces- sary to make the attachment of the Microscope to the compound rest of the lathe very firm, and to brace the bed of the lathe very securely from the floor. The writer was recently called upon to ‘level up’ the bed of a very heavy planer, having ways 18 ft. in length. Several days had already been spent in securing as good an adjustment as could be obtained with the aid of a spirit-level of special construction. A plank 22 ft. in length, 8 in. in width, and 2 in. in thickness was set up edgewise beside the platen of the planer, but insulated from it. A groove 1/2 in. wide and 1/2 in. deep was ploughed in the upper face of the plank, and after having stopped both ends, the groove was filled with mercury. The surface of the mercury then 10386 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO formed an invariable plane of reference. The Microscope was securely attached to the platen and adjusted for sharp focus upon the surface of the mercury at one end. The platen was then moved along until the Micro- scope occupied a position near the other end of the groove. This end was then adjusted by elevation or depression as required, until the surface of the mercury was sharply in focus. After two trials it was found that the surface of the mercury was at the same constant focal distance from the Microscope as indicated by the sharpness of definition. Notwithstanding the fact that extreme care had been taken in the original adjustment by the aid of the spirit-level, it was found that as the platen moved towards the central part of the bed the focus became more and more indistinct, indi- cating that the central part was too low. The proper elevation was then made at these points by means of heavy set-screws, when it was found that the mercury was sharply in focus under the objective throughout the entire range of motion. As a check upon the accuracy of the adjustment a surface-plate 8 ft. in length was now planed, when it was found that the de- viation from a true surface did not at any point exceed the third part of the thickness of tissue paper. ‘'T'wo facts of considerable importance are to be noticed in connection with this experiment. First, that the time occupied for the complete adjustment was only twenty-five minutes; and, second, that during the entire operation the machinery of the shop was running at half-speed. These and similar observations have led the writer to advocate a more éxtended use of the Microscope in the every-day work of the machine shop. By attaching the Microscope firmly to the slide-rest of the lathe, the ordi- nary operations of turning shoulders to a given length, and of cylinders to a given diameter, can be more expeditiously, more exactly, more econo- mically performed than by the usual method. It is freely admitted by mechanicians that a decided advance in me- chanical construction would be made by the employment of uniform measures of length. This can be easily and profitably accomplished in any well regulated shop, employing as many as fifty hands, by delivering from a standards room any desired unit of length, in the same way that tools are delivered from a tool-room. The expense of a comparator, from which any measure of length could be obtained within a limit of time which would not ordinarily exceed one minute, would not be great. If this comparator were placed in charge of a person familiar with its use, and in a convenient location, any workman could have a calliper set for him in half the time that would be required in setting it to a scale by the usual method; the ~ precision would be incomparably greater, and absolute uniformity would be secured in every dimension of length employed. The various points to which I have briefly called attention are to be considered simply as illus- trations of the many ways in which the useful service of the Microscope may be extended. In the address which I am called upon to make this evening, as Presi- dent of the American Society of Microscopists, I have selected a single application of the Microscope in scientific research. I beg to call your attention to the Microscope as a factor in the establishment of a constant of nature. If a bar of metal, which has the faces of each end parallel and at right angles to its axis, is submerged in melting ice, the perpendicular distance between the two faces may be said to represent a definite unit of length at the temperature of 32° F. or of 0° C. If this distance is identical in length under similar conditions with a certain bar of platinum now deposited at the International Bureau of Weights and Measures at Breteuil ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1037 near Paris, and designated the ‘ Métre des Archives, the length of the bar is said to be one metre. If now the bar is submerged in a liquid which has throughout its entire mass a temperature one degree higher than that of melting ice, its length, after it has reached the same temperature as the liquid, will be increased by a certain fraction of its entire length. If this length is subdivided into one million equal parts, and if the increase is, for example, ten parts in one million, the coefficient of expansion of the metal is said to be ten mikrons. If the increase in length proceeds uniformly for each and for every increment of temperature, we can say, for example, that the length of the bar at 100° C. will be 1000 mikrons, or one millimetre greater than it was at 0° C. We can also say that if the temperature of the entire mass of metal is again reduced to 0° the length of the bar will be exactly the same as it was before the increase of temperature took place. There is some evidence that when certain metals are exposed to very violent changes in temperature, as when zine is removed from a tempera- ture of 100° C. and is submerged in melting ice, the molecular arrange- ment of the metal is disturbed to such an extent that the return to its original condition may be delayed for several days, and even for several weeks; but it cannot, at the present time, be positively asserted that the return will not ultimately take place. Tt will be noticed that the definition of the coefficient of expansion which has been given, viz. the inerease in length due to an increase of temperature from 0° to 1°, contains the important limitation that the entire mass of the metal shall have reached the temperature of 0°.” We have no report of the remaining part of the address, except the following abstract of the ‘ Pittsburg Dispatch, which gave an account of the proceedings of the meeting :— “ Prof. Rogers chose as his subject, ‘A demonstration of the fact that metals may be safely employed to measure temperature by means of their expansion under an increase of temperature. He began with a defence of microscopy as a science, and gave a brief review of the various ways in which the usefulness of the Microscope may be extended, especially in the direction of mechanical constructions. He then proceeded to discuss the Microscope as a factor in the determination of a constant of nature, which was practically the real subject of his address. In general the problem to be considered is, ‘Do metals expand uniformly under every variation of temperature?’ After limiting the definition of the term ‘constant of nature,’ to the three bars of metal investigated, viz. a bar of Baily’s metal, composed of 16 parts copper, 25 parts tin, and 1 part zine; a bar of Jessup’s steel and a bar of glass made by Chance & Sons in 1870 for the British Board of Trade, he gave an account of the various kinds of errors to which observations of this class are liable. Incidentally he referred to the different kinds of thermometers in use, and the manner in which they are constructed, relating many interesting experiments showing the real value of their indications, and how they sometimes fail to register correctly on account of atmospheric changes and conditions. After describ- ing the methods employed to detect the errors of the thermometers em- ployed to measure the temperature at which these three standards of length were compared, he gave an account of the investigation by which he deter- mined that the relative coefficients of expansion of these metals are constant for all temperatures between — 5° and 95° temperature. He made 293 sets of observations, nearly all of them about half an hour after sunrise on clear days, and a little later on cloudy days. The time at which the com- parisons between the lengths of these standards were made, was defined by 1887. 3 .Y 1038 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the speaker to be the critical point of no variation of temperature when there was an equilibrium between the temperature of the bars of metal, of the surrounding air, and of the thermometer employed. As a result of observations extending from December, 1886, to July, 1887, the conclusion was reached, first: ‘That the relative coefficients of expansion of these metals are really constant for ordinary temperatures ; and second, that the values of the absolute coefficients have not changed since 1881.’” * Fasoldt’s Rulings.j—Mr. C. Fasoldt writes as follows :—* A gentleman interested in microscopy lately called my attention to an item in the report of the Microscopical Society of Washington, D.C., in the April number of the ‘ American Monthly Microscopical Journal, p. 77: ‘ Dr. Schaeffer asked if any of the Society had seen Fasoldt’s ruling on glass. Prof. Seaman said Fasoldt had done some fine work, but the finest was that done by. Prof. Rogers,’ &c. I was not aware that I was recognized as an amateur in mechanics, and that I imposed on the world with inferior products; neither has a commission of any exhibition ever rendered such a verdict. Contrary to that, in World, International, and State Exhibitions I was always recognized as master of the masters, which is shown by the following first-class awards :— : Prize Medal of Honour and Diploma of Merit awarded at the Cen- tennial Exposition of 1876. Also First Prize Medal and Diploma, International Industrial Exhibition, Buffalo, N.Y. Three First Prize Medals, Utica Mechanics’ Association. First Premium Medal, Syracuse Mechanics’ Association. Silver Medal and Certificate of Highest Merit of New York State. Regarding the sentence that I do not publish my method of ruling, I do not want to dictate to other persons what methods to use to accomplish a certain work—in somewhat by showing and illustrating my machine— neither do I want to contradict those who attempt to illustrate how work is and should be done. I claim that everybody has the privilege to construct and make their own Microscope, measuring and illuminating apparatus, ruling machine, and machinery to make those and all other devices that anybody wished to make for private or general public use, as I have done. As it is proper for a man to uphold and prove what he has said, or either retract such quotation, I would ask Prof. Seaman to send the following rulings made by Prof. Rogers. All test-plates should be ruled in bands, beginning with and running up every 10,000 to the denomination as given below. 1 plate ruled up to 200,000, or 250,000 lines per inch 1 » » » 120,000 09 1 ” ” 9 6,000 ” 3 stage mic. ruled 1, 10, 100, 1000 per inch. 3 stage mic. ruled 100, 1000, 5000, 10,000 lines per inch. When I will appoint a committee of four to measure and resolve them. And the Professor can appoint his committee and do likewise with my rulings. We have numerous times resolved 200,000 and over. I have the facilities to do it with, and measuring likewise.” * Cf. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii. (1887) pp. 196-7, for a criticism on this address, so far as it defends the claim of microscopy to the title of a science. “We see no advantage to be gained by naming a science which does not exist. Ina truly scientific sense there is no such thing as a science of microscopy as defined by Prof. Rogers.” t+ Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii. (1887) pp. 175-6. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1039 Tt would be very interesting if Mr. Fasoldt would tell us how he resolves the “numerous lines, 200,000 and over.” Until he does this his claim to be recognized as a “ master of the masters ” cannot be admitted. Nageli and Schwendener’s ‘The Microscope in Theory and Practice.’* —This translation of Prof. Nigeli and Schwendener’s well-known treatise on the Microscope is at last published, after suffering almost unprecedented vicissitudes. In addition to disasters to the manuscript, the whole book, after being printed off, was burnt in 1884, in a great fire in the City in which the printer’s works were involved. Those responsible for the publi- cation were so far discouraged that they practically abandoned the matter, and it is due to the enterprise of the publishers that the translation is after all given to the English-speaking public. Although advances have been made since the book was written in several directions, notably by Professor Abbe, Nigeli and Schwendener’s work will always be a classical landmark in the history of the Microscope, and will be more especially valuable to English microscopists as the first book in their language to deal with the Microscope on a scientific basis unadulterated on one side by descriptions of the various forms of Microscopes and microscopical apparatus, or on the other by a review of the microscopical subjects of the Animal, Vegetable, and Mineral Kingdoms. As such we may commend the book to a place in every microscopical library. The following is extracted from the preface :— “This translation of Niigeli and Schwendener’s well-known treatise ‘Das Mikroskop’ was commenced by Mr. Frank Crisp, Secretary of the Royal Microscopical Society, immediately after the publication of the last (German) edition (1877), with the intention—as indicated by him in a communication to the Quekett Microscopical Club—of filling up a blank in English miroscopical literature in regard to the scientific technical treatment of the theory of the Microscope, in which English text-books were so deficient. The student refers in vain, even at the present date, to English works on the Microscope for explanations of the theory of the construction of objectives, eye-pieces, &c., or for the discussion of the phenomena of diffrac- tion and polarization in their connection with the Microscope, or for any scientific treatment of the question of interpreting microscopical images or the theory of microscopic observation. ‘These subjects are dealt with systematically in German works only, and notably in that of Nageli and Schwendener, The translation was thus undertaken with a view to placing before English readers the then best known collective exposition or technical treatment of these points by German writers. When the rough draft of the translation was completed, the first five sheets (80 pp.), were revised and put in type, but in consequence of prior claims upon his time in connection with the Royal Microscopical Society, Mr. Crisp was compelled to relinquish the task of further revision, and of passing the volume through the press, a labour which was undertaken by Mr. John Mayall, jun., one of the editors of the Society’s Journal. Just as the printing was completed, a fire destroyed the premises of the printers, and the whole of the printed sheets of the volume were burnt, except one set as far as p. 374, which the publishers had retained in their possession, together with a few of the woodcuts. * Nageli, C., and Schwendener, 8., ‘The Microscope in Theory and Practice’ (translated from the German), xi. and 382 pp. and 210 figs. (8vo, Swan Sonnenschein, _ Lowrey & Co., London, 1887). " oe ¥.2 1040 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Under these circumstances the publishers had to consider the alterna- tives (1) of abandoning the issue of the volume; or (2) of incurring the additional expense of re-translating the portion of the work totally lost by the fire, replacing the missing woodcuts, and reprinting the whole; or (8) of reprinting as far as p. 374 only, omitting therefore Part VIII. (Microphysics), Part IX. (Microchemistry), and Part X. (Morphology). It was finally decided to adopt the last course, hence the present issue. Whilst it is much to be regretted that this translation should only now be issued, microscopists will no doubt appreciate the advantage of having a version in English of a work which has received high commendation from both English and foreign critics; and it is hoped that this volume may be supplemented before long by an English version of the further researches in microscopical optics by Professor E. Abbe, of Jena, which have extended so much our knowledge of the matters dealt with in Nageli and Schwen- dener’s work.” Death of Mr. T. Bolton.—We much regret to have to chronicle the death of Mr. T. Bolton, a Fellow of the Society. Mr. Bolton’s intense devotion to microscopical matters is well known to all microscopists, and the perseverance with which he carried on his supply of microscopical organisms was beyond all praise. His services in this connection had materially added to our knowledge of the fresh-water and other fauna of this country, and he was the discoverer of forms not only new to England but new to science. He was ever ready to assist microscopists and naturalists to the utmost of the means at his command, without, as we have often found, making any sufficiently adequate pecuniary demand in return. His death is a serious loss to microscopy. In 1884 the Council of the Royal Society piaced 501. in the hands of Prof. Ray Lankester for the purpose of employing Mr. Bolton to collect material for an investigation of the fresh-water fauna of the midland counties ; and at the Fisheries Exhibition a gold medal was awarded to him for an exhibition of minute life relating to the food of fishes. It will be remembered that last year, in response to a memorial signed by many eminent men of science, a Civil List pension of 50/. per annum was granted to him. “A QUEKETT CLUBMAN.”—The Student’s Handbook to the Microscope: A Practical Guide to its Selection and Management. 72 pp. and figs., 8vo, London, 1887. ALESSANDRI, P. E.—IIl Microscopio e sua applicazione alla Merceologia e Bromato- logia. 173 pp. and 280 figs., 8vo, Milano, 1886. American Society of Microscopists.—Pittsburg Meeting. St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LILI. (1887) pp. 229-34. Brezina, A.—Das neue Goniometer der K.K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt. (The new goniometer of the I.R. Geological Reichsanstalt.) [The optical part is thus described :—‘‘ The observing telescope is provided with a Huyghenian eye-piece, which can be moved to or from the objective, so that by inserting a lens in front of the objective the observer is able to use the whole system of lenses as a Microscope, and by approaching the eye-piece towards the objective to convert it into a telescope. In this way the connection between the image of the signal and that of the face may be tested in crystals with numerous faces. Since, however, the telescope may be raised or lowered, by which move- ments its distance from the axis of the circle is changed, the lens must also be capable of movement towards or from the axis. For this purpose the lens-holder is made to slide upon the telescope tube.” ] Jahrb. Geol. Reichsanst.. XXXIV. (1884) pp. 321-34, Abstr. in Neues Jahrb. f. Mineral., I. (1887) pp. 239-40. [Coprn, E. D., and Kinesuey, J. 8.]}—Wanted a Definition of a “Philosophical Instrument.” ; [Complaint that with the U.S. Custom officials a hydrometer is a “ philosophical instrument,” while a thermometer is a ‘‘ manufacture of glass,” paying a higher ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1041 duty, while “ Microscopes and microtomes are ‘manufactures of metal,’ as ruled by the Washington wiseacres in opposition to the opinions of the best scientific men of the country. . . . A more reasonable interpretation of existing laws, or better, a revision and a reduction of the present duties, would tend generally towards the advancement of American science and the promotion of American honesty.’’] Amer, Natural., XXI. (1887) p. 922. CurtTer, E.—{The Microscope and Old Age. } (“I hope that the Microscope may not be relegated to the younger members of our profession alone. It is an instrument for old age. Ehrenberg worked with his Microscope up to within a few days of his death. The focusing accommodates the defects of vision. Moreover, it is a comfort and solace to an aged physician to quietly explore the mysteries of the unseen world he has been dealing with microscopically during a long and laborious life. May it be a good preparation for that endless life where we shall no longer see through a glass darkly.’’] Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 284. GoreECKI.—Du Microscope appliqué a l’etude de la Minéralogie et de la Pétrographie. Mineralogie micrographique. (The Microscope applied to the study of mineralogy and petrography. Microscopical mineralogy.) Svo, Paris, 1887. Microscopical Studies, Pursuit of, by Amateurs. (Discussion of the question “ How can a man who uses the Microscope, and studies pursued by its aid as a means of recreation, retain his interest in the subject ? 7] Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 197-8. Microscopy in Calcutta. Sci.-Gossip, 1887, pp. 229-30. NEUMANN, C.—Die Brillen, das dioptrische Fernrohr und Mikroskop. Ein Handbuch fir praktische Optiker. (Spectacles, the dioptric telescope and Microscope. A handbook for practical opticians.) Xxxii. and 232 pp., 95 figs., Svo, Wien, Pest, Leipzig, 1887. [Ossorn, H. L.]— Microscope in Medicine. Amer, Mon, Micr. Journ., VIL. (1887) pp. 155-6. Royston-Pricort, G. W.—Microscopical Advances, XXV., XXVI, XXVIL, XXVIUL [Butterfly dust; villi and beads; its isolated beading and reticulations; reticula- tions and crossbars; ultimate beading and woof. } Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1887) pp. 101-2, 173-4, 245-6, 291-2 (4, 10, 5, and 8 figs.). VeERLOT, B.—Le Guide du Botaniste herborisant. (Guide for the collecting botanist.) [Contains descriptions of Microscopes, &c.] 3rd ed. with introduction by Naudin, xvi. and 776 pp. and 34 figs., 12mo, Paris, 1886, ‘gp. Technique.* GQ) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Cultivation of Chetomium.j— For the cultivation of Chzetomium Kunzeanum, says Dr. F. Oltmanns, plum decoction is more suitable than that of dung, as bacteria develope in it less easily. In order;to determine whether the formation of a pollinodium ceases in the ascogonium, the examination of a dead cultivation does not suffice; recourse must be had to cultivations which allow continual observation of a particular carpogonium. Cultivations in moist chambers in hanging drops as they are usually carried out are impracticable, for the fungus stands in need of much oxygen. The mycelia are rarely brought to the fructification, for before this occurs a cessation of their general growth takes place, and even if the perithecia are actually formed it is not of much use, as these prefer to arise from mycelia projecting into the air, or are as near the culture-drops and air as possible —positions unattainable with high powers. To observe an ascogonium for a long time, nothing remains but to keep the ordinary slide-cultivations in the usual way under moist bell-jars until spores are formed. A suitable * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes : (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; (4) Staining and Injecting; (6) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &e.; (6) Miscella- neous. + Bot. Ztg., xlv. (1887) Nos. 13-7 (1 pl.). Cf. this Journal, ante, p, 791. 1042 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ascogonium is then sought for under the Microscope, and the position of the slide upon the stage noted by means of a piece of paper stuck thereon. This device enables us to remove the slide and replace it under the bell-jar for further growth, and thus the stages of development may be examined without difficulty. Medium powers (Zeiss D, Oc. 4) are only available, and these do not meet the requirements of all cases. If the pollinodium be evident, it may perhaps be followed up with this objective. The younger parts can be observed until the brown hairs appear, after which their growth stops. In selecting ascogonia for observation, such as are quite immersed beneath the culture-fluid must be chosen. But as the fungi stand in need of much oxygen, they usually die if, when removed from the culture-drops, they do not receive sufficient air. From the moment when the perithecium is quite closed it becomes more difficult to follow the fate of the ascogonium. From very small perithecia some knowledge may be derived from cleared up sections. It may then be noticed in young fruit-organs in which the hyphe almost completely close up that the ascogonium is quite unchanged. For further examination the assistance of the knife is required. Axial longitudinal sections may be made in the following manner :—Pieces of elder pith cut smooth on one side are soaked in plum decoction until quite saturated therewith. The process, which is slow, may be hastened by frequent and prolonged boiling. Upon the smooth side of the pieces thus prepared spores are sown; these develope so that the perithecia stand vertical to the pith-surface. The fungi, having sufficiently grown, the piece of pith is laid in osmic acid; after hardening they are washed and then imbedded in glycerin jelly. It is also advisable to shave off a thin layer which carries the perithecia and imbed it in glycerin jelly. In both cases the gelatin is hardened in spirit, and then longitudinal sections of the perithecia are made. Imbedding may also be made in ordinary gelatin and in celloidin, but the latter is only suitable for young perithecia. Orienting perithecia under a dissecting Microscope and fixation on elder pith is only possible in the adult stages where the ascogonium formation has already begun, as in this case there is a safe criterion between apex and base. The author finds, too, apart from the fact that the ascogonium does not always lie centrally, and that every axial section does not afford correct information as to the relation of the carpogonium, that it is difficult to decide whether a section is accurately axial or not. Osmic acid facilitates the examination, as it stains the hyphe of the carpogonium brown or brownish yellow. ‘The same colouring also appears in the old cells which proceed from the ascogonium. © Some Novelties in Bacteriological Apparatus.*—(1) Mew form of Incubator.—Dr. M. Schottelius has devised an incubator which, though unprovided with a gas-pressure or thermo-regulator, does not vary summer or winter more than 0°15°. The incubator contains two approximately cubical compartments (50 cm.), and consists of a double-walled box of zinc plate 1°37 m. long, 0°80 m. deep, and 0°80 m. high. Between the double walls circulates a layer of water 10 cm. thick, except at the top, where the layer is 20 cm. thick. The box is subdivided by a median partition, also double-walled and filled with water. The capacity of each chamber is therefore about 1/8 cubic metre. Access to the chamber is obtained by two double-walled zine doors filled with a layer of ashes 10 cm. thick. The doors are placed at opposite ends of the long sides of the incubator. At the lower part of one of the shorter sides is a tap for letting off the water. Between the inner wall of the door and the incubator space is a * Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., ii. (1887) pp. 97-102. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1043 plate of glass fitted in a frame of wood and covered with felt. The incubator is encased in wood, and stands 55 cm. high. Three thermometers, each 72 cm. long, are employed to indicate the temperature of the water and of the two compartments. The scale is marked from 30°-50°, and subdivided into tenths of a degree in such a way that each division is 1 mm. distant from the next. A constant temperature is obtained by means of two simple Bunsen burners fed direct from the meter usually kept at half power. By raising the burner 1 cm. the temperature rises a tenth of a degree, so that to obtain the desired temperature (37°), twenty slips of wood, each 1 em. thick, will be required. If higher temperatures are desired, the burner must be altered. The heating action of the apparatus must of course be ascertained first of all empirically, but this is only required to be done once. It may be mentioned that the course of the circulation is from the floor upwards through the central partition, then right and left along the top, and then downwards to the floor again by the short sides. The thermometers are all encased in a copper sheath, and the floor of the incubator is also made of copper. (2) A perfectly clear Agar Medium, which will withstand a temperature of 40° without melting, is produced in the following manner :—Obtain the raw material, the dried Fucus spinosus (the ordinary agar powder is of no use), and pick out therefrom the clear yellowish transparent pieces. Then weigh the pure agar thus obtained, and wash with a 2 per cent. hydro- chloric acid for five minutes, then with ordinary water frequently changed and perfectly free from dirt. By frequent weighing the quantity of water is ascertained, and by addition of concentrated bouillon the desired con- sistence is attained. It must be noted that for this quality of agar 5-10 per cent. is required to produce a firm medium. The agar bouillon is then left to macerate all night at the ordinary temperature. The next day it is boiled in a water-bath and strained through a linen filter. The usual quantity of pepton and common salt is then added, and after being neutralized with carbonate of potash or soda, is heated once again in the water-bath for about half an hour. The agar solution is then filtered through filter-paper. It flows through clear but slowly. On account of its rapid coagulation it is well to filter direct into sterilized test-tubes or Koch’s flasks. Produced in this way the agar medium is perfectly crystal clear, remains quite firm at 40°, but is, however, somewhat softer than the ordinary solution. (3) Glass vessels for observing potato cultivations, &c., in various gases may be made by expanding as much as possible the lower part of the neck of Koch’s flask of about 200 grm. capacity, and then cutting them off at the middle of the neck. ‘To the upper somewhat conical end an air-tight glass cap is fitted on, and to the side of the bulb a thin glass tube about 10 cm. long is melted in. The latter tube is intended to communicate with the air-pump. ‘The raw potato discs are pushed through the neck opening by removing the glass cap, and after the side tube is plug ged with cotton-wool the flask is sterilized. The medium having been inoculated while the flask is held in the oblique position, the air-pump is connected with the side tube; the air is withdrawn and replaced with the desired gas. When full ‘ the side tube is melted up with a Bunsen burner. In case the access of impurities should be feared during inoculation, a narrow glass tube termi- nated by a small cap can be fitted to the larger cap, and then inoculation may be performed in a current of the gas selected by quickly removing the smaller cover. Absolute safety is attained by closing the rims with vaselin. The tap connecting with the air-valve must be triply perforated, so that the 1044 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO closure of the air-pump is simultaneous with the opening of the gasometer. It is of course obvious that experiments with this apparatus can only be made up to one atmospheric pressure. Cultivation of Bacteria on Coloured Nutrient Media,— Prof. A. v. Rozsahegyi has experimented with the following Bacteria in order to ascertain the effect of cultivation in coloured nutrient media, and the in- fluence of the dye on their growth, and to acquire, if possible, a new criterion for the differential diagnosis of the various species :—(1) bacilli of blue milk and green pus; (2) bacilli of rabbit septicemia and fowl cholera; (8) bacilli of mouse septicemia and swine plague; (4) the Koch and Finkler- Prior comma bacilli. The gelatin was stained with various anilin dyes, prepared in the manner used for staining cover-glass preparations, and with “'Tinctura Kermesina” (cochineal). A few drops of the stain were added to a small flask of liquefied 5 per cent. gelatin, some of which was filtered into test- tubes and sterilized by steam. When set, the gelatin was deeply stained, but quite clear and transparent. ‘The cultivations were made at a tempera- ture of about 20° C., the ordinary temperature of a room. In the result, it was found that in certain cases it was evident to the naked eye that the dye was taken up very freely (e. g, Finkler-Prior comma bacillus in methyl-violet), and the bacilli seemed very deeply stained; yet on microscopical examination they appeared so pale that no advantage accrued from the method of staining. The influence of the dye on the growth of the bacteria was very various, although the alkaline reaction of the gelatin was unchanged by the addition of the reagent. Vesuvin was the most active preventive of growth, and less so gentian, methyl-violet, and Tinctura Kermesina. The impairment of growth was most noticeable in the liquefying varieties, and the form of the liquefaction area was also altered; thus the Finkler-Prior comma bacillus, instead of growing quickly down along the inoculation track, spread downwards in a broad channel, presenting the appearance of a cultivation of Koch’s comma bacillus. Jn the latter the characteristic air-bubble was usually scarcely visible, In the non-liquefying varieties, the surface growth only was as a rule impaired. In most cases the colouring matter was unaffected by non-liquefying bacteria, and where a change was observed, this began at the bottom of the cultivation; the matter causing this decoloration must therefore be produced in the absence of air. Of the liquefying comma bacilli, Finkler’s had no effect on methyl-violet, while both this and Koch’s comma bacillus decolorized fuchsin in the fluid part, and methylen-blue in the solid. With methylen-blue the colour could be restored on shaking, the effect lasting in a cultivation of Koch’s bacillus for days, but in one of Finkler’s a few hours only. With regard to distinguishing between very similar kinds of bacteria, the author found that rabbit septicemia did not grow in gentian, but very strongly in vesuvin, Fowl cholera grew well in gentian, but not in vesuvin, Mouse septicemia grew strongly in methylen-blue; swine plague very poorly, Cultivations of the Finkler-Prior and Koch’s comma bacilli in fuchsin appeared pretty different; in methylen-blue the former lost colour more rapidly, and while it grew well, though slowly in methyl- yiolet, Koch’s bacillus would not grow at all. * Centralbl, f, Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., ij. (1887) pp, 418-24, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1045 (2) Preparing Objects. Preparing Supra-cesophageal Ganglia of Orthoptera.*—Signor G. Cuc- eato snips off the head of the insect with a pair of scissors, and pins it on cork. Thus fixed, the head is immersed in 0°75 per cent. NaCl solution. Then with the aid of scissors and forceps, the chitinous sheath, and the eyes, are removed from the supra-cesophageal ganglion, and the specimen removed to a watch-glass full of salt solution, wherein the trachee and muscles are removed. After a short time the object is placed for forty- eight hours in Flemming’s mixture, and then having been well washed, the rest of the muscles and the fat are removed from the ganglion, It is next put in 36 per cent. spirit, and gradually hardened. After dehydration it is imbedded in paraffin. The sections were fixed down by Mayer's method, and stained with a saturated watery solution of acid fuchsin. The fixative used was Rabl’s solution (chromo-formic acid and platinum ehloride). Treatment of Acari.t—Dr. C. Nérner remarks that Acaride should be treated according to their species and habitat. Such as live within a tissue, e.g. the Acarus scabiei, are best obtained by softening the scabs in a 10 per cent. potash solution for an hour, or perhaps better by allowing a weaker solution to act for a longer time. Very good results are produced by soaking the scabs for a day in a dilute mixture of potash, glycerin, water, and spirit. The mites are thereby rendered not too transparent and preserve their form well. A very good preserving fluid consists of equal parts of 90 per cent. spirit, glycerin, and water. When the scabs are sufficiently softened, they are teased out in dilute glycerin under a dissecting Microscope and all extraneous matter removed. Glycerin preparations may be ringed round with turpentine, with red sealing-wax dissolved in absolute alcohol or with gold size, &e. A good preparation should contain mites in all stages of development, that is to say, eggs, larva, nympha, male and female, and if possible the stage of exuviation. For such slides glycerin jelly is a better mount than glycerin. The free-living mites and ticks which infest the surface of their host are more easily obtained than the pit-digging itch insect. The feather ticks of birds are almost as numerous as the species of birds. These are obtained by laying feathers under a dissecting Microscope and removing the animals with the needles ; the breast feathers of small birds require to be placed in a dilute potash solution from which they are picked out under the Microscope. The histological structure of the Acaridz is best studied in the living animal immersed in a drop of oil, glycerin, or water. The author has also used a mixture of glycerin, spirit, acetic acid and eosin, where these reagents were extremely dilute. To prevent the animals from being crushed during the microscopical examination it is only necessary to support the cover-glass on two others. Very pretty pictures may be obtained by staining: for his purposes Ranvier’s picrocarmine is the most generally useful. Other staining fluids recommended are (1) a mixture of equal parts of picrocarmine and indigo- carmine, (2) eosin either in alcoholic solution or watery, to which 1/3 glycerin is added ; (3) methyl-green; (4) ammonia-carmine; (5) Magdala red. Rosanilin and fuchsin are the most suitable for the cast-off skin. With regard to their receptivity for dyes it should be borne in mind that mites are very uncertain, some taking up none or with great difficulty, while * Cuccato, G., ‘Sulla struttura del ganglio sopra-esofageo di aleuni ortotteri,’ Bologna, 1887. } Zeitschr. f, Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 159-67. 1046 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO others take up too much. Haller recommends boiling the mites, &., in a mixture of aq. dest. and potash (2:1) and then mounting the chitinous framework of the head in glycerin slightly dilute, while Ehlers treated them with ammonia and oil of cloves, but the author had no success with either of these methods. The structure of the trachee is best shown by slight staining with picrocarmine, illuminated by Abbe’s condenser with central stop. Sections of stained mites and ticks are prepared by immersing them in gelatin and hardening in alcohol. They are then imbedded in elder pith and so sectioned. Ova should be examined in dilute salt solution (glycerin swells their capsule too much) and without a cover-glass. Picrocarmine stains ova very well and clearly brings out the segmentation, which if unstained and in glycerin does not appear. Preparation of Microscopical Parasites.*—Dr. Stoss obtains his pre- parations of Acaride by scraping off the scabs from the diseased animal and softening them in a 10 per cent. potash solution for half an hour. A little piece of the softened scab is then mixed with a drop of water and examined carefully under a low power (xX 90). A suitable Acarus having been discovered, it is removed from the action of the potash solution by pushing the slide to the right and the cover-glass to the left with a needle. The Acarus is then freed from all extraneous objects and left on the slide for mounting, or is transferred to a watchglass containing glycerin by means of a needle. The fluid, which is suitable for extracting the potash lye, for preventing the Acarus from drying, or for preserving the animal, consists of a mixture of equal parts of 90 per cent. spirit, glycerin, and water. The Acarus, immersed in a drop of this fluid, is sealed up-with a rim of wax, paraffin, or asphalt run round the cover-glass, but dammar or Canada balsam dissolved in chloroform or xylol are probably better and more durable. When the Acari exist in quantity among the scabs and scales, and there is no difficulty in obtaining a good specimen, as, for example, is usually the case in cat’s mange, the following procedure is recommended :—The scales are put for some time in the potash solution, and are then washed in distilled water several times. The Acari and scales are allowed to settle at the bottom of the vessel, and the supernatant fluid decanted off. The glycerin-spirit mixture is then poured over them, and in this they may be kept for an indefinite period without undergoing any change. Psorosperms are well preserved in the glycerin-spirit mixture, but the proportions are different (1—1—2 water). And it is noticeable that dif- ferent objects require slight alterations in the quantities of the constituents in order to produce an equilibrium between the contracting action of the spirit and the swelling action of the glycerin. Thus Oxyuris mastigodes remains quite intact in a fluid of 1—1—2, while Filaria shows fine surface- creasings, which do not appear with a little more water. Although these parasites keep very well by the foregoing methods, they are extremely susceptible of mechanical injury. Damage from this cause is avoided by mounting in glycerin jelly. This medium is produced by softening gelatin by leaving it all night in water. It is then cut up and fluidified in a water-bath without the addition of water, and mixed with 10 per cent. glycerin and 1 per cent. carbolic acid. When cold the mass is cut up and kept in stoppered bottles. A mite or tick is mounted by placing small bits round it on a slide and then warming gently over a * Deutsche Zeitschr. f. Thiermed. u. Vergl. Pathol., xii. (1887) pp. 202-5. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1047 spirit-lamp. When the jelly is melted a warm cover-glass is imposed. If the mass should swell up over the cover-glass, it is easily removed when cold. Investigation of Histology of Eunice.*— Prof. EK. Jourdan reports that the use of alcohol at 90 per cent. has always given him the worst results with Annelids, and that the same has been the case with picric acid ; when either of these reagents has been used the elements of the tissues are quite beyond recognition. The use of 2 per cent, solution of bichromate of ammonia, of bichloride of mercury, either saturated, as Lang’s solution, or in a 5 per cent. solution, was more successful. Osmic acid (1 in 200 parts) was the best reagent for the study of the antenne and the delicate organs in general, and was always regarded as a good means of control for observations made after the use of other reagents. After the use of these fixing solutions, the specimens were washed and then placed in alcohol of increasing degrees of strength up to 90 per cent. The alum-carmine solution of Grenacher was most used in staining. Celloidin was used at the commencement of the research, but was not found to present any advantage over paraffin; the mixture of Schallibaum was found excellent in fixing the pieces after placing in paraffin, and they were thus completely coloured. The plates carrying the series of sections were treated with various strengths of alcohol, dehydrated by absolute alcohol, and mounted in Canada balsam. Prof. Jourdan found greater difficulty in his teasings ; the most successful method was one which has been used to isolate the nerve-tubes of Verte- brates. Fresh pieces were treated with one-hundredth solution of osmic acid, and were then allowed to macerate in weak alcohol or even distilled water. Specimens preserved for a year in bichromate of ammonia were also successfully teased in a drop of hematoxylic glycerin, to which a drop of glycerin was added for examination and preservation. Preparing Epithelia of Actinie.t—Dr. J. H. List used the ten- tacles of Anthea cereus and Sagartia parasitica in his examination of the epithelia of Actiniz. The tentacles were snipped off in the vessels in which the animals were kept alive, and when the contraction due to the irritation had passed off, the greater part of the sea-water was removed with a pipette, only so much being left as would serve to keep the specimen moist. The tissue of the tentacles was then fixed with chrom-osmium acetic acid. This was allowed to act for ten minutes; the specimen was then washed, and after-hardened in spirit. Isolation of the elements was etiected by placing the tentacles in a vessel containing 100 ccm. sea-water and 30 ccm. Flemming’s fluid (chrom- osmium acetic acid mixture). After allowing this to act for ten minutes, the tentacles were transferred to a large quantity of 0-2 per cent. acetic acid, wherein they remained for two to three hours. The specimens thus treated were afterwards placed in glycerin and water (equal volumes), and there teased out. Excellent isolation-preparations of the cells of the ecto- derm were thus obtained; these kept extremely well, and further differen- tiation was obtained by staining with picrocarmine. Breaking up Diatomaceous Rocks.{—M. Guinard breaks up diatoma- ceous rocks by putting small fragments in a test-tube and covering them for about 2 cm. with crystals of commercial acetate of soda and then adding one or two drops of water. (Ona larger scale the proportion of water is * Ann. Sci. Nat—Zool., ii. (1887) pp. 239-42. ¢ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 210-1. ¢ Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr.. xiii. (1887) pp. 180-2. 1048 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 5 ccm. to 100 of the salt.) The test-tube is then placed in a water-bath, and the contents dissolved at boiling-point. It is left for ten minutes in the hot water and then removed and allowed to cool gradually, or it may be cooled rapidly by plunging it in cold water. A small crystal of soda acetate is then dropped in, when, owing to its supersaturation, it at once crystallizes. By repeating this two or three times the rock is quite reduced to powder. However, very refractory rocks, such as those from Jutland, require five or six repetitions. The next step merely consists in adding water to excess to dissolve out the salt. Another substance, the hyposulphite of soda, may be used for the same purpose. The hyposulphite of soda and some bits of rocks are mixed up in a test-tube and heated in a water-bath to 48°. The salt deliquesces, and then having been allowed to cool, a small crystal is dropped in. Water is then added in excess to dissolve out the salt. Of course the operation must be repeated until the rock is properly pulverized. The foregoing methods, the first of which is preferred by the author, are simpler than the sulphate of soda method of Brun. Hueprpe, F.—Cover-glass Preparations in Bacteriological Investigations. Amer. Mon. Micr, Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 190-4, from Hueppe’s ‘Methods of Bacteriological Investigation,’ transi. by Dr. H. M. Biggs (New York). James, F. L.—Preparing Crystals of Salicine.—Referring to the note at p. 507, Dr. F. L. James further writes :— “When, some months ago, I made note of the fact that I had hit upon the method of reduplicating the astonishingly beautiful slides of salicine accidentally made some years ago, I had little idea of the possibilities of that alkaloid in the way of strange and gorgeous groupings. Some of my later experiments in this direction have resulted in slides utterly throwing into the shade all former successes. The human eye never before dwelt on so wonderful and gorgeous phenomena, as are presented in some of these latest slides. All laws and rules of crystallization seem to be set aside, and the material runs riot in its bewildering forms and combinations. The most beautiful auroras and most brilliant pyro- technics fade into insignificance alongside some of the latest results.” St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LILI. (1887) pp. 166-7. QuimBy, B. F.—Insect Preparation. II, [Mounting—mounting insects as opaque objects. | Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 266-9. (3) Cutting, including Imbedding. Myrtle Wax Imbedding Process.*—Myrtle wax, or bayberry tallow, writes Mr. J. W. Blackburn, is a substance derived from Myrica cerifera. The wax is found covering the fruit as a whitish coat, and is separated by boiling the berries in water and removing the wax on cooling. It is of a pale greyish-green colour, somewhat diaphanous, brittle, slightly unctuous to the touch, is feebly aromatic, and a little bitter to the taste. Its specific gravity is about that of water, and its melting-point 46°-6 C.—48°-8 C. (116°-120° F.). It is insoluble in water, scarcely soluble in cold alcohol, soluble except about 13 per cent. in 20 parts boiling alcohol, which deposits the greater part of it on cooling. It is also soluble in boiling ether, and slightly so in oil of turpentine. It is very soluble in chloroform benzol and xylol. The foregoing account is descriptive of the true product of Myrica cerifera, but for the purposes of the microtomist it will not answer. A variety must be obtained which is yellowish-white in colour, tougher and softer. This variety is probably the product of Rhus succedanea Ln., and should be called “Japan wax.” Dr. M. N, Miller, who first described this method,f states that “ bayberry tallow is firm and solid at ordinary temperature, and is solid in warm alcohol.” He states that specimens may be removed from the alcohol in * Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., viii. (1887) pp. 164-5. t N. York. Med. Record, xxvii. (1885) p. 429. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1049 which they have been preserved, and placed at once in a bath of melted wax ; but the author thinks it is better to first dehydrate in absolute alcohol, and then place in a preliminary bath of wax dissolved in chloroform. Benzol and xylol will dissolve large quantities of the wax, but it is deposited in a granular form on their evaporation; but after solution in chloroform the wax is left in a solil form. Hence chloroform is preferred as a solvent for the preparatory bath, but for all other purposes the less expensive reagents may be used. The chloroform may be used over and over again, and if occasionally a little fresh be added to it, the bath may be kept always ready. The method of using myrtle wax is as follows:—The specimens are dehydrated in absolute alcohol and then placed in a solution of wax in chloroform as a preliminary bath, or transferred directly to the melted wax. The pieces will be infiltrated in about the same time required by the paraffin method. The pieces may be fastened on cork, by using the melted wax, or imbedded in blocks of wax or paraffin to support the specimen in the clamp of the microtome. The sections are cut dry into benzol, washed in alcohol, stained and mounted as usual. To completely remove the wax, it is best to take the sections through a second bath of benzol, as any remaining wax will be precipitated by the alcohol used in the washing. Warm absolute alcohol may be used to free the sections from wax, but the benzol is better and cheaper. Ordinary alcohol warmed will not dissolve the wax perfectly. Warmed absolute alcohol will dissolve most of it, but will deposit it on cooling. The author therefore thinks that the above method is preferable to the immediate transferring from the preserving alcohol to the wax-bath, as advised by Dr. Miller. The method is more rapid than the paraffin or celloidin process; there is very little if any shrinkage; it does not injure the most delicate tissues ; and it is inexpensive. If hardened in large masses there is slight shrinkage and a tendency to crack; this may be prevented by the addition of a small amount of paraffin, with which it is miscible in all proportions. The author states that he has never seen a section injured by cracking. De Groot’s Automatic Microtome.*—Herr J. G. de Groot’s instrument (fig. 248) consists of a rectangular frame, supported on four feet. ‘T'o the long sides of this frame are fitted two cylindrical bars, upon which the object-carrier slides. The latter is a metal plate b faced with ebonite, and supported on the slide rails by four feet: on its under side are two vertical bars, joined at their ends by a cross-piece, from the centre of which uprises a thick screw, and this latter passes through a threaded ringr. This screw- ring supports two vertical bars, the upper ends of which pass through openings in the metal plate and are then again united by a second ring. To this last is fixed a third ring c, which supports a cup-shaped tube d filled with paraffin for the reception of the object to be cut. At the lower end of the main screw is a horizontal cog-wheel e by the movement of which the ring r and with it the object-holder d are raised or lowered. The to- and-fro movement of the object-carrier is effected by means of a rod which connects with the large wheel f. The extent to which the screw is turned in the to-and-fro movement is regulated by the escapement a. This isa rod with rack which works up and down in a box and is fixed by a screw. When the object-carrier moves backwards, the teeth of the rack grip those of the toothed wheel c, so that the more they are engaged the deeper the rod is pushed in. This depth is easily determined from the figures on the rod, but it must be noticed that the hinder side of the box coincides with the * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 145-8 (1 fig.). 1050 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO streaks upon which the numbers stand. When the slide is pushed forwards the toothed rod is disengaged from the wheel, and is replaced by another Fie 248. Ds Groot’s Auromatic MicroTome. simple arrangement not shown in the illustration. The cog-wheel e has 150 teeth, and as one complete turn raises the object 3/4 mm., one tooth represents an ascent of 1/200 mm. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1051 The knife-carrier g terminates in front in two openings, through which the knife is passed, and is there fastened by means of two screws. The cup-shaped object-holder d fits accurately in the ring c. One-half of the latter is movable and fixed by two screws, so that the preparation may be placed in any desired position. The object is imbedded in the usual manner in pure paraffin, and is then melted in the cup filled with hard paraffin. 'The cup is then fixed in the ring in such a manner that one surface of the paraffin mass is parallel to the knife. When cutting, each section is pushed off the knife by its predecessor, and adheres to it so that a ribbon-like strip is produced, and this is taken upon a brush and placed on the band h. This band moves over two rollers, one of which is attached to the front side of the microtome, the other to the knife-carrier g, The first section is stuck firmly to the band, the lower side of which is pulled by the left hand, so that the whole series of sections eventually lie on the upper side. Excellent sections of the frog’s embryo, and series of sections of the embryos of Hrinaceus and Gallus domesticus, which are 15 mm. long, have been prepared by this instrument, which is also said to work very quickly, so that 1000 sections can be prepared in ten minutes. The fig. represents the microtome about 1/5 its natural size. Hayes’s Ether Freezing Microtome.—This instrument (fig. 249*) was designed by Dr. R. A. Hayes with the object of affording to those who have occasional need to cut sections of tissues for pathological investigations, &c., with the means of doing so quickly, conveniently, and accurately. It is Fic. 249, very compact, solidly constructed, and simple in plan. It freezes rapidly, and permits sections of large surface to be made with precision, sections lin. x 5/8 in. having been cut by it without difficulty. It consists of a solid cast-iron base A, 10 in. x 44 in., which rests upon a mahogany block. Extending the whole length of the upper surface of the base is a V-shaped gutter, on the planed sides of which slides a heavy metal block B, on the flat top of which the razor is secured (any ordinary razor can be used), the tang being grasped between two flat pieces of iron, which are pressed together by a winged nut C. The razor by this arrange- ace can be secured at any desired angle to the direction of its motion to and fro. The freezing chamber is formed by a short vulcanite cylinder D, its * The block is supplied by the author, but hardly does justice to the apparatus. 1052 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO lower end being screwed into a brass base H. To its upper end is fastened by two bayonet-catches a brass plate F, on which the tissue fo be cut is placed. Inside the cylinder D, and rising from the base H, is an ordinary spray, the air and ether being supplied through tubes G and H, passing outside, through the base. There is also an opening in the floor of the chamber communicating with the tube I, to allow the overflow of ether in case of any accumulation inside the cylinder; any such overflow may be returned by the tube to the ether supply bottle K. The freezing chamber is secured to the top of the micrometer-serew arrangement Z, which is of the simplest form, but has a perfectly smooth and regular motion. The nut is divided to indicate a section 0°01 mm. in thickness, but half this thickness can be cut without difficulty. The method of using the microtome is very simple. The slide and block D having been carefully rubbed clean and well oiled, the razor is clamped at any desired angle, the bottle K is filled with ether (good dry methylated ether answers perfectly), and the piece of tissue to be cut having been previously saturated with thick gum solution, is placed upon the plate F, and the spray which plays upon the under surface of the plate F set working by the hand-pump M; in a short time the tissue will be frozen quite through, and if a number of sections are required, an oceasional stroke or two of the pump will keep the gum in proper condition for cutting. The sections are easily cut, as in other microtomes of this class, by alternate movements of the screw Z and stroke of the razor. The instrument may also be used for cutting tissue imbedded in paraffin or other mass, the object to be cut being secured in position, either by being gently heated at its under surface and pressed on the plate F', to which it firmly adheres on cooling, or by a simple clamping arrangement, which can be substituted for the freezing-chamber. When used in this way large numbers of sections may be cut in series by attaching to the razor a light support to receive the sections as they are cut. Paoletti’s Automatic Microtome.*-—Sig. E. Paoletti has invented an automatic microtome, which is said to answer perfectly. To a rectangular vertical upright are adapted two guides, between which the object-earrier moves vertically. The carrier is fitted with a clamp, movable in all directions. A micrometer screw, to which is fixed a toothed wheel, moves the earrier vertically upwards. Another wheel fixed to the upper end of a vertical plate is moved with this in a horizontal plane by a movement of rotation, which is transmitted to it by a lever. From the periphery of the wheel projects a vertical tooth, which, acting excentrically, displaces with a, to-and-fro horizontal movement a knife-carrier, the level of which is a little higher than that of the clamp containing the preparation. At the lowest part of the plate is another tooth, which, as the instrument works, meets at intervals of about half the circumference the teeth of the cogwheel, and by locking with these imparts to the screw a displacement which serves to raise the object-carrier. Now in one complete turn of the plate the movement of the knife takes place in one half, the raising of the specimen . in the other half. The tooth which causes the cogwheel to revolve can be approximated to or removed from the latter by a milled head, and thus displace it by a greater or less segment, according to the thickness desired to be given to the sections. According to the distance of the tooth from the cogwheel, the latter can be displaced by a fifth to a twenty-seventh of the circumference, and thus a thickness varying from 0-1 to 0:02 mm. can be given to the sections. * Atti Soc. Tose, Sci. Nat.—Proc. Verb., v. (1887) pp. 250-1. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1053 Buacksurn, J. W.—On Methods of preparing Tissues for Microscopical Study, and Brains for Anatomical Demonstration. {Freezing method. Hardening agents. Interstitial imbedding. Myrtle-wax im- bedding process, supra, p. 1048. Wax method applied to the preparation of brains for anatomical demonstration. ] Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 161-5. Gay, G.—[Home-made Microtome.} [The materials needed are a block of hard wood 5 in. by 32 in. by 2 in., a fine thumbscrew with a nut on it, a piece of glass tubing, and a glass slide cut length- wise through the middle. Plane the top of the block perfectly true, then bore a hole, the centre of which should be 14 in. from the end, which the glass tube will exactly fit. Saw a strip from the bottom of the block, and fit the nut in the hole. Cement the glass tube in the hole in the large block with marine glue, allowing it to project through nearly the thickness of the glass side. Cement the glass slips on the top touching each side of the tube. Fit a block of wood 1; in. long, witha rivet in the bottom, so that the thumbscrew will work smoothly on it, to the glass tube. Screw the 3/8 in. strip with the notch in it to the block, and cut a notch 1} in. by 23 in. in the block to fasten it to a table, and the microtome is complete. Sections may be cut with a flat or common razor.” Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 287. Krysinsk1i, 8.—Beitrage zur histologischen Technik. 1. Photoxylin als Einbettungs- mittel. 2. and 3. see Staining. (Contributions to histological technique. 1. Pho- toxylin as an imbedding medium.) Virchhow’s Arch. f. path. Anat. u. Hist., CVIII. (1887) pp. 217-9. LatTHAmM, V. A.—The Microscope and How to Use It. XII. Section-cutting. Journ. of Micr,, VI. (1887) pp. 238-48. (4) Staining and Injecting. Perényi’s Mikrolektron, for hardening, staining, and imbedding.*— Prof. J. v. Perényi has devised an apparatus, which he calls a “ Mikro- lektron,” for facilitating the processes of hardening, staining, and imbed- ding without incurring the risk of damaging the preparation. Figs. 250-252 Fig. 250. give a complete idea of the apparatus, which is nothing more than a rectangular vessel made of glazed majolica, and placed for convenience on a metal stand A (fig. 250). A dish of the size recommended, measures 16 cm. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 148-52 (8 figs.). 1887. 3 Z 1054 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO long, 16 em. broad, and 6 em. high, and holds 500 ccm. of fluid. On the bottom (figs. 251 and 252) are seen six oval pits, each holding 50 ccm. of fluid. These pits communicate by narrow channels with a deepish central hollow, in the middle of which Fie, 251. is a hole, closed when the = vessel is in use by a plug D (fig. 251). The dish or tray is covered with a glass top C. The way to use this ap- Fig. 252. paratus is of course obvious ; the various fluids are simply poured in through a funnel, and after the necessary time are withdrawn by removing the plug D. Imbedding with paraffin is executed by putting some soft paraffin in the mid- channel, and then transferring to an incubator. When melted the paraffin finds its way into the egg-shaped pits, and thus saturates the preparation. The excess of soft paraffin having been with- drawn by removing the plug, the process is repeated with hard paraffin. Tt is not necessary to use an incubator, a naked flame answers the purpose. Celloidin or any other imbedding medium can be manipulated in the Mikrolektron. After using the apparatus, it is advisable to clean out the cavities and channels by the aid of heat and absolute alcohol. Method of Staining and Fixing the Elements of Blood.*—Recent discoveries of morphological elements in the blood hitherto unknown, as well as the newly-published facts concerning its coagulation, have aroused an interest in the subject which calls for an acquaintance with the methods with which it is possible to follow those results. Accordingly, Miss Alice L. Gaule describes the method employed in the Physiological Laboratory, Zurich ; for, although it has been mentioned by Prof. Gaule in his lectures for several years, it has not as yet been published. The methods formerly used were that of examining fresh blood, and that, perfected by Ehrlich, which consisted in staining dried blood. * Amer. Natural., xxi. (1887) pp. 677-83. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1055 The new method consists ina series of manipulations requiring only thirty- five minutes for their completion. The following is a list of the reagents, together with the length of time and the order in which each is to be used :— Mins. 1. Corrosive sublimate (concentrated solution) .. 6 SPOPa lcd WALCE) “scr, 3. . ; sa; bg eodcw fon 1) 1 3. Absolute alcohol .. 5 4. Distilled water Re A eee coe oe cae dal eee eee 5. Hematoxylin (1/2 per cent. alum solution, to which, for every 100 ccm. employed, 20 drops 5 per cent. alcoholic solution have been added).. 6 6. Distilled water Pu tice ett see 1 7. Nigrosin (1/2 per cent. water solution) 1 8. Distilled water Ht RE has SORE PIO See Vga, ae 9. Eosin (1 gr. eosin dissolved in 60 cem. alcohol; 140 cem. distilled ROME Bee fie.) ceo ealoss Gs cham She de ror) seehess, oo 10. Alcohol .. .. iD 11. Oil of cloves .. . 1-2 12. ol. 13, Canada balsam (diluted with xylol until it readily flows). As receptacles for these fluids, each person has upon his table three shallow glass dishes with flat bottoms, so large that a slide may be easily put in and taken out of them. Into the first of these is poured corrosive sublimate, into the second distilled water, and into the third absolute alcohol. It is necessary either to label the dishes or to place the two not at the moment in use at one side. For the colouring fluids bottles are used whose stoppers serve at the same time as droppers or pipettes. The most convenient form is the glass stopper, which broadens into a funnel, closed by arubber membrane. For oil of cloves, xylol, and Canada balsam wide- mouthed bottles are used. In the first two bottles are brushes; in the last, the ordinary glass rod. Other necessary utensils are a glass rod, sharp- pointed scissors, clean slides and cover-slips, filter-paper, twine or coarse thread, a small bottle of absolute alcohol, asharp, clean needle, a fine clean rag, and a hand-towel. Aside from these, a board, 5 by 15 in., with two pairs of holes, large enough for a piece of tape to pass through double, is an essential help. The first pair of holes should be 4 in. distant from the second, and the two holes of each pair 13 in. apart. The tape should be so passed through the holes that there will remain upon one side of the board loops, on the other long ends, by which, upon passing the extremities of the frog through the loops, one may easily and firmly tie the frog upon the board. Such preparation is necessary, otherwise the manipulations cannot follow one another quickly enough. After these preliminaries have been completed, the labelled bottles being placed within reaching distance, the distilled water and alcohol in front of these, and the corrosive sublimate nearest of all, we are ready to bind our frog upon the above-mentioned board and begin our preparation. We make use of the frog for this purpose at first, since its blood coagulates less quickly than that of mammals. The vena femoralis, which may be seen as a dark blue line below the knee-joint on the inner side of the leg, having been snipped, we quickly bring with a glass rod a drop of the blood which comes from the wound upon a slide previously moistened by the breath, and throw the whole into the dish of sublimate for six minutes. Ifa little care is taken to spread out the drop of blood in putting it on the slide, the result is more satisfactory. Brought from the sublimate into the dish of water, we find that the greater part of the blood adheres to the slide. The superfluous sublimate being washed from the preparation during the moment that it remains in the water, we next 3 2 2 1056 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO partially dry the slide by resting it upon filter-paper before dropping it into the aleohol-bath. The slide, which has remained in alcohol six minutes, is brought again into distilled water for half a minute, since our colouring fluids are water solutions. ‘The hematoxylin is then dropped upon the slide, and removed again at the end of six minutes by resting the edge of the slide upon filter-paper, and afterwards washing with distilled water for one minute. The same process follows with the nigrosin and eosin, the first remaining upon the slide for one minute, the second two minutes. From the eosin we bring the preparation directly into alcohol, since the eosin is partially an alcohol solution. At the end of five minutes the slide is taken out of the alcohol, and, in order to be quite sure that there is no water still clinging to the preparation, we incline the slide at a slight angle to the rag with which we are holding it, and pour a few drops of alcohol from the small bottle over it. If upon dropping oil of cloves on the preparation it should be dark upon a dark sleeve or other dark background, we may remove the oil of cloves with a few drops of xylol. Having quickly cleaned the slide close up to the preparation, we place a drop of Canada balsam upon it, which must be allowed to spread out before the cover-slip is lowered upon it. Human blood is prepared in the same way, except that here the finger- tip undergoes the surgical operation. Mitosis Staining.*—Dr. H. Zwaardemaker states that mitoses are most successfully stained by the aid of a mordant. For hardening he usually employs Flemming’s chromo-osmium-acetic acid mixture, and then stains the sections with an anilin-safranin solution. This is made by pouring an alcoholic solution of safranin into about an equal volume of anilin water. In this stain the sections remain from two minutes to an hour, the exact length of time depending on the softness or the compactness of the tissue. Decoloration is performed with slightly acidulated spirit. Colouring the Nuclei of Living Cells.;—The most interesting fact brought out in Mr. D. H. Campbell’s work at Tiibingen is the fact that several anilin colours have the property of colouring the nucleus of many plant cells without killing them. That the living nucleus can be stained has been demonstrated by several observers in the case of animal cells, but as far as he knows, it has not hitherto been observed in plant cells. Though the work is not yet completed, he thinks it will be interesting to give briefly some of the processes by which the results were obtained, and some of the objects employed. The first colour used was dahlia, a violet-purple pigment, by whose aid Lavalette had succeeded in colouring living spermatozoa and the nuclei of sperm-cells. The most favourable object so far found by the author is the nucleus of the cells of stamen hairs of Tradescantia. T. Virginica was principally used, but other species gave equally good results. Hairs should be chosen from young buds, as these are perfectly colourless, not having developed the coloured cell-sap of the older hairs. The sepals and petals are removed, and the stamens thus exposed are plunged into an aqueous solution of the dahlia. After an immersion of from half an hour to three or four hours, or even much longer, depending on the strength of the solu- tion, it will be found that in many cases the nuclei are more or less deeply coloured, and that the cell is not killed is evinced by the continuance of the protoplasmic streaming, It is quite surprising to see how deep the nucleus is often stained without killing the cell. A nucleus so coloured appears * Zeitschy. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) p. 212. + Bot. Gazette, xii. (1887) pp. 192-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1057 perfectly normal, there being no distortion or change beyond the change in colour. As yet he has not studied especially what parts of the nucleus are coloured, but it appears to be the nucleolus and microsomes only, as in the case of cells that have first been killed and then stained according to the ordinary methods. Among other objects that have given more or less satisfactory results were the hairs from the base of the perianth of Liliwm bulbiferwm, stamen hairs of Aphodelus albus, leaves of Elodea Canadensis and Vallisneria spiralis, root-hairs of Trianea Bogatensis, Cucurbita Pepo, Tradescantia zebrina, spermatozoids of Chara and a fern (probably Blechnum). In all cases cells were chosen in which there was evident protoplasmic movement, in order that there might be a certain means of determining whether or not the cell was still living. Similar and usually quite as good results were also obtained with mauvein and methyl-violet, both colours closely resembling dahlia. Usually a 1 per cent. solution was made, and this diluted with from 50 to 1000 parts of water, according to circumstances. Some doubtful results were obtained with other colours, but too uncertain to warrant recording. Absorption of Anilin Colours by Living Cells.*—Referring to Pfeffer’s experiments showing that, contrary to the ordinarily accepted idea, various anilin colours can be absorbed in large quantities by living cells, Mr. D. H. Campbell calls attention to some easily made but instructive experiments bearing on the subject. Pfeffer’s experiments were mostly made with methylen-blue and methyl- violet, though numerous other colours were also tried. Among colours not employed by him, the author found that dahlia and mauvein, both very similar to methyl-violet, were quite as good, and acted much in the same way. The yellow colour chrysoidin also gave good results. No very satis- factory results were obtained with red pigments, though in some cases safranin, tropeolin, and fuchsin gave tolerably good colouring, but either it was too diffuse or the cell-wall was more deeply coloured than the contents. With methylen-blue either the cell-sap is coloured, often very intensely, e.g. root-hairs of T’rianea Bogatensis, or a precipitate is formed in the cell- sap, e.g. Spirogyra. If vesicles of tannic acid are present, as is the case in Zygnema, these are coloured dark blue. Methyl-violet, dahlia, and mauvein colour the protoplasm and nucleus, and are specially valuable in the study of the latter. In some cases they are also precipitated in the cell- sap. Chrysoidin appears to colour only the protoplasm. The following are some of the objects that were used :—Root-hairs of Trianea Bogatensis, Cucurbita, Tradescantia zebrina ; stamen-hairs of various species of Trades- cantia ; Spirogyra spp., Zygnema spp.; roots of Lemna minor ; leaves of Elodea (Anacharis) Canadensis, Vallisneria spiralis ; pollen-tubes of Hemero- callis spp., Tradescantia Virginica, Scilla spp.; spermatozoids of Chara. The objects are placed in a solution of 0-002-0-001 per cent., varying with the nature of the cell-wall and the time of immersion. Root-hairs are usually especially delicate, and the solution should be very dilute or the immersion very brief. In most cases objects were selected where there was marked protoplasmic streaming, as this is the best means of determining whether the cell is alive or not. It is surprising how deeply the protoplasm or nucleus may be stained without materially affecting the streaming. For a demonstration of the staining of the protoplasm the root-hairs of Trianea were found to be * Bot. Gazette, xii. (1887) pp. 193-4. 1058 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO- specially favourable, on account of their large size and the rapid streaming, as well as the readiness with which the colour is absorbed. Staining Pathogenic Bacteria with Anilin Dyes.*— Dr. C. Ginther, when dealing with pathogenic bacteria, usually employs Ehrlich’s anilin- gentian solution, Léffler’s potassium methylen-blue and Ziehl’s carbolic- acid fuchsin solution. Dry preparations stain better if before staining they are washed with 1-5 per cent. acetic acid, and, if they have been kept unstained for a long time, with a 2-3 per cent. watery pepsin solution. The author discusses Koch’s method for staining tubercle bacilli with the improvements of Ehrlich and Rindefleisch, and recommends the Ehrlich procedure as the best and safest in practice. Gram’s method is advised for the pneumonia cocci of Friedlander and Frankel, for the cocci of pyemia and erysipelas, for the bacilli of anthrax, lepra, and tubercle, and for actinomyces. On the other hand, Gram’s treatment is quite unsuited for gonococci, bacillus of typhus, of glanders and of cholera, and also for the spirochete of recurrent fever. For preparations which have been a long time in bad spirit and which resist decoloration by Gram’s method, the following modification is recommended :—Stain the sections for 1 minute, dry with blotting-paper; decolorize for 2 minutes in the iodide-iodine solution, then 1/2 minute in spirit, then 10 sec. in 3 per cent. hydrochloric acid alcohol, after this the sections are transferred to spirit. An inconvenience appertaining to Gram’s method, in the deep-staining of minute fat-globules, is best avoided by treating the specimen before it is stained with chloroform, and then washing with absolute alcohol. In order that the sections may be well stained it is advisable that not more than two or three should be manipulated at a time, as decoloration is often difficult. For double staining, the author recommends the ordinary nuclear stains for contrasting with the stain of the micro-organisms. For erysipelas sections stained by Gram’s method, a double stain is best effected by previously using ammonia-carmine or picrocarmine, a procedure which will be found more suitable than after-staining. ‘The preparations are best mounted in xylol balsam; and decoloration of tubercle and lepra bacilli, both in sections and in cover-glasses, is most perfectly avoided by the dry method as recommended by Unna. Staining the Bacillus of Glanders.t—Dr. G. M. Sternberg says that these bacilli are best stained with a concentrated alkaline solution of methylen-blue. For staining the bacilli in sections of tissue containing them, Léffler recommends that they be immersed in the above-mentioned solution for 12 to 24 hours, and then very carefully treated with very dilute acetic acid until the sections have been decolorized sufficiently to bring the bacilli into view. After this treatment they should be washed in alcohol, and immersed in oil of cedar, which does not dissolve the anilin colours, and is therefore to be preferred to oil of cloves in all preparations in which these colours are used for staining bacteria. Anilin Stains.{—Dr. S. Griesbach’s experiments on the anilin dyes lead him to the conclusion that between the constituents of the dyes and those of the tissues direct chemical combinations according to the laws of affinity are effected, and therefore all those forces which have a promoting, retard- ing, or destructive influence on affinity play a part in the staining process, while above all influences is the capacity for a saturation of the tissues with free gases, or, as Ehrlich expresses it, the gas saturation. The intro- * Deutsche Med. Wochenschr., 1887, No. 22. + Microscope, vii. (1887) p. 309, from Med. News. ¢ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iii. (1886) pp. 358-85. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1059 ductory remarks close with a reference to the so-called mordants, the effect and use of which is well known. The author believes that for microscopical research such aids are of little or no value for staining purposes, as much of what is afterwards seen and described in the preparation must be ascribed to structural alterations due to the action of the mordants. After enumerating the various anilin dyes, the classification of which is adopted from Hummel,* the author proceeds to discuss the ¢haracters and staining properties of Congo red and benzo-purpurin. Congo red is soluble in water, the solution being bromide-red. The specific gravity of the com- mercial article is 2°2149. The reaction of the chemically pure preparation is neutral, that of the trade preparation alkaline. To obtain this pure article the dye is dissolved in about 20 parts water, and is then precipitated by the aid of heat with an equal volume of saturated salt solution. After cooling, the dye is washed off the filter with the salt solution. The least quantity of a free acid turns the Congo solution blue, hence Congo is a delicate test for a free acid. This double action has been turned to account for demon- strating the presence of free acids in certain animals, and the alkaline reaction of the living tissue in others. According to the author, the watery solution of Congo is alone suitable for microscopical purposes, for, although miscible with glycerin and turpentine oil, the results therefrom are not satisfactory. For tissue staining, a concentrated watery solution stains both fresh and preserved material. Blood-corpuscles must be dried at 80° for twelve hours before using the watery solution, otherwise the action of the dye quite destroys the tissue. With regard to the staining of animal tissue generally, it appears that the plasma takes up the stain more freely than the nuclei, which are frequently devoid of colour. The hue varies from yellow to red, and preserved material stains better than fresh. One interesting example of its action is that of a section of a fibroneuroma, in which the connective tissue became of a dark orange, and the nervous tissue received a bright-orange stain. ‘Transverse sections of nerves only stained in the sheaths, the axis-cylinder being unaffected. Benzo-purpurin is obtainable in two shades, 1 B and 4B. It is soluble in water, and has approximately the same hue as Congo, but is not affected by acids in the same way as Congo. Its reaction is neutral. Cover-glass preparations dried for ten hours at 200° are said to be successful. In general the stain is somewhat similar to that of Congo, but asa rule the hue is redder. Rosanilin and Pararosanilin.j—Dr. P. G. Unna has tried to solve the question whether the appearance of lepra bacillus as threads containing cocci is dependent on the Lutz procedure, a combination of Gram’s method with decoloration in nitric acid; whether this special appearance is due to a reaction between the gentian-violet and iodine, and how this peculiarity can be explained. After numerous experiments with various chemically pure dyes the author discovered that only the pararosanilins, to which gentian-violet belongs, possess the property (when used as stated) of showing lepra bacilli as “ coccothrix,” while rosanilin, under similar circumstances, presented the same micro-organisms as bacilli. This difference is so constant that by their aid it is always possible under the Microscope to distinguish the two dyes, and this is all the more striking, as between rogsanilin and pararosa- nilin there is only a slight chemical difference, CH, replacing H. The author, furthermore, showed the relation of the iodine preparation * ‘The Dyeing of Textile Fabrics,’ London, 1885. ¢ Dermatol. Studien, 1887, Heft iv., 73 pp. 1060 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO to these dyes, finding that only between the combinations of simple iodine with rosanilin on the one part, and with the pararosanilin on the other part, do the characteristic differences in the staining of the lepra bacillus exist. He suspects, therefore, that the iodine in pararosanilin staining com- pletely extracts the dye where it is more loosely associated with the tissue, and where the combination is stronger it unites with it in the tissue, A rew dye is therefore formed, which, on account of its slow and difficult extraction, is more suitable to show further differences of the tissues than the simple dye. The methods of Gram, Lutz, and Unna are accordingly to be considered as variations of a general iodine-pararosanilin method. Extract of Logwood as a substitute for pure Hematoxylin.*—Dr. J. Paneth finds that the commercial extract of logwood is a satisfactory substi- tute for pure hematoxylin in staining the central nervous system after Weigert’s method. From this extract is made a solution which contains 90 parts water, 10 parts spirit, 1 part dye. Before use it is filtered. To 100 ccm. of this solution 8 drops of a concentrated solution of lithium car- bonate are added. The celloidin-imbedded sections are placed for twenty- four hours in Weigert’s copper acetate solution, then in 80 per cent. spirit ; then are stained in the above solution for 18-24 hours at the ordinary tem- perature. They are next decolorized with the borax and ferro-cyanide solution. This method, which is practically that of Weigert, gives similar results, but at a much less cost. Reduction of Chromic Solutions in Animal Tissues corrected by Reoxidation with H,0,.{—It is well known that the brownish-green colour assumed by animal tissues under exposure to chromic solutions is due to a combination of the oxide of chromium (Cr,O,) with CrO;. There is a partial reduction of the chromic acid in the tissues, resulting in the formation of Cr,O,, which then unites with the remaining CrO, to form the compound known as chromic chromate. Dr. P. G. Unna has shown that the greenish colour can be removed by treating the tissues with hydrogen dioxide. The chemical processes involved are explained in the following manner: —If a solution of chromic acid or bichromate of potassium be mixed with a solution of H,O,, a deep green precipitate of chromoxide (Cr,O,) is imme- diately formed, which combines with the remaining chromic acid to form the intermediate salt (chromic chromate) with a brownish-green colour. If the mixture is left to itself, the process of reduction, after reaching a definite point, changes to one of oxidation, and the chromic chromate is soon reoxi- dized, leaving the solution yellow as at first. 'The same phenomenon is seen when (1) sections coloured by chromic acid or bichromate of potassium are placed in H,0,, or when (2) sections treated with H,O, are immersed in the chromic solutions. The sections at once become dark green, then brownish- green, and finally, in the first case yellow, in the second colourless. If the sections, at the moment when the brownish-green colour appears, are removed from the solution and thoroughly washed, the colour of the chromic chromate, which is not unimportant for many histological details, remains fixed. Bases,—Nouvelle coloration des tissus normaux et pathologiques. (New stain for normal and pathological tissues.) Bull. Soc. Anat. Paris, XI. (1886) p. 73. Havser, G.—Zur Sporenfarbung. (On spore-staining.) WMiinch. Med. Wochenschr, 1887, p. 654. Josrpu, M., and C. WurstEeR.—Uber der Metaphenyldiamin als Kernfarbemittel. (On metaphenyldiamin as a staining agent for the nucleus.) Monatschr. f. prakt. Dermatol., 1887, Nr. 6. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) p. 213. + Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxx. (1887) p. 47. Cf. Amer. Natural., xxii. (1887) p. 868. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1061 KRYSINSKI, S.—Beitrage zur histologischen Technik. 1. See Imbedding. 2. Indigo- carmin als Tinctionsmittel. 8. Alauncarmin. (Contributions to histological tech- nique. 2. Indigo carmine as a staining agent. 3. Alum carmine.) Virchow’s Arch. f. path. Anat. u. Hist., CVIIL. (1887) pp. 217-9. Weicert, O.—Uber eine neue Methode zur Farbung von Fibrin und von Micro- organismen. (On a new method of staining fibrin and micro-organisms.) 5 pp., 8vo, Berlin, 1887. (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Mounting Sections without Cover-glasses.*—Dr. C. Weigert recently showed that celloidin sections could be cleared up with carbol xylol, and as ‘many of these sections were intended to be mounted under the same cover- glass it was found in practice to be somewhat expensive to provide cover- glasses of sufficient size. He resolved to follow in Golgi’s footsteps, and do without the cover-glass, but as the Italian method has several in- conveniences attached to it he adopted the photographic negative varnish as the substitute for dammar. After the sections have been cleared up with carbol xylol, the excess of fluid is removed in the usual way with blotting-paper, and a thin layer of the negative varnish is poured on. This dries very quickly. The drying may be accelerated by gently warming the slide, and this must always be done if the layer appears cloudy. When the first layer is dry, another coat is laid on, and so on until the surface remains quite smooth. Three coats are usually sufficient. When finished, the surface may, if necessary, be wiped or washed with water; high powers and even oil-immersion lenses may be used in the examination. In the latter case, a small drop of water must be placed on the surface, and upon this a cover-glass. This method cannot be used for sections stained with the anilin dyes as the carbol xylol destroys them. Gum Dammar.j—Dr. F. L. James, referring to a paper by Mr. H. Mor- land{ (in which he discredits gum dammar on the ground that it is as friable as chalk) says that he has used dammar for several years as a medium for mounting diatoms, crystals, &c.; in fact, to the entire exclusion of Canada balsam, styrax, and all other resinous media, and with perfect satisfaction. It may be used without decolorization by proceeding as follows: Dissolve the dammar in sufficient benzol to give a fluid which will pass through the best Swedish filtering paper. When filtered, evaporate the surplus benzol, and bring the solution to the consistency of treacle. Now add to each ounce of the resultant solution ten minims of the best nut or poppy oil, and shake well. The result will be a “balsam” that will never become brittle, turn red, or become opaque. Decolorized dammar may be made as follows : Dissolve dammar in benzol, and to the solution (which should be filtered through absorbent cotton or mineral wool) add alcohol of 95% until it no longer throws down a white precipitate. Stir thoroughly, decant the supernatant liquid, and wash the precipitate gum in absolute alcohol. Wash well, mulling the gum while washing, and afterwards rinse with water. Throw the washed gum on a filter and let dry (which it will do in twenty-four hours), after which it should be dissolved in pure benzol (benzol purissima, or the crystallizable benzol of Merck), and either allowed to stand a while or filtered. The solution will be as limpid and clear as crystal; but the gum contained in it is excessively friable. This defect is corrected, as in the former instance, * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 209-10. t+ Engl. Mech., xlvi. (1887) pp. 184-5. ¢ Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1887) pp. 108-14, 1062 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO by the addition of nut or poppy oil. The refractive index of this gum the author has not accurately determined ; but it is so nearly identical with that of crown glass that a bit of the latter substance dropped therein is visible only with the closest scrutiny. Xylol-Dammar.*—In an article on resinous substances and the pre- servation of microscopical preparations, Dr. G. Martinotti advocates the use of dammar as the fittest medium for mounting microscopical preparations when the general structure is desired to be brought out. In this respect it is superior to Canada balsam which is most suited for throwing into relief certain parts of a specimen which are deeply stained, such as nuclei, micro-organisms, &c. A suitable solvent for dammar has long been a desideratum, for though Flemming and Pfitzner have produced dammar solutions with turpentine and benzin, the resulting fluids have the fatal fault of losing their transparency in a comparatively short space of time. After numerous experiments, the author finally selected xylol as the solvent, and he found it to possess the necessary qualifications. The medium he produced, xylol-turpentine-dammar, is a white or slightly yellowish fluid which does not affect the anilin stains nor dissolve celloidin, retains its transparency (for nine months at least), and gives a perfect definition of the histological elements. Finely powdered dammar resin and xylol are placed together in a closed vessel, and after some days the clear supernatant fluid decanted off, or the mixture filtered. The clear white fluid is then evaporated in a water-bath to a semi-fluid mass, which is yellowish and resembles Canada balsam. If desired, the mass may be further concentrated, and in this denser condition it does not lose its trans- parency or viscidity. In practice, however, it is not necessary to proceed further than the semi-fluid condition. To produce a medium suitable for microscopical purposes, oil of turpentine is added. By this addition the microscopical images are rendered more effective than with the simple xylol solution ; the medium is less brittle when dry, and also loses most of its yellow colour. The author regrets this slight defect, and thinks it might be obviated if the concentration were carried out in vacuo and not by the aid of heat. In a note the author appends the exact quantities for making the solution. 40 gr. of powdered dammar resin, and 40 gr. of xylol are left for three to four days at the ordinary temperature in a closed vessel and then filtered. The filtrate is evaporated in a water-bath down to about 45 gr., and to this 25 gr. (or even more) of essence of turpentine are added. The author next refers to some solvents of Canada balsam, chloroform, turpentine, benzin, oil of cedar, and xylol. Chloroform is objected to on account of the yellowness which increases with time. Turpentine decolor- izes certain dyes, e. g. hematoxylin, and after a certain period bubbles of gas are developed within the preparation. Benzoin is fairly good, but the fluid is rather viscid. Of cedar oil as a solvent the author has no personal acquaintance. Xylol gives fair results, but the colour of balsam dissolved therein is markedly yellow. Safranin and other dyes seem to be injuriously affected by this reagent, which moreover is destructive of certain delicate structures, such as karyokinetic figures. Oil of lavender produces with Canada balsam an almost colourless fluid ; preparations mounted therein are said to be quite elegant, especially those stained with logwood. Some anilin stains, e.g. safranin, are however dissolved by the action of lavender oil, but others retain their brilliancy. The author, however, admits that his experience of this solvent is too short * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 153-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1063 to give a definite opinion of its value, but he thinks that it will be found to be extremely useful. Directions for using Prof. H. L. Smith’s High Refractive Mounting Media.*—Prof. H. L. Smith gives the following directions :—Use barely enough of the medium to fill in under the cover when the slide is warmed ; it does not materially diminish by any subsequent heating. Boil thoroughly under the cover and until all bubbles disappear on allowing the slide to cool; if any should still remain they may be readily coaxed out by proper application of a small flame. When the slide is cold the cover should remain firmly fixed; any excess of the medium must be removed by means of a moist cloth or a roll of moistened tissue paper. The cleansing must be thorough; all excess must be removed around the edge of the cover, as otherwise it is liable to act upon the cement or finishing ring. If, after the cleaning, the cover shows metallic stains, do not attempt to clean them off until after the finishing ring is hard. When the excess has been removed around the edge of the cover, gently warm the slide to drive off the small amount of moisture that may have been absorbed during the cleaning. When again cooled apply a protecting ring of asphalt-black, or white zinc, or, perhaps better, if one will take the trouble to make them, a wax ring, punched from the sheet- wax used for artificial flowers. The wax ring is a sure protection, especially for the highest medium, yet the white zinc or the asphalt answers well. In using the wax ring, the heat must be very cautiously applied, so as barely to melt it, following gently around with a very small flame. If bubbles of air are entangled under the ring, touch them with a heated needle-point just before the wax cools. When the asphalt, white zinc, or wax ring is solid, apply a good coat of shellac dissolved in alcohol. Slides thus prctected keep perfectly well. After the ring is firmly set, any metallic stains remaining on the cover may be removed by a piece of tissue paper and moistened with hydrochloric acid. Section-lifters. | —Dr. W. Y. Cowl advocates the use of section-lifters made of horn. They are in one flat piece, weigh 10 grains, are 3 in. long, and 5/8 in. wide at the blade, which is square, of about 1/200 in. thick, and merging into a handle 1/20 in. thick and 3/8 in. wide, The blade is smooth, flexible as paper, and pierced with fine holes. It can thus be insinuated beneath a section lying flat on the bottom of a dish and upon removal from the surrounding fluid will allow it to drain away from between the section and lifter. This brings the two into uniform apposition, which is a great desideratum. The perforations also favour the floating _ of the section from the lifter to the mounting or preparatory fluid on the slide. As horn normally contains grease as well as moisture, it will take oily or gummy media, but must then be confined to use with them. Lifters for water or glycerin must be made of burnt horn, i.e. mostly deprived of fat. In preparing specimens, the lifter is preferably inverted over the slide when loaded with a section, whilst a drop of fluid let fall on the holes in the middle of the blade, loosens the tissue, from which the instrument may then easily be withdrawn. As the horn is transparent, every detail of the section on its under side can be seen. The use of such a section-lifter naturally suggests a stout bristle instead ofa needle. It may be held in a clamping needle-holder, and when so mounted, or even simply tied to a stick, will so far surpass the needle as a means of manipulation that no one who has ever tried it will cease its use. * Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 308-9. + Ibid., pp. 164-6. 1064 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO “Berrys Hard Finish” as a Cement and Mounting Medium.*— Prof. W. H. Seaman writes that early last winter Dr. Taylor suggested that a varnish known as Berry’s hard finish (substantially Zanzibar copal dis- solved in turpentine) might serve as a cement. ‘This varnish is in very extensive use for coating wood in its natural colours, in the method now so common, and hence easily got everywhere. Dr. C. T. Caldwell took up the subject, and in the course of mounting a few slides, found he had a material which was not only useful as a cement, but also as an imbedding or mount- ing substance proper. Since his trials a number have used it, all with the most favourable results. Prof. Seaman has slides showing insects imbedded in it that have cleared up well without any previous preparation. Numerous other mounts have been made by other persons of different kinds, and he “has no hesitation in recommending it for trial as the most promising thing in this line he knows.” It is so common it may be obtained at any paint store, and may be thinned with turpentine if too thick. One of its advan- tages is that it does not precipitate when brought in contact with aqueous solutions to anything like the extent that balsam does. King’s Cement.}—Under the heading “a thoroughly reliable cement,” Miss M. A. Booth says that after an extended and critical experience she thinks that the cement prepared by the Rev. J. D. King possesses all the desirable qualities of a universally useful cement. To lovers of the beautiful, King’s scarlet or blue cement is pleasing to the eye, while that large class of microscopists to whom such beauty is a blemish will find in his amber cement reliability shorn of any objectionable features. In every instance in which she has known where King’s cements have not proved fully satisfactory the fault has been with the user. In using Mr. King’s cements, four points are to be observed :— (1) Keep your cement of the right consistency; if too thick, thin it with alcohol. (2) Use a Winsor and Newton Rigger brush No. 2; have its handle put through rubber cork, and keep the brush when not in use in a corked vial of alcohol. 3) While using the brush wash it frequently in alcohol. ta) Use no cement cells until they are thoroughly dry. “Observing these precautions, we have an infallible cement.” Houpen, A. L.—A New Material Cabinet. . [“ A very artistic and inexpensive material cabinet can easily be constructed in the following manner :—It consists of three tin or wooden boxes, of equal height, with flat covers, varying in diameter from 13 to 32 in. Take the largest, and fasten to the bottom a circle of wood or metal, 43 in. in diameter and 1/2 in. in thickness. The projection will form a rest for the vials, which are held in position by a rubber band placed around each box. The next smaller box, 22 in, in diameter, should be fastened to the cover of the largest, and so on. The interiors of the boxes form a receptacle for packets of dry material. If painted a light colour, the objects in the vials will be easily seen, and when finished, it makes a useful ornament for the microscopist’s table.”’] Microscope, VII. (1887) p. 298 (1 fig.). (Manton, W. P., and others.|—Elementary Department. Seventh, Eighth, and Ninth Lessons. [Mounting media.—Sealing and cements.—Cells.—Cell-building. Microscope, VII. (1887) pp. 277-80, 302-4, 337-9. (6) Miscellaneous. Crystallization by Cold.{—Dr. F. L. James makes geometrically perfect crystals in the following manner:—Provide two watch-glasses of nearly equal size and shape, so that they fit snugly into each other. Into one of * Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, iv. (1887) p. 33. + Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 297-8. t Ibid., pp. 166-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1065 these pour the liquid to be crystallized, and having warmed the other by passing it through the flame of the lamp or dipping it in hot water, place it immediately on the top of the globule of fluid, letting it settle to place of its own weight. The fluid is thus spread out into a tenuous film between the two watch-glasses. Now place the watch-glasses upon a piece of felt, two or three thicknesses of blotting-paper, or some other non-conducting material, and with a pipette pour on to the cavity of the upper glass a half fluid drachm of rhigoline, benzol, or ether, and blow on it with the lips. As the temperature falls the film of liquid begins to deposit crystals ; sometimes this occurs instantaneously, usually it requires about fifteen seconds to a minute to thoroughly cool the glasses. If necessary, the process must be repeated. As soon as the deposition of crystals ceases take a bit of blotting-paper and pass the edge of it between the glasses to absorb the remaining mother liquor, leaving the crystals nearly dry. The upper glass is then removed and the crystals in the lower glass may be examined at once under the Microscope or collected and washed. It is presumed that the liquid to be crystallized is in a concentrated state: if not, the small quantity required for this process is easily thickened by placing the glass on a hot slide for a few moments. Where the opera- tion must be repeated, it is best to use a clean glass for each portion, or to carefully remove the crystals resulting from previous refrigerations, since the second crop has a tendency to form around and on the first, thus making masses too large for convenient examination with high powers. The use of the pipette for placing the volatile fluid in the upper watch-glass is recom- mended, because of the difficulty of pouring small quantities of readily flowing fluids with any exactness, and the consequent danger of overflowing and mixing with the fluid to be crystallized. Method of obtaining Methemoglobin Crystals.*—Prof. W. D. Halli- burton recommends the following easy method for obtaining methemo- globin crystals. A few cubic centimetres of the defibrinated blood of a rat, guinea-pig, or squirrel, have added to them an equal number of drops of nitrite of amyl, and the whole is shaken vigorously in a test-tube for a minute or so. As soon as the liquid becomes chocolate-coloured a drop is placed on a slide and covered. In a few minutes crystals of methemoglobin are formed, and if the edges of the cover-glass be sealed they may be kept unchanged for several months. From guinea-pigs’ blood the crystals thus obtained are tetrahedra; from squirrels’ blood they are perfectly regular hexagonal plates, as are also those from rats’ blood; but in the case of the last there were a few other plates which, in the opinion of Mr. L. Fletcher, are merely variations of the hexagons. Fearnley’s ‘Elementary Practical Histology.’ {—This book has a feature which is extremely novel in a histological work, viz. it contains an account of the Diffraction Theory (under the head of “Immersion Lenses ”), with diagrams illustrating Prof. Abbe’s leading experiments. The author has been recommended { to omit this portion in future editions, a recom- mendation which we hope he will not adopt. His reviewer, like so many histologists, has evidently not appreciated the practical importance of the discussion ; but one good effect of the book will, we have no doubt, be to make many practical workers with the Microscope acquainted with one of * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1887) pp. 201-4. + Fearnley, W., ‘A Course of Elementary Practical Histology,’ xi. and 363 pp., 46 figs. (8vo, London, 1887). t Nature, xxxvi. (1887) pp. 481-2. 1066 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC. the most important points in connection with microscopical observation, without a knowledge of which they are continually liable to misinterpret histological structures. ARLOING.—Un analyseur bactériologique pour l’étude des germes de l'eau. (A bacteriological analyser for the study of germs in water. CR. Soc. Biol., 1887, pp. 539-40; Arch. de Physiol., 1887, pp. 273-85. Biscuor, G.—Dr. R. Koch’s Bacteriological Water Test. III. Lancet, 1887, II. pp. 516-8. CARNELLY and T. W1iLson.—A New Method for determining Micro-organisms in Air. [Consists essentially in the substitution of a flat-bottomed conical flask for a Hesse’s tube. | Nature, XXXVI. (1887) p. 570; Chem. News, 1887, p. 145. Evans, J.—Address to Middlesex Natural History and Science Society. [‘‘ The water supplied by the companies no longer, I am glad to say, affords so varied a field for microscopical observation as it did some fifty years ago; Lut for microscopic studies it is doubtful whether there is not fully as much scope for students living in towns as for those who reside in the country.”’] Trans. Middleséx Nat. Hist. and Sci, Soc., 1886-7, p. 7. FaspRre-DoOMERGUE.—Les Invisibles. Phéenoménes les plus intéressants de la vie des étres microscopiques. (The Invisibles. The most interesting phenomena in the life of microscopic beings.) 120 figs., 16mo, Paris, 1887. Hitcucock, R.—The Biological Examination of Water. II. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 169-71. James, F, L.—Clinical Microscopical Technology. IX. The examination of Semen. St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LIII. (1887) pp. 292-4. Petri, R. J.—Ueber die Methoden der modernen Bakterienforschung. (On the methods of modern bacteria research.) Sammi. Gemeinverstindl. Wiss. Vortrige ( Virchow and Holézendorf), 8vo, Hamburg, 1887, 62 pp. os Eine neue Methode, Bakterien und Pilzsporen in der Luft nachzu- weisen und zu zahlen. (A new method for demonstrating and counting bacteria and fungus-spores in the air.) Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, IIT. (1887) pp. 1-145. Pryer, A.—Atlas der Mikroskopie am Krankenbette. (Atlas of the microscopy of the sick-bed.) 2nd ed., xii. and 232 pp., 100 pls., 8vo, Stuttgart, 1887. Stack, H. J.—Pleasant Hours with the Microscope. [Actinophrys, Actinomonas, &c. ] Knowledge, X1. (1887) pp. 267-8 (4 figs.). Tayuor, T.—The Crystallography of Butter and other Fats. I., IT., III. ‘Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., VIII. (1887) pp. 152-3 (1 pL), 172 al pl.), 190 (1 pl.). Wuiret, T. C—A Manual of Elementary Microscopical Manipulation for the use of Amateurs. iii. and 104 pp., 1 pl. and 6 figs., 8vo, London, 1887. ( 1067 ) PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Mertine or 127TH Ocroser, 1887, ar Kine’s Cottzan, Stranp, W.C., THE Prusipent (tHe Rev. Dr. Dauuierr, F.R.S.) 1n THE CHarR. The Minutes of the meeting of 8th June last were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given to the donors. Bonnier, G., and G. de Layens, Nouvelle Flore du Nord devla From France et de la Belgique pour la détermination facile des plantes sans mots techniques. xxxiv. and 307 pp., 2282 figs., and1 map. (8vo, Paris, n.d.) . .. Prof. Gaston Bonnier, Chinese book on Natural History, &e., with woodcut of a Micro- scope .. Mr. Crisp. James, F. L., "Elementary Microscopical “Technology. Part i iv. and 107 pp. and 15 figs. (8vo, St. Louis, 1887),.. -. The Author. Maskell, W. M., An Account of the Insects noxious to Agriculture and Plants in New Zealand—The Scale-iusects (Coccidide). 116 pp. and 23 pls. (8vo, Wellington, 1887) . The Author, Sachs, J. v., Lectures on the Physiology of Plants, translated by H. Marshall Ward, M.A., F.L.S. xiv. and 836 pp. and 455 figs. (8vo, London, 1887) The Publishers. Photomicrographs of Proboscis of Blow-fly, stained vertical section of Human Scalp, Pulex irritans, Liver Fluke of sigs Red Earth Mite, and chee Human Brain .. . Mr. W. Bail. Patent Microtome.. .. Dae gst) tae, eal Weena ER edad os Deas The President welcomed Mr. C. B. Farwell, Senator for Illinois to the Congress of the United States of America, who was present with his brother, Mr. J. V. Farwell, also of Chicago. Mr. Crisp called attention to 2 Chinese book on natural history, having an illustration which represented a Microscope almost identical in pattern to the one from Japan exhibited at the meeting of the Society in May last. It would be remembered that this instrument was much criticised at the time by Mr. Beck, who threw doubts upon its Oriental origin ; but it was clear, from the figure given in this book, that the pattern was one recognized in the Hast as a typical form of Microscope. He was sorry Mr. Beck was not present, so that he might see the illustration. Prof. M. Thury’s note was read, describing a multi-ocular Microscope, which he had designed for facilitating class demonstrations. It had several body-tubes and eye-pieces, the image being thrown into each tube succes- sively by the rotation of a total-reflection prism placed over the objective. The teacher and his pupils could thus view the same object without having to change their seats (ante, p. 796). Mr. Crisp exhibited, in connection with the note, the bi-ocular and tri-ocular Microscopes of M. A. Nachet, and the quadri-ocular Microscope of Prof. Harting. Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said that, with regard to Prof. Harting’s quadri- ocular Microscope, he found that M. Nachet claimed to have made such a Microscope, and to have communicated with Prof. Harting about it in 1854. M. Nachet had recently forwarded a drawing of the particular prism which 1068 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. he used for the purpose, whence it was clear that the prisms were similar in form, though apparently that of M. Nachet was much smaller than those employed by Prof. Harting, of which Mr. Crisp possessed two. M. Nachet had also sent over a prism such as he used in his tri-ocular Microscope, and it would be seen that it was a very complicated one, the construction of which would probably puzzle many persons. He had also forwarded one of his prisms used in the bi-ocular form. These prisms were submitted for the inspection of the meeting. Mr. C. D, Ahrens’ Microscope, with three body-tubes and three objec- tives, was exhibited by Mr. Crisp (ante, p. 799). Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said that in devising this Microscope he did not think that Mr. Ahrens had any scientific end in view, his idea merely being to have something which would serve the purpose of three Microscopes in one, to exhibit to the public on festive occasions at Hampton Court and similar places. Mr. Crisp said that since their last meeting they had had a correspond- ence with Dr. Van Heurck on the subject of the remarks made at the January meeting by Mr. Mayall and Mr. Beck as to the photographs of Amphipleura pellucida made by Dr. Van Heurck, the suggestion being that the background of the photographs had been painted out. Another set of photographs had now been sent over which had not been manipulated, and which, Dr. Van Heurck claimed, showed all he had formerly represented. Dr. Van Heurck’s letter was as follows :— “Basing himself on what was said by Mr. Mayall at your January meeting, Dr. J. D. Cox stated, at a meeting of the New York Microscopical Society, that my photographs had undergone notable alterations. As I cannot allow such assertions to pass uncontradicted, casting doubts on the accuracy of my observations, I have sent to New York some further prints of my photographs, duplicates of which I send to you. It will be readily seen that these have not undergone the slightest alteration. I specially call your attention to the longitudinal lines of the Amphi- pleura pellucida, which are vastly more difficult than the beads. The undulated nature of these striz, so different to diffraction lines, shows clearly that they are real longitudinal lines.” Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said he was sorry that Dr. Van Heurck should have objected to his criticism, but he must insist that he was fairly entitled to criticize the photographs which he saw on the previous occasion ; and when it was said that no diffraction lines were visible, he could hardly do other- wise than point out that the natural background on which they were said to be projected had been blocked out, leaving the field quite white, and consequently destroying the natural outlines of the diatoms. He considered the photographs to be excellently taken, but he objected strongly to the use of an artificial background, which gave fictitious outlines to the objects. He considered all such manipulations as seriously interfering with the scientific value of photomicrographs. Mr. Enock’s preparation of the Hessian fly, and also of its parasite (Semiotellus destructor) was exhibited. Prof. Bell said of course they all devoutly hoped that the parasite might increase and multiply abundantly. The fly itself seemed of late to have been making as much stir in this country as the Colorado beetle did some years ago. It was a very important matter to know that the adult form PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1069 had been discovered in this country where they had only previously found the larva and pupa. He hoped that if any Fellow of the Society should come across this insect, he would make it his duty to bring it forward. Mr. Swift exhibited a Microscope which, on the suggestion of Prof. Tuson, of the Royal Veterinary College, had been platinized by a new process of plating by platinum which had been lately introduced, and which, as applied to Microscopes, he considered to be a great advantage. The fittings of stages in particular are much affected by the action of corrosive fluids, but this is entirely obviated by the process in question. The square edges are not rounded off, as is the case where nickelled. The platinizing had been done by the Bright Platinum Plating Company, and, according to the manager, the cost was about that of plating with silver. Mr. Crouch exhibited Dr. Woodhead’s Microscope with unusually large stage (112 in. by 92 in.) for examining sections through entire organs (supra, p. 1015). Mr. G. M. Giles’s Army Medical Microscope was exhibited, and his description of it read. The instrument was designed so as to be applicable to all the work of the military surgeon in station as well as in camp life, and at the same time to be so portable as to pack into a box 5°8 in. by 3:2 in. by 2°75 in. (supra, p. 1012). My. Crisp said it was not usual in that room to call attention to things which might be sent for the purpose of sale; but he thought exception might very properly be made in the case of the drawings of the late Mr. Draper. These drawings had, he believed, never been surpassed, and hee Draper’s widow would be glad to dispose of them to any Fellows of the ociety. Mr. Beck said he recollected very well these drawings of Mr. Draper, which were certainly the most beautiful he had ever seen. He should, therefore, be glad if by some exercise of their discretion the Council could secure them for the Society. Original drawings had always a special value of their own, and he thought the matter might be referred to the Council to consider whether they could be acquired. In all such cases, where a diligent observer had acquired a power of delineation such as that possessed by Mr. Draper, it was desirable that examples of the results should be in the possession of the Society. He would, therefore, submit to the meeting a motion to the effect that the Council be asked to take the matter into their consideration. Mr. Deby seconded the motion, and said that in order to assist in carrying out the suggestion, he would be prepared to subscribe to a fund for the purpose. The President having put the motion to the meeting, declared it to be carried unanimously. Mr. Deby called attention to the sixth annual report of the United States Geological Survey, dated 1885, but only just distributed, which contains a valuable article by Mr. J. S. Curtis, on the ‘ Quantitative De- termination of Silver by means of the Microscope.’ This method of assay- ing ores of silver is a very considerable improvement upon Plattner’s well- known method, and has really practical applications. A new micrometer ane apparatus is figured, and the mode of manipulation fully escribed. 1887. 4A 1070 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Mr. H. J. Dale exhibited a microtome which he had made and patented, the speciality of which consisted in the arrangement for working it with the foot, so that both hands were left free for cutting the sections. . Mr. Crisp said it would be recognized as within the duty of the Society to call attention to any important misstatements in the utterances of eminent scientifie men in relation to microscopical subjects, and he desired, there- fore, to correct the statement of Sir Henry Roscoe in his Presidential address to the last meeting of the British Association, in which he treated the 1/100,000 of an inch as the limit of visibility with the “highest known magnifying power.” The limit should be at least the 1/500,000 of an inch. The President said that the opinion expressed by Mr. Crisp was quite in accordance with the experience of those Fellows who had worked with the higher powers. He could say that he had himself certainly seen objects which were between the 1/200,000 and 1/300,000 of an inch (ante, p. 827). Col. O’Hara’s further note on the ‘Motion of Diatoms,’ accompanying photographs of Surirella, was read as follows :— “In my first communication on this subject I pointed out the means of movement possessed by Navicula, and in my second that possessed by Cocconeis. I now send an enlarged transparency on glass and an enlarged print on Hastman’s paper, which illustrate that possessed by the Surirella form. It appears, therefore, that the means of movement which I suggested as applicable to some forms of the Diatomacee is probably possessed by all, viz. an undulating and extrusible membrane.” Mr. P. H. Gosse’s paper on ‘Twenty-four more New Species of Rotifera,” all British, was brought before the meeting by Prof. Bell, who gave a résumé of its contents (supra, p. 861). The President said it gave them great pleasure to receive communica- tions such as this from time to time from Mr. Gosse, who was one of their Honorary Fellows. Mr. C. R, Beaumont’s paper, ‘Observations on the Metamorphoses of Amebz and Actinophrys, was read, in which he stated that he had watched Amebz change to Actinophrys, and the Actinophrys afterwards develope into Diflugia and Arcella. His observations had been made with so much care, and were so detailed and repeated, that he considered he could not be mistaken. Prof. Bell said that in Ameba they had a naked mobile mass of proto- plasm, apparently devoid of organs and continually changing in form; in Actinophrys there was an organism of definite form, and provided with a number of long, straight processes; whilst in Diflugia they had a regular mass of protoplasm provided with a case which it made for itself out of the débris of shell or other materials by which it happened to be surrounded. That an Ameba should develope into an Actinophrys was a fact which might or might not be proved; but it must be borne in mind that the term Ameba was used not only in the strict sense in which one would use the terms Homo or Equus, but as designating any of anumber of similar forms. Any statement, therefore, as to Ameba passing into Actinophrys stood upon a different basis from that of Actinophrys passing into Difflugia. Mr. Badcock said he had seen the paper, as well as some letters from Mr. Beaumont, who had also sent him two bottles of water, which he found to contain a number of naked Amebe, and also;some of the testaceous forms, most of which, however, were empty. He had examined some of the speci- mens, but had not been able to follow out his observations, for various PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1071 reasons, the chief of which was that he did not possess the means adopted by Mr. Beaumont, who had a special slide made for the purpose, which he believed was a very good device. It embodied a method by which he was able to keep the water in constant circulation, and it rotated in a way that enabled him to make his observations continuously. He had asked Mr. Beaumont to come to the meeting to tell them more about the matter, but he was not able to do so. He promised, however, to exhibit his apparatus at a future meeting. In a further letter, Mr. Beaumont gave an account of an observation made of a Huglena found inside an Actinophrys, which, he said, had been taken in during the Ameba stage. In looking over some old notes he had found a drawing, made in March 1880, which seemed to correspond with one of the stages which Mr. Beaumont had called Ameba actinophrya. Mr. Beaumont had evidently worked very hard, and he thought great interest should be taken in what he was doing. By their next meeting he hoped to have some additional particulars. Prof. Stewart thought there was very little doubt that these organisms existed under a variety of forms, and that there was nothing improbable in the idea that in Diflugia there may be an ameeboid state, though there was nothing in the drawings which showed the characters of such special forms. That certain species of Amebzx had more or less globose or spinous forms was also undoubted; but these were in structure very distinct from Actinophrys, in which one of the most marked features was the separation of the body into two layers, with rays of a somewhat more dense structure running from the central mass, and giving support to the outer layer. He did not recognize any such indications of complexity in Mr. Beaumont’s drawings, and if these were absent, the organisms would not agree with the known characters of Actinophrys. Prof. Bell referred, in connection with the paper, to Dr. Bastian’s ‘ The Beginnings of Life.’ Mr. Hardy said that the second figure reminded him of an observation he once made of an Actinophrys being evolved from what is sometimes called Acineta grandis, which before separation would have a very similar appear- ance to this figure. This acinetan is developed from amceboid matter of varying shapes, which, to one not acquainted with their appearance, might be mistaken for Ameba diffluens. As Arcellaand Difflugia may be developed from A. diffluens, the two Amebze might have been in the same trough, and the three forms are thus accounted for. The President thought they were all prepared to admit that a fact must not be in any way disregarded because it was extraordinary, but he was quite convinced, after reading Dr. Bastian’s book, that all such matters must be put into the hands of those who were specially skilled in determining the nature of such organisms. When Dr. Bastian’s work was first issued, the reviewers considered it a very extraordinary book, and worthy of attention ; but when experts examined the contents in detail, it was shown that the obser- vations relied upon were false, and therefore the conclusions utterly failed. He did not pretend to say that the observations in the paper before them were false also; but he did not think the author could object to the same kind of tests being applied to them. They would be content to wait until next year, when the organisms could again be found, to see whether they were so or not. The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :-— Mr. W. Ball :—Photomicrographs. Mr. Bolton :—Gristes Janus. Mr. Crisp :—(1) Nachet’s Bi-ocular Microscope ; (2) Nachet’s Tri-ocular 1072 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Microscope and Prism ; (3) Harting’s Quadri-ocular Microscope’; (4) Ahrens’s Tri-ocular Microscope ; (5) Reichert’s Mechanical Stage. Mr. Crouch :—Dr. Woodhead’s Microscope, with large stage. Mr. H. F. Dale :—Microtome, with treadle. Mr. Enock :—Hessian Fly and its Parasite. Mr. G. M. Giles:—Army Medical Microscope. Dr. H. Van Heurck :—Photomicrographs of Amphipleura pellucida. Col. O’ Hara :—Photographs of Surirella. Mr. Swift :—Platinized Microscope. New Fellows:—The following were elected Ordinary Fellows :-— Messrs. J. G. Grenfell, F.G.S., W. D. Gunn, C. B. Holland, John Ruther- ford, J.P., and Edward F. Underwood, M.D. Meeting or 97a Novemper, 1887, av Kine’s Cotunce, Stranp, W.C., tor Presipent (THE Rev. Dr. Dauuinerr, F.R.S.) in THe CHarr. The Minutes of the meeting of 12th October last were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given to the donors. From Wageli, C., and S. Schwendener, The Microscope in Theory and Practice, translated from the German. xi. and 382 pp., 210 figs. (8vo, London, 1887) Me atari term rt utc The Publishers. Dr. H. Van Heurck’s letter was read, in which he expressed himself satisfied with the result of the discussion at the last meeting relative to his photomicrographs of Amphipleura pellucida. Mr. E. M. Nelson said he had several matters to bring to the attention of the meeting. The first was a suggestion for supplying a want which many had felt of a really good achromatic single lens or loupe for micro- scopic purposes, of 1/2 in. focus. There were, of course, many such made, and he believed he had tried all, including the achromatics of Steinheil, but he had found them all open to one objection or another. He had, however, found that the want was met by a Seibert No. III. objective having its adapting screw removed. This, when used as a simple lens, formed the best loupe possible. The brasswork might be further turned down in a lathe, and the combination mounted like a Coddington. Mr. Nelson further said that having lately obtained an improvement in optical power, he had been able to do a little more in the matter of resolu- tion, and one of the first objects he tried was striped muscular fibre, which, as was well known, offered a good many complexities. In the early days of microscopy 2 muscular fibril used to be represented as a series of light and dark bands, the dark band being about twice the diameter of the white band. In 1853 Messrs. Huxley and Busk discovered a dark stripe in the middle of the bright band, and subsequently Hensen placed a similar darker stripe in the middle of the dark band. With his latest optical PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1073 appliances he had been able to see a faint white stripe on either side of Hensen’s dark stripe. The sequence of the eight stripes is as follows :— A white stripe. Huxley and Busk’s dark. White. Dark. Nelson’s light. Hensen’s dark. Nelson’s light. Dark. He estimated the diameter of these stripes to be all equal. In a muscular fibril of a pig he found its diameter to be 1/11,500 in., and the length of the pattern 1/11,000 in. Therefore the diameter of the stripes may be estimated as about 1/88,000 in. Although he saw evidences of longitudinal breaking up, he could see nothing of Schifer’s beads. There were beads visible such as had been described by some observers, but he considered that these were the result of bad resolution causing the breaking up of the fibres. It was curious to note that with objects of this character some eyes seemed as if they always would see beads. The third point noticed by Mr. Nelson was the note which appeared in the ‘English Mechanic’ of November 4th on Mr. Francis’ method of improving definition of such an object as Amphipleura pellucida by using the analyser. He had tested the plan, and found that it did intensify the resolution in a very marked degree. It did not resolve anything which the objective could not resolve otherwise, but it certainly did strongly intensify it (supra, p. 1033). Mr. Crisp said that the increased effect might be due, as was frequently the case, to an alteration in the intensity of the light. He should therefore like to see if the same effect could not be produced by altering the light in some other way than by using the analyser. Mr. Nelson said he had tried altering the light, but it certainly had not the same effect. Mr. Powell said he had also tested the use of the analyser, and found there could be no doubt as to the definition being improved by it; it was also certain that the same definition could not be obtained by reducing the light in other ways. Mr. Nelson said he had tried all the most delicate tests, but he found an advantage was gained only by oblique light and in a particular direction. Mr. Crisp inquired whether in the rotation of the analyser certain spectra were found to be shut off? Mr. Nelson said the analyser was large enough to include the whole of the spectra in every position. He could, however, tell what was the best position by the strength of the green. Mr. C. Beck suggested that a tourmaline should be tried, so as to see if the effect was exclusively due to polarization. Mr. E. M. Nelson also exhibited and described a new portable Micro- scope made by Messrs. Powell and Lealand from his drawings (supra, . 1013). Mr. 4 Mayall, jun., said he was glad that Mr. Nelson had interested himself in the design of so small an instrument, for a want had often been felt of such a Microscope. Generally speaking, a “ miniature ” Microscope was a mere toy. But here, he thought, Mr. Nelson had added substantially to the stock of working apparatus. The convenience of a good portable Microscope was unquestionable, and would doubtless be largely appreciated by microscopists. The arrangement of the lamp did not strike him favourably. He thought that if the instrument had to be handed round to a class or at a meeting, the lamp would be found inconvenient, if not dan- gerous. If he might make a suggestion for the improvement in the 1074 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. mechanism of the new Microscope, it would be in the direction of strengthening some of the parts which seemed rather too weak. It was a vital point to have the optic axis exactly at right angles to the stage, but he feared the cross-arm support of the body-tube was very slight, and would be easily bent in the hurry of setting up or packing away. The attachment of the body-tube to the cross-arm seemed to him defective, and reminded him of some of the least successful of previous constructions. The want of a fine-adjustment might be met to a great extent by the application of a smooth-working draw-tube, as in Swift's Miniature Microscope. The President said he must express his agreement with Mr. Mayall’s suggestions for the improvement of the Microscope. Speaking after much experience in giving class demonstrations with the Microscope, he should consider a paraffin lamp was a dangerous thing to use in a class, in the manner shown, amongst a number of youths, who were not always particu- larly careful. He thought, if used in that way, some less dangerous oil or some other source of artificial light should be provided. Mr. Nelson also exhibited and described the new photomicrographic camera, designed by Mr. C. L. Curties and himself. He also exhibited a negative of the proboscis of the blow-fly, which, he thought, would bear the closest examination (supra, p. 1025). Prof. Crookshank said that he should like to examine the apparatus a little more closely after the meeting. He felt much obliged to Mr. Nelson for introducing a cheap and efficient method to their notice. He was him- self more and more impressed with the value of photomicrography, and therefore welcomed every additional aid to its extension. So far as he could judge, this apparatus was simple, and enabled the process to be carried on with very little loss of time. This alone would be a great gain to patholo- gists who did not want to perform feats, but to get the greatest accuracy of detail recorded in as little time as possible. He thought that, especially with regard to bacteriology, the results obtained by photography had not been simply to obtain artistic pictures. Koch photographed the flagella of some of these minute organisms, and in this way obtained demonstrations of the existence of the flagella, which had not been believed in by many. He should like to say that at the Conversazione on the 23rd inst., he pro- posed to throw upon the screen a number of photographs of bacteria, to show that the results obtained by photography might be used for the pur- poses of teaching. He did not say that in all cases the results gave pictures as sharp as could be desired, but whilst it had been stated that one reason for disbelieving in the value of such researches was because they showed no morphological differences, he thought he might safely leave those to judge of the matter who would see what he proposed to show them on the 23rd. Mr. Nelson further exhibited a new eye-piece which he had devised (supra, p. 928). The President said that, as their time was already so far advanced, they must omit some of the minor matters on the programme for the evening, in order that they might hear Mr. Beaumont, who had come up to London to give them an account of his observations on the development of Amebz. Mr. C. R. Beaumont then exhibited and described his new form of slide for observing living organisms, and read a paper in which he claimed to have observed the development of an Ameba into an Actinophrys, and then into a Difflugia and an Arcella. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1075 The President said he was quite sure that the Fellows were indebted to Mr. Beaumont for taking the trouble of coming so far to present to them a detail of the facts as they appeared to him during the course of his obser- vations. Whilst they should be most unwilling to do otherwise than give their best thanks to Mr. Beaumont for his paper, yet, for his own part at least, he should also be most unwilling to pronounce any opinion at present upon the subject, but thought rather that they should wait until the time of year arrived, when it would be possible to repeat the experiments in accordance with the ideas expressed by Mr, Beaumont. The statements made in his paper were so remarkable that it was not scepticism, but rather the exercise of a true scientific spirit to suspend judgment upon the question until it could be subjected to the test of experience. Those who had made obser- vations upon minute forms, knew quite well, that though a slide might be good in all respects, yet the water from a still pond sometimes contained organisms which were capable of passing through the tube in their germ forms and of subsequently developing when the conditions were favourable. In one of the earlier volumes of the ‘ Monthly Microscopical Journal ’—that for 1873—there occurred a description of one of the monads, in which exactly what Mr. Beaumont had stated appears to have been observed. In this case the monad, after moving about in the same manner, became ameeboid. By-and-by two were seen to blend, and then, from this, spore-like bodies were seen to emerge. It was, he thought, quite possible that Mr. Beaumont might have interrupted this process, and-also have introduced from ex- traneous sources that which might lead to considerable confusion. There were at least sufficient difficulties in the way to render it a matter for the exercise of caution. It should be distinctly borne in mind, however, that in this paper it was not the life-history of a single form which was de- scribed, but the transformation of one well-known form into another, and this again into a third and a fourth. Mr. Beaumont, in reply to questions, said that the water which he used to fill up the slide was tap water; this was very good water in his part of the country. The water flowed from one reservoir to the other by the fall given to it by the inclination of the stage, and when it had all run through it was only necessary to rotate the stage, and the process would repeat itself from the other end. Professor Bell, in reply to the President’s request for his opinion, said that he had nothing toadd to the remarks which had already been made by the President, but would merely repeat in other words that in these matters they must have the most absolute evidence of isolation in the case of the organisms under observation ; if there was any doubt about that, of course the experiments must be repeated. Mr. Beaumont said that the five ponds he had mentioned in his paper contained a large number of organisms, and he should be very glad to send up a supply to any one who wished to have some. Mr. Badcock said, that at p. 225 of Mr. Saville Kent’s work on Infusoria, there was an account which to a certain extent corroborated the observations which the President had just quoted from the Journal. In this he described and illustrated the direct metamorphosis of a flagellated zooid into an organism like Actinophrys. A similar life-history had also been worked out by Mr. Fullagar, who also described Actinospherium. His own view was that Mr. Beaumont had, as he claimed, traced the life-history of Ameba from a flagellate monad to an ordinary Ameba, thence into Actinophrys, and thence again into Difflugia and Arcella, the tremulous sarcode bursting from the cyst and dispersing a number of granules. Now these granules, he presumed, would produce the original flagellate monad, 1076 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. but this had to be proved. If they looked at the slide with a high power they would see that these granules were in motion, and it was very import- ant that the rest of their history should be watched, and this link in the chain supplied. If that could be done, then he thought they had a very important discovery before them. Mr. E. M. Nelson said he kad very little knowledge of organisms of this class, but if any opinion from a brass-and-glass point of view was of any value, he might say that he was examining some monads in Scotland a short time ago, and was induced to watch them because they behaved in such a very extraordinary way, and in the course of his observations he saw the very same things take place which Mr. Beaumont had described —one of the organisms shot off its flagella, and then burst exactly in the same way. Mr. C. Beck asked if any attempt had been made to isolate these organisms in the same way as had been done in the case of Bacteria ? The President said that, as already mentioned, observations exactly corresponding to those made by Mr. Nelson were not at all uncommon if made upon the organisms found in putrefactive fluids, but in order to be of value, they must be correlated. In the case before them it must be re- membered that the claim was made that from a unicellular organism a more complex organism had directly arisen. The subject was very valuable as a basis of work, and no doubt there were some amongst them who would go very heartily into that work when Mr. Beaumont was again in a position to supply them with the material, Mr. H. B. Brady’s paper, “A Synopsis of the British Recent Fora- minifera,” was communicated to the meeting by Prof. Beli (supra, p. 872). The President was sure it would be in full accordance with the feelings of the Fellows to accord their hearty thanks to Mr. Brady for this very valuable contribution to the literature on the subject. A Synopsis of British Foraminifera brought down to date was much required. Mr. Crisp said he had been asked to mention to the meeting that Prof. Smith’s collection of diatoms was in the hands of Dr. Maddox for disposal on behalf of the widow. The President called attention to the Conversazione which had been arranged for the 23rd November, and said that they would no doubt be glad to notice that the usual programme was to be supplemented by an exhibition by Prof. Crookshank in his Bacteriological Laboratory, which would be of the greatest interest. The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :— Mr. Beaumont :—(1) Life-slide; (2) Organisms illustrating his paper. Mr. Bolton :—WNitella sp. ? Mr. Crisp :—Martin Microscope with fixed mirror. Mr. Nelson :—(1) Portable Microscope; (2) Photomicrographie Appa- ratus with square Camera; (3) New Eye-piece; (4) Achromatic Loupe. New Fellows:—The following were elected Ordinary Fellows :-— Messrs. A. J. Acheson, Ph.D., M.D., F. T. Andrews, Ph.D., M.D., J. W. Blagg, Edward T. Browne, C. S. Jeaffreson, F.R.C.S., Andrew Pringle, and Rey. C. H. Rowley. ( 1077 ) INDEX. A. Abbe, E., On Improvements of the Micro- scope with the aid of New Kinds of Optical Glass, 20. Abbott, C. A., 501. Aberration, Spherical, Determination of the Colour for which, to be corrected, 492. Abrus precatorius, Proteids of the Seeds of, 773. Absorption of Anilin Colours by Living Cells, 1057. of Anilin Pigments by Living Vege- table Cells, 512. — of Carbonic Anhydride by Leaves, 434, — of Colouring Matters by Plants, 172. of the Tadpole’s Tail, 211. — of Water by Terrestrial Organs, 436. —— —— in the fluid state by Leaves, 119: Absorption-bands, 617. Acanthococcus, 131. Acari, Treatment of, 1045. Acephala, Preparing the Central Nervous System of, 840. Acephalous Mollusca, System of, 736. Aceras anthropophora, Colouring Matter of, 256 Acetous Fermentation, 132. Achlys triphylla, Fertilization of, 269. Achromatic Condensers, Value of, 647. Acid, Carbonic, Assumed Decomposition of, by Chlorophyll, 118. ——, Decomposition of, by Chloro- phyll outside the plant, 118, — Chloral hydrate Carmine, 848. —, Glyoxylic, Presence of, in Plants, 257 Central Nervous Acidity of the Cell-sap, 606. Aconitum Lycoctonum, Fertilization of, 269. Acqua, C., Passage of Fibrovascular Bun- dles from the Branch to the Leaf, 775. Actiniz, Prepaying Epithelia of, 1047. Actinomyces from the Jaw of an Ox, 699. Actinospherium, Artificial Development in, 768. Actinozoa, New, 249. Adametz, L., Bacteria in the Soil, 454. 1887. Adaptation of Plants to rain and dew, 995. Adelosina, 254. Adjustment, Fine, Hilger’s Tangent-screw, 461. Adolph, E., Wings of Diptera, 227. Adoral Ciliated Organ of Infusoria, 99. Adventitious Roots, 610. Aerial Roots of Sonneratia, 111. Mschynanthus and Stylidium, Crystalloids in, 774. Affinities of Arachnida, 77. Africa, Central, Muscines of, 122. Agardh, J. G., Siphones, 998. Agaricus melleus, Parasitism of, 790. Agarum. Turneri, Anatomy and Develop- ment of, 441. Age, Relative, and Relationship of Noc- tue and Geometre, 75. Ahrens’ (C. D.) Microscope, 1068. — Polarizing Prism, 152. Triocular Microscope, 799. Air, Distribution of Micro-organisms in, 137, 453, 631. ——, New Micro-organisms obtained from, 631. , Permeability of Cell-walls to, 981. Air-breathing Molluscs, Terrestrial, of the United States, 376. —— -bubbles, How Alcohol drives out, 343. Albumen, Active, Separation of Silver by, 255. —— in Plants, Formation of, 994. —— in the Cell-wall, 981. Albumen-vessels in the Crucifere and allied orders, 427. Albuminoids in Plants, Formation of, 425. Alcohol drives out Air-bubbles, How, 343. , Preparation of Plants in, 675. Alcoholic Fermentation, 995. of Dextrin and Starch, 437. on living Trees, 285. Alcyonaria and Holothurioida, Fossil Cal- careous Elements of, 215. Alcyonella fungosa, Development of, 741. Alcyonida, North Sea, 599. Alder and Elwagunacez, Swelling on the Roots of, 611. Aldrovanda, Seeds of, 114. Alessandri, P. E., 1040. Aleurone-grains, Calcium oxalate in, 983. 4B 1078 Alga and Bacterium, Symbiosis of, 789, 996. parasitic on animals, 123. Alge. See Contents, xxix. Algiers, Pelagic Annelids of the Gulf of, 398. Alimentary Canal, Structure of, 944. Alkaloids and other Crystalline Bodies, Identification of, by the Microscope, 527. in Plants, Localization and Signifi- cance of, 607. Alling, C. E., 174. , Microscopical Records, 173. Allogonium, 625. Alpheus, Embryology «f, and other Crus- tacea, and the development of the Com pound Hye, 233. Alpine Lakes, High, Microscopic Fauna of, 374. —— Plants, Scandinavian, Fertilization of, 615. Alps, Influence of soil on the vegetation on the summits of, 784. Alternation of Generations in Mammalia, Altmann, R., Studies on the Cell, 46. Alvarez, E., New (Indigogenous) Microbe, 1009. and Tavel, Preparing the Bacillus of Lustgarten, 166. Amann, J., Optical Properties of the Peri- stome of Mosses, 276. Amarecium torquatum, Anatomy of, 65. Amateurs, Pursuit of Microscopical Studies by, 1041. Amblyosporium, 790. Amblysteginm, 276. Ambronn, H., Theory of Twining, 436. Awmerica, North, Sphagnacez, 998. American Desmids, 279. —— Fresh-water Infusoria, Notices of new, 35. —— , New Hypotrichous In- fusoria from, 975. American Society of Microscopists, 158. ing, 159. —_— ——. Pittsburgh Meeting, 831, 1040. ; —_ ___ ——, The Working Sessions, 668 Amecebe, Multiplication of, 249. — of Variola vera, 977. Amphibia, Hybridization between, 370. Amphibian Bladder, Goblet-cells in, 213. Egg, Preparing, 671. — Embryos, Preparation of, 327. — Ova, Maturation and Fertilization of, 564. Amphibians, Demonstration of goblet cells in bladder epithelium, 502. Amphibious Life in Rhizomorpha, 53. —— Plants, Influence of an Aquatic Medium on, 272. Amphiloma murorum, Soredial Sporidia of, 125. The Chautauqua Meet- INDEX. A eee pellucida, Photomicrographs of, 357. Amphipoda, Forgotten Genera of, 237. Hyperidea, Mimonectes, a new genus of, 85. Synopidea, 237. Amphipods, 237. Amphiura, Development of Calcareous Plates of, 966. — squamata, Copepod Parasite of, 587. Ampullaceous Sac, Position of, and Func- tion of the Water-canal-system in Spon- gida, 413. Amygdalese, Extra - floral Nectaries of, 267. Amyloid Corpuscles- in Pollen - grains, 991. Anaerobic culture of aerobic Bacteria, 795. Anesthesia and Poisoning of Plants, 785. Anagyris foetida, Fruit of, Structure and Development of, 614. Analysing Diaphragm, Lighton’s, for the Polariscope, 812. Analysis of Minerals, 525. Ancestors of Insects, 384. Ancylistee and, Chytridiaces, 283, 630. Andeer, J., The Resorein derivative Phlo- roglucin, 504. André, E., and M. Berthelot, Formation of Oxalic Acid in Vegetation, 108. Andrews, E. A., Orienting Objects in Paraffin, 510. Anguillula of the Beetroot, Brown Cysts of, 959. Anilin Colours, Absorption of, by Living Cells, 1057. Dyes, Decoloration stained with, 688. , New Methods of using, for staining Bacteria, 515. , Staining Pathogenic Bacteria with, 1088. Pigments, Absorption of, by living Vegetable Cells, 512. —— Staining, Phenomenon in, 339. Stains, 1058. Anisogonium, Gemmiparous 438. Annelids and Opisthobranchs, Pericardial Gland of, 939. of the Genus Dero, 90. , Orivin of, from the Larva of Lopa- dorhynchus, 87. Ant-entertaining Plants, 110. Antedon rosacea, Morphology of, 247. ——, Supposed Symbiotic Algw in, 247. Antenne, Function of, 380. Anthea cereus, Chromatology of, 598. Anthropoid Apes, Embryogeny of, 370. Ants and Ultra-Violet Rays, 73. —, Modification of Habits in, through fear of Enemies, 581, Microchemical, of Bacteria roots of, INDEX. Ants and Wasps, Preparation of Ova of, 841. Aperture of the Microscope, Measure of, 828 Apes, Anthropoid, Embryogeny of, 370. Aphides, Life-history of, 227. Apical Growth of Leaves, 616. Apochromatic Objectives, 462. Apocynacez, Origin of Rootlets and La- teral Roots in, 777. Apogamy in Ferns, 622. Apospory, 996. in Polystichum angulare var. pul- cherrimum, Wills, 622. Apothecia of Lachnea theleboloides, 1000. Apus and Branchipus, 237. Aquarium Microscope, Schulze’s, 1010. Aquatic Medium, Influence of an, on Amphibious Plants, 272. Plants, Desiccation of Seeds of, 271. Aquiferous System in Calophyllum, 261. —— Tissue in the Leaves of Sansevieria, 984. Arachnid Appendages, Homologues of, Arachnida. See Contents, xv. Araucaria, Secretion of, 984. Arcangeli, G., 174. , Leaves of Mosses, 785. Arctic Alge, 278. Arenicola and Lumbrica, Preparation of endothelium of the general cavity of, 842. Areschoug, F. W. C., Aquiferous Tissue in the Leaves of Sansevieria, 984. , Reproduction of parts of Plants, 994. Aril and Nectary of Jeffersonia, 781. Arloing, 8., 1066. —., Effects of Solar Light on Bacillus anthracis, 450. Armour-plate, Microscopic Structure of, 346. Army Medical Microscope, Giles’s, 1012. Arnaud, A., Carrotene in Leaves, 983. Arnstein, C., Methylen-blue Staining, 849. Arthropod and Molluscan Eyes, Preparing, 162, 672. Arthropoda. See Contents, xiv. Arthur, J. C., History and Biology of Pear Blight, 451. —_, Pathogenic Fungi, 628. Artificial Crystal Sections, Media for mounting very perishable, 855. —— Development in Actinospherium, 768. Ascaris dactyluris, Heterogamy of, 401. megalocephala, Process of Fertiliza- tion in, 593. ——,, Oogenesis in, 92. Ascent of Sap, 435. Ascidia of Cephalotus follicularis, 778. Ascidians, Normal and Teratological Em- bryology of, 739. ——,, Observations on, 942. Ascomycetes, New Genus of, 630. Asconema gibbosum, 402. 1079 Asellide, 237. Asellus aquaticus, Pale variety of, 952. Aspen, Larch, and Savin, Fungi parasitic on, 1005. Asper, G., Microscopic Organisms in Fresh Water, 53. Aspergillus, 444, ——, New, 127. Aspidiotus of the Rose-laurel, Structure and Metamorphosis of, 76. Assimilating Organ, Capsule of Mosses as an, 122. — System, 109. — and Laticiferous Vessels, 984. Assimilation and Transpiration in Leaves treated with Milk of Lime, 782. —, Chlorophyllous, 616. — , Conditions of, 992. Astacus, Sense of Touch in, 234. Astasia ocellata and Euglena viridis, Bio- logy of, 601. Asterids, Formation of Genital Organs and Appendages of the Ovoid Gland in, 246. Asteroma of the Rose, 128. Astigmatism of the Eye, Slide for testing, 158. Atavism, 565. Atmosphere, Micro-organisms in, 453. Atwater, W. O., Liberation of Nitrogen from its compounds, and acquisition of atmospheric Nitrogen by Plants, 783. and EK. W. Rockwood, Loss of Ni- trogen by Plants during Germination and Growth, 270. Auer’s Incandescent Gas-burner Microscope Lamp, 813. Aurivillius, C., Fertilization of Aconitum Lycoctonum, 269. Austral Coniferse, Formation of Roots in, 986. Australian Cladocera, 953. Hydromedusz, Addendum to, 249. Polycheta, 399. —— Sponges, 99. marr eae: Changes in Maple Leaves, 784. Fall of Leaves, 776. Axis of Inflorescence, 989. Ayers, H., Crustacean Carapace, 85. pert te (H. P.) Opaque Wood Slide, 344. as @ B. B.Sc., 174. Babes, —., 1060. Baccarini, P., Peronospora viticola, 129. Bachmann, E., Emodin in Nephroma lusi- tanica, 1001. ——, Microchemical Reactions of Lichens, 1001. , O., Peltate Hairs, 265. Bacilli, Comma-, Influence of Desiccation and Temperature on, 133, ——, Lepra, 452. ——, —, Staining of, 517. eB 2, 1080 Bacilli, Syphilis and Tubercle, Staining of, 517, 851 ——, Tubercle, 286. , and Leprosy, Staining Differ- ences, 688. ——, ——,, Preparing, 330. , ——~, Staining Cover-glass Prepara- tions of, 516. Bacillus anthracis, Chemical Composition of, 137. —_ b) , Effects of Solar Light on, 450. Brassice, 450. — of Glanders, Staining, 1058. — of Lustgarten, Preparing, 166. , Tubercle, New Method for the Culti- vation of, 499. , Staining, 339. Bacteria, aerobic, Anaerobic culture of, 795. ——, Certain Properties of Phosphorescent, 009. ——, Changes induced in Water by the development of, 799. , Chemical constituents of, 631. —, ’ Cholera, Chemical reaction for, 795. ——,, Cultivation of, on Coloured Nutrient Media, 1044. ——, Decoloration of, stained with Anilin dyes, 688. —— in Drinking-water, 136, 494. in Ice, 455. —— in the Soil, 454. — in Water, 454. ——, Intestinal, 134. ——, Method for Cultivating Anaerobic, 498. ——, Necessity of Oxygen for, 136. , New Methods of using Anilin Dyes for staining, 510. , Pathogenic, 286. —, , Staining with Anilin Dyes, 1058. ——, Sulphur-, 1007. Bacterial Material, Preparing, for Trans- mission by Post, 507. | Bacteriological Apparatus, Some Noyel- ties in, 1042. — — Examination of Water, 455. experiments with coloured nutrient media, 833. Studies in Arthropods, 70. Bacterium aceti, Chemical Action of, 794. — and Alga, Symbiosis of, 785, 996. maydis, 133. of rotten Grapes, 451. —— of Wheat Ensilage, 451. xylinum, Cellulose formed by, 795. Bacterium-method, Engelmann’s, 166, 506. Bahamas, Balanoglossus Larva from, 966. Baker, J. G., Pilularia, 275. —~,S. W., Wax Cells, 694. Balanoglossus and Tornaria, 245. — Larva, 597. from the Bahamas, 966. , Lwo New Species of, 95. Balhiani, Vesicle of, 565. INDEX. Balbiani, E. G., Bacteriological Studies in Arthropods, 70. Poe eae of Leucophrys patula, oye W. M., Genera of Plumulariide, 48. Balsam Mounting, Reagents for clearing Celloidin Sections for, 519. —, New Method of Mounting Protozoa in, 505. ——, No excess of, necessary, 692. Baltic, Pelagic Microzoa of, 52. Bambeke, C. Van, Artificial Distortions of the Nucleus, 327. Baranetzki, J., Thickening of the wall of parenchymatous cells, 426. Barfurth, D., Absorption of the Tadpole’s Tail, 211. , Conditions of Tadpole Metamor- phosis, 210. Barley and Maize, Supposed Reduction of Nitrates by, 783. , New Fungoid Disease of, 447. Barringtonies and Lecythidex, Cortical Fibrovascular Bundles in, 7795. Barrois, J., Homologies of Larve of Comatulids, 408. ——,, Metamorphosis of Bryozoa, 222. —, Palsemonetes varians, 586. ——,, Singular Parasite on Fizola, 373. Bartalini, G., Method of determining the index of refraction when the refracting angle is large, 665. Baskets for the suspension of Objects in paraffin, 681. Bastin, EH. S8., 857. Bateson, A and F. Darwin, Effect of Stimulation on Turgescent Vegetable Tissues, 985. Baumgarten, Staining Differences of Le- prosy and Tubercle Bacilli, 688. Bausch, E., 645. Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Combined Inverted and Vertical Microscopes, 141. — — — Condenser, 648. —— —— —— Condenser and Substage, 297, 320, 809. —— —— —— Mechanical Stages, 650. Spirit-lamp, 856. Beaufort, Parasitic Cuninas of, 248. Beaumont, C. R., Observations on the Metamorphoses "of Amoebe and Acti- nophrys, 1070, 1074. Beauregard, H., Vesicating Insects, 224, 581. Beccari, G., Turgidity of Petals, 779. Beck, G., Hormogones or Gloeotrichia natans, Thur., 285. , J. D., Double Staining with Echein- green and Carmine, 515. —, Mounting Pollens, 174. Beck’s (R. and J.) Microscopes, 461. Beddard, F. E., Anatomy of Earthworms, | oe , ‘Challenger’ Isopoda, 394. —, ’ New Genus of Lumbricide, 751. ——, New Species of Harthworm, 954. INDEX. Beddard, F. E., New Type of Compound Eye, 952. ——,, Ovarian Ovum of the Dipnoi, 44. , Structure of Ovum of Dipnoi, 564. Bedot, M., Stinging Cells, 410. Bee, Honey, Cell of, 577. 5 , Geometrical Construction of the Cell of, 383. , Tongue of, Anatomy and Physiology of, 224. , Wall-, and its Parasites, 225. Bees, Fertile Worker, 529. ——.,, “ Foul-brood ” of, 134. Beetles, Holopneusty in, 380. ——, Spermatogenesis of, 70. Beetroot, Brown Cysts of Anguillula of, 959. Beggiatoa alba, 794. Behrens, J., Epidermal Glands containing an Ethereal Oil, 430. , T. H., 174. = Analysis of Minerals, 525. ——, W., 158. ——, Tables for Microscopists, 524. Belgium, Bothriocephalus latus in, 93, Bell, F. J., Grouse Disease, 699. —., New Holothurians, 967. , On Tenia nana, 179. Bell-wort, “ Crazy” pollen of, 781. Belzung, E., Formation of Starch in Sclerotia, 280. ——,, Starch and Leucites, 423. Benda, C., Preparing the Mammalian Testis, 839. ——, Spermatogenesis of Mammalia, 730. Benecke, B., Focusing in Photomicro- graphy, 662. , F., Tubers on the Roots of Legu- minose, 429. Beneden, E. van, Are the Tunicata degene- rate Fishes ? 944. 55 Bothriocephalus latus in Belgium, 3 and ©. Julin, Morphology of Tuni- cata, 62. Benham, W. B., Criodrilus lacuum, 592. Bennett, A. W., Classification of Alge, 786. , Fresh-water Algz (including Chlo- rophyllaceous Protophyta) of North Cornwall; with descriptions of six new species, 8. , On Fresh-water Alge, 183. Bergendal, D., Land Planarians, 596. Berger’s (C. L.) Microscope for fixing Spider’s Threads, 144. Berggren, S., Formation of Roots in Austral Conifers, 986. Bergh, R., ‘Challenger’ Marseniide, 219. , Structure and Development of the Generative Organs of Earthworms, 238. Berlese, A. N., Fungi parasitic on Mul- berry, 1004. : , Macrophoma, a new genus of Sphe- ropsides, 280. 1081 Berlese, A. N., Protoventuria, a new genus of Pyrenomycetes, 282. Berlin Exhibition, 161. Bernard, F., Structure of Branchia of Prosobranchiate Gastropoda, 939. , Structure of False Gills of Pectini- branch Prosobranchs, 940. , J. G., 496. “ Berry’s Hard Finish” as a Cement and Mounting Medium, 1064. Berthelot, M., and E. André, Formation of Oxalic Acid in Vegetation, 108. Berthold, G., Protoplasm, 420. Bertrand, E., Microscopic Measurement of Indices of Refraction and Axial Angle of Minerals, 468. Bertrand’s Refractometer, 469. Besser, F., Comparative Anatomy of Flower- and Fruit-stalks, 990. Beyerinck, M. W., Cecidia caused by Nematus caprez, 746. Biaxial Shoots of Carex, 987. Bidert, —., 690. , Preparing Tubercle Bacilli. 330. Bienstock, B., Staining of Syphilis and Tubercle Bacilli, 517. Bile-capillaries, Demonstration of, 163. Bilharzia, Anatomy of, 403. ——,, Excretory and Reproductive Systems of, 403. Binney, W. G., Terrestrial Air-breathing Molluses of the United States, 376. Binocular Vision with the Microscope, 829. Binuclearia, a new genus of Confervacex, 441. Bipalium kewense, 966. Birds as Disseminators of Seeds, 271. , Chorioptes (or Symbiotes) on, 585. ——, Preparing Eyes of, 162. Bischof, G., 1066. Bizzozero, G., 857. “ Black-rot ” of the Vine, 129. Black Sea, Polyzoa of, 68. , Protozoa of, 977. Blackburn, J. W., 1053. , Myrtle Wax Imbedding Process, 1048. Bladder, Amphibian, Goblet-cells in, 213. Blake Expeditions, Holothurioidea of, 245. Blanc, H., Amphipods, 237. ,» New Foraminifer, 102. Blaschko, A., Physiological Silvering of Elastic Tissue, 839. Blastoderm, Relation of Yolk to, in Teleo- stean Fish-ova, 43. Blastoderm-cells, Non-nucleated, 231. Blastogenesis in the Bryozoa, 67. —— of Botrylloides rubrum, 65. Blastoids, Morphological Relations of Sum- mit plates in, 763. Blechnum occidentale and Osmunda re- galis, Structure of Mucilage-cells of, 997. Bleeding, 996. ——, Periodicity in the Phenomena of, 436. Blight, Celery-leaf, 790. 1082 Blochmann, F., Directive Corpuscles in Eggs of Insects, 743. ——, New Hematococcus, 131. ——, Oogenesis of Insects, 70. ——, Polar Globules in Insect Ova, 576. ——, Preparation of Ova of Ants and Wasps, 841. ——, Reproduction of Euglypha, 976. —, Sexual Generation of Chermes, 948. Blood, Elements of, Method of Staining and Fixing, 1054. , Fate of Microbes in, of Warm- blooded Animals, 133. of Lizards, Parasites in, 105. , Parasites in, 977. ——, Permanent Preparations of, 678. ——, Photomicrographs of Flagellated Protozoa in, 358. Plaques, method of studying, 175. Blood-corpuscles, Comparative Size of, in Man and Domestic Animals, 937. —— - —— of the Cyclostomata, 937. —— - —., Red, Alteration of, 566. ——-——,, ——,, Formation of Vacuoles in, 50. Blood -lacuna, Perineural, of Scorpions, 389. —— -serum Cultivation, 669, Plates, 832. Blossom on Old Wood, 990. Blottiére, R., Anatomy of Menispermaces, 428. Blow-fly Larva, Structure of the Head of, 948. Bohemia, Algz of, 125. Bohm, A. A., Fertilization of Ovan of Lamprey, 932. —, R., and EH. Kiilz, Poisonous princi- ples of Hymenomycetous Fungi, 127. Bohmig, L., Planaria Iheringii, 963. , Sensory Organs of Turbellaria, 962. Bokorny, T., Separation of Silver by active ‘Albumin, 255. Bolton, M., 501. , Bacteria in Drinking-water, 136, 454, — , T., 158. , Death of, 1040. Bond, G. M., and W. A. Rogers, Rogers- Bond Universal Comparator, 639. Bone, Mycelites ossifragus—a Fungus in, 789. Bonnier, G., Synthesis of Lichens, 443. ——, J., and A. Giard, Cepon, 394. —— ——, Phylogeny of Bopyride, 587. ——, The Genus Entione, 85. Booth, M. A., King’s Cement, 1064. Bopyrida, Phylogeny of, 587. Borden’s (W. C.) Electrical Constant-tem- perature Apparatus, 810, 1024. Extemporized Section-smoother, 686. Born, G., Hybridization between Am- phibia, 370. Bornet, E., and C. Flahault, Heterocystous Nostocacez, 449, 793. Borraginee and Labiate, Fertilization of, 115. INDEX. Borzi, A., Foliar Lenticels, 430. —, Soredial Sporidia. of Amphiloma murorum, 125. ——,, Structure of Nostochinesx, 448. Bostwick, A. E., On a means of deter- mining the Limits of Distinct Vision, 158. Botanical Manipulation, 675. Bothriocephalus latus in Belgium, 93. Bothrodendron and Ulodendron, 121. Botrylloides rubrum, Blastogenesis of, 65. Boudier, E., 351. ——, Ptychogaster, 1003. Bourne, A. G., Budding in Oligochzta, 91. —, Reported Suicide of Scorpions, 388. , Rotifera, 405. —, AEE C., Anatomy of Fungia, 411. ‘of Mussa and Euphyllia, and the Morphology of the Madreporarian Skeleton, 972. Bourquelot, E., Composition of the Starch- grain, 424. Bousfield, E. C., Annelids of the Genus Dero, 90. —, ‘ Guide to the Science of Photomicro- graphy,’ 488. , Natural History of the Genus Dero, 752. —, Note on some Photomicrographs, 357. ——, Photomicrographs of Amphipleura pellucida, 357. Bouvier, E. L., Nervous System in Tenio- glossate Prosobranchs, 374. of Ctenobranch Molluses, aces 60. , Typical Nervous System of Proso- branchs, 218. Bovallius, C., Amphipoda Synopidea, 237. , Asellidee, 237. —, Forgotten Genera of Amphipoda, 237. ——, Mimonectes, a new genus of Amphi- poda Hyperidea, 85. , New Isopoda, 237. Boveri, T., Preparing Medullated Nerve- fibres, 838. Bower, F. O., Apospory, 996. ——, Humboldtia laurifolia as a myrme- cophilous plant, 785. —, Positively Geotropic Shoots of Cor- dyline australis, 778. Bowman, F. H., Variations in Wool, 567. Boys, C. V., 497, 666. Brachiopoda. See Contents, xiii. Brachyura, ‘ Challenger,’ 392. Brady, H. B., A Synopsis of the British Recent Foraminifera, 872, 1076. Brain, Comparative Morphology of, in Insects and Crustacea, 379. — of Man, Cysticercus cellulose in, 93. —— of Mysis flexuosa, 951. —— of Tadpole, Showing Mitosis in, 163. —— of Vespa crabro and V. vulgaris, 578. INDEX, Bramwell, R., 678. Branch, Passage of Fibrovascular Bundles from, to the Leaf, 775. Branchia of Prosobranchiate Gastropoda, Structure of, 939. Branchiobdella_ varians, Histology of, 240. Branchipus and Apus, 237. Brandt, K., Colonial Radiolarians, 101. Brasse, L., Solution of Starch in Leaves, 165. Braun, M., Asconema gibbosum, 402. , Dicyemide, 964. —, New Genus of Parasitic Infusoria, 419. , Preparation of Rhabdoccelous Tur- bellaria, 329. Bray, A., and R. Sulzberger, 321. Bréal, E., Action of Algeze upon Water, 124. Breithaupt, P. F., Anatomy and Physio- logy of Tongue of Bee, 224. , Sections of Chitinous Organs, 509. Bresaloda, 8. G., Schulzeria, a new genus of Hymenomycetes, 127. Brezina, A., The new Goniometer of the IR. Geological Reichsanstalt, 1040. Briant, T. J., New Form of Microscope Cell for mounting objeets requiring to be examined on both sides, 856. Brinck, J., and H. Kronecker, Synthetic Processes in Living Cells, 935. British Guiana, Peripatus of, 747. Recent Foraminifera, A Synopsis of, 872. Brock, J., Development of Genital Appara- tus of Stylommatophorous Pulmonata, 58. ——, Method of Studying Development of Genital Organs of Pulmonata, 163. —, New Trematode, 595. Brokenshire, F. R., 694, 1034. Brook, G., Relation of Yolk to Blasto- derm in Teleostean Fish-ova, 43. Brooks, W. K., ‘ Challenger’ Stomatopoda, 235. , The Salpa-chain, 221. Brown, A. J., Cellulose formed by Bac- terium xylinum, 795. , Chemical Action of Bacterium aceti, 794. , Mounting Opaque Objects, 523. Bruce, A. T., Early Development of Loligo, 216. —, Nervous System of Insects and Spiders and Remarks on Phrynus, 223. Brugmansia Lowii, 535. Brun, J., Microscopical Technique for small Pelagic Objects, 505. Brunner, H., and EK. Chuard, Presence of Glyoxylic Acid in Plants, 257. Bryan, G. H., 331. Bryozoa. See Polyzoa, Contents, xiii. Bryum, Peristome of, 275. Buchenau, F., Cilia of Luzula, 113. Bud-scales, 989. Budding in Oligocheata, 91. Anatomy and 1083 Buds, Exchange of Gases by, 119. , Position of, and Formation of Root- lets in the Binary Roots of Phanerogams, 776. Bujwid, O., Chemical Reaction for Cholera Bacteria, 795. Bulloch’s (W. H.) Student's Microscope, 140 Burch’s (G. J.) Perspective Microscope, 288, 456. Burgess, E. §., 175. Biirkner, K., Auer’s Incandescent Gas- burner as a Microscope Lamp, 813. Burrill, J. T., 158, 668. A new Objective, 809. Burrill’s Stain, New Formula for, 850. Bursaria truncatella, 100. Biisgen. M., Cladochytrium, 1002. Busk, G., ‘ Challenger’ Polyzoa, 378. Butschli, O., Morphology of Eye of Pec- tens, 220. Butter and Fats, Discrimination of, 345. Buysson, R. du, Amblystegium, 276. Byssus Gland of Lamellibranchs, 942. C. Cabinet, Medland’s Portable, 173. ——., New Material, 1064. ——.,, Slide, James’s Improved, 694. Cactacez, Fertilization of, 270. Cadura, R., Bud-scales, 989. Czecal Processes of Shells of Brachiopoda, 073. Calabro, P., Poulsen’s Crystals, 425. Calathea, Silicified Cells in, 982. Calcareous Elements, Fossil, of Aleyonaria and Holothurioida, 215. —— Plates of Amphiura, Development of, 966. Calcium oxalate in Aleurone-grains, 983. — in the Cell-wall of Nyctaginex, 607. Caleutta, Microscopical Society of, 667. ——,, Microscopy in, 1041. Caldwell, C. T., New Cement, 694. , W. H., Embryology of Monotremata and Marsupialia, 563. Calker, F. J. P. van, Universal Projection Apparatus for Mineralogical Purposes, 459 Callmé, A., Biaxial Shoots of Carex, 987. Calloni, S., Fertilization of Achlys tri- phylla, 269. ——,, Nectary and Aril of Jeffersonia, 781. of Erythronium, 114. Calophyllum, Aguiferous System in, 261. ——,, Laticiferous vessels of, 609. Caltha palustris, Ovuliferous Petals in, 266. Cambium of the Medullary Rays, 426. Cambridge Scientific Instrument Oo.’s Reading Microscope, 643. Camellia, Fungi parasitic on, 790. 1084 Camera Lucida, 473. for Magnifiers, Nachet’s, 649. ——, Nelson’s Photomicrographie, 661. , Nelson and Curties’s Photo-micro- graphic, 1025. , Photomicrographic, for the Simple or Compound Microscope, 662. Campani’s (G.) Compound Microscope, 643. Campari, G., and C. V. Ciaccio, Solution of Hypochlorite of Soda with excess of chlorine as a Decolorizer, 518. Campbell’s (Sir A.) Micrometer-Micro- scope, 457. Campbell, D. H., Absorption of Anilin Colours by Living Cells, 1057. ——, Colouring the Nuclei of Living Cells, 1056. ——, Development of Spermatozoids, 620. , Fixing and Staining Nuclei, 687. Canada Balsam, Styrax and, 359. Candolle, C. De, Effects of the Tempera- ture of Melting Ice on Germination, 271. Canfield, W. B., Imbedding Eyes in Cel- loidin, 680. , Preparing Eyes of Birds, 162. Canu, E., New Genus of Parasitic Cope- poda, 238. Caoutchouc in Plants, 607. Cape Horn, Priapulide from, 241. —— Species of Peripatus, Development of, 582. Capillary Tube Slide and Perforator of Cell-elements, 319. Capsule of Mosses as an Assimilating Organ, 122. Carapace, Crustacean, 85. Carbonic Acid, Assumed Decomposition of, by Chlorophyll, 118. —— ——, Decomposition of, by Chloro- phyll outside the plant, 118. —— Anhydride, Absorption of, by Leaves, 434. Cardium edule, Preparation of Heart- muscle in, 328. Cardot, J., European Sphagnacez, 123. , Sphagnacese of North America, 998. Carex, Biaxial Shoots of, 987. Carlisle Microscopical Society and Dr. Dallinger, 156. Carmine, Acid Chloral hydrate, 848. and Echein-green, Double Staining with, 515. , Mayer’s Modification of Grenacher’s, 8 — solution made with Carbonate of Soda, 847. Carnelly, —., and T. Wilson, 1066. Carnivora, Development of, 561. Carnivorous Plants, Rhizopod-like Di- gestive Organs in, 112. _ Carnoy, J. B., Oogenesis in Ascaris, 92. Carpeles, L., New species of Mite, 390. Carpene, A., 527. Carpenter, P. H., Morphology of Antedon rosacea, 247. INDEX. Carpenter, P. H., Supposed Symbiotic Algze in Antedon rosacea, 247. Carrotene in Leaves, 983. Carruthers, W., Prehistoric Plants, 120. Carter, H. J., Position of the Ampulla- ceous Sac, and Function of the Water- canal-system in Spongida, 413. ——., Reproductive Elements of Spongida, 601. , South Australian Sponges, 99. Cartilage, fresh, Sectioning by partial Imbedding, 338. Cartilage-cells shrinking away from Ma- trix, preventing, 326. Cassia marilandica, Fertilization of, 270. Castellarnau, J. M. de, 678. Castor Oil, Mounting in, 695. Castracane, F., Diatoms of the ‘Challenger’ Expedition, 442. ——, Fossil Diatoms from Umbria, 443. ——,, Reproduction in a Fossil Diatom, 445. Castration of Decapodous Crustacea by parasites, 750. ——, Parasitic, and its influence on the External Characters of Male Decapod Crustacea, 586. Casuarinese, Anatomy of, 260. Catalogue of Microscopical Collections, Ward’s, 346. Caterpillars, Forms of, 75. Catheart Microtome, 175. Caulerpa, Prolification of, 124. Cauliflower, Moist Gangrene of, 119. Caustic Potash Preparations, Permanent, 348. Cecidia caused by Nematus caprex, 746. Celakovsky, L., Cupules of Cupulifere, 613 ——, Spike-like partial inflorescence of the Rhyncosporee, 779. Celery-leaf Blight, 790. Cell, Dry, New Form of, 856. ——,, Hartnack’s Cupro-ammonia, 826. — Material, Wax as a, 854. —, New Form of Microscopic, for mounting objects requiring to be ex- amined on both sides, 856. — of the Honey-bee, 577. — —— —,, Geometrical Construction of, 383. ——,, Studies on the, 46. Cell-division, Theory of, 935. -elements, Perforator of, and Capil- lary Tube Slide, 319. -multiplication, Endogenous, 48. —— -nuclei in the Hymenomycetes, 126. — -nucleus, Chemistry of, 372. —— -—, Crystalloids in, 255. —— -sap, Acidity of, 606. — -waill, Albumen in, 981. , Growth of, and other pheno- mena in Siphonez, 999. , structure of, 107. —— -walls, Permeability to air of, 981. - ——, Swelling and Double Refrac- tion of, 981. INDEX. Celli, A., and F. Marino-Zuco, Nitrifica- tion, 1008. Celloidin, Imbedding in, 175. ——, —— Eyes in, 680. — Sections for Balsam Mounting, Re- agents for clearing, 519. . Medium for clearing up, 519. Celloidin-Paraffin Imbedding, 849. Cells, Cup-shaped, 566. ——., Epidermal, Differentiation of, 774. — ——, Epithelial, Method for isolating, 502. ——, Giant, of Tubercle, 566. ——, Glandular, Structure of, 47. , Goblet, 47. ——, ——.,, in bladder epithelium of Am- phibians, Demonstration of, 502. —. , preparing, 325. —,-—— and Mucous, Rosanilin Nitrate for, 172. ——.,, Living, Absorption of Anilin Colours by, 1057. ——, ——,, Colouring the Nuclei, 1056. 5 , Fundamental Condition of Equilibrium in, 46. , Synthetic Processes in, 935. — , Mature, Position of Nucleus in, 980. ——., Multinucleated, 107. , Parenchymatous, Thickening of the wall of, 426. , Plasmolysed, Growth of, 254. ——, Network of, surrounding the Endo- derm in the Roots of Cruciferse, 775. — of the loose Subcutaneous Tissue, Preparing, 837. —, Origin of Male Generative, of Eudendrium racemosum, 968. —, Silicified, in Calathea, 952. ——,, Stinging, 410, 765. ——, Tendon, preparing, 837. ——, Wax, 694. Cellular Elements of Ovary of Insects, Origin and Significance of, 71. Cellulose formed by Bacterium xylinum, 795. , Starch, Nageli’s, 256. s , True Nature of, 774. Cement and Mounting Medium, “ Berry’s Hard Finish ” as, 1064. ——, King’s, 1064. ——, Kronig’s, 344. ——,, New, 175, 694. Cemented Combination Lens, Finding the general character of the Components of, 151. Cementstein, Preparing Diatoms in, 330. Centering Card, 344. Cephalopoda, Anatomy and Histology of Salivary Glands of, 734. > ‘Challenger,’ 216. ——,, Shells of, 569. Cephalotus follicularis, Ascidia of, 778. Cepon, 394. Certes, A., 331. —, New Method of Mounting Protozoa in Balsam, 505. , and M. Garrigou, Micro-organisms in Thermal Water, 214. > 1085 Chabry, L., Capillary Tube Slide and Perforator of Cell-elements, 319. , Normal and Teratological Embry- ology of Ascidians, 739. Cheetomium, 791. ——., Cultivation of, 1041. Chztomorphas, Fresh-water, 999. Chetopterus, Organization of, 956. Chalande, J., Apparatus for examining living Myriopoda, 656. ——, Mechanism of Respiration in Myrio- poda, 230, 385. ‘ Challenger’ Brachyura, 392. Cephalopoda, 216. — Cecidea, 219. — Diatoms, 442. Tsopoda, 394. —— Marseniide, 219. Polyplacophora, 219. Polyzoa, 378. — Radiolaria, 603. ——,, Reef-corals of, 249. — Seaphopoda and Gastropoda, 219. —— Stomatopoda, 235. — Tunicata, 377. Chapman, F. T., Preparing Silver Crystals, 676. Chapuis, F., Nemerteans of Roscoff, 94. Characeex. See Contents, xxix. Chase, H. H., and C. W. Walker, New Diatoms, 788. Chatin, J., Anatomy of Bilharzia, 403. —, Brown Cysts of Anguillula of the Beetroot, 959. , Excretory and Reproductive Systems of Bilharzia, 403. Chemical Action of Bacterium aceti, 794. and Morphological Composition of Protoplasm, 979. Comparison of Male and Female Elements, 45. — Composition of Bacillus anthracis, 7. of certain Nectars, 425. of Ova, 72. nature of Diastase, 995. Reaction for Cholera Bacteria, 7995. —— Reactions of Protoplasm, 423. Chemistry of Cell-nucleus, 372. —— of Chlorophyll, 606. of Germination, 615. — of Staining, 852. Chenopodiacex, Structure of, 987. Chermes, Sexual Generation of, 948. Cherry-parasite, Gnomonia erythrostroma, a, 128. Chérubin d'Orléans’ ‘ La Vision parfaite,’ 157. Cheshire, F. R., Fertile Worker-bees, 929. , Improved form of Inoculating Needle for Bacterium tubes, 179. Chick, Influence of the vertical position on the development of the Eggs of, 42. , Testicle of, Development and Signi- ficeance of the Germinal Epithelium in, 210. — 1086 Children affected with hereditary Syphilis, Staining Micro-organisms in the tissues of, 517. China-Blue as a Stain for the Funnel- shaped Fibrils in Medullated Nerves, 514. Chitinous Organs, Sections of, 509. Chiton, Oogenesis of, 940. Chiusoli, V., Magnifying Power of Dioptric Instruments, 492. Chlorema Dujardini and Siphonostoma diplochaitos, 753. Chloremidz, Organization of, 590. Chloral hydrate Carmine, Acid, 848. Chlorophyll, Assumed Decomposition of Carbonic Acid by, 118. , Chemical Composition of, 107. ——, Chemistry of, 606. ——, Decomposition of Carbonic Acid by, outside the plant, 118. ——, Hourly Variations in the Action of, 982. ——,, Production of, in an objective spec- trum, 425. ——, Researches on, 606. on Green and Yellow, 606. Chlorophyll-function of Leaves, 617. Chlorophyll-grains, Structure of, 982. Chlorophyllous Assimilation, 616. Protophyta, Relationship of, to the Protonema of Mosses, 130. Chlorosis in Plants, 437. Chlorosporex, Formation of Cysts in, 277 Chlorovaporization, 273. Chmielewsky, V., Proteinaceous bodies in Epiphyllum, 983. —., Structure of Chlorophyll-grains, 982. Choano-flagellata, New, 253. Cholera Bacteria, Chemical reaction for, 795. Cholin in Seedlings, 774. Cholodkovsky, N., Morphology of Insects’ Wings, 74. —, of Malpighian Tubes in Lepi- doptera, 381. ——, Prothoracic Appendages of Lepi- doptera, 381. Chorioptes (or Symbiotes) on Birds, 585. Christian, T., Slide for testing Astigmatism of the Eye, 158. Chromatology of Anthea cereus, 598. Chromic Solutions, Reduction of, in Animal Tissues, corrected by Reoxidation with H,0,, 1060. Chromoleucites, 256. Chromometer, Hayem’s, 472. Chroolepus, Protonema of Moss resembling, 623. Chrysomelidx, Biology of, 224. Chuard, E., and H. Brunner, Presence of Glyoxylie Acid in Plants, 257. Chun, C., Morphology of Siphonophora, 970. ——, Structure and Development of Si- phonophora, 96. INDEX. Chworostansky, C., Development of Ovum of Hirudinea, 750. Chytridiaceze and Ancylistes, 283, 630. Chytridinee, New Genus of, 284. Chytridium, New Section of, 1002. Ciaccio, C. V., and G. Campari, Solution . of Hypochlorite of Soda with excess of chlorine as a Decolorizer, 518. Cicada, Green, Sound Organs of, 947. ’ Ciesielski, “ Foul-brood ” of Bees, 134. Cilia, 49. of Luzula, 113. Ciliate Infusoria. Conjugation of, 766. Ciliated Organ, Adoral, of Infusoria, 99.- Pits of Stenostoma, 595. 5 Ciona intestinalis, Parasitic Protozoa in, = AG: Circulatory Apparatus of Ophiurids, 761. Cladocera, Australian, 953. Cladochytrium, 1002. Cladorhiza pentacrinus, 972. Clamp, Westien’s Improved Universal, for Lens-holders, &e., 807. Classification of Alge, 786. of Arthropoda, 378. of Sphagnacee, 123. Claus, C., New Lernzan, 395. ——., Relations of Groups of Arthropoda, 573. Clautriau, C., L. Errera, and Ch. Maistriau, Localization and Significance of Alka- loids in Plants, 607. Claypole, E. W., Mode of Destruction of the Potate by Peronospora infestans, 129: Cleaning and Arranging Diatoms, 844. and Drying Containers, 528. Diatoms, 506. Diatomaceous Mud, 844. Cleistogamous Flowers of Orobanchacee, 431. Cleome, Structure of Flowers of, 431. Clothing of Intercellular Spaces, 608. Cobbold, T. §., Strongylus arnfieldi and S. tetracanthus, 241. Coecide, Honeydew of, 746. Coccochloris, 286. Cochlea of Guinea-pig, Preparing, 840. Cockroach, Structure and Life-History of, 75. Cocoa-nut Palm, Germination of, 434. Codiolum, Reproduction of, 285. Codling, W. E., 523. Ceecide, ‘ Chalienger,’ 219. Coelenterata. See Contents, xx. Cohn’s Cryptogamic Flora of Silesia (Fungi), 1005. Cold, Crystallization by, 1064. , Influence of, on the Movements of tke Sap, 273. Cole, A. C., 175, 551, 527, 857. Colocasia Disease, 1005. Colochirus Lacazii, 967. Colomb, G., Anatomy of Stipules, 265. , Ochrea of Polygonacez, 430. Colonial Radiolarians, 102. Vascular System of Tunicata, 377. INDEX. Colour and Markings in Insects, Pro- tective Value of, 946. — of Coloured Leaves, 988. of Pups, 74. Colour- relation between Lepidopterous Pupz and surrounding surfaces, Cause and Extent of, 382. -sense, 51. Coloured Leaves, 263. Colouring the Nuclei of Living Cells, 1056. Colouring-matter of Aceras anthropophora, 256. Colouring - matters, Absorption of, by Plants, 172. Comatula, Twelve-armed, 247. Comatulide, Homologies of Larve of, 408. Comes, O., Moist Gangrene of the Cauli- flower, 119. Comma-Bacilli, Influence of Desiccation and Temperature on, 133. Commercial Microscopy, 160. Comparator, Geneva Co.'s, 642. ——,, Rogers-Bond Universal, 639. , Van Heurck’s, 463. Competition for the best Microscope, 645. Compressorium for Microscopical Purposes, 660. Concentric Vascular Bundles, 608. Concretionary Gland of Cyclostoma ele- gans, 376. Condenser, Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s, 648. ——., Miles’s “ Desideratum,” 648. and Substage, Bausch and Lomb, 809. Condensers, Achromatic, Value of, 647. Confervacez, Binuclearia, a new genus of, 441. Congo Red, 339. Conidial Form of Hymenomycetes, 280. Conifer, Formation of Roots in Austral, 986. ——.,, Fungi parasitic on, 284. ——,, Interruption in the Pith of, 110. Coniferin, New Reagent for, 165. Conjugation of Ciliate Infusoria, 766. of Mucorini, 281. Conn, H. W., Life-history of Thalassema, 396. Connaracex, Transparent Dots in Leaves, especially of, 430. Conodonts, 400. Constant-temperature Apparatus, Borden’s Electrical, 810, 1024. Contagium of Lung-disease, 135. Containers, Cleaning and Drying, 528. Contrivance for use with the Microscope by lamplight, 473. Cope, E. D., and J. 8. Kingsley, Wanted a Definition of a “ Philosophical Instru- ment,” 1040. Copepod Parasite of Amphiura squamata, 587. Copepoda, Development of, 86. , Parasitic, 395. Copepoda, Parasitic, New Genus of, 238. ——, Preparation of, 329. 1087 “‘ Copper,’”’ Achromatic Condensers, 473. Coral Studies, 411. Corals, Reef, of the ‘ Challenger,’ 249. | Cordyline australis, Positively geotropic Shoots of, 778. Cork, Annual Formation of, 259. » Formation of, in the Stems of plants with few or no leaves, 427. Corn, New Disease in, 447. Cornwall, North, Fresh-water Alge of (including Chlorophyllaceous Proto- phyta), with descriptions of six new species, 8. Corpuscles, Amyloid, in Pollen-grains, 991. Correlation of Growth, 271. Costantin, J., Amblyosporium, 790. , Influence of an aquatic medium on Amphibious Plants, 272. ——., Leaves of Water-plants, 113. , Rhopalomyces, 446. Cotyledons and Leaves, Forms of, 112. Coulter, 8., Sensitiveness of Spirogyra to shock, 999. Council, Report of, for 1886, 355. Courchet, L., Chromoleucites, 256. Courroux, E.S8., 845. Cover-carvier for Immersion and Dry Lenses, Wales’s, 296. Cover-glass Holder, 693. Preparations of Tubercle Ba- cilli, Staining, 516. -——, Thickness of, for which un- adjustable objectives are corrected, 1022. Cover-glasses, Mounting Sections without, 1061. Cowl, W. Y., Section-lifters, 1063. Cox, C. F., Remarks on Photomicrography, 827. Crangon, Development of Compound Eye of, 84 Crassulacex, Structure of, 260. Crayfish, Development of, 79. , Fresh-water, Preparation of the Embryo of, 329. , Green Gland of, 748, 950. “ Crazy’ pollen of the Bell-wort, 781. Crepidula, Osphradium of, 376. : Crinoids, Morphological Relations of Sum- mit-plates in, 763. Criodrilus lacuum, 591. Cristellarians, Remarks on the Foramini- fera, with especial reference to their Variability of Form, illustrated by the, Part IT., 545. Critical Notes on Polyzoa, 377. Croneberg, A., Stage in the Development of Galeodes, 585. , Structure of Pseudoscorpions, 389. Crookshank, E. M., 528. , Bacteriological Microscope, 801. —,, Cultivations of Micro-organisms, 698. —, ‘Photography of Bacteria’ and ‘Manual of Bacteriology,’ 664. , Photomicrographs of Flagellated Protozoa in the Blood, 358. -—., Reversible Photomicrographic Ap- paratus, 819. 1088 Crosier, R., 669. Cruciferze and allied orders, Albumen- vessels in, 427. —, Roots of, Network of Cells surround- ing the Endoderm in, 775. Crustacea. See Contents, xvi. Cryptogamia. See Contents, xxviii. Vascularia. See Contents. xxviii. Crystal Sections, Artificial, Media for mounting yery perishable, 855. , Unequal Heating of, 467. Crystalline Bodies, Identification of Alka- loids and other, by the Microscope, 927. Crystallization by Cold, 1064. Microscope, 288. Crystalloids tideum, 108. — in Stylidium and Aschynanthus, 771A. in the Cell-nucleus, 255. Crystals in the Marattiacese, Formation of, 622. , Methzmoglobin, Method of obtain- ing, 1065. , Method of obtaining Uric Acid, from the Malpighian Tubes of Insects, and from the Nephridium of Pulmonate Mollusca, 166. —, Micro-chemical Reactions based on the formation of, 695. of Salicine, Preparing, 507. —— of Silicon Fluoride, Preparing, 677. ——, Poulsen’s, 425. ——,, Silver, Preparing, 676. Ctenobranch Molluscs, Nervous System of, 60. Ctenodrilus parvulus, 751. Cuboni, G., Bacterium maydis, 133. ——, Transpiration and Assimilation in Leaves treated with Milk of Lime, 782. Cuccato, G., Carmine Solution made with Carbonate of Soda, 847. , Preparing Supra-cesophageal Ganglia of Orthoptera, 1045. Cucurbitacese and Leguminosz, Origin of the lateral roots in, 429. Cuénot, L., Formation of Genital Organs and Appendages of the Ovoid Gland in Asterids, 246. Culex nemorosus, Anatomy and Histology of, 383. Culpeper’s Simple and Compound Micro- scopes (Wilson’s form), 459. Cultivated Plants, Diseases of, 128. Cultivating Anaerobic Bacteria, Method of, 498. Cultivation of Bacteria on Coloured Nu- trient Media, 1044. of Gelatin Cultures, Method for Pre- servation, 497. of the Tubercle Bacillus, New Method for, 499. , Pure, of a Spirillum, 499. Cultivations of Micro-organisms, 698. Cultivations, Preserving, made by Koch’s plate method, 832. in Pithecoctenium clema- - INDEX. Culture Glass for examining Micro-organ- isms, 468. Medium, New, 500. of Micro-organisms, Solid Medium for, 832. ; Cuninas, Parasitic, of Beaufort, 248. Cunningham, J. T., Nephridia of Lanice conchilega, 591. , Stichocotyle nephropis, 595. Cunoctantha octonaria, Structure of, in adult and larval stages, 967. Cupressinez, Leafy branches of, 430. Cupro-ammonia Cell, Hartnack’s, 826. Cupules of Cupulifere, 613. Cupuliferee, Cupules of, 613. Cree of Microscopical Literature, Curties, C. L., and HK. M. Nelson’s Photo- micrographie Camera, 1025. Cutter, E., The Microscope and Old Age, 1041. Pcs of Tenia nana, Developmental, 61. Cyclostoma elegans, Concretionary Gland of, 376. Cyclostomata, Blood-corpuscles of, 937. Cyclostomatous Marine Bryozoa, Develop- ment of, 740. Cylinder, Central, of Stem, 260. Cymothoid, New Parasitic, 87. Cyphella, 790. Cypride, Anatomy of Internal Male Organs of, and Spermatogenesis in, 394. , Preparation of Male Reproductive Organs of, 841. Cypripedium, Floral Conformation of, 6 Cypris and Melicerta, 86. Cysticercus cellulose in Brain of Man, 93. Cystidia of Fungi, 627. Cystids, Morphological Relations of Sum- mit-plates in, 763. Cysts, Brown, of Anguillula of the Beet- root, 959. , Formation of, in the Chlorosporex, 277. — in Ulothrix, Formation of, 625. — of Echinorhynchus, Structure and Development of, 402. Cytisus Laburnum, Meristem of the Medul- lary Rays of, 609. Czapski, 8., 159, 645. D. “D).,” Value of the Microscope in Trade, 157, 159. Dafert, F. W., Starch-grains coloured red by iodine, 424. Dagron’s Microphotographie Apparatus, 487. Dall, W. H., Deep-sea Mollusca, 61. Dallinger, W. H., 296, 831. Dallinger, Dr., and Carlisle Microscopical Society, 156. ——, President's Address, 185, 348, 668. INDEX. Dammar, Gum, 1061. —, Xylol, 1062. Dangeard, P. A., Lower Forms of Animal and Vegetable Life, 447. ——, New Genus of Chytridines, 284. —, Researches on Lower Organisms, 769. Danielssen, D., North Sea Alcyonida, 599. Danilewsky, B., Hematozoa of the Tor- toise, 603. , Parasites in the Blood, 977. ‘ in the Blood of Lizards, 105. Danysz, J., Development of Fresh-water Peridinesx, 976. ——,, New Peridinian, 602. Daphniz, New Parasites of, 625. D’Arbaumont, J., Pericycle, 259. Dareste, C., Formation of Double Monsters, 372. ——,, Influence of the vertical position on the development of the Eggs of the Chick, 42. Dark-ground Illuminator, Nachet’s, 463. Darling’s (8.) Screw Micrometer, 652. Darwin, F., and A. Bateson, Effects of Stimulation on Turgescent Vegetable Tissues, 985. Darwinistic Heresies, Some, 212. Dasychone lucullana, Formation of Ger- minal Layers in, 955. Date-palm, Germination of, 616. Davallia Mooreana, Structure of, 623. Davis, T. 8., New Stage Accessory, 819. Dawson, W., Fossil Rhizocarps, 122. Death and Genesis of Muscle-fibre, 50. — of Muscles, 372. Debes, E., 159. —, Super-stage for the Selection and Arrangement of Diatoms, 153. Debray, M. F., Structure and Development of the Thallus in Florides, 624. Deby, J., Double-stained sections of Brug- mansia Lowii, 535. Decoloration of Bacteria stained with Anilin Dyes, 688. Decolorizer, Solution of Hypochlorite of Soda with excess of chlorine as a, 518. Decomposition, Assumed, of Carbonic Acid by Chlorophyll, 118. — of Carbonic Acid by Chlorophyll out- side the plant, 118. Deep-sea Mollusca, 61. Defensive structures of Plants, Efficiency of, 268. De Folin, ‘ Challenger’ Coecide, 219. De Groot’s (J. G.) Automatic Microtome, 1049, Dehérain, P. P., Absorption of Carbonic Anhydride by Leaves, 434. Dehydrating Microscopical Preparations, Hilgendorf’s Apparatus for, 342. — specimens to be mounted in balsam or paraffin, Flask for, 691. Dekhuyzen, M. C., 341, 690. Delage, Y., New Function for Invertebrate Otocysts, 52. 1089 Delage, Y., Otocysts as Organs of Loco- motor Orientation, 732. Delpino, F., Alcoholic 995. —, Myrmecophilous Plants, 620. ——, Nectary of Galanthus nivalis, 781. ——, Zygomorphy of Flowers, 779. Dembowski, T. v., 175. , Apparatus for controlling the posi- tion of the Microtome Knife, 336. Denaeyer, A., 1028. Dendroccela, Development of Fresh-water, 757. ——,, Fresh-water, Function of Uterus or Enigmatic Organ in, 597. Dendroccelum punctatum, 964. Dendy, A., Cladorhiza pentacrinus, 972. ——, Twelve-armed Comatula, 247. Deniker, J., Embryogeny of Anthropoid Apes, 370. Dennert, E., Axis of Inflorescence, 989. Denny, A., and L. C, Miall, Structure and Life-History of the Cockroach, 75. Dero, Annelids of the Genus, 90. ——, Natural History of the Genus, 752. Desiccation and Temperature, Influence of, on Comma-Bacilli, 133. — of Rotifers, 179. of Seeds of Aquatic Plants, 271. Desmids, American, 279. Detection of “wild yeast” tn low yeast, 132. Detlefsen, E., Elasticity of Flexion in Vegetable Organs, 619. Detmer, W., Destruction of the Molecular Structure of Protoplasm, 106. , Effects of Low Temperatures on Plants, 620. Detmers, F., Comparative Size of Blood- corpuscles in Man and Domestic Animals, 937. Development, Mechanism of, 368. of Carnivora, 561. Dew and Rain, Adaptation of Plants to, 995. Dewitz, T., Segmentation of Frog Ova in Sublimate Solution, 370. Dextrin and Starch, Alcoholic Fermenta- tion of, 437. Diakonow, N. W., Intramolecular Respira- tion, 619. ——, —— —— of Plants, 437. . Theory of Fermentation, 995. Diaphragm, Lighton’s Analysing, for the Polariscope, 812. Diaphragm-holder, Griffith’s Substage, and Glass Diaphragms, 657. Diastase, Chemical Nature of, 995. Diatom, Reproduction in a Fossil, 443. Diatom-valves, Pores in, 1000. Diatomacez, Means of Movement pos- sessed by, 697. Diatomaceous Mud, Cleaning, 844. —— Rocks, Breaking up, 1047. Diatoms, Cleaning, 506, 676. ——, —— and Arranging, 844. Fermentation, 1090 Diatoms, Endochrome of, 626. , Fossil, from Umbria, 443. ——, Gold-plated, 160. — in Cementstein, Preparing, 330. ——,, Intermediate Bands and Septa of, 442, ——, Movement of, 442. —_,, New, 788. — of the ‘Challenger’ Expedition, 442. ——,, Pyritized, 279. —,, Raising, in the Laboratory, 626. ——,, Structure of, 125. ——., Super-stage for the Selection and Arrangement “of, 153. Dichosporangium and Hildebrandtia, 124. Dicotyledons, Origin and Development of |_ the Lateral Roots in, 110. Dicyemide, 964. Didelot, L., 159, 1034. Dienelt, Fr, , Preparation of Insect Spira- cles, 675. Dietz, S., Development of the Flowers and Fruit of Typha and Sparganium, 114. Differentiation of Epidermal Cells, 774. of Tissues in Fungi, 205. Digestive Organs, Rhizopod-like, in Car- nivorous Plants, 112. —— Process in some Rhizopods, 251. Tract of Arthropoda, and particu- larly of Insects, 378. Dinophilus gyrociliatus, 965. Dinophysis and Scyphidia, On new species of, 558. Dioptric Instruments, Magnifying Power of, 490. Diplostomide, 93. Dipnoi, Ovarian Ovum of, 44. , Structure of Ovum of, 564. Dippel, L., 159, 461. Diptera, Wings of, 227. Directive Corpuscles in Eggs of Insects, 743. Disease, Grouse, 699. in Corn, New, 447. —._, New Fungoid, of Barley, 447. Diseases caused by Fungi, 128. —_,, Fungous, of Plants, 792. — of Cultivated Plants, 128. of Plants, 120. Dispersion, Mechanism of Fruits for the Purpose of, 432. Dissecting Microscope, How to make a simple, 461. — Pans, 173. Dissemination of Algze by Fish, 787. Disseminators of Seeds, Birds as, 271. Distaplia, Anatomy of, 943. Distoma endemicum, 596. Distomum ingens, 242. Distortions, Artificial, of the Nucleus, 327. Divided Instruments, tion in reading, 155. Dogiel, A., Preparing Tendon-cells and Cells of the loose Subcutaneous Tissue, 837. Errors of Observa- INDEX. Doherty, A. J., 528. ——, Making Sections of Injected Lung, 686. ——, Staining of Animal and Vegetable Tissues, 690. Dohrn, A., Are the Tunicata degenerate Fishes ? 944. Domestic Animals and Man, Comparative Size of Blood-corpuscles, 937. Dorst, F. J., 159. : eit FB. Errors of Observation in reading Divided Instruments, 155. Dostviewsky, A., Preparing Eyes of Mam- mals, 162. Dots, Transparent, in Leaves, especially of Connaracez, 430. Dotted Substance of Leydig, 214. Doubling of Flowers, 431. Douliot, H., Structure of Crassulacez, 260. and P. Van Tieghem, Central Cylin- der of Stem, 260. ——,, Origin of Lateral Roots, 262. — —, —— — — in Leguminosee and Cucurbitacez, 429. , — of Rootlets and Lateral Roots in Rubiacez, Violacee, and Apo- cynacese, 777. Drawing, Prism for, 650. Drinking-water, Bacteria in, 136, 454. Drost, K., Preparation of Heart-muscle in Cardium edule, 328. Druery, C. T., Apospory in Polystichum angulare var. pulcherrimum, Wills, 622. Dry Mounting, Rapid Method of, 520. Objects, Quick method of mourting, 94. Drying and Heating Apparatus for the Histological La borator y, 524. Apparatus for the Laboratory, 525. Dubois, R., Photogenic Function of Ova of Lampyris, 576. Dubourg, E., and U. Gayon, Alcoholic Fermentation of Dextrin and Starch, 437. Duct, Segmental, Origin of, 369. Dufour, J., Micro-chemistry of the Epider- mal Tissue, 257. —, Relationship of the Anatomical Structure of Leaves to their Origin, 264. Dulac, J., Phosphorescent Fungus, 789. Dulles, C. W., Collecting Urinary Sedi- ment for Microscopical Examination, 500. Duncan, P. M., Mergui Ophiurids, 598. Duns, E., Abnormal Limbs of Crustacea, 85. Dupetit, G., and U. Gayon, Reduction of Nitrates by Micro-organisms, 139. Durkee, R. P. H., on Electric Lamp, 178. Dutilleul, G., Anatomy of MHirudinea Rhynchobdellida, 954. Dye, New Green, 849. EK. Earthworm, Colossal Nerve-fibres of, 90. HKarthworms, Anatomy of, 953. INDEX. Earthworms, Origin of Excretory System of, 588. ——, Structure and Development of the Generative Organs of, 238. Eberth, C. J., Thalassicola exerulea, 767. Echein-green and Carmine, Double Stain- ing with, 515. Echinids, Development of Generative Apparatus of, 240, Echinoderes, Anatomy and Systematic Position of, 964. Echinodermata. See Contents, xix. Echinoderms, So-called Heart of, 406. Echinoidea, Organization of, 406. Echinoids, Radial Symmetry of, 762. Echinorhynchi, Anatomy of, 960. Echinorhynchus gigas, Development of, 960. —, Muscular Fibres of, 594. ——,, Structure and Development of Cysts of, 402. Echites peltata, Anatomical peculiarities of, 609. Ectoparasitic Rotifers from the Bay of Naples, 757. Edington, A., 669. , New Culture Medium, 500. Edriophthalmata, Muscular Fibres of, 393, 987. Efficiency of the defensive structures of Plants, 268. Ege, Amphibian, Preparing, 671. . Intra-ovarian, in Osseous Fishes, 211, 933. Egger, E., Jouannetia cumingii, Sow., 737. Eges of Arthropoda, Preparation of, 328. of Chick, Influence of the vertical position on the development of, 42. of Insects, Directive Corpuscles in, 743. of Osseous Fishes, Preparation of, 328. of Rotatoria, Preparing, 842. Ehlers, E., Polyparium ambulans, 969. Ehrlich, P., 175. , Staining Tubercle Bacilli, 851. Hichler, A. W., Increase in thickness of Palm-stems, 434. Hichholz, G., Mechanism of Fruits for the Purpose of Dispersion, 432. Eleagnacee and Alder, Swellings on the Roots of, 611. Elastic Fibres, Staining, 850. Tissues, Physiological Silvering of, 839. Elasticity of Flexion in Vegetable Organs, 619. Electric Currents, Influence of, on Tad- poles, 51. —— Fishes, Nerves of, 213. Lamp, Stricker’s, 297. — Polarizing Projection - Microscope, Newton’s, 1021. — Projection-Lamp for Microscopic Pur- poses, Selenka’s, 1015. Electrical Constant-temperature Appara- tus, Borden’s, 810, 1024. 1091 Elements, Male and Female, Chemical Comparison of, 45. Eleutheria, Structure of, 96. Eliel, L., 694. Ellis’s (J.) Focusing Arrangement for Photomicrography, 1028. Embryo in Insects, Law of Orientation of, 72 —— of the Fresh-water Crayfish, Prepara- tion of, 329. Embryo-Chemical Investigations, 732. Embryograph, Pfeifer’s, 148. Embryology, Notes on the Technique of, 901. — of Alpheus and other Crustacea, and development of Compound Eye, 233. of Ascidians, Normal and Teratologi- cal, 739. of Mysis chameeleo, 950. of Prosobranch Gasteropods, 217. —— of Schizopods, 235. —— of Spiders, 231. of Vertebrata. See Contents, x. Embryonic Ganglion-cells, 41. Embryos, Amphibian, Preparation of, 327. of Osseous Fishes, Growth of, 211. , Pelagic Fish-, Origin of Pigment- cells which invest the Oil-drop of, 43. Emmerling, A., Formation of Albumen in Plants, 994. Emodin in Nephroma lusitanica, 1001. Emys europea, Parasitic Alga of, 624. Encapsuled Organisms, Vitality of, 568. Enchytreidze, Lymphatic System in, 92. Endochrome of Diatoms, 62€. Endoderm, Network of Cells surrounding the, in the Roots of Cruciferze, 775. of Senecio Cineraria, 426. Endogenous Cell-multiplication, 48. Production of Spores, 279. Endosperm-Tissue, Formation of, 116. Endothelium of the general cavity of Arenicola and Lumbrica,, Preparation of, 842. Engelmann, T. W., Chlorophyllous Assi- milation, 616. , Colour of Coloured Leaves, 988. , Function of Otoliths, 938. Engelmann’s Bacterium-method, 166, 506. Ensilage, Wheat, Bacterium of, 451. Enteric Canal of Insects, Histology of, 580. —— Canals of Insects, Histology of, 945. Enterochlorophyll and Allied Pigments, 214. Entione, The Genus, 85. Entomological Microscope, 288. Seer ae Vogel’s Lens-stand for, Entyloma, Structure of, 284. EKocidaris, 967. Epiclemmydia lusitanica, a new species of Alga, 278. Epidermal Cells, Differentiation of, 774. pa Glands containing an Ethereal Oil, 0. 1092 Epidermal Tissue, Micro - chemistry of, 257. Tissues of Pitcher Plants, Preparing, 164. Epidermis as a Reservoir of Water, 261. Epipactis latifolia, Fertilization of, 782. Epiphyllum, Proteinaceous bodies in, 983. Epipodium, Morphology of, of Rhipido- glossate Gastropoda, 941. Epithelia of Actiniz, Preparing, 1047. Epithelial Cells, Method for isolating, 502. Epithelium, Wandering Leucocytes in, 50. Epps, H., A new Cement, 175. Equilibrium in Living Cells, mental Condition of, 46. Equisetum, Fertile Shoots of, 121. Erecting Arrangement, 660. Eriksson, J.. New Fungoid Disease of Barley, 447. Ermenghem, E. van, 696. Ernst, A., New Case of Parthenogenesis, 116. Errera, L., Efficiency of the defensive structures of Plants, 268. , Fundamental Condition of Equi- librium in Living Cells, 46. , How Aleohol drives out Air-bubbles, 343. —, Ch. Maistriau, and C. Clautriau, Loealization and Significance of Alka- loids in Plants, 607. Errors likely to occur in Microscopical Observations, 830. of observation in reading divided instruments, 155. Erythronium, Nectary of, 114. Escherich, T., Intestinal Bacteria, 134. Esmarch, E., 325. , Modification of Koch’s plate method - for the isolation and quantitative deter- mination of Micro-organisms, 832. ae Pure Cultivation of a Spirillum, 499. Esser, P., Blossom on Old Wood, 990. Eternod’s (A.) Turntable “to serve seve- ral purposes,” 853. Ether Freezing Microtome, Hayes’s, 1049. Ethereal Oil, Epidermal cell containing an, 430. Etiolated Organs, Growth of Hairs on, 113. — Seedlings, Effect of Sunlight on, 117. Eudendrium racemosum, Origin of Male Generative Cells of, 968. Euglena viridis and Astasia ocellata, Biology of, 601. Euglypha, Reproduction of, 976. Eunice, Histology of, 956. , Investigation of Histology of, 1047. Eupbhyllia and Mussa, Anatomy of, 972. European Sphagnacez, 123. Evans, F. H., 159. , Focusing Screen for Photomicro- graphy, 320. , J., 1066. Funda- INDEX. Eve, —., Actinomyces from the Jaw of an Ox, 699. Ewell, M. D., 321, 666. ——, Apochromatic Objectives, 462. Excretory and Generative Organs of Pria- pulide, 91. — and Reproductive Systems of Bil- harzia, 403. me of EHarthworms, Origin of, Exhibiting Semi-Microscopical Objects Method for, 524. Exobasidium and Helicobasidium, 280. Eye, Compound, Development of, and Embryology of Alpheus and other Crus- tacea, 233. » ——, New Type of, 952. ——, ——, of Crangon, Development of, 84. — of Pectens, Morphology of, 220. ——,, Slide for Testing Astigmatism of, 158. : Eye-piece Micrometer, Fasoldt’s, 819. , New, 928. Eye-pieces, Jaubert’s (L.), 632 See also p. 296. Eyes, Care of, in Microscopy, 492. , Imbedding, in Celloidin, 680. — of Birds, Preparing, 162. of Crustacea, 82. — of Mammals, Preparing, 162. — of Mollusca, 53. of Molluscs and Arthropods, Pre- paring, 672. , Preparing Molluscan and Arthro- pod, 162. ——,, Simple, in Arthropods, 742. FE, Fabre-Domergue, —., 1066. , Reticular Structure of Protoplasm of Infusoria, 414. Fairman, C. F., Staining Peziza Specimens, 688. Farlow, W. G., Arctic Algze, 278. ——, Development of Gymnosporangium, 44 Fasoldt’s (C.) Eye-piece Micrometer, 819. — Rulings, 1038. ° Fats and Butter, Discrimination of, 345. Fatty Matter, Relation of, to the Recep- tivity of Staining in Micro-organisms, 172. Fauna, Microscopic, of High Alpine Lakes, 374. , Pelagic and Littoral, of North Ger- man Lakes, 733. Faussek, V., Histology of Enteric Canal of Insects, 580, 945. Fearnley, W., Elementary Practical His- tology, 1065. , Frog-holder, 1024. Fellows, C. 8., 678. Fermentation, Acetous, 132. —, Alcoholic, 995. —, , of Dextrin and Starch, 437. ——, ——, on living Trees, 285. INDEX. Fermentation, Lactic, 133. , Theory of, 995. Fermentations by Protoplasm of a recently- killed animal, 731. Ferns, Anatomy of Sporangia of, 622. , Apogamy in, 622. , Leaves of, 998. Ferré, J., 852. Fertile Shoots of Equisetum, 121. — Worker Bees, 529. Fertilization and Maturation of Amphi- bian Ova, 564. Segmentation of the Animal Ovum, 929. — of the Animal Ovun, Influence of reagents on, 835. , Experimental Investigation of, 44, of Achlys triphylla, 269. — of Aconitum Lycoctonum, 269. — of Cactacez, 270. of Cassia marilandica, 270. of Epipactis latifolia, 782. — of Greenland Flowers, 433. — of Hollyhock and Indigofera, 115. — of Labiate and Borraginee, 115. of Orchidex, 432. — of Ovum of Lamprey, 932. — of Oxalis, 615. — of Scandinavian Alpine Plants, 615. — of Verbascum, 433. — of Yucca, 116. : ——., Process of, in Ascaris megalocephala, 593. Fewkes, J. W., Development of Calcareous Plates of Amphiura, 966. ——, Meduse of the Gulf-Stream, 248. —, New Rhizostomatous Medusa, 410, 765. Fibre, New Method of distinguishing Vegetable from Animal, 670. Fibres, Demonstrating Sharpey’s, 838. ——, Elastic, Staining, with Victoria Blue, 688. ——, Medullated Nerve-, Preparing, 838. —, Muscular, of Echinorhynchus, 594. —., —, of Edrivphthalmata, 393, 587. —, —, of Polycheta, 396. , staining Elastic, 850. Fibrille of Unstriated Muscular Fibres, Demonstration of, 327. Fibrovascular Bundles, Cortical, in Lecy- thides and Barringtonieze, 775. , Passage of, from the Branch to the Leaf, 775. Fickert, —., Apus and Branchipus, 237. Field, A. G., 665. Filaria inermis, 594. Fine adjustment Screw, Schiefferdecker’s, s Lever and Parallel-spring, Finders, Standard Maltwood, 529. ' Finger, Grittith’s Mechanical, 656. Fink, H. E., 668. Firola, Singular Parasite on, 373, 939. Firtsch, G, Germination of the Date- palm, 616. 1887. 1093 Fischer, A., Sieve-tubes, 984. ——, Starch in Vessels, 423. , E., Lycogalopsis Solmsii, a new Gas- teromycete, 127. — , Phalloidei, 1003. —, §., Contractile Vacuoles of Infusoria, 100. Fish, Dissemination of Algze by, 787. — Ova, Teleostean, Relation of Yolk to Blastoderm in, 43. , Why do certain, float, 731. —, Plants Poisonous to, 438. Fish-embryos, Pelagic, Origin of Pizment- cells which invest the Oil-drop of, 43. Fishes, Are the Tunicata degenerate ? 944. ——,, Electric, Nerves of, 213. ——,, Osseous, Development of, 933. —, —, Growth of Embryos of, 211. . , Intra-ovarian Egg in, 211, 933. —, ——,, Preparation of Eggs of, 328. —, —,, Significance of the Yolk in, 730. Fiszer, Z., New Parasitic Cymothoid, 87. Fixing and Staining Nuclei, 687. the Elements of Blood, 1054. 523, 853. Flagey, C., Sclrwendener’s Lichen-theory, 444. Fiahault, C.,and E. Bornet, Heterocystous Nostocaceze, 449, 793. Flask for dehydrating specimens to be mounted in balsam or parafiin, 691. Fleischl’s (E. v.) Heemometer, 657. Fleischmann, A., Development of Carnivora, 561. Flexion in Vegetable Organs, Elasticity of, 619. Floral Conformation of Cypripedium, 613. Floridez, Structure and _Development of the Thallus i in, 624. Flower- and Fruit-stalks, Comparative Anatomy of, 990. — of Orchidex, Morphology of, 114. Flowers, Action of Ultra-violet Rays in the Formation of, 617. and Fruit of Typha and Sparganium, Development of, 114. ——,, Double, 266. ——,, Doubling of, 431. ——., Pollination of, 434. —, Zygomorphic, Normal Position of, 612. the —, , Origin of, 780. , Zygomorphy of, 266, 779. Fluegge, M. C., Micro-organisms, 1007. Fluid-cavities in Quartz, Examining, 526. Fluids, Mounting in, 855. Fluorescence of Fungus Pigment, 628. Focal length of a concave lens, Determina- tion of, by the compound Microscope, 321. Focke, W. O., Origin of Zygomorphic Flowers, 780. Focus Upwards, 667. Focusing Arrangement for Photomicro- graphy, Ellis’s, 1028. 4c 1094 Focusing in Photomicrography, 662. — Screen, Evans’s (F. H.), for Photo- micrography, 320. —— ——, Nelson’s Photomicrographic, 1028. Fokker, M., Fermentations by Protoplasm of a recently-killed animal, 731. ——, Hematocytes, 937. Foliar Lenticels, 430. Food Habit of Petalomonas, 101. Food-plants of Smerinthus Larva, 226. Foraminifer, New, 102. Foraminifera, Remarks on, with especial reference to their Variability of Form, illustrated by the Cristellarians. Part IL, 545. , Synopsis of the British Recent, 872. Forel, A., Ants and Ultra-violet Rays, 73. ——, Senses of Insects, 577. ——, Vision of Insects, 379. —, H., Pelagic Micro-organisms of Fresh-water Lakes, 373. Forgan, W., 296. Formula, New, for Burrill’s Stain, 850. Forsell, K. B. J., Micro-chemistry of Lichens, 126. Forster, J., and C. B. Tilanus, Certain Properties of Phosphorescent Bacteria, 1009. Fossil Caleareous Elements of Aleyonaria and Holothurioida, 215. — Insects, 582. «*Foul-brood” of Bees, 134. Fowler, G. H., Anatomy of the Madre- poraria, 971. Fraenkel, E., and M. Simmonds, 331. Francois, P., Syndesmis, 243. Francotte, P., 321. ——, Flask for dehydrating specimens to be mounted in balsam or paraffin, 691. ——, Imbedding in Vegetable Wax, 681. ——, Photomicrographic Camera for the Simple or Compound Microscope, 662. —— , Sliding Microtome, 682. — Staining Preparations for Photo- graphy, 689. , Use of Styrax in Histology, 692. Frank, B., Asteroma of the Rose, 128. , Gnomonia erythrostroma, a cherry- parasite, 128. , Micro-organisms of the Soil, 453. —., Swellings on the Roots of the Alder and Eleagnacee, 611. Frankland, G. C. and P. F., New Micro- organisms obtained from Air, 631. , P. F., Distribution of Micro-organ- isms in Air, 137. ——, Micro-organisms in the Atmosphere, ay —, Multiplication of Micro-organisms, 138. — and T. G. Hart, Distribution of Micro-organisms in the Air, 453, 631. Fraunhofer, Joseph yon, 497. Frazer, A., Centering Nose-piece for use with Double Nose-pieces, 294, 358. INDEX. Fraser, A., Simple form of Self-centering Turntable for ringing Microscopic Speci- mens, 523. Freezing Microtome, Jung’s, 331. of Tissues, 438. French Coast, Synascidians new to, 221. Frenzel, J., Cilia, 49. a Histology of the Molluse Liver, —,, “ Liver ” of Mollusesa, 57. Fresh-water Algee of New Zealand, 1000. —— -—— Bryozoa, 378. —— -—— Chetomorphas, 999. ae Dendrocela, Development of, 757. - —— Infusoria, New, 417, 767, 974. Lakes, Pelagic Mlicro-organ- isms of, 373. —— -——,, Microscopic organisms in, 53. —— - —— Peridinexw, Development of, 976. —— -—— Polyzoa, Key to, 378. —— - ——,, Rose-tinted Growth on, 1007. —— - —— Sponges, Observations on, 414. — -—— ——_ of Galicia, 99. Friele, H., North Sea Mollusca, 221. Fritsch, C., Interruption in the Pith of Conifer, 110. , Nerves of Electric Fishes, 213. Frog Ova, Segmentation of, in Sublimate Solution, 370. Frog-holder, 1024. Frog’s Ovum, Nucleus in, 42. Fructification of Grimmia Hartmanni, 998. Fruit- and Flower-stalks, Comparative Anatomy of, 990. and Flowers of Typha and Spar- ganium, Development of, 114. of Anagyris foetida, Structure and Development of, 614. of Scutellaria galericulata, trivance for dispersing, 267. of Vaniila, Raphides-cells in, 268. Fruits, Mechanism of, for the Purpose of Dispersion, 432. ——, Succulent, 267. Fumariacex, Tannin-receptacles in, 427. Fungi. See Contents, xxx. Fungia, Anatomy of, 411. Fungous Diseases of Plants, 792. Con- G. Gage, S. H., 159, 175, 331. ——,, Care of the Eyes in Microscopy, 492. ——, Centering Card, 344. —, Demonstration of the Fibrille of Unstriated Muscular Fibres, 327. , Injecting Jar, 340. ——, Microscopical Tube-length, its length in millimetres, and the parts included in 1M the various opticians of the world, 1029. —, Paper for Cleaning the Lenses of Objectives and Oculars, 296. ——, Permanent Caustic Potash Prepara- tions, 343. INDEX. Gage, S. H., Thickness of cover-glass for which unadjustable objectives are cor- rected, 1022. Galanthus nivalis, Nectary of, 781. Galeodes, Stage in the Development of, 585. Galicia, Fresh-water Sponges of, 99. Galli, C., China-Blue as a Stain for the Funnel-shaped Fibrils in Medullated Nerves, 514. Galloway, B. T., Celery-leaf Blight, 790. Galls on the Leaf of the Vine, 384. Galton, F., Pedigree Moth-breeding, 579. Ganglia, Supra-cesophageal, of Orthop- tera, Preparing, 1045. Ganglion-cells, Embryonic, 41. Gangrene, Moist, of the Cauliflower, 119. Garbini, A., 175. —, Psorosperms, 605. Gardiner, W., Extra-floral Nectaries of Hodgsonia heteroclita, 267. — and Tukutaro Ito, Structure of Muci- lage-cells of Blechnum occidentale and Osmunda regalis, 997. Gariel, 1034. Garman, H., Baskets for the suspension of objects in parafiin, 681. Garnault, P., Concretionary Gland of Cyclostoma elegans, 376. — , Oogenesis of Chiton, 940. Garré, 175. , C., Preserving cultivations made by Koch’s plate method, 832. Garrigou, M., and A. Certes, Micro-organ- isms in Thermal Water, 214. Garrison, F. L., 331. Gas-burner, Auer’s Incandescent, as a Microscope Lamp, 813. Gas-chamber, Microscopical, 661. Gases, Exchange of, by Buds, 119. Gasparini, G., 175. Gasteromycete, Lycogalopsis Solmsii, a new, 127. Gastroblasta Raffaeiei, 97. Gastropoda and Scaphopoda, ‘ Challenger,’ 219. ——,, Nervous System of, 57. ——.,, Prosobranchiate, Structure of Bran- chia of, 939. —, Rhipidoglossate, Morphology of Epi- podium of, 941. Gasteropods, Development of Reproduc- tive Organs in, 735. ——,, Embryology of Prosobranch, 217. Gaule, A. L., Method of Staining and Fixing the Elements of Blood, 1054. Gay, F., Formation of Cysts in the Chloro- sporex, 277. > G., Home-made Microtome, 1053. Gayon, U., and E. Dubourg, Alcoholic Fermentation of Dextrin and Starch, 437. — and G. Dupetit, Reduction of Nitrates __ by Micro-organisms, 139. Geddes, P., Theory of Sex and Reproduc- tion, 728. 1095 Geddes, P., and J. A. Thomson, History and Theory of Spermatogenesis, 729. Gedoelst, L., 852. Gelatin Cultures, Method for Preservation and further Cultivation of, 497. Gelatinous Sheath of Algze, 440. Gemmiparous Roots of Anisogonium, 438. Generative and Excretory Organs of Pria- pulids, 91. —— Apparatus of Echinids, Development of, 245. —— cells, Male, of Eudendrium racemosus, Origin of, 968. Organs and Sexual Characters of Microstomida, 404. — —— of Earthworms, Structure and Development of, 238. Genesis and Death of Muscle-fibre, 50. Geneva Co.’s Comparator, 642. —— Reading Microscope, 643. Genital Apparatus of Stylommatophorous Pulmonata, Development of, 58. -—— Organs and Appendages of the Ovoid Gland in Asterids, Formation of, 246. of Pulmonata, Method of Study- ing Development of, 163, Gentians, 989. Geographical Distribution and Structure of Plumbaginezx, 428. Geology and Mineralogical Sciences, Rela- tions between, 493. Geometre and Noctus, Relationship and Relative Age of, 75. Geometrical Construction of the Cell of the Honey-bee, 383. ¢ Optics,’ Heath’s, 828. Geophilide, Structure of Spinning-glands of, 230. Geophilus, Phosphorescence of, 230. Gerard, R., 175. ——,, ‘Traité pratique de Micrographie,’ 174. Gerber, A., Annual Formation of Cork, 259. Germ-plants and Prothallium of Lyco- podium inundatum, 621. German Lakes, North, Pelagic and Littoral Fauna of, 733. Prosobranchiata, Renal Organs of, 940. Germinal Epithelium in the Testicle of the Chick, Development and Signifi- cance of, 210. — Layers, 209. _ , Formation of, in Dasychone lucullana, 955. Protoplasm, Continuity of, 561. Germination, Changes in Proteids in Seeds which accompany, 619. ——., Chemistry of, 615. ——,, Effects of the Temperature of Melting Ice on, 271. ——,, Influence of Ozone on, 782. —— of the Cocoa-nut Palm, 434. — of the Date-palm, 616. Giacomi, De, Staining Syphilis Bacillus, 517. 4c2 1096 Giard, A., Castration of Decapodous Crus- tacea by parasites, 750. ——, Copepod Parasite of Amphiura squa- mata, 587. ——, New Parasitic Rhizopod, 977. ——., Parasitic Castration and its Influ- ence on the External Characters of Male Decapod Crustacea, 586. —, Synascidians new to the French Coast, 221. and J. Bonnier, Cepon, 394. , Phylogeny of Bopyride, 587. —— ——, The Genus Entione, 85. Gibbes, H., 175. Gibson, R. J. H., Anatomy of Patella vul- gata, 375. , Nematocysts of Hydra fusca, 408. Giesbrecht, W., and G. C. J. Vosmaer, and P. Mayer, Water-bath for Paraffin Im- bedding, 845. Gieson, J. van, Reagents for clearing Celloidin Sections for Balsam Mounting, 519. Giles’s (G. M.) Army Medical Microscope, 1012, 1069. Gill, R., Camera Lucida, 473. Gills, Structure of False, of Pectinibranch Prosobranchs, 940. Gilmer, T. L., 668. Gilson, G., Spermatogenesis of Arthropods, 222. Girod, P., 175. —, Botanical Manipulation, 675. Gland, Concretionary, of Cyclostoma ele- gans, 376. , Green, of the Crayfish, 748, 950. ——, Pericardial, of Opisthobranchs and Annelids, 939. Gland-cells, Mammary, Demonstrating the Nuclei of, in Lactation, 326. Glanders, Staining Bacillus of, 1058. Glands, Epidermal, containing an Hthereal Oil, 430. —— in Foot of Tethys fimbriata, 569. ——,, Salivary, of Cephalopoda, Anatomy and Histology of, 734. ——, Thoracic Salivary, homologous with Nephridia, 73. Glandular Cells, Structure of, 47. Secretion of free Iodine, 581. Glass, New Optical, 321. , Optical, On Improvements of the Microscope with the aid of New Kinds of, 20. , Lhe New, 155, 159, 497. Gliding Growth in the Formation of the Tissues of Vascular Plants, 272. Glistening Apparatus of Schistostega os- mundacea, 623. Gleotrichia natans Thur., Hormogones of, 285. Glossophorum sabulosum, Muscular Sys- tem of, 570. Glucoside, Presence of, in the alcoholic extract of certain plants, 607. Glycerin Jelly for Plant Sections, Kaisex’s, 694. INDEX. Glyciphagide, Anatomy and Physiology of, 232. Glyoxylic Acid, Presence of, in Plants, 257. Gnomonia erythrostroma, a cherry-parasite, 128. Goblet and Mucous Cells, Rosanilin Nitrate for, 172. Goblet- cells, 47. in Amphibian Bladder, 213. —— - ——, Preparing, 325. Goebel, me, Aerial Roots of Sonneratia, 111. ——, Double Flowers, 266. —, Fertile Shoots of Equisetum, 123. ——,, Inferior Ovaries, 266. , Outlines of Classification and Special Morphology, 620. , Prothallium and Germ-plants of Lycopodium inundatum, 621. Goebeler, H., Palez of Ferns, 275. Gold-plated Diatoms, 160. Golgi, G., Preparation of the Organs of the Nervous System, 327. Golgi’s Method for Staining the Central Nervous System, Modification of, 513. ——, Mounting Sections prepared by, 520. Gomont’s (M.) “new” Botanizing Micro- scope, 803. Gonococci, Technical Method of Diagnos- ing, 507. Goodale, G. L., 331. Goodall, G. L., Method for subjecting Living Protoplasm to the action of dif- ferent liquids, 669. Gordii, Free Development and Determi- nation of, 959. Gordiide, Anatomy of, 958. , Revision of, 593. Gorecki, 1041. Gosse, P. H., Twelve New Species of Rotifera, 361, 532. ; Tne ee New Species of Roti- fera, 1 - —— more New Species of Rotifera, 861, 1070. Gottstein, A., Relation of Fatty Matter to the Receptivity of Staining in Micro- organisms, 172. ——., Staining Tubercle Bacillus, 339. Gourret, P., Crustacean Parasites of Phallusia, 392. and P. Roeser, Protozoa of Mar- seilles, 415. Graber, V., Function of Antenne, 380. Graffilla Brauni, 963. Grant, A. E., Multinucleated Cells, 107. Grapes, Rotten, Bacterium of, 451. Grasses, Leaves of, 263. Grassi, B., Anatomy of Machilis, 76. , Developmental Cycle of Tenia nana, 961. ——, Filaria inermis, 594. ——,, Microtelyphonidie, 79. —, Morphology of Scolopendrella, 77. | ——, Primitive Insects, 75. INDEX. Gray, N. M., 341. , Modification of Weigert’s Method of Staining Tissues of the Central Nervous System, 513. Green, J. R., Changes in the Proteids in the Seeds which accompany Germina- tion, 619. —,, W. E., 175. Green Colour of decaying wood, 631. — Dye, New, 849. — Gland of the Crayfish, 748, 950. Greenland Flowers, Fertilization of, 433. Greenwood, M., Digestive Process in some Rhizopods |. |. Gregarines, Spore-formation in, 770. , Structure of, 769. Gregory, E. L., Pores of the Libriform Tissue, 426. Grenacher’s Carmine, Mayer’s Modification of, 848. Grenfell, J. G., On new species of Scyphi- dia and Dinophysis, 558. Grevillius, A. Y., Stipular Sheath of Poly- gonum, 779. Griesbach, H., 175. , 8., Anilin Stains, 1058. Griessmayer, 669. , True Nature of Starch Cellulose, 774. - Griffith, E. H., Mechanical Finger, 656. — , Pocket Slide Cabinet, 694. , Substage Diaphragm - holder Glass Diaphragms, 657. Griffiths, A. B., Nephridia and “ Liver” of Patella vulgata, 941. ~ Grigorjew, A., 341, 690. Grimmia Hartmanni, Fructification of, 998. Grobben, C., Green Gland of Crayfish, 950. , Malformed Example of Tznia sagi- nata, 962. , Pericardial Gland of Opisthobranchs and Annelids, 939. Groult, P., Hansen’s Lever Microtome, 686. Grouse Disease, 699. Grove, W. B., Fungous Diseases of Plants, 792. Growing Slide, Pagan’s, 655. Growth and Respiration, 437. —— in Thickness and Formation of the Annual Ring, 776. of Cell-wall and other phenomena in Siphonee, 999. of Embryos of Osseous Fishes, 211. — of Molluscan Shell, 374. of Plants, Infiuence of Stretching on, 993. of Pollen-grains, 435. Gruber, A., Artificial Development in Actinospherium, 768. , M., Method for Cultivating An- aerobic Bacteria, 498. Grunow’s (J.) Physician’s Microscope, 159, 287. Guardia, J., Hints for Microscopists, 344. and 1097 Guébhard,” A., Magnifying Power of Dioptric Instruments, 490. Guerne, J. de, Priapulidee from Cape Horn, 241. and G. Pouchet, Protozoa as food of Sardines, 603. Guiana, British, Peripatus of, 747. Guignard, L., Fertilization of Cactacex, 270. —, of Orchidex, 432. —, Raphides-cells in the Fruit of Vanilla, 268. Pr Reproductive Organs of Hybrids, 68. Guinard, Breaking Rocks, 1047. Guinea-pig, Preparing Cochlea of, 840. Gulf-Stream, Medusz of, 248. Gulland, G. L., Sense of Touch in Astacus, 234. Gum Dammar, 1061. Gummosis, 785. Gundlach, E., 667. Giinther, C., 852. , Staining Pathogenic Bacteria with Anilin Dyes, 1058. Giintz, M., Leaves of Grasses, 263. Guttman, P., Lepra Bacilli, 452. Gymnodinium polyphemus, 101. Gymnosporangia and their Reesteliz, 445. Gymnosporangium, Development of, 445. Gynandrous Vaucheria, 1000. up Diatomaceous H. H.,.G. M., 827. Haacke, W., Distribution of Sea-Urchins, 246. , New Scyphomeduse, 971. —,, Radial Symmetry of Echinoids, 762. Haase, E., Ancestors of Insects, 384. —, Holopneusty in Beetles, 380. ——,, Relationships of Myriopods, 384. ——,, Stigmata of Scolopendride, 386. Haberlandt, G., Anatomy and Physiology of Mosses, 438. —., Assimilating System, 109. ——, Meristem of the Medullary rays of Cytisus Laburnum, 609. , Position of the Nucleus in Mature Cells, 980. , Structure of Stomata, 608. Hackel, E., ‘ Challenger’ Radiolaria, 603. Haddon, A. C., Arrangement of the Mesenteries in the parasitic larva of Halcampa chrysanthellum (Peach), 412. —,, Origin of Segmental Duct, 369. —, H. E., ‘ Challenger’ Polyplacophora, 219. Hematococcus, New, 131. Hematocytes, 937. Heematoscopy, 470. Hematoxylin, Pure Extract of Logwood as a substitute for, 1060. Hematozoa of the Tortoise, 603. Hemometer, Fleischl’s, 657. 1098 Haensell, P., 687. Hairs, Formation of, 612. ——, Growth of, on Etiolated Organs, 113. , Peltate, 265. Haleampa chrysanthellum, Arrangement of the Mesenteries in the parasitic larva of, 412. Haldeman, G. B., Tornaria and Balano- glossus, 245. Haller, B., Dotted Substance of Leydig, 214. Hallez, P., Development of Fresh-water Dendroceela, 757. ——, Embryology of Nematodes, 400. ——, Function of Uterus or Enigmatic Organ in Fresh-water Dendroccela, 597. ~ ——, Law of Orientation of the Embryo in Insects, 72. Halliburton, W. D., Method of obtaining Methzemoglobin Crystals, 1065. Hallstén, K., A Compressorium for micro- scopical purposes, 660. Halobates, 745. Halsted, B. D., Be'l-wort, 781. Hands, using both, 667. Hankin, H. H., 341. —, New Methods of using Anilin Dyes for staining Bacteria, 515. Hanks, H., Errors likely to occur in Micro- scopical Observations, 830. Hannover, A., Cysticercus cellulose in Brain of Man, 93. Hansen, A., Neat Method of Rimming Microscopical Preparations, 523. , Researches on Green and Yellow Chlorophyll, 606. Hansen’s Lever Microtome, 686. Hansgirg, A., Algee of Bohemia, 125. , Allogonium, 625. ——, Mountain Algee, 625. ——, Protonema of Moss resembling Chroolepus, 623. , Relationship of the Chlorophyllous Protophyta to the Protonema of Mosses, 130. Hardy, J. D., Desiccation of Rotifers, 179. Harmer, 8S. F., Life-history of Pedicel- lina, 67. Harpe, EH. de la, 528. Hart, T. G., and P. F. Frankland, Dis- tribution of Micro-organisms in the Air, 453, 631. Hartig, R., Fungi parasitic on the Savin, Larch, and Aspen, 1005. Hartlaub, C., Structure of Eleutheria, 96. Hartnack’s (E.) Cupro-ammonia Cell, 826. Hartog, M. M., Cortical Fibrovascular Bundles in Lecythidese and Barring- toniez, 775. , Formation and Liberation of Zoo- spores in Saprolegniee, 444. and A. P. Swan, Anaerobic Culture of aerobic Bacteria, 795. Harz, C. O., Cause of the Turbidity of Water, 787. “Crazy” Pollen of the INDEX. Hase, E., Scales of Lepidoptera, 226. Hassack, C., Coloured Leaves, 263. Haswell, W. A., Australian Polycheta, 399. ——,, Cutting Sections of delicate Vege- table Structures, 338. , Rotating Stage and Circular Slides for large Series of Sections, 297, 358. Hauck, F., Padina, 624. and Richter’s Phycotheca univer- salis, 124. Hauser, G., 1060. Hayem’s (G.) Chromometer, 472. Hayes’s (R. A.) Ether Freezing Micro- tome, 1051. eee W., Development of the Mole, Seek So-called, of Echinoderms, 406. Heart-musele in Cardium edule, Prepara- tion of, 328. Heath, R. S., 667. E ——, ‘Geometrical Optics.” Measure of the Aperture of the Microscope, 828. Heating Apparatus, Julien’s Immersion, 466. ——, Unequal, of Crystal Sections, 467. Heckel, EH., and F. Schlagdenhauffen, Secretion of Araucaria, 984. Hegelmaier, F., Formation of Endosperm- Tissue, 116. Heider, A. R. v., Coral Studies, 411. Heimerl, A., Calcium oxalate in the Cell- wall of Nyctaginex, 607. Heinricher, E., Albumen-vessels in the Cruciferze and allied orders, 427. , Differentiation of Epidermal Cells, 774. Helicobasidium and Hxobasidium, 280. Helminthocecide, 242. Helminthological Observations, 242, 757. Helotium Willkommi, 1003. Henking, H., Development of Phalan- gida, 390. , Modes of preparing Ova, 670. logy, 501. Henneguy, 1022. ,J., and A. B. Lee, 176. , ‘Traité des Méthodes Tech- niques de lAnatomie Microscopique,’ 174. ‘ —, L. F., Growth of Embryos of Os- seous Fishes, 211. ——,, Spore-formation in Gregarines, 770. , Vesicle of Balbiani, 565. Hennessy, H., Cell of the Honey Bee, 577. ——, Geometrical Construction of the Cell of the Honey-bee, 383. Hénocque, —., Hematoscopy, 470. Hensen, V., 1029. Hepatic, Insectivorous, 276. » New, 123. Herdman, W. A., 377. ——, New Organ of Respiration in Tuni- cata, 377. ‘Challenger’ Tunicata, INDEX. Heredity, Theory of, and Polar Bodies, 934. Hermann, L., Influence of Electric Cur- rents on Tadpoles, 51. Hermione hystrix and Polynoe Grubiana, Histology of the Integument and Sen- sory Appendages of, 752. Hermit-crab, Shell of, 952. Herouard, E., Colochirus Lacazii, 967. Herrick, H. F., Embryology of Alpheus and other Crustacea, and the Develop- ment of the Compound Eye, 233. Hertwig, O. and R., Fertilization and Seg- mentation of the Animal Ovum, 929. , Influence of Reagents on the Fer- tilization and Segmentation of the Animal Ovum, 835. ——, R., Experimental Investigation of Fertilization, 44. Herxheimer, C., 690. Hessian Fly, 1068. Heterocystous Nostocaces, 449, 793. Heterodera javanica, Parasitism of, 274. Schachtii, 401. Hetercecious Uredinex, 1004. Heterogamy of Ascaris dactyluris, 401. Heterosporous Muscines, 440. Heurck, H. van, 159, 320, 321, 344. , Comparator, 463, ——., New preparation of the medium of high index (2°4) and note on Liquid- ambar, 522. , Photomicrographs, 182, 1068. Heydenreich, L., Sterilization by the Steam Digester (Papin’s digester) for Bacteriological purposes, 834. High index, preparation of medium of, and note on Liquidambar, 522. Hildebrand, F., Doubling of Flowers, 431. ——,, Fertilization of Oxalis, 615. —, Structure of Flowers of Cleome, 431. —, H. E., 159, 175. —, Microtome, 170. ——,, Slide-carrier, 154. Hildebrandtia and Dichosporangium, 124. Hilgendorf, F., Apparatus for Dehydrating Microscopical Preparations, 342. , Method for Exhibiting Semi-Micro- scopical Objects, 524. Hilger’s (A.) Opaque Illuminator, 462. Tangent-screw Fine-Adjustment, 461. Hillhouse, W., Autumnal Fall of Leaves, 776. — , Beggiatoa alba, 794. ——,, Strasburger’s Practical Botany, 120. Himes, C. F., 667. Hincks, T., Critical Notes on Polyzoa, 377. Hinde, G. J., Hindia, 249. Hindia, 249. Hints for Microscopists, 344. Hirst, G. D., Method of Intensifying the Resolving Power of Microscope Objec- tives, 1033. Hirudinea, Development of Ovum of, 750. ——, Organogeny of, 88. —— Rhynchobdellida, Anatomy of, 954. 1099 His, W., Embryonic Ganglion-cells, 41.. ——, Photographing Series of Sections, 1027 Hisinger, E., Tubercles on Ruppia rostel- lata and Zannichellia polycarpa produced by Tetramyxa parasitica, 793. Histohematin and the Myohzmatins, 214. Histological Records, 176. —— Researches, Employment of Perru- thenic Acid in, 848. Histology of Vertebrata. See Contents, xi. Hitcheock, R., 490, 665, 1066. ——,, Discrimination of Butter and Fats, 345. Hochsinger, C., and M. Kassowitz, Stain- ing Micro-organisms in the tissues of children affected with hereditary Syphi- lis, 517. Hochstetter, J., 176. Hodgkinson, A., 1034. Hodgsonia heteroclita, Extra-floral Nec- taries of, 267. Hoegh, E. v., 321. Holden, A. L., A New Material Cabinet, 1064. Hollyhock and Indigofera, Fertilization oi) a 5 Holm, J. C., and §. V. Poulsen, Detection of “ wild yeast” in low yeast, 132. Holman, L. E., Multiplication of Ameeba, 249, Holopneusty in Beetles, 380. Holothurians, New, 967. Holothurioida and Alcyonaria, Fossil Cal- careous Elements of, 215. Holothurioidea of the ‘Blake’ Expedi- tions, 245, Homologies of Larve of Comatulide, 408. — of Mosses, 439. Homologues of Arachnid Appendages, 747. Honey Bee, Cell of, 577. —— ——,, Geometrical Construction of the Cell of, 383. Honeydew of Coccide, 746. Hood, J., New Rotifer, 966. Hopkins, G. M., Diminishing the Power of an Objective, 647. —, Quick method of mounting dry objects, 694. Hormogones of Gleeotrichia natans, Thur., 285. Horse-hoofs, Preparing, 163. Horvath, G., New Species of Mite, 390. Hourly Variations in the Action of Chloro- phyll, 982. Houssay, F., Perineural Blood-lacuna of Scorpions, 389. Houzeau, J. C., 461. Howland, E. P., Microscopie Projection, 294. Pal W. E., ‘Challenger’ Cephalopoda, 21 Hubrecht, A. A. W., Relation of the Nemertea to the Vertebrata, 754. Hueppe, F., 1048. —,, Bacteria, 139. —, Blood-serum Cultivation, 669. 1100 Hult, R., Distribution of Mosses, 440. Human Ovun, 932. Humboldtia laurifolia as a myrmecophi- lous plant, 785. Humphrey, J. E., Anatomy and Develop- ment of Agarum Turneri, 441. Hurst, C. H., and A. M. Marshall’s Prac- tical Zoology, 213. Huxley, T. H., Gentians, 989. Hybrid-pollination, 269. Hybridization between Amphibia, 370. Hybrids, Reproductive Organs of, 268. Hydra, Natural History of, 408. fusca, Nematocysts of, 409. Hydromeduse, Australian, Addendum to, 249. Hymenolichenes, 444. Hymenomycetes, Cell-nuclei in, 126. ——,, Conidial Form of, 280. ——,, Schulzeria, a new genus of, 125. Hymenomycetous Fungi, Poisonous Prin- ciples of, 127. Hymenophyllaceze, Root of, 623. Hyphomycetes, 446. Hypochlorite of Soda, Solution of, with excess of chlorine asa Decolorizer, 518. Hypotrichous Infusoria, New, 418. , from American Fresh Waters, 975. t Ice, Bacteria in, 455. , Melting, Effects of the Temperature of, on Germination, 271. Ichthyophis glutinosa, Development of, 731 ol. Thering, H. v., Alternation of Generations in Mammalia, 44. Tjima, L., Distoma endemicum, 596. Illuminator, Hilger’s Opaque, 462. , Nachet’s Dark-ground, 463. Imada, Y., 852. Imbedding Apparatus, Ryder’s Paraffin, 678. — , Celloidin-Paraffin, 845. —— Eyes in Celloidin, 680. — in Vegetable Wax, 681. ——, Myrtle Wax Process, 1048. —— Objects for the Rocking Microtome, 680. . Water-bath for, 177. Imhof, O. E., Microscopic Fauna of High Alpine Lakes, 374. ——, Movement of Diatoms, 442. ——,, Pelagic Microzoa of the Baltic, 52. ——, Pores in Diatom-valves, 1000. Immersion Heating Apparatus, Julien’s, 466. Incandescent Gas-burner, Auer’s, as a Microscope Lamp, 813. Index, Slide, 856. Indigofera and Hollyhock, Fertilization of, 115. Infection through parasitic Sclerotia, 627. Iuflorescence, Axis of the, 989. of Typha, 989, INDEX. Inflorescence, Spike-like partial, of the Rhyncosporee, 779. Infusoria, Adoral Ciliated Organ of, 99. , Ciliate, Conjugation of, 766. —, Contractile Vacuoles of, 100. , New, 974. —, Fresh-water, 417, 767, 974. —_, , from New Zealand, 603. ——, — Hypotrichous, 418. —, —, from American Fresh Waters, 975. —, Notices of new American Fresh- water, 35. —,, Parasitic, New Genus of, 419. ——, Reticular Structure of Protoplasm of, 414, Infusorian, New Parasitic, 253. Infusorians, Ciliated, Multiplication of, 414, Inheritance and Karyoplasm, 209. Injecting Jar, Gage’s, 340. Injection Apparatus, Stein’s, 340. Iujections, Nitrite of Amyl for Fine, 341. Tuoculating Needle for Bacterium Culture- tubes, Improved Form of, 179. Insect-holder, Macer’s, 1024. Insect-skin, 73. Insecta. See Contents, xiv. Insectivorous Hepatice, 276. Integument and Sensory Appendages of Hermione hystrix and Polynoe Grubiana, Histology of, 752. Intensifying the Resolving Power of Microscope Objectives, 1033. Intercellular Spaces, Clothing of, 608. Intestinal Bacteria, 134. Intra-ovarian Hgg in Osseous 211 Fishes, —— - —— —— of some Osseous Fishes, 933. Intramolecular Respiration, 619. of Plants, 437. Inversion of Sugar by Pollen-grains, 273. Tnvertebrata, Methods for killing, 834. See Contents, xii. Iodine, free, Glandular Secretion of, 581. ——, Starch-grains coloured red by, 424, 982. ; Iris tuberosa, Pollen of, 114. . Irritation in irritable stigmas, Conduction of, 780. Ishikawa, C., Origin of Male Genera- tive Cells of Eudendrium racemosum, 968. Isopoda, ‘ Challenger,’ 394. , New, 237. Isopoda of the ‘ Lightning,’ ‘ Porcupine,’ and ‘ Valorous’ Expeditions, 236. . Polar Globules in, 952. Isoraphinia texta and Scytalia pertusa, 249, ) Israel, O., 176, 321. —, Double Staining with Orcin, 514. ——.,, Photomicrography with High Powers, 664. Istvanffy, G., and O. Johan-Olsen, Latex- receptacles of Fungi, 626. INDEX. Ito, Tukutaro, and W. Gardiner, Structure of Mucilage-cells of Blechnum occi- dentale and Osmunda regalis, 997. Iyy-Leaf, Changes in a Rooting, 263. J. Jack, J. B., Insectivorous Hepatic, 276. James, F. L., 176, 524, 528, 696, 857, 1066. ——,, Chautauqua Meeting of the American Society of Microscopists, 159. —, Cleaning and Drying Containers, 528. ——,, Cover-glass Holder, 693. —.,, Crystallization by Cold, 1064. ——. Device for centering and holding the slide upon the turntable, 694. ——,, Dissecting Microscope, 644. ,» Gum Dammar, 1061. —— , Improved Slide Cabinet, 694. ——, Preparing Crystals of Salicine, 507, 1048. ——., Using both hands, 667. Janse, J. M., Mimetic Pollen-grains, 431. ——, Part taken by the Medullary Rays in the Movement of Water, 782. Japanese Microscope, 534. Jaubert’s (L.) Microscopes, Eye-pieces, Objectives, &e., 632. Jaworowski, A., Endogenous Cell-multi- plication, 48. Jeafireson, C. 8., 668. Jeffersonia, Nectary and Aril of, 781. Jena, A Visit to, 322. Jennings, C. G., 351, 857. Jensen, C., Analogous variations in Sphag- nace, 786. Johan-Olsen, O., Aspergillus, 444. — and G. Istvanify, Latex-receptacles of Fungi, 626. Johanson, C. J., Scandinavian Perono- sporex, Ustilaginez, and Uredinee, 282. Johnston, C., Media for mounting very perishable Artificial Crystal Sections, 855. Johnston-Lavis, H. J., and G. C. J. Vosmaer, On Cutting Sections of Sponges and other similar structures with soft and hard tissues, 200, 359. Jones, T. Rupert, and C. D. Sberborn, Remarks on the Foraminifera, with especial reference to their Variability of Form, illustrated by the Cristellarians. Part IT., 545. Jones’s (W. and §.) Radial Swinging Tail- piece, 297. Jorissen, A., Chemistry of Germination, 615. ——, Supposed Reduction of Nitrates by Barley and Maize, 783. Joseph, G., Nervous System of Tape- worms, 243. ——, M., and C. Wurster, 1060. Jouannetia cumingii, Sow., 737. 1101 Joubin, L., Anatomy and Histology of Salivary Glands of Cephalopoda, 734. —, — of Brachiopoda Articulata, 573. of Langia obockiana, 756. Jourdain, S., Blastogenesis of Botrylloides rubrum, 65. —, Muscular Fibres of Polycheta, 396. Jourdan, C., Histology of the Integument and Sensory Appendages of Hermione hystrix and Polynoe Grubiana, 752. — _, E., Histology of Eunice, 956. ——,, Investigation of Histology of Eunice, 1047. Journal of the Society, 497. Joyeux-Laffuie, J., Chlorema Dujardini and Siphonostoma diplochaitos, 753. ——,, Organization of Cheetopterus, 956. —. of Chlorzemide, 590. Judd, J. W., Relations between Geology and the Mineralogical Sciences, 493. Julien, A. A., Examining Fluid-cavities in Quartz, 526. ——, Immersion Heating Apparatus, 466. , Pyritized Diatoms, 279. Jullien, J., New Family of Bryozoa, 222. Jung, R., Freezing Microtome, 331. —, Microtome used at the Naples Zoo- logical Station, 334. , Sliding Microtome for very large Objects, 332. Royal Microscopical | Jurisprudence, Micro-, 160. Justice, Microscopic, 325. Ke Kaiser, J., Development of Echinorhyn- chus gigas, 960. sg Glycerin Jelly for Plant Sections, Kamenski, D. A., 690. Kamiénski, F., Mycorhiza, 630. Karop, G. C., and E. M. Nelson, Value of Achromatic Condensers, 647. Karpelles, L., Interesting New Mite, 748. Karsten, G., Origin of Lateral Organs, 429. ——, H., Ant-entertaining Plants, 110. Karyokinesis, 566. Karyoplasm and Inheritance, 209. Kassner, —., Caoutchoue in Plants, 607. Kassowitz, M., and C. Hochsinger, Stain- ing Micro-organisms in the tissues of children affected with hereditary Syphilis, 517. Kastschenko, N., 351. Kastschenko, N., Method for Reconstruct- ing Small Microscopic Objects, 511. Katz, O., Bacteriological Examination of Water, 455. ——, Bacterium of Wheat Ensilage, 451. Kellicott, D, S., 834. ——, Kaiser’s Glycerin Jelly for Plant Sections, 694. ——, New Infusoria, 974. Kerber, A., 667. 1102 Kerber, A., Determination of the colour for which the spherical aberration is to be corrected, 492. Kerner y. Marilaun, A., and R. Wettstein v. Westersheim, Rhizopod-like Diges- tive Organs in Carnivorous Plants, 112. Kessler, H. F., Life-history of Aphides, 227. Ketchum’s (J.) Portable Lamp, 660. Key to the Fresh-water Polyzoa, 378. Khawkine, W., Biology of Astasia ocellata and Euglena viridis, 601. Killing Invertebrata, Methods for, 834. King, Y. M., 827, 1029. King’s Cement, 1064. Kingsley, J. S., Development of Compound Eye of Crangon, 84. —, Orienting Small Objects, 510. and E. D. Cope, Wanted a Definition of “ Philosophical Instrument,” 1040. Kirk, T. W., New Infusoria from New Zealand, 603. Kirkpatrick, R., New genus of Stylaste- ride, 410. Kitton, F., Styrax and Canada Balsam, 359. Kjellman, Shoots of Pyrola secunda, 611. Klebs, G., Functions of the Nucleus, 773. ——, Gelatinous Sheath of Alge, 440. —, Growth of Plasmolysed Cells, 254. , structure of the Cell-wall, 107. Klein, W., Unequal Heating of Crystal Sections, 467. Kleinenberg, N., Origin of Annelids from the Larva of Lopadorhynchus, 87. Klement, C., and A. Renard, Micro-chemi- cal Reactions based on the formation of Crystals, 695. Klemm, P., Leafy Branches of Cupres- sinez, 430. Knatz, L., Forms of Caterpillars, 75. , Relationship and Relative Age of Noctucze and Geometre, 75. Knife-holder for Sliding Microtomes, Mar- tinotti’s, 170. Kny, L., Absorption of Water by Terres- trial Organs, 436. , Absorption of Water in the fluid by Leaves, 119. , Development of Tracheides, 260. Koch, K. R., Microscope for determining Coefficients of Elasticity, 144. , W., New Actinozoa, 249. Kocl’s Plate Method, Modification of, 498. —_ —— — , — , for the isolation and quantitative determination of Micro- organisms, 832 made by, 832. Koehler, R., Brain of Mysis flexuosa, 951. ——, Cireulatory Apparatus of Ophiurids, 761. —, Morphology of Muscular Fibres in Echinorhynchus, 594. Oxy-calcium INDEX. Koehler, R., Muscular Fibres of Echino- thynchus, 594. ——, —— —— of Edriophthalmata, 587. —, Natural History of Orthonectida, 95 ——,, Structure and Development of Cysts of Echinorhynchus, 402. of Muscular Fibres of Edrioph- thalmata, 393. Kohl, F. G., Transpiration, 272. Kolesch, K., Eocidaris, 967. Kolessnikow, 669. Kolliker, A., Demonstrating Sharpey’s Fibres, 838. , Karyoplasm and Inheritance, 209. Kollmann, J., Segmentation of Selachian Ovum, 43. Korotneff, A., Anatomy and Histology of Veretillum, 765. ——, Development of Alcyonella fungosa, 741. ——,, Polyparium and Tubularia, 968. Korschelt, E., Origin and Significance of Cellular Elements of Ovary of Insects, 71. , Some interesting processes in the formation of Insects’ Ova, 574. Korzchinsky, §., Seeds of Aldrovanda, 114. Kossel, A., Chemistry of Cell-nucleus, 372. Kowalevsky, A., Preparation of Eggs of Osseous Fishes, 328. ——.,, Post-embryonal Development of Mus- cidee, 744. —— and Marion, Lepidomenia hystrix, 218. and Schulgin, Embryology of the Scorpion, 78. Krabbe, G., Gliding Growth in the Forma- tion of the Tissues of Vascular Plants, 272. Krapelin, K., Phylogeny and Ontogeny of the Polyzoa, 66. Krasan, F., Formation of Hairs, 612. Krasser, F., Albumen in the Cell-wall, 981. Kraus, C., Bleeding, 996. —. Periodicity in the Phenomena of Bleeding, 436. —, J., Soluble Starch, 494, Krause, W., New Green Dye, 849. Kronecker, oe and J. Brinck, Synthetic Processes in Living Cells, 935. Kronfeld, M., Contrivance for dispersing the Fruit of Scutellaria galericulata, 267. —., Correlation of Growth, 271. ——,, Inflorescence of Typha, 989. —, , Raphides i in Typha, 607. ——, Relationship between Stipule and Leaf, 611. ——,, Symbiosis of a Bacterium and Alga, 996. Kronig’s Cement, 344. Kroustchoff, K. de, Spectrum Analysis in Micro- Mineralogy, 472. INDEX. Krukenberg, C. F. W., Phosphorescence, 938. Krysinski, 8., 1053, 1061. Kiihne, H., 338, 341. , New Staining Method for Sections, ol4. Kiikenthal, W., Nervous System of Ophe- liacese, 957. Kultschizky, Acid Chloral hydrate Car- mine, 848. , Celloidin-Paraffin Imbedding, 845. Kiinstler, J., Reticulated Structure of Pro- tozoa, 414. 1p L., T. F., Microscopical Advances, 160. Labiate# and Borragines, Fertilization of, 115. Labium of the Coleopterous genus Stenus, 380. Laboratory Notes, 660, 695. Lacaze-Duthiers, H. de, Nervous System of Gastropoda, 57. Lachmann, P., Gemmiparous roots of Ani- sogonium, 438. , Root of Hymenophyllacez, 623. —— ., Structure of Davallia Mooreana, 623. Lachnea theleboloides, Apothecia of, 1000. _Lactarius, Preparing, to show Branched Laticiferous Vessels, 165. Lactation, Demonstrating the Nuclei of Mammary Gland-cells in, 326. Lactic Fermentation, 133. Lagerheim, G., American Desmids, 279. , Fresh-water Chztomorphas, 999. ——,, Reproduction of Codiolum, 285. , Scandinavian Alge, 278. Lahilka, C., Isoraphinia texta and Scy- talia pertusa, 249. Lahille, F., Anatomy of Distaplia, 943. , Colonial Vascular System of Tuni- cata, 377. , Muscular System of Glossophorum sabulosum, 570. Lakes, Fresh-water, Pelagic Micro-organ- isms of, 373. , High Alpine, Microscopic Fauna of, 374, , North German, Pelagic and Littoral Fauna of, 733. Lamellibranchiata, New Sensory Organ in, 942. Lamellibranchs, Byssus Gland of, 942. — , Histological Peculiarities of, 60. —, Mouth-lobes of, 220. Lamp for Microscopic Purposes, Selenka’s Electric Projection, 1015. —, Ketchum’s Portable Oxy-calcium, 660. , Microscope, Auer’s Incandescent Gas-burner as a, 813. , Stricker’s Electric, 297. Lamp-shade, Quimby’s, 463. Lampe, P., Succulent Fruits, 267. Lampert, K., Wall-bee and its Parasites, 225, 1103 Lamprey, Fertilization of Ovum of, 932. Lampyris, Ova of, Photogenic Function of, 576. Landsberg, B., Ciliated Pits of Stenostoma, 595, Lang, A., Gastroblasta Raffaelei, 97. Lange, J., Acidity of the Cell-sap, 606. Langia obockiana, Anatomy of, 756. Lanice conchilega, Nephridia of, 591. Lankester, E. R., Classification of the Arthropoda, 378. Lantern Microscope, Leache’s, 1019. Lanzi, M., Endochrome of Diatoms, 626. Larch, Aspen, and Savin, Fungi parasitic on, 1005. Larva, Balanoglossus, 697. —, Blow-fly, Structure of Head of, 948. — of Blanoglossus from Bahamas, 966. of Lopadorhynchus, Origin of Anne- lids from, 87. — of Smerinthus and its Food-plants, 226. Larvee, Lepidopterous, &., 947. of Comatulidee, Homologies of, 408. Lateral Organs, Origin of, 429. — Roots in Dicotyledons, Origin and Development of, 110. — in Leguminose and Cucurbi- taceze, Origin of, 429. Latex-receptacles of Fungi, 626. Latham, V. A., 176, 331, 508, 519, 691, 1053. —, Mounting Mosses, 843. —, To Sharpen Razors, 176. Lathrza squamaria, Structure and Func- tion of the Subterranean Parts of, 111. Laticiferous Vessels, 110. — — and Assimilating System, 984. —— — ofa Calophyllum, 609. —— —., Preparing Lactarius to show Branched, 165. —— ——,, Relation of Secretory Channels to, 609. Latteux, P., 462, 528. Laulanié, F., Development and Signifi- cance of the Germinal Epithelium in the Testicle of the Chick, 210. Laurent, L., 296. say png St. George, v., Spermatogenesis, 45, ——.,, Spermatogenesis of Beetles, 70. Law of Orientation of the Embryo in Insects, 72. Layer of Earth composed of Alge, 442. Leach, W., Lantern Microscope, 473, 1019. Be and Stipule, Relationship between, he —— of the Vine, Galls on, 384. , Passage of Fibrovascular Bundles from the Branch to, 775. Leaf-stalk of Ferns, 274. Leafy Branches of Cupressinez, 430. Leaves, Absorption of Carbonic Anhydride by, 434. Tees. of Water in the fluid state by, 1104 Leaves and Cotyledons, Forms of, 112. ——, Apical Growth of, 616. — , Autumnal Fall of, 776. ——,, Carrotene in, 983. — , Chlorophyll-function of, 617. — , Colour of Coloured, 988. ——, Coloured, 263. —., Maple, Autumnal Changes, 784. of Ferns, 998. of Grasses, 263. — of Mosses, 785. of Sansevieria, Aquiferous Tissue in, 984. —— of Water-plants, 113. ——, Palm, Structure and Development, 778. , Relationship of the Anatomical Structure of, to their Origin, 264. ——., Solution of Starch in, 165. , Transparent Dots in, especially of Connaraceze, 430. , treated with Milk of Lime, Trans- piration and Assimilation in, 782. — , Vine, Histology of, 778. , Physiological Réle of, 784. ——, Yellow Spots on, 989. Leblois, A., Formation of Tyloses in the interior of Secretory Canals, 985. Lecanium hesperidum, Fungus parasitic in, 1004. ——, Males of, and Parthenogenesis, 383. Leclere du Sablon, Development of the Suckers of Thesium humifusum, 987. ——, Influence of Cold on the Movements of the Sap, 273. ——., Structure and Coiling of Tendrils, 436. —, aud Development of the Suckers of Melampyrum pratense, 778. Lecomte, H., Anatomy of Casuarines, 260. ——, Mycorhiza, 792. Lecythideze and Barringtoniez, Cortical Fibrovascular Bundles in, 775. Lee, A. B., Spermatogenesis in Nemer- teans, 755. and J. Henneguy, 176. , ‘Traité des Méthodes Techni- ques de l’Anatomie Microscopique,’ 174. Legal Profession, Microscope in, 493. Leguminose, Anatomical structure of the wood of, 986. and Cucurbitacee, Origin of the lateral roots in, 429. , Root-tubers of, 987. , Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of, 788. , Tubers on the Roots of, 429, 610. Lehmann, F., Lophiostoma, 1003. Lehmann’s (O.) Crystallization Micro- scopes, 288. Lehrke’s (J.) Lens-holder, 1021. Leichmann, G., Polar Globules in Isopoda, 952. Leitgeb, H., Crystalloids in the Cell- nucleus, 255. INDEX. Leitgeb, H., Structure and Physiology of Stomata, 264. Leitz’s (E.) Microscopes, 160. Lemaire, A., Origin and Development of the Lateral Roots in Dicotyledons, 110. ——, Preparing Sections of Stem and Root, 164. Lemoine, —., Structure and Metamorphosis of the Aspidiotus of the Rose-laurel, 76. Lendenfeld, R. von, Addendum to the Australian Hydromeduse, 249. —., Function of Nettle-cells, 247. ——, Staining-cells, 765. 2) Synocils, Sensory Organs of Sponges, , Systematic Position and Classifica- tion of Sponges, 599. Lendl, A., Homologues of Arachnid Ap- pendages, 747. Lenevitch, L., Influence of Desiccation a Temperature on Comma - Bacilli, 133. Lennox, R., 176. , Staining the Retina by Weigert’s Method, 339. Lens, Cemented Combination, Finding the pene character of the Components of, 151. , concave, Determination of the Focal ove of, by the compound Microscope, 1 Lens-holder, Lehrke’s, 1021. -holders, &c., Westien’s improved Uni- versal Clamp for, $07. -stand for Entomological Purposes, Vogel’s, 807. Lenses, Invention of magnifying, 533. — of Objectives and Oculars, Paper for Cleaning, 296. ——, Wales's Cover-carrier for Immersion and Dry, 296. Lenticels, Foliar, 430. Leone, T., Changes induced in water by the development of Bacteria, 795. Lepidomenia hystrix, 218. Lepidoptera, Morphology of Malpighian Tubes in, 381. , Prothoracie Appendages of, 381. , Scales of, 226. TepaevH es Larve, Pupe, &., 382, 947. —— Pupe and surrounding surfaces, Cause and Extent of Colour-relation between, 382. Lepra Bacilli, 452. , Staining of, 517. Leprosy and Tubercle Bacilli, Staining Differences, 688. —— —— ——,, Staining relations of, 688. Lernzan, New, 395. Leucites and Starch, 423. Leuckart, R., New Nematoid, 241. , ‘Die Parasiten des Menschen,’ 403. Leucocytes, Wandering, in Epithelium, 50. Leucophrys patula, 419. , Multiplication of, 252, 253. Letulle, —., 847. INDEX, Levi, D., and G. B. de Toni, Alge epi- phytic on Nymphzacex, 124. , Phycotheca Italiana, 278. Leydig, F., Colossal Nerve-fibres of the Earthworm, 90. , Dotted Substance of, 214., Leydig’s Cord, 73. Liberation of Nitrogen -from its com- pounds, and acquisition of atmospheric Nitrogen by Plants, 783. Liborius, P., Necessity of Oxygen for Bacteria, 136. Libriform tissue, Pores of, 426. Lichenes. See Contents, xxx. Licopoli, G., Pollen of Iris tuberosa, 114. Lieberkiihn’s Microscope, 806. Liebermann, L., Embryo-chemical Investi- gations, 732. Lietzmann, E., Permeability to air of Cell- walls, 981. Life, Amphibious, in Rhizomorpha, 53. —, Minimum Temperature consistent with, 52. Life-History and Structure of the Cock- roach, 75. of Pedicellina, 67. - —— of Thalassema, 396. Lifters for Sections, 1063. Light, Solar, Effects of, on Bacillus an- thracis, 450. Light-perception by Myriopods, 76. ‘Lightning’ Expedition, Isopoda of, 236. Lighton’s (W.) Analysing Diaphragm for the Polariscope, 812. Lignin, Phloroglucin Test for, 172. Limbeck, R. v., Histology of Insect Muscle, 744. Limbs of Crustacea, Abnormal, 85. Lime, Milk of, Transpiration and Assimi- lation in Leaves treated with, 782. Limit of Visibility, 827. Limits of Distinct Vision, On a means of determining, 158. Limpricht, K. G., Formation of Pores in Sphagnacez, 624. —, Rabenhorst’s ‘ Cryptogamic Flora of Germany’ (Musci), 277. Lindberg, 8. O., Reproductive Organs of Muscinesx, 275. Lindman, C. A. M., Fertilization of Scandi- navian Alpine Plants, 615. Lindner, P., New Parasitic Infusorian, 253. —. Prolification in the Mycelium of Fungi, 788. Lindsay’s (G.) Simple Microscope, 293. Linstow, O. v., Helminthological Observa- tions, 242. Lindt, O., Demonstration of Phloroglucin, 689. , W., New pathogenous species of Mucor, 792. Linnzus’s Microscope, 1022. Lintner, C. J., Chemical Nature of Dias- tase, 995. Lipez, F., Culture Glass for examining Micro-organisms, 468. 1105 Liquidambar, note on, and new prepara- tion of the medium of high index (2°4), §22. ; List, J. H., 176. —,, Goblet-cells, 47. — in Amphibian Bladder, 213. , Demonstration of goblet cells in bladder epithelium of Amphibians, 502. , Development of Osseous Fishes, 933. — , Glands in Foot of Tethys fimbriata, 569. ——, Modification of Reichert’s Object- holder, 846. —, Origin of Periblast in Teleosteans, 371. ——,, Orthezia cataphracta, 228. , Preparing Epithelia of Actiniz, 1047. ee Goblet-cells, 325. ——, Rosanilin Nitrate for Goblet and Mucous Cells, 172. ——,, Structure of Glandular Cells, 47. —, Wandering Leucocytes in KEpi- thelium, 50. * Liver’? and Nephridia of Patella vulgata, Sell , Investigating the Termination of Nerves in, 671. — , Mollusc, Histology of, 215. “«__? of Mollusca, 57. , Preparing, 502. Lizard, Wall of Yolk-sac and Parablast of, 564. , Parasites in the Blood of, 105. Lockwood, S., 501. , Raising Diatoms in the Laboratory, 626. Locomotor Orientation, Otocysts as Organs of, 752. Loeff, A. van der, Amcebze of Variola vera, 977. ° Loew, E., Fertilization of Labiatz and Borragines, 115. Loewenherz, L., 325. Loffler, —., Swine Fever, 135. Logwood, Extract of, as a Substitute for pure Hematoxylin, 1060. Loligo, Early Development of, 216. Loman, J. C. C., Glandular Secretion of free Iodine, 581. —, Morphological Significance of so- called Malpighian Vessels of two Spi- ders, 584. Long, J. H., Discrimination of Butter and Fats, 345. —, R., 160, 351. Lopadorhynchus, Origin of Annelids from the Larva of, 87. Lophiostoma, 1003. Lophopus, Characters of the Genus, 742. Loranthacee, Anatomical Structure of, 261. Lorin, M., 176. Low, F., Helminthocecide, 242. ——., Phytoptocecidia, 274. Lowenthal, N., New Method for making Picrocarmine, 848. 1106 Lower Forms of Animal and Vegetable Life, 447. Organisms, Researches on, 769. Lowne, B. T., Structure of the Head of Blow-fly Larva, 948. Lubbock, J., Forms of Leaves and Cotyle- dons, 112. ; of Seedlings and the causes to which they are due, 991. Lucas, A. H. S., Shell of Hermit-crab, 952. , Sound Organs of the Green Cicada, 947. Ludwig, F., Alcoholic Fermentation on Living Trees, 285. , Desiccation of Seeds of Aquatic Plants, 271. ——,, H., Singular Parasite in Firola, 939, , Trichodina paradoxa, 598. Luerssen, C., Rabenhorst’s Cryptogamic Flora of Germany (Vascular Crypto- gams), 789. Lumbrica and Arenicola, Preparation of endothelium of the general cavity of, 842. Lumbricida, Preparation of, 329. Lumbricide, New Genus of, 751. Lund, E., Preservation of Recent Patho- logical Specimens, 8405. Lundstrom, A. N., Absorption of Water in the fluid state by Leaves, 119. , Symbiotic Formations, 273. Lung, Injected, Making Sections of, 686. Lung-disease, Contagium, 135. Lupin, New nitrogenous constituent of, 425. Lustgarten, Preparing the Bacillus of, 166. , L., Staining Elastic Fibres with Vic- toria Blue, 688. ,8., 691. Luzula, Cilia of, 113. Lycogalopsis Solmsii, a new Gasteromy- cete, 127 Lycoperdon, Monograph of the Genus, 701. Lycopodium inundatum, Prothallium and Germ-plants of, 621. Lydtin, A., and —. Schottelius, Swine Fever, 135. Lymphatic System in Enchytreide, 92. M. Macallum, A. B., Investigating the Termi- nation of Nerves in the Liver, 671. —, Nuclei of Striated Muscle-fibre in Necturus Cae pee lateralis, 567. M‘Cassey, G. H., 857. Macchiati, L., Extra-floral Nectaries of Amyzdalez, 267. McCook, H. C., Modification of Habits in Ants through fear of Enemies, 581. Macé, 669. , Heterogamy of Ascaris dactyluris, 401. , Phosphorescence of Geophilus, 230. Macer’s (R.) Insect-holder, 1024. Macfarlane, J. M., 325. INDEX. Macfarlane, J. M., Preparing the Epi- dermal Tissues of Pitcher Plants, 164. Machilis, Anatomy of, 76. Machine for cutting Rock-sections, 509. M‘Kendrick, J. G., Binocular Vision with the Microscope, $29. M‘Leod, J., Pollination of Flowers, 434. MacMunn, Ch. A., Chromatology of Anthea cereus, 598. , Enterochlorophyll and Allied Pig- ments, 214, —, Function of the Malpighian Tubes of Insects and Nephridium of Pulmo- nate Mollusea, 52. ——, Method of obtaining Uric Acid Crys- tals from the Malpighian Tubes of In- sects, and from the Nephridium of Pulmonate Mollusea, 166. —, Myohematin and the Histohema- tins, 214. MeMurrich, J. P., Embryology of Proso- branch Gasteropods, 217. MNeill, J.. New Species of Myriopoda, 949. Macrophoma, a new genus of Spherop- sideze, 280. Maddox, R. L., On the Different Tissues found in the Muscle of a Mummy, 537. Madreporaria, Anatomy of, 971. Madreporarian Skeleton, ‘Morpholog y of, 972. Magdeburg, F., Capsule of Mosses as an Assimilating Organ, 122. Magic Lantern and Projection Microscope, Rochester, 804. Magini, G., 665. , Mounting Sections prepared by Golgi’s Method, 520. Magnifying-power of Objectives, Measure- ment of, 667, 830. Maistriau, Ch., L. Errera, and C. Clau- triau, Localization and Significance of Alkaloids in Plants, 607. Maize and Barley, Supposed Reduction of Nitrates by, 783. Malanconiee, 446. Male and Female Elements, Chemical Comparison of, 45. — Generative Cells of HEudendrium racemosum, Origin of, 968. — Reproductive Organs of Cypride, Preparation of, 841. Malformed Example of Teenia saginata, 962. Mall’s (P. F.) Section-smoother, 685. Malpighian Tubes, Function of, of Insects and Nephridium of Pulmonate Mollusca, 52. —— ——, in Lepidoptera, Morphology of, 381. —— —— of Insects and Nephridium of Pulmonate Mollusca, Method of obtain- ing Uric Acid Crystals from, 166. — Vessels, Morphological Significance of so-called, of two Spiders, 584, Maltwood Finders, Standard, 529, INDEX. Mammalia, Alternation of Generations in, 4 ——,, Spermatogenesis of, 730. Mammalian Testis, Preparing, 839. Mammals, Preparing Eyes of, 162. Mammary Gland- cells, Demonstrating Nuclei of, in Lactation, 326. Man and Domestic Animals, Comparative Size of Blood-corpuscles in, 937. ——,, Cysticercus cellulose in Brain of, 93. Mangin, L., Exchange of Gases by Buds, 29. —, Growth of Pollen-grains, 435. —, Origin of Lateral Roots, 262. , Ovuliferous Petals in Caltha palus- tris, 266. —, Vitality of Pollen-grains, 269. Manton, W. P., and others, 528, 668, 696, 857, 1064. —— —,, Stains, 691. Maple Leaves, Autumnal Changes in, 784. Marattiacexe, Formation of Crystals in, 622. Mareatili, L., and J. R. Pirotta, Latici- ferous Vessels, 110. — —, — — and Assimilating System, 984. Marine Polyzoa, Recent, 67. Vaucheria, 441. Marino-Zuco, F., and A. Celli, Nitvrifica- tion, 1008. Marion, A. F., Two New Species of Balanoglossus, 95. and A. Kowalevsky, Lepidomenia hystrix, 218. Mark, E. L., Dissecting Pans, 173. , Orienting large objects in Paraffin, , Simple Eyes in Arthropods, 742. ——,, Water-bath Apparatus for Paraffin, 167. Marking Microscopical Objects, Schief- ferdecker’s (P.) Apparatus for, 468. Markings and Colour in Insects, Protective Value of, 946. Marktanner-Turneretscher, G., 1029. ——, Anatomical Structure of Lorantha- cee, 261. Marotta, A., Micro-parasite of Variola, 452. Marpmann, G., Lactic Fermentation, 133. Marseilles, Protozoa of, 415. Marseniide, ‘ Challenger,’ 219. Marshall, A. M., and C. H. Hurst’s Practical Zoology, 213. , C. F., Structure and Distribution of Striped and Unstriped Muscle in the Animal Kingdom, 935. —., W. P., 830. , Marsupialia and Monotremata, Embryo- logy of, 563. Mortel, E., Structure and Development of the Fruit of Anagyris foetida, 614. Martin, L. J., Petroleum Spirit as a Plant Preservative, 678. , S., Proteids of the Seeds of Abrus precatorius, 773. ——, W. K., and S. B. Thomas, Autumnal Changes in Maple Leaves, 784. 1107 Martinotti, G., 176. ——,, Knife-holder for Sliding Microtomes, 170. —, “Old and New Microscopical Instruments.” Apparatus for testing Refractive Index, 814. ——,, Staining Elastic Fibres, 850. at Thymol in Microscopical Technique, 42. , Xylol-Dammar, 1062. Marxow, E. F. v., Reichert’s improved Mechanical Stage, 809. Marzi, G., Preparing Bacterial Material for Transmission by Post, 507. Maskell, W. M., Honeydew of Coccida, 746. , New Fresh-water Infusoria, 767. Massee, G., Colocasia Disease, 1005. , Monograph of the Genus Lycoperdon (Tournef.) Fr., 701. — , On the Differentiation of Tissues in Fungi, 205, 359. ——,, Structure and Function of the Sub- terranean Parts of Lathrza squamaria, 111. Masters, M. T., Floral Conformation of Cypripedium, 613. Mastigobryum, 276. Matthiessen, L., 325. Mattirolo, O., Cyphella, 790. —,, Parasitism of Tuber, 791. Maturation and Fertilization of Amphi- bian Ova, 564. Maupas, E., Conjugation of Ciliate Infu- soria, 766. —, Leucophrys patula, 419. —, Multiplication of Ciliated Infusori- ans, 414. ——, —— of Leucophrys patula, 252. , Theory of Sexuality, 973. Maurice, C., Anatomy of Amarecium torquatum, 65. Maury, P., Ascidia of Cephalotus follicu- laris, 778. — , Fertilization of Verbascum, 433. ——,, Structure and Geographical Distri- bution of Plumbagineex, 428. Mayaca, Anatomicai Studies on, 781. Mayall, J., jun., 160, 321, 325, 497, 831. , Dr. H. van Heurck’s Photomicro- graphs, 182. ——,, Hilgev’s Heliostat, 178. —, Microscope for measuring lines of diffraction plates, 178. —, Invention of magnifying 533. —, Visit to Jena, 322. Mayer, P., Fixing Sections, 853. , Formation of fresh stalks in Tubu- laria, 765. , Modification of Grenacher’s Car- mine, 848. ——,—— of the Naples Section-smoother, 846. ——, W. Giesbrecht, and G. C. J. Vos- maer, Water-bath for Paraffin Imbed- ding, 845. lenses, 1108 Measurement by Total Reflection of the Refractive Indices of Microscopic Mine- rals, 659. , Microscopic, of Indices of Refrac- tion and Axial Angle of Minerals, 468. , Minute, 321. of Power, 1032. Measures, J. W., 160. Mechanism of Development, 368. Media, coloured nutrient, Bacteriological experiments with, 835. , firm, Permanent Preparations on, 691. for mounting very perishable Arti- ficial Crystal Sections, 855. ¥ of High Refractive Index, Experi- ments with, 520. — ., Prof. H. L. Smith’s High Refrac- tive Mounting, Directions for using, 1063. Mediterranean, Synaptide of, 764. Medium, Influence of, 568. Medland. J. B., 176. ——, Portable Cabinet, 173, 183. Medullary Rays, Cambium of, 426. , Part taken by the, in the Move- ment of Water, 782. Medullated Nerve-fibres, Preparing, 838. Medusa, New Rhizostomatous, 410, 768. , New Sessile, 98. Meduse of the Gulf-Stream, 248. Meehan, T., Fertilization of Cassia mari- landica, 270. : of the Hollyhock and of Indi- gofera, 115. , Stipules and Petals, 991. Méenin, P., Anatomy and Physiology of Glyciphagide, 232. A of Echinorhynchi, 960. Meinert, F., Labium of the Coleopterous genus Stenus, 380. Melampyrum pratense, Structure and De- velopment of the Suckers of, 778. Melicerta and Cypris, 86. Mellink, J. F. A., Formation of Thulle, 261. Membrane of the Zygospores of Mucorini, 281. Menispermacese, Anatomy of, 428. Mer, E., Changes in a Rooting Ivy-Leaf, 263. Mer, E., Infiuence of an Aquatic Medium on Amphibious Plants, 272. Mercanti, F., Post-embryonic Development of Telphusa fluviatilis, 392. Mercer, A. C., 321. — , Photomicrograph versus Microphoto- graph, 669. Mergui Ophiurids, 598. Merian’s (A.) Arrangement for Heating Minerals, 318. Meristem of the Medullary Rays of Cytisus Laburnum, 609. Merry, M., Identity of Podosphera minor, Howe, and Microsphera fulvofulcra, Cooke, 1002. . INDEX. Mesenteries, Arrangement of, in the para- ue larva of Haleampa chrysanthellum, 12. Metamorphosis and Structure of the Aspi- diotus of the Rose-laurel, 76. — of Bryozoa, 222. ——, Tadpole, Conditions of, 210. Metazoa, Primitive form of, 46. Methemoglobin Crystals, Method of ob- taining, 1065. Methylen-blue Staining, 849. Meyer, A., Nageli’s Starch-cellulose, 256. ——, Starchgrains coloured red by iodine, 424, 982. —, V., Drying and Heating Apparatus for the Histological Laboratory, 524. Miall, L. C., and A. Denny, Structure and Life-History of the Cockroach, 75. Michael, A. D., 668. Michaelsen, W., Lymphatic System in En- chytreide, 92. Microbe, New Indigogenons, 1009. Microbes, Fate of, in the Blood of Warm- blooded Animals, 133. Micro-chemical Analysis of Minerals, 525. reactions of Lichens, 1001. Micro-chemistry of Lichens, 126. - —— of the Epidermal Tissue, 257. Micrococcus ochroleucus, 1008. Micro-Jurisprudence, 160. Micrometer Background, Mounting Opaque Objects on, 692. , Fasoldt’s Eye-piece, 819. ——,, Rogers’ Stage, 819. —.,, Screw-, Darling’s, 652. Wires, 661. Micrometer-Microscope, Campbell’s, 457. Micro-Mineralogy, Spectrum Analysis in, 472. Micro-organisms, 1007. - ——, Culture Glass for examining, 468. —— - ——, Distribution of, in Air, 137, 453, 631. —— - —— in Thermal Water, 214. —— - ——, Modification of Koch’s plate method for the isolation and quantita- tive determination of, 832. , Multiplication of. 138. —— -——,, New, obtained from the Air, 631. of the Soil, 453. —— - ——,, Pelagic, of Fresh-water Lakes, 373 : —— - ——, Reduction of Nitrates by, 139. —— - —, Relation of Fatty Matter to the Receptivity of Staining in, 172. —— - ——,, Solid Medium for the Culture of, 832. —— - , Staining, in the tissues of chil- dren affected with hereditary Syphilis, 517. Micro-Parasite of Variola, 452. Microphotograph versus Photomicrograph, 665. Microphotographic Apparatus, Dagron’s, 487. INDEX. Microscope, Ahrens’s Triocular, 799. and its Future, 160. and Old Age, 1041. — asa factor in the establishment of a constant of nature, 1034. ——,, Binocular Vision with, 829. —., Bulloch’s Student’s, 140. —, Burch’s Perspective, 288, 456. — by lamplight, Contrivance for use with, 473. —, Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co.’s Reading, 643. ——, Campani’s (G.) Compound, 643. —, Campbell’s Micrometer-, 457. ——, Competition for the best, 645. ——,, Crookshank’s Bacteriological, 801. ——,, Dissecting, How to make a simple, 461. —., Entomological, 288. —— for determining Coefficients of Elas- ticity, Koch’s, 144. for fixing Spider’s Threads, Berger’s, 144, —, Geneva Co.’s Reading, 643. —, Giles’s Army Medical, 1012. , Gomont’s “ new ” Botenizing, 803. ——, Grunow’s Physician’s, 287. , Identification of Alkaloids and other Crystalline Bodies’ by, 527. —— in Pharmacy, The, 352. ~— in the Lecture- and Class-room, 668. —— in the Legal Profession, 493. — in Theory and Practice, Nigeli and Schwendener’s, 1039. ——,, James’s (F. L.) Dissecting, 644. ——, Japanese, 534. — Lamp, Auer’s Incandescent Gas- burner as a, 813. —, Leach’s Lantern, 1019. ——,, Lieberkiihn’s, 806. ——,, Lindsay’s Simple, 293. —, Linneus’s, 1022. ——., Measure of the Aperture of, 828. ——,, Moginie’s Travelling, 146. —., Nachet’s Compound and Simple Dis- secting, 147. ——,, Nelson’s “ New Student’s,” 292. —, —— Portable, 1013. ——, —— Electric Polarizing Projection-, 1021. Objectives, Method of Intensifying the Resolving Power of, 1033. , On Improvements of, with the aid of New Kinds of Optical Glass, 20. ——. Photographie Apparatus for, 473. ——, Photomicrographic Camera for the Simple or Compound, 662. , Pillischer’s Kosmos, 182. , Projection, Rochester Magic Lan- tern and, 804. , Schulze’s Aquarium, 1010. ——, Stephenson’s Erecting Binocular, 802. —, Swift’s Platinized, 1069. ——,, Thury’s Multiocular, 796. —,, Value of, in Trade, 157. ——.,-Watson-Draper, 358, 458. 1887. 1109 Microscope, Weinzierl’s Simple, for the Examination of Seeds, 806. with large Stage, Woodhead’s, 1015. Microscopes, &c., New Optical Substance for Objectives of, 1023. , Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Com- bined Inverted and Vertical, 141. ——, Culpeper’s Simple and Compound (Wilson’s form), 459. —, Jaubert’s (L.), 632. — “Laboratory” and 141. —, Lehmann’s Crystallization, 288. ——,, Schott’s, 148, 804. Microscopic Advantage, A, 660. —— Justice, 325. —— Organisms in Fresh Water, 53. Projection, 294. Microscopical Instruments,” “Old and New, 814. Literature, Curiosities of, 830. — Preparations, Neat Method of Rim- ming, 523. — Records, Alling’s, 173. —, Society of Calcutta, 667. — Studies, Pursuit of, by Amateurs, 1041. — Technique for small Pelagic Objects, 505. “ University,” Mieroscopist, an Enthusiastic, 668. Microscopists, Behrens’s Tables for, 524. —’ Working Table, 346. Microscopy, Collecting, Mounting, &c. See Contents, xxxviii, xlii. , Commercial, 160. — in Calcutta, 1041. —, Instruments, Accessories, &e. Contents, xxxiv. Microsphera fulvofulera, Cooke, and Podo- sphera minor, Howe, Identity of, 1002. Microsporidia, Revision of, 770. Microstat, Swirnow’s, 651. Microstomida, Sexual Characters Generative Organs of, 404. Microtelyphonide, 79. Microtome, De Groot’s Automatic, 1049. —— de précision, 847. ae for very large Objects, Jung’s Sliding, 32. ——,, Francotte’s Sliding, 682. ——., Hansen’s Lever, 686. ——, Hayes’s Ether Freezing, 1051. —., Hildebrand’s, 170. —, Home-made, 1053. ——, Jung’s Freezing, 331. —— Knife, Apparatus for controlling the position of the, 336. ——.,, Paoletti’s Automatic, 1052. —,, Pfeifer’s Revolving Automatic, 168. —,, Reichert’s small Rivet’s, 847. —, Rocking, Imbedding Objects for, 680 See and ——, Rutherford’s (W.) Combined Ice and Ether-spray Freezing, 508. ——., Ryder’s Automatic, 682. —— used at the Naples Zoological Station, 334. 4p 1110 Microtomes, Martinotti’s Knife-holder for Sliding, 170. Microzoa, Pelagic, of the Baltic, 52. Miers, E. J., ‘Challenger’ Brachyura, 392. Mikrolektron, Perenyi’s, for hardening, staining, and imbedding, 1053. Miles, J. W. L., 678. ——,, ‘‘ Desideratum”’ Condenser, 648. Milk of Lime, Transpiration and Assimi- lation in Leaves treated with, 782. Miller, M. N., Myrtle Wax Imbedding Process, 1048. Milne, W., New Protozoa, 417. Mimetic Pollen-grains, 431. Mimonectes, a new genus of Amphipoda~ Hyperidea, 85. Mineralogical and Geological Sciences, Relations between, 493. Purposes, Universal Projection Appa- ratus for, 459. Mineralogy, Micro-, Spectrum Analysis in, 472. Minerals, Merian’s (A.) Arrangement for Heating, 318. —, Micro-chemical Analysis of, 525. ——, Microscopic, Measurement by Total Reflection of the Refractive Indices of, 659. , —— —— of Indices of Refraction and Axial Angle of, 468. Minot, C. S., Insect-skin, 73. Mischtoldt, A., 176. Mite, Interesting New, 748. , New Species of, 390. Mitosis in Brain of Tadpole, Showing, 163. —— Staining, 1056. Mitten, W., Muscinese of Central Africa, 122. Mittenzweig, H., Pathogenic Bacteria, 286. Miura, M., Demonstration of Bile-capil- laries, 163. Mobius, K., Adoral Ciliated Organ of In- fusoria, 99. ——,M., Anatomy of the Stem of Orchi- dex, 428. , Concentric Vascular Bundles, 608. Modelling-plates, Wax, and Section-series, a new method for making, 171. Moginie’s (W.) Travelling Microscope, 146. Mole, Development of, 41. Molecular Structure of Protoplasm, De- struction of, 106. of Vegetable Tissues, 259. Molisch, H., New Method of distinguishing Vegetable from Animal Fibre, 670. ——, New Reagent for Coniferin, 165. ——, Nitrates and Nitrites in Plants, 983. —,, Silicified Cells in Calathea, 982. ——, Two New Sugar Reactions, 344. Moll, J. W., New Micro-chemical Reaction for Tannin, 695. Mollusca. See Contents, xii. Molluscoida. See Contents, xiii. INDEX. Molluses and Arthropods’ Eyes, Preparing, 162, 672. Moniez, R., Distomum ingens, 242. —, Fungus Parasitic in Lecanium hes- peridum, 1004. —, Males of Lecanium hesperidum, and Parthenogenesis, 383. ——,, New Form of Sarcodina, 254. ——, —— Parasites of Daphniz, 625. —, Type of Sporozoa, 254. ——, Revision of the Microsporidia, 770. Monotremata and Marsupialia, Embryo- logy of, 563. Monsters, Double, Formation of, 372. Monteverde, N. A., Formation of Crystals in the Marattiacez, 622. Moore, A. Y., 160, 331. , Death of, 668. — , Gold-plated Diatoms, 160. ——, Turntable running by steam power, 176. Morin, J., Embryology of Spiders, 231. Morini, F., Apothecia of Lachnea thele- boloides, 1000. ——, New Aspergillus, 127. , Saccharine Substances in the Phal- loidez, 788. , Tubercularia, 282. Morland, H., Curiosities of Microscopical Literature, 830. ——, Preparing Diatoms in Cemenistein, 330 , Structure of Diatoms, 125. Morphology of Scolopendrella, 77. of Tunicata, 61. Morris, W., 344. , Experiments with Media of High Refractive Index, 520. Mosses. See Muscinez. Mosses, Mounting, 843. Mosso, A., Alteration of the Red Blood- corpuscles, 566. Moth-breeding, Pedigree, 579. Mountain Alge, 625. Mounting. See Contents, xlii. Mouth-lobes of Lamellibranchs, 220. Movement of Diatoms, 442. Movements of Star-fishes, 406, 758. of Tendrils, 618. Mucilage-cells of Blechnum occidentale and Osmunda regalis, Structure of, 997. Mucor, New Pathogenous Species of, 792. Mucorini, Conjugation of, 281. st Membrane of the Zygospores of, 81. Mucous and Goblet Cells, Rosanilin Ni- trate for, 172. Membranes, Mode of examining, 670. Mud, Cleaning Diatomaceous, 844. Mulberry, Fungi parasitic on, 1004. Miiller, C. O., Formation of Albuminoids in Plants, 425. —., F., Latent Vitality of Seeds and Rhizomes, 115. —., H.,, Physiological Réle of Vine Leaves, 784. INDEX. Miiller, N. J. C., Molecular Structure of Vegetable Tissues, 259. ——,, O., Intermediate Bands and Septa of Diatoms, 442. Miiller-Thurgau, H., Freezing of Tissues, 438. Multinucleated Cells, 107. Multiplication of Amcebe, 249. of Ciliated Infusorians, 414. — of Leucophrys patula, 252, 253. — of Micro-organisms, 138. Mummy, On the Different Tissues found in the Muscle of, 537. Muntz, A., Ripening of Seeds, 435. Muscide, Post-embryonal Development of, 744. Muscinex. See Contents, xxix. Muscle, Histology of Insect, 744. ——,, Striped and Unstriped, Structure and Distribution of, in the Animal Kingdom, 935. Muscle-fibre, Genesis and Death of, 50. — - — _, Striated, in Necturus (Meno- branchus) lateralis, Nuclei of, 567 Muscles, Death of, 372. Muscular Fibre, Striped, 1072. — Fibres of Echinorhynchus, 594. of Edriophthalmata, 393, 587. —— — of Polycheta, 396. , Unstriated, Demonstration of the Fibrille of, 327. Mussa and Euphyllia, Anatomy of, 972. Mycelites ossifragus—a Fungus in Bone, 789. Mycelium of Fungi, Prolification in, 788. Mycorhiza, 630, 792. Myohzmatin and the Histohemating, 214. Myriopoda. See Contents, xv. Myrmecophilous plant, Humboldtia lauri- folia as a, 785. — Plants, 620. Myrtle Wax Imbedding Process, 1048. Mysis Chamzleo, Embryology of, 950. ——,, Preparing Ova of, 841. — flexuosa, Brain of, 951. Myzostoma Bucchichii, 758. N. N., W. J., 160, 297, 660. Nachet’s (A.) Camera Lucida for Magni- fiers, 649. — Compound and Simple Dissecting Microscope, 147. Dark-ground Illuminator, 463. Nagamatsz, A., Chlorophyll-function of Leaves, 617. Nagel, W., Human Ovum, 932. Nageli (C.) and (S.) Schwendener’s ‘The Microscope in Theory and Practice,’ 1039. Nageli’s Starch-cellulose, 256. Nagura, O., 645. Nalepa, A., Anatomy and Classification of Phytopti, 389. ——, Anatomy of the Tyroglyphidx, 232. Naples, Bay of, Ectoparasitic Rotifers from, VEYE 1111 Naples Section-smoother, Modification of, 846. — Zoological Station, Microtome used at, 334. Nasmyth, T. G., 834. Nassonow, N., Thoracic Salivary Glands homologous with Nephridia, 73. Naturalist’s Store-case and Book-box for Specimens, 528. Naumann, A., Structure and Development of Palm-leaves, 778. Navalichin, T. G., Genesis and Death of Muscle-fibre, 50. Nectarial Tissue, Examination of, 842. Nectaries, 614. —, Extra-floral, of Amygdalex, 267. - ——, of Hodgsonia heteroclita, —— 267. Nectars, Chemical Composition of certain, 425. Nectary and Aril of Jeffersonia, 781. — of Erythronium, 114. — of Galanthus nivalis, 781. Necturus (Menobranchus) lateralis, Nuclei of Striated Muscle-fibre in, 567. Needle-holder, 528. Nelson, E. M., 160, 492, 645. , Finding the general character of the Components of a Cemented Combina- tion Lens, 151. —, Measurement of Power, 1032. , Method of Intensifying the Resoly- ing Power of Microscope Objectives, 1033. ——, Numerical Aperture, 321. ——, New Eye-piece, 928. ——, “‘ New Student’s Microscope,” 292. ——,, Object-glasses, 296. ——,, Photomicrographic Camera, 661. ; Focusing-screen, 1028. —, Portable Microscope, 1013. ——,, Striped Muscular Fibre, 1072. ,and C. L. Curties’s Photomicro- graphic Camera, 1025. and G. C. Karop, Value of Achroma- tic Condensers, 647. Nematocysts of Hydra fusca, 409, Nematodes, Embryology of, 400. Nematoid, New, 241. —— Parasite on Sugar-cane, 93. Nematus caprez, Cecidia caused by, 746. Nemertea, Relation of, to the Vertebrata, 754. Nemerteans of Roscoff, 94. ——,, Spermatogenesis in, 755. Nencki, M., Chemical Composition of Ba- cillus anthracis, 137. Nephridia and “ Liver” of Patella vulgata, 941. —— of Lanice conchilega, 591. —,, Thoracic Salivary Glands homologous with, 73. Nephridium of Pulmonate Mollusca and Malpighian Tubes of Insects, Method of obtaining Uric Acid Crystals from, 166. ——, Function of, and of the Malpighian Tubes of Insects, 52. 4p2 1112 Nephroma lusitanica, Emodin in, 1001. Nerve Staining, 850. Nerve-fibres, Colossal, of the Earthworm, 90. - ——, Medullated, Preparing, 838. Nerves in the Liver, Investigating the Termination of, 671. ——, Medullated, China-Blue asa Stain for the Funnel-shaped Fibrils in, 514. ic Fi » 218. Nervous System, Central, Modification of Golgi’s Method for Staining, 513. — of Weigert’s Method of Staining Tissues of, 513. ,—, of Acephala, Preparing, 840. —— — _,, ——, of Acephalous Mollusca, 736. —— —— in Tenioglossate Prosobranchs, 374. of Ctenobranch Molluses, 60. —— —— of Gastropoda, 57. of Insects and Spiders, and Re- marks on Phrynus, 223. of Opheliaceze, 957. —— — of Polycheta, Histology of, 954. —— —— of Tape-worms, 243. —— ——,, Preparation of the Organs of, 327. » Typical, of Prosobranchs, 218. Nettle-cells, Function of, 247. Network of Cells surrounding the Endo- derm in the Roots of Cruciferz, 775. Neumann, C., 808, 1041. Neville, J.. New Form of Dry Cell, 856. New South Wales, Fresh-water Rhizopoda of, 177. Zealand, Fresh-water Alge of, 1000. , New Infusoria from, 603. Newcomer, F.8., Cleaning and Arranging Diatoms, 844. Newton’s Electric Polarizing Projection- Microscope, 1021. Nikolsky, W., 176. , Formation of Vacuoles in red-blood Corpuscles, 50. Nissen, F., Demonstrating the Nuclei of Mammary Gland-cells in Lactation, 326. Nissl, F., 176. , Congo Red, 339. Nitella, Rotation in, 277. Nitrates and Nitrites in Plants, 983. , Reduction of, by Micro-organisms, 139. ——, Supposed Reduction of, by Barley and Maize, 783. Nitrification, 1008. Nitrite of Amyl for Fine Injections, 341. Nitrites and Nitrates in Plants, 983. Nitrogen, Acquisition of atmospheric, by Plants, 783. ——, Liberation of, from its compounds, 783. , Loss of, by Plants during Germina- tion and Growth, 270. INDEX. Noble, Captain W., and this Journal, 494, 668 Nocard and Roux, New Method for the Cultivation of the Tubercle Bacillus, 499. Noctuze and Geometre, Relationship and Relative Age of, 75. Nolen, W., and J. Poels, Contagium of Lung-disease, 135. Noll, F., Growth of Cell-wall and other phenomena in Siphonee, 999. —, Normal Position of Zygomorphic Flowers, 612. ——,, Theory of Twining, 119. —,F. C., and F. Vejdovsky, Spongilla glomerata, 99. Nordstedt, O., Fresh-water Alge of New Zealand, 1000. , Marine Vaucheria, 441. Norman, A. M., and T. R. R. Stebbing, Isopoda of the ‘ Lightning,’ ‘ Porcupine,’ and ‘ Valorous’ Expeditions, 236. Norner, C., Preparing Horse-hoofs, 163. , Treatment of Acari, 1045. North Sea Aleyonida, 599. Expedition, Norwegian, Crus- tacea of, 238. Mollusea, 221. Norwegian North Sea Expedition, Crus- tacea of, 238. Nose-piece and Adapter, Turnbull’s (J. M.) Improved Sliding, 295. , Frazer’s (A.) centering, for use with Double Nose-pieces, 294. Nostocacesze, Heterocystous, 449, 793. Nostochinee, Structure of, 448. Nova Zembla, Fungi of, 130. Nuclear Sheath, 259. Nuclei, Cell-, in the Hymenomycetes, 126. | Fixing ‘and Staining o, 687. ‘of Living Cells, Colouring, 1056. — of Mammary Gland-cells in Lacta- tion, Demonstrating, 326. — of Striated Muscle-fibre in Necturus (Menobranchus) lateralis, 567. Nucleus, Artificial Distortions of, 327. ——,, Cell-, Chemistry of, 372. —, Functions of, 773. 42. —., Position of, in Mature Cells, 980. ——, Structure of, 771. Numerical Aperture, 321. Nusbaum, J., Embryology of Mysis Cha- ie 950. of Schizopods, 235. —, ; Leydie’s Cord, 73. ——, Organogeny of the Hirudinea, 88. ——, Preparing Ova of Mysis Chameleo, 841. Nussbaum, M., Natural History of Hydra, 408. — , Polypes turned outside in, 95. — Regeneration of Polypes, 967. ——, Vitality of Encapsuled Organisms, 568. Nutrient Media, Coloured, Cultivation of Bacteria on, 1044. INDEX. Nyctaginez, Calcium oxalate in the Cell- wall of, 607. Nympheacex, Algse epiphytic on, 124. Foes Terminal Growth of the Root in, eile O. Object-glasses, 296. Object-holder, Reichert’s, Modification of, 846. Object-points, Determining the Reciprocal Positions of, 171. Objective, A new, 809. ——, Diminishing the power of, 647. ——, New Glycerin Immersion, 645. Objective-changer, Zeiss’s, with slide and centering adjustment, 646. Objectives, 1023. and Oculars, Paper for Cleaning the Lenses of, 296. —, Apochromatic, 462. , Double, with a common field of view, 462. , Jaubert’s (L.), 632. —, Method of Intensifying the Resolv- ing Power of Microscope, 1033. —., New Apochromatic, 160. —., New Optical Substance for, 1023. —, Thickness of cover-glass for which unadjustable, are corrected, 1022. Obrzut, A., Giant Cells of Tubercle, 566. Ochrea of Polygonacez, 430. Oculars and Objectives, Paper for Clean- ing the Lenses of, 296. Oerley, L., Criodrilus lacuum, 591. , New Species of Mites, 390. O’Hara, R., “Means of Movement pos- sessed by the Diatomacez, 697. , Motion of Diatoms, 1070. Ohrdruf, T. v., Galls on the Leaf of the Vine, 384, Oidium albicans, 793. Oil, Epidermal Glands containing an Ethereal, 430. * Old and New Microscopical Instru- ments,” 814. Oligocheta, Budding in, 91. Olive, Tuberculosis of, 286. Oliver, F. W., Conduction of Irritation in irritable stigmas, 780. —,, Pollination of Pleurothallis ornatus, 992. Oltmanns, F., Chetomium, 791. , Cultivation of Chetomium, 1041. Onion, Vesicular Vessels of, 262. Ontogeny and Phylogeny of the Polyzoa, 66. Oogenesis in Ascaris, 92. — of Chiton, 940. — of Insects, 70. Oospores, Propagation of Peronospora viti- cola by means of, 789. Opalina, New, 105. Opaque Illuminator, Hilger’s, 462. —— Objects, Mounting, 523, 692. 1113 Opaque Objects, Mounting, on a Micro- meter Background, 692. Opheliacez, Nervous System of, 957. Ophiurids, Cireulatory Apparatus of, 761. » Mergui, 598. Opisthobranchs and Annelids, Pericardial Gland of, 939. Optics, Heath’s ‘Geometrical, 828. Orange-leaf Scab, 129. Orchidexz, Anatomy of the Stem of, 428. ——,, Fertilization of, 482. » Morphology of the Flower of, 114. Orein, Double Staining with, 514. *“ Orderic Vital,’ 321, 667. Organogeny of the Hirudinea, 88. Orientation of the Embryo, Law of, in Insects, 72. Orienting Objects in Paraffin, 168, 510. Orobanchacez, Cleistogamous Flowers of, 431. Orthezia cataphracta, 228. Orthonectida, Natural History of, 95. Orthoptera, Preparing Supra-cesophageal Ganglia of, 1045. Osborn, H. L., 338, 1041. , Osphradium of Crepidula, 376. Osmunda regalis and Blechnum occiden- tale, Structure of Mucilage-cells of, SEE Osphradium of Crepidula, 376. Ostroumoff, A. A., Blastogenesis in the Bryozoa, 67. —, Development of Cyclostomatous Marine Bryozoa, 740. ——., Fresh-water Bryozoa, 378. —, Morphology of Bryozoa, 571. ——.,, Polyzoa of the Black Sea, 68. Otocysts as Organs of Locomotor Orienta- tion, 732. , New Function for Invertebrate, 52. Otoliths, Function of, 938. Oudemans, C. A. J. A., Fungi of Nova Zembla, 130. Outerbridge, G. E., jun., The Limit of Thinness, 160. Ova, Amphibian, Maturation and Fertili- zation of, 564. — and Development of Rotatoria, 94. — Chemical Composition of, 72. ——,, Frog, Segmentation of, in Sublimate Solution, 370. ——,, Insect, Polar Globules in, 576. , Insects’, Interesting processes in the formation of, 574. , Modes of preparing, 670. — of Ants and Wasps, Preparation of, 841. ——— of Lampyris, Photogenic Function of, 576 —— of Mysis Chameleo, Preparing, 841. ——, Teleostean Fish-, Relation of Yolk to Blastoderm in, 43. Ovarian Ovum of the Dipnoi, 44. Ovaries, Inferior, 266. Ovary of Insects, Origin and Significance of Cellular Elements of, 71. Oviatt, B. L., 176. 1114 Oviatt, B. L., Preventing Cartilage-cells shrinking away from Matrix, 326. —, Sectioning fresh Cartilage by partial Imbedding, 338. —, and EH. H. Sargent, 176. —, Nitrite of Amyl for Fine Injections, 341. Ovoid Glands in Asterids, Formation of Genital Organs and Appendages of, 246. Ovuliferous Petals in Caltha palustris, 266. Ovum, Animal, Fertilization and Segmen- _ tation of, 929. —, , Influence of reagents on the Fertilization and Seementation of, 835. —, Frog’s, Nucleus in, 42. ——, Human, 932. of Dipnoi, Structure of, 564. —— of Hirudinea, Development of, 750. of Lamprey, Fertilization of, 932. ——, Ovarian, of the Dipnoi, 44. ——, Selachian, Segmentation of, 43. Oxalic Acid, Formation of, in Vegetation, 108. Oxalis, Fertilization of, 615. Oxygen, Necessity of, for Bacteria, 136. Ozone, Influence of, on Germination, 782. 12% Packard, A. 8., The Podostomaia, 238. Padina, 624. Pagan’s (A.) Growing Slide, 655. Pal, J., Nerve Staining, 850. Palese of Ferns, 275. Palzemonetes varians, 586. Palladin, W., Respiration and Growth, 437. Palm, Cocoa-nut, Germination of, 434. Palm-leaves, Structure and Development of, 778. Palm- stems, Increase i in thickness of, 434. Palps of Myriopods and Spiders, Function of, 223. Paneth, J., Extract of Logwood as a sub- stitute for pure Hematoxylin, 1060. Paoletti’s (H.) Automatic Microtome, 1052. Paper for Cleaning the Lenses of Objec- tives and Oculars, 296. Papilionacee, Swellings on the Roots of, 987. Parablast and Wall of Yolk-sac of the Lizard, 564. Paraffin, "Baskets for the suspension of objects in, 681. ——, Celloidin-, Imbedding, 845. — ’ Imbedding Apparatus, Rydev’s, 678. —— ——, Water-bath for, 845. —, = large objects in, 168. Objects in, 510. —, ” ‘Treatment of Sections which have been imbedded i in, 853. ——, Water-bath Apparatus for, 167. Pararosanilin and Rosanilin, 1059. Parasite, Micro-, of Variola, 452. , New, of the Pock-process belonging to the Sporozoa, 978. — on Firola, 373. INDEX. Parasite, Singular, in Firola, 939. Parasites, Castration of Decapodous Crus- tacea by, 750. —, Crustacean, of Phallusia, 392. in the Blood, 977. —— of Lizards, 105. —, New, of Daphnia, 625. — of Wall-Bee, 225. —, Preparation of Microscopical, 1046. Parasitic Alga of Emys europa, 624. Copepoda, 395. , New Genus of, 238. — Cymothoid, New, 87. — Fungi on the Savin, Larch, and Aspen, 1005. ——_ ~——— Infusoria, New Genus of, 419. Tae Protozoa in Ciona intestinalis, 106, 19. —— Rhizopod, New, 977. —— Sclerotia, Infection through, 627. Parasitism of Agaricus melleus, 790. of Heterodera javanica, 274. of Tuber, 791. Parenchymatous cells, Thickening of the wall of, 426. Parker, G. H., Structure of Ravenelia, 446. Parkes, R., 678. —, Mounting Opaque Objects on 2 Micrometer Background, 692. Parona, C., Parasitic Protozoa in Ciona intestinalis, 106, 419. Parthenogenesis, and Males of Lecanium hesperidum, 383. —, Artificial, 73. , New Case of, 116. Passerini, J., Fungi parasitic on Camellia, 790. ——, G., New Disease in Corn, 447. Patella, Anatomy of, 570. — - vulgata, Anatomy of, 375. » Nephridia and “Liver” of, 941. Pathogenic Bacteria, 286. — Fungi, 628. Pathological Specimens, Preservation of recent, 845. Patouillard, N., Conidial Form of Hyme- nomycetes, 280. ——, Helicobasidium and HExobasidium, 280. ——, New genera of Pyrenomycetes, 282. set W., Eyes of Crustacea, 82. spe Mollusea, 53. —, , Preparing Eyes of Molluscs and Arthropods, 162, 672. Pe, 294. Pear Blight, History and Biology of, 451. Pectens, Morphology of Hye of, 220. Pectinibranch Prosobranchs, Structure of False Gills of, 940. Pedicellina, Life-history of, 67. Pedigree Moth-breeding, 579. Pelagic and Littoral Fauna of North Ger- man Lakes, 733. Annelids of the Gulf of Algiers, 398. —— Fish-embryos, Origin of Pigment- cells which invest the Oil-drop of, 43. INDEX, Pelagic Micro-organisms of Fresh-water Lakes, 373. — Microzoa of the Baltic, 52. —— Objects, Microscopical Technique for small, 505. Pelletan, J., 177, 351, 497, 1023. Pelseneer, P., Morphology of Epipodium of Rhipidoglossate Gastropoda, 941. ——, New Gymnosomatous Pteropod, 217. Peltate Hairs, 265. Penhallow, D. P., Movements of Tendrils, 618. Pennetier, G., 351. — , On the Teaching of Natural History and on Commercial Microscopy, 160. Perényi’s (J. v.) Mikrolektron, for harden- ing, staining, and imbedding, 1053. Peréraslavtzéva, B., Protozoa of the Black Sea, 977. Perforator of Cell-elements and Capillary Tube Slide, 319. Periblast in Teleosteans, Origin of, 371. Pericardial Gland of Opisthobranchs and Annelids, 939. Pericycle, 259. Peridinea, 602. Peridineex, Development of fresh-water, 976. Peridinian, New, 602. Perineural Blood-lacuna of Scorpions, 389. Periodicity in the Phenomena of Bleeding, 436. Peripatus, Development of Cape Species of, 582. of British Guiana, 747. Peristome of Bryum, 275. of Mosses, Optical Properties of, 276. Permanent Preparations on firm media, 691. Permeability to air of Cell-walls, 981. Peronospora infestans, Mode of Destruc- tion of the Potato by, 129. the — umbelliferarum on 789. — viticola, 129. —— ——,, Propagation of, by means of Oospores, 789. Peronospores, Scandinavian, 282. Perrier, E., So-called Heart of Echino- derms; 406. Perruthenie Acid, Employment of, in His- tological Researches, 848. Petalomonas, Food Habit of, 101. Petals and Stipules, 991. , Ovuliferous, in Caltha palustris, 266. , Lurgidity of, 779. Peter, A., Alga parasitic on animals, 123. , Parasitic Alga of Emys europea, 624. Petiole as a Taxonomic Organ, 264. Petit, L., Petiole as a Taxonomic Organ, 264. Petri, R. J., 325, 1066. ——, Modification of Koch’s Plate Method, 498. Petroleum Spirit as a Plant Preservative, 678. Vine, 1115 Petromyzon fluviatilis, Development of, 212. Peyer, A., 528, 1066. Peyrou, J., Hourly Variations in the Action of Chlorophyll, 982. “Peziza, 1003. Specimens, Staining, 688. Pfeffer, W., 294. ——, Absorption of Anilin Pigments by living Vegetable Cells, 512. —, of Colouring Matters by Plants, 172. Pfeifer’s (A.) Embryograph, 148. —, Revolving Automatic Microtome, 168. Pfeiffer, L., New Parasite of the Pock- process belonging to the Sporozoa, 978. Pfitzer, E., Morphology of the Flower of Orchidee, 114. Phalangida, Development of, 390. Phalloidee, Saccharine Substances in, 788. Phalloidei, 1003. Phallusia, Crustacean Parasites of, 392. Phanerogamia, Anatomy and Physiology of. See Contents, xxii. Pharmacy, The Microscope in, 352. Philibert, M., Fructification of Grimmia Hartmanni, 998. ——, Peristome of Bryum, 275. “Philosophical Instrument,” Wanted a Definition of, 1040. Phloroglucin, Demonstration of, 689. Test for Lignin, 172. ——, The Resorcin derivative, 504. Phosphorescence, 938. of Geophilus, 230. Phosphorescent Bacteria, Certain Proper- ties of, 1009. —— Fungus, 789. Photogenic Function of Ova of Lampyris, 576. Photographic Apparatus for the Micro- scope, 473. Photographing Series of Sections, 1027. Photography of Coloured Preparations, 689. Photo-Micro-Camera,” Rafter’s “ Profes- sional, 822. Photomicrograph versus Microphotograph, 665. Photomicrographic Apparatus, shank’s Reversible, 819. Camera for the Simple or Compound Microscope, 662. , Nelson’s, 661. — ——, Nelson and Curties’s, 1025. — Focusing-screen, Nelson’s, 1028. Photomicrographs, Dr. H. van Heurck’s, 182, 1068. — of Dr. Van Heurck and Dr. P. Fran- cotte, 665. — of Amphipleura pellucida, 357. — of Flagellated Protozoa in the Blood, 358. Photomicrography,’ Bousfield’s ‘Guide to the Science of, 488. Crook- 1116 Photomicrography, —_Ellis’s Arrangement for, 1028. —, Focusing in, 662. —, Remarks on, 827. See Contents, xxxXvi. with a Sliding Diaphragm, 529. with High Powers, 664. Photo-Microscopy, 827. Phrynus, Remarks on, and Nervous Sys- tem of Insects and Spiders, 223. Phycochromacee, Sphzrogonium, a new genus of, 131. Phycotheca Italiana, 278. —— universalis, 124. Phylogeny and Ontogeny of the Polyzoa, 66 Focusing — of Arachnida, 949. of Bopyride, 587. Physician’s Microscope, Grunow’s, 159, 287. Physiological Role of Vine Leaves, 784. Phytophthora infestans, Structure and Life-History of, 447. : Phytopti, Anatomy and Classification of, 389. Phytoptocecidia, 274. Piccone, A., Birds as Disseminators of Seeds, 271. —, Dissemination of Alge by Fish, 787. Pichi, P., Histology of Vine-leaves, 778. , Peronospora umbelliferarum on the Vine, 789. Picrocarmine, New method for making, 848. Pigment Cells, Origin of, which invest the Oil-drop of Pelagic Fish-embryos, 43. ——, Fungus, Fluorescence of, 628. Pigments, Enterochlorophyll and Allied, 214. Pillischer’s (M.) Kosmos Microscope, 182. Pilularia, 275. Pinckney, E., 177. , slide-Index, 856, Pirotta, R., Crystalloids in Pithecocte- nium clematidium, 108. , J. R., and L. Marcatili, Laticiferous Vessels, 110. , Laticiferous Vessels and Assimi- lating System, 984. Pitcher Plants, Preparing the Epidermal Tissues of, 164. Pitchers of Sarracenia, 612. Pith of Conifer, Interruption in, 110. Pithecoctenium clematideum, Crystalloids in, 108. Planaria Theringii, 963. Planarians, Land, 596, Planispirina, 977. Planta, De, Chemical composition of certain Nectars, 425. Plants, Absorption of Colouring Matters by, 172. in Alcohol, Preparation, 675. Plasmolysed Cells, Growth of, 254. Plate, L., Ectoparasitic Rotifers from the Bay of Naples, 757. INDEX. Plateau, F., Function of Palps of Myriopods and Spiders, 223. , Light-perception by Myriopods, 76. Platner, G., Theory of Cell-division, 935. Plaut, H. C., 177. , Method for Preservation and further Cultivation of Gelatin Cultures, 497. —,, Oidium albicans, 793. Pleurothallis ornatus, Pollination of, 992. Plowright, C. B., Hetercecious Uredines, 1004. Plumbaginez, Structure and Geographical Distribution of, 428. Plumulariide, Genera of, 248. Pock-process, New Parasite of, belonging to Sporozoa, 978. “Potta, P., Fossil Caleareous Elements of Alcyonaria and Holothurioida, 215. Podosphera minor, Howe, and Micro- sphera fulvofulera, Cooke, Identity of, 1002. Podostomata, 238. Poels, J., and W. Nolen, Contagium of Lung-Disease, 135. Poirier, J., The Diplostomide, 93. Poisoning and Anesthesia of Plants, 785. Poisonous Plants to Fish, 438. ~ principles of Hymenomycetous Fungi, 127. Polar Bodies and Theory of Heredity, 934. Globules in Insect Ova, 576. in Isopoda, 952. Polariscope, Lighton’s Analysing Dia- phragm for, 812. ——, Simple, 162. ——,, single, for the Toy Microscope, 661. Polarizing Prism, Ahrens’s, 152. Projection - Microscope, Electric, 1021. Poli, A., 667, 830. Pollen, ‘‘ Crazy,” of the Bell-wort, 781. —— of Iris tuberosa, 114. , Resistance of, to External Influences, 613. Pollen-grains, Amyloid Corpuscles in, 991. , Growth of, 435. , Inversion of Sugar by, 273. —— -—.,, Mimetie, 431. —— -——,, Vitality of, 269. Pollen-tubes, Entrance of, into the con- ducting Tissue, 614. Pollens, Mounting, 174. Pollination, Hybrid-, 269, —— of Flowers, 434. — of Pleurothallis ornatus, 992. Polycheta, Australian, 399, ——.,, Histology of Nervous System of, 954, ——, Muscular Fibres of, 396. —— of Dinard, 588. Polycystis, 286. Polygonacez, Ochrea of, 430. Polygonum, Stipular Sheath of, 779. Polynoe Grubiana and Hermione hystrix, Histology of the Integument and Sensory Appendages of, 752. Polyparium ambulans, 969. and Tubulavia, 968. Newton’s __ - INDEX. Polypes, Regeneration of, 967. turned outside in, 95. Polyplacophora, ‘ Challenger,’ 219. Polysiphonia, Morphology of, 278. Polystichum angulare var. pulcherrimum, Wills, Apospory in, 622. Polyzoa, Killing, 674. —. See Contents, xiii. Pommer, G., Bacillus Brassicz, 450. Porceliio scaber, Development of, 393. ‘Porcupine’ Expedition, Isopuda of, 236. Pores in Diatom-valves, 1000. —— in Sphagnacex, Formation of, 624. of the Libriform Tissue, 426. Porifera. See Contents, xx. Positively geotropie Shoots of Cordyline australis, 778. —— -embryonal Development of Muscide, 743. Post-embryonic Development of Telphusa fluviatilis, 392. Potato, Diseased, 274. , Mode of Destruction of, by Pero- nospora infestans, 129. Potonié, H., Vascular Bundles of Zea Mays, 109. Potter, M. C., Epiclemmydia lusitanica, a new species of Alga, 278. Pouchet, C., 325. —, G., Gymnodinium polyphemus, 101. ——,, Peridinea, 602. — and J. de Guerne, Protozoa as of Sardines, 603. Poulsen, 8. V., and J. C. Holm, Detection of “wild yeast” in low yeast, 132. —, V. A., Anatomical Studies on Mayaca, 781. Poulsen’s Crystals, 425. Poulton, E. B., Cause and Extent of Colour-relation between Lepidopterous Pupe and surrounding surtaces, 382. ——,, Colour of Pupe, 74. —, Larva of Smerinthus and its Food- plants, 226. —, Lepidopterous Larve, Pupx, &c., 382, 947. ——, Protective Value of Colour and Markings in Insects, 946. Power, Measurement of, 1032. Powell's (T.) Microscope and Appendages, 462. Practical Zoology, 213. Prehistoric Plants, 120. Preserving cultivations made by Koch’s plate method, 832. President’s Address, 185, 668. Preyer, W., Movements of Star-fishes, 406, 758. Priapulide, Anatomy of, 592. ——, Excretory and Generative Organs of, 91 from Cape Horn, 241. Prillieux, E., Propagation of Peronospora viticola by means of Oospores, 789. Primitive Insects, 75. Prince, E. E., Significance of the Yolk in Osseous Fishes, 730. BLY Pringsheim, N., Assumed Decomposition of Carbonic Acid by Chlorophyll, 118. —,, Conditions of Assimilation, 992. ——, Decomposition of Carbonic Acid by Chlorophyll outside the plant, 118. ——, Engelmaun’s Bacterium-method, 166, 506. Prism, Ahrens’s Polarizing, 152. for Drawing, 650. Proceedings of the Society. See Con- tents, xliv. “ Professional Photo-Micro-Camera,” Raf- ter’s, 822. Projection Apparatus, Universal, for Mine- ralogical Purposes, 459. Projection-Lamp for Microscopie Pur- poses, Selenka’s Electric, 1015. Projection-Microscope, Newton’s Electric Polarizing, 1021. Prolification in the Mycelium of Fungi, 788. of Caulerpa, 124. Propagation of Peronospora viticola by means of Oospores, 789. Prosobranchiata, German, Renal Organs of, 940. Prosobranchiate Gastropoda, Structure of Branchia of, 939. Prosobranchs, Nervous System in Tenio- glossate, 374. —— Pectinibranch, Structure of False Gills of, 940. ——, Renal Organs of, 569. , Typical Nervous System of, 218. Protective Value of Colour and Markings in Insects, 946. Proteids in the Seeds, Changes in, which accompany Germination, 619. of the Seeds of Abrus precatorius, 773. Proteinaceous bodies in Epiphyllum, 983. Prothallium and Germ-plants of Lycopo- dium inundatum, 621. Prothoracic Appendages of Lepidoptera, 381. Protonema of Moss resembling Chroolepus, 623. — of Mosses, Relationship of the Chloro- phyllous Protophyta to, 130. Protophyta. See Contents, xxxii. Protoplasm, 420. , Chemical Reactions of, 423. —,, Destruction of the Molecular Strue- ture of, 106. ——,, Germinal, Continuity of, 561. ——, Living, Method for subjecting, to the action of different liquids, 669. —, Morphological and Chemical Com- position of, 979. of a recently-killed animal, Fermen- tation by, 731. —— of Infusoria, Reticular Structure of, 414. Prototracheata. See Contents, xv. Protoventuria, a new genus of Pyreno- mycetes, 282. Protozoa, New Method of Mounting, in Balsam, 505. 1118 Protozoa. See Contents, xxi. Prouho, H., Development of Generative Apparatus of Echinids, 245. , Organization of Echinoidea, 406. Prove, O., Micrococcus ochroleucus, 1008. Prudden, T. M., Bacteria in Ice, 455. Prus, —., 177. Pscheidl, W., 161. , Determination of the Focal Length of a Concave Lens by the compound Microscope, 321. Pseudoscorpions, Structure of, 389. Psorosperms, 605. Pteropod, New Gymnosomatous, 217. Ptychogaster, 1003. Pulmonata, Genital Organs of, Method of Studying Development of, 163. —,, Stylommatophorous, Development of Genital Apparatus of, 58. Pulmonate Mollusca, Function of the Nephridium of, and of the Malpighian Tubes of Insects, 52. — —, Nephridium of, and Malpighian Tubes of Insects, Method of obtaining Uric Acid Crystals from, 166. Pumphrey, W., The Microscope in the Lecture- and Clagss-room, 668. Pupe, Colour of, 74. — of Simulide, Tracheal Gills of, 227. Pyrenomycetes, Development of, 281. ——, New genera of, 282. ——., Protoventuria, a new genus of, 282. Pyritized Diatoms, 279. Pyrofuscin, Action of, on Fungi, 1001. Pyrola secunda, Shoots of, 611. Pythium, New, 445. Q. Quartz, Examining Fluid-cavities in, 526. Queen & Co. (J. M.), 338. —, Needle-holder, 528. Quekett-Club-Man, 831, 1040. Quelch, J. J., Reef-corals of the ‘ Chal- lenger,’ 249. Quick Method of mounting Dry Objects, 694. Quimby, B. F., 845, 1048. , Lamp-shade, 463. ——,, Slide-carrier, 161. R. Rabenhorst’s Crptogamic Flora of Ger- many (Fungi), 130. — — — — (Musci), 277. — — — — (Vascular Crypto- gams), 785. Rabl, C., Preparation of Amphibian Em- bryos, 327. Radial Swinging Tail-piece, Jones’s, 297. Symmetry of Echinoids, 762. Radiolaria, ‘Challenger,’ 603. Radiolarians, Colonial, 102. INDEX, Radlkofer, L., Plants Poisonous to Fish, 438. , Transparent Dots in Leaves, espe- cially of Connaracez, 430. Rafter, G. W., 351, 857. ——, “ Professional Photo-Micro-Camera,” 822. Raillet, A., Sarcoptes levis, 585. Rain and Dew, Adaption of Plants to, 995. Ranvier, L., Cup-shaped Cells, 566. , Employment of Perruthenic Acid in Histological Researches, 848. —., Mode of examining Mucous Mem- branes, 670. ——, Preparing the Liver, 502. |, Raphides, Biological Import of, 983. in Typha, 607. Raphides-cells in the Fruit of Vanilla, 268. Rapid Method of Dry Mounting, 520. Raschke, W., Anatomy and Histology of Culex nemorosus, 383. Rathbun, R., Parasitic Copepoda, 395. Rauber, A., Showing Mitosis in Brain of Tadpole, 163. Rauff, H., Machine for cutting Rock- sections, 509. Raunkiaer, C., Crystalloids in Stylidium and Aischynanthus, 774. Ravenelia, Structure of, 446. Rawitz, B., Central Nervous System of Acephalous Mollusca, 736. ——, Green Gland of the Crayfish, 748. —, Preparing the Central Nervous - System of Acephala, 840. Razors, To Sharpen, 176. Reaction, New Micro-chemical, for Tan- nin, 695. Reactions, Micro-chemical, based on the formation of Crystals, 695. , Two new Sugar, 344. Reagent, New, for Coniferin, 165. Reagents for clearing Celloidin Sections for Balsam Mounting, 519. , Influence of, on the Fertilization and Segmentation of the Animal Ovum, 835. Receptacles for Reserve- materials in Lichens, 279. Reciprocal Positions of Object-points, De- termining, 171. Reconstructing Small Microscopic Objects, Method for, 511. Redding, T. B., 687. Reef-corals of the ‘ Challenger,’ 249. Reeves’ (J. C.) Thin Sections, Elegant Preparations, 177. Reeves, J. E., 338, 512. Refraction, Double, and Swelling of Cell- walls, 981. ——., Indices of, and Axial Angle of Mine- rals, Microscopic Measurement, 468. —, Method of determining the index of, when the refracting angle is large, 665. Refractive Index, Apparatus for testing, 814. INDEX. Refractive Index, High, Experiments with Media of, 520. — Indices of Microscopic Minerals, Measurement by Total Reflection, 659. Refractometer, Bertrand’s, 469. Regeneration of Polypes, 967. Reichel, L., Byssus Gland of Lamelli- branchs, 942. Reichenbach, H., Development of the Crayfish, 79. ——, Preparation of the Embryo of the Fresh-water Crayfish, 329. Reichert’s (C.) improved Mechanical Stage, 809. — Object-holder, Modification of, 846. small Rivet’s Microtome, 847. Reinhard, W., Anatomy and Systematic Position of Echinoderes, 964. at Development of Porcellio scaber, 3 ——, Fresh-water Bryozoa, 378. Reinke, J., Absorption-bands, 618. —, Effect of Sunlight on Etiolated Seed- lings, 117. —, Production of Chlorophyll in an objective spectrum, 425. Reinsch, P. F., Action of Pyrofuscin on Fungi, 1001. —, Acanthococcus, 131. ——, Gynandrous Vaucheria, 1000. Relations of Groups of Arthropoda, 573. Relationship and Relative Age of Noctus and Geometre, 75. — of the Anatomical Structure of Leaves to their Origin, 264. : — of the Chlorophyllous Protophyta to the Protonema of Mosses, 130. — of Myriopods, 384. Renal Organs of German Prosobranchiata, 840. —— —— of Prosobranchs, 569. Renard, A., and C. Klement, Micro- chemical Reactions based on the forma- tion of Crystals, 695. Rendle, A. B., and S. H. Vines, Vesi- cular Vessels of the Onion, 262. Repiakhoff, W., Dinophilus gyrociliatus, 965. Reproduction and Sex, Theory of, 728. — ina Fossil Diatom, 443. —— of Euglypha, 976. of Parts of Plants, 994. Reproductive and Excretory Systems of Bilharzia, 403. — Elements of Spongida, 601. —— Organs in Gasteropods, Development of, 735. —— —,, Male, of Cyprida, Preparation of, 841. —— —— of Hybrids, 268. of Muscinex, 275. Reserve-materials, Receptacles for, in Lichens, 279. Resolution of 200,000 lines to the inch, 665. Resolving Power of Microscope Objectives, Method of Intensifying, 1033. 1119 Resorcin derivative Phloroglucin, The, 504. Respiration and Growth, 437. —— in Myriopods, Mechanism of, 230, 385 —— in Tunicata, New Organ of, 377. ——,, Intramolecular, 619. ,——_, of Plants, 437. Respiratory Organ of Scutigerids, 231. Reticular Structure of Protoplasm of In- fusoria, 414. Reticulated Structure of Protozoa, 414. Retina, Preparation of the, 839. —, Staining, by Weigert’s Method, 339. Revaz, L., and P. Viala, “ Black-rot” of the Vine, 129. Reynolds, R. W., 691. Rhipidoglossate Gastropoda, Morphology of Epipodium of, 941. Rhizocarps, Fossil, 122. Rhizoctonia, 446. Rhizodendron, 623. Rhizomes and Seeds, Latent Vitality of, 115. Rhizomorpha, Amphibious Life in, 53. Rhizopod, New Parasitic, 977. Rhizopod-like Digestive Organs in Carni- vorous Plants, 112. Rhizopoda, Fresh-water, of N.S. Wales, IWIZC Rhizopods, Digestive Process in some, 251. Rhopalomyces, 446. Rhyncosporex, Spike-like Partial Inflores- cence of, 779. Ribbert, Destruction of Pathogenic Schizo- mycetes in the organism, 452. Richard, O. J., Hymenolichenes, 444. Richter, P., Urococcus, Coccochloris, and Polycystis, 286. —,, W., Continuity of Germinal Proto- plasm, 561. Richter and Hauck’s Phycotheca uni- versalis, 124. Ridley, S. O., Characters of the Genus Lophopus, 742. Riedel, O., and G. Wolffhiigel, Bacteria in Water, 454. Riefstahl, E., Shells of Cephalopoda, 569. Rimming Microscopical Preparations, Neat Method of, 523. Ring, Formation of Annual, and Growth in Thickness, 776. Ripening of Seeds, 435. Rittinghaus, P., Entrance of Pollen-tubes in the conducting Tissue, 614. ——,, Resistance of Pollen to External In- fluences, 613. Ritzema Bos, T., Tylenchus devastatrix, 753. Roberts, E., Cypris and Melicerta, 86. Roboz, Z. v., Structure of Gregarines, 769. Rocellin, 177. Rochester Magic Lantern and Projection Microscope, 804. Rock-sections, Machines for cutting, 509. Rocks, Diatomaceous, Breaking up of, 1047. 1120 Rockwood, E. W., and W. O. Atwater, Loss of Nitrogen by Plants during Ger- mination and Growth, 270. Roedel, H., Minimum Temperature con- sistent with Life, 52. Roeser, P., and P. Gourret, Protozoa of Marseilles, 415. Reestelie, Gymnosporangia and their, 445. Rogers, W. A., 497, 661, 667. ——,, Stage Micrometer, 819. , “The Microscope as a factor in the establishment of a constant of nature,” 1034. and G. M. Bond, Rogers-Bond Uni- versal Comparator, 639. Rohde, E., Histology of Nervous System of _ Polycheeta, 954. Rohon, J. V., and K. A. von Zittel, Cono- donts, 400. Rohrbeck, H., 320, 834. , Drying Apparatus for the Labora- tory, 525. Roll, —., Classification of Sphagnacee, 123. Romegialli, A., Acetous Fermentation, 132. Root and Stem, Preparing Sections of, 164. of Hymenophyllacez, 623. of Rosaceee, Super-endodermal Net- work in, 986. — of the Vine, Fungus of, 130. ——, Second Primary Wood of, 775. ——,, Terminal Growth of, in Nymphzacezx, 271. Root-tubers of Leguminose, 987. Rootlets and Lateral Roots, Origin of, in Rubiacez, Violacex, and Apocynacez, 777. , Formation of, and position of Buds in the Binary Roots of Phanerogams, 776. Roots, Adventitious, 610. , Aerial, of Sonneratia, 111. , Binary, of Phanerogams, Formation of Rootlets and position of Buds in, 776. , Formation of, in Austral Conifere, 986. —, Lateral, and Rootlets, Origin of, in Rubiacez, Violacexz, and Apocynacez, 777. —, , in Dicotyledons, Origin and Development of, 110. - , in Leguminose and Cucur- bitaceze, Origin of, 429. —, , Origin of, 262. of Crucifersee, Network of Cells sur- rounding the Endoderm in, 775. of Leguminose, Tubercular Swellings on, 788. —— ——,, Tubercles on, 610. — —, Tubers on, 429. of Papilionacez, Swellings on, 987. of the Alder and Elzagnacex, Swell- ings on, 611. Rosa, D., Criodrilus, 592. Rosacese, Super-endodermal Network in the Root of, 986. Rosanilin and Pararosanilin, 1059. INDEX. Rosanilin Nitrate for Goblet and Mucous Cells, 172. Roscoe, H., Limit of Visibility, 827. Roscoft, Nemerteans of, 94. Rose, Asteroma of, 128. Rose-laurel, Structure and Metamorphosis of the Aspidiotus of, 76. -tinted Growth on Fresh Water, 1007. Rosen, F., New Section of Chytridium, 1002. Rosenberg, P., 687. Rosenvinge, L. K., Cell-nuclei in the Hymenomycetes, 126. , Morphology of Polysiphonia, 278. Ross, H., Formation of Cork in the Stem of Plants with few or no leaves. 427. ——, W. A., New Optical Substance for Objectives of Microscopes, &e., 1023. Rostafinski, J., Spherogonium, a new genus of Phycochromacez, 131. Rostrup, E., Diseases caused by Fungi, 128. — , —— of Cultivated Plants, 128. ——, Fungi parasitic on Conifers, 284. , Rhizoctonia, 446. Rotation in Nitella, 277. of Tendrils, 618. Rotatoria, Ova and Development of, 94. , Preparing Eggs of, 342. ——, Studies on, 243. Rotifer, New, 966. Rotifera, 405. — , Key to, 405. ——, Twelve New Species of, 361.- ——, Twenty-four New Species of, 1. ——, ——-—— more New Species of, 861. Rotifers, Desiccation of, 179. —, KEctoparasitic, from the Bay of Naples, 757. Rouget, C., Death of Muscles, 372. Roule, L., Formation of Germinal Layers in Dasychone lucullana, 955. , Histological Peculiarities mellibranchs, 60. Roux, E., 827. — , G., Technical Method of Diagnosing Gonococci, 507. ——, W., Mechanism of Development, 368. ——, Mycelites ossifragus—a Fungus in Bone, 789. Royal Microscopical Society of the Sand- wich Islands, 830. Royston-Pigott, G. W., 161, 322, 492, 667, 830, 1041. Rozsahegyi, A. v., Cultivation of Bacteria on Coloured Nutrient Media, 1044. Rubiacez, Origin of Rootlets and Lateral Roots in, 777. Riiffert, F. W., 352. Rulings, Fasoldt’s, 1038. Ruppia rostellata and Zannichellia poly- carpa, Tubercles on, produced by Te- tramyxa parasitica, 793. Rutherford’s ‘((W.) Combined Ice and Ether-spray Freezing Microtome, 508. Ryder, J. A., Automatic Microtome, 682, of La- INDEX. Ryder, J. A., Origin of Pigment-cells which invest the Oil-drop of Pelagic Fish-embryos, 43. , Paraffin Imbedding Apparatus, 678. —,, Why do certain Fish-ova float ? 731. Rywosch, D., Sexual Characters and Gene- rative Organs of Microstomida, 404. S. S., R. J., Staining Fluid, 341. Se. L.*., 322. Saccardo, P. A., Spheropsides, Melan- coniez, and Hyphomycetes, 446. Saccharine Substances in the Phalloidex, 788. Sachs, J., Action of the Ultra-violet Rays in the Formation of Flowers, 617. ——, Chlorosis in Plants, 437. — , Germination of the Cocoa-nut Palm, 434. , Vegetable Physiology, 996. Sadebeck, R., New Pythium, 445. St. Gheorghieff, Prof., Structure of Cheno- podiaceze, 987. Saint-Joseph, —., Polychzta of Dinard, 588. Saint-Loup, R., Anatomy of Schizonemer- tini, 404. Salensky, W., Primitive form of Metazoa, 46 Salicine, Preparing Crystals of, 507, 1048. Saliconia herbacea, Seedlings of, 776. Salivary Glands of Cephalopoda, Anatomy and Histology of, 734. , Thoracic, homologous with Nephridia, 73. Salpa-chain, The, 221. Sandford, E., Strength of Snails, 60. Sandwich Islands, Royal Microscopical Society of, 830. Sansevieria, Aquiferous Tissue in the Leaves of, 984. Sap, Ascent of, 435. —, Cell-, Acidity of, 606. — , Influence of Cold on the Movements of, 273. Saprolegnies, Formation and Liberation of Zoospores in, 444. Sarasin, P. and F., Development of Ich- thyophis glutinosa, 731. Sareodina, New Form of, 254. Sarcoptes levis, 585. Sardines, Protozoa as food of, 603. Sargent, E: H., and B. L. Oviatt, 176. — —, Nitrite of Amy] for Fine In- jections, 341. Sarracenia, Pitchers of, 612. Sars, G. O., Australian Cladocera, 953. ——., Crustacea of the Norwegian North Sea Expedition, 238. Sasaki, C., Life-History of Ugimya seri- caria, 579. Satterthwaite, T. E., 696. Saupe, A., Anatomical Structure of the wood of Leguminose, 986. Savastano, L., Bacterium of rotten Grapes, 451. 1121 Savastano, L., Gummosis, 785. ——, Parasitism of Agaricus melleus, 790. —., Tuberculosis of the Olive, 286. Savin, Larch, and Aspen, Fungi parasitic on, 1005. Scab, Orange-leaf, 129. Scales of Lepidoptera, 226. Scandinavian Alge, 278. — Alpine Plants, Fertilization of, 615. Peronosporex, Ustilaginez, and Ure- dinezx, 282. oe hae and Gastropoda, ‘ Challenger,’ Scharif R., Ctenodrilus parvulus, 751. , Intra- -ovarian Egg in Osseous Fishes, 21 ie 933. Schauinsland, H., Anatomy of Priapulide, 592. , Excretory and Generative Organs of Priapulide, 91. Schenk, Solid Medium for the Culture of Micro-organisms, 832. Schiefferdecker, P., Apparatus for Mark- ing Microscopic Objects, 468. , Fine-Adjustment Screw, 150. —, Method for isolating Epithelial Cells, 502. ——,, Preparation of the Retina, 839. Schiffner, V., New Hepatice, 123. Schimkiewitsch, W., Affinities of Arach- nida, 77. ——., Development of Spiders, 386. —,, Non-nucleated Blastoderm-cells, 231. Schistostega osmundacea, Glistening Ap- paratus of, 623. Schizomycetes, Pathogenic, in the organ- ism, Destruction of, 452. Schizonemertini, Anatomy of, 404. Schizopods, Embryology of, 235. Schlagdenhauffen, F., and E. Heckel, Secretion of Araucaria, 984. Schlumberger, C., Adelosina, 254. ——, Planispirina, 977. Schmidt, F., Graffilla Brauni, 963. Schneider, A., Digestive Tract of Arthro- pods, and particularly of Insects, 378. ——, Structure of Alimentary Canal, 944. —, R., Amphibious Life in Bhizomor- pha, 53. —. Pale variety of Asellus aquaticus, 952. Schnetzler, J. B., Diseased Potato, 274. , Fungus of the Root of the Vine, 130. ——,, Rose-tinted Growth on Fresh Water, 1007. Schober, A., Growth of Hairs on Etiolated Organs, 113. Scholtz, M., Influence of Stretching on the Growth of Plants, 993. Schonland, S., Imbedding Objects for the Rocking Microtome, 680. Schott’s 3 (G. ) Microscopes, 148, 804. Schottelius, M., Some Novelties in Bac- teriological Apparatus, 1042. — and A. Lydtin, Swine Fever, 135. Schroder, H., Ahrens’s Polarizing Prism, 152. 1122 Schréder, H., Note on the Correction of the Secondary spectrum, 161. Schroeder’s New Lieberkihns, 661. Schrodt, J., Anatomy of the Sporangia of Ferns, 622. Schroeter, J., Cohn’s Cryptogamic Flora of Silesia (Fungi), 1005. Schuberg, A., Bursaria truncatella, 100. Schulgin, —., and A. Kowalevsky, Embry- ology of the Scorpion, 78. Schill, P., 809. Schultze, F. E., Methods for killing Inver- tebrata, 834. ——,, O., Maturation and Fertilization of Amphibian Ova, 564. Schulze, A., 296, 1023. , E., Aquarium Microscope, 1010. ——, Cholin in Seedlings, 774. —— and E. Steiger, New nitrogenous con- stituent of the Lupin, 425. —,, F. E., 331. Schulzeria, a new genus of Hymenomy- cetes, 125. Schunk, H., Chemistry of Chlorophyll, 606. Schwalbe,G., Preparing Cochlea of Guinea- pig, 840. Schwarz, F., Chemical Reactions of Proto- plasm, 423. —, Morphological and Chemical Compo- sition of Protoplasm, 979. Schwendener, S., Ascent of Sap, 435. , Swelling and Double Refraction of Cell-walls, 981. ——, Theory of Twining, 118. — and C. Nageli’s, ‘ The Microscope in Theory and Practice,’ 1039. Schwendener’s Lichen-theory, 444. Science Directory, 161. —— in 1886, 161. Scientific Directory, 325. Sclater, W. L., Peripatus of British Guiana, 747. Sclerotia, Formation of Starch in, 280. , Infection through Parasitic, 627. Scolex polymorphus, 93. Scolopendrella, Morphology of, 77. Scolopendride, Stigmata of, 386. Scorpion, Embryology of, 78. Scorpions, Perineural Blood-lacuna of, 389. , Reported Suicide of, 388. Scribner, F. L., Orange-leaf Scab, 129. , L., and P. Viala, New Disease in Vines, 1005. Scudder, 8. H., Fossil Insects, 582. Scutellaria galericulata, Contrivance for dispersing the Fruit of, 267. Scutigeride, Respiratory Organ of, 231. Scyphidia and Dinophysis, On new species of, 558. Scyphomedusee, New, 971. Scytalia pertusa and Isoraphinia texta,249. Sea-Urehins, Distribution of, 246. Seaman, W. H., “ Berry’s Hard Finish ” as a Cement and Mounting Medium, 1064. Secretion of Araucaria, 984. , Preparing the Amphibian Egg, 671. INDEX. Secretory Canals, Formation of Tyloses in interior of, 985. — Channels, Relation of, to Laticiferous Vessels, 609. Section-lifters, 1063. —— -series and a new method for making Wax Modelling-plates, 171. — -smoother, Eixtemporized, 686. —— - ——, Mall’s, 685. en ——, Modification of the Naples, Sectioning fresh Cartilage by partial Im- bedding, 338. Sections, Celloidin, Medium for clearing up, 519. ——, ——, Reagents for clearing, for Balsam Mounting, 519. —,, Fixing, 523, 853. — of delicate Vegetable Structures, Cutting, 338. —— of Sponges, On Cutting, and other similar structures with soft and hard tissues, 200. —— of Stem and Root, Preparing, 164. ——, Photographing Series of, 1027. —— prepared by Golgi’s Method, Mount- ing, 520. ——, Serial, imbedded in paraffin by Weigert’s Method, Method for treating, 342. -——, Thin, 177. ——, Treatment of, which have been im- bedded in Paraffin, 853. Sedgwick, A., Development of Cape Spe- cies of Peripatus, 582. Seedlings, Etiolated, Effect of Sunlight on, 117. ——, Cholin in, 774. ——, Forms of, and the causes to which they are due, 991. —— of Salicornia herbacea, 776. Seeds and Rhizomes, Latent Vitality of, 115. ——, Birds as Disseminators of, 271. , Changes in Proteids in, which ac- company Germination, 619. tor Microscopie Objects, 352. —— of Abrus precatorius, Proteids of, 773. —— of Aldrovanda, 114. —— of Aquatic Plants, Desiccation of, 271. ——,, Ripening of, 435. ——, Weinzierl’s Simple Microscope for the Examination of, 806. Segmental Duct, Origin of, 369. Segmentation and Fertilization of Animal — Ovum, 929. — —— of the Animal Ovum, In- fluence of reagents on, 835. — of Frog Ova in Sublimate Solution, 370. “ of Selachian Ovum, 43. Sehroén, —. v., Tubercle Bacilli, 286. Selachian Ovum, Segmentation of, 43. Selection, Importance of Sexual Repro- duction for the Theory of, 45. Selenka, E., 661. INDEX. Selenka, E., Electric Projection-Lamp for Microscopic Purposes, 1015. Semi-Microscopical Objects, Method for Exhibiting, 524. Semon, R., Synaptide of the Mediter- ranean, 764. ° Semper, C., Development of Reproductive Organs in Gasteropods, 735. Senecio Cineraria, Endoderm of, 426. Senses of Insects, 577. Sensitiveness of Spirogyra to shock, 999. Sensory Appendages and Integument of Hermione hystrix and Polynoe Grubiana, Histology of, 752. Organ, New, in Lamellibranchiata, 942. Organs of Sponges, Synocils, 412. of Turbellaria, 962. —— ——,, Special, of Myriopods, 229. Sestini, F., 528. Severino, P., Colouring Matter of Aceras anthropophora, 256. Sex and Reproduction, Theory of, 728. Sexual Characters and Generative Organs of Microstomida, 404. — Generation of Chermes, 948. —— Reproduction, Importance of, for the Theory of Selection, 45. Sexuality, Theory of, 973. Seynes, J. de, Endogenous Production of Spores, 279. , Peziza, 1003. Sharpey’s Fibres, Demonstrating, 838. Sheath, Nuclear, 259. ——, Stipular, of Polygonum, 779. Sheldon, L., Observations on Ascidians, 942, Shell, Molluscan, Growth of, 374. — of Hermit-crab, 952. Shells of Brachiopoda, Cecal Processes of, 573. — of Cephalopoda, 569. Sherborn, C. D., and T. Rupert Jones, Remarks on the Foraminifera, with especial reference to their Variability of Form, illustrated by the Cristellarians. Part IT., 545. Shipley, A. E., Development of Petro- myzon fluviatilis, 212. Shoots of Pyrola secunda, 611. , Positively geotropic, of Cordyline australis, 778. Sieve-tubes, 984. Significance of the Yolk in Osseous Fishes, 730. Silesia, Cohn’s (Fungi), 1005. Silicified Cells in Calathea, 982. Silicon Fluoride, Preparing Crystals of, 677. Silver Crystals, Preparing, 676. —, Separation of, by active Albumin, 250: Silvering, Physiological, of Elastic Tissues, 839. Cryptogamic Flora of Simmonds, M., and E. Fraenkel, 331. Simulide, Tracheal Gills of Pups of, 227. 1123 Siphoneee, 998. , Growth of Cell-wall and other phe- nomena in, 999. Siphonophora, Morphology of, 970. —-, Structure and Development of, 9 Siphonostoma diplochaitos and Chlorema Dujardini, 753. Slack, H. J., 352, 1066. Slater, Tannin in Insects, 945. Slide Cabinet, Griffith’s Pocket, 694. , James’s Improved, 694. ——, Capillary Tube, and Perforator of Cell-elements, 319. —, Device for centering and holding, upon the turntable, 694. —— for testing Astigmatism of the Eye, 158. ——, Opaque Wood, 344. ——., Pagan’s Growing, 655. Slide-carrier, Hildebrand’s, 154. » Quimby’s (B. T.), 161. —— - Index, 856. Slides, Haswell’s Circular, for large Series of Sections, 297. Smerinthus, Larva of, and its Food-plants, 226. Smirnow’s (A.) Microstat, 651. Smith, A. P., Identification of Alkaloids and other Crystalline Bodies by the Microscope, 527. —, H. L., Directions for using Prof. H. L. Smith’s High Refractive Mounting Media, 1063, , New preparation of the medium of high index (2-4) and note on Liquid- ambar, 522. —_, J. L., 338. » T., 325, 669. Snails, Strength of, 60. Soda, Carbonate of, Carmine solution made with, 847. Soil, Bacteria in, 454. —, Influence of, on the Vegetation on the summits of the Alps, 784. ——,, Micro-organisms of, 453. Soldanha, L. de, Anatomical Peculiarities of Echites peltata, 609. Sollas, W. J., Czecal Processes of Shells of Brachiopoda, 573. Solms-Laubach, Graf zu, Ustilago Treubii, 1004. Soluble Starch, 424. Sonneratia, Aerial Roots of, 111. Sontag, P., Apical Growth of Leaves, 616. Sorauer, P., Handbook of the Diseases of Plants, 120. , Yellow Spots on Leaves, 989. Sorby, H. C., 668. Soredial sporidia of Amphiloma murorum, 125. Sorokin, N., New Species of Spirillum, 631. Sound Organs of the Green Cicada, 947. Soyka, J., Permanent Preparations on firm media, 691. 1124 Sparganium and Typha, Development of the Flowers and Fruit of, 114. Spectrum Analysis in Micro-Mineralogy, 472. —, Note on the Correction of the Secondary, 161. , objective, Production of Chlorophyll in, 425. Spencer, J., Zoothamnium arbuscula, 253. Spermatogenesis, 945. ——,, History and Theory of, 729. in, and Anatomy of Internal Male Organ of Cypride, 394. — in Nemerteans, 755. — of Arthropods, 69, 222. of Beetles, 70. — of Mammalia, 730. - Spermatozoids, Development of, 620. Spherogonium, a new genus of Phycochro- maces, 131. Spheropsides, 446. ——, Macrophoma, a new genus of, 280. Sphagnacee, Analogous Variations in, 786. —, Classification of, 123. ——,, European, 123. —, Formation of Pores in, 624. of North America, 998. Spiders and Insects, Nervous System of, and Remarks on Phrynus, 223. and Myriopods, Functions of Palps of, 223. See Arachnida, Contents, xv. Threads, Berger’s Microscope for fixing, 144. Spike-like partial Inflorescence of the ' Rhyncosporez, 779. Spina, A., Bacteriological Experiments with coloured nutrient media, 833. — , Decoloration of Bacteria stained with Anilin Dyes, 688. Spinning-glands of Geophilide, Structure of, 230. Spiracles, Preparation of Insect, 675. Spizillum, New Species of, 631. , Pure Cultivation of a, 499. Spirit-lamp, Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s, 856. Spirogyra, Sensitiveness of, to shock, 999. Sponges. See Porifera. , On Cutting Sections of, and other similar structures with soft and hard tissues, 200. Spongida. See Porifera, Contents, xx. Spongilla glomerata, 99. Sporangia of Ferns, Anatomy of, 622. Spore-formation in Gregarines, 770. in Yeast, 132. Spores, Endogenous Production of, 279. Sporozoa, New Parasite of the Pock-pro- cess belonging to, 978. , New Type of, 254. Springer, F., and C. Wachsmuth, Morpho- logical Relations of Summit-plates in Blastoids, Crinoids, and Cystids, 763. Squid, Development of, 734. Stadler, §., Examination of Nectarial Tissue, 842. 'e INDEX. Stadler, S., Nectaries, 614. Stage Accessory, New, 819. , Haswell’s Rotating, 297. — Micrometer, Rogers’, 819. ——, Reichert’s improved Mechanical, 809. i , Vignal’s Hot, with Direct Regulator, Stages, Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Mechanical, 650. , Warm and Cold, 299. Stahl, E., Biological Import of Raphides, Bee F., Preparation of Male Repro- ductive Organs of Cypride, 841. Staining. See Contents, xli. Stange, F. F., Apogamy in Ferns, 622. Star-fishes, Movements of, 406, 758. Starch and Dextrin, Alcoholic Fermenta- tion of, 437. —— and Leucites, 423. — Cellulose, True Nature of, 774. ——,, Formation of, in Sclerotia, 280. — in Leaves, Solution of, 165. — in Vessels, 423. — , Soluble, 424. Starch-cellulose, Nageli’s, 256. —— -grains coloured red by iodine, 424, 982. —— - ——,, Composition of, 424. Stebbing, T. R. R., and A. M. Norman, Isopoda of the ‘Lightning,’ ‘ Porcu- pine,’ and ‘ Valorous’ Expeditions, 236, Steiger, E., and E. Schulze, New nitro- genous constituent of the Lupin, 425. Stein, B., Mycorhiza, 630. —, §. T., 161, 808. —, Focusing in Photomicrography, 663. ——,, Injection Apparatus, 340. Stem and Root, Preparing Sections of, 164. —, Central Cylinder of, 260. Stenger, F., Absorption-bands, 617. Stenglein, —., 161, 321. Stenostoma, Ciliated Pits of, 595. Stenus, Labium of the Coleopterous genus, 380. Stenzel, K. G., Rhizodendron, 623. Stephani, F., Mastigobryum, 276. Stephenson’s (J. W.) Erecting Binocular - Microscope, 802. Sterilization by the steam digester (Papin’s digester) for bacteriological purposes, 834. Sternberg, G. M., 669. ——, Staining the Bacillus of Glanders, 1058. Stevens, T. S., Key to the Rotifera, 405. Stichocotyle nephropis, 595. Stigmas, Irritable, Conduction of Irritation in, 780. Stigmata of Scolopendridz, 386. : Stimulation, Effect of, on Turgescent Vege- table Tissues, 985. Stinging Cells, 410, 765. Stipular Sheath of Polygonum, 779. Stipule and Leaf, Relationship between 611. INDEX. Stipules, Anatomy of, 265. and Petals, 991. Stohr, P., 177, 696, Stokes, A. C., 528. ——,, Focus Upward, 667. , Food Habit of Petalomonas, 101. —, New Choano-flagellata, 253. —-, Fresh-water Infusoria, 417, 974. —, —— Hypotrichous Infusoria, 418. A —— from American Fresh Waters, 975. , Notices of New American Fresh- water Infusoria, 35. Stokes, A. W., Rapid Method of Dry Mounting, 520. Stomata, Structure and Physiology of, 264. , Structure of, 608. Stomatopoda, ‘ Challenger,’ 235. Stoss, —., 845. ——,, Preparation of Microscopical Para- sites, 1046. Strahl, H., Wall of Yolk-sac, and Para- blast of the Lizard, 564. Strasburger, E., 161, 668. —., Hybrid-pollination, 269. ——, Practical Botany, 120. Strasser, H., 177. , Determining the Reciprocal Posi- tions of Object-points, 171. , Method for treating Serial Sections imbedded in paraffin by Weigert’s method, 342. —, Section-series and a new method for making Wax Modelling-plates, 171. ——, Treatment of Sections which have been imbedded in Paraffin, 853. Stretching, Influence of, on the growth of Plants, 993. Stricker, S., 645. Stricker’s Electric Lamp, 297. Strongylus arnfieldi and S. tetracanthus, 241. Strubell, A., Heterodera Schachtii, 401. Stuhlmann, F'., Anatomy of Internal Male Organs of, and Spermatogenesis in Cypride, 394. ——, Preparation of Eggs of Arthropoda, 328. Stylasteridz, New genus of, 410. Stylidium and Aéschynanthus, Crystalloids in, 774. Stylommatophorous Pulmonata, Develop- ment of Genital Apparatus of, 58. Styrax and Canada Balsam, 359. in Histology, Use of, 692. Sublimate Solution, Segmentation of Frog Ova in, 370. Substage and Condenser, Bausch and Lomb, 809. Succulent Fruits, 267. Suckers of Melampyrum pratense, Struc- ture and Development of, 778. of Thesium humifusum, Development of, 987. Sugar, Inversion of, by Pollen-grains, 273. Reactions, Two new, 344. 1887. 1125 Sugar-cane, Nematoid Parasite on, 93. Suicide of Scorpions, Reported, 388. Sulphur-bacteria, 1007. Sulzberger, R., 321. and A. Bray, 321. Summers, H. E., Fixing Sections, 523. Summit-plates, in Blastoids, Crinoids, and Cystids, Morphological Relations of,763. Sunlight, Effect of, on Etiolated Seedlings, litre Super-stage for the Selection and Arrange- ment of Diatoms, 153. Sutton, J. B., Atavism, 565. Swan, A. P., and M. M. Hartog, Anaerobic culture of aerobic Bacteria, 795. Swelling and Double Refraction of Cell- walls, 981. Swellings on Roots of Papilionacez, 987. on the Roots of the Alder and Elz- agnacez, 611 Swift's (J.) Lever and Parallel-spring Fine- adjustment, 808. Platinized Microscope, 1069. Swine-fever, 135. Symbiosis of a Bacterium and Alga, 785, 996. Symbiotic Algz, Supposed, in Antedon Rosacea, 247. Formations, 273. Synaptide of the Mediterranean, 764. Synascidians new to the French Coast, 221. Synchytrium, New, 285, Syndesmis, 243. Synocils, Sensory Organs of Sponges, 412. Synthesis of Lichens, 443. Synthetic Processes in Living Cells, 935. Syphilis and Tubercle Bacilli, Staining of, o17 — Bacilli, Staining, 517. , Hereditary, Staining Micro-organisms in the Tissues of Children affected with 517. A hy Table, Microscopist’s Working, 346. Tadpole Metamorphosis, Conditions of, 210. ——, Showing Mitosis in Brain of, 163. Tadpoles, Influence of Electric Currents on, 51. "Pail, Absorption of, 211. Tenia nana, Developmental Cycle of, 961. saginata, Malformed Example of, 962. Tail-piece, Jones’s Radial Swinging, 297. Tal, —., Modification of Golgi’s Method for Staining the Central Nervous System, 513. Tangent-screw Fine-adjustment, Hilger’s, 461. Tannin in Algee, 278. in Insects, 945. —— in Tissues, Occurrence and Function of, 774. ——, New Micro-chemical Reaction for, 695. Tannin-receptacles in the Fumariacex, 427, 4% 1126 Tape-worms, Nervous System of, 243. Tarchanow, —., and Kolessnikow, —., 669. Taschenberg, O., 161. Tassi, F'., Anesthesia and Poisoning of Plants, 785. Tatham, J., 661. Tavel, EF. v., Development of Pyrenomy- cetes, 281. and Alvarez, Preparing the Bacillus of Lustgarten, 166. Taxonomic Organ, Petiole as a, 264. Taylor, G. H., Cleaning Diatomaceous Mud, 844. soe, B22. —, T., 177, 696, 857, 1066. -——, Discrimination of Butter and Fats, 345. Teleostean Fish-ova, Relation of Yolk to Blastoderm in, 43. Teleosteans, Origin of Periblast in, 371. Teleostei, Embryology of, 42. Telphusa fluviatilis, Post-embryonic De- velopment of, 392. Temperature and Desiccation, Influence of, on Comma-Bacilli, 133. , Constant, Borden’s Electrical Ap- paratus, 1024. , Minimum, consistent with Life, 52. of Melting Ice, Effects of, on Germi- nation, 271. Temperatures, Hffects of Low, on Plants, 620. Tendon-cells, Preparing, 837. Tendrils, Comparative Anatomy of, 611. —., Movements of, 618. —, Rotation of, 618. , Structure and Coiling of, 436. Terminal Growth of the Root in Nym- pheeaceze, 271. Terracciano, N., Adventitious Roots, 610. Terrestrial Air-breathing Molluscs of the United States, 376. Organs, Absorption of Water by, 436. Species of Ulothrix, 124. Terry, W. A., 669. , Cleaning Diatoms, 676. , on Diatom Study, 473. Tessin, G., Ova and Development of Rota- toria, 94. , Preparing Hges of Rotatoria, 842. Test for Lignin, Phloroglucin, 172. Testicle of the Chick, Development and Significance of the Germinal Hpithelium in, 210. Testis, Mammalian, Preparing, 839. Tethys fimbriata, Glands in Foot of, 569. Tetramyxa parasitica, Tubercles on Rup- pia rostellata and Zannichellia polycarpa produced by, 793. Thalassema, Life-history of, 396. Tlhalassicola coerulea, 767. Thallus in Florides, Structure and De- velopment of, 624. Thanhoffer, L. v., 177. , Microscopical Gas-chamber, 661. Thaxter, R., Gymmnosporangia and their Roestelia, 445, “ INDEX. Theél, H., Holothurioidea of the ‘Blake’ Expeditions, 245. ; Thermal Water, Micro-organisms in, 214. Thesium humifusum, Development of Suckers of, 987. Thickening of the wall of parenchymatous cells, 426. Thiele, J., Mouth-lobes of Lamellibranchs, 220. ——, New Sensory Organ in Lamelli- branchiata, 942. Thin, G., Nucleus in Frog’s Ovum, 42. Thinness, The Limit of, 160. Thomae, K., Leaf-stalk of Ferns, 274. Thomas, F., New Synchytrium, 285. ——, 58. B., and W. K. Martin, Autumnal Changes in Maple Leaves, 784. Thompson, D’ Arey W., Blood-corpuscles of the Cyclostomata, 937. Thomson, J. A., and P. Geddes, History and Theory of Spermatogenesis, 729. Thoracic Salivary Glands homologous with Nephridia, 73. Thoulet, J.. Measurement by Total Re- flection of the Refractive Indices of Mi- eroscopic Minerals, 659. Thulle, Formation of, 261. Thury’s (M.) Multiocular Microscope, 796. Thymol in Microscopical Technique, 342. Tichomiroff, A., Artificial Parthenogene- sis, 73. ——, Chemical Composition of Ova, 72. Tiebe, —., Colour-sense, 51. Tieghem, P. Van, Chlorovaporization, 273. , Formation of Rootlets and position of Buds in the Binary Roots of Phane- rogams, 776. , Inversion of Sugar by Pollen-grains, 273. , Network of Cells surrounding the Endoderm in the Roots of Cruciferee, 2 CUS — Second Primary Wood of the Root, 7709. ——, Super-endodermal Network in the Root of Rosacez, 986. —, Terminal Growth of the Root in Nymphzeacesx, 271. - -——, and H. Douliot, Central Cylinder of Stem, 260. —— ——.,, Origin of Lateral Roots, 262. — ——, —— — — in Leguminosx and Cucurbitacese, 429. » —— of Rootlets and Lateral Roots in Rubiacez, Violacex, and Apo- cynaces, 777. Tilanus, C. B., and J. Forster, Certain Properties of Phosphorescent Bacteria, 1009. Tissue, Elastic, Physiological Silvering of, 839. ——,, Epidermal, Micro-chemistry of, 257. ——, Libriform Pores of, 426. . Nectarial, Examination of, 842. Tissues, Epidermal, of Pitcher Plants, Preparing, 164. INDEX. Tissues found in the Muscle of a Mummy, 537. — , Freezing of, 438. — in Fungi, On the Differentiation of, 205. —, Occurrence and Function of Tannin in, 774. of the Central Nervous System, Modi- fication of Weigert’s Method of Stain- ing, 513. , Staining of Animal and Vegetable, 690. Tolman, H. L., Staining Cover-glass Pre- _ parations of Tubercle Bacilli, 516. Tomaschek, A., Symbiusis of a Bacte- rium and Alga, 785. Témosviary, E., Respiratory Organ of Scu- tigeridee, 231. ——, Special Sensory Organs of Myrio- pods, 229. ——, Structure of Spinning-glands of Geophilide, 230. Tongue of Bee, Anatomy and Physiology of, 224. Toni, G. B. de, and D. Levi, Algz epiphy- tic on Nympheeacez, 124. , Phycotheca Italiana, 278. Tornaria and Balanoglossus, 245. Tortoise, Hzematozoa of, 603. Touch, Sense of, in Astacus, 234. Trabut, L., Cleistogamous Flowers of Oro- banchacee, 431. Tracheal Gills of Pupze of Simulide, 227. Tracheides, Development of, 260. Trade, Value of the Microscope in, 157. Transmission by Post, Preparing Bacterial Material for, 507. Trauspiration, 272. and Assimilation in Leaves treated with Milk of Lime, 782. Treasurer’s Account for 1886, 356. Treat, M., 161. Trécul, A., Laticiferous vessels of Calo- phyllum, 609. ——,, Relation of Secretory Channels to Laticiferous Vessels, 609. Trees, living, Fermentation on, 285. Trélat, U., 528. Trelease, W., Fertilization of Yucca, 116. Trematode, New, 595. Treub, A., Nematoid Parasite on Sugar- cane, 93. , Parasitism of Heterodera javanica, 274. Trimen, R., Bipalium kewense, 966. ' Troester, C., Contrivance for use with the Microscope by Lamplight, 473. Trouessart, L., Chorioptes (or Symbiotes) on Birds, 585. Trzebinski, St., 695. Tschirch, A., Calcium oxalate in Aleurone- grains, 983. — , Phloroglucin Test for Lignin, 172. ——, Researches on Chlorophyll, 606. ——, Root-tubers of Leguminosz, 987. ——, Tubercles of the Roots of Legu- minosz, 610. | 1127 Tube-length, Microscopical, its length in millimetres, and the parts included in it by the various opticians of the world, 1029. Tuber, Parasitism of, 791. Tubercle and Leprosy Bacilli, Staining re- lations of, 688, con Syphilis Bacilli, Staining of, — Bacilli, 286. — ——,, Preparing, 330. —— —,, Staining, 339, 851. Cover-glass Preparations of, 516. Bacillus, New Method for the Culti- vation of, 499. , Giant Cells of, 566. ‘Tubercles on Ruppia rostellata and Zanni- chellia polycarpa produced by Tetramyxa parasitica, 793. on the Roots of Leguminose, 610. Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of Legu- minosze, 429, 788. — on the Roots of Vicia Faba, 1005. Tubercularia, 282. Tuberculosis of the Olive, 286, Lubers, Formation of, 778. on the Roots of Leguminose, 429. Tubularia and Polyparium, 968. , Formation of fresh stalks in, 765. Tunicata. See Contents, xiii. Turbellaria, Rhabdoccelous, Preparation of, 329. , Sensory Organs of, 962. Turbidity of Water, Cause of, 787. Turgescent Vevetable Tissues, Effect of Stimulation on, 985. Turgidity of Petals, 779. Turnbull’s (J. M.) Improved Sliding Nose- piece and Adapter, 295, 358, Turner, W. B., 508. Turntable, Device for centering and hold- ing the slide upon, 694. , Eternod’s, “to serve several pur- poses,”’ 853. running by steam power, 176. , Simple form of Self-centering, for ringing Microscopie Specimens, 523. Twining, Theory of, 118, 119, 436. Tyas, W. H., 687. Tylenchus devastatrix, 753. Tyloses, Formation of, in the Interior of Secretory Canals, 985. Typha and Sparganium, Development of the Flowers and Fruit of, 114. — Inflorescence of, 989. , Raphides in, 607. Tyroglyphidz, Anatomy of, 232. U. Ude, H., Preparation of Lumbricida, 329. Ugimya sericaria, Life-history of, 579. Ulodendron and Bothrodendron, 121. Ulothrix, Formation of Cysts in, 625. ——, Terrestrial species of, 124. 1128 Ultra-violet Rays, Action of, in the For- matiou of Flowers, 617. and Ants, 73. Umbria, Fossil Diatoms from, 443. United States, Terrestrial Air-breathing Molluses of the, 376. Unna, P. G., 519, 691. ——, Chemistry of Staining, 852. , New kind of solid Blood-seram— Blood-serum Plates, 832. ——, Reduction of Chromic Solutions in Animal Tissues corrected by Reoxida- tion with H,O,, 1060. — , Rosanilin and Pararosanilin, 1059. ——, Staining of Lepra Bacilli, 517. Urbanowicz, F., Development of Cope- poda, 86. Uredinex, Hetercecious, 1004. , Scandinavian, 282. Uric Acid Crystals, Method of obtaining, from the Malpighian Tubes of Insects, and from the Nephridium of Pulmo- nate Mollusca, 166. Urinary Sediment, Collecting, for Micro- scopical Examination, 500. Urococcus, 286. Ustilaginese, Scandinavian, 282. Ustilago Treubii, 1004. Uterus or Enigmatic Organ in Fresh-water Dendroccela, Function of, 597. V. V., O., 497. V., R. E., 691. Vacuoles, Contractile, of Infusoria, 100. ——, Formation of, in red-blood Cor- puscles, 50. , Young Condition of, 605. Valette. See La Valette St. George. Vallot, J., Influence of soil on the vegeta- tion on the summits of the Alps, 784. ‘Valorous’ Expedition, Isopoda of, 236. Vanderpoel, F., 352, 661. Vanilla, Raphides-cells in the Fruit of, 268. Varigny, A. de, Influence of Medium, Variola, Micro-parasite of, 452. vera, Amcebee of, 977. Vascular bundles, concentric, 608. of Zea Mays, 109. Plants, Gliding Growth in the For- mation of the Tissues of, 272. System, Colonial, of Tunicata, 377. Vaucheria, Gynandrous, 1000. Vaucherias, Marine, 441. Vejdovsky, F., Spongilla glomerata, 99. Verbascum, Fertilization of, 433. Veretillum, Anatomy and Histology of, 765. Verlot, B., 1041. Vermes. See Contents, xvii. Vertebrata. See Contents, x. Vesicating Insects, 224, 581. Vesicle of Balbiani, 565. Vesicular Vessels of the Onion, 262. INDEX. Vespa crabro and V. vulgaris, Brain of, 578. Vesque, J., Aquiferous System in Calo- phyllum, 261. ——., Epidermis as a Reservoir of Water, 261. Vessels, Starch in, 423. Viala, P., and L. Ravaz, “ Black-rot” of the Vine, 129. and L. Seribner, New Disease in Vines, 1005. Viallanes, H., Brain of Vespa crabro and V. vulgaris, 578. , Comparative Morphology of the Brain in Insects and Crustacea, 379. , Preparation of endothelium of the general cavity of Arenicola and Lum- brica, 842. Vialleton, L., Development of the Squid, 734. Vicia Faba, Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of, 1005. Vigelius, W. J., Morphology of Ecto- proctous Bryozoa, 571. ~ ——, —— of Marine Bryozoa, 572. Vignal, W., 669, 834. —, Hot Stage with Direct Regulator, 464. Viguier, C., Pelagic Annelids of the Gulf of Algiers, 398. Villot, A., Anatomy of Gordiidz, 958. , Development and Determination of free Gordii, 959. , Revision of the Gordiide, 593. Vincenzi, L., Chemical coustitutents of Bacteria, 631. Vine, G. R., Recent Marine Polyzoa, 67. Vine, “ Black-rot ” of, 129. —., Fungus of the Root of, 130. ——, Galls on the Leaf of, 384. —, Peronospora umbelliferarum on, 789. Vine-leaves, Histology of, 778. - ——, Physiological Réle of, 784. Vines, New Disease in, 1005. Vines, S. H., and A. B. Rendle, Vesicular Vessels of the Onion, 262. Vinge, A., Leaves of Ferns, 998. Violacez, Origin of Rootlets and Lateral Roots in, 777. Visibility, Limit of, 827, 1070. Vision, Distinct, Means of Determining the Limits of, 158. — of Insects, 379. Vitality, Latent, of Seeds and Rhizomes, 115. of Encapsuled Organisms, 568. Vochting, H., Formation of Tubers, 778. , Zygomorphy of Flowers, 266. Vogel, A., Influence of Ozone on Germi- nation, 782. ‘ , H. C., Lens-stand for Entomological purposes, 807. Vogler, —., Tracheal Gills of Pupz of Simulide, 227. Vogt, C., New Sessile Medusa, 98. —, Some Darwinistic Heresies, 212. “ INDEX. Voigt, W., Anatomy and Histology of Branchiobdella varians, 24(). Voree, C. M., Discrimination of Butter and Fats, 345. , Mounting Opaque Objects, 692. Vosmaer, G. C. J., Porifera, 99. , Relationships of Porifera, 600. and H. J. Johnston-Lavis, Ou Cut- ting Sections of Sponges and other similar structures with soft and hard tissues, 200. — and W. Giesbrecht, and P. Mayer, Water-bath for Paraffin Imbedding, 845. Vosseler, J., Preparation of Copepoda, 329. Vries, H. de, 177, 344. , Nuclear Sheath, 259. ——, Preparation of Plants in Aleohol, 675. Vuillemin, P., Conjugation of Mucorini, 281. —, Endoderm of Senevio Cineraria, 426. —., Glistening Apparatus of Schistostega osmundacea, 623. ——, Homologies of Mosses, 439. ——, Membrane of the Zygospores of Mu- corini, 281. W. W., Berlin Exhibition, 161. Wachsmuth, C., and F. Springer, Morpho- logical Relations of Summit-plates in Blastoids, Crinoids, and Cystids, 763. Wagner, F. v., Myzostoma Bucchichii, 758. Wagstaff, E. H., Phenomenon in Anilin Staining, 339. Wakker, J. H., Infection through parasitic Sclerotia, 627. , Prolification of Caulerpa, 124. Waldeyer, W., Karyokinesis, 566. Wales, W., 161. ——, Cover-carrier for Immersion and Dry Lenses, 296. Walker, C. W., and H. H. Chase, New Diatoms, 788. Wall-bee and its Parasites, 225. Ward, E., Mounting in Fluids, 855. , H. M., Structure and Life-History of Phytophthora infestans, 447. —., of Entyloma, 284. —, Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of Leguminose, 788. of Vicia , R. H., 668. —, Catalogue of Microscopical Collec- tions, 348. ——, Micrometer Wires, 661. Warm-Blooded Animals, Fate of Microbes in blood of, 133. Warming, K., Fertilization of Greenland Flowers, 433. Warnstoff, C., Heterosporous Muscinez, 440. 1129 Warpachowsky, N., New Opalina, 105. Wasps and Ants, Preparation of Ova of, 841. Water, Absorption of, by ‘Terrestrial Organs, 436. ——, —— of, in the fluid state by Leaves, UD} ——, Action of Algee upon, 124. —, Bacteria in, 454. ——., Bacteriological Examination of, 455. -——, Cause of ‘Turbidity of, 787. ——,, Changes induced in, by the Develop- ment of Bacteria, 795. , Drinking, Bacteria in, 136, 454. ——,, Hpidermis as a Reservoir of, 261. ——, Fresh, Microscopie Organisms in, 53. ——, Part taken by the Medullary Rays in the Movement of, 782. , Thermal, Micro-organisms in, 214. Water-bath Apparatus for Paraffin, 167. for Paraffin Imbedding, 845. —— -canal-system in Spongida, function of, and Position of the Ampullaccous Sae, 413. —— -plants, Leaves of, 113. Watson, A. B., ‘Challenger’ Scaphopoda and Gastropoda, 219. Watson-Draper Microscope, 458. Watts, H., 358. Wax as a Cell Material, 854. — Cells, 694. ——,, Imbedding in Vegetable, 681. — Modelling-plates, Section-series and a new method for making, 171. Weber, H. A., 696. ——, Discrimination of Butter and Fats, 345. Webster, A. D., Fertilization of Epipactis latifolia, 782. Wedding, H., Microscopic Structure of an Armour-plate, 346. Wegmann, H., Anatomy of Patella, 570. Weigert, C., 691, 1061. , Medium for clearing up Celloidin Sections, 519. , Mounting Sections without Cover- glasses, 1061. Weigert’s Method of Staining Tissues of the Central Nervous System, Moditica- tion of, 513. ——, Method of treating Serial Sections imbedded in paraflin by, 342. , Staining the Retina by, 339. _ Weinzierl, T, R. v., 857. , Simple Microscope for the Examina- tion of Seeds, 806. Weise, Biology of Chrysomelids, 224. Weismann, A., Importance of Sexual Re- Beucen for the Theory of Selection, 45. ——, Polar Bodies and Theory of Here- dity, 934. Weiss, A., Fluorescence of Fungus Pig- ment, 628. ——, Preparing Lactarius to show Branched Laticiferous Vessels, 165. 1130 Weissenborn, B., Phylogeny of Arachnida, 949. Weldon, W. F. R., Balanoglossus Larva, 597. ——, —— —— from the Bahamas, 966. Wellington, C., 691. Wells, S., Treat, M., and Sargent, T. L., 161. Weltner, W., Dendroccelum punctatum, 964. Wenckebach, H. F., Embryology of Tele- ostei, 42. Went, F. A. F. C., Young Condition of Vacuoles, 605. Wesener, F.. Staining relations of Leprosy and Tubercle Bacilli, 688. West, C. E., 668. Westermaier, M., Occurrence and Func- tion of Tannin in Tissues, 774. Western Microscopical Club, 325. Westien, H., Double Objectives with a common field of view, 462. —., Improved Universal Clamp for Lens- holders, &e., 807. Wettstein, R. v., Cystidia of Fungi, 627. —,, Helotium Willkommi, 1003. Wettstein v. Westersheim, R., and A. Kerner v. Marilaun, Rhizopod - like Digestive Organs in Carnivorous Plants, 112. Weyers, J. L., Entomological Microscope, 288. Wheat Ensilage, Bacterium of, 451. Whelpley, H. M., 177. , The Microscope in Pharmacy, 302. White, T. C., 1066. , Photomicrography with a sliding Diaphragm, 529. Whitelegge, T., Killing Polyzoa, 674. , List of the Fresh-water Rhizopoda of N.S. Wales, 177. ——, W., Rotation in Nitella, 277. Whitney, J. E., No excess of balsam necessary, 692. , Wax as a Cell Material, 854. Wieler, A., Cambium of the Medullary Rays, 426. ——, Formation of the Annual Ring and Growth in Thickness, 776. Wielowieyski, H. de, Spermatogenesis of Arthropods, 69. Wierzejski, A., Fresh-water Sponges of Galicia, 99. ——., Observations on Fresh-water Sponges, 414. Wigand, A., Swellings on the Roots of Papilionacez, 987. Wildeman, E. de, Formation of Cysts in Ulothrix, 625. ——, Presence of a Glucoside in the Alco- holic Extract of certain Plants, 607. ——, Tannin in Algee, 278. ~—., Terrestrial Species of Ulothrix, 124. Wilfarth, H., 834. Wille, N., Adaptation of Plants to Rain and Dew, 995. INDEX. Willey, H., Introduction to the Study of Lichens, 1001. Williams, C. F. W. T., Mounting in Castor Oil, 695. —,, G. H., 352, 497. Williamson, W. C., 497. Wilson, E. B., Origin of Excretory System of Earthworms, 588. —.,H. V., Parasitic Cuninas of Beau- fort, 248. — , Structure of Cunoctantha octonaria in Adult and Larval Stages, 967. ——,, T., and Carnelly, 1066. Wings, Morphology of Insects’, 74. —— of Diptera, 227. Winkel, R., 162, 819. Winkler, A., Seedlings of Salicornia her- bacea, 776. Winogradsky, 8., Sulphur-bacteria, 1007. Wisselingh, C. van, Clothing of Intercellu- lar Spaces, 608. Witlaczil, H., Halobates, 745. Wittrock, V. B., Binuclearia, a New Genus of Confervaceze, 441. Tee Layer of Harth composed of Algz, 42. Wolff, G., Renal Organs of German Proso- branchiata, 940. _— of Prosobranchs, 569. ——, W., Germinal Layers, 209. Wolffhiigel, G., aud O. Riedel, Bacteria in Water, 454. Wollheim, J., Chemical Composition of Chlorophyll, 107. Wollny, R., Hildebrandtia and Dichospo- rangium, 124. Wood, R. W., jun., A Simple Polariscope, 162. Wood, Decaying, Green Colour of, 631. —— of Leguminose, Anatomical Struc- ture of, 986. ——,, Old, Blossom on, 990. —, Second Primary, of the Root, 775. Woodhead’s Microscope, 808. with Large Stage, 1015. Woodward, A. L., Cleaning Diatoms, 506. Wool, Variations in, 567. Worgitzky, G., Comparative Anatomy of Tendrils, 611. Wortmann, J., Rotation of Tendrils, 618. , Theory of Twining, 118, 437. Wurster, C., and M. Joseph, 1060. Wyssokowitch, W., Fate of Microbes in the Blood of Warm-blooded Animals, 11338}. f X. Xylol-Dammar, 1062. Y. Yeast, low, Detection of ‘wild yeast” in, 132. , Spore-formation in, 132. ——,” “wild, Detection of, in low Yeast, ze Yellow Spots on Leaves, 989. INDEX. Yolk in Osseous Fishes, Significance of, 730. , Relation of, to Blastoderm in Tele- ostean Fish-ova, 43. Yolk-sac, Wall of, and Parablast of the Lizard, 564. Yucea, Fertilization of, 116. Z. Zacharias, E., Structure of the Nucleus, TEL: —, O., Chemical Comparison of Male and Female Elements, 45. , Pelagic and Littoral Fauna of North German Lakes, 733. , Process of Fertilization in Ascaris megalocephala, 553. Zalewski, A., Spore-formation in Yeast, 132. Zaslein, T., 834. Zannichellia polycarpa and Ruppia rostel- lata, Tubercles on, produced by Tetra- myxa parasitica, 793. Zatti, C., Amyloid Corpuseles in Pollen- grains, 991. Zea Mays, Vascular Bundles of, 109. Zech, P., 492, 667. Zeiller, R., Ulodendron and Bothroden- dron, 121. Zeiss’s (C.) Objective-changer, with slide and centering adjustment, 646. 1131 Zeiss’s (C.) Ten Thousandth Microscope, 162. Zelinka, C., Studies on Rotatoria, 243. Zipperer, P., Pitchers of Sarracenia, 612. Zittel, K. A. v., and J. V. Rohon, Cono- donts, 400. Zoospores in Saprolegnies, Formation and Liberation of, 444. Zoothamnium arbuscula, 253. Zopf, W., Ancylistese and Chytridiacex, 283, 630. ——, Double Lichen, 1001. , Tannin-receptacles in the Fumaria- ces, 427. Zschokke, F., Helminthological Observa- tions, 757. , Scolex polymorphus, 93. Zukal, H., Green colour of decaying wood, 631. , New Genus of Ascomycetes, 630. , Receptacles for reserve-materials in Lichens, 279. Zune, 696. Zwaardemaker, 1056. Zygomorphic Flowers, Normal Position of, 612. H., Mitosis Staining, , Origin of, 780. Zygomorphy of Flowers, 266, 779. Zygospores of Mucorini, Membrane of, 281. LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. Supplementary Number, containing Index, &c. Toy : "XAT P'S. 597. Part 6a. DECEMBER. | No. 61. ae JOURNAL OF THE ~ ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY; CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOoOLOGZ AND BOTAN Y (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, Sc. Edited by FRANK CRISP, LL.B, B.A., One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London ; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.LS., F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A, F.Z5., Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College. JOHN MAYALL, Juy., F.Z.S., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cantad.), AND J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A.,, Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY. WILLIAMS. & NORGATE, LONDON AND EDINBURGH. PRINTED BY WM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED,] [STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. * by pelt ": : ae ie Va ani ~ (AO T 3 5185 00266 7